PUB.

(ENROUTE)

SAILING DIRECTIONS

★

★

2010

194

 BALTIC SEA 

(SOUTHERN PART)

Prepared and published by the

NATIONAL GEOSPATIAL-INTELLIGENCE AGENCY

Bethesda, Maryland

© COPYRIGHT 2010 BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

NO COPYRIGHT CLAIMED UNDER TITLE 17 U.S.C.

FIFTEENTH EDITION

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office

Internet: http://bookstore.gpo.gov Phone: toll free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

Fax: (202) 512-2250 Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-0001
II

Pub. 194

Preface

0.0 Pub. 194, Sailing Directions (Enroute) Baltic Sea (Southern

Part) Fifteenth Edition, 2010, is issued for use in conjunction

with Pub. 140, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent Seas. Companion volumes are Pubs.

191, 192, 193, and 195.

0.0 Digital Nautical Charts 22 provides electronic chart coverage for the area covered by this publication. 

0.0 This publication has been corrected to 27 November 2010,

including Notice to Mariners No. 48 of 2010.

Explanatory Remarks

0.0 Sailing Directions are published by the National GeospatialIntelligence Agency (NGA), under the authority of Department

of Defense Directive 5105.40, dated 12 December 1988, and

pursuant to the authority contained in U. S. Code Title 10,

Sections 2791 and 2792 and Title 44, Section 1336. Sailing

Directions, covering the harbors, coasts, and waters of the

world, provide information that cannot be shown graphically

on nautical charts and is not readily available elsewhere.

0.0 Sailing Directions (Enroute) include detailed coastal and

port approach information which supplements the largest scale

chart produced by the National Geospatial-Intelligence

Agency. This publication is divided into geographic areas

called “Sectors.”

0.0 Bearings.—Bearings are true, and are expressed in degrees

from 000° (north) to 360°, measured clockwise. General

bearings are expressed by initial letters of points of the compass (e.g. N, NNE, NE, etc.). Adjective and adverb endings

have been discarded. Wherever precise bearings are intended

degrees are used.

0.0 Charts.—Reference to charts made throughout this publication refer to both the paper chart and the Digital Nautical

Chart (DNC).

0.0 Coastal Features.—It is assumed that the majority of ships

have radar. Available coastal descriptions and views, useful for

radar and visual piloting are included in geographic sequence

in each Sector.

0.0 Corrective Information.—Users should refer corrections,

additions, and comments to NGA’s Maritime Operations Desk,

as follows: 

0.0 1. Toll free: 1-800-362-6289

0.0 2. Commercial: 301-227-3147

0.0 3. DSN: 287-3147

0.0 4. DNC web site: http://msi.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

DNC.portal

0.0 5. Maritime Do0.0 main web site: http://msi.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

MSI.portal

0.0

0.0 6. E-mail: navsafety@nga.mil

0.0 7. Mailing address: Maritime Domain

0.0 National Geospatial-Intelligence

0.0 Agency

Mail Stop D-44

0.0 4600 Sangamore Road

0.0 Bethesda MD 20816-5003

0.0 New editions of Sailing Directions are corrected through the

date of the publication shown above. Important information to

amend material in the publication is available as a Publication

Digital Update (PDU) from the NGA Maritime Domain website.

0.0NGA Maritime Domain Website

http://msi.nga.mil/NGAPortal/MSI.portal

0.0

0.0 Courses.—Courses are true, and are expressed in the same

manner as bearings. The directives “steer” and “make good” a

course mean, without exception, to proceed from a point of

origin along a track having the identical meridianal angle as the

designated course. Vessels following the directives must allow

for every influence tending to cause deviation from such track,

and navigate so that the designated course is continuously

being made good.

0.0 Currents.—Current directions are the true directions toward

which currents set.

0.0 Dangers.—As a rule outer dangers are fully described, but

inner dangers which are well-charted are, for the most part,

omitted. Numerous offshore dangers, grouped together, are

mentioned only in general terms. Dangers adjacent to a coastal

passage or fairway are described.

0.0 Distances.—Distances are expressed in nautical miles of 1

minute of latitude. Distances of less than 1 mile are expressed

in meters, or tenths of miles.

0.0 Geographic Names.—Geographic names are generally

those used by the nation having sovereignty. Names in parentheses following another name are alternate names that may

appear on some charts. In general, alternate names are quoted

only in the principal description of the place. Diacritical marks,

such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to

specific letters in certain foreign languages, are not used in the

interest of typographical simplicity. Geographic names or their

spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political

status of an area by the United States Government.

0.0 Heights.—Heights are referred to the plane of reference

used for that purpose on the charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Index-Gazetteer.—Navigational features and place-names

are listed alphabetically in the back of the book. The approximate position, along with the Sector and paragraph numbers

(e.g. 1.1), facilitate location in the text.

0.0 Internet Links.—This publication provides internet links to

web sites concerned with maritime navigational safety, including but not limited to, Federal government sites, foreign Hydrographic Offices, and foreign public/private port facilities.

NGA makes no claims, promises, or guarantees concerning the

accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of the contents of the web

sites and expressly disclaims any liability for errors and omissions of these web sites.

0.0 Light and Fog Signals.—Lights and fog signals are not described, and light sectors are not usually defined. The Light

Lists should be consulted for complete information.

0.0 Ports.—Directions for entering ports are depicted where

appropriate by means of chartlets, sketches, and photos, which

facilitate positive identification of landmarks and navigational
III

 Pub. 194

aids. These chartlets and sketches are not always to scale, however, and should be used only as a general informational guide

in conjunction with the best scale chart. Specific port facilities

are omitted from the standard format. They are tabulated in

Pub. 150, World Port Index.

0.0 Radio Navigational Aids.—Radio navigational aids are not

described in detail. Publication No. 117 Radio Navigational

Aids and NOAA Publication, Selected Worldwide Marine

Broadcasts, should be consulted.

0.0 Soundings.—Soundings are referred to the datum of the

charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Special Warnings.—A Special Warning may be in force for

the geographic area covered by this publication. Special

Warnings are printed in the weekly Notice to Mariners upon

promulgation and are reprinted annually in Notice to Mariners

No. 1. A listing of Special Warnings currently in force is

printed in each weekly Notice to Mariners, Section III, Broadcast Warnings, along with the notice number of promulgation.

Special Warnings are also available on the Maritime Division

website.

0.0 Wind Directions.—Wind directions are the true directions

from which winds blow.

Reference List

0.0 The principal sources examined in the preparation of this

publication were:

0.0 British Hydrographic Department Sailing Directions.

0.0 Various port handbooks. 

0.0 Reports from United States Naval and merchant vessels and

various shipping companies.

0.0 Other U.S. Government publications, reports, and documents.

0.0 Charts, light lists, tide and current tables, and other documents in possession of the Agency.

0.0 Internet Web sites, as follows:

0.0 1. Aabenraa, Denmark

0.0 http://www.aabenraa.dk

0.0 2. Anderson, Anders

0.0 2xAnderson Media AB

0.0 http://www.2xa.se

0.0 3. Carter, Donald and Diana 

0.0 Internet Public Library

0.0 http://www.ipl.org/div/light

0.0 4. Copenhagen/Malmo Port Electronic Photo Archives

0.0 Bech, Mogens

0.0 Atelier Sorte Hest

0.0 http://www.cmport.com

0.0 5. Helsingborgs Hamn AB, Sweden

0.0 http://www.port.helsingborg.se

0.0 6. Kiel, Germany

0.0 http://www.port-of-kiel.de

0.0 7. Nord-Ostsee Kanal (Kiel Canal) Home Page

0.0 http://www.kiel-canal.org
 Pub. 194

V

0.0SECTOR LIMITS — PUB. 194
Pub. 194 VI

Conversion Tables

Feet to Meters

Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.30 0.61 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 2.44 2.74

 10 3.05 3.35 3.66 3.96 4.27 4.57 4.88 5.18 5.49 5.79

 20 6.10 6.40 6.71 7.01 7.32 7.62 7.92 8.23 8.53 8.84

 30 9.14 9.45 9.75 10.06 10.36 10.67 10.97 11.28 11.58 11.89

 40 12.19 12.50 12.80 13.11 13.41 13.72 14.02 14.33 14.63 14.93

 50 15.24 15.54 15.85 16.15 16.46 16.76 17.07 17.37 17.68 17.98

 60 18.29 18.59 18.90 19.20 19.51 19.81 20.12 20.42 20.73 21.03

 70 21.34 21.64 21.95 22.25 22.55 22.86 23.16 23.47 23.77 24.08

 80 24.38 24.69 24.99 25.30 25.60 25.91 26.21 26.52 26.82 27.13

 90 27.43 27.74 28.04 28.35 28.65 28.96 29.26 29.57 29.87 30.17

Fathoms to Meters

Fathoms 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 1.83 3.66 5.49 7.32 9.14 10.97 12.80 14.63 16.46

 10 18.29 20.12 21.95 23.77 25.60 27.43 29.26 31.09 32.92 34.75

 20 36.58 38.40 40.23 42.06 43.89 45.72 47.55 49.38 51.21 53.03

 30 54.86 56.69 58.52 60.35 62.18 64.01 65.84 67.67 69.49 71.32

 40 73.15 74.98 76.81 78.64 80.47 82.30 84.12 85.95 87.78 89.61

 50 91.44 93.27 95.10 96.93 98.75 100.58 102.41 104.24 106.07 107.90

 60 109.73 111.56 113.39 115.21 117.04 118.87 120.70 122.53 124.36 126.19

 70 128.02 129.85 131.67 133.50 135.33 137.16 138.99 140.82 142.65 144.47

 80 146.30 148.13 149.96 151.79 153.62 155.45 157.28 159.11 160.93 162.76

 90 164.59 166.42 168.25 170.08 171.91 173.74 175.56 177.39 179.22 181.05

Meters to Feet

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 3.28 6.56 9.84 13.12 16.40 19.68 22.97 26.25 29.53

 10 32.81 36.09 39.37 42.65 45.93 49.21 52.49 55.77 59.06 62.34

 20 65.62 68.90 72.18 75.46 78.74 82.02 85.30 88.58 91.86 95.14

 30 98.42 101.71 104.99 108.27 111.55 114.83 118.11 121.39 124.67 127.95

 40 131.23 134.51 137.80 141.08 144.36 147.64 150.92 154.20 157.48 160.76

 50 164.04 167.32 170.60 173.88 177.16 180.45 183.73 187.01 190.29 193.57

 60 196.85 200.13 203.41 206.69 209.97 213.25 216.54 219.82 223.10 226.38

 70 229.66 232.94 236.22 239.50 242.78 246.06 249.34 252.62 255.90 259.19

 80 262.47 265.75 269.03 272.31 275.59 278.87 282.15 285.43 288.71 291.99

 90 295.28 298.56 301.84 305.12 308.40 311.68 314.96 318.24 321.52 324.80

Meters to Fathoms

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.55 1.09 1.64 2.19 2.73 3.28 3.83 4.37 4.92

 10 5.47 6.01 6.56 7.11 7.66 8.20 8.75 9.30 9.84 10.39

 20 10.94 11.48 12.03 12.58 13.12 13.67 14.22 14.76 15.31 15.86

 30 16.40 16.95 17.50 18.04 18.59 19.14 19.68 20.23 20.78 21.33

 40 21.87 22.42 22.97 23.51 24.06 24.61 25.15 25.70 26.25 26.79

 50 27.34 27.89 28.43 28.98 29.53 30.07 30.62 31.17 31.71 32.26

 60 32.81 33.36 33.90 34.45 35.00 35.54 36.09 36.64 37.18 37.73

 70 38.28 38.82 39.37 39.92 40.46 41.01 41.56 42.10 42.65 43.20

 80 43.74 44.29 44.84 45.38 45.93 46.48 47.03 47.57 48.12 48.67

 90 49.21 49.76 50.31 50.85 51.40 51.95 52.49 53.04 53.59 54.13
VII Pub. 194

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Units

°C degree(s) Centigrade km kilometer(s)

cm centimeter(s) m meter(s)

cu.m. cubic meter(s) mb millibars

dwt deadweight tons MHz megahertz

FEU forty-foot equivalent units mm millimeter(s)

grt gross registered tons nrt net registered tons

kHz kilohertz TEU twenty-foot equivalent units

Directions

N north S south

NNE northnortheast SSW southsouthwest

NE northeast SW southwest

ENE eastnortheast WSW westsouthwest

E east W west

ESE eastsoutheast WNW westnorthwest

SE southeast NW northwest

SSE southsoutheast NNW northnorthwest

Vessel types

LASH Lighter Aboard Ship ro-ro Roll-on Roll-off

LNG Liquified Natural Gas ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier

LPG Liquified Petroleum Gas VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier

OBO Ore/Bulk/Oil

Time

ETA estimated time of arrival GMT Greenwich Mean Time

ETD estimated time of departure UTC Coordinated Universal Time

Water level

MSL mean sea level LWS low water springs

HW high water MHWN mean high water neaps

LW low water MHWS mean high water springs

MHW mean high water MLWN mean low water neaps

MLW mean low water MLWS mean low water springs

HWN high water neaps HAT highest astronomical tide

HWS high water springs LAT lowest astronomical tide

LWN low water neaps

Communications

D/F direction finder MF medium frequency

R/T radiotelephone HF high frequency

GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System VHF very high frequency

LF low frequency UHF ultra high frequency

Navigation

LANBY Large Automatic Navigation Buoy SPM Single Point Mooring

NAVSAT Navigation Satellite TSS Traffic Separation Scheme

ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System VTC Vessel Traffic Center

SBM Single Buoy Mooring VTS Vessel Traffic Service

Miscellaneous

COLREGS Collision Regulations

IALA International Association of Lighthouse

Authorities

No./Nos.

PA

Number/Numbers

Position approximate

IHO International Hydrographic Office PD Position doubtful

IMO International Maritime Organization Pub. Publication

loa length overall St./Ste. Saint/Sainte
Pub. 194 IX

Contents

Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II

Chartlet—Sector Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

Conversion Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII

Sector 1

Denmark and Sweden—The Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Sector 2

Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Sector 3

Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Sector 4

Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast (including Bornholm and Christianso) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Sector 5

Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund and Oland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Sector 6

Sweden—Gotland, Faro, and Gotska Sandon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Sector 7

Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund to Landsort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Sector 8

Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Sector 9

Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Sector 10

Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Glossaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Index—Gazetteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
1

Pub. 194

1. 

Denmark and Sweden—The Sound

1.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 1 — CHART INFORMATION
3

Pub. 194

SECTOR 1 

DENMARK AND SWEDEN—THE SOUND

1.0 Plan.—This sector begins with a description of the N end of

The Sound; from Kullen Light to Helsingborg on the Swedish

side and from Nakkehoved Light to Helsigor on the Danish

side. The central part of The Sound is then described; continuing from Helsingborg to Barsebackshamn (55°45'N., 12°54'E.)

on the Swedish side and from Helsingor to Kobenhaven on the

Danish side.

1.0 The sector concludes with a description of the S end of The

Sound, continuing to Falsterbo Udde Light (55°23'N.,

12°49'E.) in Sweden and Mon Light (54°57'N., 12°33'E.) in

Denmark. 

General Remarks

1.1 The Sound, called Oresund in Swedish and Sundet, or

Oresund, in Danish, is the E of three passages which connect

the Kattegat with the Baltic Sea. It lies between the W coast of

Sweden and the E coast of Sjaelland, and extends in a general

S direction from a line joining Kullen (56°18'N., 12°27'E.) and

Gilbjerg Hoved (56°08'N., 12°18'E.) to a line joining Falsterbo

(55°24'N., 12°50'E.) and Stevns Light (55°17'N., 12°27'E.).

1.1 The coasts on both sides of The Sound are indented by bays.

Lying close to the coast of Sjaelland is the large island of Amager, and E of Amager is Saltholm. Both islands are in Danish

waters. Extensive coastal banks and numerous detached shoals

encumber much of the S part of The Sound. Drogen, the deeper

of the two main channels used by vessels proceeding through

The Sound S of Kobenhavn and Malmo, leads between Amager and Saltholm. Flintrannan, the principal E channel, leads

between Saltholm and the Swedish coast. 

1.1 The port of Kobenhavn, lying with its N limit about 2.5

miles S of Skovshoved, comprises portions of the coast of

Sjaelland and Amager and the greater part of the passage between those islands. On the Swedish coast, the port of Malmo

lies nearly 9 miles SSE of Barsebackshamn, and about 2.5

miles SW of Malmo is the smaller port of Limhamn. There are

also a number of small harbors and loading places on both the

Swedish and Danish coasts.

1.1 The Oresund Link (55°38'N., 12°39'E.), a tunnel-bridge project, connects the Danish island of Sjaelland with Sweden (see

paragraph 1.20 for details).

1.1 A description of the S approach to The Sound, with the

coasts of Sjaelland and Mon forming the W side of that approach, is included in this sector.

1.1 The sector concludes with descriptions of the coast of Sjaelland from Stevns Klint Light to Jungshoved and the N and E

coasts of Mon. 

1.1 Ice.—In winter, certain buoys are withdrawn or replaced by

winter buoys. When ice compels the withdrawal of lighted

buoys, they are replaced by winter seamarks fitted with light

reflective material, which, when illuminated, will show the

colors in which the seamark is painted. In Danish and Swedish

waters, the method used is the IALA Comprehensive Code.

1.1 Black is indicated by a blue reflector. The cardinal marks

carry reflector bands, as follows:

1. North cardinal—One blue band over one yellow band.

2. East cardinal—Two blue bands.

3. South cardinal—One yellow band over one blue band.

4. West cardinal—Two yellow bands.

1.1 Lighted buoys marking transit routes TSS schemes are maintained as long as possible and are only replaced or withdrawn

in severe ice conditions. 

1.1 Ice may wear the color from buoys and topmarks may be lost

or damaged. 

1.1 Mariners should pay particular attention to the refraction and

deflection of light sector projections caused by ice during the cold

season. Where an angle of uncertainty exists, a frequent check

must be made to determine whether the vessel is keeping on the

desired course by the use of additional aids to navigation.

1.1 Icebreaking services in the region are provided under a

cooperative agreement between Sweden, Denmark, Finland,

and Norway, with the purpose of having identical regulations.

Requests for assistance should be made direct to the icebreaker, if close, or to the State Ice Service through any coastal

radio station.

1.1 For additional information on icebreaker services, regulations, and related subjects, see Pub. 140, Sailing Directions

(Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent Seas in

Sweden. 

1.1 The Danish State Ice Service located at Arhus/Baltic

Icebreaking Management can be contacted as follows: 

1.1 Tides—Currents.—The range of tide in The Sound is negligible. The water level depends mainly on the wind and the

current. In the narrower channels, strong winds may cause a

consider-able change in the water level. Gales causing a N

current may lower the water level by 0.6 to 0.9m below mean

water level and gales causing a S current may raise it by the

same amount. The highest water level usually occurs in July

and August, and it continues to be fairly high in September and

October. Low water levels occur most frequently in April and

May, and to some extent in March. 

1.1 In the other months, mean water level usually prevails.

The direction and strength of the currents in The Sound depend

to a large extent on wind and atmospheric pressure. In the

wider parts of The Sound, it has been observed that a N current

usually prevails for 7 months of the year, a S current prevails

for 4.5 months, and during the remaining period there is no

current. This proportion varies during the different months.

During January and April, there is twice as much N current as

opsstaff@sok.dk

http://forsvaret.dk/SOK/eng/

http://www.baltice.org
4 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194

there is S current. In March, May, and November, the N and S

currents are of equal frequency. During February and

December, the proportion is normal. In June, the S current

occurs most frequently and during July, August, September,

and October it is usually prevalent. 

1.1 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels, with drafts up to 12.5m,

may proceed to Malmo, in the N part of The Sound, and vessels, with drafts up to 10m, have been reported to reach Kobenhavn.

1.1 Vessels transiting the S part of The Sound and proceeding

into the Baltic may pass through either Drogden or Flintrannan. Drogden has a dredged depth of 8m and may be used

by vessels with drafts up to 7.7m. Flintrannan is swept to depth

of 8.4m and may be used by vessels with drafts up to 7m. The

Oresund Link Bridge spanning Flintrannan has a vertical clearance of 55m.

1.1 Pilotage.—The Baltic Pilotage Authorities Commission

recommends that, when bound to or from ports in the Baltic

Sea, masters should avail themselves for deep sea pilots, who

are certified by the authority of a Baltic coastal state(s), as follows: 

1. Masters of ships which are constrained by their draft. 

2. Masters of ships, other than those registered in one of

the Baltic States, infrequently sailing in the respective area.

3. Masters of loaded oil and chemical tankers and gas

tankers, irrespective of their size.

1.1 Vessels requiring a licensed deep sea pilot in the Baltic Sea

areas of Sweden should send a request at least 24 hours in

advance to one of the following stations:

1. For the Baltic Sea, vessels should contact Lulea,

Stockholm, or Malmo Pilots.

2. For the North Sea, Goteborg Pilots may be contacted.

3. For the Kattegat, Malmo Pilots, Helsingborg, or

Goteborg Pilots may be contacted.

1.1 Requests for pilots for The Sound should be forwarded to

Helsingborg Pilots for southbound vessels and to Malmo VTS

for northbound vessels, at least 5 hours in advance.

1.1 Ice pilotage requests should be made 24 hours in advance

through Stockholm, Goteborg, Lulea, or Malmo pilot stations.

1.1 The main Swedish pilot stations for The Sound (call:

Swedish Sound Pilot) are located at Malmo and Helsingborg.

Pilots can be contacted on VHF channel 80 by southbound

vessels and on VHF channels 20 and 60 by northbound vessels.

1.1 Generally, pilots from these two stations board northbound

vessels about 1 mile NNE of Lighted Buoy M41 (55°25'N.,

12°40'E.) or in the vicinity of Trelleborg Roads Lighted Buoy

(55°20'N., 13°08'E.) and southbound vessels in the vicinity of

the M1 Lighted Buoy (56°07'N., 12°31'E.) or Malmo Roads

Lighted Buoy (55°38'N., 12°57'E.). 

1.1 Swedish pilots for The Sound can be contacted by e-mail, as

follows:

1.1 Pilotage is compulsory in Swedish coastal waters and along

certain fairways connecting ports along the coast. The vessels

subject to compulsory pilotage vary in type and size according

to location; these vessels are divided into the following categories: 

1. Category 1—Vessels carrying or with uncleaned tanks

which last carried:

a. Liquefied gas.

b. Liquid chemicals defined in MARPOL73 Supplement 2, Annex 2 as Category A, B, or (if vessel does not

have a double-skin hull under all cargo tanks) C.

c. Liquid chemicals which, according to the IMO

Bulk Chemical Code, should be carried in Type 1 or 2 vessels. 

2. Category 2—All other chemical tankers which are

laden or have uncleaned tanks and all laden oil tankers. 

3. Category 3—All other vessels. 

1.1 It should be noted that extensive changes to pilotage

procedures within Swedish waters are being carried out. Formerly, all initial ordering of pilots was carried out through the

main VTS systems. However, procedures for the initial ordering of pilots via the Swedish Vessel Reporting System (FRS)

on the Swedish Maritime Administration internet website are

being introduced. In exceptional cases, pilots may be ordered

by e-mail, telephone, fax, or VHF. A preliminary request for

pilotage should be made at least 24 hours in advance. A definitive request for pilotage must be made via the Pilot Request

System at least 5 hours in advance.

1.1 It is reported that, initial ordering of pilots for The Sound

and all ports located S and W of Vastervik (57°46'N., 16°39'E.)

is to be carried out via the Swedish Vessel Reporting System

(FRS) on the Swedish Maritime Administration internet

website.

1.1 For additional information, see the following internet website:

1.1 Generally, pilotage is compulsory for vesssels entering

Danish waters, as follows:

1. Laden tankers over 1,500 dwt.

2. Laden chemical tankers carrying cargoes covered by

the IMO Code of Chemicals.

3. Gas tankers unless constructed solely to carry CO2.

4. Vessels with radioactive cargoes.

5. Vessels under tow of 150 gt and over, that are being

towed in dredged or marked channels leading to a harbor or

passing a pilot station.

6. Tankers not gas-free and not having an inert gas unit.

1.1 Additional pilotage requirements may be stated along with

each port description.

1.1 Pilots should be ordered by inbound vessels at least 18 hours

prior to the ETA at the boarding station. A confirmation or

correction should then be sent 4 hours before arrival.

1.1 Vessels should state the following when ordering the pilot:

1. Vessel name, call sign, and IMO Number

2. Gross tonnage, length, beam, draft, and speed.

3. Nature of cargo.

4. ETA at boarding position.

5. Destination for pilotage.

6. Any faults affecting maneuverability.

7. Contact and payment information.

8. Payer’s information.

southcoastpilot@sjofartsverket.se

Swedish Maritime Administration Home Page

http://www.sjofartsverket.se

opc@sjofartsverket.se
Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 5

Pub. 194

1.1 The ordering of Harbor Pilots or Danish Deep Sea (Transit)

Pilots may be carried out directly with the State Pilot Service

or with a private pilot. Pilot ordering arrangements are accepted by the following three offices:

1. DanPilot (The Sound), Kobenhavn.—This office can

be contacted on VHF channel 16, by fax at 45-35-431017,

and by telephone at 45-35-386700. It arranges pilotage for

Allinge (Bornholm), Dragor, Drogden, Fredrikssund, Fredriksvaerk, Helsingor, Hundested, Kobenhavn, Koge, Stevns

Pier, and Tuborg.

2. DanPilot (Great Belt), Spodsbjerg.—This office can

be contacted on VHF channel 16, by fax at 45-62-501528,

and by telephone at 45-62-501535. It arranges pilotage for

Assens, Bandholm, Faaborg, Gedser, Grenaa, Korsor, Limfjorden, Mariager Fjord, Nakskov, Naestved, Nyborg, Nykobing, Orehoved, Randers Fjord, Skagen (The Skaw), Stigsnaes, Store Belt (Great Belt), Stubbekobing, Studstrupvaerket, Svendborg, and Vordingborg.

3. DanPilot (Belt and Ford Pilot), Fredericia.—This

office can be contacted on VHF channel 16, by fax at 45-75-

928822, and by telephone at 45-76-200320. It arranges pilotage for Aabenraa, Esbjerg, Fredericia, Horsens, Kalundborg, Kolding, Middelfart, Odense, and Vejle.

1.1 The DanPilot (The Sound), Kobenhavn office may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

1.1 The DanPilot (Great Belt), Spodsbjerg office may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

1.1 The DanPilot (Belt and Ford Pilot), Fredericia office may be

contacted by e-mail, as follows:

1.1 Pilots for the following ports are not provided by DanPilot,

but they may be ordered using the above procedures. These

ports include Arhus, Aeroskobing, Bogense, Ebeltoft, Egernsund, Fredrikshavn, Grasten, Haderslev Fjord, Hanstholm,

Hirstshals, Hvide Sande, Kerteminde, Marstal, Nexo (Bornholm), Nysted, Rodbyhavn, Romo Havn, Ronne (Bornholm),

Saeby, Skagen, Soby, Sonderborg, and Thorsminde.

1.1 Danish Deep Sea (Transit) Pilots board vessels at the following positions:

1. Via Route T:

i. 57°47.0'N, 10°38.0'E or 57°44.0'N, 10°45.0'E (Skagen/The Scaw).

ii. 56°24.0'N, 11°05.0'E (Grenaa).

iii. 55°23.5'N, 11°00.0'E (Sprogo NE).

iv. 54°46.0'N, 10°49.0'E or 54°47.5'N, 10°52.5'E

(Store Belt-Great Belt).

v. 54°37.0'N, 12°16.0'E (Gedser):

vi. 55°20.0'N, 14°47.0'E (Bornholm).

2. Via The Sound.

i. 57°47.0'N, 10°38.0'E or 57°44.0'N, 10°45.0'E (Skagen/The Scaw).

ii. 56°07.5'N, 12°31.0'E (Helsingor).

iii. 55°45.0'N, 12°41.0'E (Kobenhavn).

iv. 55°31.0'N, 12°43.0'E (Drogden).

v. 55°20.0'N, 14°47.0'E (Bornholm).

1.1 Attention is drawn to the fact that a greater risk of grounding

exists during periods of icy conditions, when buoyage can not

be relied on expected to be in position and in order. Should the

passage take place under such conditions, the following measures are further recommended:

1. When navigating S of latitude 56°N (Sjaellands

Odde), the ship shall use two tugboats. Each of the tugboats

shall be fitted with a suitable electronic position fixing system and have a pilot on board. The passage shall, if deemed

necessary, take place in daylight and in good visibility.

2. For ships fitted with a special and workable position

fixing system, e.g. a radar mapping system, the use of tugboats mentioned in 1 above may be limited to the passage

between Keldsnor and Enstedvaerket.

1.1 On becoming aware of the fact that a ship bound for one of

the four harbors mentioned above does not comply with these

recommendations, vessels are requested to report the findings

to the Danish Maritime Authority.

1.1 Vessels requiring distance pilotage may be required to embark two pilots.

1.1 Regulations.—The following recommendations have been

implemented by the IMO regarding vessel transits through the

entrances to the Baltic Sea:

1. The Sound.—Loaded oil tankers with a draft of 7m

or more, all loaded chemical tankers and gas carriers, irrespective of size, and vessels carrying shipments of irradiated

nuclear fuel, plutonium, or high level radioactive wastes

(INF cargoes) should use the pilotage service established by

soundpilot@pilotage.dk

belt@pilotage.dk

littlebelt-pilot@lillebaelt.dk

Danish Pilotage Service (DanPilot) Home Page

http://www.pilotage.dk

or

http://www.danpilot.dk/index.html

The Sound—Pilot Boarding/Tranfer positions 
6 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194
Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 7

Pub. 194
8 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194

the governments of Denmark and Sweden when navigating

in a designated part of The Sound described below. 

The designated area lies SE of a line extending from Svinbaden Light (56°09'N., 12°33'E.) to Hornbaek, 4 miles SW,

and N of a line extending from Skanor (55°25'N., 12°50'E.)

to Aflandshage, the southernmost point of Amager Island,

lying 12 miles NW. 

Vessels should be aware that anchoring may be necessary

owing to the weather and sea conditions, in relation to the

size and draft of ship and the sea level. Vessels should also

take into account information from the pilot or from the

radio navigation information services in the area. 

2. Route T.—Vessels with a draft of 11m or more, and

vessels carrying shipments of irradiated nuclear fuel, plutonium, or high level radioactive wastes (INF cargoes), regardless of their size and draft, are to use the pilotage services locally established by the coastal states. 

Vessels should be aware that anchoring may be necessary

owing to the weather and sea conditions, in relation to the

size and draft of ship and the sea level. Vessels should also

take into account information from the pilot or from the

radio navigation information services in the area. 

3. Route T (Depth reductions).—Charted depths may

be up to 2m less due to unknown obstructions, sand migration, and tidal or meteorological effects. Vessels should not

enter the area unless they have a draft which provides sufficient underkeel clearance, taking into account the draft increasing factors, including squat and the effect of a course

alteration. 

In certain area of the Storebaelt (Great Belt), Hatter Rev,

Vengeancegrund, and in the narrow passage E of Langeland,

vessels are to exhibit the signal for a vessel constrained by its

draft as prescribed in Rule 28 of the 72 COLREGS. 

1.1 Shipowners and masters should consider the full potential of

new and improved navigation equipment in SOLAS chapter V,

including Electronic Chart Display and Information System

(ECDIS) when navigating in these narrow waters of The Sound

and along Route T. 

1.1 Two ship reporting systems have been established in the entrances to the Baltic Sea, as follows: 

1. SOUNDREP—described below.

2. BELTREP—described in paragraph 2.1 and paragraph 2.12. 

1.1 SOUNDREP, a voluntary ship reporting system, has been established in the central and S parts of The Sound in order to

improve safety and protect the marine environment. This reporting system, which is operated by Sound VTS, includes a

Reporting Area and an inner Operational Area. 

1.1 All vessels of 300 grt and over are encouraged to participate

in the SOUNDREP reporting system (call sign: Sound VTS)

when navigating within the Operational Area.

1.1 The Operational Area is bound by lines joining the following

positions:

1. North Limit. 

a. 55°46.0'N, 12°36.0'E. 

b. 55°46.0'N, 12°55.0'E.

2. West Limit.

a. 55°33.3'N, 12°35.6'E. 

b. 55°27.0'N, 12°31.0'E.

3. South Limit.

a. 55°27.0'N, 12°31.0'E. 

b. 55°27.0'N, 12°56.0'E.

1.1 The Reporting Area is bound by Reporting Lines joining the

following positions:

1. North Reporting Line. 

a. 55°50.0'N, 12°34.6'E. 

b. 55°50.0'N, 12°55.0'E.

2. South Reporting Line.

a. 55°17.4'N, 12°27.3'E. 

b. 55°10.0'N, 12°27.3'E.

c. 55°10.0'N, 12°54.5'E. 

d. 55°23.0'N, 13°02.0'E.

3. West Reporting Line.

a. 55°19.8'N, 12°27.3'E. 

b. 55°33.3'N, 12°35.6'E.

1.1 Vessels within the Operational Area are monitored both by

radar and by their AIS transmisson. Vessels within the Reporting Area are monitored by land-based AIS only.

1.1 For safety reasons, relevant information to shipping is given

only in the Operational Area. 

1.1 Sound VTS (call sign: Sound VTS) may be contacted by

VHF, telephone (46-4020-4317), and e-mail, as follows: 

1.1 The language used for communication should be English,

with IMO standard marine communication phrases where necessary.

1.1 A Sailing Plan (SP) should be sent before entering the Operational Area or as near as possible to the time of departure from

a port within the SOUNDREP area.

1.1 A Dangerous Goods Report (DG) should be sent when an

incident takes place involving the loss of packaged dangerous

goods into the sea, including those in freight containers,

portable tanks, road and rail vehicles, and shipborne barges.

1.1 Further reports should be sent whenever there is a change in

navigational status or circumstances, particularly in relation to

Item Q of the reorting format.

1.1 All reports should be made on VHF channel 71. Vessels

equipped with AIS can fulfil certain reporting requirements by

transmitting updated AIS information. Vessels may select, for

reasons of commercial confidentiality, to communicate that

part of their report which provides information on the next port

of call and cargo by fax or e-mail.

1.1 The SP should contain the following information:

contact@soundvts.org

Designator Information Required

A Vessel name, call sign, and IMO number 

(if available).

B Date and time in UTC (a 6-digit group 

giving day of month, hour, and minutes). 

C

Position in degrees-minutes-seconds (a 5-

digit group for latitude suffixed with N 

and a 6-digit group for longitude suffixed 

by E).

E True course (a 3-digit group).
Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 9

Pub. 194

1.1 The DG Report should include the items A, B, C, Q, R, T,

and X from the above table.

1.1 SOUNDREP VTS will broadcast relevant information concerning the safety of navigation in the Operational Area. Such

information may concern vessels and activities of special relevance, obstacles to traffic, failure of important navigation aids,

currents and water levels, ice conditions, extraordinary meteorological conditions, and other safety information.

1.1 Additional information may be given on request. Relevant

information will be broadcast on VHF channel 68. Prior to the

broadcast an announcement will be made on VHF channels 16

and 71. All vessels in the area should listen to the broadcast.

1.1 The VTS center will also recommend suitable anchorages

for vessels, if required. 

1.1 Directions.—For details of designated routes in the Kattegat, see Pub. 193, Sailing Directions (Enroute) Skagerrak and

Kattegat (Sector 7). Route B, which may best be seen on the

chart, leads SE into The Sound.

1.1 An IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Scheme (TSS), which

may best be seen on the chart, lies in the N part of The Sound

between Helsingborg, Sweden and Helsingor, Denmark. Its

separation zones are marked by lighted buoys.

1.1 Lighted Buoy M4 (56°03'N., 12°39'E.), equipped with a

racon, is moored near the central part of the TSS.

1.1 The central part of The Sound is divided into two passages

by the island of Ven (56°55'N., 12°42'E.). The E passage is

deeper and is used by deep-draft vessels proceeding to Kobenhavn. The W passage is shorter and is used by most vessels

proceeding to and from the Baltic Sea.

1.1 The S part of The Sound is divided into two channels by

Saltholm (55°38'N., 12°45'E.). Drogden leads S on the W side

and is the deepest channel leading through the Sound. The

deep-water route for Malmo leads SSE on the E side and then

Flintrannan continues SW. Both channels rejoin in the vicinity

of Drogden Light (55°32'N., 12°43'E.).

1.1 An IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Scheme (TSS), which

may best be seen on the chart, lies in the S part of The Sound.

Its circular separation zone is centered on Falsterborev Light

(55°18'N., 12°40'E.).

1.1 Caution.—Several areas, within which submarine cables

exist, lie in The Sound and may best be seen on the chart.

Many of these areas are marked by lighted beacons on the adjacent shores. Large magnetic anomalies may occur in the vicinity of power cables.

1.1 High speed ferries may be encountered within The Sound.

Ferry traffic is especially heavy during the summer. 

1.1 Fishing is carried on extensively in The Sound throughout

the year, but mainly during spring and fall. A sharp lookout

should be kept to avoid drift nets and other fishing gear laid in

these waters. 

1.1 The waters on the Swedish side of the S entrance to the

Sound lie within former NEMEDRI Mine Danger Area No. 10,

within which anchoring, fishing, or any form of seabed activity

could be dangerous.

1.1 On the Danish side, there are a few small areas S of Kobenhavn where anchoring, fishing, or underwater activities should

be avoided due to the possible existence of mines. See Pub.

140, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean

and Adjacent Seas for further details.

1.1 Between April and November, numerous yacht racing buoys

may be moored up to about 1 mile off the small harbors located

along both coasts of The Sound. 

North Entrance of The Sound to Helsingborg and 

Helsingor

1.2 The Swedish coast between Kullen (56°18'N.,

12°27'E.) and Viken, a fishing village located about 10 miles

SSE, is low and sparsely wooded. From Viken to Helsingborg,

7.5 miles farther SSE, the land becomes higher. There are no

large coastal indentations. The port of Hoganas is situated

about 7 miles SSE of Kullen and several small fishing harbors

lie along the stretch between Kullen and Helsingborg.

1.2 The range of tide along this part of the coast is negligible, the

water level change depending mainly on the wind and the

current. The shore is fringed by a coastal bank and all dangers,

with the exception of some wrecks, lie inside the 20m curve.

1.2 Kullen Light (56°18'N., 12°27'E.) is shown from a prominent tower, 15m high with an adjacent house, standing 0.2

mile SE of the NW extremity of the promontory. Hogkull,

188m high, rises 2.7 miles ESE of the light and is the tallest

peak in this area.

1.2 Molle (56°17'N., 12°30'E.), a small fishing harbor, is situated 2 miles SE of Kullen Light. It is protected by breakwaters

and has an entrance facing WNW. 

1.2 Krapperup Manor House, a prominent building, stands about

1.5 miles SE of Molle.

1.2 Lerhamn (56°15'N., 12°31'E.), a small harbor, is situated 2

miles SSE of Molle and is used only by small craft.

F Speed in knots (3-digit group). 

I Destination.

L Intended route.

O Maximum present draft (in meters).

P Cargo and quantity and class of 

dangerous cargo, if applicable. 

Q

Details of defects, deficiencies, or restrictions affecting navigation or maneuverability.

R* Details of type of pollution or dangerous 

goods lost overboard. 

T Owner or representative from which details of cargo may be obtained.

U Dwt and air draft, when exceeding 35m.

W Total number of persons on board.

X

Miscellaneous information:

a. Navigational status and any additional information contributing to the

safety of navigation.

b. Characteristics and estimated quantity of bunker fuel, for vessels carring

more than 5,000 tons of bunker fuel. 

* Only used in the DG Report

Designator Information Required
10 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194

1.2 Nyhamnslage (56°15'N., 12°32'E.), a small fishing harbor,

is situated 0.8 mile SSE of Lerhamn and has an entrance facing

SSW.

1.3 Hoganas (56°12'N., 12°33'E.) (World Port Index No.

24100), a small port, is situated about 7 miles SE of Kullen

Light. It is protected by a mole on the W side and the entrance

faces SSE.

1.3 Winds—Weather.—During NW gales, in the fall, the water

level in the harbor may rise about 1.6m above mean level.

During SE gales, in the spring, it may fall about 1.1m below

mean level. Normally, LW is about 0.6m below mean level. 

1.3 Ice.—The harbor is seldom closed by ice.

1.3 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel leads E

through the coastal dangers and is dredged to a depth of 8.2m

over a bottom width of 40m. The harbor has a depth of 8.2m.

The W quay is 370m long and the loading pier, on the E side of

the harbor, is 125m long. Vessels up to 130m in length and

7.4m draft can be accommodated.

1.3 Aspect.—An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about

1.6 miles W of the harbor entrance. The approach channel is

indicated by a lighted range and marked by buoys at its inner

end.

1.3 A prominent church stands in the town, 0.9 mile E of the

harbor, and another church, with a prominent spire, is situated

at Vasby, about 1.5 miles E of the harbor.

1.3 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots are provided by

the station at Helsingborg (see paragraph 1.5). They may be

contacted on VHF channel 80 (call: Hoganas Pilot) and board

in the vicinity of the outer approach lighted buoy.

1.3 For additional information concerning pilotage in The Sound

and the initial ordering of pilots, see paragraph 1.1.

1.3 Regulations.—Vessels with drafts over 6.7m must use the

services of a tug or the pilot launch when turning within the

harbor.

1.3 Caution.—The daymarks for the approach range are reported to be difficult to distinguish against the trees behind them.

1.4 Lerberget (56°11'N., 12°34'E.), a small harbor, is situated 1.4 miles S of Hoganas. It is protected by breakwaters

and has an entrance facing WSW. This harbor is used only by

fishing boats and pleasure craft.

1.4 Viken (56°08'N., 12°35'E.), a resort town, is situated 3.4

miles S of Hoganas. The small harbor is used almost entirely

by pleasure craft. A prominent church, white with a red roof

and a pointed tower, stands in the town.

1.4 Kulla Gunnarstorp Manor House, a conspicuous building, is

situated 3 miles SE of Viken.

1.4 Sofiero Castle, prominent from seaward, stands 1 mile E of

the small town of Sofiero, about 1.2 miles SSE of Kulla Gunnarstorp Manor House.

1.4 Svinbadan Light (56°09'N., 12°32'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 25m high and floodlit, standing about 1 mile

offshore, 1.4 miles NW of Viken.

1.4 Domsten, a yacht harbor, is situated 1.5 miles SSE of Viken

and is marked by a light. 

1.4 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 20m,

blue clay, about 1 mile W of Viken, but this roadstead is exposed to winds from NW through W to S.

Helsingborg (56°03'N., 12°42'E.)

World Port Index No. 24120

1.5 The port of Helsingborg is situated on the E bank of

Kullen Light

Krapperup Manor House Kulla Gunnarstorp Manor House

Sofiero Castle
Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 11

Pub. 194

the narrowest part of The Sound, directly opposite the Danish

port of Helsingor. The industrial part of the city is situated at its

S end. The port, which is a main ferry terminal, consists of

three sheltered harbors and is open for navigation throughout

the year.

1.5 Tides—Currents.—Gales from between W and N usually

raise the water level and gales from between E and S usually

lower it. The maximum variations in water level are 1.7m

above and 0.9m below mean level. During calm weather, the

variation in water level is slight.

1.5 The currents outside the harbor are variable and frequently

strong. There are often surface and bottom currents setting at

the same time in different directions and with different velocities. The current usually sets N near the entrances. However,

with winds from between W and N, the current may set S with

the change occurring quickly. 

1.5 Depths—Limitations.—Nordhamnen, or the North Harbor,

is the old port fronting the center of the city. It is protected on

the S side by a short detached breakwater and on the N side by

a curved breakwater. The N entrance, which has a depth of 9m,

is used only by small vessels due to the current setting across it.

The S entrance has a depth of l0m and is 90m wide. Nordhamnen provides four basins.

1.5 Cityhamnen (Basin 1), the northernmost basin, has a depth

of 6.8m and is used by small craft. A marina, with a separate

entrance, lies N of this basin.

1.5 Inre Hamnen (Basin 2) has depths of 3.6 to 6m; the berths on

the S side are used by ro-ro automobile ferries.

1.5 Sodra Hamnen (Basin 3) has depths of 6 to 8m; the berths on

the N side are used by railroad ferry traffic.

1.5 Ocean Harbor (Basin 4) is the outermost basin. The E quay

is 480m long and has depths of 8 to l0m alongside. The W

quay provides one cargo berth and two ro-ro ferry berths, 90 to

130m long, with depths of 7 to 8.5m alongside.

1.5 Vessels up to 180m in length, 35m beam, and 8.5m draft can

be accommodated in Nordhamnen.

1.5 Vasthamnen, or West Harbor, is situated 0.7 mile S of

Nordhamnen and has an entrance facing S, with a depth of

13m. The harbor has two basins and provides terminals for

ferries, ro-ro, and container vessels. The large basin has two

quays, 265m and 300m long, with depths of 13m alongside.

The small basin has two quays, 184m and 220m long, with

depths of 9m alongside. Vessels up to 225m in length and

11.7m draft can be handled. 

1.5 Sydhamnen, or the South Harbor, lies close S of Vasthamnen

and contains Basins 5, 6, and 7. Basin 5 provides two oil

berths, with depths of 11m alongside, which can be used by

tankers up to 10.5m draft. Basin 6 provides a grain terminal

berth, 460m long, with depths of 10.5 to 13.5m alongside.

Basin 7 has 1,350m of quayage and provides ten cargo berths,

with depths of 8 to 11.5m alongside.

1.5 Bulkhamn, previously known as Kopparverkkshamnen, is

situated 0.8 mile SSE of Sydhamnen. This bulk harbor is privately owned and serves the adjacent copper works.

1.5 The quay at the W side of the harbor basin is 440m long. It

provides seven berths and has depths of 7 to 10.5m alongside.

The quay at the E side is 180m long. It provides three berths,

with a depth of 7m alongside. Vessels up to 10m draft can be

handled.

 The port can accommodate vessels up to 65,000 dwt, 230m

in length, and 12.3m draft.

1.5 Aspect.—A light is shown from a prominent tower on a

house, 18m high, standing at the root of the curved breakwater

at the N side of Nordhamnen.

1.5 The harbor entrance channels are indicated by lighted

ranges, which may best be seen on the chart.

Svinbadan Light

Courtesy of Port of Helsingborg

Helsingborg—North Harbor

Courtesy of Port of Helsingborg

Helsingborg—West Harbor
12 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194

1.5 Karnan Tower, red and square, stands on high ground about

0.6 mile NE of the entrance to Nordhamnen and is prominent

from seaward. A water tower and a radio mast, both conspicuous, are situated about 1 mile NNE and 0.6 mile ENE, respectively, of Karnan Tower.

1.5 A conspicuous chimney stands at a heating plant on the N

side of Vasthamnen and several prominent silos are situated

within Sydhamnen. A number of prominent chimneys stand in

the N part of Bulkhamnen.

1.5 Pilotage.—A main pilot station is located at Helsingborg.

This station provides pilots for that part of the Oresund Maritime Area extending between the vicinity of Hallands Vadero

(56°30'N., 12°30'E.) and Landskrona. Pilotage for this part of

the area is compulsory for the following vessels (see paragraph

1.1):

1. All category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 vessels of 80m length and over or 15m

beam and over.

3. Category 3 vessels of 90m length and over or 16m

beam and over.

1.5 All ordering of pilots for the Oresund Maritime Area and the

station at Helsingborg must be made through Malmo VTS (see

paragraph 1.18).

1.5 Pilots for the Port of Helsingborg may be contacted on VHF

channel 80. Generally, pilots for the harbors board northbound

vessels in the vicinity of Lighted Buoy M7 (55°58.9'N.,

12°41.5'E.) and southbound vessels in the vicinity of Lighted

Buoy M1 (56°07.3'N., 12°31.7'E.) or Lighted Buoy M3

(56°04.6'N., 12°36.8'E.).

1.5 It should be noted that extensive changes to pilotage

procedures within Swedish waters are being carried out. Formerly, all initial ordering of pilots was carried out through the

main VTS systems. However, procedures for the initial ordering of pilots via the Swedish Vessel Reporting System (FRS)

on the Swedish Maritime Administration internet web site are

being introduced. For additional information, see paragraph

1.1.

1.5 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system controls shipping movements, including ferries, within the approaches to the port.

1.5 All vessels should send a report at least 24 hours in advance

to the port authority.

1.5 Vessels should report at least 1 hour in advance of arrival or

departure to the Harbor Radio on VHF channel 11 in order to

obtain traffic information.

1.5 Vessels should report to the VTS Port Control Center

(Helsingborg) on VHF at least 30 minutes prior to entering the

fairways leading to the harbors or departing a berth.

1.5 Helsingborg VTS may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

1.5 Vessels with a draft exceeding 2.4m are restricted to a speed

of 4 knots within the harbors.

1.5 Anchorage.—Anchoring in the roadstead of the port should

be avoided because of the close proximity to the inshore lanes

of the TSS and the heavy volume of ferry traffic.

1.5 Caution.—Several marine reserve areas, within which anchoring is prohibited, lie in the approaches to Helsingborg and

may best be seen on the chart.

1.6 The Danish coast is cliffy and devoid of trees in the

vicinity of Gilbjerg Hoved (56°08'N., 12°18'E.) at the NW side

of the entrance to The Sound. Between Nakkehoved, a bushcovered cliff located 2 miles ESE of Gilbjerg Hoved, and

Helsingor, 10 miles ESE, the foreshore is low and the land

within the coast is alternately high and low, with wooded areas

in places. Much of the SE part of this stretch of coast is thickly

populated. A number of small fishing harbors are located between Gilbjerg Hoved and Helsingor.

Courtesy of Port of Helsingborg

Helsingborg—Bulk Harbor

Courtesy of Port of Helsingborg

Helsingborg—South Harbor

Helsingborg Light

vts@port.helsingborg.se
Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 13

Pub. 194

1.6 Gilleleje (56°08'N., 12°19'E.), a resort town, is fronted by a

small harbor, which is protected by breakwaters. The entrance

is 40m wide, has a depth of 4.5m, and faces NNE. The harbor

is mostly used by fishing vessels and pleasure craft. A dredged

channel leads SSW through the dangers lying in the approaches to the entrance. Vessels up to 40m in length, 9m

beam, and 3.6m draft can enter.

1.6 A prominent water tower and a church, with a conspicuous

black spire, stand in the town.

1.6 Gilleleje Flak, a shoal area, extends up to about 1.8 miles N

of Gilleleje. It has depths of 2.5 to 7.2m and is marked by

buoys.

1.6 Nakkehoved Light (56°07'N., 12°21'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 21m high, standing 1 mile ESE of Gilleleje.

A disused light tower is situated about 0.2 mile E of the light.

1.7 Hornbaek (56°06'N., 12°28'E.), a small fishing harbor, is situated 5 miles ESE of Gilleleje and protected by

breakwaters.

1.7 Hornbaek Bugt, extending NW of the harbor, affords temporary anchorage to sailing vessels that have been prevented by

adverse current and wind from entering the narrow part of The

Sound. A conspicuous windmill, without sails, stands at

Dronninge, 2.5 miles W of Hornbaek.

1.7 Alsgarde (56°05'N., 12°32'E.), a fishing village, is situated

about 3 miles ESE of Hornbaek. A pier, 150m long, fronts the

E side of the village and has a depth of 1.5m alongside its head.

1.7 Odinshoj, a windmill without sails, stands about 0.3 mile

WNW of Alsgarde and is conspicuous from seaward.

1.7 A conspicuous red factory, with a tall chimney, is situated at

Hellebaek, about 3.5 miles ESE of Hornbaek.

1.7 Julebaek Light (56°04'N., 12°34'E.) is shown from a prominent hut, 4m high, standing about 1.5 miles SE of Alsgarde.

1.7 Kronborg Pynt (56°02'N., 12°37'E.), situated 2.2 miles SE

of Julebaek Light, is steep-to. Kronborg Castle stands on this

point and is very conspicuous. This castle was the setting for

Shakespeare’s Hamlet. A light is shown from a tower, 32m

high, surmounting the NE part of the castle.

1.7 Helsingor Nordhaven (56°02'N., 12°37'E.), situated 0.3

mile NW of Kronborg Pynt, is an extensive marina. It is protected from N by a long curved breakwater. The entrance faces

SE and is 35m wide. Small craft and yachts up to 35m in

length, 6m beam, and 2.5m draft can enter.

1.7 Caution.—Several shoal patches, with depths of less than

10m, front the shore between Nakkehoved Light and Hornbaek, about 6 miles ESE. Large vessels should avoid proceeding into depths of less than 20m in this area.

Helsingor (Elsingor) (56°02'N., 12°37'E.)

1.7World Port Index No. 29350

1.8 Helsingor, a commercial port, is situated close W of

Kronborg Pynt. The ferry service between this harbor and

Helsingborg, Sweden, provides the principal port activity.

1.8 Winds—Weather.—The water level may be raised by up to

1.5m by winds from between WNW and N. It may be lowered

by up to 1.2m by winds from between ESE and S. 

1.8 Ice.—Navigation may be hampered to some extent by ice

during severe winters, but the harbor is always kept open by

icebreakers. 

1.8 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range is negligible. 

1.8 The N current sets past the head of the S breakwater and

toward the shore W of Kronhoved, a point lying 0.2 mile SW

of Kronborg Pynt. At the same time an eddy often sets W along

the shore, turning S toward the harbor entrance.

1.8 The S current sets SW from Kronborg Pynt and across the

harbor entrance. The current can attain a velocity of 3 knots, at

times.

1.8 Depths—Limitations.—The main harbor basin, which provides 2,100m of quayage, is entered between two breakwaters.

The entrance is 61m wide and has a depth of 7.5m. The basin

has 16 berths, 23 to 160m long, with depths of 4 to 7.5m alongside. There are facilities for ferries, general cargo, container,

tanker, ro-ro, and cruise vessels. Vessels up to 170m in length,

30m beam, and 6.6m draft can be accommodated.

1.8 It is reported that a ferry berth, with a depth of 17m

alongside, is located close S of the S breakwater.

1.8 Aspect.—Kronborg Castle stands on Kronborg Pynt, close E

of the harbor. Two prominent churches are situated in the town.

Lights are shown from structures, 6m high, standing on the

breakwater heads.

1.8 Pilotage.—For information concerning the ordering of

Danish pilots in The Sound, see paragraph 1.1.

1.8 Pilotage for the port is provided by the main station at

Kobenhavn. Pilotage is compulsory for all tankers. Some exNakkehoved Light

Kronborg Castle in winter from seaward
14 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194

emptions are made for frequent visitors. Pilotage is recommended for all vessels without local knowledge. Pilots can be

contacted by VHF and board in the vicinity of Lighted Buoy

M1 (56°07'N., 12°31'E.) or further NW by request.

1.8 Helsingor may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

1.8 Regulations.—Vessels departing must wait for vessels entering. Vessels entering should sound one long blast, in sufficient time.

1.8 Speed within the harbor is restricted to 3 knots, but vessels

may maintain a speed of 6 knots during entry and departure.

1.8 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in Helsingor

Redd (56°01'N., 12°37'E.), the roadstead area lying S of Kronborg Pynt. A strong current, which diminishes in strength as

the distance from Kronborg Pynt increases, may be experienced in this roadstead. When approaching the anchorage, caution is required due the number of ferries transiting this area.

Vessels are advised not to anchor in that part of the roadstead

located close N of Snekkersten (56°01'N., 12°36'E.) because

the holding ground is too soft and numerous abandoned cables

and anchors lie on the bottom. 

The Sound—Central Part

1.9 The central part of The Sound extends between

Helsingborg and Barsebackshamn (55°45'N., 12°54'E.), on the

Swedish side, and between Helsingor (Elsingor) and Kobenhaven, on the Danish side.

The coast between Helsingborg (56°03'N., 12°42'E.) and

Landskrona, about 11 miles SSE, is mainly hilly, but is low

near the shore in places. The island of Ven lies with its S end

located 4 miles WNW of Landskrona. Between Landskrona

and Barsebackshamn, 7 miles SSE, the coast recedes about 2.5

miles and forms Lundakrabukten. The land along the shore of

this bight is low, but rises slightly inland.

1.9 Raa (56°00'N., 12°44'E.), situated 1.5 miles S of the Bulk

Harbor at Helsingborg, is a harbor used by fishing vessels and

yachts. The controlling depth in the entrance channel, which is

subject to silting, is 3.5m. The basins provide 500m of berthage, with depths of 2.5 to 4m alongside.

1.9 A prominent octagonal water tower, with a conical roof,

stands about 0.5 mile ENE of the harbor entrance.

1.9 Alabodarna (55°56'N., 12°47'E.), a small harbor formed by

two curved moles, is situated 3.5 miles SSE of Raa. It is used

by fishing vessels and yachts. The entrance faces S and has a

controlling depth of 2m.

1.9 Borstahusen (55°54'N., 12°49'E.), situated 3 miles SSE of

Alabodarna, is a small harbor protected by two breakwaters. It

has a depth of 3m and is used by small craft and fishing

vessels.

1.9 Anchorage.—An anchorage area, which may best be seen

on the chart, lies centered 0.9 mile SW of Raa. It has depths of

11 to 16m, clay. This roadstead is located clear of the main

traffic routes through The Sound and E of the strongest current.

Vessels anchored in this area are usually not affected by the

heavy swell from the Kattegat during strong N winds.

1.9 Caution.—A small area, within which anchoring and fishing

Helsingor Harbor

Kronborg Castle—Helsingor Harbor

elsinore@helsingoerhavn.dk
Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 15

Pub. 194

are prohibited due to the possible existence of bottom mines,

lies in the approach to Raa and may best be seen on the chart.

1.9 A prohibited anchorage area, which may best be seen on the

chart, lies centered 2 miles SW of Raa, at the S end of the TSS.

1.10 Ven (55°54'N., 12°42'E.), a Swedish island, lies 3

miles SW of Alabodarna. It consists of plateau, 35m high,

which is partially covered by trees. The coasts of the island are

formed by steep cliffs, especially on the N and W sides.

1.10 Sankt Ibb, a church with a conspicuous spire, stand in the

center of the island.

1.10 Ven Light (55°55'N., 12°40'E.) is shown from a prominent

tower, 8m high, standing near the NW extremity of the island.

1.10 A lighted buoy is moored about 0.4 mile W of Ven Light and

marks the coastal bank in this vicinity.

1.10 Kyrkbacken (55°55'N., 12°40'E.), a small craft harbor, is

situated 0.6 mile SE of Ven Light. It is protected by two moles

and has a depth of 2.7m in the entrance. An old church, consisting of a white building with a red roof and no tower, stands

close above the harbor and is prominent from seaward.

1.10 Norreborg, a small yacht harbor, lies about 1 mile E of Ven

Light and is protected by two breakwaters.

1.10 Haken Light (55°55'N., 12°44'E.) is shown from a prominent tower, 12m high with red dwellings, standing near the E

extremity of the island.

1.10 Backviken (55°54'N., 12°43'E.), situated close S of Haken

Light, is a small harbor, which is protected by two moles and a

detached breakwater. It is used by yachts, fishing vessels, and a

ro-ro ferry. The entrance has a controlling depth of 5m.

1.10 Sodra Udde Light (55°53'N., 12°43'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 8m high, standing near the S extremity of the

island.

1.10 Staffans Bank (55°53'N., 12°45'E.) lies centered 1.5 miles

ESE of Sodra Udde Light and is marked by a lighted buoy at

the SW end. It has depths of 10.5 to 16m and consists of sand,

clay and shells.

1.10 Anchorage.—Large vessels can anchor about 1 mile NNE

of Ven Light, in a depth of 25m. Anchorage may also be obtained, in a depth of 11m, in the vicinity of Staffans Bank.

1.10 Caution.—Several submarine cables, which may best be

seen on the chart, extend between the E extremity of Ven and

the Swedish mainland. 

Landskrona (55°52'N., 12°50'E.)

World Port Index No. 24180

1.11 The port of Landskrona is situated on the mainland,

about 4 miles SE of Ven. It is fronted and protected by

Vasterflacket, an area of rocky and sandy shoals, which may

best be seen on the chart.

1.11 Winds—Weather.—The water level is raised by W winds

and lowered by E winds. 

1.11 Ice.—The harbor is never closed by ice. 

1.11 Tides—Currents.—The currents sometimes attain a velocity of 3 to 4 knots at the harbor entrance.

1.11 Depths—Limitations.—The main approach channel leads

in a SE direction through extensive shoals to the harbor

entrance and is dredged to a depth of 11m.

1.11 A minor channel, with a depth of 2.5m, leads NNW through

the shoals to the harbor and is used by small craft with local

knowledge.

1.11 The principal berths are situated on the N and E sides of the

channel leading through the harbor. The port provides 2,220m

of total quayage, with alongside depths of 5 to 11m. There are

extensive facilities for bulk vessels. Vessels up to 190m in

length, 30m beam, and 10.1m draft can be accommodated.

1.11 The Oresund Shipyard, at the SE end of the harbor, can

handle vessels up to 30,000 dwt, 190m, in length, 30m beam,

and 7.1m draft.

Kyrkbacken Church (above harbor)

Ven Island—Sodra Udde Light

Landskrona
16 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194

1.11 Aspect.—The main approach channel is indicated by a

lighted range and marked by lighted buoys, which may best be

seen on the chart.

1.11 The Citadel is situated close N of the harbor and is conspicuous from seaward. Graen, an old fort, stands on the S side of

the harbor entrance and is prominent.

1.11 A very conspicuous water tower stands on the N side of the

harbor entrance.

1.11 Twelve prominent wind turbines, 46m high, stand on the

edge of Gipson, an island lying close S of Graen.

1.11 Pilotage.—Pilots are provided by the station at Helsingborg

(see paragraph 1.5). Pilots can be contacted on VHF channel

80 and board off Landskrona by advance arrangement. All ordering of pilots and traffic information is carried out by Malmo

VTS (see paragaph 1.18).

1.11 For additional information concerning pilotage in The Sound

and the initial ordering of pilots, see paragraph 1.1.

1.11 Regulations.—Vessels entering at night are limited to a

maximum draft of 7m and a maximum length of 130m; vessels

carrying ammonia are further limited to a maximum length of

110m.

1.11 Speed is restricted to a maximum of 10 knots in the approach

channel and 5 knots in the harbor area for vessels with drafts

over 2.5m.

1.11 Under normal circumstances, inbound vessels take precedence over outbound vessels.

1.11 Vessels exceeding 50 grt and vessels towing with an overall

tow length of more than 50m must report their arrival on VHF

2 miles before entry.

1.11 Caution.—Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of a

submarine pipeline which extends about 2.3 miles W from a

position located close S of Graen.

1.12 Grasrannan Light (55°52'N., 12°48'E.), equipped

with a racon, is shown from a prominent tower standing about

0.8 mile WSW of the harbor entrance at Landskrona.

1.12 Knolen (55°51'N., 12°44'E.), a detached shoal patch, lies

about 2 miles SW of Grasrannan Light. It has a least depth of

9.6m and is marked by a lighted buoy, which is equipped with a

racon.

1.12 Lundakrabukten (55°48'N., 12°53'E.) is a large bay entered

between the S side of Landskrona and Barsebackshamn, about

7 miles SSE. The N part of this bay is encumbered by the shallow coastal bank, which extends up to about 3 miles seaward in

places.

1.12 Barsebackshamn (55°45'N., 12°54'E.), a small harbor protected by breakwaters, is located at the S end of Lundakrabukten. It is used by fishing vessels and yachts. The harbor entrance faces SW and has a depth of 3m.

1.12 The shallow coastal bank extends up to about 0.5 mile seaward in the vicinity of Barsebacksham and its outer edge is

marked by a lighted buoy.

1.12 Pinhatten Light (55°45'N., 12°52'E.), equipped with a

racon, is shown from a conspicuous tower, 13m high and

floodlit, standing on a rocky shoal, 1.3 miles W of Barsebacksham. A lighted buoy is moored 0.8 mile N of this light.

1.12 A detached shoal patch, with a depth of 7.6m, lies about 0.4

mile SW of the light and is marked by a buoy. 

1.12 Pilotage.—Pilots board vessels, with drafts over 11m,

proceeding to Malmo about 1.5 miles NW of Pinhatten Light.

1.12 Anchorage.—Designated anchorage areas, centered 1.8

miles N and 3.5 miles NW of Pinhatten Light, lie in Lundakrabukten and may best be seen on the chart. These areas have

depths of 15 to 27m, but the holding ground is poor.

1.12 Directions.—Two routes lead in a SE direction toward the

Malmo approaches from a position located about 3.2 miles S of

the S extremity of Ven. The route passing W of Pinhatten Light

leads SSE for 12 miles and has a controlling depth of 8m.

1.12 The route passing E of Pinhatten Light leads SE for about 4

miles, using the white sector of this light, and then 2.5 miles

ESE into the SW part of Lundakrabukten. From a position

about 1 mile N of Pinhatten Light, the track leads SSE and S

for 2 miles, passing between the light and the lighted buoy

marking the coastal bank. This route has a controlling depth of

12.5m.

Landskrona—The Citadel

Landskrona Water Tower

Pinhatten Light
Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 17

Pub. 194

1.12 Caution.—Several submarine cables, which may best be

seen on the chart, extend seaward from the vicinity of the S

part of Lundakrabukten. 

1.13 The Danish coast extending between Helsingor and

Skovshoved, 16 miles S, has a number of wooded areas, with

numerous houses and other buildings standing near the shore.

Between Skovshoved and Vedbaek, about 5.5 miles N, the

coast is so closely built over that structures and objects near the

shore are difficult to identify from seaward.

1.13 Snekkersten (56°01'N., 12°36'E.), situated 2 miles SSW of

Helsingor, is a small craft harbor formed by two breakwaters.

The entrance faces ENE and has a depth of 2.8. The village is

prominent from seaward.

1.13 Espergaerde (56°00'N., 12°34'E.), situated 1.4 miles SW of

Snekkersten, is small craft harbor formed by two breakwaters.

The entrance faces ENE and has a depth of 2.5m. A conspicuous church, with a square tower surmounted by a tall spire,

stands in the N part of the village.

1.13 Tibberup Windmill stands about 0.7 mile SSW of Espergaerde and is conspicuous.

1.13 Humlebaek (55°58'N., 12°33'E.), situated 1.3 miles SSW of

Espergaerde, is a small yacht harbor protected by two breakwaters. The entrance faces NE and has a depth of 2.5m. A

prominent chapel, with a pointed tower, stands in the village.

1.13 Sletten (55°57'N., 12°32'E.), situated 1 mile SSW of Humlebaek, is a small craft harbor protected by two breakwaters. The

entrance faces N and has a depth of 2.5m.

1.13 Niva Havn (55°56'N., 12°32'E.), a small craft harbor, lies

0.7 mile SSW of Sletten and is protected by two breakwaters.

The entrance faces E and has a depth of 2.5.

1.13 Rungsted (55°53'N., 12°33'E.), situated 4 miles S of Sletten,

is an extensive yacht harbor protected by two curved

breakwaters. The entrance faces NW and has a depth of 3m.

1.13 Vedbaek (55°51'N., 12°35'E.), situated 2.2 miles SSE of

Rungsted, is an extensive yacht harbor protected by two

curving breakwaters. The entrance faces N and has a depth of

2.5m.

1.13 Eremitagen, a large and conspicuous building, stands about

3.2 miles S of Vedbaek.

1.13 Tarbaek (55°47'N., 12°36'E.), a small harbor, lies 4 miles N

of Kobenhavn and is protected by two breakwaters. It is used

by fishing vessels and yachts. The entrance faces N and has a

depth of 2m.

1.13 Skovshoved (55°46'N., 12°36'E.), situated 1.5 miles S of

Tarbaek, is a small harbor formed by two breakwaters. The

entrance faces E, has a depth of 4m, and is sheltered by a

detached breakwater. The harbor is used by fishing vessels and

yachts. Vessels up to 30m in length, 4.5m beam, and 3.5 draft

can enter. A prominent church stands in the village.

1.13 Lous Flak (55°50'N., 12°38'E.), an area of shoals and flats,

fronts the coast between Rungsted and Skovshoved. It extends

up to 3.5 miles seaward in places and may best be seen on the

chart. Lous Flak Lighted Buoy, equipped with a racon, is

moored near the SE end of the area, about 4.8 miles NE of

Skovshoved. This lighted buoy is replaced by a spar when ice

forms.

1.13 Tarbaek Rev (55°47'N., 12°38'E.), a sand flat with rocky

patches, extends up to about 2.3 miles seaward from the shore

and is marked by a lighted buoy moored 2.5 miles E of Tarbaek.

1.13 Regulations.—The SOUNDREP Reporting Area is situated

in this vicinty and its N limit extends along latitude 55°50.0'N.

For further details of this ship reporting system, see Regulations in paragraph 1.1.

1.14 Middelgrunds Fort (55°43'N., 12°40'E.) stands 3.2

miles SE of Skovshoved and is marked by lights at the NW and

SE ends. It is situated at the N end of Middelgrund, an extensive shoal area, which extends up to about 3 miles S.

1.14 A foul ground area, which may best be seen on the chart, lies

in the vicinity of this shoal area and is marked by buoys.

1.14 A prominent meteorological mast, 48m high, stands on the

NW side of this foul area, 1.2 miles SSW of Middelgrunds

Fort.

1.14 A wind farm area, in which 20 conspicuous wind generators

stand, extends for about 2 miles along the E side of this foul

area, about 0.4 mile E of the meteorological mast.

1.14 Flakfort (55°42'N., 12°44'E.), marked by a light, is a prominent object situated 2.4 miles ESE of Middelgrunds Fort, on

the NW part of Saltholm Flak. 

1.14 Kongedybet (55°41'N., 12°39'E.) is the channel leading between the bank fronting the NE shore of Amager, on its W

side, and Middelgrund shoal, on its E side. This channel provides access to Kobenhavn from the Baltic Sea and Drogden. It

has a controlling depth of 11m lying between the coastal bank

Tibberup Windmill

Eremitagen

Middelgrunds Fort
18 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194

fronting the NE shore of Amager, on its W side, and

Middelgrund shoal, on its E side. This channel provides access

to Kobenhavn from the Baltic Sea and Drogden. It has a

controlling depth of 11m.

1.14 Hollaenderdybet (55°42'N., 12°41'E.) is the channel lying

between Middelgrund, on the W side, and the NW part of

Saltholm Flak, on the E side. This channel, which is marked by

lighted buoys, leads into the N end of Drogden (see paragraph

1.27).

1.14 Caution.—During the months of September, October, and

November, fishing nets are laid in an area located between

Helsingor and Rungsted. They extend seaward to a depth of

about 13m. Each net is marked by buoys, with red flags at the

inner end and green flags at seaward end.

1.14 A prohibited area, which may best be seen on the chart,

surrounds Middelgrunds Fort.

1.14 An area, within which anchoring and fishing are prohibited,

lies centered about 0.4 mile SE of Middelgrunds Fort and may

best be seen on the chart.

1.15 Tuborg (55°43'N., 12°35'E.) (World Port Index No.

29260), a small port, is situated close N of Kobenhaven and is

the private property of Carlsberg Breweries.

1.15 During NW gales, the water level may be raised by about

1m; during SSW gales it may be lowered by the same amount.

The harbor consists of Yderbassin and Inderbassin, with

depths of 4m; Nordkanal, with depths of 1.5 to 3m; and Yderkanal, a marina, with a depth of 2.5m.

The port should be approached from the ESE. It is protected

by two detached breakwaters, 140m and 55m long.

1.15 The entrance channel is marked by lighted buoys and buoys.

For additional landmarks, see Kobenhaven (see paragraph

1.16).

1.15 Pilots may be obtained from Kobenhavn (paragraph 1.16).

For further information, see paragraph 1.1.

Kobenhavn (55°42'N., 12°37'E.)

World Port Index No. 29230

1.16 Kobenhavn (Copenhagen) is the principal commercial port of Denmark and the main base of the Danish Navy. It

is situated on the E coast of Sjaelland and includes most of the

NW side of Amager, a flat island lying close offshore.

1.16 The port is composed of four main harbors. Nordhavnen

(North Harbor), Inderhavnen (Inner Harbor), Sydhavnen

(South Harbor), and Osthavnen (East Harbor).

1.16 Winds—Weather.—Gales from W to NW may raise the

water level by up to 1.4m and gales from E to S may lower it by

up to 1.1m. 

1.16 Ice.—Only during occasional severe winters does ice hinder

shipping in the harbor. At such times the port is usually kept

open by icebreakers.

1.16 Tides—Currents.—The currents in Kronlobet and the harbor usually follow the direction of the channel, but sometimes

the N current sets rather strongly toward Stubben (55°44'N.,

12°37'E.) and the S current sets toward Trekroner Fort

(55°42'N., 12°37'E.). The maximum velocity of the currents in

the harbor is 2 knots.

1.16 Depths—Limitations.—The main approach route leading

into the port from N passes through Renden, the N part of

Kongedybet. This route leads SW and lies between Stubben, a

shoal extending about 1 mile NNE from the N end of the port,

and Middelgrunds Fort. The route then continues SW through

Kronlobet, a dredged entrance channel, which is 150m wide

and has a depth of 10m.

1.16 Lynettelobet, situated 0.6 mile S of the main entrance, leads

W from Kongedyb into the outer harbor. This channel, which is

dredged to a depth of 7m, leads across a shallow sand flat and

through a small entrance, 30m wide. 

1.16 Vessels approaching the port from S are limited by the controlling depth of Drogden (see paragraph 1.27).

1.16 Skudelobet, a dredged channel, leads SSW to the northernmost group of basins in Nordhavnen. This channel passes between the coastal bank and the W side of Stubben. It has a controlling depth of 6.7m in the outer part and 6.3m in the inner

part.

1.16 Kalvebodlobet, a narrow channel, leads NNE and NE from

the N part of Koge Bugt (55°30'N., 12°30'E.) into the S part of

the port. This channel has a controlling depth of 3.7m and a

vertical clearance of 3m under the bridge in the S part of the

port.

1.16 Nordhavnen (North Harbor) consists of Faergehavn Nord,

Kalkbraenderihavnen, and Frihaven.

1.16 Faergehavn Nord, entered via Skudelobet, is a ferry harbor.

It provides nine berths, with depths of 6.7m alongside. 

1.16 Kalkbraenderihavnen, located 0.4 mile SSW of Faergehavn

Nord, provides 11 berths, with depths of 6.3 to 6.7m alongside.

An extensive marina lies on the NW side of this basin.

1.16 Frihaven, located close SW of the main entrance, consists of

six basins. These basins provide 48 main berths, with depths of

8.1 to 10m alongside.

1.16 Yderhaven, the outer harbor, extends S between the main

entrance of the port and Inderhavnen. A passenger ship

terminal, 800m long, is situated at the W side and has depths of

9.1 to 10m alongside.

1.16 Inderhavnen (Inner Harbor) extends S between Yderhaven

and Sydhavnen. The NE part is occupied by the naval dockKobenhavn—Main Entrance
Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 19

Pub. 194

yard. The SE part provides 19 berths, with depths of 6.2 to 8m

alongside. Christianshavns Kanal, which lies parallel to Inderhavnen on the E side, provides 35 berths, with depths of 4 to

5m alongside. The W part of Inderhavnen provides 19 main

berths, with depths of 6.2 to 8.1m alongside.

1.16 Knippelsbro, a bascule road bridge, spans Inderhavnen,

about 2 miles SSW of the main entrance. This bridge has a

navigable width of 34m when open and a vertical clearance of

5m when closed.

1.16 Langebro, another bascule road bridge, spans Inderhavnen,

about 0.4 mile SW of Knippelsbro. This bridge has a navigable

width of 35m when open and a vertical clearance of 7m when

closed.

1.16 Sydhavnen (South Harbor) provides 40 main berths, on the

W side, with depths of 5 to 7m alongside, and 15 berths, on the

E side, with depths of 6.2 to 7.7m alongside.

1.16 Osthavnen (East Harbor) is situated outside the main entrance on the NE coast of Amager. It consists of Amagervaeket and Provestenshavn.

1.16 Amagervaeket, the site of a power plant, provides ten berths,

with depths of 6 to 12m alongside.

1.16 Provestenshavn, located S of Amagervaeket, is connected to

the NE side of Amager by a bridge and consists of a single

basin protected by breakwaters. The entrance, which is

accessed directly from Kongedybet, faces ENE and is 140m

wide. This basin provides 12 berths, with depths of 5 to 10.5m

alongside. Provestens Oliepier, located 0.2 mile N of the

entrance to the basin, is a T-shaped oil pier with a head, 50m

long. Mooring dolphins situated at each side of the pier provide

310m of total berthage, with depths of 9.1 to 12m alongside.

1.16 The port has facilities for general cargo, ro-ro, ferry, passenger, cruise, bulk, container, and tanker vessels. The maximum size of vessel handled is limited only by draft.

1.16 Aspect.—The entrance channels are indicated by lighted

ranges and marked by buoys, which may best be seen on the

chart. A racon is situated at the light shown from the head of

the S breakwater, at the main entrance. An outer approach

lighted buoy is moored about 3 miles NE of the main entrance.

1.16 Trekroner, a prominent fort, is situated 0.2 mile S of the

main entrance. A directional light is shown from a tower, 12m

high, standing on the E side of the fort.

1.16 Three prominent chimneys stand in the vicinity of a power

Kobenhavn—Osthavnen

Kobenhavn—Yderhavnen Passenger Terminal

Kobenhavn—Nordhavnen (Frihaven)

Trekroner Fort

Trekroner Fort Light
20 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194

station at the NW side of Nordhavnen, 0.9 mile WNW of the

main entrance. A gas works is situated 0.2 mile SW of the

power station.

1.16 Jacobs Church, standing about 1.3 miles WSW of the main

entrance, is prominent. It is situated between the gas works and

an electricity plant.

1.16 A prominent silo is reported to stand at the N end of a pier in

Frihavnen, 0.6 mile SW of Trekroner fort.

1.16 A conspicuous crane is situated on the E side of the entrance

to Inderhavnen, about 1.2 miles S of the main entrance. 

1.16 Frelsers Church, surmounted by a spire with an external

spiral staircase, and Christians Church stand prominently in the

city about 0.3 mile SE and 0.2 mile S, respectively, of the

Knippelsbro Bridge.

1.16 Several prominent tank farms are situated in the vicinity of

Provestenshavn. Two conspicuous towers, which mark sewers,

stand on the W side of Provestenshavn.

1.16 A conspicuous silo, 58m high, stands on the NE part of Amagervaeket, about 1.3 miles SE of the main entrance.

1.16 Seven prominent wind turbines, 50m high, are reported to

stand near the edge of the area of reclaimed land, about 0.9

mile SSE of the main entrance.

1.16 The Little Mermaid, a famous statue, stands on a rock near

the shore of Langelinie, a shallow bay lying at the W side of

the channel about 1 mile SSW of the main harbor entrance.

1.16 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels exceeding

80m in length passing through the bridges to the S part of the

port. Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board about 3.4 miles

NE of the main port entrance.

1.16 For further information, see Pilotage in paragraph 1.1.

1.16 Kobenhavn may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

1.16 Regulations.—Foreign naval vessels are prohibited from

anchoring in or passing through Kobenhavns Red, the port

roadstead, without prior permission. The limits of the roadstead, which may best be seen on the chart, extend up to about

5 miles NE of the port and about 2 miles S and SW of Amager.

1.16 All vessels with an air draft of more than 35m, including

towed vessels, must report to the control tower of Kobenhavn

Airport, via Lyngby Radio, 30 minutes before passing through

Drogden. For further infomation, see paragraph 1.27.

1.16 Anchorage.—Three designated anchorage areas, which may

best be seen on the chart, lie within Kobenhavns Red. Anchorage

No. 1, centered 2.5 miles NE of Middelgrunds Fort, is for vessels

with drafts of 6m or more; Anchorage No. 2, centered 2 miles

NNW of Middelgrunds Fort, is for vessels with drafts of less than

6m; and Anchorage No. 3, centered 1 mile NNW of Middelgrunds

Fort, is reserved for vessels proceeding to Kobenhavn. The bottom

in these anchorage areas varies between fine sand, mud, and clay,

with good holding ground.

1.16 Vessels are prohibited from anchoring in the approach channels, in the line of the directional lights and ranges, and in such

a manner as to obstruct or interfere with the safe and clear

passage of other vessels.

1.16 Caution.—Numerous submarine cables and pipelines are

situated within the port and may best be seen on the chart.

1.16 Gas pipes are laid across in Yderhavnen, ESE from

Langelinie Bugt (55°41.6'N., 12°36.0'E.) to a position close S

of the shipyard at Refshaleoen. Outfall pipes are laid from the

NE corner of Orientbassinet across Kronlobet and Middelpult

to Middelgrundand leading to Askedepot.

1.16 It is reported that areas lying outside the main entrance are

under extensive reclamation. Generally, the seaward limits of

the works in progress are marked by buoys. 

The Sound—South Part

1.17 The Swedish coast between Barsebackshamn

(55°45'N., 12°54'E.) and Falsterbo (55°23'N., 12°50'E.) is

closely built over. The land rises behind the shore and there are

a few wooded areas.

1.17 Lommabukten (55°41'N., 13°00'E.) is entered between

Barsebackshamn and Lernacken, 11 miles S. 

1.17 Saltviken (55°45'N., 12°57'E.), a small bay, indents the N

part of Lommabukten. A power station stands on the N side of

the entrance to this bay and is fronted by Barsebacksvaerket, a

small harbor. The harbor is protected by a breakwater and

provides a ro-ro berth, 100m long, with a depth of 5.7m alongside. The entrance channel, which is 90m wide, leads NNW

from the SW side of Saltviken and has a controlling depth of

6m. It is marked by buoys and indicated by a lighted range.

1.17 Vikhogs Hamn, a small and shallow harbor, is situated close

SE of the S entrance point of Saltviken. It is formed by two

breakwaters and used by fishing boats.

1.17 A church and a windmill, which are conspicuous from seaLittle Mermaid Statue

cphport@cphport.dk

Malmo
Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 21

Pub. 194

ward, stand in the vicinity of Loddekopinge, about 3 miles NE

of Vikhogs Hamn.

1.17 Lomma (55°41'N., 13°04'E.), a small craft harbor, is situated

at the mouth of the Hojean River, 4.6 miles SE of Vikhogs Hamn

and about 3 miles NNE of Malmo. It is formed by two

breakwaters extending W from the mouth of the river. The entrance faces WSW and has a controlling depth of 2.5m. A quay,

270m long, is situated on the N side of the harbor has depths of

2.5 to 3.2m alongside. A church, with a prominent spire, and a

conspicuous silo, with a chimney standing close S, are situated

in the vicinity of Lom-ma.

1.17 Anchorage.—A designated anchorage area, with depths of

13.5 to 15m, lies centered 2.5 miles S of Barsebacksvaerket

and may best be seen on the chart. This area is marked at its

NE end by a buoy and at its NW end by a lighted buoy.

Anchorage is available off Lomma, in depths of 7 to 10m, clay

and fine sand, about 0.8 mile SW of the harbor entrance.

1.17 Caution.—A prohibited area, which may best be seen on the

chart, fronts Barsebacksvaerket harbor.

1.17 An area, within which fishing is prohibited, fronts Lomma

and may best be seen on the chart.

Malmo (55°37'N., 13°00'E.)

World Port Index No. 24210

1.18 The port of Malmo, situated on the S side of Lommabukten, consists of four main harbors. Oljeehamnen and

Swede harbor, consisting of a single basin, is situated in the NE

part of the port and is entered through a separate channel. Centralhamnen, consisting of four basins, is situated in the SW part

of the port and is entered through the main entrance channel.

Frihamnen, consisting of a single basin, is situated close E of

Centralhamnen and is entered through the main entrance channel. Industrihamnen, consisting of two large basins and one

small basin, is situated NE of Frihamnen and is entered

through a separate passage leading E from the E side of the

main entrance channel.

1.18 Winds—Weather.—Strong NW and N winds may cause the

water level in the harbor to rise by up to 1.2m above the mean

sea level. Strong SE and S winds, particularly in spring, may

lower the water level by up to 1.3m.

1.18 Ice.—The harbor is seldom obstructed by ice, but even in

normal winters there may be drift ice in the approach channels.

Icebreakers are available when conditions necessitate their use. 

1.18 Depths—Limitations.—The entrance channel leading SE to

Oljehamnen and Swede Harbor, which is 3.2 miles long, is

dredged to a depth of 13.5m and varies in width from 120 to

150m. 

1.18 Oljehamnen, the oil terminal, consists of a single basin, with

a depth of 13.5m. There are two tanker berths, each 70m long,

with depths of 12m alongside. There are also five berths for

coastal tankers with depths of 6m alongside. Tankers up to

260m in length and 11.4m draft can be accommodated.

1.18 Swede Harbor, a bulk terminal, is situated at the W side of

Oljehamnen. The quay is 200m long and has a depth of 13.5m

alongside. Vessels up to 60,000 dwt (100,000 dwt partly

loaded), 260m in length, 40m beam, and 12.5m draft can be accommodated. 

1.18 The main entrance channel leading SE into Centralhamnen is

120m wide and is dredged to a depth of 9.2m. Centralhamnen

consists of Yttre Hamnen, Nyhamnen, Inrehamnen, and Sodra

Varvsbassangen.

1.18 Yttre Hamnen, with a depth of 7.2m, has a quay belonging to

the repair yard on its W side and a hovercraft terminal on its E

side. Inrehamnen has a passenger terminal quay, 390m long, on

its E side, with depths of 5 to 6m alongside.

1.18 Nyhamnen, the New Basin, has 4,230m of total quayage and

provides ten berths with depths of 6 to 7.2m alongside. There

are facilities for ferry, passenger, ro-ro, bulk, and general cargo

vessels. Vessels up to 150m in length and 6.6m can be accommodated. 

1.18 Sodra Varvsbassangen, with depths of 3 to 6.5m, is entered

through a bascule bridge located at the SW end of Yttre Hamen. This basin provides eight berths for bulk grain vessels on its

E and S sides. 

1.18 Industrihamnen, consisting of three basins, is entered

through a side channel, 80m wide, with a depth of 9m. The harbor has 3,025m of total quayage and provides 38 berths, with

depths of 6 to 9m alongside. 

1.18 There are facilities for ro-ro, bulk, and general cargo vessels.

Vessels up to 170m in length and 8.4m draft can be

accommodated.

1.18 Frihamnen, the Freeport Harbor, has 1,500m of total quayage and provides 14 berths, with depths up to 9.2m alongside.

There are facilities for container and ro-ro vessels. Vessels up

to 225m in length and 8.6m draft can be accommodated.

1.18 A large shipyard, with two drydocks, is situated in the SW

part of the port. The largest drydock, which is used for shipbuilding, is 405m long and 75m wide.

1.18 Aspect.—Malmo Vagbrytarbank Light (55°37.5'N., 12°

58.6'E.) is shown from a prominent tower, 12m high, standing

on the SW side of the main entrance channel. 

1.18 The entrance channels are indicated by lighted ranges and

marked by lighted buoys, which may best be seen on the chart.

An outer fairway lighted buoy is moored about 1.8 miles NW

of the entrance to Centralhamnen.

1.18 Saint Petri Church, with a high spire, and Malmo Citadel

stand about 0.3 mile SE and 0.5 mile SW, respectively, of Inrehamnen basin and are conspicuous from seaward.

1.18 Turning Torso, a conspicuous building, 193m high, stands in

position 55°36.8'N, 12°58.7'E. A wind turbine stands in position 55°37.9'N, 13°00.7'E. 

The Oresund Link (Flintrannan) from Turning Torso
22 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194

1.18 Pilotage.—A main pilot station is located at Malmo. This

station provides pilots for that part of the Oresund Maritime

Area extending between Landskrona (55°47.0'N., 12°49.0'E)

and Sandhammaren (55°23'N., 14°12'E.). 

1.18 Malmo Pilot can be contacted on VHF channel 13, 18, 20,

60, and 80.

1.18 E- mail can also be sent to: 

1.18 Pilotage for this part of the area is compulsory for the

following vessels (see paragraph 1.1):

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 vessels of 80m length and over or 15m

beam and over.

3. Category 3 vessels of 90m length and over or 16m

beam and over.

1.18 In certain channels leading to and from Barsebacksverket,

pilotage is compulsory for the following vessels:

1. All category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 and 3 vessels of 80m length and over, 15m

beam and over, and 5m draft and over.

1.18 All ordering of pilots in the Oresund Maritime Area must be

made through Malmo VTS. Vessels should send a request for

pilotage and an ETA at least 5 hours in advance, with a

confirmation message 3 hours in advance. Requests for deepsea pilots for The Sound should be sent at least 24 hours in

advance (see paragraph 1.1).

1.18 Pilots for Malmo may be contacted on VHF channel 60 and

board vessels in the following positions:

1. Ystad Redd (55°23.3'N., 13°48.0'E.).

2. Trelleborg Redd (55°20.0'N., 13°08.0'E.).

3. 55°28.2'N, 12°43.0'E (for vessels northbound for

Flintrannen).

4. Near Malmo Fairway Lighted Buoy (55°38.5'N.,

12°56.8'E.).

5. Position 55°42.6'N, 12°53.7'E.

6. Position 55°46.5'N, 12°50.4'E (for all vessels over 9m

draft bound for Malmo).

1.18 During bad weather, vessels may be required to embark

pilots at the roadstead anchorage. 

1.18 The Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system at Malmo coordinates and administers all pilotage services within the Oresund

Maritime Area. 

1.18 The VTS center at Malmo may be contacted by e-mail, as

follows:

1.18 Primary pilotage requests are made in cordination with the

Swedish Vessel Reporting System (FRS) and the Swedish

Maritime Administration 24 hours followed by a 5-hour prior

confirmation on ETA. 

1.18 A preliminary request for the pilot must be made through the

FRS at least 24 hours in advance; a confirmation ETA should

be sent at least 5 hours in advance. For additional information,

see paragraph 1.1. 

1.18 In exceptional cases, pilots may be requested through e-mail,

telephone, fax, telex or VHF for the following listed ports. 

southcoastpilot@sjofartsverket.se

vtsmalmo@sjofartsverket.se

Swedish Maritime Administration Home Page

http://www.sjofartsverket.se

Malmo - The Turning Torso

Direct Request for Pilot at the Port of Entry

Port of 

Entry Telephone VHF channal Call Sign

Hoganas 46 40 204351 80 Hoganas 

Pilot

Helsingborg 46 40 204351 80 Helsingborg 

Pilot

Landskrona 46 40 204351 80 Landskrona 

Pilot

Barseback 46 40 204351 60 Barseback 

Pilot

Malmo 46 40 204351 60 Malmo Pilot

Trelleborg 46 40 204351 20 Trelleborg 

Pilot

Ystad 46 40 204351 20 Ystad Pilot

Simrishham 46 40 204352 18 Simrishham 

Pilot
Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 23

Pub. 194

Limhamn (55°35'N., 12°56'E.)

World Port Index No. 24220

1.19 The port of Limhamn lies about 2 miles SW of Malmo and serves a number of nearby industrial establishments. It

is under the jurisdiction of Malmo. 

1.19 Winds—Weather.—Winds from SW through W to N may

raise the water level by up to 1m and winds from N through E

to SW may lower the water level by the same amount.

1.19 Ice.—Ice obstructs the harbor only in very severe winters. 

1.19 Tides—Currents.—The currents set across the entrance

channels and, at times, attain velocities of 3 to 4 knots. 

1.19 Depths—Limitations.—The port has two separate commercial harbors. Centralhamnen, situated in the N part of the

port, consists of a single large basin. The entrance channel

leads SSW and is dredged to a depth of 8.6m. The harbor provides 12 berths and has depths of 7.7 to 8.4m alongside. Cargo

vessels up to 170m in length and 7.8m draft can be accommodated.

1.19 Sodrahamnen, situated in the S part of the port, is used by roro ferries and fishing vessels. The entrance channel leads E and

is dredged to a depth of 5m. Vessels up to 4.5m draft can be

accommodated.

1.19 Marinas, with extensive facilities for small craft and yachts,

are situated close SW of Sodrahamnen and close NNE Centralhamnen.

1.19 Aspect.—The entrance channels are indicated by lighted

ranges and marked by buoys, which may best be seen on the

chart. 

1.19 Numerous tall chimneys, including one 120m high, stand on

the E side of Centralhamnen. A conspicuous church, with a tall

red square tower and a dark gray spire, stands on high ground

on the S side of the town, about 1 mile SE of Centralhamnen.

1.19 A prominent aeronautical beacon tower stands about 2 miles

ESE of Centralhamnen. 

1.19 Pilotage.—See Pilotage for Malmo (paragraph 1.18). 

1.19 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor about 0.8 mile N of the

submerged breakwater, which lies close W of the entrance to

Centralhamnen, in a depth of 13m. 

1.19 Caution.—Submarine breakwaters, 0.4 miles long, are

located about 0.3 mile NW and 0.9 mile NE of the entrance to

Centralhamnen.

1.20 Oresund.—The shallowest section of Oresund (The

Sound) lies in the waters located between Malmo and the Danish

island of Amager. Vessels are directed to transit this area through

Flintrannan see paragraph 1.21), on the Swedish side, or through

Drogden (see paragraph 1.27), on the Danish side.

The Oresund Link (55°35'N., 12°46'N.), a fixed railroad

and motor traffic link, extends across The Sound from the vicinity of Kobenhavn Airport (55°37'N., 12°40'E.) to the vicinity

of Lernachen (55°34'N., 12°55'E.), on the Swedish coast.

 The W section of the Oresund Link extending across Drogden to the N end of Peberholm (see paragraph 1.26), the artificial island lying SW of Saltholm, consists of a submerged tunnel.

 The E section of the Oresund Link extending across Flintrannan from the S end of Peberholm to the Swedish coast

consists of a bridge. The elevated part of the bridge crossing

the channel has a free span, 490m wide, with a vertical clearance of 55m.

1.21 Flintrannan (55°37'N., 12°53'E.) is the passage lying

between the Swedish coast in the vicinity of Malmo, on the E

side, and the shoal flat fronting Saltholm (55°38'N., 12°46'E.) on

the W side. It is encumbered with numerous dangers, which may

best be seen on the chart.

1.21 Depths—Limitations.—The main fairway through Flintrannan was dredged to a depth of 8.2m. Vessels up to 7m draft can

transit this passage, but are recommended to proceed with

reduced speed due to shoaling. The bridge span crossing the

channel has a vertical clearance of 55m.

1.21 Trindelranna, a narrow channel, leads SW for 5 miles from

close SW of Malmo Vagbrytarbank Light (55°37.5'N.,

12°58.6'E.). It then leads about 1 mile SSW, passing under a

span of the Oresund Link bridge, to a position close W of the

lighted buoy marking the W extremity of the coastal bank in

the vicinity of Lernacken (55°34'N., 12°54'E.). This channel,

which has a least depth of 5.6m, can be used by vessels up to

4.5m draft. Local knowledge is required and transit during the

herring fishing season is only allowed during daylight. The

bridge span is 100m wide, with a vertical clearance of 40m.

1.21 Malmo VTS broadcasts details of current strength and water

levels in the vicinity of Flintrannan.

Ahus 46 40 204352 18 Ahus Pilot

Solvesborg 46 40 204352 18 Solvesborg 

Pilot

Elleholm 46 40 204352 18 Elleholm 

Pilot

Karlshamn 46 40 204352 18 Karlshamn 

Pilot

Ronney 46 40 204352 18 Ronney Pilot

Karlskrona 46 40 204352 18 Karlskrona 

Pilot

Bergkvara 46 40 204352 13 Bergkvara 

Pilot

Degerhamn 46 40 204352 13 Degerhamn 

Pilot

Kalmar 46 40 204352 13 Kalmar Pilot

Jatterson 46 40 204352 13 Jatterson 

Pilot

Oskarshamn 46 40 204352 13 Oskarshamn 

Pilot

Simpevarp 46 40 204352 13 Simpevarp 

Pilot

Flivik 46 40 204352 13 Flivik Pilot

Vastervik 46 40 204352 13 Vastervik 

Pilot

Direct Request for Pilot at the Port of Entry

Port of 

Entry Telephone VHF channal Call Sign
24 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194

1.21 Aspect.—Flintrannan NE Light (55°36.8'N., 12°53.4'E.),

equipped with a racon, is shown from a prominent floodlit

tower, 12m high, standing at the NE side of the N entrance to

the main channel, about 1.8 miles NW of Limhamn.

1.21 Flintrannan SW Light (55°31.1'N., 12°44.7'E.), equipped

with a racon, is shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 11m

high, standing at the SW side of the S entrance to the main

channel, about 1.6 miles SE of Drogden Light.

1.21 The main dredged fairway is marked by lighted buoys and

lighted beacons, which may best be seen on the chart.

1.21 The main fairway routes under the bridge are indicated by

lighted ranges, which are equipped with racons.

1.21 Sjollen, an extensive shoal, lies centered about 2.5 miles

WNW of Malmo Vagbrytarbank Light (55°37.5'N., 12°58.6'E.)

and 1 mile NNE of the N entrance to the dredged channel. It

has depths of 2.5 to 6m and is marked by lighted buoys.

1.21 Lillgrund, a large shoal, lies centered about 1 mile ESE of

Flintrannan SW Light and is marked by buoys. This shoal has

depths of 1.7 to 5.7m and its N edge is situated adjacent to the

S side of the dredged channel (see Caution).

1.21 Pilotage.—Pilotage is provided by Malmo. Pilotage must be

requested through Malmo VTS (see paragraph 1.18).

1.21 Vessels intending to transit Flintrannan should send a request

for pilotage, along with their draft and their ETA, 5 hours in

advance. Pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 20 and 60.

1.21 Pilots board in the vicinity of Malmo Redd Lighted Buoy

(55°39'N., 12°57'E.) or about 1 mile NNE of Lighted Buoy

M41 (55°25'N., 12°40'E.). 

The Oresund Link (Flintrannan) from S

The Oresund Link—Peberholm Island

The Oresund Link—Flintrannan
Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 25

Pub. 194

1.21 Caution.—Depths in the main fairway leading through Flintrannan are subject to silting. A minimum depth of 8.4m is

maintained by continuous surveying and dredging. Vessels

with a draft close to the maximum of 7m are recommended to

proceed through the channel at reduced speed. 

1.21 An extensive wind generator farm is situated on the E part of

Lillgrund. It lies within a prohibited area, marked by buoys,

and may best be seen on the chart. A submarine cable leads

ENE from a platform in the farm to close N of Klagshamn. 

1.21 Several submarine cables, which may best be seen on the

chart, extend across Flintrannan between 1 mile and 2.5 miles

SW of the Oresund Link bridge.

1.21 Herring fishing, with drift nets, is carried out within Flintrannan. Generally, the nets are laid between dusk and midnight. Vessels are cautioned to stay in the recommended channels and tracks, especially from June to November.

1.21 A submarine gas pipeline, which may best be seen on the

chart, extends W and NW from the vicinity of Klagshamn

(55°31'N., 12°54'E.) to the SE coast of Amager. It crosses the

dredged channel about 0.5 mile NNE of Flintrannan SW Light.

1.22 Between Limhamn and Hollviken, 8 miles S, the

coast is low, but rises inland. The area near the coast is considerably built over, but there are occasional wooded patches.

1.22 Hollviken Light (55°31'N., 12°51'E.) is shown from a

prominent floodlit tower, 10m high, standing about 3.5 miles

ESE of Flintrannan SW Light.

1.22 Bredgrund (55°31'N., 12°51'E.), an extensive shoal, lies

centered about 2.6 miles SW of Hollviken Light and may best

be seen on the chart. It is marked on the W side by a lighted

buoy and on the E side by several buoys. A prominent framework beacon, 4m high, stands on the shoal, 2.3 miles SW of

Hollviken Light. This shoal has depths of less than 3m and

consists of sand, rocks, and stones.

1.22 Viragogrund, a detached shoal patch, lies off the SW side of

Bredgrund, about 4.5 miles SW of Hollviken Light. It has a

depth of 5.6m and is marked by a buoy.

1.22 Klagshamn (55°31'N., 12°54'E.) (World Port Index No.

24230), a small harbor, is situated 4 miles S of Linhamn and

protected by a two breakwaters. It is used by fishing vessels,

small craft, and yachts. A dredged entrance channel, 24m wide,

leads ENE from a position about 0.3 mile N of Hollviken

Light. It is marked by buoys and has a controlling depth of 4m.

1.22 Caution.—A submarine outfall pipeline extends about 2

miles WNW from a point on the shore close N of the harbor

and its seaward end is marked by a buoy.

1.22 The landing place for a submarine gas pipeline, which may

best be seen on the chart, is located in the S part of the harbor. 

1.23 The Skanor Peninsula (55°24'N., 12°53'E.) extends

about 5 miles W from the coast, 7 miles S of Klagshamn. Falsterbokanalen, an excavated canal, cuts through the narrow

neck of land at the E end of this peninsula. The W side of the

peninsula is low and fronted by several islets.

1.23 Knosen (55°26'N., 12°52'E.), situated 4.5 miles S of Hollviken Light, is the NW extremity of the peninsula. It is fronted

by a shoal flat, with depths of less than 2m, which extends up

to about 1 mile seaward in places. 

1.23 Skanor (55°25'N., 12°50'E.), a popular summer resort, is

situated on the W side of the peninsula, 1.5 miles SSW of

Knosen. It is fronted by a small harbor, which is protected by

two breakwaters. The entrance, which faces NE, is 50m wide

and has a controlling depth of 4m. The harbor is used by small

craft and pleasure boats.

1.23 A conspicuous white church, with a dark red roof and a low

tower, stands in Skanor and a prominent water tower is situated

1 mile S of it. Another conspicuous white church, with a high

tower, stands in Falsterbo, a resort located about 1.7 miles S of

Skanor.

1.23 Naset (55°27'N., 12°57'E.), a promontory, extends about 1.5

miles NNW from the N side of the root of the Skanor Peninsula. Kuddarna, a group of islets, lies centered about 1.2 miles

NNW of the N end of this promontory. A conspicuous beacon,

11m high, stands on the southernmost islet.

1.23 Between Klagshamn and Naset, about 4 miles SSE, the shallow coastal bank extends up to 1.2 miles offshore.

1.23 Hollviken (55°26'N., 12°55'E.), a shallow bay, lies on the N

side of the Skanor Peninsula and is entered between Knosen

and the N end of Naset. This bay provides good anchorage for

small vessels, sheltered in all but N winds, in depths of 3 to 5m,

sand and clay.

1.23 Falsterbo Udde Light (55°23'N., 12°49'E.), marking the S

end of the E side of The Sound, is shown from a prominent

round tower with a square base, 25m high, standing near the

SW extremity of the Skanor Peninsula. A conspicuous radar

mast is situated about 1.6 miles ENE of this light.

1.23 The waters lying S and E of Falsterbo Udde Light are described beginning in paragraph 4.26.

1.23 Falsterborev Light (55°19'N., 12°38'E.) is shown from a

tower standing 7 miles SW of Falsterbo Udde Light and is described in paragraph 4.26. 

The Oresund Link—Drogden
26 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194

1.23 Caution.—An unsurveyed area, which may best be seen on

the chart, lies centered 1.4 miles N of Knosen.

1.23 A nature reserve area, which may best be seen on the chart,

lies centered 0.8 miles WSW of Knosen. Vessels are prohibited

from entering this area between April and July.

1.23 Sailing races are frequently held within 2 miles of Skanor.

1.24 Falsterbo Kanal (55°24'N., 12°57'E.) is cut across

Falsterbonaset, the inner part of the Skanor Peninsula. It connects the S part of Hollviken, in The Sound, with Kampingebukten, in the W part of the Baltic Sea. This route shortens the

passage between Flintrannan and the Baltic Sea by 16 miles.

A dredged approach channel, about 6 miles long, leads SSE

from the vicinity of Hollviken Light to the N entrance of the

canal. It is marked by buoys and has a least depth of 5.6m.

 The N entrance of the canal is protected by two breakwaters,

which extend about 0.3 mile from the shore. The canal control

tower can be contacted on VHF channel 73. 

The canal can be transited by vessels up to 15,000 dwt, 20m

beam, and 4m draft.

For further details of the Falsterbo Kanal, see paragraph

4.28.

Directions.—The main traffic route leads S from the S

entrances of Drogden and Flintrannan to the vicinity of Falsterborev Light (55°19'N., 12°38'E.).

 An IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Scheme (TSS) lies near

Falsterborev Light, in the S approach to The Sound, and may

best be seen on the chart. A circular route is centered on the

light and traffic lanes extend N, S, and ESE from its vicinity.

An inshore traffic zone lies E of the main traffic lanes. 

Lighted Buoy M41 is moored about 5 miles WNW of Falsterbo Udde Light and marks the N end of the TSS.

The main route into the Baltic Sea follows the ESE traffic

lane and passes S of the entrance to Trelleborg (55°22'N.,

13°09'E.).

1.24 Caution.—Numerous wrecks, which may best be seen on

the chart, lie in the vicinity of the TSS and the S approach to

The Sound.

Kobenhavn to Mon Light

1.25 Amager (55°35'N., 12°35'E.), a flat island, lies close

S of Kobenhavn, on the Danish side of The Sound. This island

is considerably built over and Kobenhavn Airport is situated at

its E side. Kongelund, a wooded area, is located at the S end of

the island.

Sunby Sejlforenings Havn and Kastrup Strandpark are two

pleasure boat harbors situated about 0.7 mile and 2 miles, respectively, S of Provestenshavn, the oil terminal at Kobenhavn.

Kastrup Scanport Havn (55°38'N., 12°39'E.) (World Port

The Oresund Link (Flintrannan) from N

Nordre Rose Light
Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 27

Pub. 194

Index No. 29250), situated about 2.5 miles SSE of Provestenshavn, is a small privately owned harbor. The approach channel,

which is 40m wide and marked by buoys, leads WSW and is

dredged to a depth of 5m. The harbor consists of a single basin

with depths of 3 to 5m. The entrance is 40m wide and faces E.

Vessels up to 75m in length can be handled.

Two small pleasure boat harbors are situated close S of Kastrup Scanport Havn.

Nordre Rose Light (55°38'N., 12°41'E.), equipped with a

racon, is shown from a prominent tower, 17m high, situated

near the edge of the coastal bank, about 1 mile E of Kastrup

Scanport Havn. It is reported that a lattice radar mast stands on

the foundation close to the light.

Kobenhavn Airport occupies most of the coastal land extending about 2 miles S of Kastrup Scanport Havn.

1.26 Dragor Havn (55°36'N., 12°41'E.), situated 3 miles

SSE of Kastrup Scanport Havn, is a small harbor protected by

two breakwaters. It has depths of 2 to 3.5m and is used by

ferries and fishing vessels. The entrance channel has a controlling depth of 3.5m. Ferries have the right of way over all

other vessels within the entrance channel. Vessels up to 45m in

length, 10m beam, and 3m draft can be accommodated.

Dragor Ferry Harbor (55°35'N., 12°41'E.), situated close S

of Dragor Havn, has an entrance, 60m wide, facing NE. The

entrance channel has a controlling depth of 4.8m. Ferry vessels

up to 80m in length, 20m beam, and 4.5m draft can be accommodated.

A water tower and a church, both conspicuous, stand in the

town of Dragor. Dragor Fort Light is shown from a structure,

3m high, standing about 0.3 mile S of Dragor Havn.

The coastal bank fronting the SE side of Amager extends up

to about 2 miles seaward. It has depths of less than 3m and may

best be seen on the chart. Dragor Sandrev, a shoal with a depth

of 2m, lies near the outer edge of this bank, about 2 miles S of

Dragor Ferry Harbor.

1.26 Caution.—In the vicinity of Kobenhavn Airport, low flying

aircraft can cause turbulence and wind eddies over the water

surface for a distance of up to 3 miles from the airport. The

wind velocity within these eddies can form violent waterspouts

and constitute an extreme danger to small craft.

1.26 A prohibited area, which may best be seen on the chart,

fronts the shore in the vicinity of Kobenhavn Airport. Vessels

are prohibited from stopping within this area.

1.26 A restricted area, within which fishing is prohibited, lies

close W of Nordre Rose Light and may best be seen on the

chart. In addition, in order to reduce the amount of danger to

aircraft caused by seabirds massing in the vicinity, fishing is

prohibited within 150m of the coast between Nordre Rose

Light and Redningshavn, about 1.5 miles S.

1.26 A submarine pipeline, which may best be seen on the chart,

extends seaward from the SE side of Amager (see paragraph

1.25).

1.26 It is reported that mooring buoys may be situated from

January to November in the vicinity of Dragor Sandrev

(55°34'N., 12°40'E.).

1.27 Saltholm (55°39'N., 12°46'E.) lies with its N extremity located 3.5 miles NE of Nordre Rose Light. This island is

low, flat, and devoid of woods. It has no conspicuous landmarks except for a few isolated houses. The island is surrounded by an extensive sandy bank, which nearly dries within

about 0.5 mile of the shore. Numerous islets and above-water

rocks lie on this bank and may best be seen on the chart.

1.27 Saltholm Flak (55°41'N., 12°45'E.), an extensive flat with

depths of less than 5m, extends about 3 miles N from the N end

of Saltholm and may best be seen on the chart. 

1.27 Flakfort (55°42'N., 12°44'E.), previously described in paragraph 1.14, lies on the NW part of Saltholm Flak.

1.27 Peberholm (55°36'N., 12°45'E.), an artificial island, lies 0.5

mile SW of the SW side of Saltholm. This island is part of the

Oresund Link (see paragraph 1.20). It forms the E end of the

tunnel passing under Drogden and the W end of the bridge

spanning Flintrannan.

1.27 Drogden Light (55°32'N., 12°43'E.), equipped with a racon,

is shown from a prominent square tower, 20m high, standing

about 3.4 miles SSE of Dragor Havn and 0.8 mile S of the S

end of Drogden.

1.27 Caution.—A protected area, within which navigation is prohibited, surrounds Saltholm and may best be seen on the chart.

The outer limits of this area almost coincide with the 5m depth

contour.

1.27 Several nature reserve areas lie off the S end of Saltholm and

may best be seen on the chart. Entry into these restricted areas

is subject to numerous regulations.

Falsterbo Udde Light

Drogden Light
28 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194

1.27 A danger area, which may best be seen on the chart, lies

centered about 0.5 mile W of the N end of Peberholm. Anchoring, fishing, or underwater activities should be avoided in this

area due to the possible existence of bottom mines.

1.27 A local magnetic anomaly exists in the vicinity of a position

about 1.5 miles SW of Drogden Light.

1.28 Drogden (55°36'N., 12°42'E.), the fairway extending

S from the S end of Hollaenderdybet (see paragraph 1.14) lies

between the coastal banks fronting Amager and Saltholm. The

S part of the channel, lying S of Dragor Fort Light, is known as

Dragor Bro (Taerskelen).

1.28 Tides—Currents.—Because the current in the S part of

Drogden does not follow the direction of the dredged channel,

vessels should exercise great care to prevent being set onto the

channel buoys or Drogden Light (55°32'N., 12°43'E.). The

current flowing S, the greater part of which comes through

Flintrannan, sets in a WSW direction. The current flowing N,

which is deflected by the bank fronting the SE side of Amager,

sets in a NE direction. The construction of the Oresund Link

may have affected the direction and strength of these currents.

1.28 Depths—Limitations.—The fairway through Drogden is

dredged to a depth of 8m. Vessels up to 7.7m draft can transit

this passage.

1.28 Aspect.—The fairway within Hollaenderdybet is indicated

by a directional sector of Nordre Rose Light. The dredged

channel in Drogden is marked by lighted buoys.

1.28 Pilotage.—Pilots are provided by Kobenhavn. Pilots may be

contacted by VHF and board about 1.5 miles N of Middelgrunds Fort or 1.3 miles S of Drogden Light.

1.28 For further information, see Pilotage in paragraph 1.1.

1.28 Regulations.—Vessels with drafts exceeding the officially

announced limitations may not pass through the channel.

1.28 Vessels using the channel must proceed at moderate speed.

1.28 Vessels are prohibited from anchoring in the dredged channel or within 50m of either side of it. 

1.28 Vessels which, on account of their size, are obliged to keep

in the deeper part of the channel may display the appropriate

signal or lights for a constrained vessel. Such vessels may also

make a sound signal consisting of one long blast followed by

two short blasts. Other vessels must give way to those vessels

displaying the above signal or lights.

1.28 All vessels with an air draft of more than 35m, including

towed vessels, must report to the control tower of Kobenhavn

Airport, via Lyngby Radio, 30 minutes before passing through

Drogden dredged channel. The passage of such vessels may

endanger low flying aircraft in the vicinity. The transmission of

the report is free of charge (collect call). The message should

include the following information:

1. Vessel’s name.

2. Call sign.

3. Course.

4. Expected time (GMT) of passing Norde Rose Light

(55°38'N., 12°41'E.).

5. Expected time (GMT) of passing No. 9 Lighted Buoy

(55°36'N., 12°42'E.).

6. Maximum air draft of vessel or floating equipment.

1.28 Caution.—Numerous ferries, including high speed craft,

may be encountered in the vicinity of Drogden.

1.28 Several submarine cables, which may best be seen on the

chart, extend across Drogden from the vicinity of Dragor

Havn.

1.29 Koge Bugt (55°30'N., 12°26'E.) is entered between

Aflandshage, the S extremity of Amager and Koge Sonakke, a

low point located about 12 miles SW. Koge stands at the head

of this large bay and the area N of this town is devoid of woods.

The coasts of Amager and Sjaelland bordering the bay are

generally low.

A number of small harbors are situated along the shore of

Koge Bugt and are used by fishing boats and pleasure craft.

Mosede Klint, a low, yellow cliff, stands about 10.5 miles W

of Aflandshage and some comparatively high land backs the

coast about midway between Koge and Koge Sonakke.

Wooded areas are situated 3 miles SSE and 7 miles SE of

Koge.

1.29 Caution.—Fishing nets are laid in Koge Bugt, particularly

in the N part, and may extend up to 4 miles offshore. Net

fishing on the bottom is strictly regulated and may only take

place in designated areas, which are marked by buoys. 

1.29 A danger area, which may best be seen on the chart, lies centered about 3 miles SSW of Aflandshage. Anchoring, fishing,

or underwater activities should be avoided in this area due to

the possible existence of bottom mines.

1.29 A restricted area, which may best be seen on the chart, lies in

the vicinity of a wreck, about 4.8 miles SW of Aflandshage.

Anchoring, fishing, and underwater activities are prohibited

within this area.

1.30 Avedorevaerkets Havn (55°36'N., 12°29'E.), a small

privately-owned harbor, is situated in the N part of Koge Bugt,

close W of the S entrance to Kalvebodlobet, the channel leading NE into the S part of Kobenhavn.

1.30 Depths—Limitations.—A dredged approach channel, 55m

wide, leads NNW to the harbor and has a controlling depth of

7.3m. The harbor consists of a small basin and a main quay. It

is protected by a curving breakwater on the W side and a detached breakwater on the E side. The quay provides a berth,

280m long, with a depth of 7.5m alongside. The harbor has

facilities for handling oil and coal. Vessels up to 123m in

length, 21m beam, and 6.5m draft can be accommodated. 

1.30 Aspect.—The approach channel is marked by buoys and

indicated by directional sector lights. A conspicuous chimney,

149m high, stands near a silo on the W side of the harbor.

1.30 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots are provided by

Kobenhavn. For further information, see paragraph 1.1.

1.30 Regulations.—Permission to enter the approach channel is

required.

1.30 Caution.—A submarine cable, which may best be seen on

the chart, extends S from a point on the shore located about 1.5

miles W of the harbor.

1.31 Avedore Rastofhavn (55°37'N., 12°30'E.), situated

0.9 mile NE of Avedorevaekets Havn, is a small privatelyowned harbor, which can accommodate vessels up to 100m in

length, 12m beam, and 4m draft. 

Koge (55°27'N., 12°12'E.) (World Port Index No. 29220) is

situated at the mouth of the Koge River, about 13 miles SW of

Avedorevaekets Havn. The port consists of an outer harbor and

two main basins, which are protected by two long breakwaters.
Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 29

Pub. 194

1.31 Ice.—The port is seldom closed by ice. 

1.31 Tides—Currents.—Winds from NE to SE can raise the

water level by up to 1.6m and winds from W can lower it by as

much as 0.9m.

1.31 Depths—Limitations.—The entrance between the breakwater heads is 60m wide. The harbor provides about 3,000m of

main quayage with depths of 4 to 7m alongside. There are

facilities for general cargo, bulk, timber, ro-ro, tanker, and LPG

vessels. Vessels up to 160m in length, 24m beam, and 6.7m

draft can be accommodated. 

1.31 Aspect.—The entrance channel is indicated by a directional

sector light. A prominent church stands in the town.

1.31 Valloby Church, with a red tower, is situated about 3.5 miles

SSE of the harbor and is conspicuous.

1.31 Vallo Castle, prominent from seaward, has a tall spire and

stands 0.8 mile W of Valloby Church.

1.31 Pilotage.—Pilots are provided by Kobenhavn. Pilotage is

compulsory for all tankers and all other vessels over 450 grt or

1,000 dwt. Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board vessels

from the N about 1 mile S of Drogden Light and vessels from

the S about 9 miles SW of Drogden Light (Koge W). Pilots

also board vessels about 7 miles SW of Drogden Light (Koge

E).

1.31 Vessels must report to the port 1 hour prior to arrival and

announce their presence on VHF channel 16 to other vessels 30

minutes before arrival.

1.31 For further information, see Pilotage in paragraph 1.1.

1.31 Anchorage.—Anchorage, with good holding ground, is

available 1 to 2 miles E of the harbor.

1.31 Caution.—A submarine outfall pipeline, which may best be

seen on the chart, extends about 2.7 miles ESE and ENE from a

point on the shore located 0.5 mile N of the harbor.

1.32 From Koge Sonakke (55°24'N., 12°22'E.), the S entrance point of Koge Bugt, to Stevns Light, at the W side of the

S limit of The Sound, the coast trends first in a general SE

direction for about 5 miles to Mandehoved and then S for about

2.5 miles.

1.32 Precpitous chalk cliffs commence about midway between

Koge Sonakke and Mandehoved and extend along the coast as

far as Rodvig, 3.5 miles SW of Stevns Light. This cliffy stretch

of coast, which is named Stevns Klint, attains a height of 41m

about 1 mile NNW of the light. Kustirenden, a deep cleft, is

situated about 1.2 miles NNW of Mandehoved and is conspicuous from seaward.

Stevns Light (Stevns Klint Light) (55°17'N., 12°27'E.) is

shown from a prominent tower, 26m high.

Stevns Pier (55°19'N., 12°28'E.), situated 2 miles N of

Stevns Light, is a privately-owned terminal used by vessels

loading chalk. The pier extends about 500m from shore and

has a head, 205m long, with a depth of 8m alongside. Vessels

up to 150m in length and 7.5m draft can be accommodated

during calm weather.

Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 5,000 dwt. Pilots

may be contacted by VHF and board about 1.2 miles S or 9

miles SW of Drogden Light. For further information, see Pilotage in paragraph 1.1.

Vessels should send an ETA via their agent 24 hours and 12

hours in advance. They should then contact the terminal on

VHF channel 16 at least 2 hours before arrival.

1.33 Fakse Bugt (55°08'N., 12°19'E.) is entered between

Stevns Light and Hellehavns Nakke, the NE extremity of Mon,

about 17 miles S. The W part of this bay is mostly occupied by

an extensive flat, with depths of less than 5m, which may best

Koge

Koge—Valloby Church

Koge—Vallo Castle

Stevns Light
30 Sector 1. Denmark and Sweden—The Sound 

Pub. 194

be seen on the chart. Between Stevns Light and Rodvig, 3.5

miles SW, the steep chalk cliffs of Stevns Klint decrease in

height. From Rodvig to Fakse Havn, 7.5 miles WSW, the coast

is low.

The old and new churches standing at Hojerup, about 0.7

mile SSW of Stevns Light, are conspicuous from seaward.

Rodvig (55°15'N., 12°23'E.), a small harbor, is protected by

two moles extending from the shore. It has an entrance, 70m

wide, which faces SW and has a controlling depth of 3.7m. The

harbor is used by fishing vessels and yachts. Vessels up to 50m

in length, 10m beam, and 3.1m draft can accommodated.

1.34 Fakse Ladeplads Havn (55°13'N., 12°10'E.) (World

Port Index No. 29180), situated in the NW part of the bay, is a

small commercial harbor used for the export of limestone.

A dredged channel, about 0.5 mile long, leads NNW to the

harbor. It has a bottom width of 25m and a controlling depth of

4.2m. The harbor is also used by fishing vessels and yachts.

Vessels up to 100m in length, 20m beam, and 4.1m draft can be

accommodated. Both the entrance channel and the harbor basin

are subject to silting. A conspicuous silo stands at the E side of

the harbor. 

1.34 Anchorage can be obtained, in a depth of 5m, blue clay and

sand, about 0.3 mile from the harbor and W of the entrance

channel.

Bogestrom (55°04'N., 12°10'E.), a passage leading SW and

S into the W side of Stege Bugt (see paragraph 2.56), lies in the

SW part of Fakse Bugt. The channel, which connects with the

N end of Ulvsund, leads between the NW end of Mon and the

mainland coast of Sjaelland. It has a controlling depth of 2.3m

and is used only by small craft and pleasure boats.

1.34 Caution.—Bottom fishing nets are placed within 1.5 miles of

the shore between Hojstrup Pynt, close SW of Rodvig, and Fakse

Ladeplads Havn. 

1.35 Hellehavn Nakke Light (55°00'N., 12°31'E.) is

shown from a prominent tower, 6m high, standing on the NE

extremity of Mon.

The N coast of Mon is generally low. The E part of Mon

rises gradually toward the E coast, which consists mainly of

steep chalk cliffs topped by wooded land. This cliffy stretch,

known as Mons Klint, commences about 0.7 mile SSE of

Hellehavn Nakke Light and ends at the SE extremity of the island. The cliffs attain their greatest elevation about 2.5 miles

SSE of the light.

Mon Light (54°57'N., 12°33'E.) is shown from a prominent

tower, 13m high, standing on the SE extremity of Mon.

A conspicuous church is situated at Magleby, 3 miles NW of

Mon Light Mon Light. 
31

Pub. 194

2. 

Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet

2.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 2 — CHART INFORMATION
33

Pub. 194

SECTOR 2 

DENMARK—STORE BAELT AND SMALANDSFARVANDET

2.0 Plan.—This sector begins with a description of the N part of

the Store Baelt lying between Rosnaes (55°45'N., 10°52'E.)

and Sprogo (55°20'N., 10°58'E.). The dangers lying in the triangle formed by the SE extremity of Samso (55°46'N.,

10°37'E.), Rosnaes, and Fyn Hoved (55°37'N., 10°35'E.) are

described first. The central part of the Store Baelt is then described; continuing S to Omo (55°10'N., 11°10'E.) on the E

side and to Hov (55°10'N., 10°56'E.) and Stokkebaek Flak

(55°10'N., 10°50'E.) on the W side.

2.0 The sector concludes with a description of the S end of the

Store Baelt. First the W section, which includes the passage

lying between Fyn and Langeland as far as Rudkoping

(54°56'N., 10°43'E.), and then the E section, which includes

Smalandsfarvandet and the passage lying between Langeland

and Lolland. 

General Remarks

2.1 Store Baelt (55°30'N., 10°55'E.), which is also

known as the Great Belt, is the center of the three passages

connecting the Kattegat to the Baltic Sea. It is the widest and

deepest of the three passages and, therefore, the most suitable

for deep-draft vessels.

The channel passes between Sjaelland and Lolland, on the E

side, and Fyn and Langeland, on the W side. It is bounded at

the N end by a line joining Rosnaes (55°45'N., 10°52'E.) and

Fyns Hoved (55°37'N., 10°35'E.) and at the S end by a line

joining Kappel Church (54°46'N., 11°02'E.), on Lolland, and

the S extremity of Langeland (54°44'N., 10°42'E.).

Sprogo, an island, lies 25 miles S of Rosnaes and divides

Store Baelt into two passages, Osterrendenon the E side and

Vesterrenden on the W.

2.1 Store Baelt Link (55°19'N., 11°00'E.) is a major tunnel/

bridge connecting Sjaelland with Fyn via Sprogo. The W

section spanning Vesterrenden is formed by a low-level bridge

while the E section spanning Osterrenden is formed by a high

suspension bridge (see paragraph 2.12).

2.1 The W part of the S section of Store Baelt lies between Fyn

and Langeland. Channels leading to Svendborg and Rudkobing

extend from the S end of this part.

Smalandsfarvandet is the inlet lying between Sjaelland, on

its N side, and Lolland and Falster, on the S side. It connects

Store Baelt with the Baltic Sea via Gronsund, Guldborg, and

Bogestrom.

2.1 Langelands Baelt is the E part of the S section of Store Baelt.

It lies between the E side of Langeland and the W side of

Lolland. 

2.1 The bottom characteristic in the Store Baelt is mainly clay,

which is covered in some places by a thin layer of rather fine

sand or occasionally gravel. This layer usually increases in

depth as the shore is approached. On many of the shoals, there

is a considerable amount of rock imbedded in the clay. 

2.1 Close to shore there is frequently a belt of clean white sand

with grass. The amount of grass increases farther offshore and

is gradually replaced by weed. The holding ground is good in

nearly all parts of Store Baelt, but the nature of the bottom does

not afford much information for determining position by the

use of soundings. 

2.1 Ice.—The formation of ice in Store Baelt frequently follows

the freezing over of Smalandsfarvandet. Ice in the passages

lying E and W of Sprogo is nearly always still. The ice in

Nyborg Fjord and in the passage between Langeland and Fyn

remains longer than that in other parts of Store Baelt. When the

ice in the W part of the Baltic Sea breaks up, large masses of it

often drift N through Store Baelt.

2.1 Mariners should pay particular attention to the refraction and

deflection of light sector projections caused by ice during the cold

season. Where an angle of uncertainty exists, a frequent check

must be made to determine whether the vessel is keeping on the

desired course by the use of additional aids to navigation.

2.1 Icebreaking services in the region are provided under a

cooperative agreement between Sweden, Denmark, Finland,

and Norway, with the purpose of having identical regulations.

Requests for assistance should be made direct to the icebreaker, if close, or to the State Ice Service through any coastal

radio station.

2.1 Ice information reports and icebreaker service for the Baltic

coast of Denmark are made available on request from the State

Ice Service or from any icebreaker. The Danish icebreakers and

their call letters are Danbjom (OUDN), Isbjom (OUDO), and

Thorbjom (OUDP). These icebreakers can be contacted on

2,182 kHz, on VHF channel 16, or through Lyngby CRS.

2.1 The Danish State Ice Service may be contacted by e-mail, as

follows: 

2.1 The Swedish State Ice Service can be contacted as follows:

2.1 For additional information on icebreaker services, regulations, and related subjects, see Pub. 140, Sailing Directions

(Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent Seas.

2.1 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in Store Baelt is negligible. However, fluctuations in sea level result from changes in

wind force and direction.

2.1 Because of the variable nature of the currents in Store Baelt,

it is impossible to predict with certainty the direction in which

they will set. A S current is prevalent only when the wind is

between W and NNE. Winds from NW nearly always cause a

strong S current. A N flowing current is caused by winds from

between NNE, through E and S, and WSW.

2.1 Although the N current predominates, it seldom occupies the

whole width of Store Baelt. At times, the current flows N on

one side and S on the other side. At other times, there is a N

opsstaff@sok.dk

opc@sjofartsverket.se

http://www.sjofartsverket.se/en/
34 Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 

Pub. 194

current on each side of the passage and a S current of varying

width between them. The adjacent edges of these opposing

currents are indicated by rips, and are frequently marked by

foam and seaweed; they are not constant, but depend on the

velocities of the currents, the difference in water level on the

opposite shores, and other factors. 

2.1 The direction of the current is determined to a considerable

extent by local conditions, but it is not constant at any given

place. The current, either flowing N or S, sets in a different

direction after it has been running for some time, even though

conditions appear unchanged. After running for about 12

hours, the main current usually follows the direction of Dybe

Rende, the deep channel.

2.1 Irregularities of the bottom and other local conditions may

deflect the current in places, and undercurrents are also causes

of diversion. An example of local conditions is the tidal current, which sets through the harbor entrance at Korsor. This action deflects the main current in Store Baelt well outside the

harbor and beyond Halsskov Rev. 

2.1 The larger irregularities of the bottom in Store Baelt are usually indicated by overfalls, which frequently appear on the side

of a shoal opposite to that toward which the current is setting.

These overfalls, which should not be confused with the previously-mentioned rips, sometimes give warning of underwater dangers, but they may also occur in the deeper parts of

the fairway as, for instance, in places where the depths decrease abruptly from about 29 to 14m.

2.1 The velocity of the current depends on the width and depth

of the fairway; it is also affected to some extent by the tidal

currents. In the narrower and deeper parts of the fairway, the

velocity increases, and it is greatest in Dybe Rende. A danger

to be guarded against is the possible increase in the velocity

near detached shoals and reefs, over which the direction of the

current may vary according to the formation of the bottom.

Even in calm weather and under apparently settled conditions,

the rate of the current in Store Baelt may be as much as 3

knots.

2.1 The S current is the stronger in Vesterrenden and the N current is the stronger in Osterrenden. In places where the coastal

banks are steep-to, both currents produce countercurrents

which can be utilized by vessels having local knowledge. The

strongest countercurrents are along the coast of Fyn between

Kerteminde Bugt and Knudshoved, and, especially with a

north-flowing current, along the coast of Langeland between

Tranekaer and Gulstav. The E side of the latter countercurrent

is frequently marked by strong rips. Along the W coast of

Lolland there is a fairly strong countercurrent that extends

offshore to a depth of about 7m.

2.1 From the N entrance of Store Baelt, the S flowing current

follows the direction of the fairway SSE and passes on both

sides of Elefantgrund. The greater part of the W branch passes

between Elefantgrund and Romso, and then sets S toward Vesterrenden, where it is divided by Sprogo, one part setting S on

the W side of Osterrenden and the other setting through Vesterrenden. Another part of the current W of Elefantgrund sets

through the passage between Romso and Fyn, across Kerteminde Bugt outside a depth of about 16m, and then follows

the Fyn coast outside the 10m curve to Knudshoved; only a

small portion of this part of the current sets along the shores of

Kerteminde Bugt. 

2.1 After the current from the N entrance of Store Baelt bifurcates at Elefantgrund, the E branch passes between that shoal

and Lysegrund and then sets S to Osterrenden, passing close W

of Musholm and then toward the NW side of Halsskov, off

which it turns SW and rounds Halsskov Rev.

2.1 The current W of Sprogo keeps mainly to the W side of

Vesterrenden and sets from Knudshoved toward Vresen Puller,

where it divides. A weak branch passes between Vresen and

Fyn and extends as far S as Thuro; with strong W winds a

portion of this current sets E through Kobberdyb. Strong NE

and E winds cause large quantities of the water passing through

Vesterrenden to be forced into the passage between Fyn and

Langeland. The main part of the current through Vesterrenden

passes E of Vresen Puller and sets across Broen, where it is

influenced to a considerable extent by the wind. Strong W

winds force the water from Vesterrenden so far E that the

current crosses the entire width of Broen to the W side of

Vengeancegrund, from which it sets toward the flats bordering

the W side of Omo and then continues S. 

2.1 A branch of the current which sets around Halsskov Rev

passes through Agerso Sund; the remainder of this current sets

along the W sides of Agerso and Omo. The current from Osterrenden sets through the narrow channel between Vengeancegrund and Agerso Flak, and then passes the flats extending

from the W side of Omo. With strong NE and E winds, this

current passes some distance W of Omo. 

2.1 To the S of Broen, the combined current follows the general

direction of the fairway, attaining its greatest velocity in Dybe

Rende. The comparatively shallower portions of the bottom in

Dybe Rende cause the current to divide as it sets across them. 

2.1 In general, the N current through Store Baelt, like the S

current, follows the direction of the fairway. It sets toward

Naebberevler, on the E side of Langeland, with considerable

strength. It crosses Broen in a N direction, its W portion passing close to Hov Sand, E of Vresen, and through Vesterrenden.

The current across the central part of Broen sets directly

toward Sprogo, but S of that island it is divided by Gaellegrund

into two branches which pass respectively E and W of Sprogo.

As the N current passes across Broen its direction is affected

by strong winds in the same manner as the direction of the S

current. 

2.1 Between Fyn and Langeland there is a weak N current which

passes W of Vresen and continues N to a junction with the

current setting through Vesterrenden off Knudshoved. The E

portion of the N current crosses the flats W of Omo and passes

through the channel between Agerso Flak and Vengeancegrund. North of Egholm it is joined by the current from Agerso

Sund, and the combined current, together with the E branch of

the current which divides at Gaellegrund, then sets through

Osterrenden. After setting through the passages on either side

of Sprogo, the current continues N, passing on both sides of

Elefantgrund. Like the S current, the N current is not strong in

Kerteminde Bugt. 

Depths—Limitations.—Depths in the Store Baelt are very

irregular. Dybe Rende, the winding deep-water channel, has

depths in excess of 27m, except in a few places, and extends

through the entire length of the passage. In clear weather, vessels can transit Store Baelt in a least depth of 12.8m without

following all the meandering of Dybe Rende.

The controlling depth in the passage through Store Baelt for
Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 35

Pub. 194

Route T is 19m, except for the northbound lane through

Osterrenden, where the maximum depth is 17m.

The controlling depth in the passage for Route H is 12m.

This route is mandatory for vessels, with drafts of 10m or less.

2.1 Pilotage.—Pilots for the Store Baelt and ports in this region

are provided by the DanPilot (Great Belt), Spodsbjerg station

(54°56'N., 10°50'E.). For further information, see Pilotage in

paragraph 1.1.

2.1 Pilots for the Store Baelt can be contacted by VHF and board

vessels proceeding N, as follows:

1. In Route T—at position 54°46.0'N, 10°49.0'E.

2. In Route H—at position 54°47.5'N, 10°52.5'E.

2.1 Pilots board vessels proceeding S in Route T at position

55°23.5'N, 11°00.0'E. They may be contacted by VHF (call

sign “Sprogo NE”).

2.1 The DanPilot (Great Belt), Spodsberg station may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

2.1 An IMO Resolution recommends that vessels with a draft of

11m or more and all vessels, irrespective of size, carry-ing a

shipment of radiated nuclear fuel, plutonium, or highly

radioactive waste use the services of a pilot when transiting

Route T.

2.1 Regulations.—BELTREP, a mandatory ship reporting system, is operated by Great Belt VTS in the N and central parts

of Store Baelt (call sign: Great Belt VTS).

2.1 The N limit of the VTS area is bounded by a line joining the

following positions:

1. 56°00.0'N, 11°17.0'E (Sjaellands Odde). 

2. 56°00.0'N, 10°56.0'E (near Marthe Flak).

3. 55°47.0'N, 10°38.0'E (Samso).

4. 55°36.0'N, 10°38.0'E (Fyn).

2.1 This ship reporting system must be used by all vessels of 50

grt and over and all vessels with an air draft of 15m and over.

For further information concerning BELTREP, see paragraph

2.12 (Store Baelt Link).

2.1 Large vessels bound for the Baltic Sea should transit Route

T, which leads from Lighted Buoy No. 1 (57°48'N., 10°44'E.),

off Skagens, through Store Baelt to the S end of Langelands

Baelt.

2.1 Sections of Route T within Samso Baelt, Store Baelt, and

NE of Gedser Rev have been designated as Deep Water Routes.

These sections must be avoided by vessels capable, because of

their draft, of navigating outside the route.

2.1 Route H, which is situated at the E side of Langelands Baelt,

must be used by vessels, with drafts of 10m or less.

2.1 For further information concerning IMO recommendations

for navigating through the entrances to the Baltic Sea, see paragraph 1.1. 

2.1 Directions.—For details of designated routes in the Kattegat, see Pub. 193, Sailing Directions (Enroute) Skagerrak and

Kattegat (Sector 7). Route T, which may best be seen on the

chart, leads S into Store Baelt.

2.1 Route T—Route T leads S for 4.5 miles from Lighted Buoy

No. 20 (55°49'N., 10°49'E.) and enters the Store Baelt. It

passes between Lighted Buoy No. 21 and Lighted Buoy No.

22, which are moored about 2.5 miles WNW of Rosnaes Puller

Light (55°45'N., 10°51'E.). The route then continues SSW for

6 miles to Lighted Buoy No. 23 (55°39'N., 10°47'E.).

2.1 From Lighted Buoy No. 23, the route leads SSE for 9 miles

to Lighted Buoy No. 25 (55°31'N., 10°52'E.), passing 0.5 mile

ENE of Romso Tue Light No. 24 (55°34'N., 10°49'E.), which

is equipped with a racon.

2.1 From Lighted Buoy No. 25, Route T continues SE for 10

miles to the N entrance of Osterrenden.

2.1 An IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Scheme (TSS), which

may best be seen on the chart, extends S for 3.5 miles though

Osterrenden. The TSS traffic lanes, which are about 475m

wide, pass under the suspension bridge that forms the E section

of the Store Baelt Link (see paragraph 2.12).

2.1 From Lighted Buoy No. 28A, moored at the S entrance of

the Osterrenden TSS, Route T leads SSE for 5.5 miles and

passes between Lighted Buoy No. 32 (55°14'N., 11°07'E.) and

Vengeancegrund No. 31 Light, about 0.7 mile W. This section

of the track passes close WSW of Egholm Flag No. 30 Light

(55°15'N., 11°06'E.). 

2.1 From the vicinity of Lighted Buoy No. 32, the route leads S

for about 1.5 miles to pass between Lighted Buoy No. 33 and

Agerso Flak No. 34 Light (55°12'N., 11°07'E.), which is

equipped with a racon.

2.1 The track then divides with Route T leading SW and Route

H leading SSW. Route T extends SW for 2.5 miles and then

follows a designated Deep Water Route.

2.1 Deep Water Route.—The Deep Water Route, which is

about 33 miles long, leads in a SSW direction through Langelands Baelt and may best be seen on the chart. It lies from 1 to

3 miles off the E coast of Langeland and is marked by lighted

buoys, lights, and racons. The fairway varies in width from 0.2

to 0.8 mile and is swept to a least depth of 19m.

2.1 This Deep Water Route must be avoided by vessels capable

of navigating outside it. However, mariners are to consider the

possibility of changes in sea level caused by meteorological

and other effects.

2.1 DW Lighted Buoy No. 61 (54°40'N., 10°45'E.) and DW

Lighted Buoy No. 58, moored 1.5 miles NE, mark the S entrance of the Deep Water Route. From this entrance, Route T

continues SE into Fehmarn Belt (see paragraph 4.1). 

2.1 Route H.—Route H leads through Langelands Baelt on a

track lying almost parallel to and on the E side of the Deep

Water Route. It is marked by lighted buoys and may best be

seen on the chart. This route has a minimum depth of 12m and

must be used by vessels with a draft of 10m or less.

2.1 Northbound traffic passes to the E of the mid-channel aids;

southbound traffic passes to the W of them.

2.1 Lighted Buoy No. 7 (54°42.0'N., 10°52.5'E.), moored 5.8

miles ESE of Keldsnor Light (54°44'N., 10°43'E.), marks the S

limit of Route H within the Store Baelt. From Lighted Buoy

No. 7, Route H continues SE into Fehmarn Belt (see paragraph

4.1).

Store Baelt—North Part

2.2 The N part of Store Baelt is the area lying between the

N entrance and Sprogo. Kalundborg Fjord, Jammerland Bugt,

and Musholm Bugt lie on the E side and Kerteminde Bugt lies

on the W side. The isolated dangers lying in the triangle formed

by the SE extremity of Samso, Rosnaes, and Fyn Hoved are also

belt@pilotage.dk
36 Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 

Pub. 194

described. Depths within this triangle are very irregular. 

2.2 General depths within the Store Baelt as far as Osterrenden

and Vesterrenden range from 18 to 60m.

Rosnaes (55°45'N., 10°52'E.), the W extremity of Sjaelland,

is the NE entrance point of the Store Baelt. This peninsula rises

to barren hills, 60m high, and terminates in a narrow point

Route T and Route H
Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 37

Pub. 194

faced with cliffs, l0m high. Rosnaes Rev, a shallow reef, fronts

the point and extends up to about 0.5 mile seaward. For landmarks in the vicinity of Rosnaes, see paragraph 2.4. 

2.2 Rosnaes Light (55°45'N., 10°52'E.), now disused, is a prominent tower, 15m high, standing at the W extremity of Rosnaes. 

 A small fishing harbor is situated on the N shore of the

peninsula, 2.5 miles E of the light. The entrance, 16m wide,

faces SE and has a controlling depth of 2.8m.

A detached shoal patch, with a depth of 11.2m, lies about 1.8

miles SSW of Rosnaes Light and is marked by a lighted buoy.

2.2 Rosnaes Puller (55°45'N., 10°51'E.), a reef with large rocks,

lies about 1.3 miles W of Rosnaes. A narrow channel, with a

depth of 6.4m, leads between the inner side of this reef and the

W extremity of Rosnaes Rev. 

2.2 Rosnaes Puller Light (55°45'N., 10°51'E.) is shown from a

prominent mast on a granite base, 9m high, standing on the

NW part of the reef.

2.2 Lushage Light (55°46'N., 10°37'E.) is shown from a mast,

7m high, standing on the SE extremity of Samso.

2.3 Falkse Bolsaks (55°43'N., 10°43'E.), a rocky shoal,

lies centered 4.2 miles SE of Lushage Light and about 4.5

miles WSW of Rosnaes Puller Light. It has a least depth of

3.5m and is marked by a buoy.

2.3 Bolsaks, a rocky shoal with a least depth of 1.3m, lies about

1.7 miles SW of Falkse Bolsaks is marked by a buoy. 

2.3 Paludans Flak (55°44'N., 10°35'E.), a large shoal area with

a least depth of 4.1m, lies about 2.7 miles SW of Lushage

Light and is marked at the N side by a lighted buoy.

2.3 Fyns Hoved (55°37'N., 10°35'E.), a small peninsula located

at the N end of Hindsholm, forms the NW entrance point of the

Store Baelt. Baesbanke, 24m high, is a prominent hill standing

on the W side of this peninsula. 

2.3 Lillegrund (55°39'N., 10°38'E.), a shoal with a least depth

of 1.2m, lies near the end of the rocky spit extending about 2.7

miles NNE from Fyns Hoved and is marked by a lighted buoy.

A detached shoal patch, with a depth of 5.6m, lies about 1.5

miles N of Lillegrund and is marked by a buoy.

2.3 Ryggen (55°37'N., 10°45'E.), a detached rocky shoal with a

depth of 5.9m, lies about 5 miles E of Fyns Hoved. 

2.3 Directions.—Routes connecting the Store Baelt to the Lille

Baelt lie between Fyns Hoved and the S side of Samso. A

narrow passage leads WNW between Paludans Flak and the

coastal bank fronting the S side of Samso. Vessels leaving

Route T can approach this passage from NW of Rosnaes Puller

Light. They may also approach it from SSW of the light by

passing between Falkse Bolsaks and Bolsaks.

2.3 A new Deep Water Route leads W and SW between the N

side of Lillegrund and the detached shoal, with a depth of

5.6m, lying about 1.5 miles N. From a position located 4 miles

SSW of Rosnaes Puller Light, vessels may leave Route T and

proceed WSW for about 5 miles to the E entrance of the channel. The fairway is marked by buoys and has a least depth of

15.7m.

2.3 Caution.—Between Rosnaes and Asnaes, 5 miles SE, the

prevailing N current sets almost directly across the passage

toward the shoals of Falkse Bolsaks and Bolsaks.

2.3 A submarine cable area, which may best be seen on the

chart, extends WNW from the W extremity of Rosnaes to

Samso.

2.3 The inshore traffic zone of an IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Scheme (TSS) is situated N of the Rosnaes Peninsula. For

further information concerning this TSS, see Pub. 193, Sailing

Directions (Enroute) Skagerrak and Kattegat (Sector 7).

Store Baelt—North Part—East Side

2.4 Kalundborg Fjord (55°41'N., 11°00'E.) is entered between Rosnaes and Asnaes, about 5 miles SE. This fjord

extends about 7.5 miles ESE from its entrance and gradually

narrows. There are general depths of 11 to 17m in the fjord but

it shoals rapidly near the head. The S shore of the fjord is lower

than that on the N side and is partly wooded. The N shore is

hilly and devoid of woods.

Asnaes Nordvest Flak, a shallow and rocky shoal area,

extends up to about 1 mile N of Asnaes and its seaward edge is

marked by a buoy.

2.4 A prominent white church, with a red roof, is situated at

Ulstrup, about 3 miles ESE of Rosnaes (disused) Light, and a

conspic-uous windmill stands close NW of it.

2.4 Another prominent white church, with a red roof, is situated

on high ground at Rorby, about 0.8 mile inland and 7 miles

ESE of Rosnaes (disused) Light.

2.4 An aeronautical light is shown from a conspicuous television

mast, 321m high, standing at Jyderup (55°41.1'N., 11°27.8'E.),

about 20.5 miles ESE of Rosnaes (disused) Light. 

Rosnaes Light (Disued)

Rosnaes Puller Light
38 Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 

Pub. 194

2.4 Regulations.—Tanker lightening operations must be carried

out within an area, with a radius of 0.3 mile, centered on position 55°42.0'N, 10°59.8'E. During these lightening operations,

the tankers must display the appropriate signals provided in the

72 COLREGS and other vessels must pass at slow speed.

2.4 Special regulations, limiting speed and wave heights, apply

in the E part of the fjord to high-speed ferries carrying vehicles.

2.4 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor mostly anywhere within

the fjord in good holding ground. Winds from W to NW cause

a swell in the fjord, but vessels should still remain safe.

2.4 Directions.—To enter the fjord in the deepest water, vessels

may pass, in a least depth of 15m, between the bank extending

S from Rosnaes (disused) Light and the lighted buoy marking

the shoal patch, with a depth of 11.2m, moored about 1.5 miles

SSW. 

2.4 An alternative track, marked by lighted buoys, leads about 5

miles ESE, in a least depth of 13m, from a position located 2.5

miles NNW of Asnaes Light (55°40'N., 10°56'E.).

Kalundborg (55°41'N., 11°06'E.)

World Port Index No. 29490

2.5 Kalundborg harbor fronts the city and is situated on

the N side of the head of the fjord. It is protected on the W side

by Gisselore Pynt, a low tongue of land extending SE from the

N shore of the fjord.

2.5 Winds—Weather.—The harbor area averages 65 days with

fog or mist annually. The monthly average is 10 days for the

months of December, January, and February. The average for

the months of March, October, and November is 7 or 8 days.

April, May, and September have a monthly average of 2 to 4

days. June, July, and August average l day each month. 

2.5 Ice.—The approaches become encumbered with ice between

January and March. However, the port is seldom closed.

2.5 Tides—Currents.—Gales from NW may raise the sea level

as much as 1.3m and gales from SE may lower it by as much as

0.9m.

2.5 Depths—Limitations.—The entrance channel, 100m wide,

has a dredged depth of 15m.

2.5 Kalundborg Havn, in the N part of the port, consists of

Vesthavn, Osthavn, and Sydhavn.

2.5 Vesthavn, protected by a breakwater, has three main berths,

80 to 250m long, with depths of 6m alongside. It is mostly

used by ro-ro ferries. The W part of this basin is used by yachts

and fishing vessels.

2.5 Osthavn, located E of Vesthavn, has four main berths, 170 to

280m long, with depths of 7 to 10m alongside. This open basin

provides ro-ro and bulk facilities. 

2.5 Sydhavn, located S of Osthavn, has a quay, 170m long, with

a depth of 8.5m alongside and another quay, 450m long, with

depths of l0 to 12m alongside. This basin provides ro-ro, oil,

and general cargo facilities. Vessels up to 240m in length, 35m

beam, and 11.5m draft can be accommodated in this basin.

2.5 Dokhavn, located S of Sydhavn, has three main berths, 120

to 160m long, with depths of 5 to 10m alongside. Vessels up to

140m in length, 20m beam, and 9.5m draft can be accommodated in this basin.

2.5 Statoil Oil Terminal, located S of Dokhavn, consists of a

quay and a pier, which extends about 420m WNW from the

shore. The quay is 330m long and has a depth of 15m alongside. Tankers up to 140,000 dwt, 270m in length, and 14.2m

draft can be handled.

2.5 The pier has three berths, 73 to 274m long, with depths of 5

to 13m alongside. Tankers up to 70,000 dwt, 264m in length,

and 12.5m can be handled at the S side of the pier. Tankers

exceeding 70,000 dwt, up to a maximum of 130,000 dwt, are

limited to a maximum draft of 12.2m at the pier. The maximum

freeboard allowed is 15.85m.

2.5 Asnaesvaerkets Havn, located W of Statoil Oil Terminal, is a

bulk terminal serving a power station. It is approached through

a channel, 80m wide, with a dredged depth of 13.5m.

2.5 The coal berth has a depth of 13.5m alongside and can accommodate vessels up to 175,000 dwt, 290m in length, 45m

beam, and 13.2m draft.

2.5 The oil berth has a depth of 9.5m alongside and can accommodate vessels up to 300m in length, 50m beam, and 9.2m

draft.

2.5 The ash berth has a depth of 7.7m alongside and can accommodate vessels up to 120m in length, 20m beam, and 7.2m

draft.

2.5 The gypsum berth has a depth of 9.5m alongside and can accommodate vessels up to 120m in length, 20m beam, and 9.2m

draft.

2.5 Aspect.—The entrance channel is marked by lighted buoys

and indicated by a lighted range.

2.5 A light is shown from a prominent framework tower, 4m

high, standing on the end of Gisselore Pynt (55°40.2'N.,

11°04.6'E.). A radio mast, 145m high, and a disused light

tower stand close N of this light. A narrow bank fronts Gisselore Pynt and its edge is marked by a lighted buoy.

2.5 A castle and a church, both prominent, stand in the city. The

church has five high, pointed towers.

2.5 Two conspicuous chimneys, the taller one being 224m high,

stand near the power station in the S part of the port.

2.5 Pilotage.—Pilotage for Kalundborg is compulsory for tankers of 60m in length and over. Pilotage for Asnaesvaerkets

Havn is compulsory for vessels calling at the terminal for the

first time and all vessels being towed. Pilotage for the Statoil

Terminal is generally compulsory for vessels over 7,000 dwt.

Kalundborg Church
Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 39

Pub. 194

Pilotage is recommended for vessels without local knowledge.

2.5 Vessels should send a message requesting pilotage through

the agent at least 24 hours in advance. This request may be sent

through the agent along with the ETA message to:

2.5 Kalundborg may be contacted directly as follows:

2.5 Pilots can be contacted by VHF channel 16 and 12 and

board in the following positions: 

a. 55°44.5'N, 10°48.5'E (Rosnaes). 

b. 55°43.5'N, 10°52.0'E (Rosnaes SE).

c. 55°39.0'N, 10°46.0'E (Lighted buoy No 23, Route-T).

2.5 Oil Terminal and tugs can be contected on VHF channel 16;

9, 10, 12, 14, and also on:

2.5 Regulations.—Vessels must send an ETA message through

the agent 72 hours and 24 hours in advance. Any changes to the

ETA of over 2 hours should be reported. Vessels must then call

their agent when 5 miles from the port to confirm their ETA.

2.5 Vessels must maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF

channel 16 when in Kalundborg Fjord.

2.5 Inbound vessels over 100 grt should broadcast their presence

on VHF channels 12 and 16 when passing Asnaes Northwest

Flak.

2.5 Departing vessels must wait until vessels entering the harbor

have cleared the channel. 

2.5 Caution.—Numerous ferries, including high speed craft,

may be encountered in the approaches to the port.

2.6 Asnaes Light (55°40'N., 10°56'E.) is shown from a

structure, 4m high, standing on the W extremity of Asnaes, the

peninsula separating Kalundborg Fjord from Jammerland

Bugt.

2.6 Asnaes Rev (55°39'N., 10°53'E.), a shoal with depths of 2.2

to 7.8m, fronts the W end of Asnaes. It extends up to about 2

miles WSW of Asnaes Light and is marked by a buoy.

2.6 Jammerland Bugt (55°36'N., 11°04'E.) lies between

Asnaes and Reerso, a small peninsula. It is seldom used by

large vessels. The coastal bank, with depths of less than 10m,

extends up to about 3 miles from the shore in places and several shoal lie in the approach to this bight.

2.6 A prominent church stands 1.3 miles inland at Svallerup,

about 9 miles SE of Asnaes Light and near the middle of the

bight. Another prominent church is situated at Udby, about 1.5

mile NE of Svallerup.

2.6 Lysegrund (55°35'N., 10°55'E.), an extensive shoal with

Kalundborg—Vesthavn

Kalundborg—Osthavn 

Kalundborg—Sydhavn

 info@portofkalundborg.dk

 http://www.portofkalundborg.dk/

Kalundborg—Dokhavn and Statoil Terminal

Telephone: 45 59 574521

Fax: 45 59 516298
40 Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 

Pub. 194

depths of 4.3 to 9.1m, lies centered 4 miles S of Asnaes Light

and in the outer approach to Jammerland Bugt.

2.6 Reerso (55°32'N., 11°06'E.), the small peninsula separating

Jammerland Bugt from Musholm Bugt, is joined to Sjaelland

by a low, narrow isthmus. The W side of this peninsula is faced

with cliffs and rises to a height of 19m. A church, with a prominent spire, stands on the E side. A small fishing harbor is situated on the sheltered SE side of this peninsula.

2.7 Elefantgrund (55°32'N., 10°55'E.), a rocky shoal

with a least depth of 3.4m, lies 5.5 miles W of Reerso and is

marked by a buoy moored at its W side. 

2.7 Musholm Bugt (55°28'N., 11°08'E.) lies between Reerso

and the N extremity of Halsskov, 9 miles S. Its shores are

devoid of woods except for a small plantation located near the

middle. This bight has general depths of 7 to 16m lying between the shoals in the approaches and the coastal bank fronting the shore. A small and shallow fishing harbor is situated in

the NE part of the bight, 2.3 miles SE of Reerso. A prominent

church stands 1.4 miles inland at Kirke-Stillinge, about 4 miles

SSE of the harbor.

2.7 Musholm, a low island, lies in the N part of the bight, about

2 miles SSW of Reerso. Its W side rises to a height of 9m and

ends in a steep, yellow cliff.

2.7 Slettingsgrund, a shoal patch with a least depth of 4.3m, lies

in the approach to the bight, about 3.5 miles SSE of Musholm.

2.7 Anchorage may be taken in most parts of this bight with

good holding ground. The S part has depths of 11 to 15m; the

N part, which is sheltered from almost all winds, has depths of

7 to 9m.

2.7 Hojbjerg, 29m high, is a prominent hill, with a pointed summit, standing about 1.3 miles ESE of the N extremity of Halsskov.

2.7 Caution.—Two submarine gas pipelines, which may best be

seen on the chart, extend W and SW across Store Baelt from a

point located on the shore of Musholm Bugt, about 6 miles SE

of Reerso.

2.7 Restricted areas, 1 mile in diameter, are situated 3 miles and

6 miles W of Reerso and 1 mile N of Halsskovv. These areas,

within which anchoring and trawling are prohibited due to the

presence of unexploded ordnance, may best be seen on the

chart.

Store Baelt—North Part—West Side

2.8 The E coast of Hindsholm, of which Fyns Hoved

(55°37'N., 10°35'E.) is the N extremity, is hilly. The hills in the

N part are barren, but those in the S have scattered wooded

areas. A conspicuous white church, with a red roof, stands at

Stubberup, about 5.5 miles SSE of Fyns Hoved.

2.8 Stubberup Knold (55°35'N., 10°45'E.), a small shoal area,

has a least depth of 7.8m and lies 1.6 miles offshore, about 5

miles SE of Fyns Hoved.

2.8 Romso Tue No. 24 Light (55°33'N., 10°49'E.), equipped

with a racon, is shown from a prominent green tower, 12m

high, standing at the E side of Romso Tue Shoal. This detached

shoal patch has a depth of 8.6m and lies about 8 miles SE of

Fyns Hoved.

2.8 Polyphem, a shoal area with a least depth of 7.2m, lies about

1.5 miles WSW of Romso Tue.

2.8 Romso (55°31'N., 10°48'E.) is a low, wooded island with a

cliff, 7m high on its E side. A rocky reef extends about 0.8 mile

W from the low and narrow point forming the SW extremity of

the island. Klaepen, a drying rock, lies at the seaward end of

this reef and is marked by a buoy. A conspicuous disused light

tower is situated on the E extremity of the island. A number of

prominent buildings stand close behind the tower.

2.8 Romso Puller (55°30'N., 10°49'E.), a rocky shoal area with

depths of 1.8 to 4.7m, lies at the outer edge of the coastal bank.

It extends about 1 mile SE of Romso and is marked by a

lighted buoy.

2.8 Large vessels may anchor, in a depth of 22m, about 2.3 miles

SE of Romso.

2.8 Romso Sund (55°31'N., 10°45'E.), the passage leading between Romso and Hindsholm, can be used by vessels with

local knowledge and drafts up to 4.5m.

2.8 Kerteminde Bugt (55°27'N., 10°43'E.) lies between Stavreshoved, the SE extremity of Hindsholm and Risinge Hoved,

4 miles S. Mollegrund, a shoal with a least depth of 5.6m, lies

about 1.3 miles SSE of Stavreshoved, at the S edge of the

coastal bank. 

2.9 Kerteminde (55°27'N., 10°40'E.) (World Port Index

No. 29870), a small port, lies at the head of Kerteminde Bugt

and is situated between two long embankments at the entrance

to Kertinge Nor, a shallow tidal lagoon.

2.9 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in the entrance attain

rates up to 3 knots. During gales rates up to 5 knots may be

experienced. Winds from NW to NE may raise the sea level by

up to 1m and winds from SE may lower it by as much as 0.8m.

2.9 Depths—Limitations.—Two breakwaters protect the harbor

entrance, which is 40m wide and has a controlling depth of

4.5m. A basin, used by fishing vessels, is situated on the S side

of the harbor and has a depth of 3m. The quay on the N side of

the harbor has depths of 4.2 to 5.5m alongside and can handle

cargo vessels up to 120m in length and 4.2m draft. Vessels over

80m in length should be equipped with a bow thruster.

2.9 An extensive yacht marina is situated 0.2 mile N of the N

breakwater.

2.9 Aspect.—The entrance fairway off the breakwater heads is

marked by buoys. The approach is indicated by a lighted range.

A prominent red church, with a square tower at its W end,

stands in the town.

Romso Disused Light Tower
Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 41

Pub. 194

2.9 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory. Pilotage is advised

for vessels with drafts over 3.7m without local knowledge.

Pilots are provided by the DanPilot (Great Belt), Spodsbjerg

station. For further information, see Pilotage in paragraph 1.1.

2.9 Kerteminde may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

2.9 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, according to draft, E of

the port. This roadstead is sheltered from all but E winds and

has good holding ground. 

2.9 Caution.—Yacht races are held in the approaches to the port

from April to November.

2.10 Risinge Hoved (55°25'N., 10°50'E.) forms the SE entrance point of Kerteminde Bugt. The shore between this point

and Ostero, 8 miles SSE, is wooded. Ostero, a low peninsula,

extends about 2 miles SE from the coast, in the vicinity of Nyborg.

2.10 Skalenbjerg (55°22'N., 10°44'E.), rising 3 miles S of Risinge Hoved, is a barren hill, 44m high, which is conspicuous

from seaward. A windmotor is situated 1 mile E of this hill.

2.10 Knudshoved (55°17'N., 10°51'E.), a cliff-faced point, forms

the SE extremity of Ostero. A light is shown from a prominent

square tower, 12m high, standing on this point. 

2.10 Knudshoved Faergehavn (55°17'N., 10°51'E.), situated

close N of Knudshoved Light, is a ferry terminal harbor. It is

used only by the automobile ferries operated by the railroads.

No other vessels, including pleasure craft, may use the harbor.

The entrance fairway is indicated by range beacons and has a

depth of 6m.

2.10 Caution.—Two submarine gas pipelines, which may best be

seen on the chart, extend across the Store Baelt from a point on

the shore located about 2.5 miles SE of Risinge Hoved.

2.10 A submarine cable, which may best be seen on the chart,

extends NE from a point on the shore located about 1.3 miles

SE of Risinge Hoved.

2.10 An abnormal magnetic disturbance has been reported to exist

in the area lying about 0.5 mile offshore, 4.2 miles NNW of

Knudshoved.

Store Baelt—Central Part

2.11 The central part of Store Baelt is the area bounded to

the N by a line joining Halsskov, Sprogo, and Ostero and to the

S by a line extending across the N entrance of Langelands

Baelt between Omo and Hov.

2.11 Sprogo (55°20'N., 10°58'E.), a hilly island lying between

Halsskov and Ostero, divides the Store Baelt into two channels,

Osterrenden on the E side and Vesterrenden on the W side. A

prominent disused light tower stands on a hill, 25m high, at the

E end of the island and is floodlit at night.

2.11 The passage through Osterrenden is narrowed by Sprogo ERev, a narrow reef of clay and rocks, which extends 1.4 miles

ENE from the E side of Sprogo and Hasskov Rev, a rocky

shoal, which extends 1.2 miles W from Hasskov.

2.11 The passage through Vesterrenden is narrowed by Alehus

Rev, a rocky spit, which fronts the coast in the vicinity of

Knudshoved and Sprogo Puller, a number of detached clay and

rock shoals, which extend up to 2.3 miles SW of Sprogo.

2.11 The above dangers and the aids marking them may best be

seen on the chart.

2.11 Caution.—Landing on Sprogo without prior permission is

prohibited.

2.12 Store Baelt Link (55°19'N., 11°00'E.) connects Ostero to Halsskov, 9 miles ENE, via Sprogo. The section spanning Vesterrenden, on the W side of Sprogo, consists of a low

road and rail bridge. The section spanning Osterrenden, on the

E side of Sprogo, consists of a high road bridge and two undersea tunnels.

2.12 Vesterrenden.—The W section of the link, which spans

Vesterrenden, consists of a low-level bridge (West Bridge) supported by 62 piers, designated 2 through 63 as counted from

Sprogo. The fairway channel for northbound traffic lies between piers 34 and 35, while the fairway channel for southbound traffic lies between piers 37 and 38. Each navigation

channel has an overall width of 104m with a free vertical clearance at mean sea level of 18m over the central 70m.

2.12 Navigation through West Bridge is restricted to vessels of

less than 1,000 dwt. Vessels of 1,000 dwt or more are required

to use the appropriate traffic lanes in Osterrenden.

2.12 The designated fairway channels leading under the bridge

are marked by lighted buoys and indicated by range lights.

Racons are situated at the center of both navigation spans. The

racon on the E span is apparent only to vessels approaching

from S, while the racon on the W span is apparent only to vessels approaching from N.

2.12 Vessels are advised that the prevailing current in Vesterrenden

aho@kerteminde.dk

Knudshoved Light

Sprogo Disused Lighthouse
42 Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 

Pub. 194

does not run parallel to the general direction of the traffic flow

through the navigation channels.

2.12 To approach Vesterrenden from N, vessels should leave Route T

at Lighted Buoy No. 25 (55°31'N., 10°52'E.) and steer in a S direction to pass W of Sprogo.

2.12 Osterrenden.—The E section of the link, which spans Osterrenden, consists of a suspension bridge (East Bridge) with a total

length of about 4.3 miles. The center span is 1,624m wide and has

a vertical clearance of 65m at mean sea level.

2.12 The two conspicuous towers supporting the suspension

bridge are 254m high.

2.12 An IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Scheme (TSS) is

located in the vicinity of the main navigation span. Each lane is

about 475m wide and marked by lighted buoys. The northbound lane, situated at the E side of the fairway channel, has a

least depth of 17m. The southbound lane, situated at the W side

of the fairway channel, has a least depth of 19m.

2.12 The traffic lanes of the TSS are marked by lights and lighted

buoys, which may best be seen on the chart. Their entrances

are indicated on the outer sides by racons. Racons, situated on

the bridge span, indicate the directional fairways and are only

apparent to vessels approaching in the designated lane. Range

lights, situated on the underside of the bridge span, indicate the

preferred line of passage through the lanes.

2.12 Vessels of less than 20m in length and sailing vessels are

recommended to avoid the TSS lanes and use the adjacent

spans. Fishing vessels are prohibited in the traffic lanes.

2.12 All vessels must reduce speed to a maximum of 20 knots

prior to entering the appropriate lane of this TSS.

2.12 Route T follows the TSS through Osterrenden (see paragraph 2.1).

2.12 Regulations.—BELTREP, a mandatory ship reporting system, operates in the N and central parts of Store Baelt and is

operated by Great Belt VTS (call sign: Great Belt VTS).

2.12 The N limit of the reporting area is bounded by lines joining

the following positions:

a. 56°00.0'N, 11°17.0'E (Sjaellands Odde). 

b. 56°00.0'N, 10°56.0'E (near Marthe Flak).

c. 55°47.0'N, 10°38.0'E (Samso).

d. 55°36.0'N, 10°38.0'E (Fyn).

2.12 The S limit of the reporting area is bounded by lines joining

the following positions:

a. 55°12.0'N, 11°15.4'E (Stigsnaes Oil Pier). 

b. 55°08.4'N, 11°09.0'E (Orespids).

c. 55°05.0'N, 11°09.0'E (S of Orespids).

d. 55°05.0'N, 10°56.1'E (E coast of Langeland).

e. 55°00.0'N, 10°48.7'E (W coast of Langeland).

f. 55°01.2'N, 10°44.0'E (Thuro Rev Lighted Buoy).

2.12 The VTS area is divided into two Sectors at latitude 55°35'N.

Sector 1 is located on the N side of this latitude; Sectior 2 is

located on the S side of this latitude.

2.12 All vessels of 50 grt and over and all vessels with an air draft

of of 15m and over must participate in this reporting system.

2.12 Vessels in Sector 1 should communicate with Great Belt

VTS (call sign: Great Belt VTS) on VHF channels 16 and 74.

Vessels in Sector 2 should communicate with Great Belt VTS

(call sign: Great Belt VTS) on VHF channels 16 and 11. All

vessels within the VTS area must maintain a continuous listening watch. 

2.12 The language used for communication shall be English.

IMO-standard marine phrases should be used when necessary.

2.12 Vessels entering the reporting area must submit a full report

when crossing the limit lines or on departure from a port

located within the area.

2.12 Vessels crossing the line between Sector 1 and Sector 2 must

submit a short report. This report should include the vessel’s

name, call sign, IMO number, and position.

2.12 Additional reports must be made whenever there is a change

in navigational status or circumstances.

2.12 Reports to the VTS should be made using VHF voice transmissions. However, vessels can fulfil certain reporting requirements through the use of AIS.

2.12 The full report may be submitted by using a combination of

voice and non-verbal means. Vessels may select, for reasons of

commercial confidentiality, to communicate that part of their

report which provides information on the next port of call by

non-verbal means prior to entering the area.

2.12 The full report to Great Belt VTS should be in the following

format:

Store Baelt Link

Store Baelt Link—East Bridge

Designator Information Required

A Vessel name, call sign, and IMO number.

C

Position (a 4-digit group for latitude suffixed with N and a 5-digit group for longitude suffixed by E).
Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 43

Pub. 194

2.12 Information of interest to shipping in the VTS area will be

given on request or will be broadcast on a VHF channel

specified by the VTS. Prior to the broadcast, an announcement

will be made on VHF channel 16. All vessels in the area should

listen to the broadcast.

2.12 Great Belt VTS can provide navigational assistance to individual ships, including the recommendation of suitable anchorages. Such assistance will be made on VHF channel 10 or other

channels as assigned. 

2.12 Anchorage.—Vessels waiting for pilots, improvements in

weather conditions, or for any other reasons connected to their

passage through Osterrenden can anchor within two designated

areas, with a radius of 1 mile, which may best be seen on the

chart. The area for southbound vessels lies centered 3.5 miles

NNW of Sprogo and the area for northbound vessels lies

centered 5 miles SSE of Sprogo. These areas have depths of 17

to 22m and are under the control of Great Belt Traffic VTS.

2.12 Caution.—Submarine cables, which may best be seen on the

chart, extend across the Store Baelt between Hasskov and the

Ostero Peninsula.

Store Baelt—Central Part—East Side

2.13 Halsskov (55°21'N., 11°06'E.), a small promontory,

forms the E shore of Osterrenden. The coast, to the N of its

low-lying SW extremity is faced with prominent yellow cliffs.

Halsskov Rev, a shoal area, extends up to about 1.5 miles

SW from the SW extremity of Halsskov. This area has depths

of less than 6m lying up to 1 mile offshore and detached, rocky

patches, with depths of less than 6m, extending up to 2 miles

seaward.

2.13 Halsskov Harbor (55°21'N., 11°06'E.), situated on the S

side of Halsskov, is used only by state-owned ferries. The entrance, protected by two breakwaters, faces SW. It is 120m

wide and has a controlling depth of 7.5m. The ferry slips at the

head of the harbor basin have depths of 6.5 to 8m alongside.

Korsor (55°20'N., 11°08'E.)

World Port Index No. 29520

2.14 Korsor, lying 1 mile SE of Halsslov, is a commercial

port and naval base. The town stands on both sides of the

entrance to Korsor Nor, a shallow tidal lagoon.

2.14 Ice.—The port is kept open mostly all year round by strong

currents and ice breaker assistance.

2.14 Tides—Currents.—The mean range of tide is 0.3m. Gales

from NW to NE may raise the sea level by up to 1.2m and gales

from S may lower it by as much as 0.8m.

2.14 During calm periods, there are regular flood and ebb tidal

currents in the harbor and the passage leading to Korsor Nor.

These currents are irregular in places and are quite strong at

times. 

2.14 Depths—Limitations.—The main approach channel, with a

controlling depth of 8m and a width of 103m, leads ENE between

the offshore dangers to the harbor entrance. The harbor is protected by N and S breakwaters and a detached breakwater, 200m

long, lying close SW. It provides about 2,000m of main quayage.

2.14 The naval basin is situated close inside the S breakwater.

Gamlehavn, the main section of the harbor, extends SSE from the

outer part to Halsskov Bridge and has depths of 6 to 8m. Inderhavn, the inner section, lies E of the bridge and has depths up to

7m. 

2.14 The Halsskov Bridge, separating Gamlehavn from Inderhavn, is

a fixed rail bridge with a single raising bascule at the S end. The

navigable passage at the bridge is 25.5m wide with a vertical

clearance of 26.8m alongside the bascule pillar. Vessels up to

100m in length, 25m beam, and 5.7m draft may proceed through

this bridge passage.

2.14 The port has facilities for general cargo, bulk, ro-ro, and

cruise vessels. Vessels up to 200m in length, 30m beam, and

7.5m draft can be accommodated. 

2.14 Aspect.—Prominent cliffs form the part of the coast adjacent to a hill, 20m high, which rises between Halsskov Harbor

and Korsor. The dredged approach channel is indicated by a

lighted range.

2.14 A castle, with a conspicuous tower, stands on the S side of

the entrance to the main harbor. Prominent water towers are

situated 0.2 mile E and 0.7 mile SE of the castle.

2.14 Bonderup, an estate with a conspicuous white building, is

situated 2 miles SE of the harbor.

2.14 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all tankers and all

other vessels over 100m in length passing the Halsskov Bridge.

It is advised for all vessels without local knowledge. Pilots are

provided by the DanPilot (Great Belt), Spodsbjerg station. For

further information, see Pilotage in paragraph 1.1.

2.14 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board about 2 miles

WSW of the harbor entrance.

2.14 Regulations.—Vessels sould send an ETA message 24 hours

in advance.

2.14 All unauthorized vessels are prohibited from entry or

approaching within 30m of the naval basin.

2.14 Under normal conditions, vessels entering and leaving the

port have the right of way over vessels proceeding through the

entrance of the naval basin. In an emergency, however, naval

vessels have priority. Such emergencies are indicated by a

quick red flashing light shown from the naval signal station.

2.14 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in depths of 15 to

27m, about 2.3 miles SW of the harbor entrance.

2.15 Egholm (55°15'N., 11°11'E.) is a small and low

island lying 5.5 miles SSE of Korsor. It is partly wooded with

no prominent features. Egholm Flak, the bank fronting this

island extends up to 2 miles N and 2.5 miles NW of the island. 

2.15 Egholm No. 30 Light (55°15'N., 11°06'E.) is shown from a

mast on a platform, 10m high, standing about 2.6 miles WNW

of Egholm, near the outer edge of Egholm Flak.

2.15 Vengeancegrund No. 31 Light (55°18'N., 10°46'E.) is

shown from a mast on a platform, 10m high, standing on the E

I Next port of call.

L Intended route.

O Draft (in meters).

Q Details of defects, deficiencies, or restrictions of maneuverability.

U Deadweight tons and air draft.

Designator Information Required
44 Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 

Pub. 194

side of an isolated shoal patch, with a depth of 9.7m, lying

about 3.2 miles WSW of Egholm. 

2.15 Agerso (55°13'N., 11°11'E.) is a low flat island rising to a

height of 12m in its central part. A causeway leads over the

drying bank and connects the N end of Agerso with Egholm.

2.15 Agerso Light is shown from a lattice mast standing on

Naebbet, the SW extremity of the island.

2.15 Agerso Havn, a small harbor, is situated at the E side of the

island, about 1 mile NE of Agerso Light. It is used by pilot

boats and fishing vessels. The entrance, which is protected by

two breakwaters, is 15m wide and has a controlling depth of

2.8m. A ferry terminal, formed by two moles, is situated close

N of the harbor and has a controlling depth of 3m. 

2.15 Helleholm Light (55°11'N., 11°13'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 12m high, standing near the SW extremity of

the low peninsula forming the S end of Agerso.

2.15 Agerso Flak, a large shoal area, extends up to about 2 miles

W of Agerso Light.

2.15 Agerso Flak No. 34 Light (55°12'N., 11°07'E.), equipped

with a racon, is shown from a mast on a platform, 10m high,

standing about 2.3 miles W of Agerso Light, near the outer

edge of Agerso Flak. A shoal, with a least depth of 5.9m, lies

about 1.3 miles W of this light and is marked on its E side by a

lighted buoy.

2.15 Omo (55°10'N., 11°10'E.) lies about 2 miles SW of Helleholm Light and is separated from the SW side of Agerso by

Omo Sund. A conspicuous white church stands in a village

near the center of the island. Skovbanke, 24m high, is a prominent barren hill that rises on the NE side of the island and

slopes steeply on its E side.

2.15 Langelandsore Light (Omo Light) (55°10'N., 11°08'E.) is

shown from a prominent tower, 22m high, standing on the W

extremity of the island.

2.15 Omo Havn, a small craft harbor, is situated on the N side of

the island and protected by two breakwaters. It is entered from

NE through a dredged channel, 25m wide, with a controlling

depth of 3m. 

2.15 Omo NW Flak, a shoal area, extends up to about 1.5 miles

NW of the island and may best be seen on the chart.

Store Baelt—Central Part—West Side

2.16 Nyborg Fjord (55°17'N., 10°50'E.) extends in a NW

direction for 2 miles on the SW side of the Ostero peninsula.

The W shore of this fjord is comparatively high and wooded.

The fjord affords sheltered anchorage from all winds, but the

entrance channel is restricted by shoal flats extending from the

shores.

Holckenhavn Fjord, a shallow arm, extends about 1 mile W

from the W side of Nyborg Fjord. A castle, consisting of a

yellow building with a square tower and a spire, stands on the S

shore of the entrance to the fjord and is conspicuous from

seaward.

A prominent white church, with a high-stepped gable, stands

in Vindinge, about 2 miles NW of the castle. 

2.16 Slipshavn (55°17'N., 10°50'E.), a small harbor, lies within a

cove on the N side of Slipshavn Pynt, the SW extremity of

Ostero. This harbor has depths of 2.7 to 3.9m and normally is

only used by naval and government vessels. Unauthorized

entry is prohibited.

Nyborg (55°19'N., 10°48'E.)

World Port Index No. 29860

2.17 Nyborg, a former main ferry terminal, is situated at

the head of Nyborg Fjord. The port also includes Lindholm

Havn, which is situated about 0.8 mile NNW of the SW

extremity of Ostero. 

2.17 Ice.—The port is normally kept open all year round by ice

breakers. 

2.17 Tides—Currents.—The mean range of tide is 0.3m. Gales,

depending on direction, may raise or low the water level in the

harbor by as much as 0.8m.

2.17 Depths—Limitations.—Nyborg Havn consists of the

former ferry basin, Vesterhavn, and Osterhavn. The former

ferry basin has five piers with depths of 5 to 8m alongside.

Vesterhavn, close W of the ferry basin, has two ro-ro berths,

with depths of 7 to 7.5m alongside. It can accommodate vessels up to 7.5m draft. Osterhavn, a small basin at the NE end of

Vesterhavn, has a depth of 5m.

2.17 Avernakke Oil Pier is located S of Nyborg Havn. It has two

main berths, 65 and 100m long, with depths of 6 to 10m alongHelleholm Light

Langelandsore Light (Omo Light)
Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 45

Pub. 194

side. Tankers up to 200m in length and 10m draft can be accommodated.

2.17 Lindholm Havn is approached through a dredged channel

with a controlling depth of 11m. There are thee main quays, 80

to 240m long, with depths of 5 to 11m alongside. Vessels up to

230m in length and 10m draft can be accommodated.

2.17 The port has facilities for general cargo, ro-ro, bulk, container, tanker, and fishing vessels.

2.17 Aspect.—The approach channel leading into the fjord and

the entrance fairways leading to the harbor are indicated by

sector lights or lighted ranges. Slipshavn Light is shown from a

framework tower, 6m high, standing on the SW extremity of

Ostero. An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about 1mile

SSE of this light.

2.17 A conspicuous church, with a tall slender spire, stands in the

city, close N of the harbor.

2.17 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is advised for

vessels without local knowledge. Pilots are provided by the

DanPilot (Great Belt), Spodsbjerg station. For further information, see Pilotage in paragraph 1.1.

2.17 Pilots can be contacted by VHF channel 16 12 13 and board

about 0.6 mile E of the outer approach lighted buoy.

2.17 The Port may be contacted as follows: 

2.17 Regulations.—Vessels leaving Lindholm Havn must give

way to vessels in the main channel proceeding to the harbor at

Nyborg.

2.17 Anchorage.—The best anchorage in the fjord is in its widest

part, off the entrance to Holckenhavn Fjord. This roadstead has

a depth of 10m and is sheltered from all quarters, but SE winds

may raise some sea.

2.17 Caution.—It is reported that the structures of the lighted

range indicating the harbor entrance channel are difficult to

identify.

2.18 Vest-lige Puller (55°17'N., 10°54'E.), a detached

shoal patch, lies about 1.6 miles E of Knudshoved Light. It has

a least depth of 6.2m and is marked by a lighted buoy moored

at its W side.

2.18 Ost-lige Puller (55°17'N., 10°56'E.), a shoal with a depth of

6m, lies about 2.8 miles ENE of Knudshoved Light and is

marked by a lighted buoy moored at its N side. This shoal is

located at the N end of a rocky ridge, which may best be seen

on the chart.

2.18 Dronning Maries Puller, a shoal with a depth of 5.8m, lies on

the ridge about 1 mile SSW of Ost-lige Puller.

2.18 Kloverhage Pynt (55°14'N., 10°49'E.), situated about 3.5

miles S of Ostero, is a low rounded point backed by a low

bluff. Helvedbakke, 58m high, is a prominent hill, with a

wooded summit, standing about 2 miles NW of the point.

A conspicuous red church, with a slender spire, stands at

Tarup, about 1.4 mile WNW of the point. Another conspicuous

church, white with a tall dark spire, stands at Svindinge, 3.2

miles WSW of Tarup. 

Klintholm Warehouse, a large white building with a red roof,

stands on the coast, 2.6 miles S of Kloverhage Pynt and is

conspicuous from seaward.

2.18 Vresen (55°13'N., 10°53'E.), a narrow grass-covered islet,

lies 2.5 miles ESE of Kloverhage Pynt. This islet, which is

about 1 mile long, is marked at its N end by a beacon.

2.18 Vresen Puller (55°15'N., 10°54'E.) consists of a number of

rocky shoals, with depths of less than 3m, extending up to

about 2 miles N of Vresen.

2.19 Hov (55°10'N., 10°56'E.), the N extremity of Langeland, terminates in Lille Hov, a steep bluff, 6m high. Frankeklint, a prominent cliff, is located 0.3 mile SW of Hov. It is

14m high and appears yellow from seaward. A light is shown

from a house, 4m high, standing on the top of this cliff.

2.19 Hov Light (55°15'N., 10°54'E.) is shown from a prominent

tower, 12m high, standing about 1 mile SE of Hov.

2.19 Hov Sand, with depths of less than 5m, fronts Hov and extends up to about 1.8 miles N.

2.19 A shallow ridge of rocky shoals extends from a point on the

W side of Langeland located about 3 miles SW of Hov to

Vresen. This ridge is about 1 mile wide and may best be seen

on the chart.

2.19 Kobberdyb (55°12'N., 10°54'E.), a narrow channel, is the

deepest passage leading across the ridge. It lies about 0.8 mile

S of Vresen and is used by small vessels with local knowledge.

The fairway has a controlling depth of 4.3m.

2.19 Stokkebaek Flak (55°10'N., 10°50'E.), a rocky shoal with a

least depth of 3.7m, lies about 3.5 miles W of Hov. It is located

about 1.2 miles offshore, near the outer edge of the coastal

bank, and is marked by a buoy.

2.19 Directions.—Having passed S of the West Bridge in Vesterrenden, vessels may proceed to the E side of the Store Baelt

by following a channel lying S of the banks fronting the S side

of Sprogo. The track passes N of Ost-lige Puller and then leads

ESE for about 5 miles to join Route T.

2.19 Vessels proceeding S into the passage lying between Fyn and

Langeland should head SSW and pass WNW of Vest-lige

Puller. They should then adjust course in a S direction to pass

between the coastal bank on the W side and the rocky ridge

extending S from Vresen on the E side.

Store Baelt—South Part—West Section

2.20 The W section of the S part of the Store Baelt consists

of a passage bounded on the W side by the E coasts of Fyn and

 post@adp-as.dk

http://www.adp-as.dk/

Hov Light
46 Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 

Pub. 194

Thuro and on the E side by the N half of the W coast of

Langeland. From the vicinity of Stokkebaek Flak (55°10'N.,

10°50'E.), the channel leads 10 miles SSW between the coastal

banks.

2.20 The fairway leading through the passage as far S as the E

approach to Svendborg Sund has a controlling depth of 10m.

2.20 The E approach fairway leading to Svendborg Sund has a

controlling depth of 6.7m (see paragraph 2.24).

2.20 The N approach fairway leading to Rudkobing has a controlling depth of 5m (see paragraph 2.25).

2.21 East coast of Fyn.—Lundeborg (55°08'N.,

10°47'E.), a small fishing harbor, is situated 5.5 miles S of Kloverhage Pynt. The entrance, 10m wide, faces S and has a controlling depth of 2.5m.

2.21 The shore between Kloverhage Pynt and this harbor rises

inland. There are several large woods and fields enclosed by

hedges, which give a general wooded appearance.

2.21 Ore Flak (55°08'N., 10°48'E.), a rocky shoal with a depth of

4.3m, lies on the coastal bank, about 1 mile SE of Lundeborg.

Elsehoved Light (55°06'N., 10°47'E.) is shown from a

prominent metal tower, 8m high, standing on a low point faced

with a bluff, 7m high.

2.21 Tiselholt Manor, a large red building with a small spire,

stands 0.7 mile WSW of Elsehoved Light. The spire is visible

above the trees, but the building is reported to be conspicuous

from only ESE.

2.21 Thuro (Turo) (55°03'N., 10°42'E.), a low island, lies 0.5

mile off the SE coast of Fyn, 4.5 miles SW of Elsehoved Light.

The island is well built over, particularly in the N part. A hill,

surmounted by a prominent windmill, rises in the NW part.

The E and S sides of the island are partially wooded.

2.21 Thuro Rev, a shoal with depths of less than 3m, extends up to

about 1 mile SE from the SE extremity of the island and is

marked by a lighted buoy.

2.21 Thuro Bund, a long and narrow inlet, indents the W side of

Thuro island. It is used as a winter anchorage by small local

vessels.

2.22 Skarupore Sund (Skaurup Sund) (55°04'N.,

10°42'E.), the shallow passage leading between the coast of

Fyn and the N side of Thuro, is only navigable by small craft.

A low road bridge spans the passage at its W end.

2.22 Gronneodde (55°02'N., 10°40'E.), a shallow spit, fronts the

SW extremity of Thuro and is marked by a buoy. Grasten Pier,

29m long, is situated close N of this spit and has a depth of

3.5m alongside its head.

2.22 Tasinge (55°00'N., 10°33'E.), well built over and wooded in

places, is the largest island lying S of Fyn. Valdemarsslot, a

prominent castle, stands near the shore in the NE part of the

island. It appears from seaward as a large group of buildings,

with the main structure having a dark blue roof.

2.22 A prominent red church, with a dark roof and spire, stands at

Bregninge, 1.5 miles W of the castle, and surmounts the highest point of the island. A prominent windmill is situated close

NE of this church. Another prominent church stands on the

side of a hill at Bjerreby, in the S part of the island.

2.22 The peninsula of Vemmenaes forms the SE part of Tasinge.

Lunke Bugt, a shallow bay, lies within the hook of this peninsula.

2.22 Caution.—Submarine cables, which may best be seen on the

chart, extend between Fyn and Langeland in the vicinity of

Elshoved Light and Dagelokke.

2.23 West coast of Langeland.—Lohals (55°08'N.,

10°54'E.), a small harbor, lies 2 miles SW of Hov, the N

extremity of Langeland. It consists of two basins protected by

breakwaters. The S basin is used by small craft and yachts. The

N basin has a berth for ro-ro ferries on the E side of the entrance. The entrance, 11m wide, faces S and has a controlling

depth of 3.7m. Vessels up to 20m in length, 6m beam, and

3.5m draft can be accommodated.

The main approach to the harbor is through a channel, with a

controlling depth of 12m, which leads in a SSW direction

between the shoal bank fronting Hov and the shallow ridge

extending N from the NW side of Langeland. Two alternate

routes lead across the above ridge, but they may only be used

by small vessels and require local knowledge.

Hove Chapel stands about 0.8 mile ESE of Lohals. It is

prominent, but hidden by woods on the N and S sides.

A conspicuous white church is situated at Stoense, 2.7 miles

S of Lohals, and another conspicuous church stands in Snode,

0.8 mile SSE of it.

2.23 Dagelokke Havn (55°04'N., 10°52'E.), a small harbor, lies

4.5 miles SSW of Lohals and is protected by two breakwaters.

The entrance, 14m wide, faces W and has a controlling depth

of 2.6m. Vessels up to 30m in length, 7m beam, and 2.4m draft

can enter. The conspicuous chimney of a brick works stands in

the vicinity of the harbor.

2.23 A prominent church stands at Bostrup, 1.3 miles SE of Dagelokke, but it is reported to be only visible above the trees from

W.

2.23 Between Dagelokke and Rudkkoping, about 8.5 miles SW,

the W coast of Langeland rises gradually from the shore and is

mostly well built over.

2.23 Sio (54°57'N., 10°41'E.), a small and low island, lies midway between the SE side of Tasinge and Rudkobing. A farm is

situated in the center of this island; several houses stand near

the SE extremity. The island is separated from Tasinge by Sio

Sund, which is shallow and spanned by a fixed highway bridge.

2.23 For a description of the fixed bridge extending between the

SE side of Sio and Rudkobing, see paragraph 2.25.

Elsehoved Light
Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 47

Pub. 194

Svendborg (55°04'N., 10°37'E.)

World Port Index No. 29830

2.24 Svendborg is situated on the S coast of Fyn, near the

middle of Svendborg Sund. The port is an important commercial center and ferry terminal.

2.24 The harbor consists of three principal basins and several

smaller ones. Frederikso, an island, occupies the central part of

the harbor and is connected to shore by a fixed bridge on its W

side. An oil depot is situated near the E end of the island.

2.24 Ice.—Ice may be encountered from early December through

the end of March. The port is usually kept open by icebreakers,

except during very severe winters.

2.24 Tides—Currents.—There is a tidal range of 0.3 to 0.6m.

The water level is determined by wind force and direction.

Gales from N to NE can raise the water level up to 1.5m and

gales from S to SW can lower it by the same amount. 

2.24 Currents in Svendborg Sund are very irregular and are greatly influenced by the wind. Gales from NW usually generate W

setting currents and gales from E usually generate E setting

currents. The currents usually attain rates of 2 to 3 knots, but

rates of up to 6 knots can occur in the narrower parts.

2.24 Depths—Limitations.—The E approach fairway, which has

a controlling depth of 6.7m, leads between the W side of Thuro

and the NE side of Tasinge. The W approach fairway has a

controlling depth of 6.9m.

2.24 Ostre Havn and Nordre Havn, on the N side of Frederikso,

form the main commercial berthing areas. The port provides

about 2,000m of quayage with depths of 4.3 to 7.5m alongside.

The tanker berth at the E end of Frederikso is 78m long and has

a depth of 7m alongside.

2.24 There are facilities for general cargo, passenger, bulk, tanker,

ro-ro, ferries, and coastal vessels. Vessels up to 27,300 dwt,

180m in length, and 6.5m draft can be accommodated.

2.24 Aspect.—The fairway channels leading through the E approach to Svendborg are marked by buoys and indicated by

lighted ranges. 

2.24 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory but is recommended.

Pilotage is provided by the main DanPilot (Great Belt), Spodsbjerg station. 

2.24 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board, as follows: 

1. From the E—About 1 mile SE of the SE extremity of

Thuro (Thuro Rev).

2. From the W and Faabourg—position 55°01.7'N,

10°11.2'E (Skrams Flak).

3. From the W—position 55°01.3'N, 10°31.9'E

(Lehnskov).

2.24 Svendborg may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

2.24 Anchorage.—Good anchorage is available, in depths of 7 to

11m, soft bottom, in the fairway lying between Thuro and

Tasinge.

2.24 Caution.—Due to depths of less than 5m lying close adjacent to the fairway ranges in several places, the E approach can

be transited only during daylight and under pilotage.

2.24 A number of small piers and marinas, used by pleasure craft,

are situated in the vicinity of the port.

2.24 The direction of buoyage changes off Svendborg.

2.25 Rudkobing (54°56'N., 10°43'E.) (World Port Index

No. 29760), a small port, is situated on the W coast of Langeland, about 5.5 miles S of the SE extremity of Thuro. It can be

approached from N or S through Rudkobing Lob, a narrow

channel leading between Thuro and Langeland.

2.25 Ice.—Ice can present serious difficulties to traffic navigating

in the channels leading between Tasinge and Langeland. 

2.25 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range is negligible. Wind

force and direction are the determining factors for the water

level. Winds from NW to NE raise the water level by up to

0.6m and winds from S to SW lower it by as much as 1.2m. 

2.25 During calm weather, the tidal current in Rudkobing Lob

changes direction regularly about every 6 hours and attains a

rate of about 2 knots. In unsettled weather, the currents may set

in the same direction for several days and attain rates of 4 to 5

knots. Winds from NW usually cause a strong S setting current

and winds from NE usually cause a strong N setting current.

2.25 Depths—Limitations.—The section of Rudkoping Lob lying N of the harbor has a controlling depth of 5m over a bottom width of 30m. The section lying S of the harbor has a controlling depth of only 3.2m.

2.25 Langelandsbroen (Langelands Bridge), a fixed bridge, spans

Rudkobing Lob and extends between the SE extremity of Sio

and the harbor. The navigable span is located between supporting pier No. 11 and supporting pier No. 12, counted from Sio.

It has a navigable width of 80m and a vertical clearance of

26m.

2.25 The main commercial harbor basin has an entrance, 18m

wide, and depths 3.5 to 5m. A basin, used by fishing vessels,

and a basin used by small ferries, are situated close NE and

close SW, respectively, of the main basin. A marina lies close

N of the harbor. There are facilities for general cargo, ferries,

bulk, coasters, and fishing vessels. Vessels up to 82m in length,

15m beam, and 4.8m draft can be accommodated. 

2.25 Aspect.—The approach channel is marked by lighted and

unlighted buoys. Its outer section is indicated by a lighted

range. An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about 1.8

miles NNE of Sio. The fairway leading under the bridge is

marked by daymarks and synchronized flashing lights on pillars.

2.25 A prominent red church, with a tall spire, stands in the town

and a conspicuous windmill is situated close SE of it. Another

prominent church, with a chimney standing close SE of it, is

situated about 0.3 mile E of the red church. A conspicuous silo

stands in the vicinity of the main harbor basin.

2.25 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory but is recommended.

Pilotage is provided by the main DanPilot (Great Belt), Spodsbjerg station. For further information, see Pilotage in paragraph

1.1.

havn@svendborg.dk

The Langelands Bridge
48 Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 

Pub. 194

2.25 Vessels should send an ETA at least 12 hours in advance.

2.25 Caution.—The dredged sections of the approach channel

are subject to silting and depths may be less than indicated.

2.25 The currents set across the harbor entrance.

Store Baelt—South Part—East Section

2.26 The E section of the S part of the Store Baelt consists

of Langelands Baelt, a passage bounded on the W side by

Langeland and on the E side by a line separating Smalandsfarvandet from the Store Baelt and by the W coast of Lolland.

The coastal bank fronting the shore is generally narrow but it

extends up to about 1 mile seaward at a point about 4 miles S

of Hov. 

2.26 For details of Route H and Route T (Deep Water Route),

which lead through Langelands Baelt, see paragraph 2.1.

Langelands Baelt—West Side

2.27 The W side of Langelands Baelt is formed by the E

coast of Langeland, which extends 28 miles SSW from Hov

(55°10'N., 10°56'E.) to Dovnsklint, the S extremity of the island. The land is hilly and there are many woods. The S part of

the island, in the vicinity of Dovnsklint, is known as Gulstav.

2.27 A conspicuous large main building stands at Nedergard, about

7.5 miles SSW of Hov. It is red and surrounded by trees.

2.27 Tranekaer Castle (55°00'N., 10°52'E.), a conspicuous red

building surmounted by a thin spire, stands on high ground about

10 miles SSW of Hov.

2.27 A prominent church, with a tall spire, is situated 0.5 mile SW

of the castle. A square tower, 9m high, stands on the coast, 1.5

miles ESE of this church, and is conspicuous from seaward.

2.27 Spodsbjerg Havn (54°56'N., 10°50'E.), a small harbor, lies

about 4 miles S of Tranekaer Castle. It consists of three basins

protected by breakwaters. The S basin, with depths up to 3.5m,

is used by pleasure craft and the center basin, with a depth of

2.5m, is used by fishing vessels. The N basin, with a depth of

5m, is used exclusively by the Spodsbjerg-Naskov ferry

vessels. The entrance to this ferry basin is 60m wide and is indicated by a lighted range.

2.27 A prominent church stands at Tullebolle, 1.8 miles NW of

Spodsbjerg Havn. It has a square tower, but is visible only from

SE; a conspicuous windmill is situated close NE of this church.

2.27 A prominent white church stands at Longelse, 1.3 miles SW

of Spodsbjerg Havn, but is partially obscured by trees. A

conspicuous windmill is situated 0.5 mile W of this church.

2.27 A prominent church stands at Fuglsbolle, 3.2 miles NW of

Spodsbjerg Havn. It has a slender black spire, but can only be

seen from certain directions.

2.27 A prominent church stands at Lindelse, 5.7 miles SW of

Spodsbjerg Havn, and a conspicuous windmill is situated 0.4

mile ENE of it. A prominent large red building, with a spire,

stands 1.4 miles SE of the church.

2.27 Prominent churches stand at Humble and at Fodslette, which

are located 6.8 miles N and 5.8 miles NNE, respectively, of the

S extremity of Langeland. However, they are only visible from

certain directions. A conspicuous farm house stands at Hjortholm, 0.9 mile ENE of Fodslette.

2.27 A prominent church, with a square tower, stands at Tryggelev, 5 miles N of the S extremity of Langeland. A conspicuous chimney and a windmill are situated close NE and on a

hill close SW, respectively, of this church and are clearly visible from SE.

2.27 A prominent white church, with a slender spire, stands at

Magleby, 3.1 miles NNE of the S extremity of Langeland. A

conspicuous windmill is situated at Sondenbro, 1.4 miles SSW

of this church.

2.27 Keldsnor Light (54°44'N., 10°43'E.) is shown from a prominent tower, 34m high, standing on the SE extremity of Langeland. Dovnsklint, the S extremity of Langeland, is located 1.2

miles WSW of the light and is formed by white cliffs, up to 16m

high.

2.27 Caution.—An area, within which anchoring and fishing are

prohibited, lies centered about 3.5 miles NE of Keldsnor Light.

The area extends up to 3 miles seaward from the E coast of

Langeland and may best be seen on the chart.

2.27 Danger Areas, which may best be seen on the chart, lie centered about 4 miles SE and 11 miles ESE of Keldsnor Light.

Anchoring, fishing, and underwater activities should be avoided within these areas due to the possible existence of bottom

mines.

Langelands Baelt—East Side

2.28 The E side of Langelands Baelt is formed, in the N

part, by the a line separating Smalandsfarvandet from the Store

Baelt and, in the S part, by the W coast of Lolland.

Tranekaer Castle Keldsnor Light
Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 49

Pub. 194

An extensive flat, with depths of less than 10m, extends

between Omo (55°10'N., 11°10'E.) and the N coast of Lolland,

11 miles S, and may best be seen on the chart.

Omo Tofte, extending up to about 3 miles S of the S extremity of Omo, and Omo Stalgrunde, lying centered about 4.5

miles S of Omo, are two shoal areas lying on this extensive flat.

Numerous unmarked shoals and rocky areas lie on this flat.

Therefore, navigation in the area lying between Omo and Lolland is mostly limited to small vessels with local knowledge.

An unmarked narrow passage, with a controlling depth of

7.3m, leads E across the flat, about 4 miles N of Lolland. 

2.28 The W coast of Lolland bordering Langelands Baelt is low,

flat, and wooded, with few prominent landmarks.

2.28 Onsevig (54°57'N., 11°07'E.), a shallow inlet with wooded

shores, indents the NW side of Lolland. It is entered between

Klinteodde and Nojsomheds Odde, 0.4 mile WSW. A small

harbor basin lies close off the E side of this inlet and is connected to the shore by a causeway, 180m long. The basin has an

entrance, 10m wide, and is used only by small craft.

2.28 A windfarm area, in which 11 wind generators stand, is

located about 1.8 miles NE of the entrance to Onsevig and may

best be seen on the chart. The wind generators are conspicuous and floodlit.

2.28 Vensholm (54°56'N., 11°03'E.), a narrow islet, lies about 0.5

mile offshore, 2 miles WSW of the entrance to Onsevig.

2.29 Tars (54°53'N., 11°02'E.), a small harbor, is situated

on the S side of Tars Vig, a small bay lying about 5 miles SW

of Onsevig. It is used exclusively by local ferries. The approach channel is 40m wide and has a controlling depth of 5m.

A small and shallow harbor, used by fishing vessels, lies 0.2

mile NW of the ferry harbor.

An aeronautical light is shown from a prominent TV mast

standing at Karleby, about 6.5 miles E of Tars.

2.29 Nakskov Fjord (54°50'N., 11°00'E.) indents the W side of

Lolland and extends about 5 miles SE. It is entered between

Tars Vig and Albuen, 3.2 miles SW. The fjord is generally

shallow and encumbered with numerous small islands. Several

small bays indent the N shore.

2.29 Albuen Light (54°50'N., 10°57'E.) is shown from a prominent tower, 13m high, standing on the N end of a low peninsula, which is connected to the W side of Lolland by a long

narrow isthmus. 

2.29 Enehoje (54°50'N., 11°01'E.), 16m high, lies 2 miles E of

Albuen Light and is the largest island in the fjord. Range lights

are situated at the E and W sides of this island. A pier, 150m

long, extends seaward from the E side of the island and has a

depth of about 1m alongside.

2.29 Lango Havn (54°49'N., 11°01'E.), a small harbor formed by

two moles, is situated on the S shore of the fjord. It is used by

yachts and fishing vessels. The entrance faces NW and has a

controlling depth of 3m. 

2.29 Albue Flak (54°49'N., 10°55'E.), a shoal area with depths of

0.9 to 6m, extends up to about 1.8 miles W of Albuen Light

and is marked by a buoy.

2.29 Kappel Church (54°45'N., 11°02'E.), white with a prominent pointed steeple, stands 4.5 miles SE of Albuen Light and

marks the E side of the S end of Langelands Baelt.

2.29 Caution.—A Danger Area, which may best be seen on the

chart, lies centered about 1.2 miles W of Tars, in the N approach to Nakskov Fjord. Anchoring, fishing, and underwater

activities should be avoided within this area due to the possible

existence of bottom mines.

Nakskov (54°50'N., 11°08'E.)

World Port Index No. 29700

2.30 Nakskov, the largest port in Lolland, is situated in a

narrow winding inlet at the E end of Nakskov Fjord.

2.30 Ice.—Ice may be encountered from early December through

the middle of March. During average winters, ice may encumber the approaches from early January to late February, but icebreakers are available.

2.30 Tides—Currents.—Gales from NE to E may raise the sea

level by up to 1.5m and gales from SW to W may lower it by as

much as 0.9m. The tidal range is negligible. The tidal currents

alternate regularly about every 6 hours during calm weather

and follow the general direction of the channel.

2.30 Depths—Limitations.—Shoal flats, with depths of less than

5m, front the entrance to the fjord. A main dredged approach

channel, with a controlling depth of 6.3m over a bottom width

of 30 to 40m, leads between the dangers in the fjord to the port.

At a position close S of Enehoje, a secondary channel, with a

controlling depth of 3.2m, branches off and also leads to the

port.

2.30 The harbor provides about 2,800m of total berthage, with

depths of 4.5 to 6.3m alongside. There are facilities for general

cargo, ro-ro, bulk, tanker, and fishing vessels. Vessels up to

200m in length, 30m beam, and 5.8m draft can be accommodated.

2.30 There are two drydocks in the harbor. The largest can handle

vessels up to 33,000 dwt and 190m in length. 

2.30 Aspect.—An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about

1.8 miles NNW of Albuen Light, at the seaward end of the

narrow, winding channel. The fairway is marked by lighted

buoys, buoys, and lighted ranges.

2.30 A prominent red church, with a spire, stands in the town.

Two conspicuous chimneys, tall and thin, are situated in the

town and are visible from all directions. Several prominent

cranes and silos stand in the vicinity of the harbor.

Albuen Light
50 Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 

Pub. 194

2.30 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory but is recommended.

Pilotage is provided by the main DanPilot (Great Belt),

Spodsbjerg station. For further information, see paragraph 1.1.

2.30 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board about 2.5 miles

NW of Albuen Light.

2.30 Nakskov may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

2.30 Regulations.—The inner part of the approach channel has a

speed limit of 5 knots.

2.30 Vessels of 2,000 dwt and less may enter the port by day or at

night. Other vessels can only navigate safely at night with the

assistance of searchlights. Such searchlights can be provided

by a tug for which 24 hours notice is required.

2.30 Anchorage.—Anchorage in the fjord is limited to small

vessels, in depths of up to 5.5m. Local knowledge is advised.

2.30 Caution.—The inner part of the fjord is designated as a

wildlife reserve and entry is subject to numerous regulations.

Smalandsfarvandet

2.31 Smalandsfarvandet comprises the waters lying between Sjaelland, on the N side, and Lolland and Falster, on the

S side. It connects Store Baelt with the Baltic Sea by means of

the passages leading between Falster and Lolland, between

Falster and Mon, and between Mon and Sjaelland.

2.31 Smalandsfarvandet is considered as being divided into a W

part and an E part by the meridian of 11°50'E. This meridian,

which passes through Orehoved, the N extremity of Falster,

lies 24 miles E of the line separating Smalandsfarvandet from

the Store Baelt.

2.31 The principal entrances from the Store Baelt are Agerso

Sund, lying between Agerso and the coast of Sjaelland, and

Omo Sund, lying between Agerso and Omo (see paragraph

2.15).

2.31 The channels leading over the flat extending between Omo

and the N coast of Lolland are suitable only for small vessels

with local knowledge.

2.31 The W part of Smalandsfarvandet is wide but the channels

narrow considerably in the E part. The coasts on both sides

have numerous indentations. A few islands front the Sjaelland

coast and several islands lie within about 7 miles of the N side

of Lolland.

2.31 The principal entrances to the Baltic Sea are Gronsund, lying

between the SW side of Mon and Falster; Guldborg Sund,

lying between Falster and Lolland; and Bogestrom, lying

between Sjaelland and Mon.

2.31 The main route through Smalandsfarvandet from the Store

Baelt leads through Omo Sund and then SE through Gronsund.

Most of the W part of Smalandsfarvandet has a controlling

depth of 11m while most of the E part is relatively shallow. The

dredged channel located at the E end of Gronsund has a controlling depth of 5m.

2.31 Secondary channels lead from the W entrances to the ports

located on the N side of Lolland and on the S side of Sjaelland.

There are also some small craft passages leading between the

islands and shoal areas.

2.31 Guldborg Sund has a controlling depth of 6.1m as far as

Nykobing, but it is then comparatively shallow S of this port.

2.31 Bogestrom, leading along the coast of Sjaelland and then

NW of Mon, is comparatively shallow and may only be used

by small vessels.

2.31 Vessels with drafts of more than 5m must approach the ports

located within Smalandsfarvandet only from the Store Baelt.

2.31 Ice.—Ice may appear in Omo Sund and the deeper fairways

in the W and SW parts of Smalandsfarvandet as early as the

third week of December. It may remain as late as the second

week of April.

2.31 Among the islands off the N coast of Lolland, ice forms

quickly and often remains for a long time. The coast of

Sjaelland may be rapidly obstructed by ice or cleared of it by a

shift in the direction of the wind. 

2.31 In the E part of Smalandsfarvandet, the relatively shallow

channels usually freeze over early in the season, and once ice

has formed it is slow to disappear. A large amount of drift ice

may be carried in both directions through Gronsund, but the

channel is seldom entirely frozen over.

2.31 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range is small, but strong

winds may raise or lower the water level a considerable

amount. During calm weather, tidal currents in Smalandsfarvandet set regularly E with a rising tide and W with a falling

tide. In unsettled weather, the direction of the current is determined by the wind. An E current is formed by N and W winds

and a W current is formed by E and S winds.

2.31 In the narrow channels in the E part of Smalandsfarvandet,

the currents sometimes attain a velocity of 3 to 4 knots, but in

the W part they seldom exceed a rate of 1 knot.

2.31 Pilotage.—Pilotage is provided by the DanPilot (Great

Belt), Spodsbjerg station. 

2.31 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board about 4.5 miles

NW of the N extremity of Agerso.

Smalandsfarvandet—West Part

2.32 Omo Sund (55°11'N., 11°11'E.), the main entrance

channel leading from the Store Baelt, has depths exceeding

13m.

From a position about 0.5 mile S of Agerso Flak No. 34

Light (55°12'N., 11°07'E.), the route through the sound leads

ESE for 2.5 miles and then SSE for 3 miles. A lighted buoy,

marking the inner entrance of this sound, is moored about 2.5

miles SSE of the S extremity of Agerso.

2.32 Caution.—Several submarine cables, which may best be

seen on the chart, extend across Omo Sund and are marked by

directional beacons.

2.33 Agerso Sund (55°13'N., 11°14'E.), the northernmost

passage leading from Store Baelt into Smalandsfarvandet, has

depths of 10.2 to 61m in the fairway channel. It passes between

Egholm and Agerso, on the W side, and the coast of Sjaelland,

on the E side.

From a position about 4 miles NW of the N extremity of

Egholm, the route through the sound leads ESE for 3.2 miles,

SE for 1 mile, S for 3 miles, and SE for 3.5 miles.

2.33 The fairway is marked by lighted buoys, buoys, and lighted

ranges.

2.33 Anchorage.—Bogevig, a bay lying between Egholm and the

N part of Agerso, provides anchorage for large vessels. The

roadstead has depths of 9 to 11m and lies between the steep-to

coastal bank and the channel leading through the sound.

havnen@nakskov.dk
Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 51

Pub. 194

2.33 Caution.—Several submarine cables, which may best be

seen on the chart, extend across Agerso Sund.

2.33 Several dangerous wrecks, which may best be seen on the

chart, lie adjacent to the sides of the fairway channel.

2.33 Yacht racing marks may be moored adjacent to the E side of

the fairway channel from April to November.

2.34 Skaelskor (55°15'N., 11°18'E.) (World Port Index

No. 29530) is a small harbor lying in the SW section of the

passage connecting Skaelskor Fjord and Skaelskor Nor.

2.34 The entrance to Skaelskor Fjord lies at the E side of Agerso

Sund, 1.7 miles E of Egholm, and is protected by two breakwaters. The fjord extends about 1.5 miles in an ESE direction

and then 1 mile NE to the harbor. Skaelskor Nor, an extensive

shallow inlet, lies N of the harbor and is connected to the fjord

by a narrow passage.

2.34 Ice.—Ice may appear as early as the beginning of November

and remain until the first week of April. 

2.34 Tides—Currents.—Due partly to the shallow inlet lying N

of the harbor, the tidal currents are very strong. In calm

weather the currents change regularly every 6 hours and attain

rates up to 5 knots.

2.34 Depths—Limitations.—A dredged channel, with a controlling depth of 4.5m, leads through the fjord to the harbor. 

2.34 The harbor consists of two basins with depths of 3.8 to 4.6m

alongside. Vessels up to 60m in length, 10m beam, and 4.1m

draft can be accommodated.

2.34 It is reported that the harbor is used mainly by yachts and

fishing vessels, and seldom by commercial vessels.

2.34 Aspect.—The entrance channel is marked by buoys and is

indicated by a lighted range.

2.34 A prominent red church, with a red roof, stands in the town

and a conspicuous chimney is situated 0.8 mile W of it. A

prominent red church stands at Boeslunde, 3.4 miles NNE of

the entrance to the fjord.

2.34 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory but is recommended

due to the strong currents in the area. 

2.34 Caution.—The fjord and inlet are designated as a nature

reserve and entry is subject to numerous restrictions.

2.35 Stigsnaesvaerket Havn (55°12'N., 11°15'E.) (World

Port Index No. 29545) lies on the E side of Agerso Sund, 1.7

miles NE of the S extremity of Agerso, and serves a power

plant. The fairway channel leading to the harbor has a dredged

depth of 18m.

2.35 A T-shaped oil pier projects about 600m from the shore and

has a depth of 16m alongside the head. The berth, formed by

additional mooring dolphins, is 235m long. There are no length

or beam restrictions at this berth but vessels are limited to a

draft of 15m.

2.35 A coal discharge quay is situated close N of the oil pier. The

berth is 300m long and has a depth of 18m alongside. Vessels

up to 170,000 dwt, 300m in length, 45m beam, and 17m draft

can be accommodated.

2.35 A coal-loading berth, 135m long, is situated close N of the

discharge quay and has a depth of 9m alongside. It can accommodate vessels up to 150m in length, 19m beam, and 8.5m

draft.

2.35 An ash quay is situated close S of the oil pier. The berth is

60m long and has a depth of 8m alongside. It can accommodate vessels up to 130m in length and 7.5m draft.

2.35 Stigsnaes Ferry Harbor is situated 0.5 mile NW of Stigsnaesvaerket Havn. This harbor is used exclusively by small

ferries and is closed to all other traffic.

2.35 Pilotage.—Pilotage for Stigsnaesvaerket Havn is compulsory for dry cargo vessels over 8,000 dwt unless an exemption

has been granted. Exemptions are made for vessels under 8,000

dwt which are frequent visitors. Pilots are provided by the

DanPilot (Great Belt), Spodsbjerg station. For further information, see Pilotage in paragraph 1.1.

2.35 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board about 4 miles NW

of the N extremity of Egholm. Vessels should send an ETA 72

hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance.

2.36 Gulfhavn (Stigsnaes Oil Pier) (55°12'N., 11°15'E.),

situated 0.5 mile SE of Stigsnaesvaerket Havn, serves a refinery.

2.36 Tides—Currents.—The currents at Stigsnaesvaerket Havn

and Gulfhavn run parallel with the pier heads and attain a maximum rate of about 2 knots.

Depths—Limitations.—The facility consists of a T-shaped

pier extending 306m from the shore. The pier head is 500m

long and provides three main berths, with depths of 7.5 to 16m

alongside. Tankers up to 120,000 dwt (170,000 dwt partly

loaded), 280m in length, and 15.5m draft can be accommodated.

2.36 Aspect.—Two conspicuous chimneys stand near the power

plant at Stigsnaesvaerket Havn. A prominent tank farm is

situated in the vicinity of Gulfhavn.

2.36 A conspicuous castle stands at Borreby, about 2 miles NE of

Stigsnaesvaerket Havn, and a prominent white church is

situated about 1 mile E of it.

2.36 Pilotage.—Pilotage for Gulfhavn is compulsory for vessels

over 1,500 dwt or over 4,500 grt. Pilots are provided by the

Stigsnaesvaerket Havn

Gulfhavn—Stigsnaes Oil Pier
52 Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 

Pub. 194

DanPilot (Great Belt), Spodsbjerg station. For further information, see Pilotage in paragraphs 1.1 and 2.34.

2.37 Ferne Klint (55°11'N., 11°18'E.), the SE entrance

point of Agerso Sund, is situated 1.2 miles ESE of Gulfhavn

and formed by a small but conspicuous yellow cliff.

From Ferne Klint, the coast, for 7 miles E, is fronted by an

extensive shallow lagoon, which is protected on its S side by a

series of narrow strips of land and Glaeno, an island.

2.37 Glaeno (55°12'N., 11°26'E.) is situated 5 miles E of Ferne

Klint. This island rises in steep, yellow bluffs to a height of

26m midway along its length. The part of the lagoon lying W

of Glaeno is known as Basnaes Nor and the part lying E is

known as Holsteinborg Nor. The coastal bank fronting this

lagoon extends up to 1.5 miles seaward in places.

2.37 A prominent white church stands at Orslev, 1.5 miles NNW

of Glaeno, and a conspicuous windmill is situated 0.5 mile

ENE of it.

2.37 A conspicuous castle, with two thin spires, stands near

extensive woodlands at Holsteinborg, 1.3 miles NE of Glaeno.

2.37 The land extending between the E end of the lagoon and

Karrebaeksminde, 5 miles E, rises to an elevation of about

30m. Klinteby Klint, a steep and somewhat prominent cliff,

stands about 4 miles E of Glaeno.

2.37 Knudshoved (55°05'N., 11°37'E.), a narrow peninsula,

extends about 8 miles WNW from the S part of the Sjaelland

coast. It is wooded except for a narrow isthmus near the W end.

2.37 Kirkegrund (55°06'N., 11°22'E.), marked by a buoy on the

S side, is the westernmost of a chain of shoals and rocky areas

extending about 9 miles WNW from the W end of Knudshoved.

2.37 Venegrunde (55°06'N., 11°28'E.), an area of rocky shoal

patches, lies about midway between Kirkegrund and Knudshoved. It has a least depth of 1.7m near the E end and is

marked by buoys.

2.37 Knudshoved Rev (55°05'N., 11°35'E.), an area of rocky

patches with depths less than 10m, extends up to about 2 miles

WNW of the W end of Knudshoved and is marked by a buoy. 

2.37 Karrebaeksminde Bugt (55°07'N., 11°33'E.) is the water

area lying N of Venegrunde and Knudshoved Rev. It has fairly

regular depths up to 12m and is clear of dangers between the

shoals on its S side and the coastal bank on its N side. In the

middle of the bay the bottom is generally mud and toward the

sides the bottom is sand.

2.38 Avno Fjord (55°05'N., 11°45'E.) is a shallow inlet,

encumbered with rocks, which indents the coast at the SE end

of Karrebaeksminde Bugt. It separates Knudshoved peninsula

from the Sjaelland coast. A narrow and unmarked shallow

channel leads to the head of this fjord. 

2.38 From the head of Avno Fjord, at the root of Knudshoved

peninsula, the E coast of Karrebaeksminde Bugt trends NW for

10 miles to Karrebaeksmind. Dybso Fjord and Karrebaek Fjord

back the islands of Eno and Dybso, which together form the

outer shore of the N part of this stretch of coast. Both of these

fjords are shallow.

2.38 A prominent church, with a pointed tower, stands at Kong,

about miles 4 miles N of the root of the Knudshoved peninsula.

Another prominent red church is situated at Vester Egesborg,

about 3 miles N of Kong.

2.38 Karrebaeksminde (55°11'N., 11°39'E.), a small harbor, is

situated in the NE part of Karrebaeksminde Bugt. It is used by

small craft but is no longer used by commercial vessels.

2.38 Karrebaeksminde Red is situated in the NE corner of Karrebaeksminde Bugt and provides anchorage. The roadstead lies

within a small bight in the coastal bank close W of Karrebaeksminde and has depth of 7 to 8m, with good holding ground.

2.38 A dredged channel leads from the harbor area of Karrebaeksmind into a canal, which extends across Karrebaek Fjord

to the port of Naestved.

2.38 Caution.—Designated nature reserve areas are situated

within the waters of the lagoon (Basnaes Nor and Holsteinborg

Nor), Dybso Fjord, and Karrebaek Fjord. Entry into these areas

is subject to numerous restrictions.

2.38 Firing exercise areas, marked by buoys, occupy the central

and E parts of Dybso Fjord.

2.38 A fish farm area, which may best be seen on the chart, lies

centered about 2 miles SE of the SE extremity of Glaeno. 

Naestved (55°14'N., 11°45'E.)

World Port Index No. 29555

2.39 Naestved, the port for an industrial center, is situated

5 miles NE of Karrebaeksminde.

2.39 Tides—Current.—The current at the port is negligible. The

tidal currents at the entrance to Karrebaeksmind attain rates up

to 4 knots, but are much influenced by the wind.

2.39 Winds from NW can raise the water level in the fjord by up

to 1.2m and winds from E to SE can lower it by 0.5m. 

2.39 Depths—Limitations.—A dredged channel, marked by

buoys, leads from the harbor area of Karrebaeksmind into a

canal, which extends across Karrebaek Fjord to the port.

2.39 The entrance to the dredged channel at Karrebaeksmind is

protected by two breakwaters and is 70m wide. The dredged

channel has a bottom width of 20m. The canal has a surface

width of 40m and a minimum bottom width of 16m. The

dredged channel and canal have a controlling depth of 6m.

2.39 A fixed bridge, with a single bascule, spans the canal about

0.4 mile E of Karrebaeksminde. It has a navigable width of

22m and, when open, a vertical clearance of 20m.

2.39 An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 33m,

spans the canal 1.5 miles SW of the port.

2.39 A double-section swing bridge spans the canal about 1.4

miles SW of the port and has a navigable width of 42m.

2.39 The basins at Naestved provide about 1,100m of total quayage, with a depth of 6m alongside. There are facilities for

general cargo, timber, and bulk vessels. Vessels up to 118m in

length, 14.4m beam, and 4.8m draft, or 12.2m beam and 5.6m

draft, can be accommodated. 

2.39 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of 55m in

length and over proceeding to Naestved. Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board about 2 miles SW of the entrance to

Karrebaeksminde. Vessels exceeding 1,700 dwt are advised to

employ a tug.

2.39 Pilotage is provided by the main DanPilot (Great Belt),

Spodsbjerg station. For further information, see paragraph 1.1.

2.39 Naestved may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

port@naestvedport.dk
Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 53

Pub. 194

2.39 Regulations.—Speed through the fjord is limited to a maximum of 6 knots.

2.39 Vessels proceeding against the tidal current are required to

give way to vessels proceeding with it. 

2.39 Vessels over 1,800 dwt must transit through the single-bascule bridge with the assistance of a tug unless they are

equipped with an adequate bow thruster.

2.39 Caution.—Submarine cables and pipelines extend across

the canal in several places and are marked by notice boards.

2.40 Vejro (55°02'N., 11°22'E.), a low island, lies 9.5

miles WSW of the W end of the Knudshoved peninsula and is

well built over. A light is shown from a prominent tower, 16m

high, standing on the NE side of the island.

Vejro Vestre Flak, a shallow area of rocks and stones, extends up to about 2.5 miles NW of the island and is marked by

buoys.

A lighted buoy, marking the outer edge of the coastal bank in

this vicinity, is moored about 3.4 miles NW of Vero Light. 

Urne (54°57'N., 11°17'E.), a small harbor, is located on the

NW coast of Lolland, about 5.5 miles SSW of Vejro. It consists

of a basin connected to the shore by a causeway, 300m long.

The harbor has a controlling depth of 1m and is only used by

fishing boats.

The coast between Urne and Vigsnaes, 12 miles ESE, is

generally low except for a short hilly stretch located 1 mile S of

Kragenaes Havn. Numerous wooded areas fringe the shore and

some extend to the waters edge. 

2.40 Extensive shoal areas, which may best be seen on the chart,

occupy most of the S half of the W part of Smalandsfarvandet.

They surround the offshore islands and front the N coast of

Lolland. Several shallow channels lead between the offshore

islands but can be navigated only by small vessels.

2.41 Rago (54°58'N., 11°19'E.), a small and flat island,

lies on the shore bank, about 1.3 miles NE of Urne. It is low

and covered with bushes. A prominent disused lookout tower

stands at the E end of this island. Rago Kalv, an islet, lies close

W of Rago and is connected to it by a rocky ridge.

2.41 Rago Flak, a shoal area with depths of less than 5m,

surrounds these islands and extends up to about 3 miles NW.

Rago Sund is the shallow passage leading between these Rago

and the coast of Lolland.

2.41 Kragenaes Havn (54°55'N., 11°22'E.), a small harbor, is

situated 3 miles SE of Urne and used by ferries. The entrance,

which faces E, is 15m wide and has a controlling depth of 3m.

The two ferry berths are situated outside the harbor, close N of

the entrance, and have a depth of 3m alongside.

2.41 Fejo (54°57'N., 11°25'E.), a mostly flat and built over island,

lies centered 2.5 miles NE of Kragenaes Havn. A prominent

mill, without sails, stands at Osterby, about 1.5 miles W of the

E extremity of the island.

2.41 Skalo, an islet, lies close off the NW extremity of Fejo and is

connected to it by a causeway.

2.41 Skalo Havn, a small and shallow fishing boat harbor, is

situated on the S side of Skalo and Dybvig Havn, a small craft

harbor, is situated on the SE side of Fejo.

2.41 Vesterby Havn, a small harbor, is situated on the W side of

Fejo. The entrance, which faces SW, is 25m wide and has a

controlling depth of 3.9m. The harbor basin has depths of 1.4

to 3.4m and is used by ferries and pleasure craft.

2.42 Femo (54°59'N., 11°32'E.) lies 2.5 miles NE of the E

extremity of Fejo. This island is hilly in contrast to the adjacent

ones and rises to a height of 22m in its SE part. A prominent

church, with a pointed tower, stands on the W side of the

island.

2.42 Skellerev, a reef with a narrow strip of sand, lies about 1 mile

E of the E extremity of the island. 

2.42 Femo Sund leads SE between Femo and Fejo. There is a

controlling depth of 9.1m in the N part of this channel, but it is

reduced to 3.7m in the S part lying between the islands. This

channel is used only by small craft with local knowledge.

2.42 Lilleo (54°54'N., 11°29'E.), a small island with several

houses, lies 2.3 miles S of the E extremity of Fejo. 

2.42 Asko (54°53'N., 11°29'E.) lies close S of Lilleo and is

connected to it by a causeway. This island is flat and a small

village stands on its N side. A prominent church is situated

close S of the village in the N part of the island. Asko Havn, a

small craft harbor, lies close off the SW end of the island and is

connected to the shore by a causeway. The entrance is 12m

wide and has a controlling depth of 3m. 

2.42 Lindholm (54°53'N., 11°27'E.), a partly wooded and comparatively high islet, lies on a shallow spit extending from the

coast of Lolland, 1 mile WSW of Asko.

2.42 Vigsnaes (54°54'N., 11°39'E.), a low and partially-wooded

peninsula, forms the NE extremity of Lolland. Vigso, an islet,

lies on the coastal bank, close N of the N end of this peninsula.

Vigso Skal, a rocky shoal with a least depth of 2.8m, extends

about 1 mile NE of Vigso and is marked by a buoy.

2.42 Caution.—Several areas lying in the vicinity of Rago and

Rago Flak have been designated as Wild Life Reserves. Entry

into these areas is subject to numerous restrictions.

2.42 A marine farm area, marked by buoys, lies close NE of Rago

Flak.

2.42 Several submarine cables, which may best be seen on the

chart, extend between the offshore islands and the coast of Lolland.

2.43 Staldyb (55°00'N., 11°18'E.) is the channel leading in

Vejro Light
54 Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 

Pub. 194

a SSE direction for about 9 miles between the bank fronting

Lolland, on the SW side, and the shoals extending NW from

Fejo, on the NE side. The fairway passes between Rago and

Skalo and is marked by buoys.

2.43 Lindholm Dyb (54°54'N., 11°25'E.), marked by buoys, is a

continuation of Staldyb. This channel leads in a SE direction

for about 3.5 miles and passes close SW of Asko.

2.43 Bandholm Rende (54°51'N., 11°32'E.), a dredged approach

channel, leads about 2 miles SE from the inner end of Lindholm Dyb to the outer entrance channel of Bandholm.

2.43 Oreby Rende (54°51'N., 11°32'E.), a dredged approach

channel, leads in a SE direction from Bandholm Rende to

Sakskobing.

2.43 Depths—Limitations.—The controlling depth through Stakyb and Lindholm Dyb is 9m, but the fairway is very narrow

and intricate. The controlling depth through Bandholm Rende

is 5.5m and the controlling depth through Oreby Rende is 3m.

2.43 Caution.—The banks on either side of Staldyb are steep-to

and soundings give little warning of approaching the edges.

The positions of the banks are generally indicated by the appearance of a lighter sheen in the water and by ripples along

their edges. 

2.44 Bandholm (54°50'N., 11°30'E.) (World Port Index

No. 29670), a small port, serves the city of Maribo, 4 miles S.

2.44 Tides—Currents.—Gales from NW can raise the water

level by up to 1m and gales from SW can lower it by the same

amount. 

2.44 Depths—Limitations.—The dredged entrance channel

leading SSW from Bandholm Rende has a controlling depth of

5.8m. The harbor entrance faces NE and is 55m wide. The two

harbor basins provide about 500m of total quayage with depths

of 4.4 to 5.8m alongside. Vessels up to 5.1m draft can enter.

There are facilities for general cargo and bulk vessels. Vessels

up to 120m in length can be accommodated, dependent on their

draft.

2.44 Aspect.—The entrance channel is indicated by a lighted

range. A prominent silo stands on the E side of the harbor. A

conspicuous red church, with a thin spire, is situated near the

W end of the town.

2.44 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is advised. Pilots

are provided by the DanPilot (Great Belt), Spodsbjerg station.

For further information, see Pilotage in paragraph 1.1.

2.44 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board about 1.5 miles

NNE of Kragenaes Havn.

2.45 Sakskobing (54°48'N., 11°38'E.) (World Port Index

No. 29660), a small harbor, is situated at the head of Sakskobing Fjord.

2.45 Winds from NW to NE can raise the water level by up to 1m

and winds from S to SE can lower it by the same amount. A

small river flowing into the head of the harbor can sometimes

cause an outgoing current. The range of tide is 0.3m.

2.45 The dredged entrance channel has a controlling depth of 3m.

The harbor basin has depths of 2 to 3m alongside and is used

by coasters and small craft. Vessels up to 82m in length, 12m

beam, and 3m draft can be handled.

2.45 Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 100 nrt. Pilots are

provided by the DanPilot (Great Belt), Spodsbjerg station. For

further information, see Pilotage in paragraph 1.1. Vessels generally navigate only during daylight as there are no lighted navigational aids.

2.45 Oreby Pier, 30m long, extends from the N shore at the

entrance to the fjord. Between this pier and the harbor, vessels

of 30 grt and over must not exceed a speed of 4 knots and vessels of less than 30 grt must not exceed a speed of 6 knots.

2.46 Falster (54°57'N., 11°48'E.), a large island, lies E of

Lolland. Its NW part consists of a low partly-wooded peninsula

indented by Valse Vig, a shallow and rock-encumbered bay.

2.46 Orehoved (54°58'N., 11°50'E.), a salient point on the N side

of Falster, is the E entrance point of Valse Vig. Dyrefod, a

wooded islet, lies close N of this point.

2.46 Vesterskov Flak and Dyrefod Flak, two rocky shoal areas

with depths of less than 3m, extend up to about 3 miles W and

2.3 miles NW, respectively, of Orehoved.

2.46 The meridian dividing the W and E sections of Smalandsfarvandet passes through Orehoved.

2.46 Orehoved Havn (54°58'N., 11°51'E.), a small harbor, is

located about 1 mile ESE of Orehoved. It consists of a pier,

about 200m wide, extending 0.2 mile NNE from the shore. An

approach channel, 50m wide, leads to the pier. It has a controlling depth of 7m and is indicated by a lighted range. The

pier has depths of 5 to 7m alongside and can handle vessels up

to 150m in length and 6.5m draft. Prominent warehouses are

situated on the pier. Pilotage is advised for vessels without

local knowledge. Pilots can be contacted on VHF channel 16

and are provided by the Vordingborg (Masnedo) station.

2.46 A prominent church, with a black spire, stands at Gyldenbjerg, 1 mile S of Orehoved Havn. Another prominent church,

red with a pointed tower, is situated at Valse, about 3 miles SW

of Orehoved Havn.

2.46 Directions.—The entrance channels leading from the Store

Baelt open into an area with depths of 9 to 29m. From this

area, the main transit route through Smalandsfarvandet leads

ESE and E, passing between Vejro and Kirkegrund. It then

passes S of Knudshoved, N of Orehoved, and continues SE into

the E section of Smalandsfarvandet.

2.47 Guldborg Sund (54°52'N., 11°45'E.), the passage

leading SSE between Lolland and Falster, is used mainly by

vessels proceeding through the N approach to Nykobing.

2.47 Ice.—Generally, ice appears in the N approach to this passage

in early January and remains until early March. The fairway

channel is seldom ice-free throughout the winter, but an icebreaker is available.

2.47 Tides—Currents.—During settled weather, the tidal currents in the sound change direction regularly and attain rates of

1 to 2 knots. In unsettled weather, especially immediately after

the onset of a gale from SE, a current may run N for several

days and attain rates up to 4 knots in the narrower parts of the

channel. 

2.47 Depths—Limitations.—The channel is entered about 4.5

miles N of the N end of Vigsnaes and leads in a SE direction

between the dangers fronting the NE end of Lolland and the

NW end of Falster.

2.47 The fairway has a controlling depth of 6.1m as far as Nykobing. Navigation of the passage is allowed only in daylight.

2.47 The controlling depth of the S approach to Nykoping, which
Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 55

Pub. 194

leads through the sound from Fehmarn Belt (see paragraph

4.1), is only 2.1m.

2.47 Aspect.—An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about 2

miles E of the E extremity of Femo and marks the seaward

entrance of the channel leading through the sound. The fairway

is marked by buoys and, in places, fluorescent beacons.

2.47 A prominent church, with a thin spire, stands at Klippinge,

2.6 miles NE of the Guldborg Bridge. Another prominent

church, with a tower, stands at Brarup, 1.5 miles SSE of Klippinge.

2.47 A prominent red church, with a stepped tower, is situated at

Majbolle, 2.3 miles SSW of the Guldborg Bridge.

2.47 The Guldborg Bridge (54°52'N., 11°45'E.), a road bridge

with a double bascule span, crosses the sound at Guldborg,

about 4 miles above the mouth. The bascule span is situated

between the two central pillars and provides a navigable width

of 30m. The bascule span has a vertical clearance of only 4m

when closed. The opening through the bridge is lighted on both

sides. 

2.47 From the Guldborg Bridge, a narrow, winding channel leads

SSE for 7.5 miles to Nykobing.

Nykobing (54°46'N., 11°52'E.)

World Port Index No. 29630

2.48 Nykobing is the largest city on Falster. It is a commercial and industrial center and an important railroad junction. The port is situated near the middle of the E side of Guldborg Sund.

2.48 Tides—Currents.—The mean range of tide at the port is

0.4m. Gales from NW to NE can raise the water level by up to

1.5m and gales from SE to SW can lower it by as much as

0.8m.

2.48 Depths—Limitations.—The harbor consists of a continuous quay, 1,000m long, extending along the E side of the fairway channel and three small basins. The quay has a depth of

6.2m alongside; the basins have depths of 2 to 6.2m alongside.

2.48 There are facilities for general cargo, bulk, tanker, and fishing vessels. Vessels up to 5,000 dwt, 129m in length, 20m

beam, and 5.8m draft can be accommodated. 

2.48 Aspect.—A prominent silo and several tanks are situated

near the N end of the main quay.

2.48 The King Frederik IX Bridge spans the sound close S of the

harbor and is conspicuous. This road and railway bridge has a

single bascule. When raised the bridge has a navigable width of

20m. It has a vertical clearance of only 4m when closed.

2.48 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for tankers, but recommended for vessels without local knowledge. Pilots can be

contacted by VHF and board about 2.3 miles E of the E extremity of Femo, near the outer approach lighted buoy.

2.48 Pilotage is provided by the main DanPilot (Great Belt),

Spodsbjerg station. For further information, see paragraph 1.1.

2.48 Nykobing may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

2.48 Caution.—Several areas within the sound located within

about 1 mile of the harbor have been designated Wildlife Reserves; entry is subject to numerous restrictions.

Smalandsfarvandet—East Part

2.49 Oringe (55°00'N., 11°55'E.), a small peninsula, is

located on the S coast of Sjaelland, 3 miles NE of Orehoved

Havn. A conspicuous complex of hospital buildings, surrounded by woods, stands on the E part of this peninsula.

Vordinborg Nordhavn, a small and shallow harbor, is situated on the N side of a small bay lying on the N side of the

peninsula. It is used only by small craft, yachts, and fishing

boats.

The shallow coastal bank fronting the S side of Slaelland in

the vicinity of Oringe extends up to about 1.5 miles seaward.

Masnedo (54°59'N., 11°55'E.), a low island, lies close SW

of Oringe. A prominent electric power plant stands on the N

part of this island. A shoal area, with depths of less than 4m,

fronts the W side of this island and extends up to about 0.7

mile seaward.

Masnedo Kalv, a low islet, lies close S of the island. A shoal

area, with depths of less than 6m, fronts the NW side of this

islet and extends up to about 1 mile seaward.

Ore Light (55°00'N., 11°52'E.) is shown from a prominent

tower, 13m high, standing on the S shore of Sjaelland, about

1.5 miles W of Oringe.

Valdemars Tower, a conspicuous red building with a pointed

roof, is situated in the town of Vordingborg, 1.5 miles E of Ore

Light. A prominent church and a water tower stand 0.3 mile

WNW and 0.4 mile NE, respectively, of this tower.

2.49 Masnedsund (55°00'N., 11°54'E.) is the narrow passage

leading between the S side of Sjaelland and the N side of

Masnedo. This sound, which is about 3 miles long, is marked

by buoys and lighted ranges. The E end of the passage leads

ESE between the shallow shoal areas fronting the NE side of

Masnedo and the S side of Oringe.

2.49 The part of the fairway channel lying W of Masnedsund

Bridge has a controlling depth of 6.7m while the part lying E of

it has a controlling depth of 7m. Vessels up to 6.5m draft can

use this passage.

The Guldborg Bridge

The King Frederik IX Bridge

havne@nyk-f-kom.dk
56 Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 

Pub. 194

2.49 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in the passage change

direction regularly, every 6 hours, in settled weather and may

attain rates of 3 to 4 knots. During stormy weather, they

become irregular and a current may set in the same direction

for several consecutive days. Gales from W to NW can cause

an E current and gales from E to SE can cause a W current.

These currents may attain rates up to 5 knots.

2.49 Caution.—An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of

36m, spans the passage, about 0.3 mile NW of Masnedsund

Bridge. The three pylons supporting the cable are conspicuous.

2.49 Fishing stakes and traps may be moored adjacent to the N

side of the fairway in the NW part of Masnedsund from March

to December.

2.50 The Masnedsund Bridge (55°00'N., 11°53'E.), situated 0.9 mile SE of Ore Light, spans Masnedsund and connects

the S side of Sjaelland with the N side of Masnedo.

2.50 This road and railroad bridge has a single bascule span,

which provides a navigable width of 24.8m. Because the

bascule span does not raise to a vertical position, the navigable

width is reduced to 18.4m at a height of 32.9m.

2.50 When the bridge is closed, there is a vertical clearance of

4.8m at its N end and a vertical clearance of 5.4m at its S end.

Both sides of the navigable passage are marked by lights.

2.50 Pilotage.—Vessels of 1,500 dwt and over intending to pass

through the Masnedsund Bridge are advised to employ the

services of a pilot. Pilots are provided by the DanPilot (Great

Belt), Spodsbjerk station. For further information, see Pilotage in

paragraph 1.1.

2.50 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board about 1.6 miles W

of Ore Light.

2.50 Regulations.—Only one vessel at a time may pass through

the bridge and vessels under sail take precedence over powerdriven vessels. 

2.50 Caution.—Submarine cables and a gas pipeline, marked by

beacons and notice boards, extend between Sjaelland and the N

side of Masnedo, in the vicinity of the bridge. Magnetic anomalies, with deviations up to 70°°, have been experienced in

the vicinity of the cables.

2.51 Vordingborg Sydhavn (55°00'N., 11°54'E.) (World

Port Index No. 29560), formerly known as Masnedsund Havn,

is situated close E of Masnedsund Bridge, on the S side of

Sjaelland. This harbor provides a quay, 460m long, with depths

of 6.5 to 7m alongside and a small craft basin. Vessels up to

93m in length, 16m beam, and 6.5m draft can be handled. A

number of conspicuous silos stand near the quay.

Masnedovaerkets Havn (55°00'N., 11°53'E.), a private

harbor, is situated close W of the Masnedsund Bridge, on the N

side of Masnedo. This facility mainly services the power plant.

The harbor provides a turning basin and a quay, 270m long,

with a depth of 6.7m alongside. Vessels up to 100m in length,

17m beam, and 6.5m draft can be accommodated.

2.51 Masnedo Godningshavn (54°59'N., 11°54'E.), formerly

known as Masnedo Benzinhavn, is situated near the S extremity of Masnedo. This small harbor consists of a single basin. It

provides a tanker berth at the W side with a depth of 5m alongside. Vessels up to 100m in length, 15m beam, and 4m draft

can be accommodated.

2.51 Caution.—Depths alongside the above facilities can be

raised or lowered by strong winds. 

2.52 Storstrom (54°58'N., 11°53'E.) is the passage lying

between the coastal bank fronting the NW side of Falster and

the S side of Masnedo. This passage is about 5 miles long and

extends ESE as far as Faro (54°57'N., 12°00'E.).

2.52 A detached shoal patch lies about 0.9 mile S of the S end of

Masnedo, near the center of the passage. It has a depth of 3.6m

and is marked by a buoy. Generally, vessels pass on the N side

of this danger.

2.52 Except for the above patch, the main fairway channel has

depths of 7.3 to 23m, the greatest being in the E part.

2.52 Gabense Lystbadehavn, a small harbor, lies on the S side of

the passage, 0.6 mile ESE of the S end of the Storstrom Bridge.

This harbor has a controlling depth of 2.5m and is used only by

small craft.

2.52 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in the passage change

direction regularly in settled weather and attain rates of 1 to 2

knots. The flood current sets E and the ebb current sets W. In

stormy weather they are irregular and a current may set in one

direction for a long period. During these periods the current

may attain a rate of 3 to 5 knots. Gales from W to NW can

Ore Light

Vordjngborg Sydhavn—The Masnedsund Bridge
Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 57

Pub. 194

cause an E current and gales from E to SE can cause a W current.

2.52 Pilotage.—Pilots are provided by the DanPilot (Great Belt),

Spodsbjerk station. For further information, see Pilotage in

paragraph 1.1.

2.52 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board southeastbound

vessels about 1.6 miles W of Ore Light. Pilots for northwestbound vessels entering this passage from the Baltic Sea are

provided by the station at Hesnaes (54°49'N., 12°09'E.).

2.52 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken anywhere in the

passage, clear of the submarine cables, cable area, and bridges. 

2.52 Caution.—A submarine cable area, 1.3 miles wide, extends

SW across the passage from the S shore of Masnedo. A submarine cable extends N across the passage from close W of

Orehoved Havn to the S side of Sjaelland.

2.53 The Storstrom Bridge (54°58'N., 11°53'E.) spans

Storstrom and extends SSW between the S extremity of

Masnedo and the N coast of Falster. It is a fixed bridge resting

on 51 piers, which are numbered 0 to 50 from the N end. The

central spans, numbered 21-22, 22-23, and 23-24, have conspicuous arched superstructures.

2.53 Span 21-22, the N arch, has a vertical clearance of 25.5m

and a navigable width of 95m. It is reserved for northwestbound traffic.

2.53 Span 22-23, the central arch, has a vertical clearance of 26m

and a navigable width of 125m. It is reserved for southeastbound traffic.

2.53 Span 23-24, the S arch, has a vertical clearance of 25.5m and

a navigable width of 95m. The remaining spans have a navigable width of 50m with vertical clearances decreasing toward

the shores.

2.53 At night, the sides of the passages under the N and central

arched spans are marked by lights visible to vessels approaching from either direction.

2.53 If necessary, because of the height of their masts, northwestbound vessels may pass through the central arched span,

but priority must be given to southeastbound vessels.

2.53 Caution.—Due to electric cables on the bridge, passage is

exceptionally dangerous with aerials exceeding the height of

the vertical clearances.

2.54 Faro (54°57'N., 12°00'E.), a low island, lies about

midway between the S side of Sjaelland and the N side of

Falster, 3.5 miles SE of the S end of Masnedo. This island is

treeless but a few farms are situated on it.

2.54 Bogo (54°56'N., 12°03'E.), a hilly island, lies close SE of

Faro and is built over at its E end. A prominent gray church,

with a square tower, stands on the N part of the island and a

conspicuous windmill is situated 0.7 miles S of it.

2.54 The NW end of this island is connected to the S side of Faro

by a narrow causeway. Barholm, an islet, lies close off the SE

end of Bogo. A narrow causeway extends across this islet from

the SE extremity of the island and connects with Borgsted, a

peninsula located at the SW end of Mon.

2.54 Bogo Havn, a small craft harbor, is situated on the S side of

the island, about 1 mile W of the SE extremity. It has an entrance, 15m wide, with a controlling depth of 2.5m. 

2.54 The Sjaelland Faro Bridge (54°58'N., 12°00'E.), a fixed

road bridge, extends NNE from the N end of Faro to the S side

of Sjaelland. The spans situated over the fairway channels have

a navigable width of 40m between the piers and a vertical

clearance of 20m. 

2.54 The Faro Falster Bridge (54°57'N., 11°59'E.), a cantilever

road bridge, extends SW from the SW side of Faro to the N

side of Falster. The span situated over the fairway channel has

a navigable width of 260m between the piers and a vertical

clearance of 26m.

2.54 Caution.—A submarine cable extends NE between the N

side Falster and the S side of Sjaelland, about 0.4 mile W of

Faro. Another submarine cable extends N between the N side

of Falster and the SE end of Bogo.

2.55 Taero (54°57'N., 12°05'E.), a low island, is situated 3

miles E of Faro and a hillock, 11m high, rises in its E part.

Lilleo, a low islet, lies on a shallow shoal flat, 0.5 mile W of

the W end of the island.

Petersvaerft Havn is situated on the S side of Sjaelland,

about 1 mile NW of the E extremity of Taero. This small craft

harbor consists of a pier, 69m long, with a depth of 1.5m alongside the head and a shallow basin.

2.55 Lango (54°59'N., 12°07'E.), a small island, is located 1.2

miles NNE of Taero. It lies about 0.5 mile off the S side of

Sjaelland to which it is connected by a causeway.

2.55 Boren, 33m high, is a prominent hill, which rises on the N

side of Mon, 1.5 miles SE of the E end of Lango.

2.55 The Dronning Alexandrines Bridge (54°59'N., 12°10'E.),

formerly known as the Ulvsund Bridge, is a fixed road bridge

situated 1.5 miles NE of Lango. It extends between embankments projecting from the S side of Sjaelland and Kosterland, a

peninsula on the N side of Mon.

2.55 The central navigational opening can easily be identified by

its arched superstructure. This opening has an overall navigable width of 120m between the piers and a width of 80m

under the central part of the arch. It provides a vertical clearance of 25m under the central part of the arch, which decreases

to 6m alongside the piers.

The Storstrom Bridge

The Faro Falster Bridge
58 Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 

Pub. 194

2.55 Regulations.—Only one vessel at a time may pass through

the bridge and vessels under sail take precedence over powerdriven vessels. 

2.55 Vessels proceeding W through under the arched opening take

precedence over vessels proceeding E. 

2.55 Caution.—Due to electric cables on the Dronning Alexandrines Bridge, passage under it is exceptionally dangerous with

aerials exceeding the height of the vertical clearance.

2.55 Submarine cables extends NNW between Taero and the S

side of Sjaelland.

2.56 Kalvehave Havn (55°00'N., 12°10'E.), a small craft

harbor, is situated at the SE extremity of Sjaelland, close E of

the Dronning Alexandrines Bridge. The entrance, which faces

SE, is 30m wide and has a controlling depth of 2.5m.

 A prominent white church, with a square tower, stands at

Kalvehave, 0.8 mile W of the harbor.

2.56 Stege Bugt (55°00'N., 12°14'E.), a large bay, lies NE of

Kalvehave Havn and is encumbered by extensive shallow flats.

2.56 Lindholm (55°00'N., 12°13'E.), a small island, lies near the

center of Stege Bugt, 2.3 miles NE of the Dronning Alexandrines Bridge. A conspicuous chimney stands on this low

islet. A small craft harbor, which services a veterinary research

facility, is situated on the SW side of the island. 

2.56 Nyord (55°03'N., 12°13'E.), a low island, lies on the N side

of Stege Bught and is connected by a bridge at its E side to

Ulvshale, a peninsula projecting NW from the N side of Mon.

A large drying flat extends up to 2 miles NE from the N side of

this island.

2.56 A small craft harbor, protected by two breakwaters, is situated near the SW end of the island. A conspicuous church, with

a pointed spire, stands in the village close N of the harbor and a

tall chimney is situated close E of it. 

2.56 Stege Havn (54°59'N., 12°17'E.) (World Port Index No.

29600), a small harbor, is situated at the head of Stege Bugt,

about 4 miles E of Kalvehave Havn. It lies at the entrance to

Stege Nor, a shallow lake.

2.56 Koster Rende, the main approach channel, leads in an E

direction across the shallow flats to the harbor. It is marked by

buoys and has a controlling depth of 4.1m.

2.56 The outer and inner parts of the harbor are separated by a

bascule bridge. A conspicuous chimney stands at a sugar factory close SW of the harbor. A prominent church, with a spire,

is situated close NE of the harbor. The outer harbor, which has

a depth of 4m, consists of a quay and two small basins. Vessels

up to 80m in length and 3.9m draft can be accommodated.

2.56 Caution.—Several designated nature reserve areas lie within

Stege Bught and in the vicinity of Nyord. Entry into these areas

is subject to numerous restrictions.

2.56 Submarine cables extend E between Lindholm and the E side

of Stege Bugt. 

2.57 Faergestrom (54°59'N., 11°57'E.), a narrow channel,

extends ESE across the shoal bank fronting the S side of

Sjaelland. It connects the E end of Masnedsund to the W end of

Ny Farvand, about 1.5 miles W of the Sjaelland Faro Bridge.

The fairway has depths of 6.2 to 10.2m in mid-channel. A

narrow passage branches SE from the junction of Faergestrom

and Ny Farvand to connect with Kalvestrom.

2.57 Ny Farvand (54°58'N., 11°58'E.), a very narrow channel,

extends E for about 1.5 miles. It connects the E end of Faergestrom to the W end of Ulvsund, in the vicinity of the Sjaelland

Faro Bridge. This channel has a controlling depth of only

4.4m.

2.57 Ulvsund (54°58'N., 12°09'E.), entered from the E end of Ny

Farvand, extends ESE and passes under the Sjaelland Faro

Bridge. The channel continues NE and passes between Taero

and the S side of Sjaelland and then between the N end of

Taero and the S end of Lango. It then leads NE and passes

under the Dronning Alexandrines Bridge.

2.57 From the above bridge, the channel continues in a N direction along the W side of Stege Bught. It then passes between

the W side of Nyord and the Sjaelland coast to connect with the

S end of Bogestrom. 

Kalvestrom (55°04'N., 12°10'E.) leads E from close SE of

the S end of Masnedo and has depths up to 11m in places. This

narrow channel passes N of Faro and then between Bogo and

Taero. It then ends at a shallow bar. This passage has a controlling depth of 2.5m at the W end, 1.5 miles WNW of Faro,

and is used only by pleasure craft.

Bogestrom (55°04'N., 12°10'E.), a passage leading N and

NE, lies in the SW part of Fakse Bugt (see paragraph 1.33). It

connects the outer end of Ulvsund to the Baltic Sea. This

buoyed passage has a controlling depth of 2.3m and is used

only by small craft and pleasure boats. It is subject to silting.

2.58 Sortso Gab (54°56'N., 12°00'E.) extends in a SE

direction for about 3.5 miles from SW of Faro to the W end of

Stubbekobing. This passage connects the E end of Storstrom to

the W end of Gronsund. The fairway has depths of 10.9 to

38m, the greatest being in its central and NW parts.

Stubbekobing (54°53'N., 12°03'E.) (World Port Index No.

29580), a small harbor, is situated on the N coast of Falster. It

consists of a main commercial basin with an entrance, 25m

wide. A quay, 100m long, and a ferry berth are situated close

W of the main basin and are protected by a detached breakwater. A pleasure craft basin is situated close E of the main

basin.

2.58 An entrance channel, with a controlling depth of 5m, leads S

across the coastal bank to the harbor. The main basin has

depths of 2.5 to 5m alongside. Vessels up to 120m in length,

22m beam, and 4.8m draft can be accommodated.

2.58 The entrance channel is marked by buoys and indicated by a

lighted range. A conspicuous red church, with a red tower,

stands in the town, close S of the harbor. A prominent tall silo

is situated at the SW end of the harbor.

2.58 A directional sector light is shown from a prominent house

standing 0.7 mile W of the main harbor basin. 

2.58 Pilotage is not compulsory, but is advised for vessels without

The Dronning Alexandrines Bridge
Sector 2. Denmark—Store Baelt and Smalandsfarvandet 59

Pub. 194

local knowledge. Pilotage is provided by the main DanPilot

(Great Belt), Spodsbjerg station. For further information, see

paragraph 1.1.

2.58 Vessels can anchor, according to draft, off the harbor.

2.58 Caution.—Marine farms may be moored along the SW side

of Sortso Gab.

2.58 A detached shoal patch, with a depth of 3.4m, lies about 0.4

mile NW of the entrance to the main basin and is marked by a

buoy. 

2.59 Borgsted Light (54°53'N., 12°08'E.) is shown from a

prominent hut, 4m high, standing on the SW side of Mon,

about 2.2 miles ENE of Stubbekobing. A conspicuous white

church is situated at the head of Fanefjord, 1.5 miles E of the

light.

2.59 Harbolle Pynt (54°53'N., 12°08'E.), at the SW end of Mon,

is located 1.8 miles SE of Borgsted Light. A small pier, situated close NW of this point, has a berth at its head, 25m long,

with a depth of 3.8m alongside.

2.59 Harbolle Pynt Light (54°53'N., 12°08'E.) is shown from a

prominent framework tower standing 0.6 mile NW of the point.

2.59 Harbolle Havn, a small harbor, lies close NW of the light and

is protected by breakwaters. It is used only by pleasure craft

and fishing boats. The entrance faces SW and has a controlling

depth of 3m. 

2.59 Madses Klint (54°53'N., 12°12'E.), located 2.2 miles E of

Harbolle Pynt, is formed by a small yellow cliff, 22m high.

This point, at the SE end of Mon, forms the SE entrance point

of Gronsund.

2.59 Skansepynt (54°53'N., 12°07'E.), a prominent point at the E

side of Falster, is located about 0.5 mile WSW of Harbolle

Pynt Light. From this point, the coast extends 3.5 miles SSE to

Hestehoved. It is wooded in the S part with some high steep

cliffs.

2.59 A conspicuous high, white building is situated at Naesgard,

about 1.2 miles SSW of Skansepynt. It stands between some

woods and is visible from E. 

2.59 Hestehoved Light (54°50'N., 12°10'E.) is shown from a

prominent house, 4m high, standing on Hestehoved, the SW

entrance point of Gronsund.

2.60 Gronsund (54°54'N., 12°05'E.) connects the E end of

Sortso Gab to the Baltic Sea. This sound is entered in the

vicinity of Stubbekobing and leads in a SE direction between

the SW end of Mon and the NE part of Falster. The fairway

channel 

The coastal banks lying SE of Skansepynt and E of Harbolle

Pynt, with depths of less than 4m, extend up to 0.6 mile

seaward, in places. Stenpladerne, a detached rocky shoal, lies

on the W side of the channel, 0.3 mile W of Harbolle Pynt. It

has a least depth of 2.8m and is marked by a buoy.

The fairway channel rounds Skansepyn and then passes

close off Harbolle Pynt. The W part of the passage has depths

of 8 to 25m. 

An extensive shallow bank of shifting sand occupies much of

the NE part of Gronsund and its outer part is marked by a buoy

moored about 2 miles ENE of Hestehoved Light. Tolke Dyb

leads ESE from the vicinity of Harbolle Pynt, but the seaward

end of this channel is obstructed by a shallow bar.

Nyt Lob and Hestehoved Dyb are dredged channels leading

S and SE through the shoals in the SE part of Gronsund. The

fairway, which is 80m wide, is marked by buoys and indicated

by lighted ranges. The inner entrance lies 0.8 mile SSE of

Harbolle Pynt and is marked by a lighted buoy. The outer

entrance lies 0.6 mile E of Hestehoved Light and is marked by

a lighted buoy, moored 0.4 mile SE of it. This dredged channel

has a controlling depth of 5m, but is subject to silting.

2.60 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in the sound change

direction regularly, every 6 hours, in settled weather and attain

rates of 1 to 2 knots. In unsettled weather the direction and

velocity of the current is governed by the wind. Winds from W

to N can cause an E current; winds from E to S can cause a W

current. The currents may attain rates of 3 to 4 knots, but in the

narrow part of the fairway, off Harbolle Pynt, they may attain

rates of 5 to 6 knots.

Directions.—The route through the E part of Smalandsfarvandet is divided into two passages.

2.60 The S and main passage leads generally SE through Storstrom, Sortso Gab, and Gronsund into the Baltic Sea. This

passage has a controlling depth of 5m (Gronsund).

2.60 The N passage leads through Masnedsund, Faergestrom, Ny

Farvand, Ulvsund, and Bogestrom. It has a controlling depth of

4.4m at the W end (Ny Farvand) and a controlling depth of

2.3m at the E end (Bogestrom).

2.60 The passage through Kalvestrom is insignificant to navigation.

2.60 Caution.—Fishing stakes and traps may be moored adjacent

to the S side of the channel close W of Skansepynt.

2.60 Gales from NE may cause a heavy swell within Nyt Lob and

Hestehoved Dyb.

2.60 A submarine cable extends NE from the vicinity of Skansepynt to the SE end of Mon.

Borgsted Light

Hestehoved Light
61

Pub. 194

3. 

Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht

3.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 3 — CHART INFORMATION
63

Pub. 194

SECTOR 3 

DENMARK AND GERMANY—LILLE BAELT, FLENSBORG FJORD, AND KIELER BUCHT

3.0 Plan.—This sector describes the approaches to and the

passage through Lille Baelt. The coast extending W of Fyn

Hoved (55°37'N., 10°35'E.), including Odense Fjord, and the

coast extending W of Bjornsknude (55°42'N., 10°02'E.), including Vejle Fjord, are described first. This is followed by the

passage through Lille Baelt, which is divided into N, central,

and S parts. The fairways lying S of Fyn and Flensborg Fjord

are then described. This is followed by the shores of Kieler

Bucht as far as a line extending N between Markelsdorfer Huk

(54°32'N., 11°04'E.), the NW extremity of Fehmarn, and

Kappel Church (54°46'N., 11°02'E.), on Lolland. The main

shipping routes through this area are then described. The descriptive sequences are N to S through Lille Baelt and then W

to E along the coasts. 

General Remarks

3.1 Lille Baelt (Little Belt) is the westernmost of the

three passages that connect the Kattegat with the Baltic Sea.

This passage is entered at the N end between Bjornsknude

(55°42'N., 10°02'E.) and the island of Aebelo (55°39'N.,

10°10'E.). It is entered at the S end between Pols Huk

(54°53'N., 10°04'E.), on the island of Als, and Vejnaes Nakke

(54°49'N., 10°26'E.), on the island of Aero.

3.1 The coastal terrain in the vicinity of Lille Baelt is generally

low. The area is extensively cultivated with occasional large

wooded tracts interrupting the farm lands. 

3.1 In general, the bottom within Lille Baelt consists of sand,

mud, and gravel, which is underlaid with clay and forms a

good holding ground.

3.1 The Danish-German boundary runs approximately through

the middle of Flensborg Fjord.

3.1 Kieler Bucht, at the W end of the Baltic Sea, is considered to

include the waters lying between Die Schlei (54°40'N.,

10°02'E.) and the NW side of Fehmarn (54°32'N., 11°04'E.),

35 miles ESE.

Winds—Weather.—Weather conditions in Lille Baelt and

in the rest of the area covered by this sector are similar to those

in Store Baelt, The Sound, and the Kattegat. 

3.1 In the Baltic Sea proper the land drainage due to rains and

melting snow is greatest in the spring. However, the water level

does not reach its maximum during this season, as expected. In

fact the lowest water level occurs during April and May and the

highest during August and September. The cause of this

phenomena may be attributed to the prevailing winds over the

North Sea and the Baltic Sea areas. These prevailing winds are

from E during March, April, and May and from W at the end of

June or early July. During April and May the water level may

fall by as much as 0.1 to 0.3m below the mean level and during

September it may rise by as much as 0.1 to 0.2m above the

mean level. The area is also affected by notable changes in the

density of the water.

Ice.—Ice conditions in Lille Baelt vary with the severity of

the winter. In the N part of the passage, strong currents usually

prevent the formation of ice. However, in the S part, S of

Assens (55°16'N., 9°53'E.), drift ice from the Baltic Sea may

be encountered.

3.1 For details of Danish icebreaker services, see paragraph 2.1.

3.1 Germany provides icebreaker services during the winter in

the Baltic Sea area from three Ice Service Centers.

3.1 The center at Kiel-Holtenau covers the area from Flensburg

to the W coast of Fehmarn and the Nord-Ostsee Kanal (Kiel

Canal). It can be contacted on VHF channel 22 (Kiel Traffic).

3.1 The center at Lubeck covers the area from the W coast of

Fehmarn to the meridian of 11°42'E. It can be contacted on

VHF channel 13 (Trave Traffic).

3.1 The center at Stralsund covers the area from the meridian of

11°42'E to the German-Poland border. It can be contacted on

VHF channel 14 (Stralsund Traffic).

3.1 Requests for ice breaking assistance should be usually

directed to the appropriate Ice Service Center. In exceptional

circumstances, vessels may directly contact an ice breaker

working in the corresponding area. The requests should include the vessels’s name, call sign, nationality, size, ice class,

engine power, position, and destination.

3.1 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in these waters is negligible. However, fluctuations in sea level are caused by

changes in wind force and direction.

3.1 The currents in Lille Baelt may set quite strongly, particularly within the narrows at the N end of the passage. The

currents generally follow the direction of the fairways but

eddies are formed along the shores in certain places. Where

there are sharp bends in the narrower parts, the currents may

set strongly toward the shore.

3.1 In general, the direction of the current is governed by the

wind. Winds from ENE through S to SW produce a N current;

winds from other directions cause a S current. In the spring

when land drainage into the Baltic Sea is heaviest, the prevailing current sets N. Sometimes this current may set in the same

direction for several days regardless of the wind conditions. In

the succeeding months, the duration and strength of this current are more dependent on the prevailing winds.

Depths—Limitations.—The main channel through Lille

Baelt is 68 miles long and has a controlling depth of 11m.

3.1 The East Lille Baelt Bridge, with a vertical clearance of

44m, and the West Lille Baelt Bridge, with a vertical clearance

of 29m, span the passage in the N part and connect the peninsula of Jylland with the island of Fyn (see paragraph 3.12 and

paragraph 3.14).

3.1 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory in Lille Baelt, but is

advised for vessels without local knowledge. Vessels requiring

pilotage for this passage can obtain pilots for the southbound

transit at Skagen (57°47'N., 10°°44'E.) or from the main station

at Frederica (55°34'N., 9°45'E.). For the northbound transit, as

far as Vejle Fjord (55°9'N., 9°°50'E.), pilots can be obtained in

a position 4.5 miles SW of Assens (55°16'N., 9°53'E.) or 5

miles ESE of Gammel Pol Light (54°53'N., 10°04'E).

3.1 Pilots are arranged through the DanPilot (Belt and Fjord
64 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

Pilot), Fredericia station. Deep Sea (Transit) Pilots are also

available for routes N to Skagen, E to Helsingor, to Skaebaekvaethet, and to other ports in the Store Baelt located N of

55°20'N. For further information, see Pilotage in paragraph

1.1.

3.1 Caution.—Large vessels, which do not employ the services

of a pilot, should attempt to navigate the passage through Lille

Baelt only under good radar conditions or during good visibility.

3.1 Due to the strong currents in the narrow parts of the passage,

vessels navigating at night are advised to continuously operate

their depth-sounding instruments.

3.1 High-speed ferries may be encountered crossing the main

fairway routes within Lille Baelt and its approaches.

Lille Baelt—North Approach and Entrance

3.2 The N approach to Lille Baelt, which extends W as far

as Aebelo, is bounded, on the E side, by a line extending between Fyns Hoved (55°37'N., 10°35'E.) and the island of Samso, 9 miles N.

Vessels may approach from E via the channels leading

through the dangers lying between Fyns Hoved and the S end

of Samso. Vessels may also approach from N by passing W of

Samso. 

The S shore between Fyns Hoved and Aebelo, 14 miles W, is

generally low and barren, with several small wooded areas

lying near the coast.

The N side of the approach, which lies between Samso and

Bjornsknude (55°42'N., 10°02'E.), is described in Pub. 193,

Sailing Directions (Enroute) Skagerrak and Kattergat, Sector 8.

3.2 It is reported that a new Deep Water Route leads into Lille

Baelt from the E. This route is entered about 3.5 miles N of

Fyns Hoved. It is marked by buoys and has a least depth of

15.7m.

Fyns Hoved (55°37'N., 10°35'E.), previously described in

paragraph 2.3, is the E entrance point of the bight which curves

S to form the approach to Odense Fjord. This bight is entered

between Fyns Hoved and Agernaes, a wooded point located 10

miles W. There are general depths of less than 18m within the

bight, but the 10m curve lies up to 1.5 miles offshore in most

parts.

The E side of the bight between Fyns Hoved and Skoven, 5.5

miles S, is irregular and mostly consists of a beach, backed by

bare hills. The coast at the W side of the bight is low and bare.

A small and shallow bay lies close S of Fyns Hoved.

3.2 Korshavn Light (55°36'N., 10°37'E.) is shown from a

tower, 3m high, standing on a low point extending S from the

inner side of Fyns Hoved. A small and shallow bay lies close S

of this light. 

3.2 Skoven (55°32'N., 10°34'E.), located at the E side of the

entrance to Odense Fjord, is formed by a bare, rocky peninsula,

15m high. A light is shown from a prominent framework tower,

7m high, standing on the N part of the peninsula.

3.2 Dalby Bugt, a small bay lying close E of Skoven, provides

sheltered anchorage to small vessels, in depths of 5 to 8m,

good holding ground. 

3.2 Enebaerodde Light (55°31'N., 10°34'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 14m high, standing at the SE end of Hals, a

long and narrow peninsula forming the W side of the entrance

3.3 Odense Fjord (55°31'N., 10°34'E.) is entered through

Gabet, a narrow passage lying between Hals and Skoven. This

extensive fjord is mostly shallow with several small islands

lying within it.

A narrow winding channel, about 7 miles long, leads through

the shallows to the outer entrance of the Odense Kanal. This

canal continues in a SSW direction for about 4 miles to the port

of Odense.

3.3 Bregnor (55°29'N., 10°36'E.), a small fishing harbor, is situated 2.3 miles SE of the entrance to the fjord. It consists of a

basin connected to the shore by a causeway. The entrance is

15m wide and has a controlling depth of 2m.

3.3 Lindo Skibsvaerft (55°28'N., 10°32'E.), a private shipyard,

is situated on the S side of the channel, about 2.7 miles SSW of

the entrance. The facilities include a fitting-out quay, 650m

long, with a depth of 7.5m alongside and three drydocks. The

largest drydock, which can handle vessels up to 650,000 dwt, is

415m long and 89.9m wide. Vessels up to 400m in length, 70m

beam, and 8.4m draft have been accommodated at this yard.

Odense (55°25'N., 10°23'E.)

World Port Index No. 29880 

3.4 Odense, a port serving the industrial area of the island

of Fyn, is situated at the head of Odense Fjord.

3.4 Ice.—Ice may occur in the fjord between January and March

but the entrance channel is kept open by ice-breaking tugs.

3.4 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in the fjord varies up to

0.6m. Gales from W to NE may raise the water level by up to

1.8m and gales from E to SW may lower it by as much as 1.5m.

3.4 During settled weather, the regular flood and ebb currents in

the fjord change every 6 hours. In Gabet the flood current runs

strongly, being increased by gales from the W. The strength

and direction of the ebb current depend on the prevailing wind.

3.4 Depths—Limitations.—The N part of the channel between

the entrance and Lindo Terminal Quay has a controlling depth

of 11m. The S part of the channel between this quay and the

port, including the canal, has a controlling depth of 7.5m.

3.4 The fairway of the channel has a bottom width of 30 to 40m.

In the straight sections of the canal the fairway has a surface

width of about 60m and a bottom width of 25m. At the bends

in the canal the fairway has a surface width of about 70m and a

bottom width of up to 32m.

3.4 Three main harbor basins and several facilities alongside the

Enebaerodde Light
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 65

Pub. 194

canal provide about 4,200m of total quayage, with depths of

4.5 to 7.5m alongside. A tanker wharf, 420m long, is located

outside the harbor, at the S side of the canal. It serves a power

station and has depths of 7.5m alongside. There are facilities

for general cargo, bulk, tanker, and LPG vessels. Vessels up to

160m in length and 6.8m draft can be accommodated at

Odense.

3.4 The Lindo Terminal Quay is situated close NE of Lindo

Skibsvaerft shipyard, about 2.7 miles SSW of the entrance to

the fjord, and is operated by the port. It is 280m long and has a

dredged depth of 11m alongside. Bulk vessels up to 250m in

length, 35m beam, and 9.9m draft can be accommodated at this

quay.

3.4 Aspect.—An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about

1.9 miles NW of Skoven Light. A shoal, with a depth of 6.9m,

lies near the edge of the bank extending NE from Hals. It is

located about 0.7 mile NW of Skoven Light and marked by a

buoy moored close E. The white sector of Skoven Light indicates the approach track, which leads SSE from the outer

approach lighted buoy and passes ENE of the shoal.

3.4 A lighted range, which may best be seen on the chart, then

indicates a track leading SW toward the fjord entrance. 

3.4 The fairway channel leading SSE through Gabet, the narrow

entrance of the fjord, is indicated by the white sector of Enebaerodde Light and also marked by lighted buoys.

3.4 The fairway channel within the fjord is indicated by lighted

ranges and is marked by beacons and buoys, which may best be

seen on the chart. The sides of the canal are illuminated by

sodium lights.

3.4 A conspicuous church stands 0.8 mile inland at Hasmark,

about 4 miles WNW of Enebaerodde Light. A prominent

wooded area is located near the root of Hals, about 2.8 miles

NW of Enebaerodde Light. Several conspicuous silos are situated in the port area.

3.4 Pilotage.—Pilotage between Gabet and the port is compulsory for vessels of 70m in length and over and for vessels with

a beam of 11m and over.

3.4 Pilotage between Gabet and Lindo is compulsory for vessels

of 100m in length and over and vessels for with a beam of 15m

and over.

3.4 Inbound vessels should report by VHF to the pilot station

upon crossing a line extending between Agernaes (55°38'N.,

10°18'E.) and Fyns Hoved (55°37'N., 10°35'E.). 

3.4 Pilots board inbound vessels in the vicinity of the outer

approach lighted buoy or in the vicinity of No. 23 Lighted

Buoy (55°39'N., 10°46'E.) at Route T and Lille Baelt.

3.4 Pilots can be arranged through the DanPilot (Belt and Fjord

Pilot), Fredericia station. For further information, see Pilotage

in paragraph 1.1.

3.4 Odense can be contacted as follows: 

3.4 Regulations.—A Reporting System operates in the fjord and

applies to all vessels over 20m in length that are equipped with

VHF. It covers the area between the outer approach lighted

buoy and Odense.

3.4 All vessels within the area must maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF channel 12. Inbound vessels must also

issue a position report on VHF channel 12 when passing latitude 55°33.5'N (at Approach Lighted Buoy).

3.4 The broadcast language used should be English. The report

must include the vessel name, direction (inbound/outbound),

position, and draft.

3.4 Vessels hearing a transmission must reply providing the

same information. The two meeting vessels should mutually

agree a safe passage.

3.4 Vessels at the port must keep a listening watch on VHF

channel 12 for 30 minutes before departure.

3.4 In addition to the regulations for navigating in Danish inland

waters, vessels must not exceed a speed of 6 knots in the

channel or canal. In addition, anchoring in the channel or canal

is prohibited. 

3.4 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in depths of 10 to 14m, in

the vicinity of the outer approach lighted buoy.

3.4 Caution.—Some sections of the fairway channel are subject

to silting.

3.4 A small passenger ferry crosses the canal at Stige, about 2

miles below the port. It is propelled by hand along a cable that

extends across the canal. Vessels should signal in time for the

cable to be lowered.

Odense

Odense—Lindo Terminal

odense.port@odensehavn.dk

http://www.odensehavn.dk
66 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

3.4 Two power cables, with a vertical clearance of 45m, span the

canal at Fynsvaerket, 0.7 mile SW of Stige. Another power

cable, with a vertical clearance of 53m, spans the canal, 0.5

mile N of the harbor basins.

3.4 A target firing range area is situated in the S part of the fjord.

A flashing light is shown from a signal mast standing 0.7 mile

E of Stige when firing is in progress.

3.4 A nature reserve area lies in the NW part of the fjord and

entry is subject to numerous restrictions.

3.5 Agernaes (55°37'N., 10°18'E.) is a low wooded point

located at the W end of the approach to Odense Fjord. A

prominent church stands about 1.5 miles inland at Krogsbolle,

3.8 miles SE of the point.

3.5 Aebelo (55°39'N., 10°11'E.) is located about 2 miles offshore, 4.5 miles WNW of Agernaes. This island, which forms

the S entrance point of the N part of Lille Baelt, lies on the

shallow shore bank that fronts the N coast of Fyn. It is connected at the S end by a narrow neck of land to Aebelo Holm,

an islet lying 1.3 miles S. Aebelo Holm, along with two other

islets, lies on a large sand flat fringing the coast.

3.5 Aebelo is wooded and has several steep light-colored bluffs

on its seaward side. Aebelo Light is shown from a prominent

tower, 18m high, standing on the NW extremity of the island.

3.5 Aebelo Rev, a shoal area with depths of less than 10m,

extends up to about 1 mile N of the island and is marked by a

lighted buoy. A large shoal bank, which dries in places, extends

between the SE end of the island and Agernaes.

3.5 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in depths of 9 to

13m, about 1 mile SW of Aebelo Light. This roadstead is sheltered from all winds except those from NW.

3.5 Bjornsknude (55°42'N., 10°02'E.), a low and sandy point,

forms the N entrance point of the N part of Lille Baelt. Bjornskunude Rev, a shoal bank with depths of less than 5m, extends

about 1.5 miles SE from the point and is marked by a buoy. A

sanitarium building stands near the point and is prominent

from seaward.

3.5 A prominent church is situated 1.2 miles inland at Klakring,

about 2.8 miles WNW of Bjornskunude. A conspicuous radio

mast stands at an elevation of 110m about 1.2 miles NW of this

church.

Lille Baelt—North Part

3.6 The N part of Lille Baelt as defined by this sector

comprises the area W of Aebelo, the area W of Bjornskunude,

Tragten, and Snaevringen. Tragten is the area lying close E of

Fredericia, where the passage becomes narrow, and Snaevringen includes the narrows S of Fredericia. The S limit of

Snaevringenarea is situated adjacent to Stenderup Hage

(55°28'N., 9°42'E.). Vejle Fjord and Kolding Fjord are also included in the description of the N part.

Bogense (55°34'N., 10°05'E.), a small port, is situated 5.5

miles SW of Aebelo Light. The harbor, which is protected by a

breakwater, consists of a narrow basin formed by two wide

moles and a yacht basin. 

A lighted range leads SSE and indicates the main approach

from seaward through the off-lying dangers. From a position

about 0.6 mile NNE of the harbor, the outer reach of the

dredged entrance channel leads SSW. This reach is indicated

by the white sector of the light shown from the head of the E

mole and is marked by lighted buoys. The inner reach of the

entrance channel then leads SSE into the harbor. A prominent

church stands in the town and three conspicuous chimneys are

situated in the vicinity of the harbor. The harbor entrance is

20m wide and has a controlling depth of 4.2m.

3.6 The harbor is used by coasters and small craft. Vessels up to

55m in length, 10m beam, and 3.5m draft can be accommodated.

3.6 Baring Vig (55°32'N., 9°55'E.) lies between Fogense Pynt,

located 1.5 miles WSW of Bogense, and Stavrshoved, 6.5

miles W. This bay has general depths of 11 to 16m seaward of

the 10m curve, which lies less than 1 mile from the shore in the

greater part of the bay. At the E side of the bay, the shorebank,

with depths of less than 5m, extends up to 1.5 miles N of

Fogense Pynt.

3.6 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor within this bay

during S winds, in depths of 10 to 14m, clay and mud.

3.6 Stavrshoved, the W entrance point, is 29m high and steep.

The land to the S and W of the bay is comparatively high and

rises to a height of about 70m.

3.7 Vejle Fjord (55°39'N., 9°50'E.) is entered between

Bjornsknude and Trelde Naes, 7.2 miles SW. It extends about

14 miles W to the port of Vejle. The land is high and wooded

on both sides of the fjord and there are no detached dangers

lying outside the fringing shorebanks. The bottom within the

fjord is mostly mud, with a large amount of weed near the

head.

3.7 Trelde Naes (55°38'N., 9°52'E.), the S entrance point, consists of a wooded peninsula that rises from a low point to a

height of 46m. A light is shown from a prominent framework

structure, 21m high, standing at the E extremity of this point.

3.7 Kasserodde Flak, a shoal area with depths of 2 to 9m,

extends up to about 2 miles E of the point and is marked by a

buoy.

3.7 Hvidbjerg, 28m high, is a prominent white sandhill, which

Aebelo Light
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 67

Pub. 194

rises 4 miles WNW of Trelde Naes Light. A conspicuous water

tower stands near a mental hospital at Brejninge, about 6.5

miles WNW of Trelde Naes Light.

3.7 A conspicuous manor house is situated on Rosenvold Point,

7.4 miles WSW of Bjornskunude. A prominent disused light

tower, 16m high, stands on Traeskohage Point, 2.5 miles

WNW of Rosenvold Point.

3.7 Caution.—Yacht racing marks may be moored within the

fjord from April to November.

Vejle (55°43'N., 9°33'E.)

World Port Index No. 30190 

3.8 The harbor at Vejle serves an industrial center and

consists of a single basin fronting the town.

3.8 Ice.—Icebreakers keep the port open as long as the The

Sound and Lille Baelt are open to navigation.

3.8 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range is about 0.6m. Gales

from NW to NE may raise the water level by up to 1.6m and

gales from S to SW may lower it by as much as 1.4m. Winds

from E may cause a strong current in the inner part of the

approach channel. 

3.8 Depths—Limitations.—A dredged approach channel, at the

head of the fjord, leads 1.3 miles W and then 1.2 miles WNW

to the harbor. It has a dredged depth of 7m over a bottom width

of about 30m.

3.8 A road bridge, with a vertical clearance of 40m, spans the

fjord, 0.5 mile E of the harbor.

3.8 A quay, 1,100m long, is located at the S side of the main

basin and a quay, 500m long, is located at the N side. Both

quays have a depth of 7m alongside. There are facilities for

general cargo, bulk, ro-ro, and tanker vessels. A pleasure boat

basin is situated at the NE end of the harbor. Vessels up to

165m in length, 30m beam, and 6.8m draft can be accommodated.

3.8 Aspect.—The dredged approach channel is marked by

stakes and buoys. Its seaward entrance is marked by a lighted

buoy. The inner fairway reach is indicated by a lighted range.

3.8 Several prominent silos stand on the S side of the main

harbor basin.

3.8 Pilotage.—Pilots may be contacted by VHF and board about

2.4 miles NE of Trelde Naes Light. Pilots can be arranged

through the DanPilot (Belt and Fjord Pilot), Fredericia station.

For further information, see Pilotage in paragraph 1.1.

3.8 Vejle port can be contacted as follows: 

3.8 Regulations.—Vessels within about 0.4 mile of the harbor

entrance must not exceed a speed of 4 knots. Vessels inside the

harbor basin must not exceed a speed of 3 knots.

3.8 Prior to departure from the harbor, vessels must ascertain

that no large ships are entering through the dredged approach

channel.

3.8 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor as convenient within the

fjord. Small vessels can anchor, in a depth of 5m, clay, close W

of Bjornsknude. Temporary anchorage can be taken by large

vessels, in a depth of 9m, close W of Rosenvold Point

(55°40'N., 09°49'E.), but the bottom is soft with poor holding

ground.

3.8 Caution.—A designated nature reserve area extends across

the fjord and up to 1 mile E of the road bridge.

3.9 Tragten (55°35'N., 9°52'E.) lies at the E approach to

Snaevringen, where the fairway channel becomes narrow.

The NW side between Trelde Naes Light and Skanseodde, 5

miles SW, is cliffy and wooded in the N part. It becomes lower

as Skanseodde and the port of Fredericia, close W, are

Vejle

Approaches to Vejle

The Vejle Bridge

vejleport@vejleport.dk

http://www.vejleport.dk
68 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

approached. The S side between Stavrshoved and Strib Odde, 3

miles W, is steep and wooded for 1.2 miles before becoming

lower. A conspicuous church stands at Rojleskov, 1 mile WSW

of Stavrshoved.

3.9 Skanseodde E Light (55°33'N., 9°46'E.), equipped with a

racon, is shown from a prominent floodlit mast, 12m high,

standing at the edge of the coastal bank, 0.2 mile SE of Skanseodde.

3.9 Strib Light (55°33'N., 9°45'E.), a directional sector light, is

shown from a prominent tower, 21m high, standing on Strib

Odde. It marks the SW end of Tragten and the NE end of

Snaevringen.

3.9 A detached shoal patch, with a least depth of 5.6m, lies about

0.6 mile offshore, 1.7 miles NE of Skanseodde E Light. This

shoal is unmarked and is located adjacent to the N side of the

fairway channel within Tragten.

3.9 A lighted buoy moored about 3.5 miles ESE of Trelde Naes

Light marks the deepest depths in the NE part of Tragten.

Lighted buoys moored about 3 miles, 2.3 miles, and 1.4 miles

NE of Skanseodde E Light mark the deepest depths in the route

leading through the SW part of Tragten. This route, which

provides a depth of 16m, is also indicated by the white sector

of Strib Light.

3.9 Caution.—A firing practice area, marked by buoys, extends

up to 1.2 miles seaward from the N shore of Tragten, about 2

miles NNE of Skanseodde.

Fredericia (55°34'N., 9°46'E.)

World Port Index No. 30170

3.10 Fredericia, an old fortress town, stands on the low

land close NW of Skanseodde at the entrance to Snaevringen.

Its main part is situated within a quadrant of moats and ramparts. The harbor facilities front the SW side of the town.

3.10 Ice.—The port is kept open all year round by the use of

icebreakers.

3.10 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range is about 0.3m. Winds

from N to E may raise the water level by up to 1.4m and winds

from S to W may lower it by as much as 1.6m.

3.10 The current off the harbor nearly always sets E because the

main S current in Lille Baelt forms an eddy off the port and the

N current follows the direction of the shore. This current off

the harbor can attain a rate of up to 6 knots.

3.10 Depths—Limitations.—The commercial port facilities are

described from E to W.

3.10 Skanseoddehavn (Shell) provides two oil and chemical

berths. Quay No. 41 is 175m long, with the use of mooring dolphins, and has a depth of 10m alongside. Quay No. 42 is 275m

long, with the use of mooring dolphins, and has a depth of 15m

alongside.

3.10 Kastelshavn has 520m of total quayage. It provides three

bulk berths with depths of 12m alongside.

3.10 Old Harbor (Vaerfthavn) has 200m of total quayage at the E

side of the basin. It provides two bulk berths with depths of 5.6

to 7.5m alongside.

3.10 Shipyard Harbor has 500m of total quayage at the W side of

the basin. It provides four berths, with depths of 5 to 6.5m

alongside, in addition to two floating docks and a drydock. The

largest floating dock is 227m long and 35m wide.

3.10 Vesthavn, the main cargo basin, has about 800m of total

quayage and an entrance, 180m wide. It provides six berths,

including ro-ro and container facilities, with depths of 7 to 10m

alongside.

3.10 Oil Harbor consists of a T-head tanker berth, 275m long,

with a depth of 15m alongside.

Strib Light (Strib Odde Light)

Fredericia—Skanseoddehavn and Kastelhavn

Fredericia—Center Harbor and Mollebugthavn
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 69

Pub. 194

3.10 Center Harbor has about 300m of total quayage. It provides

two berths for general cargo, bulk, and containers with depths

of 15m alongside.

3.10 Quay No. 23, a chemical tanker jetty, is situated in the center

of the basin. It provides a berth, 115m long, with a depth of

7.5m alongside.

3.10 Mollebugthavn, located in the W part of the port, has about

700m of total quayage. It provides five berths, including container and ro-ro facilities, with depths of 9 to 13.5m alongside.

An extensive pleasure craft basin is situated close SW of the W

end of Mollebugthavn.

3.10 Vessels up to 300m in length and 13.3m draft can be accommodated within the port (entry from NE).

3.10 Aspect.—A lighted range, which may best be seen on the

chart, leads NW to the facilities in the NW part of the harbor.

3.10 A number of prominent tanks, chimneys, and silos are situated in the SE part of the port.

3.10 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for loaded tankers over

1,500 dwt and for all vessels using oil berth No. 23, regardless

of size. Pilotage is also compulsory for all tankers in ballast

with uncleaned tanks which last carried oil products. Some

exemptions apply for frequent visitors.

3.10 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board about 4.5 miles

NE of Skanseodde E Light.

3.10 Pilots can be arranged through the DanPilot (Belt and Fjord

Pilot), Fredericia station. For further information, see Pilotage

in paragraph 1.1.

3.10 Fredericia port can be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

3.10 Regulations.—Vessels should send an ETA message to the

port at least 12 hours in advance.

3.10 Prior to departure from the harbor, vessels must ascertain

that no other ships are entering.

3.10 Anchorage.—FA1 and FA2, two designated anchorage areas

with depths of 16m, lie centered 1.5 miles SSW and 3.3 miles

SSE, respectively, of Trelde Naes Light.

3.11 Snaevringen (55°32'N., 9°45'E.), leading from the

SW end Tragten into the N part of Bredningen, follows a winding course for about 10 miles and has very irregular depths.

The fairway within this passage is narrow and passes under two

bridges. However, the route is not difficult to negotiate because

it is deep, the shorebanks in most places are fairly steep-to, and

there are numerous navigational aids.

3.12 Snaevringen—North Part.—The two reaches of the

passage lying between Fredericia and Gals Klint comprise the

N part of Snaevringen.

3.12 Strib Havn (55°32'N., 9°45'E.), a private harbor, is situated

0.3 mile SE of Strib Light and consists of two basins. The

southernmost basin is used as a yacht harbor. The northernmost

basin has a controlling depth of 5m and can be usd by vessels

up to 60m in length, 6m beam, and 4.5m draft. Pilots are

available, with at least 3 hours prior notice, from the station at

Fredericia but vessels can enter only during daylight. The current is reported to constantly set N across the entrances to the

basins. 

3.12 Anchorage is available, in depths of 11 to 13m, within the

bight lying S of Strib Havn, at the E side of the passage.

Although the bottom is steep, this anchorage area has no swell

during NE winds.

3.12 Lyngs Odde (55°31'N., 9°45'E.) is situated 1.5 miles SSW

of Strib Light, at the SW end of the first reach. Lyngs Odde

Flak, a shoal with depths of less than 10m, extends up to about

0.4 mile S of the point.

3.12 A conspicuous church stands inland at Erritso, 2.2 miles NW

of this point, and a prominent windmill, without sails, is situated 0.4 mile ESE of it.

3.12 Lyngs Odde Ammoniakhavn (55°31'N., 9°45'E.), situated

0.3 mile N of Lyngs Odde, is a private terminal. The quay,

which has additional mooring dolphins, is 55m long and has a

depth of 11m alongside. Vessels up to 207m in length can be

handled at this terminal. Pilotage is compulsory for vessels

over 500 grt or 60m and more in length. Pilots are provided by

the station at Fredericia. Three prominent tanks stand in the

vicinity of the terminal. 

3.12 The East Lille Baelt Bridge (55°31'N., 9°45'E.), a suspension bridge, spans the passage between Lyngs Odde and

Stavrby Skov, 0.6 mile ESE. It has a vertical clearance of 44m.

Several lights shown from the bridge and the white sector of

Strib Light indicate the navigable fairway.

3.12 Stavrby Skov Light (55°31'N., 9°46'E.), a directional sector

light, is shown from a hut, 2m high, standing on the E side of

the passage, close S of the bridge.

Fredericia—Vesthavn

post@adp-as.dk

The East Lille Baelt Bridge
70 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

3.12 Caution.—Several submarine gas pipelines, which may best

be seen on the chart, extend across the passage close N and S

of East Lille Baelt Bridge.

Middelfart (55°30'N., 9°44'E.)

World Port Index No. 29910 

3.13 Middelfart is situated on the S side of the passage,

about 1 mile SW of East Lille Baelt Bridge. The port consists

of three separate harbors. Gamle Havn, a quay at Ny Havn,

Hansens Havn, and a berth fronting the Nordiske Cable and

Wire Factory.

3.13 Ice.—Ice conditions occur occasionally, but traffic is seldom

hindered. Ice may appear off the harbor by late December and

in the harbor by the middle of January. Off the harbor, it may

last until late March.

3.13 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range is about 0.3m. Gales

from E to NE may raise the water level by up to 1.5m and gales

from W to SW may lower it by as much as 1.2m. When the

current is setting N in Lille Baelt, the current off the harbor

usually sets W.

3.13 Depths—Limitations.—The port facilities are described

from W to E. Gamle Havn, a small craft basin, is protected by a

mole. It has a depth of 4.5m and an entrance, 20m wide. The

Old Harbor, situated at the outer side of the mole, has two

quays, 80m and 100m long, with depths of 6.5 to 6.8m alongside.

3.13 The New Harbor (Ny Havn) has two quays, 100m and 190m

long, with depths of 5.2m and 6m, respectively, alongside.

3.13 AC Hansens Quay, which is approached through a dredged

channel, is 90m long and has a depth of 4.2m alongside.

3.13 Nordiske Cable and Wire Factory Quay (NKT Quay) is

200m long and has a depth of 6.5m alongside.

3.13 There are facilities for general cargo, ro-ro, and bulk vessels.

Vessels up to 150m in length, 30m beam, and 6.5m draft can be

accommodated.

3.13 Aspect.—A conspicuous church is situated in the town. A

prominent chimney stands at the factory in the E part of the

port. A conspicuous silo is situated in the vicinity of New

Harbor quays. A range formed by beacons indicates the buoyed

channel leading S toward AC Hansens Quay.

3.13 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is advised for

vessels without local knowledge. Pilots are available at the port

and may be contacted by VHF.

3.13 Pilots can be arranged through the DanPilot (Belt and Fjord

Pilot), Fredericia station. For further information, see Pilotage

in paragraph 1.1.

3.13 Middelfart can be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

3.13 Anchorage.—Good anchorage is available in the roadstead

off the port.

3.14 Kongebro Lystbadehavn (55°31'N., 9°43'E.), a

small yacht harbor, is situated 0.6 mile WNW of the W end of

Middelfart. It consists of a basin protected by a mole and has a

controlling depth of 2.5m.

3.14 The West Lille Baelt Bridge (55°31'N., 9°43'E.), a fixed

railroad bridge, spans the channel about 1 mile W of Lyngs

Odde. It is supported by four upright piers, which are numbered 1 to 4 from the S side.

3.14 The bridge has a vertical clearance of 29m; the main channel, between Pier 2 and Pier 3, has a navigable width of 210m,

allowing for two-way traffic. The passage between Pier 1 and

Pier 2 is 155m wide and may only be used by vessels, proeeding to the N, in an E direction. The passage between Pier 3

and Pier 4 is 155m wide and may only be used by vessels

Stavrby Skov Light

havnen@middelfart.dk

Middelfart - Old Harbor and New Harbor Quays

Middelfart - NKT Quay
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 71

Pub. 194

proceeding to the S, in a W direction. The passages between

the shore and the outer piers at each end of the bridge may be

used by small craft heading in either direction.

3.14 Red and green guide lights are shown from the bridge piers

and a white light, in addition to a racon, is shown from each

side of the bridge over the main channel.

3.14 Vessels that have passed under the bridge must allow approaching vessels sufficient room to enable them to adjust

course toward the narrow passages.

3.14 Fishing, navigating across the fairway, and anchoring, except

in emergency, are prohibited within 500m of the bridge. 

3.14 Snoghoj Light (55°32'N., 9°42'E.), a directional light, is

shown from a prominent building, 8m high, standing 0.6 mile

WNW of the N end of the West Lille Baelt Bridge. The white

sector of this light astern indicates the fairway leading WSW

into the S part of Snaevringen. 

3.14 Borup N Light (55°32'N., 9°41'E.), a directional light, is

shown from a house, with an orange tiled roof, standing 0.5

mile WNW of Snoghoj Light. The white sector of this light

astern indicates the fairway leading SW toward the entrance of

Kolding Fjord.

3.14 Borup W Light (55°32'N., 9°42'E.), a directional light, is

shown from a hut, 7m high, standing 0.2 mile W of Borup

Light. The white sector of this light indicates the route leading

between Pier 3 and Pier 4 of the West Lille Baelt Bridge.

3.14 Damgard Light (55°32'N., 9°40'E.), a directional light, is

shown from a prominent building, 7m high, standing close

WSW of Borup W Light. The white sector of this light indicates the route leading between Pier 2 and Pier 3 of the West

Lille Baelt Bridge. 

3.14 The village of Damgard, situated close NNW of the light, is

surrounded by woods and can be identified by a high light-red

colored building, which is prominent from seaward. A steep

valley is located close SW of the village.

3.14 Gals Klint (55°31'N., 9°41'E.), the NW extremity of Fyn, is

a wooded headland, 26m high, located about 0.8 mile WNW of

the S end of the West Lille Baelt Bridge.

3.14 Caution.—When the tidal current sets S in the passage in

The West Lille Baelt Bridge

Snoghoj Light

Borup N Light

Borup W Light

Damguard Light
72 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

the vicinity of the West Lille Baelt Bridge, it sometimes is

deflected by as much as 40° from the line of the channel and

flows from a SE direction; a similar situation occurs when the

N tidal current is deflected and flows from a NW direction. 

3.14 A submarine cable extends across the channel from the

vicinity of Lyngs Odde to Middelfart.

3.14 Two overhead cables, with a vertical clearance of 44m, span

the channel about 0.7 mile W of the West Lille Baelt Bridge.

The westernmost cable is supported by two prominent pylons,

120m high.

3.15 Snaevringen—South part.—The two remaining

reaches lying in the passage between Gals Klint and Stenderup

Hage, 3.5 miles S, form the S part of Snaevringen. This part of

the route is wider and deeper than the N section.

3.15 Faeno (55°29'N., 9°42'E.), with its N extremity located 1.2

miles SSW of Gals Klint, is an island that divides this part of

Snaevringen into two passages. The main passage leads W of

the island and Faeno Sund leads between the E side of the

island and Fyn.

3.15 The island has steep and cliffy coasts in most places and is

wooded on the N and S ends. A hill, 39m high, rises in the

middle of the island and is surmounted by a prominent mill.

3.15 Faeno Kalv (55°30'N., 9°40'E.), an islet, lies near the middle

of the main passage, 0.7 mile SW of the N extremity of Faeno.

It is 12m high, steep-to, and covered with grass.

3.15 Flessingen (55°30'N., 9°40'E.), an extensive shoal bank, lies

centered 0.4 mile WNW of the N extremity of Faeno. It fronts

the N entrance to Faeno Sund. This shoal has depth of 4.5 to

9m and is marked by a buoy moored at its W side.

3.15 Faeno Sund (55°29'N., 9°43'E.), the secondary channel

leading E of Faeno, has general depths of 10 to 34m. It is free

of detached dangers but somewhat constricted. This sound

leads SE into Gamborg Fjord. A branch of this sound rounds

the S end of Faeno and leads SW to rejoin the main passage

through Snaevringen.

3.15 Middelfart Lystbadehavn, a yacht harbor, is situated on the N

side of the sound, 2.1 miles SE of Gals Klint. 

3.16 Gamborg Fjord (55°29'N., 9°44'E.), a continuation

of Faeno Sund, extends inland for about 4 miles and leads

between the Fonsskov Peninsula, on the W side, and the mainland, on the E side. This fjord has general depths of 5 to 7m between the shorebanks. A shallow bank extends up to 1.2 miles

NW from the head of the fjord. Local knowledge is essential

for entering this inlet.

3.16 Skaerbaek Light (55°31'N., 9°37'E.), a directional light, is

shown from a structure standing on the roof of a factory, 1.8

miles NW of Faeno Kalv. The white sector of this light astern

indicates the route leading SE between the coast of Jylland and

Faeno Kalv to the vicinity of Stenderup Hage.

3.16 The shore bank, with depths of less than 5m, extends up to

about 0.3 mile S in the vicinity of this light and is marked by a

buoy. 

3.16 A conspicuous church, with a tower, stands at Taulov, 1.8

miles N of Skaerbaek Light.

3.16 Faeno Light (55°29'N., 9°42'E.), a directional light, is

shown from a house, 8m high, standing on the S end of Faeno,

1.7 miles SE of Faeno Klav. The white sector of this light

astern indicates the route leading SSE into Bredningen.

3.16 Stenderup Hage (55°31'N., 9°38'E.) is located at the S end

of Snaevringen, 0.9 mile SSW of Faeno Light. A conspicuous

yellow cliff is located 0.5 mile NW of the point. The coastal

bank, with depths of less than 5m, extends up to about 0.4 mile

seaward in the vicinity of this point and is marked by a buoy.

3.16 Caution.—A submarine cable area extend across the

channel in the vicinity of Stenderup Hage.

3.16 A prohibited anchorage area, which may best be seen on the

chart, extends across the channel in the vicinity of Stenderup

Hage. This area extends up to about 0.7 mile N and 1.3 miles S

of the point.

3.17 Kolding Fjord (55°30'N., 9°32'E.) is entered between

Borup Sande and Loverodde, 0.8 mile SW, and extends W for

about 4.5 miles to the port of Kolding. With the exception of

the entrance, the greater part of this fjord is shallow.

Gudso Vig, a shallow bay, indents the N shore of the fjord

and has general depths of less than 1m.

Borup Sande (55°31'N., 9°38'E.), the NE entrance point of

Kolding Fjord, is located 0.8 mile E of Skaerbaek Light. This

point is wooded and 30m high.

3.17 Skaerbaek Fiskerihavn (55°31'N., 9°38'E.), a fishing harbor, lies 0.4 mile NW Borup Sande, at the head of a small

bight. The entrance, which faces S, is 15m wide and has a controlling depth of 2.8m.

3.17 A small yacht harbor, protected by two moles, is situated

close W of this fishing harbor.

3.17 Skaerbaekvaerket Havn (55°31'N., 9°37'E.), consisting of

a coal quay and an oil jetty, lies 0.8 mile W of Borup Sand and

fronts a power plant, with two prominent chimneys.

3.17 The dredged channel leading to the quay, which is marked by

buoys, is 49m wide and has a depth of 7m. The quay is 253m

long and has a depth of 7m alongside. It can handle vessels up

to 150m in length and 6.7m draft.

3.17 The dredged channel leading to the oil jetty, which is indicated by a lighted range, is 80m wide and has a depth of 11.8m.

The jetty extends 200m SSE from the shore at the E end of the

harbor and has a depth of 11.9m alongside. It can handle vessels up to 250m in length and 11.6m draft.

3.17 Drejensodde Light (55°30'N., 9°35'E.), a directional light,

is shown from a hut, 4m high, standing on a point of the same

name, 1.4 miles SW of Skaerbaek Light. A prominent sanitarium is situated on the N shore of the fjord, about 1 mile W of

the light.

Faeno Light
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 73

Pub. 194

3.17 Caution.—A marine farm is established from April to

December about 0.3 mile W of Borup Sande.

3.17 Protected bird sanctuary areas have been established in

bights on either side of the head of the fjord.

Kolding (55°29'N., 9°30'E.)

World Port Index No. 30160 

3.18 The port of Kolding serves an industrial center and is

situated at the head of Kolding Fjord.

3.18 Ice.—An icebreaker is available and the port is usually kept

open to navigation even in severe winters. 

3.18 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range is only about 0.2m.

Winds from E can raise the water level by 1.5m and winds

from W can lower it by the same amount.

3.18 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel is dredged

to a depth of 7m. The harbor is protected by two breakwaters

and has an entrance, 80m wide. A small pleasure craft basin is

situated close inside the harbor on the N side.

3.18 The outer part of the harbor has 600m of quayage on the N

side, with depths of 5 to 7m alongside, and 800m of quayage

on the S side, with a depth of 7m alongside. The inner part of

the harbor has 500m of quayage with depths of 4.5 to 7m

alongside. There are facilities for general cargo, bulk, lumber,

and ro-ro vessels. Vessels up to 190m in length, 30m beam, and

6.8m draft can be accommodated.

3.18 Aspect.—The white sector of Drejensodde Light indicates

the route leading WSW into the fjord. The white sector of

Skaerbaek Light, astern, then indicates the route leading SW to

the outer entrance of the dredged approach channel. The fairway of the approach channel is marked by buoys and stakes.

The entrance fairway leading into the harbor is indicated by a

lighted range.

3.18 The town stands out prominently and the ruins of Koldinghus Castle are situated on high ground overlooking it. A

number of silos stand on the S side of the harbor basin.

3.18 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels carrying dangerous goods. Pilotage is not compulsory for other vessels but

is advised. Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board about 0.5

mile NW of Faeno Kalv.

3.18 Inbound vessels navigating without a pilot must give an announcement 10 minutes before arrival at the buoyed channel on

VHF channels 16 and 12.

3.18 Pilots can be arranged through the DanPilot (Belt and Fjord

Pilot), Fredericia station. For further information, see Pilotage

in paragraph 1.1.

3.18 Kolding Port can be contacted by e-mail, as follows: 

3.18 Regulations.—All vessels must send an ETA to the port or

the agent at least 1 hour prior to arrival.

3.18 Vessels in the harbor are limited to a speed of 4 knots.

3.18 Anchorage.—Good anchorage is available in the entrance of

the fjord, in depths of 12 to 16m, mud and clay, about midway

between Borup Sande and Loverodde.

Lille Baelt—Central Part

3.19 The central part of Lille Baelt as defined in this sector

is bound on the N side by Snaevringen and on the S side by a

line extending between Lindehoved (55°08'N., 9°59'E), the

SW extremity of Helnaes, and Halk Hoved (55°12'N., 9°42'E).

3.19 The N section of this part, known as Bredningen, forms a

spacious roadstead which lies, in general, between the S

entrance to Snaevringen and the island of Brandso, 6 miles S.

3.19 To the S of Brandso, the S section of the central part of Lille

Baelt is encumbered by extensive shoals on which lie several

islands and islets. Bago (55°19'N., 9°48'E) and Aro (55°15'N.,

9°45'E) are the largest of these islands. Bago Sund, the deepest

and the most extensively used channel, leads between Fyn and

Bago.

3.19 To the S of Aro, Lille Baelt broadens considerably and becomes deeper. Both shores of this part of Lille Baelt trend irregularly to form a number of bights, but these are of little

commercial significance. On the E shore, the bights are separated by prominent, but fairly low peninsulas whereas on the W

shore, the bights, although not as recessive, are separated by

steep headlands. The terrain is characterized by rolling country,

isolated hills, farmland, and wooded areas.

3.19 Haderslev Fjord, a narrow inlet, indents the coast of Jylland,

4 miles SSW of Brandso.

3.20 Bredningen (55°25'N., 9°43'E.), the N section of the

central part of Lille Baelt, lies between Stenderup Hage and

Drejensodde Light

Kolding

koldingport@kolding.dk

 http:// uk.koldinghavn.dk/engelsk/
74 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

Brandso, 6 miles S. This spacious roadstead has general depths

of 5 to 18m. The 5m curve lies less than 1 mile offshore in

most places.

3.20 Flaekojet (55°26'N., 9°43'E.), a detached and steep-to shoal

bank, lies centered in the middle of the N entrance to Bredningen, 1.6 miles SSE of Stenderup Hage. This shoal bank has

a least depth of 4.3m and is marked by a buoy moored close SE

of it.

3.20 Tonnes Odde (55°26'N., 9°45'E.), the W extremity of the

Fonsskov Peninsula, is located 2.1 miles SE of Stenderup Hage

and terminates in a prominent steep cliff.

3.20 Fons Vig is entered between Tonnes Odde and Alehoved,

about 2 miles SE. Good anchorage, out of the current, is available within this bay, in depths of 10 to 12m. Alehoved Flak, a

shoal bank with depths of less than 5m, extends up to about 1

mile W of Alehoved.

3.20 A prominent church stands at Fon, near the head of the bay.

3.20 Wedellsborg Hoved (55°22'N., 9°47'E.), a wooded bluff, is

located 4.2 miles S of Tonnes Odde. The shore bank, with

depths of less than 5m, extends up to about 0.5 mile seaward in

the vicinity of this bluff. A prominent church stands at Husby,

2.5 miles E of the bluff.

3.20 Tybrind Vig is entered between Alehoved and Wedellsborg

Hoved. Anchorage, out of the current, is available within this

wide bight, in depths of 7 to 10m, but a stony bank, with depths

of less than 5m, extends up to about 1.2 miles seaward from the

head.

3.20 Vargard Hoved (55°23'N., 9°37'E.), located 4.8 miles SW

of Stenderup, is a wooded yellow bluff. Mosvig, a bight, lies

between the two points and provides anchorage, in a depth of

8m, soft bottom with mud and ooze.

3.20 A prominent church, with a spire, stands at Vejstrup (Sjolund), 3.2 miles WNW of Vargard Hoved.

3.20 Skamlingsbanken (55°25'N., 9°34'E.), 113m high, rises 2.5

miles NW of Vargard Hoved and forms the prominent summit

of a ridge of hills. It is the highest elevation in this area and is

surmounted by a monument.

3.20 Hejlsminde Bugt (55°22'N., 9°37'E.) lies between Vargard

Hoved and Anslet Hage, 3.2 mile SSE. A short and narrow

channel, marked by buoys on its S side, leads from the head of

this bight into Hejls Nor, a shallow lake, lying close W.

Anslet Hage (55°21'N., 9°39'E.) is a wooded point. Knudshoved, a prominent point, is located 0.8 mile S of Anslet Hage

and fringed by rocks. 

3.20 Anslet Grund, a shallow shoal bank, extends up to 0.9 mile E

of Anslet Hage and is marked by a buoy. Knudshoved Grund, a

detached shoal with a depth of 5.8m, lies about 1.5 mile ESE of

Anslet Hage.

3.20 Brandso (55°22'N., 9°43'E.), a low island, lies about midway between Anslet Hage and Wedellsborg Hoved. A shore

bank, which dries in places, fronts this island and extends up to

about 0.6 mile seaward in places. A small and shallow pier

extends from the S side of the island. Small vessels can anchor

off the pier, in a depth of 6m.

3.20 Anchorage.—The regular depths in Bredningen are convenient for anchoring throughout most of the area and the holding ground is good.

3.20 Directions.—Vessels proceeding S through Bredningen

should pass E of Flaekojet. They should then steer to pass

about midway between Brandso and Wedellsborg Hoved.

3.20 Caution.—Dangerous wrecks have been reported to lie

about 1. 2 miles NW of Brandso and about 0.7 mile SW of

Wedellsborg Hoved.

3.20 A submarine cable extends ENE between Brandso and Wedellsborg Hoved.

3.20 An outfall pipeline extends about 0.5 mile SE from a point

on the shore located 1 mile S of Vargard Hoved.

3.21 Lille Baelt—Central Part—South Section.—The S

section of the central part of Lille Baelt extends between

Anslet Hage and Halk Hoved (55°12'N., 9°42'E.), on the W

side, and between Wedellsborg Hoved and Lindehoved

(55°08'N., 9°59'E), on the E side.

3.21 Bago (55°19'N., 9°49'E.), lying 3.5 miles S of Wedellsborg

Hoved, is a low island. A prominent church, with a low tower

and spire, stands in the village near the center of the island.

3.21 Bago Light is shown from a prominent tower, 8m high,

standing on the SW extremity of the island. A small and shallow fishing harbor is situated close NE of the light.

3.21 A shoal bank, with depths of less than 5m, surrounds the

island and extends up to about 1 mile seaward on the NW and

SE sides. Bago Flak, the outer part of this shoal, extends about

1.3 miles SSE from the S side of the island.

3.21 Egholm, a small grass-covered islet, lies on the shoal bank,

close NW of the NW extremity of Bago. 

3.21 Aro (55°16'N., 9°45'E.), a low island, lies on the W side of

the passage, 3 miles SW of Bago. The W side of the island is

built up and several groves of trees stand on the E side. Aro

Kalv, a peninsula, projects about 1.3 miles NE from the SE

extremity of the island. Korso, another peninsula, extends 0.8

mile NW from the SW end of the island.

3.21 Aro W Light is shown from a prominent tower, 13m high,

standing on the NW side of Korso peninsula. It is reported that

some of the sectors of this light are partially ob-scured by

vegetation.

3.21 Aro Flak, an extensive shoal area with depths of less than

5m, extends about 1.4 miles E and NE from the E side of Aro

Bago Light
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 75

Pub. 194

Kalv. Aro Sand, a rocky shoal area with depths of less than 5m,

extends about 1 mile S from the S side of Aro.

3.21 Bardenfleths Grund (55°18'N., 9°44'E.), a rocky shoal, lies

about 2.5 miles NNE of Aro W Light, near the edge of the

shoal bank extending N from the N side of Aro. This shoal has

depths of 2 to 3m and is marked by a buoy moored close NW.

3.21 Rodegrund (55°18'N., 9°43'E.), a detached shoal, lies 3.2

miles N of Aro W Light. It has a least depth of 4.8m and is

marked by a buoy moored close SE.

3.21 Bastholm (55°17'N., 9°46'E.), a small islet, lies on the shoal

bank, 0.5 mile N of the N extremity of the Korso peninsula.

Smaholme, another small islet, and Graesholm, a drying sand

bank, lie on the shoal bank 0.3 mile S and 0.6 mile E, respectively, of Bastholm.

3.21 Linderum (55°18'N., 9°43'E.), a small islet, lies 1.9 miles

NNW of Aro W Light, on Linderum Grund, an extensive shoal

area with depths of less than 5m.

3.21 Toro (55°15'N., 9°55'E.), a low and flat island, lies 4 miles

SE of Bago Light and close off the coast of Fyn. Toro Rev, an

extensive shoal area with depths of less than 5m, extends up to

2 miles W from the W side of the island. 

3.21 Nordlige Lillegrund (55°12'N., 9°49'E.), a detached shoal

with a least depth of 6.7m, lies about 3.2 miles SW of Toro and

is the outermost of the dangers extending W from Fyn.

3.21 Toro Banke (55°12'N., 9°54'E.), a detached shoal bank, lies

3 miles E of Nordlige Lillegrund and has a least depth of 5.3m.

Several other isolated shoal patches, with depths of less than

10m, lie between Nordlige Lillegrund and the coast of Fyn and

may best be seen on the chart.

3.21 Caution.—A nature reserve area lies in the vicinity of Aro

Kalv. Entry is subject to numerous restrictions.

3.21 A marine farm is established from March to December in the

area lying 0.5 mile E of the E side of Bago.

3.22 East side—Tvingsbjerg N Light (55°19'N., 9°54'E.),

a directional light, is shown from a house, 8m high, standing

on the E side of the passage, 5 miles SE of Wedellesborg

Hoved. A conspicuous church stands at Sandager, 1.5 miles

NE of the light.

Mariendal, a large farm house surrounded by trees, stands

about 1.6 miles S of Tvingsbjerg N Light and is prominent

from seaward. 

3.22 Sonderby Klint (55°13'N., 9°56'E.), situated 5.5 miles SSE

of Tvingsbjerg N Light, is a prominent bare point, which rises

to a height of 45m close inland. A prominent church, with a

tower surmounted by a turret, stands at Dreslette, about 3.5

miles E of the point. 

3.22 Lindehoved (55°08'N., 9°59'E.), located 5.5 miles SSE of

Sonderby Klint, is the SW extremity of Helnaes, a peninsula

extending about 5 miles S from the coast of Fyn. The peninsula

narrows to an isthmus near its N end.

3.22 Helnaes Light (55°08'N., 9°59'E.), a sector light, is shown

from a prominent tower, 28m high, standing on Lindehoved. A

prominent church, with a tower, stands at Helnaes, 1.5 miles

ENE of the light. This church can only be seen on certain bearings and a prominent mill, without sails, is situated 0.8 mile

NNW of it.

3.22 The coastal shoal bank, with depths of less than 10m, extends up to about 1.2 miles WSW of the light in this vicinity

and is marked by a buoy. A detached shoal, with a least depth

of 6.9m, lies about 2.4 miles W of the light.

3.23 Assens (55°16'N., 9°53'E.) (World Port Index No.

29930), a small port, is located 2.5 miles S of Tvingsbjerg N

Light. It lies within a small inlet that is formed by a peninsula

projecting about 0.4 mile N from the coast.

3.23 Tides—Currents.—Gales from NW to NE may raise the

water level by up to 1.4m and gales from W to S may lower it

by as much as 1m. 

Aro W Light

Helnaes Light

Assens
76 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

3.23 Depths—Limitations.—Asnaes Rev, a sandy shoal area

with depths of less than 5m, extends up to about 1 mile NW of

the N extremity of the peninsula and is marked by a buoy.

3.23 A dredged channel leads SSE to the harbor through the

dangers in the approaches. It passes on the E side of Asnaes

Rev and has a controlling depth of 7m.

3.23 An extensive pleasure craft basin occupies the S part of the

harbor. Sydlige Havn, the southernmost basin, has about 300m

of total quayage with a depth of 4m alongside. It is mostly used

by small craft. Mellemhavn, located close N of Sydlige Havn,

has a depth of 5m. It is narrow and mostly used by ferries.

3.23 Nordlige Havn, located close N of Mellemhavn, is the

commercial basin. It has about 400m of total quayage with

depths of 6.6 to7m alongside. There are facilities for general

cargo and bulk vessels. Vessels up to 130m in length, 20m

beam, and 6.8m draft can be accommodated

3.23 Aspect.—Assens Havn Light, a directional light, is shown

from a structure, 4m high, standing at the N extremity of the

peninsula. A breakwater extends about 120m NE from this

structure and its head is marked by a light. The dredged

approach channel leading SSE into the inlet is indicated by a

lighted range.

3.23 A prominent church, with an octagonal tower surmounted by

a spire, stands in the town and a conspicuous chimney is situated on a sugar factory 0.2 mile S of it. Several prominent silos

are situated at the E side of the harbor.

3.23 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is advised for

vessels over 600 grt or those without local knowledge. Pilots

are provided by the Lille Baelt pilot station at the port. They

can be contacted by VHF and board about 1.5 miles NNW of

the harbor entrance. 

3.23 Caution.—It is reported that the lights at the port may be

difficult to identify because of strong background illumination.

3.24 West side.—Avne Vig (55°19'N., 9°38'E.), a small

and shallow bay, lies 1.5 miles S of Anslet Hage.

3.24 Orby Hage (55°18'N., 9°40'E.), a point located 2 miles SE

of Avne Vig, is fronted by a shallow spit. Rumpgrund, a shoal

area with depths of less than 5m, lies about 1.3 miles NE of the

point, near the outer edge of the coastal bank.

3.24 Haderslev Fjord (55°19'N., 9°38'E.) is entered between

Orby Hage and Stagodde, 0.4 mile SW. This narrow and winding inlet extends in a WSW direction for about 7 miles. It is too

narrow for anchoring and has depths of only 2m. A dam,

situated at the head, separates the fjord from a large lake.

3.24 The shallow coastal bank encumbers the entrance of the

fjord and extends up to about 1.3 miles ESE of Orby Hage. A

dredged channel, marked by buoys, leads through the dangers

in the approaches and along the entire length of the fjord. It has

a controlling depth of 6m.

3.25 Haderslev (55°15'N., 9°30'E.) (World Port Index No.

30120), a small port serving an agricultural area, is situated at

the head of the fjord.

3.25 Ice.—The port is generally kept open all year round; icebreakers are used when necessary.

3.25 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range is about 0.2m. Winds

from E may raise the water level by up to 1.3m and winds from

W may lower it by the same amount.

3.25 Depths—Limitations.—The dredged entrance channel has

a controlling depth of 6m over a width of 26m. The S side and

inner part of the harbor basin are shallow and occupied by

facilities for pleasure craft. The N side of the outer part of the

basin provides about 500m of total commercial quayage with

depths of 4 to 6m alongside. Vessels up 4,000 dwt, 110m in

length, 17m beam, and 5.9m draft can be accommodated.

3.25 Aspect.—The dredged entrance channel is marked by buoys

and stakes. The head of the harbor is shallow and a bridge

crosses the waterway leading to the dam. A number of prominent silos stand on the N side of the harbor.

3.25 Regulations.—Vessels are restricted to a speed of 6 knots in

the dredged channel.

3.25 Outbound vessels, not under pilotage, must avoid meeting

inbound vessels in places where passing is difficult.

3.25 Caution.—A designated nature reserve is situated adjacent

to the channel in the vicinity of the harbor. Entry is subject to

numerous restrictions.

3.26 Arosund (55°16'N., 9°43'E.), a small harbor, is situated 2 miles SE of Orby Hage and protected by a breakwater. It

consists of an enclosed basin with a ferry berth situated close S

of it. The entrance has a controlling depth of 3m. The harbor is

only used by pleasure craft, fishing boats, and small ferries.

A sector light is shown from a prominent tower, 10m high,

standing on the E extremity of the S mole at the W side of the

entrance to Arosund harbor.

3.26 Rade Hoved (55°14'N., 9°43'E.), a steep and bare point, is

located 1.5 miles S of Arosund. It is fronted by Rade Grund, a

shoal with depths of less than 5m, which extends up to about

0.5 mile SE from the coast.

3.26 Halk Hoved (55°12'N., 9°42'E.), 28m high, is located 2.6

miles SSW of Rade Hoved. This steep and prominent headland

is formed by nearly vertical cliffs. Halk Grund, a shoal with

depths of less than 10m, fronts the headland and extends up to

0.5 mile seaward.

3.26 Schonheyder Banke, a detached shoal with a least depth of

7.6m, lies about 2 miles S of Halk Hoved.

3.27 Directions.—Bago Sund (55°18'N., 9°52'E.), the

main shipping route, passes between Bago and the coast of

Fyn. It consists of three reaches and has a least depth of 11.8m

in the S part. On the E side, the channel is bordered by the

dangers fronting the coast of Fyn. On the W side, the channel is

Assens Havn Light
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 77

Pub. 194

bordered by the dangers extending from the N, E, and S sides

of Bago and those extending from the SE and S sides of Aro.

These dangers are marked at the outer edge by buoys.

The northernmost reach leads SE and is indicated by the

white sector of Tvingsbjerg N Light. The central reach leads

SSE and is indicated by the white sector of Assens Havn Light.

The southernmost reach is narrow and leads SW. It is indicated

astern by a lighted range, the front light of which is situated on

the same structure as Tvingsbjerg N Light.

3.27 Fyr Renden leads into the narrowest part of the fairway, 2

miles SE of the SW end of Bago. The W side of this fairway is

formed by the extensive shoal area lying between Bago and

Aro. The E side of the fairway is formed by the shoal bank

extending from the coast close N of Assens. A lighted range

indicates the fairway leading through the SW reach between

these dangers.

3.27 Fyr Renden (55°18'N., 9°46'E.), a narrow and tortuous

channel, has a controlling depth of 6m. It passes between the

shoal banks extending W and SE from Bago and NE from Aro.

The W side of the fairway, which has a least width of only

about 300m, is marked by buoys. This channel can be used by

small vessels with local knowledge.

3.27 Aro Sund (55°15'N., 9°43'E.), a narrow channel, leads

through an extensive coastal shoal area fronting the E side of

Jylland. The channel, which is marked by buoys and lights,

passes W of Aro. This route is available to vessels of moderate

draft. It has general depths of 9 to 23m and follows an intricate

course. The currents do not always follow the direction of the

fairway in this passage and sometimes set across it onto the

shoals.

3.27 A secondary channel leads W of Linderum. It has a least

depth of 3.8m and is limited to small craft with local knowledge.

3.27 Caution.—Magnetic anomalies have been reported to exist

within an area lying about 1 mile W of the N part of Bago.

3.27 A submarine water pipeline lies across Bago Sund within an

abandoned cable area. It extends from the SE side of Bago to

Mariendal (farm house) and is marked by beacons on both

shores.

Lille Baelt—South Part

3.28 The S part of Lille Baelt as defined by this sector,

extends, on the E side, from Lindehoved to Dovnsklint

(54°43'N., 10°42'E.), the S extremity of Langeland, and, on the

W side, from Halk Hoved to Pols Huk (54°53'N., 10°04'E.), 23

miles SE. It also includes Abenra Fjord, Als Fjord, Marstal

Bugt, and Als Sund as far as, but not including, the port of

Sonderborg.

3.28 The main passage in this part of Lille Baelt is deeper, less

encumbered with detached dangers, and wider than the central

part. However, the coastal configuration on both sides of this

part trends more erratically. 

3.28 In general, the terrain on Jylland and the islands consists of

rolling hills and low land. It is interspersed with highly-cultivated fields and wooded areas.

3.28 The main route through this part of Lille Baelt leads S from

the S end of Bago Sund and passes W of Nordlige Lillegrund

(55°12'N., 9°49'). It then leads in a SE direction, passing close

off the NE coast of Als, into Kieler Bucht. This route, which

has a least depth of 20.1m, passes through the channel lying

SW of the detached dangers lying in the center of this part of

Lille Baelt.

3.28 An alternate channel, which has a least depth of 11.8m, leads

through the channel lying NE of the detached dangers.

3.28 Tides—Currents.—In the areas of open water, the mean

change in water level is small. However, in the narrow channels

and where the shoreline is irregular, the water level may vary

by as much as 1.5m. Generally, winds from E to NE raise the

water level by as much as 1.2m and winds from W to NW

lower it by the same amount. 

3.28 With winds from ENE to S, the current generally sets N;

with winds from other directions, the current sets S. 

3.29 Off-lying dangers—Schonheyder Banke (55°09'N.,

9°43'E.) lies about 2 miles S of Halk Hoved and has a least

depth of 7.6m. This detached shoal bank consists of clay mixed

with sand and stones and a buoy, marking a firing area, is

moored in its vicinity.

3.29 Holst Banke (55°08'N., 9°40'E.) lies centered 4 miles S of

Halk Hoved and has a least depth of 7.3m. This large detached

shoal bank consists of clay mixed with sand and stones and is

marked by buoys.

3.29 Lillegrund (55°07'N., 9°55'E.), a stony patch, lies about 2.8

miles WSW of Helnaes Light. It has a least depth of 3.7m and

is marked by a buoy. This detached shoal lies on a bank and an

isolated shoal, with a depth of 6.9m, lies about 1.2 miles NNE

of it.

3.29 Langgrund (55°06'N., 9°55'E.) lies about 2.8 miles SW of

Helnaes Light. This detached shoal lies near the SE end of a

bank and has a least depth of 5.9m.

3.29 Hesteskoen (55°05'N., 9°54'E.), a steep-to and partly drying

reef, lies on a detached shoal, 4.1 miles SW of Helnaes Light.

The shoal has depths of less than 5m and is marked by a buoy

moored close NE of it.

3.29 The channel leading between Hesteskoen and Langgrund has

a least depth of 10.9m.

3.29 Sondre Stenron (55°04'N., 9°57'E.), a stony patch, lies

about 4.5 miles SSW of Helnaes Light. It has a least depth of

0.7m and lies at the N end of a sandy shoal bank, which is

marked by buoys. Depths of less than 10m extend up to about

2.3 miles SE and 1.2 miles S of this patch. The channel separating Hesteskoen from this patch has depths of more than

18m.

3.30 West side—Sandvig (55°11'N., 9°36'E.) lies 3 miles

WSW of Halk Hoved. The land extending SW of the latter

point is high and steep. This bay affords anchorage, sheltered

from N winds, in depths of 8 to 18m, sand and mud.

3.30 Diernaes Bugt (55°09'N., 9°31'E.), a small and shallow bay,

lies 3.8 miles SW of Sandvig. Slibso, a lagoon, lies close inland of this bay.

3.30 Sonderballe Hoved (55°08'N., 9°31'E.), a prominent wooded headland, is located 1.7 miles SSE of Dierrrnaes Bugt.

3.30 Barso (55°07'N., 9°33'E.), a small island, lies off the entrance to Genner Fjord, 1.3 miles ESE of Sonderballe Hoved.

Laddenhoj, with a saddle-backed summit, rises to a height of

38m at the N end of the island. The N, S, and W sides of the

island are fairly steep-to.

3.30 Barso Grund, a shoal bank with depths of less than 5m,
78 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

fronts the E side of the island and extends up to about 0.7 mile

seaward.

3.30 Genner Fjord (55°07'N., 9°30'E.), a sheltered inlet, is entered S of Sonderballe Hoved and has general depths of 5 to

20m. Barso, lying in the approaches, can be passed on either

side.

3.30 Kalvo (55°07'N., 9°28'E.), a small craft harbor situated at

the head of the fjord, has a controlling depth of 3.3m. Sheltered anchorage is available, in depths up to 14m, off this harbor.

3.30 Knivesbjerg (55°08'N., 9°27'E.), a prominent hill, stands

2.7 miles W of Sonderballe Hoved. It is 92m high and surmounted by a tower.

Knudshoved (55°05'N., 9°33'E.), a steep point, is located

2.6 miles SSE of Sonderballe Hoved. It is 15m high and forms

the N entrance point of Abenra Fjord.

3.30 Starbeck Grund, a shoal spit, projects about 1.2 miles E from

this point. It has depths of less than 5m and is marked by a

buoy.

3.30 Abenra Fjord (55°02'N., 9°30'E.) is entered between Knudshoved and Varnaes Hoved, 2.8 miles SSE. This deep fjord

extends about 5 miles WSW and is mostly free of dangers. Its

sides are high and rather heavily wooded. Several mussel beds,

marked by poles, are situated along the N shore of the fjord. 

3.30 Caution.—An outfall pipeline extends about 0.5 mile SE

from a point on the shore located 1.2 mile SW of Halk Hoved.

3.30 A restricted area, which may best be seen on the chart, lies

3.5 miles SW of Halk Hoved, in the approach to Sandvig.

Anchoring, fishing, and sea bed activities within this area

could be dangerous due to the existence of bottom mines.

3.30 A firing exercise area fronts the area lying between Sandvig

and Diernaes Bugt. It extends up to 4 miles seaward and is

marked by buoys.

3.30 Marine farms, marked by buoys, are established from March

to December along the NW side of Barso and from April to

December along the SW side.

3.30 A nature reserve area lies in the vicinity of Kalvo, at the head

of Genner Fjord. Entry is subject to numerous restrictions.

3.30 Several mussel beds, marked by poles, front the points along

the N shore of Abenra Fjord.

3.31 Abenra (Aabenraa) (55°03'N., 9°26'E.) (World Port

Index No. 30100), a small commercial port, is situated at the

head of Abenra Fjord. A yacht basin lies close S of the harbor. 

3.31 Ice.—The port is generally open throughout the winter, but

icebreaker assistance may be required at times. 

3.31 Tides—Currents.—The water in the port is brackish. Gales

from NE to E may raise the water level by up to 1.5m and gales

from SW may lower it by as much as 1m.

3.31 Depths—Limitations.—The dredged entrance channel,

which is about 0.5 mile long, has a depth of 11m and a minimum width of 120m.

3.31 Nyhavn, the N basin, provides about 800m of total quayage

with depths of 6.5 to 11m alongside. Gammelhavn, the W

basin, provides about 500m of total quayage with a depth of

7.5m alongside. Sydhavn, the S basin, provides 250m of total

quayage. It has a depth of 4m and is used by fishing vessels.

3.31 Sonderjyllandskajan, 260m long, is situated S of the entrance to Sydhavn and has a depth of 11m alongside. A ro-ro

jetty, 150m long, extends SSE from the S end of this quay and

has a depth of 11m alongside.

3.31 The tanker terminal is situated on the E side of the entrance

to Nyhavn. It has two berths with depths of 11m and 7m alongside.

3.31 Cargo vessels up to 250m in length and tankers up to 200m

in length can be accommodated, with drafts up to 10.75m.

3.31 Aspect.—Sonderstrand Light is shown from a structure

standing at the head of the fjord, 0.6 mile S of the port. The

approach channel leads WSW and is indicated by the white

sector of this light. The entrance fairway leads NW and is

indicated by a lighted range.

3.31 A prominent red church, with a slate roof and slender spire,

stands in the town, close W of the harbor. Several silos are

situated in the vicinity of the harbor.

3.31 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for tankers over 1,500

dwt and carrying oil, gas, or dangerous chemicals. It is recommended for all vessels over 2,000 grt. Pilots can be contacted

by VHF and board about 3 miles E of the harbor.

3.31 Pilots can be arranged through the DanPilot (Belt and Fjord

Pilot), Fredericia station. For further information, see Pilotage

in paragraph 1.1.

3.31 Aabenraa can be contacted by e-mail, as follows: 

3.31 Anchorage.—A designated anchorage area, with depths of

26 to 30m, lies centered about 2 miles E of Knudshoved and

may best be seen on the chart. nd sand.

3.32 Enstedvaerket (55°01'N., 9°26'E.) (World Port Index

No. 30105) is situated at the head of Abenra Fjord, 1.2 miles S

of Abenra. The main facilities, which are owned by an electric

power company, consist of an oil terminal and a coal quay.

3.32 Depths—Limitations.—The dredged approach channel,

leading WSW, is about 2 miles long and has a depth of 18m.

3.32 The coal quay is 375m long and has a depth of 18m alongside. A jetty projects 270m ENE from the E end of this quay

and has two oil berths, fronted by dolphins, at its head. The

Abenra

port@aabenraaport.dk

http://aabenraaport.dk/?id=14463
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 79

Pub. 194

outer berth has a depth of 18m alongside and the inner berth

has a depth of 15.5m alongside.

3.32 Three berths situated at the W side of the harbor have depths

of 8m alongside and are used by coasters.

3.32 Vessels up to 350m in length and 17m draft can be accommodated.

3.32 Aspect.—The dredged approach channel is indicated by a

lighted range. The limits of the dredged area in the harbor are

indicated by lighted beacons.

3.32 A conspicuous chimney stands at the power station.

3.32 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of 13m draft

and over and for tankers over 1,500 dwt carrying oil, gas, or

dangerous chemicals. Pilots can be contacted by VHF and

board about 3 miles E of the harbor. Pilots board large vessels

about 3.5 miles NE of Nordborg Light.

3.32 Pilots can be arranged through the DanPilot (Belt and Fjord

Pilot), Fredericia station. For further information, see Pilotage

in paragraph 1.1.

3.32 Enstedvaerket can be contacted by e-mail, as follows: 

3.32 Anchorage.—A designated anchorage area, with depths of

26 to 30m, lies centered about 2 miles E of Knudshoved and

may best be seen on the chart. nd sand.

3.33 Varnaes Hoved (55°03'N., 9°35'E.), 25m high, is a

steep point. It forms the S entrance point of Abenra Fjord and

also the W entrance point of Als Fjord.

3.33 Als Fjord (55°03'N., 9°38'E.) is entered between Varnaes

Hoved and the NW extremity of Als, 2 miles ENE. It leads

about 7 miles in a general SE direction to the junction with Als

Sund and Augustenborg Fjord. This fjord is about 1 mile wide

and has general depths of 11 to 33m in the fairway channel.

The SW side of the fjord is higher and more wooded than the

NE side. Several marinas are situated within the fjord.

3.33 Ballebro Light (55°00'N., 9°40'E.) is shown from a prominent tower, 6m high, standing on the W side of the fjord, about

4 miles SE of Varnaes Hoved. The white sectors of this light

indicate the main fairway.

3.33 A prominent church stands at Ullerup, about 1.8 miles SSW

of Ballebro Light.

3.33 Stegsvig, a bay, indents the E side of the fjord, 3 miles ESE

of Varnaes Hoved. Several shoals, with depths of 5 to 8m,

encumber the entrance. Dyvig, a shallow inlet, leads about 1.2

miles E from the head of the bay and has a pier at its head. A

channel, 20m wide, leads to the pier and has a controlling

depth of 3.5m. A small boat harbor lies close S of the pier.

3.33 Sandvig, a bay, lies 3.6 miles E of Ballebro Light, near the

head of the fjord, and has general depths of 12 to 14m.

3.33 Stevning Nor, a narrow and shallow inlet, lies 0.7 mile S of

Sandvig. It is used by small vessels with drafts up to 4m and

local knowledge. 

3.33 Augustenborg Fjord (54°59'N., 9°46'E.), the SE continuation of Als Fjord, is entered about 3.5 miles ESE of Ballebro

Light. This fjord is about 4 miles long and has general depths

of 5 to 13m. The head is encumbered by shallow shoals. Small

vessels can anchor, in a depth of 9m, about 1.5 miles inside the

fjord. 

3.33 Augustenborg (54°57'N., 9°52'E.) (World Port Index No.

30095), a small port, lies in a shallow inlet extending NE from

the head of Augustenborg Fjord. A road embankment, with a

sluice at its N end, crosses the inlet near the town.

3.33 A dredged channel, marked by buoys, leads to the harbor and

has a controlling depth of 4m. The harbor provides a quay,

170m long, with a depth of 4m alongside. Vessels of up to 80m

in length, 15m beam, and 3.5m draft can be accommodated.

3.33 Caution.—Several submarine cables lie across Als Fjord,

3.5 miles SE of Varnaes Hoved. The landing places are marked

by beacons on both shores.

3.33 A ferry crosses Als Fjord in the vicinity of Ballebro Light.

3.33 It is reported that hovercraft operate in Augustenborg Fjord.

3.34 Als Sund (54°58'N., 9°45'E.) leads S for 5 miles to

Sonderborg and separates Als from the mainland. It is entered,

at the N end, between Snogbaek Huk and Arnkilsore, 0.8 mile

ESE. This narrow sound has low and wooded shores in the N

part, becoming higher toward the S. 

3.34 Snogbaek Huk (54°56'N., 10°03'E.), the W entrance point,

is located 2.4 miles ESE of Ballebro Light. Snogbaek Hage, a

shallow bank of sand and rock, extends about 0.4 mile NE

from this point and is marked by a lighted buoy. A detached

shoal, with a depth of 8.4m, lies about 0.8 mile NE of the point.

3.34 Sottrupskov Light is shown from a structure, 2m high, standing on the W side of the passage, 1 mile S of Snogbaek Huk.

Enstedvaerkets

ensted@dongenergy.dk

http://www.dongenergy.com/en/

Ballebro Light
80 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

The white sector of this light indicates the entrance channel. A

prominent church stands at Vester Sottrup, about 2 miles SW

of the light.

3.34 The fairway in the sound is marked by lighted buoys on the

W side and unlighted buoys on the E side. It varies from 100 to

250m in width and has a controlling depth of 10.5m, close N of

Sonderborg.

3.34 Alssundbroens (Als Sund Bridge), a fixed bridge, spans the

sound about 0.9 mile N of Sonderborg. It has a navigable width

of 50m and a vertical clearance of 33m.

3.34 For further details of Sonderborg, see paragraph 3.50.

3.34 Vessels without local knowledge are advised to use the services of a pilot as a considerable amount of local traffic use this

passage. Pilots are available from Sonderborg and will board

vessels N of Snogbaek Huk. 

3.34 Caution.—The current in Als Sund usually flows N and

attains rates of 3 to 4 knots. This makes navigation somewhat

difficult for large vessels as the current tends to set toward one

or the other shore.

3.35 The NE and E shores of Als form the W side of the

main passage leading through the S part of Lille Baelt. The

shore between Tontoft Nakke and Pols Huk, 17 miles SE, is

fairly high with occasional steep cliffs.

Nordborg Light (55°05'N., 9°43'E.) is shown from a prominent tower, 20m high, standing about 4 miles ENE of the entrance to Als Fjord. The coast between is low and barren.

3.35 Tontoft Nakke (55°05'N., 9°45'E.), the N extremity of Als,

is located 1.2 miles ENE of Nordborg Light. Tranesand, a

shoal with depths of less than 3m, fronts the point. It extends

up to about 0.6 mile seaward and is marked by a buoy.

3.35 Tranerodde Light (55°03'N., 9°51'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 10m high, standing on a point of the same

name, 4.2 miles SE of Tontoft Nakke. Tranerodde Grund, a

shoal with depths of less than 10m, fronts the point and extends

up to about 1 mile seaward.

3.35 A conspicuous white church, with a slender spire, is situated

on high ground at Havnbjerg, 1.8 miles WSW of the light and a

prominent windmill stands near it.

3.35 Taksensand Light (55°00'N., 9°58'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 19m high, standing on a point of the same

name, 4.5 miles SE of Tranerodde Light.

3.35 Fynshav Ferry Harbor (55°00'N., 9°59'E.), situated 1 mile

SE of Taksensand Light, is protected by breakwaters. It is used

exclusively by ferries from Bojden (55°06'N., 10°05'E.). 

3.35 Mommark Havn (54°56'N., 10°03'E.), situated 5.2 miles

SE of Taksensand Light, is protected by a breakwater. It is used

by the ferries from Faaborg (55°06'N., 10°14'E.), small craft,

fishing boats, and yachts. The entrance has a controlling depth

of 4m. Vessels up to 25m in length, 8m beam, and 3m draft can

be accommodated.

3.35 Pols Huk (54°53'N., 10°04'E.), the SE extremity of Als, is

located 3.5 miles SSE of Mommark Havn. Pols Rev, a shoal

bank with depths of less than 5m, extends up to about 1.5 miles

SE from the point and is marked by a buoy.

3.35 Gammel Pol Light (54°53'N., 10°04'E.) is shown from a

prominent column, 11m high, standing on the N part of Pols

Huk. A prominent church stands at Lysabild, 2.6 miles NW of

the light.

3.35 Directions.—The main route through this part of Lille Baelt

passes close off the NE coast of Als. The channel leads SE and

ESE to pass SW of the detached dangers lying offshore. The

track is indicated by the white sectors of Tranerodde Light and

Taksensand Light.

3.35 A fairway, 300m wide, lies 1.5 miles NNE of Tranerodde

Light, between Tranerodde Grund and Hesteskoen. It is

marked by lighted buoys and can be used by vessels with drafts

up to 17m.

Nordborg Light

Tranerodde Light

Taksensand Light
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 81

Pub. 194

3.35 From a position located about 4 miles E of Taksensand

Light, the route then leads SSE through the S part of Lille Baelt

into Kieler Bucht (see paragraph 3.70).

3.35 Caution.—A marine farm lies 0.6 mile offshore, about 2

miles SE of Tranerodde Light. It is marked by lighted buoys

and may best be seen on the chart.

3.35 Submarine cables, which may best be seen on the chart, lie

across Lille Baelt and extend NE from close NW of Fynhavn

and ENE from a point located 1 mile N of Gammel Pol Light.

3.35 A marine farm lies close offshore, about 0.6 mile NW of

Mommark Havn. It is marked by lighted buoys and may best

be seen on the chart.

3.35 A restricted area, which may best be seen on the chart, lies

centered 2.5 miles NE of Pols Huk. Anchoring, fishing, and sea

bed activities are prohibited in this area due to the existence of

unexploded ordnance surrounding a wreck.

3.36 East side—Hornenaes (55°05'N., 10°05'E.), located

4.8 miles SE of Helnaes Light, is the W end of an irregularlyshaped peninsula. This headland, which forms the S entrance

point of Helnaes Bugt, has steep cliffs and rises to a height of

40m close inland. The 10m curve lies about 0.5 mile W of the

point.

3.36 Helnaes Bugt (55°07'N., 10°04'E.) lies N of Hornenaes and

its entrance is encumbered by shoals. This bay is divided into

Sonder Fjord and Norre Fjord by a shallow bank extending in

an E direction from the E side of Helnaes to the E shore. Three

islets lie on this bank.

3.36 Kalvore, a small peninsula, projects from the E side of the

entrance to the bay, 4 miles SE of Helnaes Light. Bojden Ferry

Harbor, protected by two moles, is situated at the NW end of

this peninsula. This small harbor is used exclusively by the

ferries from Fynshav (55°00'N., 9°59'E.).

3.36 Several ramps, piers, and loading places, with depths of less

than 3m alongside, are situated within Helnaes Bugt and used

only by small craft.

3.36 A conspicuous church, with a tall spire at one end and two

small towers at the other, stands on high ground at Horne, 4.2

miles E of Bojden Ferry Harbor.

3.36 Lyo (55°02'N., 10°09'E.), located 3 miles SE of Hornenaes,

has steep cliffs along its W and S shores and is flat at the NW

end. A prominent village church stands near the center of the

island, but is generally obscured by trees. A conspicuous mill,

without sails, is situated on high ground close W of the church.

3.36 A shore bank, with depths of less than 10m, fronts the W

side of the island and extends up to about 0.8 mile seaward.

Lyo Flak, a rocky shoal with a least depth of 4.7m, lies about

1.3 miles W of the W side of the island and is marked by a

buoy.

3.36 Lyo Rev Light is shown from a mast, 4m high, standing on

the low N extremity of the island. A sandy spit extends about

0.3 mile E from the light and is marked by a buoy. Lyo Sand, a

shore bank with depths of less than 5m, fronts the E and SE

sides of the island and extends up to about 0.8 mile seaward.

3.36 Skrams Flak, a detached shoal area with depths of less than

5m, lies centered 1.8 miles SE of the SE side of the island and

is marked by a lighted buoy. 

3.36 Lyo Havn, consisting of a pier and a yacht basin, is situated

at the N side of the island. The head of the pier provides a berth

for a ferry and has a controlling depth of 4.5m. Vessels up to

20m in length, 5m beam, and 3m draft can be accommodated

alongside.

Aero (54°55'N., 10°20'E.), 12 miles long, lies with its N end

located 4.5 miles SSE of Lyo. A ridge of hills extends along the

longitudinal axis of this island and its summit, 67m high, rises

near the middle. The island is mostly built over and, although

there are no woods, the numerous hedge rows give it a wooded

appearance.

3.37 Skjoldnaes (54°58'N., 10°12'E.), the N extremity of

the island, is 24m high. Skjoldnaes Light is shown from a

prominent tower, 22m high, standing on this point.

3.37 A prominent church, with a tower surmounted by a small

spire, stands at Sodby, 2.5 miles SE of the light. This church is

surrounded by trees and is not visible on all bearings. A

conspicuous windmill is situated on high ground 1.2 miles SE

of the church.

Gammel Pol Light

Skjoldnaes Light
82 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

3.37 Vejsnaes Nakke (54°49'N., 10°25'E.), the S extremity of

Aero, is formed by a bluff surmounted by a hill, 22m high. A

light is shown from a mast, 9m high, standing on this point.

3.37 A prominent church, with a tower surmounted by a spire,

stands at Store Rise, 2.3 miles NNW of the light. Another

prominent church, with a tower surmounted by an open belfry,

stands at Tranerup, 4 miles NW of the light.

3.37 A prominent windmill stands at Bregninge, 2.4 miles NW of

Tranderup, and a church, with a slender spire, is situated 0.4

mile SSE of it.

3.37 Vodrup Flak (54°51'N., 10°16'E.), a detached shoal bank

with a least depth of 8.2m, lies centered about 2.3 miles offshore, 5.6 miles NW of Vejsnaes Nakke Light. 

3.37 Vejsnaes Flak (Sneedorffs Grund) (54°45'N., 10°26'E.), a

detached shoal bank with a least depth of 6.4m, lies centered

4.2 miles S of Vejsnaes Nakke Light.

3.37 Caution.—A restricted area, which may best be seen on the

chart, lies centered 8 miles W of Vejsnaes Nakke Light. Anchoring, fishing, and carrying out any seabed activities within

this area are prohibited due to the existence of wartime gas

shells on the bottom.

3.37 A submarine exercise area, which may best be seen on the

chart, lies centered 7.5 miles W of Vejsnaes Nakke Light in the

vicinity of the above restricted area.

3.38 Marstal Bugt (54°47'N., 10°35'E.) is entered

between Vejsnaes Nakke and Dovnsklint, 11 miles SE. This

bay is enclosed by the S side of Aero and the SW side of

Langeland. A shallow and sandy flat, with several small islands

lying on it, connects the SE end of Aero to Langeland and

separates the bay from the waters lying S of Fyn. The bay has

general depths of 9 to 20m throughout, but several detached

shoals, with depths of less than 10m, lie near the center of the

entrance. 

3.38 The 10m curve lies within 1 mile of the shore except off the

SE end of Aero where it extends up to 2 miles seaward. Both

sides of the bay are mostly low.

3.38 Vessels can anchor as convenient within the bay, sheltered

from N winds.

3.38 For details of Marstal (54°51'N., 10°31'E.), which can be

entered from the bay, see paragraph 3.46.

3.38 Bagenkop (54°45'N., 10°40'E.), a small harbor, is situated 2

miles NNW of Dovnsklint and protected by breakwaters. The

inner three basins have depths of 3 to 3.5m and are used by

fishing vessels and small craft. The entrance channel, outer

basin, and ferry berth have a depth of 6m. Vessels up to 50m in

length, 10m beam, and 3m draft can be accommodated. 

3.38 Dovnsklint (54°44'N., 10°43'E.) is the S extremity of Gulstav, the S part of Langeland. It is formed by white cliffs, up to

16m high. Keldsnor Light is shown from a tower standing 1.2

miles ENE of this point (see paragraph 2.27).

3.38 Snekke Grund, a shore bank with depths of less than 10m,

fronts Dovnsklint and extends up to about 1.3 miles seaward. 

3.38 Gulstav Flak (54°41'N., 10°43'E.), a detached bank of sand

and stones with depths of less than 10m, extends up to about 4

miles S of Dovnsklint. A wreck, with a swept depth of 9m, is

reported to lie on the S part of this bank. 

3.38 Caution.—Restricted areas, which may best be seen on the

chart, lie centered 4 miles SE of Vejsnaes Nakke Light, 3.5

miles SW of Dovnsklint, and 5 miles SSW of Dovnsklint.

Vessels are prohibited from anchoring, trawling, dredging, or

carrying out any seabed activities within these areas due to the

residual danger from mines lying on the bottom.

3.38 High speed ferries operate in the vicinity of Marstal Bugt. 

Fairways South of Fyn

3.39 The fairways S of Fyn lie within an area enclosed by

the S coast of Fyn, the N coast of Aero, and the SW coast of

Langeland. The E limit of this area is defined roughly by a line

extending between Svendborg (55°03'N., 10°37'E.) and Rudkobing (55°56'N., 10°43'E.). Most of the area is foul and encumbered by numerous islands, islets, and shoals.

3.39 Tasinge, the largest island, forms the S side of Svendborg

Sund. Ports of commercial importance in this area include the

following:

1. Faborg (55°06'N., 10°15'E.).

2. Marstal Havn (54°51'N., 10°31'E.).

3. Soby (54°57'N., 10°16'E.).

4. Aeroskobing (54°53'N., 10°25'E.).

3.39 There are also numerous shallow small craft harbors and

yacht marinas in the area.

3.39 For buoyage purposes, the channels lying S of Fyn are

considered to run E from Lille Baelt toward Svendborg.

3.39 Ice.—Ice formation in this area may appear quite early in the

season. However, the larger ports are generally open to navigation all year round and icebreakers are used when necessary.

Ice has been known to appear as early as the first part of

December off Rudkobing and remain as late as the first week

of April. As a rule, the W part of this area, to the N of Aero, is

the last to freeze over. Svendborg Sund is, for the most part,

kept free of any extensive ice formation by the current.

3.39 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in this area is small and

may vary from negligible to about 0.6m. During certain wind

conditions, a remarkable difference in the rise of the water

level at various places occurs. For example, at Faborg, NE

winds may raise the water level by up to 0.6m, whereas, with

the same wind conditions, the water level may rise by up to

1.5m at Svendborg. In general, winds from N to E cause the

water level to rise and winds from S to W cause it to fall.

3.39 In Svendborg Sund, the current is strongly affected by the

winds and as a result is very irregular. The current may set in

the same direction for 5 or 6 days and may attain a rate of up to

6 knots. 

3.39 Pilotage.—Pilots are available from the station at Tankefuld

(55°03'N., 10°34'E.) in the W approach to Svendborg Sund.

They can be contacted by VHF and board in the vicinity of

Lehnskov Pynt (55°02'N., 10°30'E.). The pilots will conduct

vessels to Svendborg and also to ports situated in the Baltic

Sea, Lille Baelt, the S part of Store Baelt, and the W part of

Smalandsfarvandet. Local pilots are available at Aeroskobing

and Marstal.

3.40 Lyo Krog (55°04'N., 10°08'E.), the passage lying

between the S side of Horne Land and the N side of Lyo, leads

2 miles ENE and then 3 miles ESE. Horne Land is the

peninsula separating Helnaes Bugt from Faaborg Fjord.

3.40 Lyo (55°03'N., 10°09'E.), an island lying 3 miles SE of

Hornenaes, was previously described in paragraph 3.36.

3.40 Knolden (55°04'N., 10°13'E.), the S extremity of Horne
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 83

Pub. 194

Land, consists of a small peninsula connected to the coast by a

narrow isthmus. It is faced on the S side by prominent lightcolored cliffs, up to 30m high. 

3.40 Knastegrund (55°03'N., 10°14'E.), a rocky shoal with

depths of less than 1m, extends about 1.2 miles SE from Knolden and is marked by a buoy.

3.40 Avernako (55°01'N., 10°17'E.), an island divided into two

parts by a narrow strip of land, lies with its N end located 1.8

miles SE of Knolden. This island is mostly built over and its

highest part is at the E end. A prominent church, with a gray

roof and tower, stands near the center of the W part of the

island.

3.40 Munke Sector Light is shown from a structure, 4m high,

standing on the E side of the W part of the island.

3.40 Nakkeodde Sector Light is shown from a structure, 3m high,

standing on the N side of the E part of the island.

3.40 Bjorno (55°04'N., 10°15'E.), a barren and hilly island, lies

1.5 miles E of Knolden and forms the S side of Faborg Fjord. A

light is shown from a structure, 3m high, standing on the SW

side of the island.

3.40 Bjornoholme Flak, a shoal with depths of less than 3m,

extends up to 0.5 mile SE from the S end of the island and is

marked by a buoy.

3.40 Lillegrund (55°03'N., 10°14'E.), a detached rocky area with

depths of less than 1m, lies in the W approach to Faborg Fjord,

0.9 mile W of Bjorno Light, and is marked by buoys.

3.40 Store Svelmo (55°02'N., 10°20'E.), an islet, lies 0.8 mile offshore, about 2.3 miles SE of Bjorno Light. Svelmo Trille, a

narrow spit, fronts the S side of this islet and is marked by a

buoy.

3.40 A conspicuous white church, with a red roof, stands at

Astrup, 2.5 miles N of Store Svelmo. Another prominent

church, with a red roof and tower, is situated at Ulbolle, about

3 miles E of Astrup.

3.40 Caution.—A submarine cable and a submarine pipeline

extend S from the SE end of Bjorno to the N end of Avernako

and are marked by beacons.

3.40 A submarine cable extends NNE from the N side of Lyo to

the coast of Fyn.

3.40 A submarine cable, which may best be seen on the chart, extends in a S direction from close NW of Knolden to the N end

of Aero. 

3.41 Faborg Fjord (55°05'N., 10°15'E.) and its

approaches lie between Knolden and Store Svelmo. Except for

some bluffs standing along the SE shore, the coast of the fjord

is generally low. Several hills rise a short distance inland. The

depths within the fjord are very irregular and there are several

shallow shoal patches.

3.41 Two channels lead through the shallow dangers into this

fjord. The E channel passes E of Bjorno and has a controlling

depth of 3.4. The W channel, which passes W of Bjorno, may

be entered by passing either E or W of Lillegrund. The fairway

leading W of Lillegrund has a controlling depth of 3.7m. The

main fairway leading E of Lillegrund has a controlling depth of

10m as far as the NW extremity of Bjorno and a controlling

depth of 4.9m as far as Faborg.

3.42 Faborg (Faaborg) (55°06'N., 10°15'E.) (World Port

Index No. 29940), a small port serving the surrounding

agricultural area, is situated at the head of Faborg Fjord. A

pleasure craft basin is situated in the NW part of the port.

3.42 Tides—Currents.—Winds from N may raise the water level

by up to 1m and winds from SW may lower it by the same

amount. 

3.42 Depths—Limitations.—The main harbor has an entrance,

30m wide, protected by breakwaters. Its inner part has depths

of 2.8 to 4.4m and is used by pleasure craft and fishing vessels.

The outer part provides 200m of total commercial quayage and

has depths of 3.2 to 5.6m alongside. A basin used by ferries is

located in the SE part of the port and has a depth of 4.5m.

Vessels up to 100m in length, 20m beam, and 4.2m draft may

be accommodated.

3.42 Aspect.—The harbor approach channel is indicated by a

lighted range. A prominent church, with a spire, stands in the

town. A bell tower and a power station chimney, both conspicuous, are situated close SSW and 0.2 mile SSE, respectively, of

the church.

3.42 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in depths of 6 to 11m,

close within the W entrance channel.

3.42 Caution.—The approach and entrance fairways are subject

to silting.

3.43 Nakkebolle Fjord (55°03'N., 10°23'E.), a small and

shallow bight, is entered 1.5 miles NE of Store Svelmo and is

almost completely encumbered with shoals. The shores are low

and densely built over. 

3.43 Lehnskov Pynt (55°02'N., 10°31'E.), located 6.2 miles E of

Store Svelmo, is the NW entrance point of Svendborg Sund.

Woods extend down almost to the water in the vicinity of this

point. A prominent green bluff, 15m high, is located about 0.7

mile WNW of the point.

Skaro (55°00'N., 10°28'E.), a low island, lies 2 miles SW of

Lehnskov Pynt. It is treeless with a few scattered houses.

Tasinge (55°00'N., 10°33'E.), the E part of which was described beginning in paragraph 2.22, is the largest island lying

S of Fyn.

Baekkehave Light (55°00'N., 10°33'E.) is shown from a

structure, 6m high, standing on the NW side of the island, 1.2

miles SE of Lehnskov Pynt.

Varo Knude, the SW extremity of this island, is located 4.3

miles S of the light. This point rises steeply on its S side to a

prominent hillock, 8m high.

Baekkehave Light
84 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

3.43 Vornaes Pynt (55°01'N., 10°31'E.), the NW extremity of

Tasinge, is located about 1 mile S of Lehnskov Pynt and forms

the SW entrance point of Svendborg Sund.

3.43 Directions.—The main route leading through this area,

which connects Lille Baelt with Store Baelt, passes between

Hornenaes and the N side of Lyo. It then passes between the N

end of Avernake and Knastegrund shoal. The route continues

in an E direction along the S coast of Fyn and into Svendborg

Sund. The fairway channel is indicated by sector lights and has

general depths of 10 to 22m.

3.43 An alternate secondary route passes S of Lyo, N of Avernako, and then joins the main fairway channel.

3.43 Caution.—Submarine cables extend NE across the channel

from the N side of Skaro to the coast of Fyn.

3.44 Svendborg Sund (55°04'N., 10°37'E.), a narrow

passage, leads between the S shore of Fyn and the NW side of

Tasinge. The entrance, lying between Lehnskov Pynt and Vornaes Pynt, is comparatively wide and deep. Both shores are

rather low and have scattered wooded areas located near the

coast

3.44 Iholm, 5m high, is an islet lying near the edge of the shore

bank on the S side, about 2 miles inside the entrance. The main

fairway passes N of this islet.

3.44 The current in the sound is very irregular and greatly influenced by the wind. During prolonged calm periods, the current

attains a rate of 2 to 3 knots. During gales, the current can

attain a rate of 6 knots in the narrower parts.

3.44 The Svendborg Sund Bridge (Bratten Bridge) (55°03'N.,

10°36'E.), a fixed road bridge, spans the sound about 1 mile

SW of Svendborg. The piers of the navigable span are protected by underwater caissons, which extend 25m in the

direction of the fairway. The centermost 50m of this navigable

span has a vertical clearance of 33m.

3.44 Saint Jorgens Light (55°03'N., 10°36'E.) is shown from a

structure standing on the N shore of the sound, close SW of the

bridge. The white sector of this light indicates the fairway

channel.

3.44 The fairway channel leading through the sound has a controlling depth of 6.9m. Vessels with drafts up to 6.5m can transit to the port of Svendborg.

3.44 For details of the port of Svendborg, see paragraph 2.24.

3.44 Caution.—Submarine cables and submarine gas pipelines

extend across the channel within 0.5 mile of the Svendborg

Sund Bridge and are marked by beacons.

3.44 The greater part of Svendborg Sund has been designated a

nature reserve and numerous restrictions apply.

3.45 An extensive shallow flat, which can best be seen on

the chart, fronts the W and S sides of Tasinge. It extends up to

about 6 miles W of the island, on the S side of the channel

leading to Svendborg Sund. This flat also extends from the SW

end of Tansinge to the SE end of Aero and from the S side of

Tasinge to the SW side of Langeland. A number of small

islands and islets lie scattered on this flat and several channels,

some buoyed, lead between them. These channels are used by

small coasters with local knowledge.

Aero (54°53'N., 10°20'E.) lies with its SE end located about

6 miles SSW of Varo Knude, the SW extremity of Tasinge.

3.45 Billes Grunde (54°59'N., 10°18'E.), a detached shoal area,

lies 3 miles ENE of Skjoldnaes, the N extremity of Aero. It has

a least depth of 3.4m and is marked by a buoy.

3.45 An area of deep water, entered between the N end of Aero

and Billes Grunde, extends SE for about 7 miles along the NE

side of Aero. It is bordered on the E side by the seaward edge

of the flat extending from the W side of Tassinge. 

3.45 Odden (54°54'N., 10°24'E.) is a low and steep-to peninsula,

1.3 miles long, which extends NE and NW from the N side of

Aero, 8 miles SE of Skjoldnaes.

3.45 Ommelshoved (54°53'N., 10°28'E.) is a low peninsula,

about 2 miles long, which extends NW from the SE end of

Aero. Halmo, an islet, lies close E of the N end of this peninsula. Its E end is formed by a low cliff.

3.45 Drejo (54°58'N., 10°25'E.), a low island, lies on the flat, 6

miles E of the N end of Aero. Skoven, the W part of the island

is connected to the E part by a narrow isthmus. This island is

almost entirely flat and treeless. A village, with a prominent

church, is situated in its E part.

3.45 Stryno (54°54'N., 10°37'E.), 10m high, lies 3 miles SE of

Varo Knude, the SW extremity of Tasinge. This island is well

built over and a prominent church stands in the village near its

center.

3.46 Soby (54°57'N., 10°16'E.), a small harbor, is situated

on the NE side of Aero, about 2.5 miles SE of Skjoldnaes. The

harbor consists of three basins and is protected by breakwaters.

The entrance is 30m wide and has a controlling depth of 4.8m.

A detached breakwater, 80m long, extends NNW on the W side

of the entrance.

Gales from NE can raise the water level by up to 1.7m and

gales from SW can lower it by the same amount.

The easternmost basin is used only by pleasure craft. The

center basin has depths of 3 to 4m and is mostly used by

fishing vessels. A ferry berth, with a depth of 4m alongside, is

situated in the S part of this basin. The westernmost basin

provides about 200m of commercial quayage, with depths of

3.5 to 4.8m alongside. Vessels up to m in length, 12m beam,

and 3.5m draft can be accommodated.

The harbormaster acts as a local pilot. Due to heavy passenger traffic, vessels of over 100 grt are required to notify the

harbor authorities in advance of their arrival and departure

times.

3.46 Good anchorage, sheltered from winds from SE through S to

WNW, is available, in depths of 13 to 15m, blue clay, off the

harbor.

3.46 Aeroskobing (54°53'N., 10°25'E.) (World Port Index No.

29800), a small harbor, lies 6.2 miles SE of Soby. It is located

in the NW corner of a shallow bay, which is enclosed by Odden

and Ommelshoved peninsulas. Dejro lies in the approaches to

The Svendborg Sund Bridge
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 85

Pub. 194

the harbor and may be passed on either side. A pleasure craft

marina is situated close NW of the harbor.

3.46 Two channels pass W of Dejro. The westernmost of these

channels has a controlling depth of 3.8m while the easternmost

has a controlling depth of 4.5m. The channel passing E of the

island has a controlling depth of 3.6m.

Gales from E to SE can raise the water level by up to 2m and

gales from W to SW can lower it by as much as 1.5m.

The harbor consists of a single basin, enclosed by two moles,

which has depths of 3.5 to 4.5m. The entrance is 15m wide and

has a controlling depth of 4.5m. Two ferry berths, located outside the basin close NNW of the N mole, have depths of 4m

alongside. Vessels up to 80m in length, 13m beam, and 4.3m

draft can be accommodated. Local pilots are available. 

3.46 A prominent white church, with a dark spire, stands in the

town and a conspicuos windmill is situated about 0.4 mile SW

of it.

3.46 Port can be contacted as follows: 

3.47 Marstal (54°51'N., 10°31'E.) (World Port Index No.

29790), a small harbor, is situated at the SE end of Aero. It can

be approached from the NW through Morkedyb, from the E

through Rudkobing Lob, and from the S through Marstal

Sondre Lob.

3.47 Tides—Currents.—Gales from NE to E can raise the water

level by up to 1.2m and gales from SE to S can lower it by the

same amount.

3.47 Depths—Limitations.—Morkedyb, a narrow buoyed channel, leads SE through the extensive flat extending W from

Tasinge. It is entered S of Drejo and has a controlling depth of

3m.

3.47 Rudkobing Lob, a narrow passage, leads S from Rudkobing

(see paragraph 2.25). It passes S of Stryno and has a controlling depth of 3.6m.

3.47 Marstal Sondre Lob, a buoyed channel, leads N from Marstal

Bugt (see paragraph 3.38). It is indicated by a lighted range and

has a controlling depth of 4.5m.

3.47 The harbor consists of a narrow channel fronting the town,

which is protected on the E side by a detached breakwater, 3m

high. This breakwater extends almost parallel to the shore and

terminates at its S end near Aeroshale, a narrow tongue of land

forming the SE extremity of Aero.

3.47 The harbor entrance, 32m wide, is protected by a short

detached breakwater. The S part of the harbor is used only by

pleasure craft. There are several shipyards and a floating dock,

115m long and 15.5m wide. Marstal Quay provides 518m of

quayage, with depth of 3.2 to 4.5m alongside. There are facilities for general cargo, ferries, tankers, and passenger vessels.

Vessels up to 115m in length, 20m beam, and 4.5m draft can be

accommodated.

3.47 Aspect.—A prominent church, with a dark spire, stands in

the town and a mill, without sails, is situated close SW of it. A

prominent shipyard building is situated close NW of the harbor

entrance.

3.47 Pilotage.—Pilots are available from the harbor. They may be

contacted on VHF channel 71 and board in the vicinity of the

seaward entrance to the buoyed channel leading through

Marstal Sondre Lob. Pilotage is not compulsory but is recommended. Vessels should send their ETA at the boarding place

12 hours in advance and a confirmation message 3 hours prior

to arrival.

3.47 Regulations.—Vessels with drafts over 4.2m must contact

the harbormaster by VHF prior to entering Marstal Sondre

Lob. Vessels entering by this channel must wait for vessels

departing.

3.47 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor in the roadstead off the

harbor, to the N of the range line.

3.47 Caution.—A submarine cable extends across the harbor

entrance.

3.47 High speed ferries operate in the approaches to the port.

Flensborg Fjord (Flensburger Forde)

3.48 Flensborg Fjord (54°50'N., 9°50'E.), known to the

Germans as Flensburger Forde, is one of the largest coastal

inlets in the W part of the Baltic Sea. It is about 27 miles long

and very irregularly formed. The entrance to this fjord lies

between Pols Huk (54°53'N., 10°04'E.), on the Danish island

of Als, and Schleimunde, on the German Schleswig coast,

about 12 miles S. The German port of Flensburg lies at the

head of the fjord and is reached through an intricate channel.

The fjord also provides access through Sonderborg Bugt to the

Danish port of Sonderborg which lies at the S end of Als Sund,

the latter passage emptying into the N part of the bay.

The fjord is divided naturally into an outer part and an inner

part by a line extending between Borreshoved (54°50'N.,

9°44'E.) and Habernis Huk, 2.8 miles SE. The outer part is

wide whereas the inner part is comparatively narrow and tortuous.

3.48 Ice.—The fjord only freezes over completely during severe

winters. During these times, the ice usually forms after the

middle of January and closes the fjord for about two months.

With winds from the E a hard frost can cause the fjord to freeze

over completely in 24 hours.

3.48 Generally, the ice begins to thaw in the early part of March,

when it melts along the shores and begins to move. Since W

winds usually prevail in this area at that time, the ice drifts

seaward over the entire fjord in very large floes.

3.48 Tides—Currents.—Although the tidal range in the fjord is

havn@marstal.dk

http://www.aeroehavne.dk/Welcome_uk

Marstal
86 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

mostly negligible, the tides are noticeable in some places. For

example, Sonderborg has a mean tidal range of only about

0.6m, whereas Egernsund has a mean tidal range of nearly

1.2m.

3.48 Winds from the E raise the water level and winds from the W

lower it. Strong winds from NE cause the highest rise in the

water level, up to 2.5m, and strong winds from SW to W can

reduce the water level by 1.5 to 2.5m.

3.48 Aspect.—The centerline of the fairway channel leading

through the fjord is the approximate boundary between Danish

and German waters. In many places this boundary is indicated

by beacons or lighted ranges.

3.48 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 1,000 grt

and for all oil, gas, and chemical tankers. Pilotage is recommended for all vessels with drafts over 6m proceeding to the

inner part of the fjord.

3.48 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board in the vicinity of

Flensburger Forde Lighted Buoy (54°49'N., 9°44'E.). Vessels

arriving from seaward must give an ETA at the boarding

position to the pilot station at least 5 hours in advance.

3.48 Pilots from Germany and Denmark have the right to conduct

pilotage within the territorial waters of both countries. Each

country has the right to station pilots in the fjord and to pilot

vessels as far as the approaches of any port. Within each port,

the local pilot’s nationality corresponds to that country in

which the harbor is located.

3.48 Regulations.—Vessels are prohibited to approach within

200m of the coasts in the fjord without special permission. In

the area lying NW of Holnis (54°52'N., 9°36'E.), an exception

is made to this rule and vessels may approach the coast as

closely as navigation necessitates. 

3.48 Landing on Danish territory requires permission of the

police.

3.48 Except in an emergency, vessels are prohibited from anchoring on range lines or within the fixed white sectors of the directional channel lights.

3.48 Caution.—Fishing gear, nets, and traps are laid along the

shores of the fjord, annually, from September to the end of

May. They extend offshore to a depth of about 3m and in most

areas are marked by barrel buoys.

3.49 Flensborg Fjord Entrance.—The coast extending

between Pols Huk (54°53'N., 10°04'E.), previously described

in paragraph 3.35, and the W end of Kegnaes, 7 miles W, forms

the N shore of the entrance to the fjord.

3.49 Kegnaes (54°52'N., 9°55'E.), a low peninsula, is connected

at its E end by a narrow isthmus to the mainland. A prominent

church is situated at the SW end of this peninsula.

3.49 A light is shown from a prominent tower, 18m high, standng

on a bluff at the SE end of the peninsula.

3.49 The coastal bank, with depths of less than 8m, extends up to

about 0.7 mile S and SE from the shore in the vicinity of the

light and is marked by a buoy. Flejmose Sand, a shallow and

rocky bank, fronts the S side of the peninsula, 1.3 miles W of

the light. This bank is steep-to and extends up to about 0.4 mile

seaward. The water over this bank is usually visible from a

distance due to its light color.

3.49 Fiskersand, a shoal bank with depths of less thn 8m, extends

up to about 0.7 mile S from the S side of the peninsula, 3.2

miles W of the light.

The coast extending between Schleimunde (54°40'N.,

10°02'E.) and Birknack, 9 miles NW, forms the S shore of the

entrance to the fjord. This low, sandy stretch of coast is diked

for almost its entire length. Behind the dike, the land is marshy

and partly cultivated. The coastal bank, with depths of less than

10m, extends up to about 1.7 miles seaward in places along the

shore.

The prominent tower of a manor house stands near the shore

at Oehe, 2.5 miles NW of Schleimunde. A conspicuous silo is

situated at Schwackendorf, 2.3 miles W of this tower.

3.49 Birknack (54°48'N., 9°55'E.) is a low and barren point. Falshoft Tower, a disused light tower, stands near the shore, 2.7

miles SE of this point. It is 24m high and prominent.

3.49 Kalkgrund (54°48'N., 9°54'E.), a shallow spit, extends

about 2 miles NNW from Birknack. It consists of fine sand and

stones. 

3.49 Kalkgrund Light (54°49'N., 9°53'E.), equipped with a

racon, is shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 24m high,

standing at the N end of this spit.

3.49 Bredgrund (54°49'N., 10°02'E.), an extensive shoal area,

encumbers the entrance of the fjord and lies centered 3 miles

SE of Kegnaes Light. It is marked on the S side by a buoy. This

shoal area has a least depth of 4.3m, which lies near the center

and is marked by a buoy moored about 0.5 mile N of it.

3.49 Directions.—The main entrance channel lies S of Bredgrund and is part of the Kiel-Flensburg Route, which may best

be seen on the chart.

Kegnaes Light

Falshoft Disused Light Tower
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 87

Pub. 194

3.49 From the vicinity of Lighted Buoy No. 2, moored 5.5 miles

SE of Schleimunde, the route leads NW for about 10 miles to

the Lighted Buoy No. 3, moored 5.5 miles SE of Kalkgrund

Light. It then leads NW for about 6 miles to Lighted Buoy No.

4, moored 1 mile NNE of Kalkgrund Light.

3.49 Vessels may then proceed WSW into the inner part of the

fjord or NW toward Sonderborg Bugt.

3.49 A narrow channel lying between the N side of Bredgrund

and the shore bank fronting the S part of Kegnaes also leads

into the fjord. The fairway has a minimum width of about 0.2

mile and a least depth of 10.9m. Its narrowest part is marked by

a buoy and indicated by light sectors.

3.49 The outer part of the fjord has a controlling depth of 18m.

3.49 Caution.—A disued ammunition dumping ground area,

which may best be seen on the chart, lies centered 4 miles N of

Schleimunde, in the S approach to Flensborg Fjord.

3.49

3.50 Sonderborg Bugt (54°52'N., 9°50'E.) is entered between the W end of Kegnaes and Borreshoved, about 4.8 miles

SW. This bay has general depths of 21 to 31m. 

3.50 Middelgrund (54°51'N., 9°52'E.), a steep-to and rocky

detached shoal, lies centered 1.4 miles SW of the W extremity

of Kegnaes, on the E side of the entrance. It has a least depth of

2.8m and is marked by buoys, moored at the E and W sides.

3.50 Heltsbanke (54°51'N., 9°47'E.), a detached shoal area, lies

centered 1.3 miles ENE of Borreshoved, on the W side of the

entrance. It has a least depth of 5.4m and is marked by a buoy

moored at the SE side.

3.50 The main deep channel leading into the bay lies between

Middelgrund and Heltsbanke. A secondary channel, with a

controlling depth of 10.7m, leads NNW between Middelgrund

and the W side of Kegnaes. A narrow channel, with a controlling depth of 5.2m, leads NNE between Heltsbanke and

Borreshoved.

3.50 Vemmingbund (54°54'N., 9°44'E.), a small bight, indents

the NW shore of Sonderborg Bugt. The land in the vicinity of

the head of this bight is low. 

3.50 Horup Hav (55°53'N., 9°57'E.), an inlet, indents the NE part

of the bay and extends along the N side of Kegnaes. Horuphav

Havn, a yacht harbor, is situated on the N side of the entrance

to this inlet, 0.7 mile N of the N extremity of Kegnaes. 

3.50 Borreshoved (54°50'N., 9°45'E.), the W entrance point of

Sonderborg Bugt, is the N entrance point of the inner part of

the fjord. This point is fringed by a steep-to and shallow shore

bank, which extends up to about 0.3 mile seaward and is

marked by a buoy.

3.50 Flensburger Forde Lighted Buoy (54°49'N., 9°44'E.),

marking the entrance to the inner part of the fjord, is moored

about 0.8 mile S of Borreshoved Point.

3.50 Caution.—Except for Danish vessels, navigation is prohibited within Horup Hav.

Sonderborg (54°55'N., 9°47'E.)

World Port Index No. 30060 

3.51 Sonderborg, situated on the N side of Sonderborg

Bugt, lies at the S entrance to Als Sund. This river port has

berthing facilities extending along both shores of the sound.

The main part of the town stands on the E side of the sound. 

3.51 For details of the N entrance to Als Sund, see paragraph

3.34.

3.51 Ice.—Navigation within the port is impeded by ice only

during severe winters. 

3.51 Tides—Currents.—The current in the harbor generally sets

N and may attain a rate of up to 3 knots. During such times, it

is difficult to navigate within the harbor or through the passage

of the bridge. 

3.51 Winds from E can raise the water level by up to 1.2m and

winds from W can lower it by the same amount.

3.51 Depths—Limitations.—The route leading through the bay

to the port has depths of more than 18m as far as the entrance

to Als Sund. The steep-to shore banks fronting both sides of

the S entrance, which has a controlling depth of 7.5m, extend

seaward and narrow the fairway channel to a width of only

about 270m. 

3.51 The Christian X Bridge (Kong Christian den X’s Bro), a

bascule bridge, spans the sound about 0.4 mile above the S

entrance and divides the port into two harbors, Nordhavnen

(North Harbor) and Sydhavnen (South Harbor). The navigable

passage of this bridge is 30m wide. It has vertical clearance of

only 5m when closed.

3.51 The commercial quays, situated along the E side of Nordhavnen. provide 800m of total berthage, with a depth of 7.5m

alongside. There are also several offshore mooring dolphins, in

depths of 9 to 10m, for the use of lay-up vessels.

3.51 Sydhavnen, which is mainly used by passenger ferries and

fishing boats, has 500m of total quayage, with depths of 4 to

8m alongside. Vessels up to 4,000 grt and 6.5m draft can enter

the harbor through the bridge from the S.

3.51 The N entrance has a controlling depth of 10.5m. Vessels up

to 33,000 grt, 200m in length, 32m beam, and 9.5m draft can

enter the harbor through the N entrance of the sound, but may

not proceed S of the Christian X Bridge.

Kalkgrund Light

The Christian X Bridge
88 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

3.51 The Als Sund Bridge, an elevated fixed bridge, stands 0.9

mile N of the Christian X Bridge. The navigable channel leading through the bridge has a width of 50m and a vertical clearance of 33m. 

3.51 Aspect.—The outer limits of the E and W shore banks fronting the S entrance to the sound are marked by lighted buoys.

An extensive marina, protected by breakwaters, is situated on

the E side of the entrance, about 0.9 mile SSE of the Christian

X Bridge. A light is shown from the head of its main breakwater.

3.51 A prominent beacon is situated on the shore at the W side of

the entrance, 0.8 mile SW of the Christian X Bridge. A prominent church, with a spire, stands in the town, close E of the

bridge. A prominent castle is situated on the E shore, about 0.3

mile S of the bridge and close N of the entrance.

3.51 Dybbol Windmill stands on a bare hill, 0.9 mile WSW of the

Christian X Bridge, and is conspicuous. A prominent yellow

pyramid-shaped monument is situated close SW this windmill. 

3.51 Pilot for Port of Sonderborg can be contact as follow: 

3.51 Pilotage.—Local harbor pilots are available. They may be

contacted by VHF and generally board off Middelgrund. Tankers and all other vessels over 2,000 dwt are recommended to

use the services of a pilot. In addition, see pilotage for Flensborg Fjord in paragraph 3.47. 

3.51 Regulations.—Vessels must proceed only at speeds necessary to maintain steerageway when within 250m of either side

of the bridge while passing through the navigable span.

3.51 Anchoring within 250m of the bridge, except in an emergency, is prohibited.

3.51 Vessels anchoring in the channel must do so in a manner that

does not impede the passage of other vessels proceeding

through the bridge.

3.51 Vessels must stay at least 100m from the bridge until the

signal to pass through the span is given.

3.51 With the exception of recreational vessels, only one vessel at

a time may pass through the bridge span. When a sailing vessel

and a power-driven vessel are approaching the bridge from the

same direction at the same time, the sailing vessel shall have

precedence. 

3.51 Vessels must proceed according to the directions given by

the bridge watch.

3.51 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor S of the lighted buoy

marking the seaward limit of the shore bank on the E side of

the entrance.

3.51 Caution.—The direction of buoyage changes at the Christian X Bridge.

3.51 Several submarine cables and pipelines extend across the

harbor and may best be seen on the chart.

3.52 Geltinger Bucht (54°48'N., 9°51'E.) is entered

between Kalkgrund Light and Habernis Huk, 3.7 miles SW.

This bay has general depths of 7 to 23m between the shore

banks. Jurgens Schott, a shoal area of sand and weed, has

depths of 4.8 to 7.5m and projects about 1.7 miles N from the

head of the bay.

Gelting, a small craft harbor, and two marinas are situated

near the head of the bay.

3.52 Anchorage is available, according to draft, N of Jurgens

Schott, but winds send in a sea that makes this roadstead unsuitable for small vessels.

3.52 Habernis Huk (54°48'N., 9°47'E.), the W entrance point of

Geltinger Bucht, is the S entrance point of the inner fjord. The

shore bank, with depths of less than 5m, fronts this point and

extends up to about 0.5 mile seaward.

3.52 The village of Habernis stands on high ground about 0.5

mile W of the point and is conspicuous from seaward.

3.52 Neukirchen Grund (54°49'N., 9°46'E.), a steep-to and

rocky shoal, lies about 1.2 miles NW of Habernis Huk. This

shoal has a least depth of 2.3m and is marked by a buoy,

moored close N of it.

3.52 Caution.—Former mine areas lie along the E and W sides of

Geltinger Bucht. Vessels are cautioned that anchoring, fishing,

or carrying out sea bed activities along the sides of this bay

could be dangerous.

3.52 A nature reserve area lies along the NE side of Geltinger

Bucht and extends up to 0.6 mile seaward. Entry is subject to

numerous restrictions.

3.53 The inner part of the fjord, entered between Borreshoved and Habernis Huk, initially leads WNW for about 5

miles toward the Holnis peninsula. The route then consists of

three reaches that lead generally NNE, WNW, and SW around

this peninsula. It continues SW for about 7 miles to the head of

the fjord. 

3.53 Skelde Vig (54°51'N., 9°42'E.), a small bight, lies 1.7 miles

WNW of Borreshoved. It affords sheltered anchorage to small

vessels, in depths of 5 to 11m.

The Als Sund Bridge

Telephone: 45 74 422765

Fax: 45 74 433019 

havnen@sonderborg.dk

http://www.sonderborg.dk/english/

Dybbol Windmill
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 89

Pub. 194

3.53 Brunsnaes Flak (54°52'N., 9°38'E.), a shoal, fronts the S

and W sides of Brunsnaes, 4 miles WNW of Borreshoved. This

shoal, with depths of less than 10m, extends up to about 0.8

mile seaward and is marked by buoys.

3.53 A conspicuous white church, with twin spires and a separate

bell tower, stands at Broager, about 2 miles NNE of Brunsnaes.

3.53 Langballigau (54°49'N., 9°40'E.), a small fishing harbor, is

situated at the mouth of a river, 5 miles WNW of Habernis

Huk. The entrance is 15m wide and has a controlling depth of

2.1m. The pilot vessel used by German pilots is stationed at

this harbor.

3.53 A prominent beacon stands near the shore, about 1 mile ESE

of Langballigau. A conspicuous windmill is situated at Westerholz, 0.6 mile SE of Langballigau.

3.53 Langballig Bank (54°50'N., 9°40'E.), formed by two detached shoal patches, lies centered 0.7 mile NE of Langballigau. It has depths of 7.6 to 8.9m and is marked a buoy moored

on the NW side.

3.54 Holnis (54°52'N., 9°36'E.), a peninsula, projects N for

about 2 miles from the S shore of Flensborg Fjord. This peninsula is very low at its S end where it connects to the mainland.

Holnishaken, a steep-to and sandy spit with several drying

rocks, extends about 0.5 mile NE from the NE extremity of the

peninsula. Schidenkind, a shorebank, extends up to about 0.5

mile N and NW from the marshy NW extremity of the peninsula.

Holnis Light (54°52'N., 9°34'E.), a directional sector light,

is shown from a prominent tower, 26m high, standing on the W

side of the peninsula. The route leading into the inner part of

the fjord is indicated by the white sector of this light.

3.54 Skodsbol Reach (54°54'N., 9°39'E.) leads NNE between

Holnishaken and Holdnaes Middelgrunde, a detached shoal

with a least depth of 8.8m, lying about 0.6 mile E of the NE

extremity of Holnis.

3.54 Rinkenaes Reach (54°53'N., 9°35'E.) leads WNW and

WSW between the bank fronting N side of Holnis and the S

side of Rinkenaes Bugt.

3.54 Lagemade Reach (54°54'N., 9°37'E.) leads SW between the

bank fronting the W side of Holnis and the dangers fronting the

Danish coast.

3.54 Okseoer (54°51'N., 9°31'E.) is the outer of two islets lying

close off the N shore of the fjord, 2.2 miles W of Holnis Light.

A conspicuous beacon stands on the summit of this islet.

3.54 Farensodde (54°49'N., 9°28'E.), an extensive pleasure craft

harbor, is situated on the S side of the fjord, 2.5 miles SW of

Okseoer. The entrance is protected by two moles and has a

controlling depth of 4.8m. The shore in the vicinity of this harbor consists of white sand.

3.54 Mittelgrund (54°49'N., 9°27'E.), a shoal area with a least

depth of 4.6m, extends E from the W side of the head of the

fjord. Its outer edge is marked by a lighted buoy, moored about

0.6 mile W of Farensodde.

3.54 Osbekgrund, a shoal area with a least depth of 4.5m, extends

E from the W side of the head of the fjord. It lies about 0.5 mile

S of Mittelgrund and is marked by a lighted buoy.

3.54 Murwik (54°49'N., 9°28'E.), the site of a maritime academy,

is situated about 0.6 mile SW of Farensodde. It is fronted by

several piers and boat harbors, with depths of 4 to 8m alongside, which are closed to civilian use. The conspicuous tower

of the academy is visible from seaward.

3.54 Depths—Limitations.—The track leading WNW from the

entrance to the inner part of the fjord has depths in excess of

12m in the fairway.

3.54 The recommended track leading through Lagemade Reach,

NW of Holnis, has a controlling depth of 7m. However, a controlling depth of 10m can be maintained by using the fairway

that turns sharply round the NW end of Holnis.

3.54 Vessels navigating the narrows off Holnis are limited to a

maximum speed of 8 knots. Vessels with drafts over 7m may

require the assistance of a tug in order to navigate the sharp

turn and should not attempt the passage at night.

3.54 The fairway channel extending SW from the narrows to the

head of the fjord has general depths of 10 to 20m.

3.54 Aspect.—The recommended track leading into the inner part

of the fjord is indicated by the white sector of Holnis Light.

The recommended tracks leading through the reaches, which

may best be seen on the chart, are indicated by lighted ranges,

range beacons, and lighted buoys.

3.54 Caution.—During the winter when ice forms, the lighted

buoys in the inner part of the fjord and in the narrows off

Holnis are liable to be replaced by unlighted spar buoys.

3.54 A foul area, within which entry is prohibited, lies centered

0.6 mile N of Holnis Light and is marked by buoys.

3.54 A spoil ground dumping area, which is occasionally buoyed,

lies centered 0.8 mile WNW of Farensodde and may best be

seen on the chart.

3.55 Rinkenaes Bugt (54°54'N., 9°37'E.), the bay lying N

of Holnis, forms the approach to Egernsund and Nybol Nor.

The E part of the bay has general depths of 6 to 9m and

provides anchorage but the W part is shallow. An isolated shoal

patch, with a depth of 4.6m, lies near the middle of the bay, 0.9

mile NW of the NE extremity of Holnis and is marked by a

buoy, moored close S.

Marina Minde, an extensive pleasure craft harbor, is situated

on the E side of the bay, 1.3 miles N of the NE extremity of

Holnis, and is protected by a floating breakwater.

Egernsund (54°54'N., 9°36'E.), a short and narrow strait,

leads from the head of Rinkenaes Bugt to Grasten Havn and

Nybol Nor. An approach channel leads NW through the E part

Holnis Light
90 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

of the bay to the entrance of the strait. It is indicated by a

lighted range and marked by lighted buoys. 

The entrance fairway, which leads between the steep-to

shore banks, has a minimum width of 65m and a controlling

depth of 8.6m.

3.55 A bascule road bridge spans the strait between Egernsund

and Alnor, close inside the entrance, and has a navigable width

of 25m.

3.55 Egernsund Havn (54°55'N., 9°36'E.), a small harbor, lies in

the middle of the strait and is used by coasters, fishing boats,

and pleasure craft. There are several piers and a quay, 30m

long, with depths of 2.5 to 4m alongside. Vessels up to 80m in

length, 23m beam, and 4m draft can be handled.

3.55 Grasten Havn (54°55'N., 9°36'E.), a small harbor, lies at the

head of Sildekule, a small bight extending N from Egernsund.

The entrance channel, which is marked by buoys and indicated

by lighted ranges, has a controlling depth of 5m. There is a

quay, 160m long, and a pier, 50m long, which have depths of

5m alongside. Two prominent silos stands near the quay. Vessels up to 70m in length, 15m beam, and 4.8m draft can be

handled.

3.55 Nybol Nor (54°55'N., 9°38'E.) is an enclosed body of water

extending about 2 miles NE from the bridge at Egernsund. It is

mostly used by pleasure craft. The entrance channel is marked

by buoys and has a controlling depth of 7m.

3.55 Caution.—A submerged cable and a gas pipeline cross the

strait in the vicinity of the bridge at Egernsund and are marked

by beacons.

3.55 To the W of Farensort, the approach to Flensburg is 1.5 miles

wide, but the entrance fairway is narrowed to a width of 0.2

mile by Mittelgrund and Osbekgrund.

Flensburg (54°48'N., 9°26'E.)

World Port Index No. 29005

3.56 Flensburg, a commercial port and ferry terminal, lies

in a narrow inlet at the head of Flensburg Fjord. The harbor

consists of a natural basin, over 1 mile long, and an artificial

basin situated at Freihafen, on the E side of the entrance. 

3.56 Ice.—The harbor freezes only during severe winters. 

3.56 Tides—Currents.—Winds from S lower the water level and

winds from NE raise it. The highest observed level was 3m

above the mean sea level and the lowest was 2.4m below.

Generally, the level ranges from 1.7m above to 1.5m below. 

3.56 Depths—Limitations.—The entrance fairway has a controlling depth of 9.6m. 

3.56 Harniskai, at the E side of the harbor, provides two cargo quays,

240m and 470m long, with depths of 6 to7m alongside. Ballastkai, a quay located close S of Harniskai, is 140m long. It has a

depth of 5m alongside and is used by passenger vessels.

3.56 Innerkai, a quay located at the SW side of the harbor, is 320m

long. It has a depth of 5m alongside and is used by passenger

ferries. Schiffbruckkai, two quays located close N of Innerkai,

provide 290m of total berthage, with depths of 5 to 6.5m alongside. Kraftwerk Kai, at the power station, is 180m long and has a

depth of 9m alongside.

3.56 Vessels up to 8.5m draft can be accommodated in the port.

3.56 Aspect.—A conspicuous power station, with a tall chimney,

stands on the NW side of the harbor entrance and a shipyard is

situated close N of it. A prominent silo is situated on the E

side, 0.3 mile SE of the power station. Several conspicuous

churches stand in the town.

3.56 The approach channel leading SSW into the inlet between

Mittelgrund and the coast is indicated by the white sector of

Kielseng Light, which is shown from a mast, 5m high, standing

on the E side of the harbor. The entrance fairway leading SW

into the harbor is indicated by a lighted range.

3.56 Pilotage.—Local pilots are available at the harbor for

departing vessels. For arriving vessels, pilot board for

Flengburg in position 54°49.5'N, 9°44.5'E. Flengburg Pilot can

be contacted as follow: 

3.56 Vessels should request the port of Flenburg pilot 12 hours

before arrival, and a 5-hour ETA confirmation to be sent prior

arrival at pilot station. Pilotage is compulsory for following: 

1. Tankers carrying gas, liquefied chemicals, bulkpetroleum products; discharged cargo tankers with unclean

tanks or cargo tanks not gassfreed shall have a pilot onboard.

Tankers carrying or having carried any of the

aforementioned product with a flash point below 35°C shall

carry pilot.

2. Any vessel of 90m and above LOA, or 13m and above

width, or having a draft of 6m and above, shall carry a pilot.

3. All outbound vessels as stated in 1 and 2 above,

should request for pilot, 5 hours before ETD from a port in

Flensburger Forde.

3.56 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in depths of up to

19m, mud, in the roadstead lying NE of Mittelgrund. The

harbor basin is too narrow and restricted for anchoring. 

3.56 Vessel Traffic System (VTS).—In the area and the stretch

along Kiel-Flensburg Route, between Bulk Light (54°27.3'N.,

10°11.8'E.) and Kalkgrun Light (54°49.5'N., 9°53'E.) vessels

are to call Kiel Bight Traffic on VHF channel 16; 73.

Alternative means of contact as follow: 

Flensborg Fjord to Kieler Forde

3.57 Directions.—Coastal route—The Kiel-Flensburg

Route, which may best be seen on the chart, forms the main

passage along this stretch of the coast.

From the vicinity of Lighted Buoy No. 3, moored 5.5 miles

SE of Kalkgrund Light (54°49'N., 9°53'E.) in the approach to

Flensborg Fjord, the track leads SE for about 10 miles to

Telephone: 49 416 141217

Fax: 49 431 361049

etainfo@kielpilot.de

http://www.kielpilot.de/

Telephone: 49 4502 84750

Fax: 49 4502 8475527

vkz-trave.wsa-luebeck@wsv.bund.de 
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 91

Pub. 194

Lighted Buoy No. 2, moored 5.5 miles SE of Schleimunde

(54°40'N., 10°02'E.). It then continues SE for about 9 miles to

a position lying 1.3 miles E of Kiel Light (54°30'N., 10°16'E.),

in the approach to Kieler Forde.

3.58 Schleimunde (54°40'N., 10°02'E.), located close S of

the entrance to Flensburger Forde, forms the entrance to Die

Schlei. Two breakwaters extend seaward and protect the

entrance to this narrow fjord.

3.58 Die Schlei extends inland for about 22 miles in a SW direction from Schleimunde to the town of Schleswig. The shore is

very irregular and the fjord varies in width from about 100m to

over 2 miles. Some sections are subject to silting and the

fairway depths are maintained by dredging. Local knowledge

is required. Several harbors used by small craft, pleasure boats,

and fishing vessels are situated along the fjord.

3.58 Ice.—Generally, the fjord freezes over before the outer

waters. Navigation for small craft is usually difficult from January to February.

3.58 Tides—Currents.—The current usually follows the direction of the channel and sets in or out according to the prevailing winds. In the narrow parts of the fjord the current may

attain a rate of 3 knots. Tides are negligible. 

3.58 Depths—Limitations.—Schleimunder Seegat, a dredged

entrance channel, leads across the shallow coastal bank and is

marked by buoys. It is 65m wide and has a controlling depth of

5m. The channel from Shleimunde has a controlling depth of

3.8m as far as Kappeln (54°40'N., 9°56'E.) and 3.5m as far as

Arnis (54°38'N., 9°56'E.). Above Arnis the controlling depth is

only 2.5m.

3.58 A highway drawbridge is situated at Kappeln; a highway and

railroad bascule bridge is situated at Lindaunis (54°35'N.,

9°49'E.). Both bridges have navigable widths of 22.3m.

3.58 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 28m, spans

the fjord about 1.2 miles NE of Kappeln and another overhead

cable, with a vertical clearance of 26m, spans the fjord 0.9 mile

NE of Lindaunis.

3.59 Kappeln (54°40'N., 9°56'E.) (World Port Index No.

28955), a small port, is situated on the W side of the fjord.

Quays, 100m and 170m long, line the shore N and S, respectively, of the bridge and have depths of 4 to 5m alongside. There

are facilities for bulk vessels and passenger ferries. Vessels up

to 120m in length, 13m beam, and 4m draft can be accommodated, but entry is dependent on the controlling depth of the

dredged fairway.

3.59 Aspect.—Schleimunde Light is shown from a prominent

floodlit tower, 14m high, standing on the head of the N breakwater, at the entrance to the fjord.

3.59 The fairway channel of the fjord is marked by beacons and

buoys. The reaches as far as Kappeln are indicated by four

lighted ranges.

3.59 Pilotage.—Pilots are available and should be requested from

Kiel Bight, as in Pilot for Flensburg above.

3.59 Anchorage.—With W winds, anchorage can be obtained, in

depths up to 14m, according to draft, about 2 miles E of the

fjord entrance. However, this anchorage is unsafe with E

winds.

3.59 Caution.—Special marine regulations are in force for navigation on Die Schlei.

3.60 Between Schleimunde and Eckernforder Bucht, 9

miles S, the coast is mostly low and wooded. In the vicinity of

Schleimunde the shore is low, but at Schonhagen, about 2 miles

S, it is steep and prominent from seaward. This stretch of coast

is fringed by a shore bank, which is foul and weedy, with

depths of less than 4m. 

3.60 Olpenitz Hafen (54°40'N., 10°02'E.), lying 0.6 mile S of

Schleimunde, is a small military harbor which is closed to

commercial shipping. The harbor is protected by breakwaters

and has depths of 2.4 to 6.5m. A prominent chimney stands

close S of this harbor.

3.60 A conspicuous castle stands at Schonhagen, about 1.5 miles

S of Olpenitz Hafen. A prominent mill, without sails, is situated on the high ground at Brodersby, 1.5 miles WNW of the

castle. 

3.60 Schonhagener Grund (54°37'N., 10°04'E.), a rocky shoal

patch, lies about 1 mile offshore, 2.5 miles SSE of Olpenitz

Hafen. It has a depth of 4.8m and is marked by a buoy.

3.60 Bokniseck (Boknis Eck) (54°33'N., 10°01'E.), located about

7 miles S of Olpenitz Hafen, is the N entrance point of Eckernforder Bucht. Sporthafen Damp, an extensive yacht marina, is

situated 2 miles N of this point.

3.60 Caution.—A prohibited area, the limits of which are shown

on the chart, lies centered 3 miles SE of Schleimunde. It is used

for mining exercises and is marked by buoys.

3.60 A mine laying practise area (restricted area), the limits of

which are shown on the chart, lies with its N end located about

2.8 miles ENE of Schleimunde. This area, which extends in a S

direction for 5 miles, is 0.8 mile wide.

3.60 A disused explosives dumping ground area, the limits of

which are shown on the chart, lies centered 4.5 miles SSE of

Schleimunde.

3.60 Submarine pipelines, marked by buoys, extend about 2.5

miles NE and 1.5 miles ESE from a point on the shore located

about 1 mile N of Bokniseck.

3.60 A submarine exercise area, the limits of which are shown on

the chart, lies centered 3 miles E of Bokniseck.

3.61 Eckernforder Bucht (54°30'N., 10°00'E.) is entered

between Bokniseck and Danisch Nienhof, a poorly defined

Schleimunde Light
92 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

point located 5 miles SE. This bay, which extends SW for

about 8 miles, narrows gradually to a width of 1.5 miles at its

head. It is mostly free of dangers and has general depths of 9 to

27m.

The shores of the bay are high in places, with hills behind,

and are thickly wooded. A conspicuous church stands on the S

side at Krusendorf, 2.8 miles W of Danisch Nienhof.

A conspicuous chimney, 27m high, stands on the N side at

Waabs, 1.6 miles SW of Bokniseck, and a prominent silo is

situated 0.5 mile SW of it. A prominent church stands close N

of the chimney but is reported to be often obscured by trees. 

3.61 Mittelgrund (54°31'N., 10°03'E.), a large detached shoal,

lies centered 2.6 miles SSE of Bokniseck in the middle of the

entrance to the bay. It has a least depth of 5.5m and is marked

by a buoy.

3.61 Eckernforde Light (54°28'N., 9°51'E.), a directional light,

is shown from a prominent tower, 27m high, standing at the

head of the bay. A prominent radio mast is situated 0.6 mile

SSW of the light.

3.61 Der Ort, a small craft harbor, is situated on the N side of the

bay, 1 mile NE of the light. It is used exclusively by naval

vessels. A yacht marina lies close NE of this harbor. 

3.61 A conspicuous mill stands on a hill, 38m high, at Lindhoft,

about 4 miles E of the light.

3.62 Eckernforde (54°29'N., 9°50'E.) (World Port Index

No. 28950), a small port and resort, is situated in the NW part

of the head of the bay.

3.62 Ice.—In general, ice conditions in the bay are similar to

those in Kieler Forde. Occasionally, the inner bay will freeze

over 1 week before Kieler Forde. Usually, the first ice appears

in the middle of January and disappears during the last part of

February.

3.62 Tides—Current.—Normally, the current flows into the bay

with N or E winds and out with S and W winds. During strong

N winds, the current flows in along the N shore and out again

along the S shore. The currents attain rates of about 1 knot in

the bay.

3.62 Winds from NE can raise the water level in the harbor by up

to 0.9m and winds from SW can lower it by as much as 1.2m.

3.62 Depths—Limitations.—The approach route through the

bay leads WSW and passes NNW of Mittelgrund. It is indicated by the white sector of Eckernforder Light. An outer entrance buoy is moored at the head of the bay, about 1 mile SE

of the port. From this buoy, the entrance channel, which has a

controlling depth of 6m, leads 0.9 mile NW and is indicated by

the white sector of the harbor light. 

3.62 A bascule bridge divides the harbor into inner and outer

basins. The inner basin has depths of 3 to 3.5m and is used by

pleasure craft. A small craft basin, protected by a mole, is

situated on the SE side of the outer basin. The quays in the W

part of the outer basin are used mostly by fishing vessels. 

3.62 Pilotage.—Pilots are requested from Kiel Bight, as in Pilot

for Flensburg above. 

3.62 The commercial quays at the SE side of the outer basin provide 400m of total berthage, with depths of 5 to 6m alongside.

There are facilities for general cargo vessels, bulk vessels, and

passenger ferries. Vessels up to 5m draft can be accommodated.

3.62 Aspect.—The church standing in the town at Eckernforde is

conspicuous. A prominent disused light tower, 12m high,

stands near the root of the mole on the S side of the outer basin.

3.62 Anchorage.—Good anchorage is available, in depths of 18 to

20m, mud and clay, within the roadstead lying about 0.8 mile SE

of the harbor.

3.62 Caution.—A small prohibited area, marked by buoys, lies 1

mile SE of Bokniseck and may best be seen on the chart.

3.62 A measured distance (2 miles) is situated close SW of

Bokniseck and may best be seen on the chart. Its running

course is marked by buoys and three pairs of range beacons.

Vessels using this measured distance should display the flag

signal SM.

3.62 A small prohibited area, which may best be seen on the

chart, lies adjacent to the shore in the vicinity of a pier used by

naval craft, about 2 miles W of Danisch Nienhof.

3.62 A torpedo firing range area lies parallel with the S shore of

Eckernforder Bucht and extends from the head of the bay to the

vicinity of Mittelgrund. It is marked by buoys and may best be

seen on the chart. Vessels entering the bay are cautioned to stay

N of this range area. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited

within the area. When the range is in use, warning signals are

shown from patrol vessels and from a signal mast on the S

shore.

3.62 A small prohibited area, which may best be seen on the

chart, lies centered 0.5 mile SE of Eckernforde Light.

3.62 A small prohibited area, which may best be seen on the

chart, lies adjacent to the shore close E of Der Ort, the naval

craft harbor.

3.62 It is reported that the tower of a hostel standing close S of

Eckernforde Light is conspicuous and from a distance may be

mistaken for the light structure.

Kieler Forde

3.63 Approaches.—Kiel Light (54°30'N., 10°16'E.),

equipped with a racon, is shown from a prominent floodlit

tower standing on a caisson in the outer approaches to Kieler

Forde. Pilot vessels are stationed within a small sheltered basin

at the base of the light structure, which is protected by two

moles extending S and W.

Eckernforde Light
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 93

Pub. 194

3.63 Bulk Light (54°27'N., 10°12'E.) is shown from a prominent

tower, 25m high, standing on a wooded point at the W side of

the approach, 3 miles SE of Danisch Nienhof. A stony shore

bank, with depths of less than 5m, fronts the point and extends

up to about 0.6 mile seaward in the vicinity of the light. Kleverberg, a stony foul area with depths of less than 10m, extends

up to about 1.5 miles ENE of the light and is marked by a

lighted buoy. 

3.63 The coast extending NW of Bulk Light is high and sparsely

wooded. It is fronted by a shore bank, with depths of less than

10m, which extends up to about 1.6 miles seaward.

3.63 Stollergrund (54°31'N., 10°12'E.), an extensive detached

area of stony foul ground, lies centered 4 miles N of Bulk

Light. It has a least depth of 6.6m and is marked by a buoy

moored on its N side.

3.63 Stollergrund Rinne (54°30'N., 10°11'E.), a secondary channel leading into the W side of Kieler Forde, passes between the

S side of Stollergrund and the shorebank fronting the coast. It

has a minimum width of about 0.3 mile and a controlling depth

of 10.6m.

3.64 Stein (54°25'N., 10°16'E.), a village, stands on the E

side of the approach, 3.4 miles SE of Bulk Light. Sporthafen

Wendorf, a small harbor, fronts the shore in the vicinity of this

village and is used by fishing boats and pleasure craft. It is

protected on the W side by a stone dam and has a controlling

depth of 2.8m.

3.64 The coast extending to the E of Stein is low with salt flats,

which are protected against flooding by dikes. Kolberger

Heide, a coastal bank with depths of less than 5m, fronts the

shore and extends up to about 0.4 mile seaward. A detached

shoal patch, with a least depth of 4.5m, lies about 1 mile offshore, 2.5 miles NE of Stein.

3.64 Au Haken, a shorebank with depths of less than 5m, fronts

the coast close W of Stein and extends up to about 1 mile seaward in places.

3.64 Several extensive shoals lie within 6 miles of the coast, on

either side of the approaches to Kieler Forde. Outside these

shoals, the depths are uneven and vary between 10m and 20m.

The bottom consists mainly of rocks and large stones.

3.64 Gabelsflach (54°32'N., 10°21'E.), a detached shoal patch, is

the outermost danger in the approach. It lies about 2.5 miles

NE of Kiel Light and has depths of 9.3 to 9.8m.

3.64 Regulations.—An IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Scheme

(TSS) lies at the N entrance to Kieler Forde and is centered 0.8

mile SE of Kiel Light.

3.64 The E end of the separation zone is marked by Lighted Buoy

KO1/1, which is moored about 1.2 miles E of Kiel Light. The

W end of the separation zone is marked by Kieler Forde

Lighted Buoy, which is moored about 0.9 mile S of Kiel Light.

Inbound traffic passes on the N side of these lighted buoys and

outbound traffic passes on the S side.

3.64 Directions.—Vessels approaching from the Store Baelt or

Fehmarn Baelt should use the Kiel-Ostsee Route and pass SW

of Gabelsflach. The track, which is shown on the chart, leads in

a WSW direction toward the vicinity of Lighted Buoy KO1/1.

3.64 Vessels approaching from Fehmarnsund should use the KielFehmarnsund Route. The track, which is shown on the chart,

leads in a W direction toward the vicinity of the Lighted Buoy

KO1/1.

3.64 Vessels approaching from Lille Baelt or Flensburger Forde

should use the Kiel-Flensburg Route. The track, which is

shown on the chart, leads in a SSE direction to the vicinity of

the Lighted Buoy KO1/1.

3.64 All inbound vessels should proceed SW in the TSS traffic

lane. From a position located about 0.8 mile S of Kiel Light,

vessels should steer SSW for 2.5 miles, using the fixed white

sector of Friedrichsort Light (54°23'N., 10°12'E.), to a position

about 1.3 miles ESE of Bulk Light. They should then steer SW

and SSW for about 3 miles, using the white isophase sector of

Friedrichsort Light, to a position close E of the Lighted Buoy

No. 7 (54°24'N., 10°12'E.). The track then continues S into the

fjord.

3.64 Outbound vessels should proceed NNE for about 3 miles

from close E of Lighted Buoy No. 7, using the fixed white sector of Friedrichsort Light, astern, to a position about 1.7 miles

E of Bulk Light. They should then continue to steer NNE for

about 1.5 miles, using the white sector of Kiel Light. From a

position about 2 miles S of Kiel Light, vessels should then

proceed NE through the TSS traffic lane.

3.64 Caution.—A submarine cable, marked by buoys, extends

NE from the vicinity of Bulk Light to Kiel Light. Anchoring

and fishing are prohibited within 300m of this cable.

3.64 Numerous foul patches and wrecks lie in the approach area

and may best be seen on the chart.

Kiel Light

Bulk Light
94 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

3.64 An explosives dumping ground area, within which anchoring

is prohibited, lies centered 3.2 miles SE of Kiel Light and may

best be seen on the chart.

3.64 It is reported that vessels using the TSS at the N en-trance to

Kieler Forde are often advised by the pilots to navi-gate within

the outbound traffic lane when entering due to the deeper

depths. 

3.65 Kieler Forde (54°26'N., 10°13'E.) includes the area

extending SSW for about 7.5 miles from Kiel Light. It is

bounded on the W side by the stretch of coast extending

between Bulk Light and Friedrichsort Light, 4 miles S. It is

bounded on the E side by the stretch of coast extending between Stein and Jagersberg, 3 miles SW.

3.65 Strander Bucht (54°26'N., 10°12'E.), a bay, lies 1.4 miles S

of Bulk Light and indents the W side of the fjord. Strande, a

small harbor, is situated at the head of the bay. It has a controlling depth of 3.5m and is used by fishing vessels and

pleasure craft. Schilsee, an extensive yacht marina, is situated

close S of Strande. A conspicuous radio mast stands near the

coast at the S end of the bay.

3.65 The bay provides anchorage, in depths of 10 to 16m, good

holding ground, but the roadstead is untenable in E winds and

there are several foul patches.

3.65 Friedrichsort Light (54°23'N., 10°12'E.), a directional sector light, is shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 32m high,

standing on a small islet lying close off the W side of the fjord,

about 4 miles S of Bulk Light. The islet is connected at its S

end to the shore by a causeway. Three conspicuous radio masts

are situated about 0.3 mile WNW of the light.

3.65 Laboe Hafen (54°24'N., 10°13'E.), a small and shallow harbor, is situated 2 miles WSW of Stein at the E side of the fjord.

It is used by a fishing vessels. A yacht marina is situated close

S of this harbor.

3.65 A prominent naval war memorial stands near the shore, 0.7

mile NE of the harbor.

3.66 Jagersberg (54°23'N., 10°13'E.), situated 1 mile S of

Laboe, is fronted by a pier. A small explosives dumping ground

area, which may best be seen on the chart, lies in the vicinity of

this pier.

3.66 A lighted range, situated at Jagersberg, indicates the route

leading SW to the entrance of the Nord-Ostsee Kanal (Kiel

Canal).

3.66 Ice.—During normal winters, Kieler Forde is frozen over

from mid-January until the last half of February. Generally,

navigation is obstructed for only about 15 days. In severe

winters with strong NE winds, drift ice may form a barrier

across the ford, particularly in the narrows off Friedrichsort

Light. 

3.66 Tides—Currents.—The tide in the fjord is negligible. The

water level depends on the wind force and direction. Gales

from the NE can raise the water level by up to 2m and gales

from SW can lower it by the same amount.

3.66 With winds from S to W, the current flows out of the fjord

and with winds from N to E it flows inward. The currents attain

maximum rates of 2.5 knots in the narrows off Friedrichsort.

With strong NE and SE winds, a current may set W at a rate of

2 knots in the vicinity of Kiel Light.

3.66 Depths—Limitations.—The controlling depth through Kieler Forde is 16m, decreasing to 11m near the head of the inner

fjord. 

3.66 Pilotage.—Pilotage in Kieler Forde is compulsory for all oil,

gas, and chemical tankers and other vessels of 90m and over in

length or 13m beam, with a draft exceeding 8m. 

3.66 Pilotage is compulsory in the canal for the following vessels:

1. Tankers over 60m in length, 10m beam, or 3.1m draft

carrying gas, chemicals, petroleum, or petroleum products in

bulk, or unloaded tankers, if not cleaned, degassed, or

completely inerted after carrying petroleum or petroleum

products with a flashpoint below 35°C.

2. Other vessels or composite units over 45m in length,

9.5m beam, and 3.1m draft or 55m in length, 8.5m beam,

and 3.1m draft.

3. Tows over 55m in length, 10m beam, or 3.1m draft.

3.66 Vessels bound for Nord-Ostee Kanal (Kiel Canal) entering

from the E and vessels bound for Kieler Forde from sea must

send a request for pilotage at least 3 prior to arrival off Kiel

Light. If the transit time is less than 3 hours, requests for

pilotage must be made immediately upon departure from the

last port.

3.66 All vessels over 55m in length or 8m beam should contact

Kiel Pilot on VHF channel 14 on passing Kiel Light. Such vessels must state their name, beam, length, grt or nrt, whether

their journey to the locks will be interrupted or not, whether the

vessel is exempt from taking a pilot, and whether a sea pilot is

required for the canal roads.

3.66 Contact Kiel Lighthouse Pilots on VHF channel 14 and/or

by:

3.66 Contact Kiel-Holtenau Pilots on VHF channel 12 and/or by: 

Freiderichsort Light

Telephone: 49 171 8358445

Fax: 49 171 8316109

etainfo@kielpilot.de

http://www.kielpilot.de/

Telephone: 49 1431 362858

Fax: 49 431 361049

etainfo@holtenaupilot.de

http://www.kielpilot.de/
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 95

Pub. 194

3.66 Vessels proceeding to the port facilities at Kiel, at the head of

the fjord, should sent an ETA to the port at least 24 hours in

advance.

3.66 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system has

been established in Kieler Forde and the Nord-Ostsee Kanal

(Kiel Canal).

3.66 The requirements for VTS Kiel Canal West are described in

Pub. 192, Sailing Directions (Enroute) North Sea (Sector 9).

3.66 Participation in VTS Kiel Canal East/Kieler Forde is mandatory for vessels, as follows: 

1. All vessels, including pushed or towed composite

units, with a length of 50m and over.

2. All vessels carrying dangerous cargo (gas, chemicals,

petroleum, or petroleum products) in bulk.

3. Vessels bound for Holtenau Anchorage (54°23'N.,

10°10'E.) with a mast or superstructure height greater than

40m above the waterline.

3.66 Vessels entering the VTS area of Kiel Canal East must

maintain a continuous listening watch on the appropriate VHF

channel, as follows:

1. Kieler Forde—Kiel Traffic Station—VHF channel 22.

2. Kiel-Holtenau Locks approach, the outer harbor, and

in the locks—Kiel Canal Station No. 4—VHF channel 12.

3. Canal area from Breitolz to Kiel-Holtenau—Kiel

Canal Station No. 3—VHF channel 3.

3.66 A Sailing Plan (SP) must be sent (to VTS Kiel Traffic on

VHF channel 22), as follows:

1. 30 minutes before passing Kiel Light (inbound only).

2. Before leaving a harbor or berth within Kieler Forde

and bound for the canal.

3. When within Kieler Forde and bound for the Holtenau

Anchorage.

3.66 A Sailing Plan (SP) must also be sent, as follows:

1. When in the canal locks (by a form available at the

lock).

2. Before leaving a harbor or berth within the canal (to

VTS Kiel Canal Station No. 3 on VHF channel 3).

3.66 The format for the SP is, as follows:

3.66 A Position Report (PR) must be sent on passing Kiel Light

(inbound only).

3.66 The format for the PR is, as follows:

3.66 A Deviation Report (DR) must be sent in case of amendments to the SP (e.g., when interrupting or commencing a

canal transit without instruction from the VTS Center).

3.66 An Incident Report (IR) must be sent in case of an incident

impairing safety or the environment.

3.66 When in the canal, the DR or IR should be sent to VTS Kiel

Canal Station No. 3 on VHF channel 3. When in Kieler Forde

or the Holtenau locks, the DR or IR should be sent to VTS Kiel

Canal Station No. 4 on VHF channel 12.

3.66 Special regulations governing navigation, speed, anchorage,

dangerous cargo, and quarantine within Kieler Forde are in

force and a copy should be obtained from the authorities.

3.66 Information broadcasts are made at fixed times and as single

reports on demand, as follows:

1. VTS Kiel Canal Station No. 2 broadcasts every H+15

and H+45 on VHF channel 2 in German, and on request in

English.

2. VTS Kiel Canal Station No. 3 broadcasts every H+20

and H+50 on VHF channel 3 in German, and on request in

English.

3. In cases of severe icing in Kieler Forde, VTS Kiel

Traffic Station broadcasts on VHF channel 22 according to

the situation.

3.66 The broadcasts include information relevant to the safe passage through the VTS area and general traffic details including

local storm warnings, weather, visibility, ice, casualties, and

dredging operations.

Kieler Hafen (54°22'N., 10°10'E.)

World Port Index No. 28930 

3.67 Kieler Hafen occupies the inner part of Kieler Forde

to the S of Friedrichsort Light and includes the approach to the

locks at the E end of the Nord-Ostsee Kanal (Kiel Canal) and

the facilities at Kiel.

3.67 Friedrichsort (54°23'N., 10°11'E.), a manufacturing town

and suburb of Kiel, stands 0.8 mile W of Friedrichsort Light. It

is fronted by several wharves, boatyards, shipyards, and

floating repair docks.

3.67 Stickenhorn (54°23'N., 10°10'E.), a large yacht harbor, is

situated 1 mile WSW of Friedrichsort Light. The basin lies on

the E side of a mole, which extends about 600m SSE from the

shore. It has depths of 2 to 8m and is protected on the NE side

by a breakwater. A shoal, with depth of less than 5m, extends

about 200m SSE from the head of the mole and is marked by a

buoy.

Designator Information Required

A Vessel name and call sign.

D Position.

U Length (in meters), beam (in decimeters),

and type.

O Draft (in decimeters).

G Port of departure.

I Port of destination.

P

Indication if liquefied gases, chemicals,

petroleum, or petroleum products are or

were carried in bulk. If yes, type, quantity,

and UN number and whether tanks are

uncleaned or completely inerted.

Q Deficiencies or restrictions on maneuverability.

T Name of vessel’s owner or agents.

Designator Information Required

A Vessel name and call sign.

B Time of report (local time in four digits).

D Position.

F Speed.
96 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

3.67 Pluschowhafen (54°23'N., 10°10'E.), a well-protected

basin, lies close W of Stickenhorn. It is enclosed by the W side

of the mole and the shore. The basin has depths of 3 to 7m and

is used by fishing vessels, yachts, and naval craft. A small prohibited area lies in the SW part of this basin.

3.67 Holtenau Schleusen Light (54°22'N., 10°09'E.) is shown

from a prominent tower, 20m high, standing 1.9 miles SW of

Friedrichsort Light, on the N side of the entrance to the NordOstsee Kanal (Kiel Canal). A conspicuous church is situated

0.2 mile NW of the light.

3.67 An aeronautical light is shown from a prominent structure,

16m high, standing near the airport, 0.5 mile NW of Holtenau

Light. 

3.67 Holtenau (54°22'N., 10°09'E.), also known as Kiel-Holtenau, is that part of Kiel extending along the N side of the entrance to the canal. Tiessenkai, the main quay, extends W from

the vicinity of the light. It is 300m long and has depths of 4 to

5.5m alongside. Vessels up to 85m in length, 13m beam, and

3.5m draft can be accommodated alongside.

3.67 Scheerhafen Light (54°22'N., 10°09'E.) is shown from a

prominent framework tower, 20m high, standing about 0.4 mile

S of Holtenau Schleusen Light, at the E end of a mole on the S

side of the entrance to the Nord-Ostsee Kanal (Kiel Canal). 

3.67 Moltenort (54°23'N., 10°12'E.), a small harbor, is situated

on the E side of the fjord, about 1 mile S of Friedrichsort Light.

It has depths of 2 to 4m and is used by fishing vessels. A

pleasure craft basin adjoins the S end of this harbor.

3.67 The Kiel Submarine Memorial Monument (54°22.8'N.,

10°11.7'E.), a tall brown tower, stands on a point about 0.2

mile N of Moltenort and is conspicuous from seaward.

3.67 Anchorage.—Holtenau Reede (Holtenau Anchorage)

(54°23'N., 10°11'E.), the limits of which are indicated on the

chart, lies centered 0.8 mile NE of Holtenau Schleusen Light,

at the W side of the fjord, and has depths of 12 to 13m.

3.67 Heikendorf Reede (Heikendorf Anchorage) (54°22'N.,

10°11'E.), the limits of which are indicated on the chart, lies

centered 1.1 miles E of Holtenau Schleusen Light, at the E side

of the fjord, and has depths of 7 to 12m.

3.67 Caution.—Degaussing range areas, which may best be seen

on the chart, front the shore of the fjord 0.3 mile SW of Friedrichsort Light and close W of the Submarine Memorial Monument. Vessels using the degaussing ranges must exhibit the

International Code flag signal RU.

3.67 A submarine pipeline extends SE across the fjord close N of

Friedrichsort Light and is marked by beacons.

3.67 A submarine cable extends SSE across the fjord from a point

on the shore located 0.2 mile W of Friedrichsort Light.

3.68 Nord-Ostsee Kanal (Kiel Canal) (54°22'N.,

10°09'E.) connects the North Sea to the Baltic Sea. The North

Sea terminal, or W end, of the canal is at Brunsbuttel. The

canal is 53 nautical miles long and has a depth of 11m.

The E entrance lies close S of Holtenau Schleusen Light and

consists of two sets of locks, the New Locks and the Old

Locks. Generally, the New Locks are in service, but the Old

Locks may be used temporarily. 

3.68 The Old Locks, situated on the N side of the entrance, have a

usable length of 125m and a usable width of 22m. These locks

can be used by vessels with drafts of up to 7m.

3.68 The New Locks, situated on the S side of the entrance, have

a usable length of 310m, a usable width of 42m, and a depth

over the sill of 13.8m. Vessels up to 9.7m draft can use this

lock and proceed to the facilities situated close W of it.

3.68 To expedite traffic, each new lock has a third gate which can

divide the lock into two chambers with usable lengths of 221m

and 100m.

Holtenau Schleusen Light

Kiel Submarine Memorial Monument

Kieler Hafen from S
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 97

Pub. 194

3.68 The mast heights of vessels are limited by a bridge, situated

1 mile inside the E entrance, which has a vertical clearance of

40m.

3.68 Approach areas, the limits of which are indicated on the

chart, lie off the entrances of the canal. Generally, navigation

within these areas is restricted to vessels entering or leaving the

canal.

3.68 Vessels with a maximum length of 235m, a maximum beam

of 32.5m, and a maximum draft of 9.5m can transit the canal.

This maximum draft only applies to vessels of up to 160m in

length. Vessels exceeding 160m in length are subject to a

sliding scale with regard to the draft limitation.

3.68 The average time of transit of the canal and the locks at both

ends usually requires from 8 to 10 hours.

3.68 It is reported that vessels transiting the canal must have

operational AIS equipment on board. The position data of all

vessels in the canal, except pleasure craft, will be recorded by

the VTS system via AIS. In exceptional cases or emergen-cies,

such as system failure, mobile AIS equipment may be leased

from the authorities at the entry locks. 

3.68 For further information, including draft and size limitations,

for the canal, see Pub. 192, Sailing Directions (Enroute) North

Sea (Sector 9).

3.68 The latest information concerning the canal is now available

on the internet, as follows:

3.69 Nordhafen (Holtenau-Wik) (54°22'N., 10°07'E.) is

situated on the S side of the canal at the W side of the bridge,

which spans the waterway 0.6 mile W of the locks. The quay

provides 1,068m of total berthage with a depth of 10m alongside. There are facilities for timber, bulk, ro-ro, and container

vessels.

Stadtwerkekai, a bunkering quay, is situated on the S side of

Binnenhafen, close W of the locks. It is 800m long and has

depths of 10 to 10.5m alongside.

Two conspicuous chimneys stand at a power station located

close S of the SE end of Stadtwerkekai.

Bunkerbrucke Projensdorf, another bunkering berth, is situated close W of Nordhafen and has a depth of 10.5m alongside.

3.69 Scheerhafen (54°22'N., 10°09'E.), a bulk terminal, is situated immediately S of the canal locks and is formed by two

moles. The moles are 300m long and have depths of 8.8 to 10m

alongside. A pier, used by tankers, projects from the shore midway between the moles. This pier is 170m long and has depths

of 10m and 6m, respectively, alongside its N and S sides.

3.69 Tirpitzhafen (54°21'N., 10°09'E.), with depths of 5 to 10m,

lies immediately S of Scheerhafen and is protected by breakwaters. The NE breakwater extends about 500m SSE from the

head of the southernmost mole at Scheerhafen. This basin is

closed to all commercial shipping.

3.69 Sporthafen Wik, a yacht marina, is situated 0.2 mile S of

Tirpitzhafen and fronts the suburb of Wik.

3.69 Sporthafen Dusternbrook, an extensive yacht harbor with

four basins, is situated 1 mile SSE of Tirpitzhafen. A conspicuous water tower stands at Ravensburg, about 1 mile W of the

harbor.

3.69 Sporthafen Monkeberg, a yacht marina, is situated at the E

side of the fjord, about 1 mile E of Tirpitzhafen. A conspicuous

deviation beacon and a prominent water tower stand about 0.7

mile ESE and 0.9 mile ENE, respectively, of the marina.

3.69 The Schwentine River flows into the E side of the fjord,

about 1.3 miles S of Sporthafen Monkeberg. A conspicuous

chimney, 132m high, stands in an industrial area about 0.5 mile

NNE of the river mouth.

3.69 Caution.—Submarine cables extend E across the fjord from

the S part of Scheerhafen and a point on the shore located 0.3

mile N of Sporthafen Dusternbrook.

3.70 Kiel (54°20'N., 10°08'E.), a large city, stands at the

head of the fjord. It is an important manufacturing and commercial center with extensive shipbuilding and repair facilities.

The industrial complexes are concentrated on the E side in the

communities of Gaarden, Ellerbek, Wellingdorf, Neumuhlen,

and Dietrichsdorf. The latter three being situated in the vicinity

of the Schwentine River. Kiel is also a major naval base. 

3.70 Ice.—Navigation in the port is seldom hindered by ice.

3.70 Depths—Limitations.—Generally, vessels entering the harbor are limited to a length of 245m and a draft of 9.7m. Vessels up to 270m in length may enter with special permission.

3.70 The main facilities on the W side of the port are described

from N to S below.

Nord-Ostsee Kanal (Kiel Canal) Entrance

Nord-Ostsee Kanal (Kiel Canal) Home Page

http://www.kiel-canal.org

Nordhafen (Nord-Ostsee Kanal)
98 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

3.70 Osterkai, a ro-ro ferry terminal, is situated about 0.8 mile

WSW of the mouth of the Schwentine River. It has a quay,

500m long, and two piers, with least depths of 7m alongside.

3.70 Satorikai, a cargo quay, is 200m long and has depths of 6 to

7m alongside.

3.70 Schwedenkai, a ferry terminal quay with a ro-ro ramp, is

180m long and has a depth of 10m alongside.

3.70 Bollhornkai Nord, with a ro-ro ramp, is 270m long and has a

depth of 10m alongside. 

3.70 Bollhornkai Sud, with a ro-ro ramp, is 300m long and has a

depth of 10m alongside. It has facilities for cruise liners.

3.70 The main facilities on the E side of the port are described

from N to S below.

3.70 Ostuferhafen, a ro-ro and container terminal, is situated close

N of the mouth of the Schwentine River and consists of a wide

pier and a basin. It provides 1,700m of total quayage, with five

ro-ro berths, and has a depths of 6.6 to 10m alongside. 

3.70 The Schwentine River is navigable for about 0.8 mile within its

entrance. A fishing harbor is situated on the S side and has depths

of 6 to 7m alongside. A scrapyard is situated on the N side. It is

fronted by a quay with a depth of 7.3m alongside. There are also

several small marinas.

3.70 Arsenalhafen, a naval dockyard, is situated close S of the

mouth of the Schwentine River. It consists of a large basin and

three floating docks. This facility is closed to commercial shipping.

3.70 Howaldtswerke, situated close SW of Arsenalhafen, is an

extensive shipbuilding yard with several dry docks. The largest

dock is 426m long, 88m wide, and has a depth of 10.2m on the

sill. It can handle vessels up to 700,000 dwt. Several conspicuous large cranes stand in the vicinity of this yard.

3.70 Norwegenkai, a ro-ro passenger ferry terminal, is situated

SW of Howaldtswerke. It consists of a quay, 300m long, and

two ro-ro berths, with a depth of 10m alongside.

3.70 A railroad bridge spans the harbor close S of Norwegenkai.

It has an opening section, which allows vessels up to 21.5m

beam to enter Die Horn, the innermost part of the port.

3.70 Die Horn, a basin situated at the head of the fjord, is mostly

used by passenger vessels. Bahnofskai, a quay at the W side, is

380m long and has depths of 4 to 6m alongside. Willy-BrandtUfer, a quay at the NE side, is 220m long and has depths of 3.7

to 6.7m alongside. 

Kieler Bucht

3.71 Kieler Bucht (54°35'N., 10°30'E.), lying at the W end

of the Baltic Sea, is considered to include the waters lying

between the entrance to Die Schlei (54°40'N., 10°02'E.) and

the NW side of Fehmarn (54°32'N., 11°04'E.), 35 miles ESE.

Except in the approaches to the fjords and off the W side of

Fehmarn, the area is free from obstructions and has general

depths of 11 to 22m.

The N and W sides of this area, including the S entrances to

Lille Baelt and Store Baelt, have previously been described.

The S side of the area is formed by the German coast extending

between Kieler Forde and the NW extremity of Fehmarn, 26

miles ENE.

3.71 Between the E entrance of Kieler Forde and the approach to

Fehmarnsund, the coast for the first 4 miles is low and, in

places, protected by dikes. Farther to the E, the coast becomes

higher and is backed by hills. Hohwachter Bucht lies at the E

end of this stretch of coast. The shore between the E entrance

of Kieler Forde and this bay is fronted by a bank, with depths

of less than 10m, which extends up to about 1.7 miles seaward

in places.

3.71 Heidkate Signal Tower, a prominent structure, is associated

with the nearby firing area. It stands near the shore about 4.2

miles SSE of Kiel Light. Three high-rise buildings are situated

near the shore about 2 miles ESE of this tower and are very

conspicuous from seaward.

3.71 Neuland Light (54°22'N., 10°36'E.) is shown occasionally

from a prominent tower, with adjoining buildings, standing

near the shore at the W side of Hohwachter Bucht. Several firing area signal structures are situated NW and within 2.5 miles

of this light.

3.71 Hessenstein Tower (54°20'N., 10°33'E.) stands on Pilsberg,

a hill, at an elevation of 128m, about 2.7 miles SW of Neuland

Light. It is 17m high, surrounded by trees, and conspicuous.

3.72 Hohwachter Bucht (54°20'N., 10°45'E.), a large bay,

has general depths of 12 to 17m. Several lakes lie close inland

at the head. Anchorage can be obtained in the S part of the bay,

in a depth of 15m, fine sand. However, the bay is open and

Neuland Light

Hessenstein Tower
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 99

Pub. 194

gives little protection and the bottom in the vicinity of the

shore is foul in many places.

3.72 Since there are no commercial harbors here and navigation is

often prohibited in the bay due to military firing exercises, it

should be avoided by general shipping.

3.72 Caution.—Todendorf anti-aircrft firing range area and Putlos tank firing range area lie along the stretch of coast between

the E entrance of Kieler Forde and the NE side of Hohwachter

Bucht. These range areas extend up to about 12 miles offshore

and their outer limits are marked by lighted buoys and buoys,

which may best be seen on the chart.

3.72 During firing exercises these range areas are closed to

shipping and fishing. Warning signals are shown from safety

patrol vessels and from several signal towers standing along

the coast. Firing times are disseminated in the German Notice

to Mariners. For further information, see Pub. 140, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent

Seas.

3.72 Extensive herring fishing takes place in the vicinity of Hohwachter Bucht from May through November. The nets, which

may be up to 1 mile long, are marked at each end by lighted

buoys.

3.72 Numerous high-speed ferries operate within the waters of

Kieler Bucht.

3.73 Heiligenhafen Light (54°22'N., 11°01'E.), a sector

light, is shown from a tower with a dwelling, 13m high, standing near the shore, about 3 miles E of the NE end of Hohwachter Bucht.

 Klaustorf Tower stands, at an elevation of 134m, about 0.7

mile SSW of this light. It is 75m high and very conspicuous.

Heiligenhafen (54°22'N., 10°59'E.) (World Port Index No.

28920), a small harbor, is situated about 1 mile W of Heiligenhafen Light and is protected from seaward by a narrow strip

of land. It is used by fishing vessels, coasters, local ferries, and

pleasure craft.

3.73 Tides—Currents.—With continuous E winds, the water

level may rise by up to 0.6m. With W winds, the level may be

lowered by the same amount.

3.73 Depths—Limitations.—The dredged approach channel,

which leads W between the narrow strip of land and the

mainland, has a controlling depth of 4.5m and is 40m wide.

3.73 The harbor is protected from the E by a breakwater, 380m

long, which extends NNE and N from the shore. There are extensive facilities for pleasure craft. The main commercial quay

is 210m long and has depths of 3.8 to 5.1m alongside. Vessels

up to 116m in length and 4m draft can be accommodated. 

3.73 Aspect.—An outer lighted buoy is moored about 1 mile NE

of Heiligenhafen Light at the seaward entrance to the approach

channel. Vessels should steer SW toward this lighted buoy

using the white sector of the light. The fairway of the dredged

channel is indicated by lighted ranges and is marked by buoys.

3.73 The town, a resort, stands on the E slope of the higher land

fronting Hohwachter Bucht. The harbor is not visible when

approaching from the W until it bears S. A prominent church

and a silo, 40m high, stand in the vicinity of the harbor.

3.73 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 90m in

length but is recommended for vessels without local knowledge. Local pilots are available and may be contacted on VHF

channel 14. Vessels over 8m beam must report to the port

authority on VHF at least 20 minutes prior to entering the seaward entrance of the approach channel.

3.73 Anchorage.—Sheltered anchorage is available, in a depth of

7m, mud, in a roadstead lying about 0.5 mile NE of Heiligenhafen Light.

3.73 Caution.—A submarine pipeline extends about 1 mile NE

from a point located 0.2 mile E of Heilgenhafen Light.

3.74 Fehmarn (54°28'N., 11°08'E.), a comparatively-low

island, lies centered 8 miles NE of Heilgenhafen. It is well

cultivated with few trees.

3.74 Westermarkelsdorf Light (54°32'N., 11°04'E.) is shown

from a prominent tower, 17m high, standing near Markelsdorfer Huk, the NW extremity of the island. The coast extending ESE for about 6 miles from the light is protected by

dikes. Within these dikes, there is an almost continuous series

of lagoons separated by dams.

3.74 KO5/T62 Lighted Buoy (54°36'N., 11°01'E.), equipped

with a racon, is moored about 4 miles NNW of Westermarkelsdorf Light. It marks the junction of the Kiel-Baltic (KielOstsee) Route and Route T.

3.74 KO6/T63 LANBY (54°36'N., 11°09'E.), equipped with a

racon and floodlit, is moored about 5.2 miles NE of Westermarkelsdorf Light. It marks the junction of Route T and Route

H.

Heilgenhafen Light

Klaustorf Tower
100 Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 

Pub. 194

3.74 Ojet Bank (54°37'N., 11°01'E.), a steep-to and detached

shoal, lies 5.7 miles NNW of Westermarkelsdorf Light. It has a

least depth of 9.4m and is located between Route T and Route

H.

3.74 Flugge Light (54°27'N., 11°01'E.) is shown from a prominent tower with a dwelling, 37m high, standing on the SW end

of Fehmarn, 5.3 miles SSW of Westermarkelsdorf Light. The

coast extending along the W side of the island is low and diked.

It is backed by marshes and a few lagoons.

3.74 A prominent church, with a spire, stands at Petersdorf, 2.8

miles NE of Flugge Light, and a conspicuous silo, 40m high, is

situated close SE of it.

3.74 Orther Bucht, a shallow bay, lies between Flugge Light and

Strukkamphuk, 3.2 miles SE. Krummsteert, a narrow peninsula, is located at the W side of the entrance and extends about

1 mile SE from Flugge Light. Orth, a shallow pleasure craft

harbor, lies in the NW corner of this bay.

3.74 Strukkamphuk Light (54°25'N., 11°06'E.), a sector light, is

shown from a prominent tower, 5m high, standing at the E side

of the entrance to Orther Bucht.

3.74 Fluggesand (54°27'N., 10°57'E.), an extensive coastal bank

with depths less than 10m, fronts the entire W side of Fehmarn.

It extends up to about 3.5 miles seaward off the N and central

parts of the W side and up to 9 miles W off the SW extremity

of the island. This bank is mostly rocky and foul.

3.74 Caution.—A minelaying practice area, the limits of which

are shown on the chart, lies centered 6.2 miles NW of Flugge

Light, off the W side of Fehmarn.

3.75 Fehmarnsund (54°24'N., 11°06'E.) is the narrow

passage, used by small vessels, leading between the S side of

Fehmarn and the mainland. It is spanned by Fehmarnsund

Brucke, a fixed road and rail bridge.

3.75 Ice.—Fehmarnsund freezes over only during severe winters.

The first ice usually appears in the middle of January and the

last ice disappears around the first part of March. Generally,

shipping is hindered for an average of about 20 days and the

passage is closed by packed floes of drift ice for about 15 days.

With winds from the E or the W, drift ice is driven into the

sound making anchoring dangerous.

3.75 Tides—Currents.—Winds from the NE usually cause a W

current in the sound and winds from SW to NW cause an E current. These currents usually attain a rate of about 2 knots, but

they may occasionally set at 4 knots in the narrows. After a

sudden shift in the wind direction during stormy weather, the

wind and current sometimes oppose each other.

3.75 Winds from N to E can generally raise the water level by up to

1m and by up to 2m in the winter. Winds from SSW to W can

lower it by as much as 1.5m in the winter.

3.75 Depths—Limitations.—Coastal banks, with depths of less

than 10m, front the stretches of shore extending from Heiligenhafen to the bridge, on the S side, and from Flugge Light to the

bridge, on the N side. These coastal banks occupy the entire

approach to the sound and extend up to about 4 miles W of the

bridge. Mittelgrund, a shoal with depths of less than 10m,

occupies the E approach to the passage and extends up to about

4 miles E of the bridge. 

Westermarkelsdorf Light

K06/T63 LANBY

Flugge Light

Strukkamphuk Light
Sector 3. Denmark and Germany—Lille Baelt, Flensborg Fjord, and Kieler Bucht 101

Pub. 194

3.75 A dredged channel leads E through the passage and ESE

under the bridge. The fairway at the W side of the bridge has a

controlling depth of 5.5m and the fairway at the E side of the

bridge has a controlling depth of 3.8m. The channel is about

50m wide and subject to silting. 

3.75 The Fehmarnsund Bridge has a vertical clearance of 22.1m

and a navigable span width of 240m.

3.75 Aspect.—The channel leading E through the W approach of

the sound is marked by buoys and its entrance is marked by a

lighted buoy. The white sector of Fehmarnsund Bridge Light,

which is equipped with a racon, indicates the approach fairway.

The fairway leading ESE through the navigable span of the

bridge is marked by buoys. The channel leading SE through

Mittelgrund, in the E approach, is marked by buoys. The fairway is indicated by the astern alignment of Flugge Light and

Strukkamphuk Light.

3.75 A conspicuous church stands on the mainland about 1.8

miles SSW of the bridge.

3.75 Pilotage.—Pilotage within the sound is not compulsory.

Pilots are available at Heiligenhafen for vessels without local

knowledge. 

3.75 Regulations.—Speed is limited to 8.1 knots in the dredged

channel at the E side of the bridge.

3.75 Rules for navigating in German restricted waters are in force

within Fehmarnsund. Vessels proceeding E are considered to

be incoming from seaward.

3.75 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in a depth of 8m, sand

over mud, to the E of the bridge Anchorage is prohibited on the

lighted range alignment at the E side of the bridge.

3.75 Caution.—Several submarine cables and pipelines extend

across the passage in the vicinity of the bridge.

3.75 During winter, the positions of the channel buoys can not be

relied upon.

3.75 Fishing with fixed nets, drift nets, lines, and eel baskets takes

place in the approaches to the passage in depths up to 5m, clear

of the channels.

Routes

3.76 Coastal routes.—The Kiel-Fehmarnsund Route, which

may best be seen on the chart, has been established for small

vessels bound for Mecklenburger Bucht (54°15'N., 11°30'E.). This

route leads ESE for 4 miles from the TSS located in the vicinity of

Kiel Light to Lighted Buoy No. 2 (54°29'N., 10°25'E.). It

continues SE for 9 miles to Lighted Buoy No. 3 (54°26'N.,

10°40'E.). The route then leads ESE for about 10 miles to

Lighted Buoy No. 4 (54°25'N., 10°56'E.), which is moored in

the W approach to Fehmarnsund.

Vessels using this route should not confuse the lighted buoys

marking the center of the track with the lighted buoys marking

the outer perimeter of the firing practice areas, which extend up

to 12 miles offshore in this vicinity.

3.76 The Kiel-Baltic Route (Kiel-Ostsee), which may best be

seen on the chart, has been established for vessels proceeding

E through Kieler Bucht and into the Baltic Sea. The centerline

of the track is marked by lighted buoys.

3.76 This route leads NE for 11 miles from the TSS located in the

vicinity of Kiel Light to Lighted Buoy KO3 (54°34'N.,

10°36'E.). The route then continues ENE for 15 miles to

Lighted Buoy KO5/T62 (54°36'N., 11°01'E.) where the track

joins Route T (see paragraph 2.1 and paragraph 4.1).

3.76 Deep Water Route.—A route for deep-draft vessels, with

drafts of up to 17m, leads into the Baltic Sea from the S part of

Lille Baelt. From a position located about 4 miles E of Taksensand Light (55°00'N., 9°58'E.), the track leads SSE through the

S part of Lille Baelt into the N part of Kieler Bucht.

3.76 From a position located about 9.5 miles of Vejsnaes Light

(54°49'N., 10°26'E.), a deep-water channel leads in an E direction for 12 miles. It is marked on the N side by Lighted Buoy

No. 2, Lighted Buoy No. 4, Lighted Buoy No. 6, and Lighted

Buoy No. 8 and on the S side by Lighted Buoy No. 1 and

Lighted Buoy No. 3.

3.76 The channel then continues SE for 3.5 miles from a position

located 5.5 miles SW of Keldsnor Light (54°44'N., 10°44'E.),

close N of Lighted Buoy No. 3. This section of the route narrows to a width of only about 0.2 mile. It is marked by Lighted

Buoy No. 10, Lighted Buoy No. 12, and Lighted Buoy No. 14

on the NE side and by Lighted Buoy No. 5 and Lighted Buoy

No. 7 on the SW side.

3.76 From close S of Lighted Buoy No. 14, moored about 5.2

miles SSW of Keldsnor Light, vessels may proceed ENE to

join Route T (see paragraph 2.1 and paragraph 4.1).
Pub. 194

4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast (including Bornholm and Christianso)

4.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 4 — CHART INFORMATION
105

Pub. 194

SECTOR 4 

GERMANY—FEHMARN BELT TO KAP ARKONA AND SWEDEN—SOUTH COAST 

(INCLUDING BORNHOLM AND CHRISTIANSO)

4.0 Plan.—This sector first describes Fehmarn Belt, Mecklenburger Bucht, Lubecker Bucht, and Kadet Rinne. The

shores bordering the SW part of the Baltic Sea are then described. These include the section of the German coast

between Darsser Ort and Kap Arkona, the section of the Danish coast between Gedser Odde and Mon Light, and the section

of the S coast of Sweden between Falsterbo Udde and Torhamnsudde. A description of the off-lying islands of Bornholm and Christianso is also included. The descriptive sequence is from W to E. 

General Remarks

4.1 Fehmarn Belt (54°35'N., 11°12'E.), the passage leading between Fehmarn and Lolland, provides access to Mecklenburger Bucht from Kieler Bucht and the Store Baelt. It is 16

miles long, 6 miles wide, and has depths up to 27m.

4.1 To the E of Fehmarn Belt, the S shores of the Danish islands

are fronted by shifting sand banks, islets, and extensive shoals.

Shallow channels lead from this passage to several small fishing harbors lying along the coast.

4.1 Gedser Rev, the shore bank, extends up to 9 miles SE from

Gedser Odde (54°34'N., 11°58'E.) and narrows the main passage.

4.1 Mecklenburger Bucht (54°25'N., 11°32'E.) indents the

German coast between Staberhuk, the SE extremity of Fehmarn, and Darsser Ort, located on the mainland 42 miles ENE.

It has general depths of 22 to 24m.

4.1 Lubecker Bucht (54°05'N., 11°02'E.) extends SW from the

SW part of Mecklenburger Buct and Neustadter Bucht is entered at the NW side of its head.

4.1 Kadet Rinne (54°27'N., 12°15'E.), known to the Danes as

Kadet Renden, lies about midway between Gedser Odde and

Darsser Ort and is the deepest part of the channel leading SW

and W into Mecklenburger Bucht. The main fairway is 1 to 3

miles wide and 15 miles long.

4.1 The E coast of Falster and the S coast of Mon form the NW

limits of the water area described within this sector. Hjelm

Bugt, a large bight, is bordered on its N side by the S coast of

Mon.

4.1 The Swedish coast between Falsterbo Udde Light (55°23'N.,

12°49'E.) and the island of Utlangan (56°01'N., 15°47'E.)

forms the N limit of the water area in the W part of the Baltic

Sea described within this sector.

4.1 The coast between Falsterbo Udde Light and Sandhammaren, 49 miles E, is generally low, sandy and backed by

gently rolling plains. From Sandhammaren, the coast turns

NNE and the terrain becomes higher with forested hills

appearing in many places. At Listershuvud, a prominent point

located 45 miles NNE of Sandhammaren, the coast continues E

to Torhamnsudde. This low and partly wooded section of the

shore is heavily indented and fronted by numerous islands and

islets, which lie up to 3 miles seaward. With few exceptions, all

of the dangers lie within 10 miles of the shore.

4.1 Bornholm and Christianso, both Danish possessions, lie 20

miles SE and 34 miles E, respectively, of Sandhammaren

(55°23'N., 14°12'E.).

4.1 Winds—Weather.—Winds from the W and SW predominate

throughout the year along the S coast of Sweden, but are not

considered to be trade winds. In many areas the winds are

variable. For example, a fresh breeze may blow on the W side of

Bornholm, while a calm prevails on the E side. Winds from the E

have occasionally been observed in late winter and spring. Land

and sea breezes may also be encountered along the coastal

regions of Sweden during the summer.

4.1 The weather in the S part of Sweden, under the influence of

the Gulf Stream, is remarkably mild considering the latitude.

Fog is most frequently encountered in the winter. Mild winds

from the SW enter the Baltic Sea from the North Sea following

a cold period and usually form dense fog. During periods of

severe cold on the land, sea smoke is formed on the coastal

waters. Precipitation along the S coast of Sweden is low and

the snowfall is usually not heavy.

4.1 Ice.—Ice conditions for harbors are found with the respective description of the port. It is only during severe winters

that the open waters of the Baltic Sea are frozen over. During

the ice season, concentrations of drift ice move through the

area toward the passages leading to the Kattegat.

4.1 Tides—Currents.—The prevailing current flows from the

Baltic Sea toward Mecklenburger Bucht and Fehmarn Belt at a

rate of 1 to 2 knots. During severe weather, the current generally sets with the wind in the open sea and attains rates of 3

to 4 knots near the shores.

4.1 Tidal action has little effect on the water levels in the W part

of the Baltic Sea. In general, the water level rises 1.2 to 1.8m

with winds from the N and NE and falls a like amount with

winds from the SW and W. Particularly strong and prolonged

winds from one direction are usually the main factor in changing the water level. At Hesnaes (54°49'N., 12°08'E.), on the

Danish coast, winds from the NE may raise the water level by

up to 1.5m and winds from the SW may lower it by a like

amount. At Klintholm (54°57'N., 12°28'E.), farther NE, gales

from the NE may raise the water level by 0.6 to 0.9m and those

from WSW may lower it by the same amount. Severe storms

may cause even higher rises in the water level. During such

periods, flooding sometimes occurs over the low-lying land

along the German coast.

4.1 Depths—Limitations.—Between the S entrance of Store

Baelt and the Baltic Offshore Routes, Route T has a controlling

depth of 17m.

4.1 Pilotage.—Deep Sea (Transit) Pilots for Store Baelt, Lille

Baelt, The Sound, Kattegat, Kieler Forde, and the W part of the

Baltic Sea are available at Gedser and are arranged by the

DanPilot stations. For further information, see Pilotage in

paragraph 1.1.
106 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

4.1 Pilots may be contacted by VHF and board in the vicinity of

Lighted Buoy DW 74 (54°36'N., 12°15'E.).

4.1 An IMO Resolution recommends that vessels with a draft of

11m or more and all vessels, irrespective of size, carry-ing a

shipment of radiated nuclear fuel, plutonium, or highly

radioactive waste use the services of a pilot when transiting

Route T.

4.1 It should be noted that extensive changes to pilotage

procedures within Swedish waters are being carried out. Formerly, all initial ordering of pilots was carried out through the

main VTS systems. However, procedures for the initial ordering of pilots via the Swedish Vessel Reporting System (FRS)

on the Swedish Maritime Administration internet web site are

being introduced. For additional information, see paragraph

1.1.

4.1 Regulations.—A voluntary reporting system BELTREP has

been established within the Danish waters of the Baltic Sea and

along Route T. It applies to vessels of 20,000 grt and over; all

vessels 1,600 grt and over carrying oil, gas, or chemicals; all

vessels carrying radioactive materials; and all vessels with

drafts of 13m and over. See Pub. 140, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent Seas for

further details.

4.1 Several IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Schemes (TSS)

have been established within the waters described in this sector

and may best be seen on the charts. Two such extensive TSSs

are located in Kadet Rinne (Kadet Renden) and Bornholmsgat,

the passage leading betwen Bornholm and the mainland coast

of Sweden (see Directions).

4.1 Caution.—Extensive fishing is carried out from May to

November off the N and E coasts of Fehmarn and in the W part

of Mecklenburger Bucht. From December through the middle

of April, fishing is carried out within Lubecker Bucht.

4.1 Several restricted danger areas lie within the waters described in this sector and may best be seen on the chart. Vessels

are cautioned not to anchor, trawl, dredge, lay cable, or conduct any similar type of operation in these areas due to the

residual danger from mines on the bottom. Vessels anchoring

within, or passing through, these mined areas during thunderstorms do so at their own risk. See Pub. 140, Sailing Directions

(Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent Seas for

further details of mined areas in Sweden and Denmark areas

formerly published in NEMEDRI.

4.1 Numerous wrecks, some dangerous, lie within the waters

described within this sector and may best be seen on the chart.

4.1 Several submarine exercise areas lie within Mecklenburger

Bucht and Lubecker Bucht and may best be seen on the chart.

4.1 Numerous large rocks lie on the bottom throughout Mecklenburger Bucht and Lubecker Bucht, especially in the shallower parts.

4.1 High speed ferries operate in the waters described within this

sector.

4.1 Defensive minefields lie in the approaches to Solvesborg,

Karlshamn, Guovik, Jarnavik, Ronneby, and Karlskrona. Vessels are cautioned not to anchor or fish in these fields and they

should also avoid passing through them during a thunderstorm.

4.1 Directions.—Route T is the primary route leading through

Store Baelt, Fehmarn Belt, and Mecklenburger Bucht. It is the

recommended route for deep-draft vessels. Sections of the

route are designated as Deep Water Routes. In the S section of

Store Baelt, Route T is designated as a Deep Water Route and

lies on the W side of the passage leading through Langelands

Baelt (see paragraph 2.1).

4.1 Route H, which must be followed by vessels with drafts of

10m and less, lies on the E side of the passage leading through

Langelands Baelt.

4.1 Route T.—Route T continues SE and E into the N part of

Fehmarn Belt from the S end of the Deep Water Route. It

extends about 10 miles SE to Lighted Buoy KO5/T62

(54°36'N., 11°01'E.) and then about 4.5 miles E to the KO6/

T63 LANBY (54°36'N., 11°09'E.).

4.1 The Kiel-Baltic (Kiel-Ostsee) Route joins Route T at

Lighted Buoy KO5/T62.

4.1 Route T then continues through Fehmarn Belt and across the

N part of Mecklenburger Bucht. It leads SE for 24.5 miles from

KO6/T63 LANBY to Lighted Buoy KO10/T67-68 (54°25'N.,

11°47'E.) and then E for 7.5 miles to the W end of the

extensive TSS situated within Kadet Rinne (Kadet Renden).

4.1 Route T follows the lanes of the TSS, which may best be

seen on the chart, to a position located about 11.5 miles ENE of

Gedser Odde Light (54°34'N., 11°58'E.). It then continues NE

for about 19 miles to a position located about 25 miles WNW

of Kap Arkona Light (54°41'N., 13°26'E.). This latter section

of the route is marked by lighted buoys and is designated as a

Deep Water Route. Deep-draft vessels are advised to proceed

with great caution when navigating in the vicinity of the TSS

due to a number of recent groundings in this area.

4.1 Vessels, other than those which are obligated to use the Deep

Water Route because of their draft, must use the area outside

the route. Such vessels proceeding to the E should stay on the

E and S sides of the Deep Water Route and those proceeding to

the W should stay on the N and W sides.

4.1 An IMO-adopted Inshore Traffic Zone lies between the TSS

located in Kadet Rinne (Kadet Renden) and the German coast.

4.1 Route H.—Route H continues SE for 11.5 miles from

Lighted Buoy No. 7 (54°42.0'N., 10°52.5'E.), at the S end of

Store Baelt (Langelands Baelt), and joins Route T at the KO6/

T63 LANBY (54°36'N., 11°09'E.). 

4.1 Lubeck-Gedser Route.—The Lubeck-Gedser Route, which

may best be seen on the chart, leads through Mecklenburger

Bucht and is marked by lighted buoys. From the entrance to

Die Trave (53°58'N., 10°53'E.), the track leads 8 miles NNE

and about 40 miles NE to join Route T at the W end of the TSS

situated in Kadet Rinne. The approach route leading to Wismar

(53°54'N., 11°27'E.) branches SSE from this route.

4.1 Baltic Offshore Routes.—From the E end of Route T,

located 25 miles WNW of Kap Arkona Light (54°41'N.,

13°26'E.), vessels bound for The Sound should proceed N in

order to enter the TSS situated S of Falsterbo Rev Light

(55°18'N., 12°40'E.); and vessels bound for German and Polish

ports should proceed E and join the local designated tracks.

4.1 From the E end of Route T, vessels bound E into the Baltic

Sea should proceed ENE towards the Rugen TSS, which lies

centered about 14 miles NW of Kap Arkona Light (54°41'N.,

13°26'E.). They should then continue in an ENE direction and

enter the extensive Bornholmsgat TSS, which lies centered 13

miles WSW of Hammer Odde Light (55°18'N., 14°46'E.), in

the passage lying between Bornholm Island and the Swedish

mainland.
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 107

Pub. 194

4.1 Bornholmsgat TSS consists of a Precautionary Area lying

centered about 14 miles S of Sandhammaren Light (55°23'N.,

14°12'E.). Separation zones and traffic lanes, which may best

be seen on the chart, extend from the NE, SW, and W sides of

this area. 

4.1 Vessels following the offshore track around the S coast of

Sweden should proceed in an E direction from a position 26

miles S of Kullagrund Light (55°18'N., 13°20'E.) and then

enter the traffic lane of the Bornholmsgat TSS. 

4.1 From the NE end of the Bornholmsgat TSS, vessels should

continue in a NE direction to the Olands Sodra Grund TSS,

which is situated in the vicinty of Olands Sodra Grund Light

(56°04'N., 16°41'E.).

4.1 From the Olands Sodra Grund TSS, vessels proceeding to

the Gulf of Finland should steer NE to the Off Gotland Island

TSS, which is centered 11 miles SE of Hoburg Light

(56°55'N,. 18°09'E.). They should then continue NE for about

180 miles to the TSS lying centered 20 miles NW of Kopu

Light (58°55'N., 22°12'E.).

4.1 The above TSSs are IMO-adopted. For further information,

including Areas to be Avoided, see paragraph 5.1 and paragraph 6.1.

4.1 For further information concerning the waters lying NE of

the TSS centered 20 miles NW of Kopu Light (58°55'N.,

22°12'E.), see paragraph 10.1 and Pub. 195, Sailing Directions

(Enroute) Gulf of Finland and Gulf of Bothnia.

4.1 Vessels bound for the Gulf of Bothnia should proceed about

175 miles NNE from the Olands Sodra Grund TSS to a

position located ESE of Landsort (58°44'N,. 17°52'E.). They

should pass W of Stora Karlso (57°17'N,. 17°58'E.), E of

Knolls Grund (57°32'N,. 17°29'E.), and E of Nielsengrund

(58°17'N,. 18°00'E.). Vessels should then steer for about 84

miles in a NE direction to a position located W of Bogskar

Light (59°30'N., 20°21'E.), at the S end of the Ahvenanmeren

Deep-Draft Channel. Vessels should pass SE of Almagrundet

Light (59°09'N,. 19°08'E.).

4.1 For a description of the routes lying N and W of Bogskar

Light (59°30'N., 20°21'E.), see paragraph 8.1 and Pub. 195,

Sailing Directions (Enroute) Gulf of Finland and Gulf of Bothnia.

4.1 Baltic Deep Water Route.—A Deep Water Route, recommended for vessels with drafts over 12m, has been established

for vessels proceeding to the NE part of the Baltic Sea and may

best be seen on the chart. It extends ENE and NE from the E

end of the Bornholmsgat TSS to the S end of the TSS lying

centered 20 miles NW of Kopu Light (58°55'N., 22°12'E.). 

4.1 It is reported that this recommended route has a least depth

of 25m and is recommended for vessels with drafts up to 15m.

For further information, including Areas to be Avoided, see

paragraphs 5.1 and 6.1.

Fehmarn Belt

4.2 Fehmarn Belt (54°35'N., 11°12'E.), the passage

leading between the SW coast of Lolland and Fehmarn, is

entered at its W end between Markelsdorfer Huk (54°32'N.,

11°04'E.), the NW extremity of Fehmarn, and a point on the

coast of Lolland, 13 miles N. It is entered at the E end between

Staberhuk, the SE extremity of Fehmarn, and Hyllekrog, a

small and low island, located off the S end of Lolland.

Vessels are advised not to approach the N coast of Fehmarn

or the S coast of Lolland within depths of less than 20m. 

4.2 Westermarkelsdorf Light (54°35'N., 11°12'E.), previously

described in paragraph 3.73, is situated in the vicinity of Markelsdorfer Huk.

4.2 Lighted Buoy KO5/T62 (54°36'N., 11°01'E.), equipped

with a racon, is moored about 4 miles NNW of Westermarkelsdorf Light. It marks the junction of the Kiel-Baltic (KielOstsee) Route and Route T.

4.2 KO6/T63 LANBY (54°36'N., 11°09'E.), equipped with a

racon and floodlit, has been previously described in paragraph

3.73. It is moored about 5.2 miles NE of Westermarkelsdorf

Light and marks the junction of Route T and Route H.

4.2 Ojet Bank (54°37'N., 11°00'E.), a steep-to shoal patch, lies

5.2 miles N of Markelsdorfer Huk. It has a least depth of 9.4m

and is located between Route T and Route H.

4.2 For information concerning these routes, see paragraph 4.1.

4.2 Caution.—It is reported that the IMO proposes to reduce the

controlling depth of the Deep Water Route situated NE of

Gedser and within Route T from 17m to 16.5m. Vessels should

contact the local authorities for the latest information. 

4.3 South side.—Markelsdorfer Huk (54°32'N.,

11°04'E.), the NW extremity of Fehmarn, is a low point backed

by a lagoon. The coast extending ESE for about 7 miles from

this point is protected by dikes. Within these dikes, there is an

almost continuous series of lagoons separated by dams. Several

churches standing along the shore are visible from seaward.

The conspicuous mast of the Niobe Denkmal Monument

stands on the foreshore, about 3.2 miles ESE of Markelsdorfer

Huk.

4.3 Ohlenburgs Huk (54°30'N., 11°15'E.) is the NE extremity

of Fehmarn. Marienieuchte Light is shown from a prominent

tower, 33m high, standing on the point. A prominent disused

light tower with a dwelling, square and yellow, is situated close

SE of the light.

4.3 Puttgarden (54°30'N., 11°14'E.), a small harbor, is situated

0.6 mile NNW of Marienieuchte Light. It is protected by two

breakwaters, which form an entrance, 85m wide. This harbor is

the S terminal of the Lolland-Fehmarn ferry and is closed to

general traffic. The approach channel is indicated by a lighted

range and is marked by lighted buoys. It has a controlling depth

of 8.5m.

4.3 A conspicuous radio mast stands 1.2 miles SW of the Puttgarden Harbor.

Marienleuchte Light (Ohlenburgs Huk)
108 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

4.3 Staberhuk (54°24'N., 11°19'E.), the SE extremity of Fehmarn, is located 6 miles SSE of Ohlenburgs Huk and is fronted

by rocks. The coast between is mostly formed by steep and

crumbling cliffs. The shore bank, with depths of less than 10m,

consists of stony foul ground and extends up to about 2 miles

seaward in places. A sector light is shown from a prominent

tower with a dwelling, 23m high, standing on the point.

4.3 Caution.—An area, within which anchoring and fishing are

prohibited, extends up to 3 miles NE from the vicinity of Ohlenburgs Huk and may best be seen on the chart. Several submarine cables are situated within this area.

4.3 A small prohibited area, marked by buoys, lies centered 2.8

miles NE of Ohlenburgs Huk and may best be seen on the

chart.

4.3 Submarine cables, which may best be seen on the chart,

extend NE across Fehmarn Belt from a point located close W

of Puttgarden Harbor and extend ESE from a point located 1

mile S of Marienieuchte Light.

4.3 Care should be taken when identifying features on the N and

W coasts of Fehmarn by radar due to the low shoreline.

4.4 North side.—The SW coast of Lolland forming the N

side of Fehmarn Belt is low and protected by dikes. It is fronted

by several detached shoal areas, which extend up to 3 miles

seaward. Several conspicuous churches are situated at villages

along this stretch of coast.

4.4 Rodby Havn (54°39'N., 11°21'E.) (World Port Index No.

29710), a small harbor, is the N terminal of the LollandFehmarn ferry. It is protected by two breakwaters, which form

an entrance, 90m wide. The approach channel is indicated by a

lighted range and is marked by lighted buoys. The entrance

channel is dredged to a depth of 8.5m but is subject to silting.

The outer part of the harbor has four berths for ro-ro passenger

ferries, with depths of 7 to 8.5m alongside. The inner part of

the harbor provides about 400m of commercial berthage. Vessels up to 80m in length, 20m beam, and 4.5m draft can be accommodated. Pilotage is not compulsory and local assistance

is available for entry. Vessels are advised to keep strictly within

the fairway as obstructions lie close adjacent to the edges. Two

conspicuous silos stand in the vicinity of the harbor. It is

reported that a conspicuous wind generator, 100m high, stands

on the coast close SE of the harbor.

4.4 Hyllekrog (54°36'N., 11°30'E.) is a narrow and low island

lying off the S coast of Lolland, 10.7 miles NE of Marienieuchte Light. A conspicuous framework radio mast, 120m

high, stands on the mainland, 3.5 miles NNE of this island.

4.4 Caution.—A restricted area, within which anchoring and

fishing are prohibited, extends up to 3 miles offshore in the

vicinity of Hyllekrog and may best be seen on the chart.

Mecklenburger Bucht

4.5 The N side of Mecklenburger Bucht is bordered by

the S coast of Lolland and the S part of Falster. Several islets,

rocks, and a shallow shoal flat front this stretch between Hyllekrog (54°36'N., 11°30'E.) and Gedser Odde, 17 miles ESE, and

extend up to about 5 miles seaward. Rodsand, a shifting sand

bank, extends across the shallow flat and is mostly awash.

Three channels lead N through the dangers fronting the

coast. Ostre Maerker, a buoyed channel, leads across the

middle of the sandbank and has a controlling depth of 2.8m.

4.5 Rodsand Rende (54°33'N., 11°58'E.), a narrow channel,

leads between the E end of Rodsand and the S end of Falster.

From a position located about 3 miles SSW of Gedser Odde

Light the channel leads N and has a controlling depth of 6.2m.

The fairway is marked by lighted buoys and is indicated by a

lighted range.

4.5 Kroghage Dyb (54°33'N., 11°58'E.), a narrow channel,

leads between the E end of Rodsand and the S end of Falster.

From a position located about 1.5 miles SE of Gedser Odde

Light the channel leads NW. The fairway lies close to the coast

and has a controlling depth of 4m.

4.5 Nysted (54°40'N., 11°44'E.) (World Port Index No. 29720),

a small harbor, is situated on the S coast of Lolland, 10 miles

NW of Gedser Odde Light. It can be reached from seaward

through Ostre Maerker or Rodsand Rende. The entrance

channel is marked by buoys and has a controlling depth of

3.5m over a width of 20m.

4.5 The commercial quay is 80m long and has a depth of 3.5m

alongside. Vessels up to 80m in length, 20m beam, and 3.4m

draft can be accommodated. Pilotage is compulsory for vessels

over 300 tons. Local knowledge is advised. The water levels in

the harbor and fairways may vary with the wind direction and

force.

4.5 A conspicuous castle, with a truncated tower and a pointed

tower, stands on the W side of Nysted and a prominent church

is situated about 0.4 mile E of it.

4.5 A wind farm area, in which 72 wind generators stand, is

located on the flats, about 5 miles S of Nysted. The wind generators are 70m high and prominent.

Marienleuchte Disused Light Tower

Staberhuk Light
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 109

Pub. 194

4.6 Guldborg Sund (54°39'N., 11°52'E.) leads N between the E side of Lolland and the W side of Falster and

forms the S approach to Nykoping (54°46'N., 11°52'E.). The

channel is narrow, tortuous, and has a controlling depth of only

2.1m. For information concerning Nykobing, see paragraph

2.48.

4.6 Gedser Odde (54°34'N., 11°58'E.), the SE extremity of Falster, is fronted by low cliffs. Gedser Odde Light is shown from

a prominent tower, 20m high, standing close NW of the point.

4.6 Gedser Rev (54°30'N., 12°10'E.), consisting of a chain of

shoals, extends up to about 8 miles SE of Gedser Odde. It has

depths of 2 to 8m and is marked by buoys. This shoal bank is

formed mainly of chalk covered with sand and stones.

4.6 Gedser Rev Lighted Beacon (54°29'N., 12°06'E.),

equipped with a racon, is situated 6.7 miles SE of Gedser Odde

Light and marks the S part of Gedser Rev. 

4.6 No. 71 Lighted Buoy (54°28'N., 12°12'E.), equipped with a

racon, is moored about 10.5 miles SE of Gedser Odde Light

and marks the TSS in Kadet Rinne (see paragraph 4.20). 

Gedser (54°34'N., 11°56'E.), a small harbor, is situated 1.5

miles NW of Gedser Odde and is the terminal for passenger

ferries sailing from Warnemunde. It can be approached through

Rodand Rende or Kroghage Dyb. The entrance, which is

protected by two breakwaters, is 100m wide and has a controlling depth of 6.2m. The ferry berths have depths of 4 to

6.3m alongside. There are also facilities for pleasure craft and

fishing vessels.

It is reported that the fairway in Rodand Rende and the

entrance have been dredged to a controlling depth of 7m. 

4.6 Caution.—Due to the constant changes in depths in the

vicinity of Rodsand, large vessels are advised to stay in depths

of at least 18m when proceeding through the N part of Mecklenburger Bucht.

4.6 Several submarine cables, which may best be seen on the

chart, extend NE, SE, and SSE from the vicinity of Gedser

Odde. The power cables extending SSE to Markgrafenheide

have been reported to cause deviations of up to 70° to the magnetic compass.

4.7 The W side of Mecklenburger Bucht is bordered by

the stretch of coast extending between Staberhuk, the SE

extremity of Fehmarn, and Dahmeshoved, 14.5 miles SW. The

shore is generally bare, low, and protected by dikes in places.

The coastal bank, with depths of less than 10m, extends up to

about 2.5 miles seaward in places.

4.7 Burgstaken (54°25'N., 11°12'E.) (World Port Index No.

28908), a small harbor, is situated 4.3 miles WNW of Staberhuk. It lies on the N shore of Burger See, an inland bay, which

is fronted by two narrow peninsulas. The entrance of the bay

lies between two breakwaters, which extend from the extremities of the peninsulas. An approach channel, with a controlling

depth of 4.5m over a width of 35m, leads NW into the inlet. It

is marked by buoys and indicated by a sector light. The main

commercial quay is 200m long and has depths of 3.5 to 5m

alongside. The harbor is used by coasters, small craft, and fishing vessels. Anchorage, sheltered from N winds, can be taken,

in depths of 5 to 7m, about 0.5 mile SE of the entrance to the

bay. Local knowledge is advised. Several marinas are situated

in the vicinity of the harbor.

4.7 A conspicuous church stands in the town of Burg, about 0.8

mile N of the harbor. A prominent watch tower is situated at

the W end of the peninsula at the E side of the entrance to the

bay.

Fehmarnsund (54°24'N., 11°06'E.), a narrow passage, leads

between the S side of Fehmarn and the mainland. It is spanned

by Fehmarnsund Brucke, a fixed road and rail bridge. For

further information, see paragraph 3.74.

4.7 Grossenbroder Binnensee, a bay, lies 3.5 miles SSW of the

Fehmarnsund Bridge and is protected from E by a curved

breakwater, about 0.6 mile long. Grossenbroder Hafen, a disused ferry harbor, is situated close W of the root of the breakwater. It is reported that an extensive marina lies in the NW

part of the bay.

Dahmeshoved Light (54°12'N., 11°05'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 28m high, standing close N of Dahmeshoved.

A shoal, with a least depth of 4.8m, lies about 1 mile SE of the

light and is marked by a buoy.

4.7 Sagas Bank (54°17'N., 11°12'E.), with a least depth of 6.9m,

lies centered 4 miles offshore, about 6 miles NE of Dahmeshoved Light. Deep-draft vessels are advised not pass between

this shoal bank and the coast.

4.7 Caution.—A mine laying practice area, which may best be

seen on the chart, fronts the E approach to Fahmarnsund and

lies centered 7.5 miles NE of Dahmeshoved Light.

Gedser Odde Light

Gedser Rev Lighted Beacon
110 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

4.8 Lubecker Bucht (54°05'N., 11°02'E.), with Neustadter Bucht at its head, forms the SW part of Mecklenburger

Buct. This bay is entered between Dahmeshoved and Gross

Klutzhoved, 11.5 miles SSE.

4.8 During severe winters, ice may close the inner parts of

Lubecker Bucht. However, as long as the bay areas remain

passable, icebreakers generally keep the river approaches and

ports open.

Between Dahmeshoved and Pelzerhaken, 10 miles SW, the

coast is low and sandy for the first 5 miles and then becomes

higher. It is fronted by foul ground.

Pelzerhaken Light (54°12'N., 11°05'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 19m high, with several dwellings situated

near it. A conspicuous gray tower stands 0.5 mile NE of this

light.

4.8 Lighted Buoy No. 1, marking the Lubeck-Gedser Route, is

moored about 6 miles E of Pelzerhaken Light.

4.8 Walkyriengrund (54°07'N., 11°02'E.), an area of rocky

shoals and foul ground, lies centered about 3 miles offshore, 6

miles ENE of Pelzerhaken Light. It has a least depth of 8.6m

and lies on the N side of the recommended route.

4.8 Gromitz (54°09'N., 10°57'E.), an extensive yacht harbor, is

situated 5.5 miles SW of Dahmeshoved. A church, with a

prominent tower and surrounded by poplar trees, stands in the

town, which is a tourist resort.

Between Gross Klutzhoved and the approaches to Travemunde, 11 miles WSW, the coast is hilly.

4.8 A conspicuous radio tower, 99m high, is reported to stand

about 0.8 mile inland, 3 miles WSW of Gross Klutz-hoved.

Prominent churches are situated at Kalkhorst and El-menhorst

located about 5.5 miles and 3 miles, respectively, WSW of

Gross Klutzhoved.

4.8 Caution.—An explosives dumping ground area, which may

best be seen on the chart, lies centered 3 miles E of Pelzerhaken Light.

4.8 Several wrecks lie within Lubecker Bucht and may best be

seen on the chart.

4.8 Several submarine exercise areas lie within Lubecker Bucht

and may best be seen on the chart.

4.9 Neustadter Bucht (54°03'N., 10°49'E.) lies at the

NW side of Lubecker Bucht between Pelzerhaken and the

mouth of Die Trave, 7 miles SSE. The coast of this bay is alternately low and hilly with occasional wooded areas. Several

tourist resorts, fronted by shallow piers, are situated along the

shore.

4.9 Neustadt Hafen (54°06'N., 10°49'E.) (World Port Index No.

28900), a small harbor, is situated along the sides of a narrow

inlet, which indents the NW shore of Neustadter Buchtand and

leads to a lake. It is used by coasters, small craft, fishing

vessels, and yachts. A channel, marked by buoys, leads NNW

into the harbor and is indicated by lighted ranges. The fairway

has a controlling depth of 5.8m over a least width of about

40m.

4.9 The harbor provides about 600m of total commercial quayage, with depths of 4 to 5.5m alongside. Vessels up to 120m in

length, 20m beam, and 5m draft can be accommodated. Vessels

over 90m in length, 14.5m beam, and 4.2m beam must request

special prior permission to enter. Local pilots are available and

may be contacted on VHF channel 13.

4.9 A church, several radio masts, and several water towers, all

prominent, are situated in the town. Several conspicuous chimneys stand next to a high-rise building in the E part of the town.

4.9 A conspicuous tower, 12m high, stands on Gomnitzberg, a

prominent hill, which rises 2.5 miles W of the Neustadt and has

an elevation of 92m.

4.9 Niendorf (54°00'N., 10°48'E.), a small harbor, lies on the S

shore of Neustadter Bucht, about 5.8 miles SSW of Pelzerhaken Light. It is used by yachts and fishing vessels. The

entrance, which is protected by breakwaters, is 15m wide and

has a controlling depth of 3.1m. A conspicuous tower stands

near the shore, about 1 mile E of this harbor.

4.9 Stein Riff (54°00'N., 10°54'E.), an extensive rocky shoal

area, fronts the S side of Neustadter Bucht and extends up to

about 3.4 miles NE of Niendorf. It has depths of 2 to 9m and is

marked by buoys.

4.9 Caution.—A submarine exercise area lies in the E part of

Neustadter Bucht and may best be seen on the chart.

Dahmeshoved Light

Pelzerhaken Light
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 111

Pub. 194

4.9 An explosives dumping ground area lies in the W part of

Neustadter Bucht and may best be seen on the chart.

4.9 A small area, within which unexploded ordnance exists, lies

on the SE side of Stein Riff, about 2.3 miles ENE of Niendorf,

and may best be seen on the chart.

4.9 Extensive fishing is carried out during the winter months in

Neustadter Bucht and off the estuary of Die Trave.

Travemunde (53°58'N., 10°53'E.)

World Port Index No. 28880

4.10 Travemunde, the outport for Lubeck, is situated at the

mouth of Die Trave (Trave River), on the S side of Lubecker

Bucht. It is a main passenger ferry terminal and fishing center

in addition to being a popular tourist resort. The marine facilities and installations line both sides of the river up to 1 mile

above the entrance.

4.10 Ice.—Generally, the channel from Travemunde to Lubeck is

kept open by icebreakers as long as Lubecker Bucht is passable. When the bay is closed, navigation ceases on the river.

Usually icebreakers are used on an average of 12 days per

season, but they have been required up to 60 days.

4.10 Normally, the ice season starts in the middle of January and

lasts until the middle of February, but ice has appeared as early

as the middle of December and remained until the beginning of

April.

4.10 Tides—Currents.—Winds from NNW through N to E

cause an inflowing current while winds from S to W cause an

outflowing current. The rate of these currents seldom exceeds 2

knots.

4.10 Immediately outside the entrance, the inflowing current sets

SW in the center of the approach channel and along the SE

side. However, at the NW side of the channel, the inflowing

current sets S across the port entrance. The outflowing current

divides into two branches at the river entrance. One branch

follows the direction of the approach channel as far as the

roadstead and the other branch sets S towards the Mecklenburg

coast. These branches have sometimes attained rates of up to 4

knots. Inside the entrance, the currents follow the direction of

the river, but are deflected to the N by the curve of the harbor.

Close inshore, a countercurrent may be encountered which

usually attains a rate of half the rate of the current in the center

of the river.

4.10 In exceptional cases, winds from N to ESE can raise the

water level in the entrance by up to 3.3m and winds from N to

ESE can lower it by as much as 2m. Generally, the fluctuations

of the water level are limited to about 1m.

4.10 Depths—Limitations.—The fairway channel leading SW

from the S end of the recommended route into the river entrance is 100m wide and dredged to a controlling depth of 10m.

4.10 The harbor is mostly used by yachts, fishing vessels, and

passenger ferries. Several extensive marinas are situated on

both sides of the river. The main commercial facilities are

located at the N and W sides of the river.

4.10 Ostpreussenkai, 200m long, is situated on the N side of the

harbor about 0.7 mile W of the entrance. This quay has a depth

of 7.1m alongside and is mostly used by cruise vessels.

4.10 Kaiserbrucke, situated close E of Ostpreussenkai, is 52m

long and has a depth of 8m alongside.

4.10 Kohlenhofkai, a coaling quay, is situated on the S side of the

harbor opposite Ostpreussenkai. It is 200m long and has a

depth of 8m alongside. This quay is not for commercial use.

4.10 Skandinavienkai is situated at the W side of the harbor and

provides 2,050m of total quayage. It has nine berths with

facilities for container and ro-ro vessels. The berths are 135 to

290m long and have depths of 9.5m alongside.

4.10 Aspect.—A light, equipped with a calibration radiobeacon,

is shown from the top of a conspicuous building, 118m high,

standing 0.3 mile W of the harbor entrance. A prominent disused light tower stand on the S side of the entrance, 0.3 mile

SSE of the light.

4.10 Trave Lighted Buoy, marking the outer approach, is moored

about 3 miles NE of the light. The dredged approach channel is

marked by lighted buoys and indicated by a lighted range. A

light is shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 9m high, standing at the head of the N breakwater.

4.10 A prominent church, with a slender spire, stands on the N

side of the river, about 0.7 mile SW of the light.

4.10 Potenitz Castle, a conspicuous white building, is situated

about 1.7 miles SE of the light and may be seen from seaward.

4.10 Travemunde Port Harbormaster can be contacted on VHF

channels 16 and 19, and by telephone: 49-4502 74362.

Travemunde (Die Trave) Entrance

Travemunde
112 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

4.10 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of 60m or

more in length, vessels with a beam of 10m or more, and all

oil, gas, and chemical tankers.

4.10 Vessels should send a request for pilotage at least 12 hours in

advance of arrival at the boarding station at Lubeck-Gedser

Route No. 1 Lighted Buoy (54°04.6'N., 11°02.0'E.). Vessels

should then send a confirmation by VHF 2 hours prior to

arrival. Pilots can be contacted by VHF (Lubeck Pilot) on

channel 12.

4.10 Vessels of 60m or more in length, or with a beam of 10m or

more, passing Lubeck-Gedser Route No. 1 Lighted Buoy must

provide their name, beam, grt and nrt, and the position to

which pilotage is requested or whether the vessel is exempt

from pilotage.

4.10 The pilotage service can be contacted, as follows:

1. Telephone: 49-4502-71117

2. Facsimile: 49-4502-753517

3. E-mail: etainfo@luebeckpilot.de

4. Internet: http://www.luebeckpilot.de

4.10 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system operates in the approaches to Die Trave. It is mandatory for all vessels with a beam over 6m, including pushed or towed composite units. 

4.10 Vessels must maintain a continuous listening watch with

VTS Center Trave Traffic on VHF channels 13 and 16.

4.10 A Sailing Plan (SP) must be sent to VTS Center Trave

Traffic on VHF channel 13 before transiting Travemunder

Enge (narrows) or Trave-Strecke as follows:

1. Before transiting Travemunder Enge:

a. Immediately before departing Travemunde.

b. Before passing Lubeck-Gedser Route Lighted

Buoy No. 1 (inbound only).

2. Before transiting Trave-Strecke:

a. Immediately before departing Lubeck.

b. Before passing Lubeck-Gedser Route Lighted

Buoy No. 1 (inbound only).

4.10 A Position Report (PR) must be sent to VTS Center Trave

Traffic on VHF channel 13 when passing the following reporting points:

1. Before transiting Travemunder Enge:

a. Trave Outer Lighted Buoy (54°00.0'N., 10°56.3'E.)

(inbound only).

b. Lighted Buoy No. 1 (53°58.8'N., 10°54.7'E.) (inbound only).

c. Light No. 8 (53°56.5'N., 10°52.0'E.) (outbound

from Lubeck).

d. A line joining Stulper Huk and Light No. 16

(53°55.1'N., 10°52.3'E.) (outbound from Lubeck).

2. Before transiting Trave-Strecke—Light No. 16

(inbound only). 

4.10 A Deviation Report (DR) must be sent in case of amendments to the SP.

4.10 An Incident Report (IR) must be sent in case of an incident

impairing safety or the environment.

4.10 For the format for the SP and the PR, see Regulations for

Kieler Forde in paragraph 3.65.

4.10 Traffic information is broadcast every 3 hours from 0600 to

2100 by Trave Traffic on VHF channel 13.

4.10 Vessels are not allowed to meet in Travemunder Enge, the

narrows at the harbor entrance. If there is any uncertainty when

meeting, vessels proceeding seaward have priority.

4.10 Speed restrictions apply within the harbor.

4.10 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in depths of 15 to 17m,

mud and clay mixed with sand, within a roadstead lying about

2 miles NE of the harbor entrance on the N side of the approach route. This roadstead is open to winds from the NE,

which may create a choppy sea at times.

4.10 Caution.—A submarine power cable, which may best be

seen on the chart, extends NE from a point located on the shore

about 0.6 mile E of the harbor entrance. Magnetic compass

deflections of up to 70° have been observed in the vicinity of

this cable.

Travemunde Light (building)

Travemunde Disused Light Tower

Travemunde Breakwater Light
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 113

Pub. 194

4.10 Several submarine gas pipelines and cables extend across the

harbor and may best be seen on the chart.

4.10 Ferries cross the harbor about 0.3 mile and 0.9 mile above

the entrance.

4.11 Die Trave (53°57'N., 10°52'E.), a narrow and tortuous river, extends in a SW direction to Lubeck, which stands

about 10 miles above Travemunde. Untertrave, the fairway

channel, is marked by buoys and beacons, and is indicated by

lighted ranges.

A number of comparatively shallow bays, which may best be

seen on the chart, can be entered from the river. In many places

along the river the shore lies within nature reserve areas.

4.11 Depths—Limitations.—The fairway channel is dredged to

a controlling depth of 10m over a bottom width of 100m as far

as Sienchenbucht, about 1.4 miles above the mouth of the river.

From Sienchenbucht to the port area of Lubeck, the fairway

channel is dredged to a controlling depth of 9.5m over a bottom width that gradually decreases from 100m to 60m. There

are three turning basins, up to 400m wide, situated within the

river.

4.11 Herrenbrucke, a double-bascule lift bridge, spans the river at

Siems (53°54.2'N., 10°46.2'E.) and has a navigable width of

52.9m. It has a vertical clearance of 21m when the span is

closed. It has been reported that the bridge is being dis-mantled

and is being replaced by a tunnel.

4.11 Herrenwyk (53°54'N., 10°48'E.), the site of a prominent

smelting works on the N shore, is fronted by a small basin.

There is a berth, 450m long, with depths of 8 to 10m alongside.

4.11 Flenderwerft A.G., a shipyard with two floating drydocks, is

situated about 0.6 mile W of the above basin. Lehmannkai II, a

quay, adjoins the E side of the shipyard. It is 350m long and

has depths of 7 to 7.5m alongside.

4.11 An extensive power plant stands on the N shore at Siems,

about 1 mile NW of the shipyard. It is fronted by several quays,

with depths of 7.5 to 9m alongside.

4.11 Schlutup (53°54'N., 10°48'E.), a town standing on the S

shore of the river, has a narrow basin on its W side with depths

of 2 to 5m alongside. A quay, about 200m long, is situated on

the E side of the town and has depths of 4 to 5m alongside.

4.11 Caution.—Several submarine pipelines and cables cross the

channel leading to Lubeck and may best be seen on the chart.

4.11 Several ferries cross the channel leading to Lubeck.

Lubeck (53°53'N., 10°42'E.)

World Port Index No. 28890

4.12 The port of Lubeck lies within an important industrial

center and is the N terminal of the Elbe-Lubeck Kanal (ElbeTrave Kanal). The main part of the city is situated on an island

which is surrounded by basins and waterways. The port area is

divided into an outer and inner harbor. The outer harbor serves

ocean-going vessels while the inner harbor is primarily used by

small craft, barges, and canal traffic.

4.12 Depths—Limitations.—There are ten main quays, 550 to

1,200m long, with depths of 6 to 9.5m alongside. Vorwerker

Hafen, a basin, is situated in the NW part of the harbor and is

940m long. Umschlaghafen consists of several quays fronting

the E side of the river, S of Vorwerker Hafen. Burgtorhafen,

with quays on both sides, is that part of the river lying between

Umschlaghafen and Walhalbinsel. 

4.12 Walhalbinsel is a peninsula located in the S part of the

harbor. Wallhafen, a basin, lies on the N side of Walhalbinsel

and is 1,118m long. Hansashafen, a basin, lies on the S side of

Walhalbinsel and is 1,185m long.

4.12 There are facilities for general cargo, bulk, tanker, container,

cruise, and ro-ro ferry vessels. Vessels of up to 64,000 dwt and

9.3m draft can be accommodated.

4.12 The Elbe-Lubeck Kanal, with seven locks, leads S from the

port and connects with the Elbe River at Lauenburg, a distance

of about 42 statute miles. It can be used by lighters up to 1,200

dwt, 80m in length, 11.6m beam, and 2m draft.

4.12 Pilotage.—See Travemunde Port (paragraph 4.10) for

information concerning pilotage and the VTS system operating

in the approaches to Die Trave river, which flows into the S

part of Lubecker Bucht. 

4.13 Wismar Bucht (53°59'N., 11°20'E.), a large bight, is

situated on the S side of Mecklenburger Bucht and lies between Gross Klutzhoved (54°01'N., 11°11'E.) and Wustrow, 14

miles ENE. It is encumbered with extensive sand banks. Wismar is situated at the S end of a bay at the head of the bight.

Wustrow, a peninsula, extends about 5 miles SW from the

mainland at the E side of the bight. Salz Haff, a shallow area of

water, lies on the inside of this peninsula. The coastal bank,

with depths of less than 5m, extends about 1 mile W and 1.5

miles NW from the W end of Wustrow. 

4.13 Tarnewitzer Huk (54°00'N., 11°14'E.) is located on the NW

side of the bight, 3 miles SE of Gross Klutzhoved. Boltenhagen

Lubeck

Lubeck Passenger Quay
114 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

Bucht lies between these two points. This bay provides anchorage, in depths up to 18m, sand and mud with good holding

ground.

4.13 Lieps (54°00'N., 11°17'E.), an extensive and shallow shoal

area, extends about 3 miles NE from Tarnewitzer Huk across

the W side of the entrance to the bight. A directional light is

shown from a mast, 10m high, standing on the SE part of the

shoal, about 2 miles E of Tarnewitzer Huk. Schweinskothel, a

large shoal area with depths of less than 5m, lies centered 1

mile NE of Lieps Light. Sechersgrund, a detached shoal with a

least depth of 4.7m, lies 0.5 mile ENE of Lieps Light.

4.13 Hannibal (54°02'N., 11°22'E.), an extensive rocky shoal

with depths of less than 5m, lies near the middle of the

entrance to Wismar Bucht and is centered 4.7 miles NE of

Tarnewitzer Huk.

4.13 Wohlenberger Wiek, a large bay, lies S of Lieps and provides

sheltered anchorage, in depths of 7 to 9m.

4.13 Poel (54°00'N., 11°27'E.), a low and treeless island, occupies

the SE part of Wismar Bucht and lies on an extensive shore

bank. This large island is connected to the mainland at its SE

side by a road bridge, which spans a shallow sound. Langenwerder, an islet, lies close off the NE extremity of the island.

4.13 Kirch See, a narrow and shallow inlet, indents the S side of

the island and extends about 2 miles N. A narrow fairway,

marked by buoys and indicated by a lighted range, leads N into

the inlet and to the village of Kirchdorf, which stands at the

head. The village is fronted by a small harbor, which is used by

fishing boats, and two marinas. A conspicuous church, with a

steeple, stands on the W side of the head of this inlet.

4.13 Walfisch, an islet, lies 1.2 miles SSW of the entrance to

Kirch See.

4.14 Timmendorf Light (53°59'N., 11°23'E.), a directional light, is shown from a prominent tower with a dwelling,

21m high, standing on the W extremity of the island. A small

harbor, with a controlling depth of about 3m, is situated close

W of the light and is used by pilot boats, fishing vessels, and

pleasure craft.

Mittelgrund, a detached shoal patch, with a least depth of

4.7m, lies about 1.3 miles WSW of Timmendorf Light and is

marked by a buoy.

Die Platte, a large shoal area with depths of less than 5m, lies

centered 1.1 miles NW of Timmendorf Light.

Flagtief, a narrow channel, leads S between the E side of this

shoal area and the W side of the shorebank fronting the NW

part of Poel. It may be used by small vessels with drafts up to

4m. Local knowledge is required.

Gollwitz N Light (54°01.5'N., 11°28.3'E.), a sector light, is

shown from a prominent tower on a building, 10m high, standing on the NE part of the island, 3.8 mile ENE of Timmendorf

Light.

Gollwitz W Light (54°01.5'N., 11°28.0'E.), a sector light, is

shown from a prominent tower on a building, 13m high, standing close WNW of Gollwitz N Light.

Wismar Lighted Buoy (54°06'N., 11°26'E.), marking the

entrance to Grosses Tief, is moored about 4.7 miles NNW of

Gollwitz N Light.

4.14 Offen Tief Lighted Buoy (54°02'N., 11°17'E.), marking the

entrance to Offen Tief, is moored about 4 miles NW of

Timmendorf Light.

4.14 Grosses Tief (54°05'N., 11°27'E.), the main approach channel, is entered about 3.5 miles NW of the NW side of Wustrow.

It leads SSE for 2.5 miles from the vicinity of the Wismar

Lighted Buoy and passes W of the shorebank fronting the W

side of Wustrow. The track lies in the white sector of Gollwitz

N Light. The channel then leads SW and W, passing between

Hannibal and the shore bank fronting the N side of Poel, into

Krakentief, a pool lying on the E side of Lieps.

4.14 From Krakentief, a dredged fairway leads S, SE, and SSE to

the port of Wismar. This fairway passes between Die Platte and

Schweinskothel and then between Mittelgrund and Sechersgrund. It rounds the SW side of Poel and passes between Walfisch and Fliemstorf Huk, a point on the mainland 0.7 mile SW.

4.14 The channel is marked by lighted buoys and indicated by

lighted ranges, which may best be seen on the chart.

4.14 Lighted Buoy No. 17, moored 1.8 miles WSW of Timmendorf Light, marks the turn in the channel and is equipped with a

racon.

4.15 Offen Tief (54°02'N., 11°18'E.), a secondary channel,

leads SE from the vicinity of Offen Tief Lighted Buoy over the

narrow neck of the shoalbank connecting Lieps and Hannibal

into Krakentief. It is marked by buoys. Local knowledge is

advised.

4.15 Depths—Limitations.—Grosses Tief has a controlling

depth of 9.5m and can be used by vessels with drafts up to

8.2m.

4.15 Offen Tief has a controlling depth of 5.1m and can be used

by small craft with drafts up to 3.1m.

Timmendorf Light

Gollwitz N Light
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 115

Pub. 194

4.15 Caution.—A spoil ground dumping area lies about 1 mile S

of Offen Tief and may best be seen on the chart.

4.15 Several nature reserves, which are closed to commercial

shipping and fishing vessels, lie within the coastal areas of

Wismar Bucht and may best be seen on the chart.

4.15 Navigation outside the main fairway channel at night is not

recommended for vessels without local knowledge.

Wismar (53°54'N., 11°28'E.)

World Port Index No. 28870

4.16 Wismar, situated in an industrial area, is a shipbuilding and repair center in addition to being a commercial port.

4.16 Ice.—Ice conditions in Wismar Bucht are much the same as

those elsewhere within the Lubecker Bucht area. However, due

to the shallowness of the channels and the lack of currents, ice

may appear earlier in the season, usually around the beginning

of January. The winter season lasts until the end of March.

Icebreakers generally maintain an open channel from the sea to

the port of Wismar.

4.16 Tides—Currents.—Winds from the N, and winds from the

E if winds from the W have previously prevailed, can cause a

rise in the water level. Winds from S or W can lower the water

level. Fluctuations of up to 0.9m occur frequently. Gales from

NE can raise the water level by up to 2.8m and gales from SW

can lower it by as much as 1.9m.

4.16 The currents in the bight are caused by the winds and are

normally slight, being noticeable only in the deeper channels

during prolonged winds from the same direction.

4.16 Depths—Limitations.—The port is fronted by a turning

area, 280m wide, with a depth of 9.5m. A shipyard, with a drydock, is situated at the W side of the port. It is fronted by Werfthafen, a basin, which has depths of 6.5 to 9.5m and provides

fitting-out berths. Westhafen, a basin located in the S part of

the port, is 600m long. It has a depth of 6.5m and provides

shipyard berths. Alter Hafen, a basin located in the SE part of

the port, has depths of 6.7 to 8.2m. Its outer section is used by

timber vessels and its inner section is used by fishing vessels.

4.16 Olhaven, located in the N part of the port on the NE side of

the channel, is a chemical and oil terminal. Uberseehafen and

Kalihafen, located in the E part of the port, are two commercial

basins. They provide about 1,600m of total quayage with

depths of 5.1 to 9.5m alongside.

4.16 There are facilities for timber, bulk, tanker, chemical, passenger, general cargo, and ro-ro vessels.

4.16 Vessels up to 210m in length, 28m beam, and 8.2m draft can

be accommodated. Tankers up to 150m in length and 8.2m

draft can be handled.

4.16 Aspect.—The fairway channels leading to the port are

marked by sector lights, lighted ranges, and lighted buoys.

4.16 A church, with a conspicuous steeple, stands at Klutz, 3

miles SSW of Gross Klutzhoved. A prominent church is situated at Hohenkirchen, 5 miles SE of Klutz. A prominent high

building is reported to stand at Wendoff, about 0.7 mile WNW

of the port. Numerous cranes standing at the shipyards in the

port area are conspicuous.

4.16 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for the following:

1. Tankers carrying gas, chemicals, petroleum, or petroleum products.

2. Unloaded tankers, if not cleaned, degassed, or completely inerted after having carried petroleum or petroleum

products with a flashpoint below 35°C.

3. Other vessels over 70m in length or with a beam

greater than 11m.

4.16 Vessels should send a request for pilotage and an ETA at the

boarding place at least 4 hours in advance. The message must

state the following information:

4.16 Pilots can be contacted by VHF (Timmendorf Pilot) and

board, as follows:

1. Vessels over 90m in length or 5.2m draft in the

vicinity of Wismar Lighted Buoy (54°06'N., 11°26'E.).

2. Vessels of 90m in length or 5.2m draft and less in a

position about 2.2 miles NW of Gollwitz N Light.

3. Vessels of 3.1m draft and less in the vicinity of Offen

Tief Lighted Buoy (54°02'N., 11°17'E.).

4.16 The Wismar pilotage service can be contacted on VHF

channel 14 and 16, and by e-mail, as follows:

Wismar

Wismar Tanker Terminal

Designator Information Required

A Vessel name and call sign.

U Length (in meters), beam (in decimeters), and grt.

H ETA at pilot boarding position.

O Draft (in decimeters).

I Port of destination.

station@wismarpilot.de

Wismar Pilotage Service Home Page

http://www.wismar-rostock-stralsund-pilot.de
116 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

4.16 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) is in

operation in the approaches to Wismar Bucht and is mandatory

for the following: 

1. Vessels of 17m in length and over, including composite units.

2. Vessels carrying dangerous goods in bulk (gas, chemicals, petroleum, or petroleum products).

3. Unloaded tankers if not cleaned, degassed, or completely inerted after carrying petroleum or petroleum products with a flashpoint below 35°C.

4. Nuclear-powered vessels.

4.16 The VTS may be contacted on VHF channels 12 and 16.

Vessels entering the VTS area must maintain a continuous

listening watch. It is mandatory to send the following reports:

1. Sailing Plan (SP)—An SP must be sent to VTS Center

Wismar Traffic on VHF channel 12, as follows:

a. When entering the VTS area from seaward 1 hour

before passing Wismar Lighted Buoy or Offen Tief

Lighted Buoy.

b. Before leaving a harbor or berth within the VTS

area.

2. Position Report (PR)—A PR must be sent to VTS

Center Wismar Traffic on VHF channel 12, as follows:

a. After embarking the pilot.

b. When leaving the fairway.

c. When entering or leaving an anchorage or berth

within the VTS area.

d. When passing the following reporting points:

i. Wismar Lighted Buoy.

ii. Offen Tief Lighted Buoy.

iii. Lighted Buoy No. 12 (54°01.1'N., 11°22.2'E.),

stating if Flaggtief fairway is to be used.

iv. Lighted Buoy No. 22 (53°58.1'N., 11°21.4'E.)

stating if Flaggtief fairway is to be used.

3. A Deviation Report (DR) must be sent in case of

amendments to the SP.

4. An Incident Report (IR) must be sent in case of an

incident impairing safety or the environment.

4.16 For the format for the SP and PR, see Regulations for Kieler

Forde in paragraph 3.65.

4.16 Information broadcasts are made by VTS Wismar Traffic on

VHF channel 12 in German, and on request, in English at

0230, 0630, 0930, 1230, 1530, 1830, and 2130. The broadcast

includes information relevant to the safe passage through the

VTS area and general traffic situation details including local

storm warnings, weather, visibility, ice, casual-ties, and

dredging operations.

4.16 Speed is limited to 5 knots within the harbor.

4.16 Tugs are mandatory for vessels over 1,600 grt and for all vessels carrying dangerous cargoes.

4.16 Vessels over 125m in length or 7.3m draft are not permitted

to transit the approach fairway channels in Wismar Bucht without permission from the Captain of the Port of Wismar.

4.16 Anchorage.—A designated outer anchorage area, which

may best be seen on the chart, lies centered 3 miles N of Hannibal. It has depths of 11 to 16m, with a sand and stone bottom.

4.16 A designated inner anchorage area, which may best be seen

on the chart, lies centered 0.9 mile WSW of Timmendorf

Light. It has depths of 6 to 9m, with a bottom of mostly mud.

4.16 Directions.—Vessels should use the Lubeck-Gedser Route,

which may best be seen on the chart, and then proceed in a S

direction toward the Wismar Lighted Buoy (54°06'N.,

11°26'E.).

4.16 Caution.—High speed ferries, many of which use the Offen

Tief channel, may be encountered in the approaches to Wismar.

4.17 From Wustrow, at the E side of the entrance to Wismar Bucht, the S coast of Mecklenburger Bucht continues E for

15 miles to Warnemunde. The Warnow River discharges at

Warnemunde and the town of Rostock is situated 5 miles above

its mouth.

4.17 Buk Light (54°08'N., 11°42'E.) is shown from a prominent

tower with a dwelling, 21m high, standing 1.2 miles SSE of

Buk Spitze, a low-lying point.

4.17 A prominent hill, 128m high, rises 2.8 miles SE of the light.

A conspicuous church stands near the shore at Rerik, 3.2 miles

SW of the light.

4.17 Between Buk Spitze and the village of Heiligendamm, 5.5

miles E, there are hills and woods, but then as far as Warnemunde the land becomes lower and less wooded. The shore

bank fronting this section of the coast is encumbered with

numerous large stones and extends up to about 1.5 miles seaward in the vicinity of Buk Spitze.

Buk Light

Warnemunde Light
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 117

Pub. 194

4.17 Warnemunde Light (54°11'N., 12°05'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 31m high, standing on the W side of the entrance to the Warnow River. A conspicuous circular building is

situated near the light. A conspicuous church, with a slender

spire, stands at Bad Doberan, 7.7 miles SW of the light.

4.17 It is reported that prominent groups of wind gener-ators are

situated at Diedrichshagen, 2.5 miles WSW of the light, and at

Nienhagen, 5 miles WSW of the light.

4.17 Caution.—An explosives dumping area, which may best be

seen on the chart, extends up to about 5 miles offshore between

Wustrow and Buk Spitze.

4.17 A measured distance area, which may best be seen on the

chart, lies 2.5 miles offshore and is centered 4 miles NE of Buk

Light. It is indicated by pairs of beacons. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited in the vicinity of this measured distance

area.

4.17 A marine farm area, which may best be seen on the chart,

lies centered 2.8 miles NNE of Buk Light.

4.17 A marine farm area, which may best be seen on the chart,

lies 0.7 mile offshore, 5 miles W of Warnemund. 

Rostock (54°06'N., 12°08'E.)

World Port Index No. 28860

4.18 The town of Rostock stands 5 miles above the mouth

of Die Warnow (Warnow River). The extensive industrial port

of Warnemunde-Rostock extends along the river and includes

several shipyards. The port is also an important transshipment

center and ferry terminal.

4.18 Ice.—Due to its position on the open sea, Warnemunde

remains ice free longer than Wismar and the other German harbors to the E. In average years, the first ice appears around the

end of December and remains until the last days of February.

The mouth of the river seldom freezes and then only for short

periods. As long as the open sea and approaches remain ice

free, the river channel and harbor basins are kept open by

icebreakers.

4.18 Tides—Currents.—The coastal current sets mostly E and

may attain a rate of 3 knots. The current only sets W after persistent E winds. The current in the river flows mostly seaward

and with little strength in calm weather. After persistent N

winds followed by sudden offshore winds, the outgoing current

can attain a rate of 4 knots, particularly along the E breakwater.

With strong onshore winds the current flows inshore and across

the entrance from the W breakwater. Strong SW winds may

cause a current to flow E across the entrance.

4.18 Generally, the water level is decreased by winds from SSE to

W and increased by winds from NW to NE. The daily fluctuations seldom exceed 0.3m. However, the water level can be

raised by up to 2.5m by isolated gales from NW to NE and

lowered as much as 1.6m by gales from SSE to W.

4.18 Depths—Limitations.—Depths in the approach channel

and main entrance fairway (Seekanal) are maintained by

dredging. The main channel (Seekanal) leads SSE for 2 miles

to Rostock-Uberseehafen. It then leads S for 4 miles, following

the river, to Rostock-Stadthafen. This channel has controlling

depths of 14.5m as far as the oil terminal in Uberseehafen, 12m

as far as Dorf Schmarl (54°08.2'N., 12°05.7'E.), 9m as far as

the entrance to Marienehe Basin (54°07.1'N., 12°05.8'E.), and

6.5m as far as Rostock-Stadthafen.

4.18 A secondary channel (Neuer Strom), lying close W of the

main channel, leads SSE to the harbor of Warnemunde, located

at the W side of the river. It has a controlling depth of 6m. This

channel joins the main fairway about 2 miles S of the river

entrance.

4.18 Alter Strom, a shallow basin, is entered close S of the root of

the W breakwater. It is used by fishing vessels and pleasure

craft. A ferry terminal basin lies 0.3 mile SSE of the entrance

to Alter Strom. It has a depth of 6.4m and can handle passenger

ferry vessels, with drafts up to 5.5m.

4.18 Passagierkai, 240m long, extends SSE from the ferry terminal basin and has a depth of 9m alongside. It is approached

through the main channel (Seekanal) and can handle passenger

vessels up to 180m in length and 7.9m draft. A turning basin,

with a depth of 9m, lies close S of the S end of this quay.

4.18 A shipyard is situated on the W side of the river, S of the

turning basin. It is fronted by several fitting out berths, with

depths of 5 to 9m alongside. Vessels up to 200,000 tons can be

constructed in this yard. There is also a floating repair drydock,

which is 230m in length and 50.3m wide.

4.18 Breitling, a shallow area of water, lies on the E side of the

river, 1 mile S of the entrance. A naval base is situated on the N

side of this area and is fronted by several berths, with depths of

4 to 6m alongside. The N part of the area is prohibited to

commercial marine traffic.

4.18 The main commercial harbor (Rostock-Uberseehafen) lies

on the S side of Breitling and consists of three basins, an oil

terminal, and a chemical terminal. A turning basin, with a

depth of 14.5m, lies in the entrance. There is about 9,000m of

total quayage, providing 43 berths, with depths of 10.5 to

14.5m alongside. There are facilities for ro-ro, container, general cargo, bulk, and tanker vessels.

4.18 Vessels up to 260m in length, 40m beam, and 13m draft can

be accommodated. Chemical tankers are limited to a length of

180m and a draft of 9.5m. Vessels over 230m in length, 36m

beam, or 12m draft must obtain special permission from the

authorities prior to entering.

4.18 Marienehe Basin is situated at the W side of the river, about

2 miles S of Rostock-Uberseehafen. It provides 850m of total

quayage, with a depth of 6.5m alongside, and is used by fishing

vessels with drafts up to 5.5m.

4.18 Warnowkai, about 900m long, extends N from the N side of

Marienehe Basin. It provides four berths and has a depth of 9m

alongside. There are facilities for reefer cargo and vessels with

drafts up to 7.9m can be handled.

4.18 Rostock-Stadthafen, the old section of the port, lies 3 miles S

Wismar Bulk Terminal
118 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

of Rostock-Uberseehafen and fronts the city. There are seven

commercial berths, with depths of 6 to 7.3m alongside, and

facilities for small craft and yachts. Vessels up to 125m in

length and 6.3m draft can be accommodated.

4.18 Aspect.—The entrance channel is marked by lighted buoys

and is indicated by a lighted range. Rostock Lighted Buoy is

moored about 7.5 miles NNW of the river entrance and marks

the outer approaches.

4.18 Warnemunde Light, previously described in paragraph 4.17,

is located on the W side of the entrance to the river. A conspicuous hotel, 64m high, stands 0.3 mile WSW of the light.

Prominent churches are situated at Lichtenhagen, about 3 miles

SW of the light, and in Warnemunde, 0.3 mile S of the light. 

4.18 Numerous prominent chimneys, radio masts, and towers are

situated within the port area. Several conspicuous high buildings and churches, with prominent spires, stand in the vicinity

of the city of Rostock and are also visible from seaward.

4.18 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for the following:

1. Tankers carrying gas, chemicals, petroleum, or petroleum products.

2. Unloaded tankers, if not cleaned, degassed, or completely inerted after having carried petroleum or petroleum

products with a flashpoint below 35°C.

3. Other vessels over 100m in length or 15m beam or

7.5m draft (up to Berth No. 60 Warnowpier).

4. Other vessels over 60m in length or 10m beam or 5m

draft (further upriver to Stadhafen Rostock).

4.18 Pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 14 and 16 and usually board, as follows:

1. Vessels with drafts over 11.58m in position 54°17'N,

12°00'E, about 7 miles NNW of the river entrance.

2. Vessels with drafts over 6.5m in position 54°14.5'N,

12°02.3'E (near Lighted Buoy No. 5), about 4 miles NW of

the river entrance.

3. Vessels with drafts of 6.5m and less in position

54°12.43'N, 12°03.90'E (near Lighted Buoy No. 11 and

Lighted Buoy No. 13), about 1.7 miles NW of the river entrance.

4.18 Pilots disembark in the following positions:

a. 54°12.90'N, 12°04.91'E.

b. 54°14.35'N, 12°04.00'E.

c. 54°17.20'N, 12°02.50'E.

4.18 Inbound vessels should send their ETA 3 hours before arrival

at the pilot boarding position, stating the following:

4.18 The Rostock/Wismar/Warnemunde pilotage service can be

contacted by e-mail, as follows:

4.18 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system

operates in the approaches to Die Warnow. It is mandatory for

the following:

1. Vessels 30m in length and over, including composite

units.

2. Vessels carrying dangerous goods in bulk (gas, chemicals, petroleum, or petroleum products).

3. Unloaded tankers if not cleaned, degassed, or completely inerted after carrying petroleum or petroleum products with a flashpoint below 35°C.

4. Nuclear-powered vessels.

4.18 The format for the Sailing Plan and Position Report is found

in Kieler Forde in paragraph 3.65.

4.18 Vessels entering the VTS Area of Warnemunde/Rostock

must maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF channel

73 or 16. It is mandatory to send the following reports:

1. Sailing Plan (SP)—An SP must be sent to VTS

Center Warnemunde Traffic on VHF channel 73, as follows:

a. Two hours before arrival at Fairway Lighted Buoy

(54°17.9'N., 12°01.6'E).

b. Thirty minutes before entering the fairway for

Warnemunde/Rostock.

c. Before leaving a harbor or berth within the VTS

Area of Warnemunde/Rostock.

2. Position Report (PR)—A PR must be sent to VTS

Warnemunde Harbor (Rostock)

Rostock

Designator Information Required

A Vessel name and call sign.

U Length (in meters), beam (in 

decimeters), and grt.

H ETA at pilot boarding position.

O Draft (in decimeters).

I Port of destination.

station@rostockpilot.de
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 119

Pub. 194

Center Warnemunde Traffic on VHF channel 73, as follows:

a. After embarking the pilot

b. When leaving the fairway and after mooring.

c. When turning in the Uberseehafen Turning Basin

(beginning and completion of the turning maneuver).

d. When passing Lighted Buoy No.1 and Lighted

Buoy No.2 (about 5 miles NNW of the port entrance) or

when entering the Warnemunde/Rostock fairway.

e. When passing the moles (54°11.1'N., 12°05.4'E.);

Berth No. 60 Warnowpier (54°08.3'N., 12°05.8'E.); and

Marienehe Channel (54°07.1'N., 12°05.7'E.).

3. A Deviation Report (DR) must be sent in case of

amendments to the SP.

4. An Incident Report (IR) must be sent in case of an

incident impairing safety or the environment.

4.18 The format for the Sailing Plan and Position Report is found

in Kieler Forde in paragraph 3.65.

4.18 Information broadcasts are made by VTS Warnemunde

Traffic on VHF channel 73 in German (and on request, in English) on request and at 0115 and every 2 hours between 0515

and 2115. The broadcast includes information relevant to the

safe passage through the VTS area and general traffic situation

details including local storm warnings, weather, visibility, ice,

casualties, and dredging operations.

4.18 Anchorage.—A designated anchorage area, which may best

be seen on the chart, lies W of the approach channel. It is separated into two sections and marked by lighted buoys. Anchorage is available, in depths of 13 to 17m, mixed clay and

sand with good holding ground, but this roadstead is exposed

to winds from W through N to NE. The E section (No. 1) of

this anchorage is for general vessels; the W section (No. 2) is

for tankers and vessels with dangerous cargo.

4.18 Caution.—The W breakwater at the river entrance is very

low, only 1.5m above the mean water level. It covers during

periods of high water and rough seas.

4.18 Ferries cross the channel at several places within the port and

their routes may best be seen on the chart.

4.18 An abnormal magnetic disturbance has been observed in a

position about 8 miles N of Warnemunde.

4.18 Prohibited areas, which may be best seen on the chart, lie E

and W of the river entrance and extend up to about 1.3 miles

seaward. These areas are for fishery protection and entry into

them is not permitted between 1 March and 31 May.

4.18 A dumping ground area, which may best be seen on the

chart, lies centered 1 mile offshore, 3.5 miles NE of the river

entrance.

4.18 Submarine cables, which may best be seen on the chart,

extends N from points on the shore located about 1.5 miles E

and 1.9 miles ENE of the river entrance.

4.19 From Warnemunde Light, the E coast of Mecklenburger Bucht extends NE for 23 miles to Darsser Ort. With the

exception of the steep cliffs N of Wustrow Light, this section of

coast is generally low and flat. It is wooded except at

Fischland. The coastal bank, with depths of less than 10m and

large stones, extends up to about 3 miles seaward in places

along this stretch, but extends less than 1 mile W of the shore

in the vicinity of Darsser Ort.

4.19 A conspicuous radio mast, 103m high, stands about 3.5

miles NE of Wustrow Light.

A conspicuous water tower stands at Graal Muritz, about 6.8

miles NE of Warnemunde. Prominent chimneys, 46m and 54m

high, are situated 0.4 mile NW and 0.3 mile W, respectively, of

this tower.

4.19 Wustrow, a resort, is situated on Fischland, an area extending

up to about 2 miles NE and SW of the light. This area is protected by groynes and consists of alternate dunes and hills.

4.19 Wustrow Light (54°20'N., 12°23'E.) is shown from a tower

standing on the NW corner of a prominent building, 10m high.

A conspicuous church and a wind generator, 36m high, are

situated close to this light.

4.19 Several wrecks lie along this stretch of the coast and may

best be seen on the chart. A wreck, with a depth of 5m, lies

about 1.5 miles offshore, 4.8 miles NE of Wustrow Light, and

is marked by a lighted buoy.

Darsser Ort (54°29'N., 12°32'E.), a low and sandy point, is

situated about 10 miles NE of Wustrow Light and backed by

dunes and woods. A shallow harbor, used by small craft, is

situated at the E side of the point.

The shore bank, with depths of less than 10m, extends up to

about 4.5 miles N and NE of this point. Prerow Bank, with

depths of less than 5m, lies on the shorebank, about 3 miles

ENE of the point, and is marked by a lighted buoy.

A light is shown from a prominent tower with a dwelling,

35m high, standing on the W side of the point. A conspicuous

radio mast is situated close NNE of the light.

Wustrow Light

Darsser Ort Light
120 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

4.19 Tides—Currents.—Off Darsser Ort, in extreme cases,

winds from NNW to ENE can raise the water level by up to

2.5m and winds from SE to W can lower it by as much as 1.6m.

4.19 Caution.—A submarine cable, which may best be seen on

the chart, extends NW and then NE from the vicinity of Wustrow Light.

4.19 An area, within which anchoring and fishing are prohibited,

lies centered 2.5 miles WNW of Wustrow Light and may best

be seen on the chart.

4.19 It is reported that the harbor and fairway are closed until

further notice.

4.20 Kadet Rinne (54°27'N., 12°15'E.), known to the

Danes as Kadet Renden, lies about midway between Gedser

Odde (see paragraph 4.6) and the coast extending SW of

Darsser Ort. It is the deepest part of the channel leading SW

and W into Mecklenburger Bucht. The main fairway is 1 to 3

miles wide and about 18 miles long.

4.20 Kadet Bank (54°34'N., 12°22'E.), with a least depth of 11m,

lies centered about 7 miles NNW of Darsser Ort, close SE of

the recommended track leading through Kadet Rinne.

4.20 Directions.—A Traffic Separation Scheme (TSS) is situated

in Kadet Rinne and may best be seen on the chart. For more

information about this TSS and Route T, see paragraph 4.1.

4.20 Caution.—Traffic proceeding E in the southernmost lane of

the TSS within Kadet Rinne should be aware that vessels

bound for Warnemunde-Rostock (54°11'N., 12°05'E.) may be

crossing this lane between Lighted Buoy No. E69 (54°23.5'N.,

12°00.0'E.) and Lighted Buoy No. E70, 5.5 miles E.

4.20 Several submarine cables lie within Kadet Rinne and may

best be seen on the chart.

4.20 Several wrecks, with swept depths, lie within Kadet Rinne

and may best be seen on the chart.

4.20 A seaplane landing area, which may best be seen on the

chart, is located in the S part of the port.

German Coast—Darsser Ort to Kap Arkona

4.21 The Zingst Peninsula (54°26'N., 12°41'E.), a narrow

strip of the mainland, extends E for about 16 miles from Darsser Ort to the prominent village of Pramort. Alternating sand

dunes and pine forests back the low-lying shore and several islands lie close E of the E end of the peninsula. A series of interconnected and shallow bays extends W to Fischland along the

inland side of the peninsula. The shorebank, with depths of less

than 10m, extends up to about 4 miles seaward along this

stretch of coast.

4.21 A conspicuous church stands at Prerow, 3.2 miles SE of

Darsser Ort Light. A prominent chimney is situated at Zingst,

4.3 miles E of Prerow and a conspicuous church stands 0.5

mile W of it.

4.21 Plantagenet Grund (54°38'N., 12°48'E.), a group of shoal

areas with depths of less than 10m, extends up to 10 miles

offshore, N of the Zingst Peninsula. This group is marked on

its N side by a lighted buoy moored about 15.5 miles NE of

Darsser Ort Light.

4.21 A conspicuous tide gauge, 8m high and lighted, stands about

15 miles NNE of Darsser Ort and is marked by lighted buoys.

4.21 Der Bock (54°27'N., 13°00'E.), an extensive drying sand

bank, extends E for about 5 miles from the E part of the Zingst

Peninsula and almost reaches the S end of Hiddensee. Several

islands lie on this sand bank and the shore bank, with depths of

less than 10m, extends up to about 8 miles N and NW of them.

4.22 Hiddensee (54°33'N., 13°07'E.), a narrow island,

extends about 9 miles NNE. It lies across the entrance to the

passage which leads between the mainland and Rugen. Several

villages stand on this island which is generally low and sandy

except at Dornbusch, at the N end, where it rises to a height of

72m and is faced with steep cliffs.

4.22 Dornbusch Light (54°36'N., 13°07'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 27m high, standing near the highest point on

the N part of Hiddensee.

4.22 Gellen Light (54°31'N., 13°05'E.), a sector light, is shown

from a prominent tower, 12m high, standing on the W side of

Hiddensee, 5.8 miles SSW of Dornbusch Light.

4.22 Gellenstrom (54°27'N., 13°04'E.), a narrow passage leading

to Stralsund, lies between the S end of Hiddensee and Der

Boek.

4.22 Rugen (54°41'N., 13°26'E.) is a large and irregularly-shaped

island of which Wittow, its N section, rises from low-lying land

at the W side to a height of 45m at Kap Arkona, its N extremity. The W part of Wittow is generally wooded and the E part is

barren with steep, chalk cliffs.

4.22 Der Bug, a low-lying peninsula, extends SW from Dranske,

at the W end of Wittow, and forms the E shore of the passage

leading between Hiddensee and Rugen.

Dornbusch Light

Gellen Light
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 121

Pub. 194

4.22 Kap Arkona (54°41'N., 13°26'E.), the N extremity of

Rugen, is a conspicuous headland consisting of chalk and barren cliffs, up to 46m high. A light is shown from a prominent

round tower, 35m high, standing on this headland. A disused

square light tower is situated close SE of the light.

4.22 Foul ground, with several large rocks, extends up to about

0.5 mile E from the E extremity of the headland.

4.22 For a description of the waters to the E of Kap Arkona, see

Sector 9.

4.22 To the S of the Zingst Peninsula and along the W shore of the

N part of Rugen lie numerous interconnected, shallow, and

irregularly formed bays and coves. Several small harbors and

loading places are situated within this area, but local knowledge is required. The buoyed channels leading into and

through this area have general depths of less than 3m.

4.22 Tides—Currents.—Within the waters in the vicinity of

Rugen, winds from N to E can raise the water level by up to

1.2m and winds from S to W can lower it by the same amount. 

4.22 Regulations.—Vessels transiting the waters N of Rugen

must follow the local designated recommended routes which

are shown on the chart.

4.22 Caution.—In poor visibility, vessels are cautioned not to

mistake the high land in the vicinity of Baken Berg (54°41'N.,

13°21'E.) for Kap Arkona.

4.22 An area, within which anchoring and fishing are prohibited,

extends up to 10 miles seaward of the coast of the Zingst

Peninsula and may best be seen on the chart. This area is also

used occasionally for military firing practice.

4.22 A small explosives dumping area, which may best be seen on

the chart, lies close N of Plantagenet Grund, about 12.5 miles

WNW of Dornbusch Light.

4.22 Nature reserve areas have been established in many places

along the coast between Darsser Ort and Dornbusch. Entry into

these areas is subject to numerous restrictions.

4.22 Several submarine cables lie in the waters to the N of the

coast between Warnemunde and Kap Arkona and may best be

seen on the chart.

Stralsund (54°19'N., 13°06'E.)

World Port Index No. 28848

4.23 The port of Stralsund is situated on the mainland, 8.5

miles S of the S end of Hiddensee. The port can be approached

from the E through Greifswalder Bodden and from the N via

channels passing E and W of Hiddensee. Entry through Greifswalder Bodden, the principal approach, is described beginning

in paragraph 9.7.

4.23 Ice.—Ice may appear as early as November in the inner

waters and remain until the first day of April. In average

winters, the ice season lasts from the middle of December until

early March. Winds from the N drive floe ice from the open sea

into the entrances of both the N and the E approach channels.

Heavy concentrations of ice may hinder shipping and at times

close the port. Generally, Stralsund is closed for 27 days

annually by ice, but the port has been closed for up to 99 days

during very severe winters. Icebreakers maintain a channel

from Greifswalder Bodden for as long as possible.

4.23 Tide—Currents.—In Gellenstrom, winds from N to E can

raise the water level by up to 1m and winds from S to W can

lower it by as much as 0.4m. During very severe storms, when

flooding occurs, the water level may rise by up to 2m and fall

by as much as 1m. The maximum recorded variations are 2.7m

above and 1.2m below the mean water level.

4.23 In the main N approach channel to Stralsund, the current sets

S with winds from W through N to ENE and sets N with winds

from E through S to WSW. With light breezes, the current may

change direction several times during one day. Gales from NE,

NW, SW, or SE cause the strongest currents.

4.23 Aspect.—Gellen Outer Approach Lighted Buoy is moored

about 2 miles W of Dornbusch Light. The approach channel is

marked by buoys and indicated by lighted ranges.

4.23 A conspicuous radio mast, 56m high, stands on the mainland

at Barhoft, about 5 miles SSW of Gellen Light. A prominent

watch tower, 53m high, is situated 0.3 mile NNW of this mast

near the steeply falling shore. A conspicuous large building

stands at the shipyard in the S part of the port.

4.23 Depths—Limitations.—The inner passage from N leading

E of Hiddensee has a controlling depth of only 2.5m. The

approach channel leading W of Hiddensee and through Gellenstrom has a controlling depth of 4.5m and is 60m wide. It can

generally be used by vessels up to 95m in length, 13m beam,

and 3.7m draft. Both channel are subject to silting.

4.23 The channels leading from E through Greifswalder Bodden

(see paragraph 9.7 through paragraph 9.10) can generally be

Kap Arkona Light Stralsund
122 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

used by vessels up to 120m in length, 17.5m beam, and 6m

draft. However, with permission from the port authorities,

larger vessels with drafts up to 6.3m can proceed to Stralsund.

4.23 Several breakwaters and the island of Danholm protect the N

part of the port area. Rugendamm, a dam, connects Rugen with

the mainland at Stralsund. It runs in a NE direction across the

NW part of the island of Danholm and carries both a road and a

railway.

4.23 The N section of the dam, which crosses the fairway channel

NE of Danholm, consists of several fixed bridges. It provides

two openings for traffic, which have a navigable width of 50m

and a vertical clearance of 8m. The S section of the dam, which

extends between the port and the island, provides three openings. The E and W openings are 50m wide and are spanned by

two fixed bridges with vertical clearances of 6m. The central

opening is spanned by two bascule lift bridges, which have a

navigable width of 24.5m and a vertical clearance of 6m when

closed. One bascule bridge carries the road and the other

carries the railway so that both bridges must be raised for

vessels to pass.

4.23 Two power cables, with a vertical clearance of 42m, span the

fairway channel in the vicinity of the port.

4.23 The harbor fronts the town and has about 1,830m of total

quayage, providing 19 berths, with depths of 6 to 6.6m alongside. A shipyard is situated in the S part of the port and a basin

used by fishing vessels lies at the SW side of Danholm. There

are facilities for general cargo, bulk, passenger, ferry, and ro-ro

vessels. Vessels up to 150m in length, 22m beam, and 6m draft

can be accommodated. However, vessels with drafts up to 6.3m

can enter only with special permission.

4.23 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for the following:

1. Tankers carrying gas, chemicals, petroleum, or petroleum products.

2. Unloaded tankers, if not cleaned, degassed, or completely inerted after having carried petroleum or petroleum

products with a flashpoint below 35°C.

3. Stralsund Northern Approach—Other vessels over

60m in length, over 10m beam, or exceeding 3.3m draft.

4. Stralsund Eastern Approach—Other vessels over 85m

in length, over 13m beam, or exceeding 5m draft.

4.23 Pilots can be contacted by e-mail, as follows: 

4.23 Pilots can be contacted on VHF channel 14 and board as

follows:

1. Stralsund Northern Approach—in the vicinity of

Lighted Buoy No. 1 (54°34'N., 13°03'E.).

2. Stralsund Eastern Approach (Sassnitz, Mukran, and

Wolgast)—in the vicinity of Landtief B Lighted Buoy

(54°17'N., 13°46'E.) or Osttief 2 (02) Lighted Buoy

(54°12'N., 13°52'E.).

4.23 Pilots will board at the following positions if requested: 

1. Sassnitz—in the vicinity of Sassnitz Lighted Buoy

(54°33'N., 13°46'E.).

2. Mukran—in the vicinity of Mukran Lighted Buoy

(54°26'N., 13°43'E.).

4.23 Inbound vessels should send an ETA and a request for

pilotage 6 hours prior to their arrival at the pilot boarding

position. The message should state the following information:

4.23 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system operates in the approaches to Rugen and is mandatory for the following:

1. Vessels of 20m in length and over, including composite units.

2. Vessels carrying dangerous goods in bulk (gas, chemicals, petroleum, or petroleum products).

3. Unloaded tankers if not cleaned, degassed, or completely inerted after carrying petroleum or petroleum products with a flashpoint below 35°C.

4. Nuclear-powered vessels.

4.23 Vessels entering the VTS Area of Stralsund North must

maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF channel 16 or

67. It is mandatory for vessels to send the following reports:

1. Sailing Plan (SP)—An SP must be sent to VTS Center

Stralsund Traffic on VHF channel 67, as follows:

a. When entering the VTS Area from seaward 30

minutes before passing Gellen Lighted Buoy (54°36'N.,

13°04'E.).

b. Before leaving a harbor or berth within the VTS

Area of Stralsund North.

2. Position Report (PR)—A PR must be sent to VTS

Center Stralsund Traffic on VHF channel 67, as follows:

a. After embarking the pilot.

b. When leaving the fairway.

c. When entering or leaving an anchorage or berth

within the VTS Area of Stralsund North.

d. When passing Gellen Lighted Buoy, Lighted Buoy

No. 30 (54°26'N., 13°02'E.), and Buoy No. 48 (54°20'N.,

13°07'E.).

3. A Deviation Report (DR) must be sent in case of

amendments to the SP.

4. An Incident Report (IR) must be sent in case of an

incident impairing safety or the environment.

4.23 For the format for the SP and PR, see Regulations for Kieler

Forde in paragraph 3.65.

4.23 Vessels entering the VTS Area of Stralsund East must

maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF channel 16 or

67. It is mandatory for vessels to send the following reports:

1. Sailing Plan (SP)—An SP must be sent to VTS Center

Stralsund Traffic on VHF channel 67, as follows:

a. When entering the VTS Area from seaward 30

station@stralsundpilot.de

Stralsund Pilot Home Page

http://www.stralsundpilot.de

Designator Information Required

A Vessel name and call sign.

U Length (in meters), beam (in decimeters), and grt.

F Speed (knots).

H ETA at pilot boarding position.

O Draft (in decimeters).

I Port of destination.
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 123

Pub. 194

minutes before passing Landtief B Lighted Buoy

(54°17'N., 13°46'E.).

b. Before leaving a harbor or berth within the VTS

Area of Stralsund East.

2. Position Report (PR)—A PR must be sent to VTS

Center Stralsund Traffic on VHF channel 67, as follows:

a. After embarking the pilot.

b. When leaving the fairway.

c. When entering or leaving an anchorage or berth

within the VTS Area of Stralsund East.

d. When passing the following reporting points:

i. Landtief Channel—Landtief B Lighted Buoy and

Lighted Buoy No. L15 (54°12'N., 13°39'E.).

ii. Osttief Channel—Vessels using this channel

must report to Wolgast VTS (see paragraph 9.7).

iii. Palmer-Ort-Rinne Channel to Stralsund—Lighted Buoy No. 3 and Lighted Buoy No. 4 (54°12'N.,

13°27'E.), Lighted Buoy No. 17 (54°14'N., 13°20'E.),

and Lighted Buoy No. 34 (54°17'N., 13°06'E.).

3. A Deviation Report (DR) must be sent in case of

amendments to the SP.

4. An Incident Report (IR) must be sent in case of an

incident impairing safety or the environment.

4.23 For the format for the SP and PR, see Regulations for Kieler

Forde in paragraph 3.65.

4.23 Information broadcasts are made by VTS Stralsund Traffic

on VHF channel 67 in German (and on request, in English) on

request and at 0235 and every 2 hours between 0635 and 2235.

The broadcast includes information relevant to the safe passage

through the VTS area and general traffic situation details including local storm warnings, weather, visibility, ice, casualties, and dredging operations.

4.23 Ostteif Channel (54°12'N., 13°52'E.), leading into the S part

of Greifswalder Bodden, lies outside the Stralsund East VTS

area and within Wolgast VTS area (see paragraph 9.7).

4.23 Speed is limited to a maximum of 10 knots in the approach

channel and 4 knots in the vicinity of the harbor. The maximum size of vessels allowed to enter is reduced during darkness and in periods of poor visibility.

4.23 Vessels departing the port have the right of way in the

fairway over vessels entering.

4.23 The harbormaster can be contacted on VHF channel 11. The

port operators can be contactedby e-mail, as follows: 

4.23 Directions.—Vessels from the N must follow the designated

recommended route, which is indicated on the chart. This route

leads SE toward Gellen Outer Approach Lighted Buoy, which

is moored about 2 miles W of Dornbusch Light. The track then

leads S for 4 miles, in the white sector of Gellen Light, to the

seaward entrance of the approach channel. The channel leads

SSW and SSE along the W side of Hiddensee and through

Gellenstrom. The entrance fairway then continues SE and S for

about 8 miles to the port. 

4.23 Caution.—Numerous fishing boats, nets, and traps may be

encountered in the waters off Rugen.

4.23 The channels leading to Stralsund are subject to silting and

the autthorities should be contacted for the latest information

concerning dredged depths and maximum allowable drafts.

Danish Coast—Gedser Odde to Mon Light

4.24 Gedser Odde (54°34'N., 11°58'E.) has been previously described in paragraph 4.6. This point, the S extremity

of Falster, is fronted by low cliffs. A dike protects the lowlying E coast of Falster which extends N from Gedser Odde for

about 10 miles. A high bank, 2 miles long and formed of clay,

extends N from the end of the dike and then the coast becomes

wooded, with steep bluffs, as far as Hestehoved. A prominent

church stands at Gedesby, 2.5 miles NNW Gedser Odde.

4.24 The shore bank along this stretch, with a depth of less than

10m, extends up to about 4 miles seaward in places.

4.24 Hestehoved (54°50'N., 12°10'E.), a headland, is the E extremity of Falster and also the SE entrance point of Gronsund.

It is marked by a light (see paragraph 2.59).

4.24 Hesnaes, a small harbor, lies 1.2 miles SW of the headland

and is used by fishing vessels. It is protected by breakwaters

which form an entrance, 25m wide. The harbor basin has a

controlling depth of 3.1m, but is subject to silting. A conspicuous chimney stands in the vicinity of this harbor.

4.24 Gronsund (54°50'N., 12°10'E.), a passage leading to Smalandsfarvandet, is entered between Hestehoved and Madses

Klint, 3 miles NNE. The entrance is encumbered by Tolken, a

steep-to and shallow shoal area formed of shifting sands, which

extends up to 3 miles offshore.

4.25 Madses Klint (54°53'N., 12°12'E.), the NE entrance

point of Gronsund, is formed by a small, yellow cliff, 22m

high. Hjelm Klint, located 4 miles NE of Madses Klint, is a

prominent white cliff and Hjelm Mill, a conspicuous landmark,

stands 1mile SW of it.

4.25 Hjelm Bugt, a bight, indents the S coast of Mon between

Madses Klint and Mon Light, about 12 miles ENE. With offshore winds, vessels can anchor as convenient within this

bight, over mainly sandy bottom.

4.25 Mon Light (54°57'N., 12°33'E.) is described in paragraph.

1.34. Bjelkes Flak, a rocky shoal with depths of less than 7m,

extends up to about 1.8 miles S of Mon Light.

4.25 A group of remarkable white chalk cliffs stand along the E

end of Mon and are conspicuous from a considerable distance

to seaward.

4.25 Klintholm, a small harbor, lies 2.5 miles W of Mon Light

and is used by fishing vessels and pleasure craft. The entrance

is 30m wide and has a controlling depth of 3m. A prominent

church stands at Magleby, 2 miles NNE of this harbor.

4.25 Caution.—The depths within the waters lying between

Gedser Odde and Mon Light are rather irregular. Seaward of

the 10m curve, the depths increase to 26m, but general depths

are less than 18m.

4.25 Survey equipment, marked by buoys, is frequently moored

off the coast between Gedser Odde and Mon Light, especially

within Hjelm Bugt. 

Swedish Coast—Falsterbo Udde Lt to

Torhamnsudde

4.26 The Skanor Peninsula (Falsterboudde) (55°23'N.,

shl@seehafen-stralsund.de

Stralsund Harbormaster Home Page

http://www.seehafen-stralsund.de
124 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

12°49'E.) forms the low SW extremity of Sweden. The coast

extending 18 miles ESE from this point to Smygehuk, the S extremity of Sweden, is mostly low and fronted by sandy beaches. The shore is partly wooded and partly bare.

Falsterbo Udde Light (55°23'N., 12°49'E.), marking the SE

end of The Sound, stands near the SW extremity of the Skanor

Peninsula and is fully described in paragraph 1.23.

4.26 Falsterborev (55°20'N., 12°50'E.) extends up to about 6

miles SW and 5 miles S of the SW end of the Skanor Peninsula

and may best be seen on the chart. This extensive reef is

formed of sand and gravel. It has depths of less than 2m and is

marked by buoys. Maklappen, a low and sandy islet, lies on the

reef, 1.3 miles S of Falsterbo Udde Light.

4.26 Falsterborev Light (55°19'N., 12°38'E.), equipped with a

racon, is shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 30m high

with a helicopter platform, standing 7 miles SW of Falsterbo

Udde Light (see paragraph 1.23).

4.26 Blenheim Lighted Buoy (55°16'N., 12°53'E.), equipped

with a racon, is moored about 6.7 miles SSE of Falsterbo Udde

Light. It marks the S end of Blenheimgrund, which has a least

depth of 7.4m and is the southernmost shoal lying in this

vicinity. Several dangerous wrecks lie on this shoal.

4.26 A dangerous wreck lies about 3.2 miles SW of Blenheim

Lighted Buoy and is marked by two lighted buoys. The northernmost lighted buoy is equipped with a racon.

4.26 Kriegers Flak (55°02'N., 13°02'E.), an off-lying bank, lies

centered 20 miles SE of Falsterborev Light. It is formed of

sand and stones and has a least depth of 15m. Several wrecks,

with depths of 11.7m to 17.5m, lie in the vicinity of this bank

and may best be seen on the chart.

4.26 Skare (55°22'N., 13°03'E.), a small harbor, is situated on the

mainland 8 miles E of Falsterbo Udde Light. It is used by fishing vessels and pleasure craft. The entrance is 14m wide and

has a controlling depth of 2m.

4.26 A church, with a prominent steeple, stands at Maglarp, 1.2

miles NE of Skare. A prominent radio mast, 136m high, is

situated 0.7 mile W of this church.

4.26 A prominent monument stands on Stavstensudde, a point

located about 1 mile SE of Skare. A shoal, with depths of less

than 5m, extends up to about 1.5 miles SSE of this point and is

marked by buoys.

4.26 Caution.—It is reported that an extensive wind gen-erating

farm, with 128 turbines and several platforms, is being

constructed in the vicinity of Kriegers Flak (55°02'N.,

13°02'E.). 

4.27 Trelleborg Light (55°21'N., 13°09'E.), equipped with

a racon, is shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 15m high,

standing 0.6 mile offshore, about 3.5 miles ESE of Skare.

4.27 For details of the waters lying W of Falsterbo Udde Light

and The Sound, see paragraph 1.23.

4.27 Directions.—An IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Scheme

(TSS) is situated in the vicinity of Falsterborev Light, in the S

entrance to The Sound, and may best be seen on the chart.

4.27 A circular traffic route is centered on the light and traffic

lanes extend N, S, and ESE from its vicinity. An inshore traffic

zone is located E and N of the main traffic lanes.

Lighted Buoy M41 is moored about 5 miles WNW of

Falsterbo Udde Light and marks the N end of the TSS. Lighted

Buoy M42 and Lighted Buoy M43 are moored about 2 miles

and 8 miles, respectively, ESE of Falsterborev Light and mark

the easternmost traffic separation zone.

The main route into the Baltic Sea follows the ESE traffic

lane and passes S of the entrance to Trelleborg (55°22'N.,

13°09'E.). The main route leading toward Kadet Rinne follows

the S traffic lane and passes E of Mon Light. The main route

leading to the S entrances of the Drogden and Flintrannan

channels follows the N traffic lane.

4.27 Caution.—Numerous wrecks, which may best be seen on

the chart, lie in the S approaches to The Sound and in the

vicinity of the TSS.

4.27 Several submarine cables lie in the S approaches to The

Sound and three submarine cables extend S from the mainland

in the vicinity of Skare. These cables may best be seen on the

chart.

4.27 A large danger area, the limits of which are shown on the

chart, lies across the S approaches to The Sound. It extends 24

miles SW from a position located 5 miles SE of Falsterbo Udde

Light. Anchoring, fishing, and seabed activities are prohibited

Falsterborev Light Trelleborg Light
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 125

Pub. 194

within this area due to the residual danger of bottom mines.

4.27 A danger area, which may best be seen on the chart, lies

centered 13 miles SE of Blenheim Lighted Buoy. Anchoring,

fishing, and sea bed activities are prohibited within this area

due to the residual danger of bottom mines.

4.27 During heavy winter gales, the sea level off the S coast of

Sweden may vary by as much as 0.9m.

4.27 A restricted natural preservation area, which may best be

seen on the chart, lies in the vicinity of Maklappen. The islet is

a bird sanctuary and entry into the area is prohibited without

permission.

4.28 Falsterbo Kanal (55°24'N., 12°57'E.) has been cut

across Falsterbonaset, the inner part of the Skanor Peninsula.

This canal extends about 1 mile NW from Kampingebukten, in

the W part of the Baltic Sea, to Hollviken, in The Sound. It

shortens the passage between Flintrannan and the Baltic Sea by

16 miles.

Kampingebukten Lighted Buoy is moored about 3 miles SE

of the S entrance. A dredged approach channel, 100m wide,

leads NW from the vicinity of this buoy to the canal entrance,

which is protected by two breakwaters. The fairway is indicated by a lighted range and has a least depth of 7m.

The canal is 40m wide and 5.6m deep. It can be used by vessels up to 15,000 dwt, 20m beam, and 4m draft.

The canal can be navigated both by day and at night, except

when the difference in the water level between Hollviken and

Kampingebukten exceeds 1m. A lock, 0.5 mile long, has been

constructed in the canal and maintains an equal water level

whereby vessels can normally transit the canal at any time

without interruption.

4.28 The Hollviksbron Bridge, a road and rail bascule bridge,

spans the canal near the N entrance and has a navigable width

of 25m. The bascule has a vertical clearance of 3.9m when

closed. Usually, rail traffic across the bridge has priority over

marine traffic through the canal.

4.28 A dredged channel, with a least depth of 5.6m, leads SE into

the N entrance. For details of the N approach to the canal, see

paragraph 1.24.

4.28 Pilotage.—Pilotage is available and recommended for vessels without local knowledge. Pilots are provided by the main

pilot station at Malmo (see paragraph 1.18). They can be

contacted by VHF and board off Malmo or Trelleborg. Vessels

must communicate with the canal control tower at

Hollviksbron on VHF channels 16 and 73, and maintain a

continuous listening watch. Information concerning water

levels and traffic in the canal is available on VHF from the

control center. Requests for bridge opening can be made

through the center. 

4.28 The conventional direction of buoyage in the approach channel leading to the S entrance of the canal is N to S.

4.28 Special regulations are in force within the approaches to the

canal and should be obtained from the local authorities prior to

transit.

4.28 It is reported that passage through the canal is permissable,

as follows: 

1. 15 April to 30 September—Every hour from 0600 to

2200 except 0800 and 1700.

2. 1 October to 14 April—At 0630 and 1830.

3. Canal 24 to 26 December and 1 January: Closed 

Trelleborg (55°22'N., 13°09'E.)

World Port Index No. 24250

4.29 The port of Trelleborg, a ferry terminal, is situated

about 11.5 miles E of Falsterbo Udde Light.

4.29 Winds—Weather.—Although the harbor is unprotected

from S and SW winds, there is no sea or suction felt because of

the shallow water lying in the approaches. A comparatively

smooth sea prevails during onshore winds, but NW and SW

gales sometimes cause an extensive lowering of the water level.

4.29 Ice.—Inclement weather or ice seldom hinders traffic proceeding in or out of the harbor.

4.29 Depths—Limitations.—The shorebank, with depths of less

than 5m, extends up to about 1.6 miles seaward in the vicinity

of the port. An approach channel, dredged to a depth of 8.4m

over a bottom width of 100m, leads NNE from close W of

Trelleborg Light.

4.29 The harbor is entered between two breakwaters, which form

an entrance, 130m wide. It is divided into three main basins.

4.29 Nyhamnen, the New Harbor, lies at the W side of the port

and has a depth of 8m. It provides a quay, 455m long, on the N

side and an oil berth, 220m long, on the S side. A quay located

at the S side of the inner part of this basin is used by fishing

vessels. Centralhamnen, in the N part of the port, is divided

into two basins by Hamnbron, a short pier. A quay, 275m long,

is located at the W side of Centralhamnen and has a depth of

8m alongside. Ferry berths, with depths of 8m alongside, are

situated in the outer part of the E section of Centralhamnen and

at both sides of the pier. There are also seven ro-ro berths in the

port with depths of 6.5 to 8m alongside. Generally, vessels up

to 15,000 dwt and 7.6m draft can be accommodated.

4.29 Aspect.—Trelleborg Redd Lighted Buoy marks the outer

entrance of the approach channel and is moored about 1.5

miles SSW of Trelleborg Light. The approach fairway is

marked by buoys and indicated, along its edges, by lighted

ranges.

4.29 A church, with a prominent stepped gabled, a green silo, and

a group of cistern tanks are situated on the W side of the

harbor. A group of prominent chimneys, one of which is 65m

high, and a gray silo are situated on the E side of the harbor. A

prominent water tower stands in the town and a radar mast,

42m high, is situated close W of it. Another prominent water

tower is situated about 1 mile NNE of the town.

4.29 A conspicuous radio mast, 130m high, stands 2 miles NE of

the harbor entrance.

4.29 Pilotage.—All ordering of pilots in the Oresund Maritime

Area must be made through Malmo VTS (see paragraph 1.18).

Vessels should send a request for pilotage and an ETA at least 5

hours in advance. Requests for deep-sea pilots for The Sound

should be sent at least 24 hours in advance.

4.29 The pilot station at Trelleborg provides local pilots and

coastal pilots for The Sound, Store Baelt, Kiel-Holtenau, and

other ports in the Baltic Sea. Harbor pilots can be contacted on

VHF channel 20 and usually board in the vicinity of Trelleborg

Redd Lighted Buoy (55°20'N., 13°08'E.). 

4.29 It should be noted that extensive changes to pilotage

procedures within Swedish waters have taken place. For-merly,

all initial ordering of pilots was carried out through the main

VTS systems. However, procedures for the initial ordering of
126 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

pilots via the Swedish Vessel Reporting System (FRS) on the

Swedish Maritime Administration internet web site are being

introduced. For additional information, see paragraph 1.1.

4.29 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system has

been established in the port; the procedures apply to all

arriving or departing merchant vessels.

4.29 Inbound vessels should give a first announcement 5 minutes

before arriving at Trelleborg Redd Lighted Buoy (55°20'N.,

13°08'E.) on VHF channel 74. Such vessels should also give a

second announcement upon arrival at this lighted buoy.

4.29 Outbound vessels should announce their intention to depart

on VHF channel 74. When such vessels have announced their

departure, inbound traffic must await the outbound traffic, unless another agreement has been made.

4.29 The VTS center will assist any outbound vessels with limited

radar information concerning the movements of other vessels

in the harbor.

4.29 All fishing vessels and other small craft intending to enter

the port should announce their arrival 20 minutes before passing the outer breakwater headson VHF channel 74. Their departure should also be announced.

4.29 The VTS center can also be contacted by telephone. Any

communications with the center should preferably be spoken in

English. 

4.29 Trelleborg VTS can be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

4.29 Signals.—Fixed green and yellow lights are shown from the

E inner pier head when ferries are entering or departing.

4.29 Anchorage.—With offshore winds, anchorage can be taken,

in depths of 7 to 12m, clay mixed with sand and stones, to the

W of the track leading between Trelleborg Redd Lighted Buoy

and Lighted Buoy No. 1, marking the seaward entrance of the

dredged channel.

4.29 Directions.—Vessels from SW should proceed ENE for 5

miles, using the white sector of Trelleborg Light, to the vicinity

of Trelleborg Redd Lighted Buoy. Vessels from SE should

proceed WNW for 7 miles, using the white sector of Trelleborg

Light, to the vicinity of Trelleborg Redd Lighted Buoy. Vessels

should then steer NNE for 1.5 miles to the seaward entrance of

the dredged approach channel, which is situated close W of

Trelleborg Light.

4.29 Caution.—Due to numerous dangers lying in the approaches, including a detached breakwater, vessels without

local knowledge are advised not to deviate from the designated

dredged fairway.

4.30 Smygehuk (55°20'N., 13°21'E.), the S extremity of

Sweden, is located 7 miles ESE of Trelleborg. The coast between is low and partly wooded. A light is shown from a

prominent tower, 17m high, standing on this point.

4.30 Gislov, a small harbor, lies 2.7 miles ESE of Trelleborg and

is used by fishing vessels and pleasure craft. The entrance faces

SSW and has a controlling depth of 2.8m. A conspicuous

church, with a steep gable, is situated at Dalkopinge, 0.8 mile

WSW of this harbor.

4.30 Smygehamn, a small harbor, lies close E of Smygehuk and is

used by fishing vessels and pleasure craft. The entrance faces S

and has a controlling depth of 2m.

4.30 It is reported that a prominent radio mast, 147m high, stands

about 4 miles inland, 5 miles NE of Trelleborg.

4.30 Romeleasen (Romeleklint), a hill, stands 18 miles NE of

Trelleborg. It is 186m high and is reported to be very conspicuous, especially from the S. The hill has two mounds, the E

one being the higher, and joins a lower range of hills which are

blue in appearance.

4.30 Kullagrund Light (55°18'N., 13°20'E.), equipped with a

racon, is shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 20m high,

standing 2.5 miles SSW of Smygehuk.

4.30 Kullagrunden, a group of shoals with depths of less than 4m,

extends up to about 2 miles from the coast, NW of Kullagrund

Light, and is marked by a buoy.

4.30 The coast trends 29 miles E from Smygehuk to Sandhammaren and recedes to form a bight with the port of Ystad situated at its head. A conspicuous warehouse and a prominent

church stand near Ostra Klagstorp, 3.5 miles NNE of Smygehuk.

4.30 Abbekas (55°23'N., 13°36'E.), a small and shallow fishing

harbor, is situated 8.5 miles ENE of Smygehuk. The town

standing behind the harbor is relatively large and can easily be

identified as the coast is low. A prominent castle, with two

towers, stands 5.5 miles NE of the town. A conspicuous church

is situated at Balkakra, 0.5 mile S of this castle.

4.30 Caution.—The water level along this part of the coast is

unusual in that it falls rapidly with an onshore wind and rises

rapidly with an offshore wind. Storms from the NW are reported to cause strong onshore currents.

4.30 Extensive drift net fishing is conducted off this part of the

coast between Trelleborg and Sandhammaren. Vessels should

exercise caution in order to prevent net damage.

4.30 Eel bottom nets, which may be either secured to piles on the

sea bed or moored to floats, may be laid up to 1.5 miles offshore from May to December. Vessels are advised not to approach within 1.5 miles of this stretch of coast without local

knowledge.

4.30 A danger area, the limits of which are shown on the chart,

lies centered 22 miles S of Smygehuk. Anchoring, fishing, and

sea bed activities are prohibited within this area due to the

residual danger of bottom mines.

tic@port.trelleborg.se

Kullagrund Light
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 127

Pub. 194

Ystad (55°26'N., 13°50'E.)

World Port Index No. 24260

4.31 The commercial port of Ystad lies at the head of a

broad open bight; steep bluffs are located in its vicinity.

4.31 Winds—Weather.—Although the harbor is sheltered, S and

SW gales sometimes raise a heavy sea outside the entrance.

The greatest difference between the mean and low water levels

is 1m, with the normal level varying up to 0.6m.

4.31 Ice.—During a normal winter, ice offers no impediment to

navigation in the harbor. If necessary, an icebreaker will render

assistance.

4.31 Depths—Limitations.—A reef, with a least depth of 5.5m,

fronts the shore at the W side of the harbor. Foul ground, with

depths of less than 5m, extends up to about 1.2 miles S and 1

mile SW of Revnabben, a point located 0.5 mile ESE of the

harbor entrance. Klostergrund, a rocky shoal, lies about 1.5

miles S of Revnabben and has a least depth of 6m.

4.31 Vessels should steer NE toward the outer approach lighted

buoy and then enter the main approach channel. This channel

leads in a NE direction through the off-lying dangers and has a

controlling depth of 7.2m. The harbor is protected by two inner

breakwaters, which form an entrance 150m wide, and two

detached breakwaters, located 0.4 mile seaward. A basin for

pleasure craft and fishing boats is situated at the W side of the

harbor.

4.31 The main harbor basin provides 1,100m of total quayage

with depths of 5 to 7.2m alongside. There are facilities for general cargo, passenger, bulk, ro-ro, and ferry vessels. Vessels of

up to 150m in length, 20m beam, and 6.8m draft can be accommodated.

4.31 Aspect.—An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about

1.5 miles SW of the harbor entrance. The main entrance fairway leads in a NE direction and is indicated by a lighted range.

The seaward edges of the shoal areas lying in the approaches

are marked by a buoys.

4.31 A large green silo stands on the W mole and is prominent. A

church, a water tower, and several silos stand in the town and

are prominent. A tall and conspicuous chimney stands at a

sugar mill, 4.5 miles ENE of the harbor.

4.31 Pilotage.—All ordering of pilots in the Oresund Maritime

Area must be made through Malmo VTS (see paragraph 1.18).

Vessels should send a request for pilotage and an ETA at least 5

hours in advance. Local pilots can be contacted on VHF

channel 20 and generally board in the vicinity of the outer

approach lighted buoy. 

4.31 It should be noted that extensive changes to pilotage

procedures within Swedish waters are being carried out.

Formerly, all initial ordering of pilots was carried out through

the main VTS systems. However, procedures for the initial

ordering of pilots via the Swedish Vessel Reporting System

(FRS) on the Swedish Maritime Administration internet web

site are being introduced.

4.31 Regulations.—Inbound vessels should send an ETA to the

port authority 24 hours in advance stating their name, length,

draft, and if tugs are required or not.

4.31 Inbound vessels should maintain a continuous listening

watch on VHF channel 16 in order to receive information in

regard to ferry traffic.

4.31 The port of Ystad can be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

4.31 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken within Spanska

Redden, an area lying 1.5 miles SSW of the harbor entrance.

This roadstead has depths of 14 to 16m and consists of sand,

clay, and stones. It has good holding ground, but is exposed to

S gales.

4.31 Caution.—Submarine cables, which may best be seen on the

chart, extend SW and SE from a point on the shore close W of

Ystad.

4.32 Kasehuvud (55°23'N., 14°03'W.), a high and bare

flat-topped headland, slopes steeply seaward and dominates the

landscape 8 miles ESE of Ystad. The coast between this

headland and Sandhammaren, 5 miles ESE, is unindented. The

shore is fringed by a sandy bank and fronted by several shoals.

A conspicuous tall chimney stands 4.5 miles ENE of Ystad.

4.32 Anchorage can be taken in depths of 9 to 16m, good holding

ground with sand and clay, between Ystad and Kasehuvud.

Vessels are advised to anchor closer to the headland than the

town. The headland and adjoining hills protect this roadstead

from NE winds.

4.32 Kaseberga, small and shallow fishing boat harbor, is situated

close E of Kasehuvud and is formed by two breakwaters.

4.32 Sandhammaren (55°23'N., 14°12'E.), a low and sandy

point, is the SE extremity of Sweden. A light is shown from a

prominent tower, 29m high, standing on the point; a conspicuous radio mast is situated 0.8 mile NNW of it.

4.32 Svartgrund (55°14'N., 14°15'E.), a detached bank, lies

about 9 miles S of Sandhammaren. It has a least depth of 14m

and is marked by a lighted buoy. During gales, seas are reported to break heavily on this bank. An isolated shoal patch,

with a depth of 10.2m, lies about 4 miles WNW of the bank.

4.32 Caution.—The water level in the vicinity of Sandhammaren

falls rapidly with an onshore wind and rises rapidly with an

offshore wind.

port@ystad.se

Sandhammaren Light
128 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

4.32 Stormy weather, especially from the NE, may cause variable

depths within the 20m curve. Storms from the SW usually

cause strong onshore currents. Large vessels are advised to stay

at least 7 miles offshore when passing Sandhammaren.

4.32 Several wrecks, some dangerous, lie in the waters to the S of

Kasehuvud and Sandhammaren and may best be seen on the

chart.

4.32 It is reported that a large (lighted) ODAS buoy is moored

about 31 miles SSW of Sandhammaren Light.

4.33 The coast turns abruptly NNE from Sandhammaren

and increases in height. The land is more wooded and several

churches, standing along the shore, are visible from seaward. A

prominent church, with a tower, is situated inland at Borrby,

4.5 miles N of Sandhammaren.

4.33 Ornhokaknosen (55°26'N., 14°16'E.) lies about 1.2 miles

offshore, 3.5 miles NE of Sandhammaren Light. This shoal has

a least depth of 10.2m and choppy seas break over it.

4.33 Skillinge (55°28'N., 14°17'E.), a small harbor, lies 6 miles

NNE of Sandhammaren. It is used by fishing boats and small

craft. The entrance channel leads WNW and has a controlling

depth of 4.5m. It is marked at the seaward end by a lighted

buoy and indicated by a lighted range.

4.33 A prominent windmill is situated on the N side of the town,

0.2 mile NW of the harbor. A conspicuous radio mast and a

prominent church stand 1.7 miles NW and 1.8 miles W, respectively, of the harbor.

4.33 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 12 to 15m, sand and

clay, good holding ground, about 1 mile off Skillinge. Vessels

can also anchor, in a depth of 25m, about 2 miles off Skillinge.

This roadstead has good holding ground during W gales.

4.33 Brantevik, a small harbor, lies 3.5 miles NE of Skillinge and

is used by fishing boats. It is protected by two breakwaters and

has a controlling depth of 3m. It can easily be recognized by a

windmill and a church, both conspicuous, standing in the town.

4.33 A prominent church, with a spire, is situated at Ostra Nobbelov, 1.5 miles W of Brantevik.

4.33 Langagrund (55°32'N., 14°29'E.), a detached shoal, lies

about 4.5 miles offshore, 8 miles NE of Skillinge. It has a least

depth of 5m and is marked by a lighted buoy.

4.33 Caution.—Submarine power cables, which may best be

seen on the chart, extend SE from a point on the shore about 3

miles SSW of Skillinge.

4.34 Simrishamn (55°33'N., 14°22'E.) (World Port Index

No. 24280), a small commercial harbor, is situated 2.5 miles N

of Brantevik and is protected by two breakwaters. It is a major

fishing center and also has facilities for pleasure craft.

4.34 Winds—Weather.—The harbor is exposed to strong E

winds which sometimes cause a heavy swell to set into the

outer part. Entry should not be attempted during such times.

During W gales, the water level usually falls by as much as

1.1m below mean sea level.

4.34 Ice.—The harbor is usually ice free, but it may form off the

entrance in January and February during severe winters. An

icebreaker is available.

4.34 Tides—Currents.—Winds of gale force cause the usually

weak currents outside the harbor to attain rates of up to 2 knots.

Gales from the E and SE cause a current to set into the harbor

entrance.

4.34 Depths—Limitations.—An approach channel leads WSW

through the off-lying dangers to the harbor. Nedjan, a shoal

patch, lies about 1.2 miles ENE of the light standing close S of

the harbor entrance. It has a least depth of 2.7m and is marked

at the E side by a lighted buoy. The fairway, which has a least

depth of 6m, passes SSE of Nedjan. The entrance, between the

two outer breakwaters, is 50m wide. The outer basin has a

single berth, 100m long, with a depth of 5m alongside. The

inner basin has 400m of total quayage with depths of 5 to 5.5m

alongside. The fishing basin provides 470m of total quayage

with a depth of 5m alongside. Small vessels with drafts up to

4.5m can be accommodated.

4.34 Aspect.—The approach channel is marked by buoys and indicated by a lighted range. A light is shown from a tower, 15m

high, standing close S of the harbor entrance.

4.34 A prominent church, with a low tower, is situated in the

town. A conspicuous windmill, with sails, and a conspicuous

chimney stand 0.7 mile WSW and 0.5 mile SW, respectively,

of the S outer breakwater head. A prominent radio mast is

situated 2.3 miles NW of the harbor.

4.34 Pilotage.—Pilots are provided by the station at Ahus.

However, all ordering of pilots and traffic information is

carried out by Malmo VTS (see paragraph 1.18). For details of

compulsory pilotage in this area, see Karlshamn in paragraph

4.42. Vessels must send an ETA and request for pilotage 5

hours prior to arrival. Pilots can be contacted on VHF channel

13 and generally board off the seaward entrance to the

approach channel. For additional information concerning the

initial ordering of pilots, see paragraph 1.1 and paragraph 4.1.

4.34 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 12 to

15m, sand and clay, good holding ground, N of the harbor.

Anchorage is also available, in a depth of 25m, sand and clay,

SE of the harbor.

4.34 Caution.—When strong E winds prevail, it is dangerous for

vessels to attempt entry.

4.34 An outfall pipeline extends seaward from a point on the

shore located 1.5 miles S of the harbor. The landing place is

marked by lighted beacons.

4.35 Baskemolla (55°36'N., 14°19'E.), a small fishing

harbor, lies 2.5 miles NNW of Simrishamn. It is formed by a

breakwater and a jetty. The entrance, which faces N, is 15m

wide and has a controlling depth of 2.5m.

 Vik, a small and shallow fishing boat harbor, lies 1.5 miles

NNW of Baskemolla.

Stenshuvud (55°40'N., 14°17'E.), a conspicuous sloping

promontory, is located 7 miles NNW of Simrishamn. It is 96m

high and wooded. Inland, the rising terrain is interspersed by

wooded hills. A light is shown from a prominent tower, 9m

high, standing on this promontory.

A prominent church, with a windmill standing close N of it,

is situated on high ground, 2 miles W of the light. A prominent

radio mast, 110m high, stands at an elevation of 285m about 4

miles W of the light.

It is reported that a conspicuous aeronautical light is situated

about 11 miles WNW of Stenshuved Light.

4.35 Hanobukten (55°58'N., 14°35'E.), an extensive bay, lies

between Stenshuvud and Listershuvud, a salient point located

about 28 miles NE. It is open to E winds, which can raise a
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 129

Pub. 194

considerable sea, and contains the ports of Ahus and Solvesborg.

4.35 Kivik, a small harbor, lies 2.3 miles NW of Stenshuvud and

is used by fishing boats and pleasure craft. It is formed by two

moles and has a controlling depth of 3m. Anchorage can be

taken, with offshore winds, in a depth of 15m, sand and clay,

about 1 mile E of this harbor.

4.35 Vitemolla, a small fishing harbor, lies 1 mile NW of Kivik

and is formed by two breakwaters. It has a controlling depth of

2.4m, but is subject to silting.

4.35 Yngsjo, a small fishing harbor, lies about 0.5 mile inside a

river mouth, 10 miles N of Kivik. It has a controlling depth of

3m, but the river entrance is subject to silting.

4.35 Ahus is located about 16 mile N of Stenshuved, at the W side

of Hanobukten. Solvesborg is located in the NW part of the

bay, about 11 miles NE of Ahus. The shorebank, with depths of

less than 10m, extends up to about 7 miles seaward between

these two ports.

4.35 Tosteberga, a small fishing harbor, lies 6 miles N of Ahus

and is protected by two breakwaters. The entrance is 13m wide

and has a controlling depth of 2.3m.

4.36 Lagerholmen Light (55°58'N., 14°28'E.) is shown

from a prominent tower, 17m high, standing on a rocky islet of

the same name, about 5 miles NE of Ahus.

4.36 A detached shoal patch, with a least depth of 7.3m, lies

almost in the center of Hanobukten, about 9 miles S of the

light.

4.36 Fjalkinge Backe (56°03.4'N., 14°17.4'E.) consists of two

conspicuous barren hills rising about 7.5 miles N of Ahus,

which are connected by a low and flat area. The highest hill has

an elevation of 101m and the other an elevation of 66m. A

tower surmounting the highest peak is reported to be radar conspicuous.

4.36 Sillnasudde Light (56°00'N., 14°37'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 11m high, standing on an islet lying close off

a headland, 5.3 miles NE of Lagerholmen Light.

4.36 Taggen Lighted Buoy (55°54'N., 14°35'E.), marking the

outer shoals in the approaches to Ahus and Solvesborg, is

moored about 5.5 miles SE of Lagerholmen Light.

Vastra Torsviken and Ostra Torsoviken are two bights which

indent the coast between Sillnasudde Light and Bjorknabben, a

point located 2 miles E. Halleviksviken, another bight, indents

the coast between Bjorknabben and Kraknabben, 1.5 miles E.

The terrain at the heads of these bights is wooded and backed

by prominent hills which rise about 1 mile inland.

Torso, a small and shallow fishing harbor, lies at the head of

Ostra Torsoviken and is formed by two breakwaters.

4.36 Hallevik, a small fishing harbor, lies at the head of Halleviksviken. It has a controlling depth of 3m and is protected by

two moles and a detached breakwater.

4.36 From Kraknabben, the coast trends 3.5 miles NE to Listershuvud and is high and steep.

4.36 Nogersund (56°00'N., 14°44'E.), a small harbor, is situated

1 mile NE of Kraknabben. It is used by fishing vessels and

small craft. This harbor, which provides 500m of berthage, is

formed by two breakwaters and has depths of 2 to 4m. A short

dredged channel, with a depth of 4.5m over a width of 40m,

leads N to the entrance. The fairway is marked by buoys and

indicated by a lighted range.

4.36 It is reported that a conspicuous wind generator, 35m high,

stands close E of Nogersund.

Ahus (55°56'N., 14°19'E.)

World Port Index No. 24300

4.37 Ahus lies at the mouth of the Helge River, 16 miles N

of Stenshuvud. It serves as the port for the city of Kristianstad

which is situated 9 miles NW.

4.37 Winds—Weather.—The harbor is protected against winds

from any quadrant, but the low coastal area in the vicinity is

open to S and E gales. Strong E winds raise the water level by

up to 0.7m and W winds lower it by as much as 0.5m.

4.37 Ice.—Ice is seldom a hindrance and the port usually remains

open all year.

4.37 Tides—Currents.—Currents in the entrance fairway flow in

N or S directions at rates of 1 to 2 knots. The direction and

strength of the currents may vary in different sections of the

channel due to shoals.

4.37 Depths—Limitations.—The main approach channel leads

WNW and WSW through the off-lying dangers from the vicinity of Taggen Lighted Buoy. It has a least depth of 8.5m over a

minimum width of 70m. A secondary channel leads NNW for

9 miles to join the main fairway about 1.2 miles E of the harbor. It can be used by small craft with local knowledge and

drafts up to 4m.

Lagerholmen Light

Sillnasudde Light
130 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

4.37 The harbor entrance is protected by two short breakwaters. It

is 65m wide and has a dredged depth of 8m. Quays line both

banks of the river mouth. The harbor provides 1,480m of total

main quayage with depths of 5.8 to 8m alongside. There are

facilities for bulk, general cargo, and timber vessels. Vessels up

to 170m in length and 7.6m draft can be accommodated.

4.37 Aspect.—Numerous shoals and rocky patches, which may

be best seen on the chart, lie in the approaches to the port and

extend up to about 10 miles seaward. The principal fairway

channel is indicated by lighted ranges and marked by buoys.

4.37 The terrain in the vicinity of the harbor is mostly low and

flat. Several silos, tanks, and chimneys standing in the vicinity

of the harbor are conspicuous from seaward.

4.37 Pilotage.—Pilots are available at Ahus, However, all

ordering of pilots and traffic information is carried out by VTS

Malmo (see paragraph 1.18). Vessels must send an ETA and a

request for pilotage at least 12 hours and 5 hours prior to

arrival. For details of compulsory pilotage in this area, call:

Ahus Pilot on VHF channel 18 and pilot boards in the vicinity

of Pallagrund (55°55'N., 14°28'E.), 5 miles ESE of the harbor

entrance, or in the vicinity of Taggen Lighted Buoy (55°54'N.,

14°35'E.). For additional information concerning the initial

ordering of pilots, see paragraph 1.1 and paragraph 4.1.

4.37 Regulations.—Inbound vessels of more than 200 grt, or

over 40m in length (including towing vessels with a combined

length of over 40m), must report 30 minutes prior to arrival at

the quay on VHF channel 18. 

4.37 The port of Ahus be contacted by e-mail, as follows: 

4.37 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 11 to

17m, sand, clay, and stone, about 2.5 miles S of Lagerholmen

Light. However, this roadstead is exposed to S and E gales.

4.37 Caution.—The entrance channel is subject to frequent silting and the port authorities should be contacted for the latest

information concerning depths.

4.37 Rinkaby Firing Practice Range is situated in the inner approaches to the port.

Solvesborg (56°03'N., 14°35'E.)

World Port Index No. 24310

4.38 The port of Solvesborg is situated on the W side of the

head of a well-sheltered inlet, which indents the N coast of

Hanobukten. The harbor consists of two basins with a shipyard

complex situated between them. An extensive pleasure craft

harbor is situated 1 mile SW of the port.

4.38 Winds—Weather.—Strong SW winds raise a rough sea off

the harbor and in the roadstead.

4.38 Ice.—Ice may impede vessels during prolonged cold weather in January and February.

4.38 Depths—Limitations.—The approaches are encumbered by

numerous islets and shoals, which lie up to about 5 miles offshore and may best be seen on the chart. A main approach

channel, with a least depth of 8.2m over a minimum width of

65m, leads NW and NNE through the off-lying dangers to the

harbor. A channel, with a least depth of 7.5m and a width of

60m, then leads to the inner part of the harbor.

4.38 The outer basin provides 380m of main commercial quayage

and an oil berth, with a depth of 8.2m alongside. There is also a

ro-ro berth, 85m long, with a depth of 7.5m alongside. Vessels

with drafts up to 7.7m can enter this basin.

4.38 The inner basin provides about 350m of main commercial

quayage with depths of 6 to 7.5m alongside. Vessels with drafts

up to 5.8m can enter this basin.

4.38 The harbor has facilities for general cargo, bulk, ro-ro,

container, oil, and timber vessels. Vessels up to 170m in length

and 7.7m draft can be accommodated.

4.38 Aspect.—The terrain backing and adjacent to the harbor is

generally low, partly wooded, and interspersed with ridges of

high hills. Ryssberg, a ridge of high hills, extends N for about 9

miles from close N of the town.

4.38 The main fairway is marked by lighted buoys and beacons

and is indicated by lighted ranges. Tunoren Light is shown

from a framework tower standing on a group of rocks, awash,

lying 2.5 miles W of Sillnasudde Light. Several conspicuous

silos, chimneys, and sheds stand in the vicinity of the harbor.

4.38 Pilotage.—Pilots for the port are provided from Ahus and

are controlled by the main station at Karlshamn. However, all

requests for pilotage and traffic information is carried out by

VTS Malmo (see paragraph 1.18). Vessel must send an ETA

southcoastpilot@sjofartsverket.se

Solvesborg Home Page

http://www.sbgport.com

Solvesborg (outer basin)

Solvesborg (inner basin)
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 131

Pub. 194

and a request for pilotage at least 12 hours, and again 5 hours,

piror to arrival. Pilots can be contacted on VHF channel 18 and

board in the vicinity of a position 1 mile SE of Spattgrund

(55°58'N., 14°35'E.), 5 miles ESE of Ahus, at Pallagrund

(55°55'N., 14°28'E.), 5 miles ESE of Ahus, in the vicinity of

Taggen Lighted Buoy (55°54'N., 14°35'E.), or in a position

about 5 miles SSE of the port. For additional information

concerning the initial request for pilotage, see paragraph 1.1

and paragraph 4.1.

4.38 Regulations.—Inbound vessels of more than 200 grt, or

over 40m in length, (including towing vessels with a combined

length of over 40m) , must report to the pilot station on VHF

channel 18 at least 30 minutes prior to arrival at the quay.

4.38 Contact Information.—The port of Solvesborg can be

contacted, as follows: 

1. Radiotelephone: VHF channels 13, 14, and 16

2. Telephone: 46-456-42240

4.38 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in a depth of 12m, sand,

within an area lying about 1.5 miles S of Sillnasudde Light.

Local knowledge is required and the roadstead is exposed to

strong winds from E to SW.

4.39 Listershuvud (56°02'N., 14°47'E.), marked by a

light, is a high, precipitous, and prominent point located 2.5

miles NE of Nogersund.

Laxgrundet, a shoal area with rocks, awash, extends up to

about 1 mile NNE of Listershuvud and is marked by buoys.

Blocket, a shoal area with a least depth of 3m, extends up to

about 2.5 miles S of Listershuvud and is marked by buoys.

4.39 Hano (56°01'N., 14°51'E.), a mostly barren island 60m high,

lies 2.5 miles ESE of Listershuvud. Bonsacken, the NW

extremity of the island, is fronted by a low spit and is marked

by a light. A small and shallow fishing harbor is situated at the

W side of the island, 0.5 mile S of this point. Hano Light is

shown from a prominent tower, 16m high, standing on the

summit of the island, 0.5 mile SE of the NW extremity.

4.39 Malkvarn, an isolated and dark above-water rock, lies on a

shoal patch, about 1.2 miles NE of Hano Light.

4.39 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 18 to 25m, sand and

clay, to the SW and NE of the island, but storms cause a heavy

swell at both of these roadsteads.

4.39 Hanosund (56°00'N., 14°48'E.), a navigable passage, leads

between Hano and the mainland. It is 2 miles wide and has a

least depth of 12m in the fairway. Obstructions extending E

into the passage are marked by buoys.

4.39 Hanobanken (55°56'N., 14°52'E.), an extensive shoal bank,

lies between 2 and 6 miles SE of Hano and may best be seen on

the chart. It has numerous ridges with depths of 9 to 20m over a

bottom of sand and gravel.

4.39 Caution.—Three submarine cables extend across Hanosund

and may best be seen on the chart.

4.39 Small danger areas, within which unexploded ordnance lies,

are located about 3 miles ENE, 7 miles E, 11 miles ESE, 11.5

miles SE, and 13.5 miles SE of Hano Light.

4.40 Pukaviksbukten (56°07'N., 14°47'E.), an extensive

bay, is entered between Listershuvud and Starno Udde, the S

extremity of a peninsula, 6.5 miles NNE. This bay is encumbered by numerous shoals which may best be seen on the chart.

The shores of the bay are irregular, low, and forested. They are

fronted by numerous reefs that extend up to about 3 miles

seaward.

Several channels lead between the various dangers and obstructions to a few small fishing harbors, but local knowledge

is required. There are also a few small anchorages and loading

places, with depths of 3 to 9m, within the bay, but local knowledge is required.

Ryssberget, a range of hills, backs the head of the bay. This

range stands about 3 miles inland and attains a height of 126m.

Horvik, a small fishing harbor, is situated 0.7 mile NW of

Listershuvud. The entrance, which is formed by two breakwaters, is 27m wide and has a controlling depths of 4m.

4.40 Krokas, a small and shallow fishing harbor, is situated 0.5

mile NW of Horvik and protected from the E by a breakwater.

4.40 Pukavik (56°10'N., 14°41'E.), a small harbor and loading

place, lies at the head of the bay. The harbor consists of an

open roadstead with depths of 3.2 to 4.2m over a bottom of

sand and clay. Two damaged piers are situated within the

harbor. Approach channels from E and SE lead between the

off-lying dangers to this anchorage, but local knowledge is

essential.

4.41 Elleholm (56°10'N., 14°44'E.), a small fishing harbor

and loading place, is situated within an inlet, 1.8 miles E of

Pukavik. The harbor consists of a roadstead, with a depth of

5m, and a jetty, 20m long, with a depth of 4.5m alongside.

Local coastal vessels up to 65m in length and 4m draft. can enter the harbor. The approach channel leads W, WNW, and N

into the inlet. The entrance fairway is indicated by a lighted

range and marked by buoys.

4.41 Gunnon (56°09'N., 14°47'E.), an islet, lies 1.7 miles E of

Elleholm and is connected at its N end by a bridge to the mainland. A sector light is shown from a column, 11m high, standing at the S end of the islet and a prominent beacon is situated

on a shoal lying 0.4 mile SE of it. Three conspicuous wind generators stand in the vicinity of the light. 

4.41 An approach channel, marked by buoys, leads N to a jetty

situated at the E side of the islet. This jetty is 45m long and has

a depth of 4.8m alongside. Vessels can obtain anchorage, in

depths of 6 to 10m, clay, off the jetty head.

4.41 Caution.—A submarine pipeline, which may best be seen

on the chart, extends about 1 mile S, 1 mile ESE, and then 1

Hano Light
132 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

mile S from a point on the shore located 0.4 mile W of Gunnon

Light. Its position is marked by lighted buoys.

4.41 Extensive salmon takes place within Pukaviksbukten from

March to September. 

Karlshamn (56°10'N., 14°52'E.)

World Port Index No. 24370

4.42 Karlshamn, a commercial port, lies at the head of an

inlet, 1.8 miles NNE of Starno Udde (56°08'N., 14°50'E.), the

S extremity of the Starno peninsula. It is sheltered at the W

side by the peninsula, at the E side by a group of islets, and to

the SE by Tarno Island. The harbors of Stillerydshamnen,

situated in an inlet at the W side of the Starno peninsula, and

Kolohamnen, situated close E of Stillerydshamnen, are included in the administrative port of Karlshamn.

4.42 Winds—Weather.—The harbor is exposed to S and SE

winds and is subject to sudden SE squalls. Normally, the water

level rises or falls about 0.5m above or below the mean level.

At times, the difference may be as much as 0.9m. Winds from

between N and E usually raise the water level and winds from

between NW and S usually lower it.

4.42 Ice.—The harbor is usually free of ice, but if required the

channels are kept open by icebreakers.

4.42 Tides—Currents.—Troublesome currents along this part of

the coast are occasionally caused by strong E winds.

4.42 Depths—Limitations.—The main approach to the port is

from S or SE, passing E of Hanobanken. Vessels may also

approach through Hanosund. The main entrance channel, with

a least depth of 12.6, leads NNW toward Karlshamn and

divides 1 mile S of the harbor. The principal fairway, authorized for drafts up to 10m, then leads NW toward the oil and

bulk berths. A branch fairway, authorized for drafts up to 8.5m

continues NNW into the inner part of the harbor.

4.42 Sutudden Oil Jetty lies close inside the breakwaters. It has a

head, 70m long, with a depth of 11m alongside. Tankers up to

30,000 dwt, 190m in length, and 10m draft can be accommodated.

4.42 The main inner harbor of Karlshamn includes Ocean Quay,

150m long, with a depth of 9m alongside; Soya Quay, 250m

long, with a depth of 8m alongside; West Quay, 400m long,

with depths of 6 to 7.5m alongside; East Quay, 350m long,

with a depth of 6m alongside; and East Pier, 160m long, with a

depth of 7.5m alongside.

4.42 Sterno, a harbor basin, lies close S of Sutudden oil jetty. It

has 480m of total quayage with a depth of 6m alongside. This

basin is entered through a fairway which is authorized for

drafts up to 5.4m.

4.42 The channel leading NW and NNE toward Stillerydshamnen

and Kolohamnen has a least depth of 14m and is authorized for

drafts up to 13m. A branch fairway, authorized for drafts up to

10.5m, leads NW to the cargo berths at Stillerydshamnen.

4.42 Stillerydshamnen has 600m of total quayage, with depths of

8 to 11m alongside. There are facilities for general cargo,

container, and ro-ro vessels. Vessels of up to 220m in length

and 10.5m draft can be accommodated.

4.42 Oxhaga Nabb Oil Jetty is situated at the N side of Kolohamnen. It has a head, 80m long, with a depth of 13m alongside. Tankers of up to 220m in length and 12.5m draft can be

accommodated.

4.42 Kolo Oil Jetty is situated at the S side of Kolohamnen. It has

a head, 100m long, with a depth of 14m alongside. Tankers up

to 260m in length and 13m draft can be accommodated. 

4.42 The port has facilities for general cargo, ro-ro, container,

bulk, timber, chemical, petroleum, and LPG vessels.

4.42 Aspect.—The harbor is fronted by several dangers and

obstructions which lie up to about 2 miles seaward. The main

approach channel, which is entered about 2 miles SE of Starno

Udde, leads NNW into the central part of the port. It is marked

by lighted buoys and indicated by lighted ranges.

4.42 A channel, which is entered about 1.5 miles SSW of Starno

Udde, leads NW and then NNE into the harbors of Kolohamnen and Stillerydshamnen. It is marked by buoys and indicated

by a lighted range. Obstructions lying adjacent to these fairways are marked by buoys and beacons.

4.42 Several silos and tanks stand in the vicinity of the harbor and

are all conspicuous from seaward. A prominent church, with a

cupola and a pointed steeple, is situated in the town. Three

prominent chimneys stand at a power station located in the

vicinity of Kolohamn, on the NW side of the Starno peninsula.

4.42 Pilotage.—A main pilot station is located at Karlshamn.

This station provides pilots for that part of the Maritime Area

extending between a line bearing 155° through Bromse

(56°19'N., 16°03'E.) and latitude 55°25'N. However, all ordering of pilots and traffic information for this area is carried out

by VTS Malmo (see paragraph 1.18). Vessels should send an

ETA and a request for pilotage at least 12 hours and 5 hours

before arrival.

4.42 Pilotage for this part of the Maritime Area is compulsory for

the following (see paragraph 1.1):

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 and 3 vessels of 70m length, 14m beam,

and 4.5m draft and over.

4.42 In certain channels between the approaches to Karlshamn

and the port, pilotage is compulsory for the following:

1. All category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 vessels of 80m length or 15m beam and

over.

3. Category 3 vessels of 90m length or 16m beam and

over.

4.42 In certain channels between Aspo and Verko, pilotage is

compulsory for the following:

1. All category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 vessels of 70m length or 14m beam and

over.

3. Category 3 vessels of 90m length or 16m beam and

over.

4.42 Pilots for the port can be contacted by VHF and board at the

Karlshamn Outer Boarding Station, located about 3.2 miles

SSE of Starno Udde (56°08'N., 14°50'E.); at the Karlshamn

East Boarding Station, located about 2 miles SE of Starno

Udde; or at the Karlshamn West Boarding Station, located

about 1.3 miles SSW of Starno Udde. 

4.42 It should be noted that extensive changes to pilotage

Karlshamn Home Page

http://www.karlshamnshamn.se
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 133

Pub. 194

procedures within Swedish waters are being carried out.

Formerly, all initial ordering of pilots was carried out through

the main VTS systems. However, procedures for the initial

ordering of pilots via the Swedish Vessel Reporting System

(FRS) on the Swedish Maritime Administration internet web

site are being introduced. For additional information, see paragraph 1.1.

4.42 Regulations.—Vessels should send an ETA to the port

(Karlshamn Harbor Radio) 48 hours and 24 hours in advance.

Any changes within 24 hours should be advised.

4.42 Inbound vessels of greater than 200 grt,or more than 40m in

length, (including towing vessels with a combined length of

over 40m), must report to Karlshamn pilots 30 minutes prior to

arrival at the quay, on VHF channel 18. For VTS reporting

points, see the appropriate chart.

4.42 Inbound vessels should at the following Reporting Points:

4.42 The port of Karlshamn can be contacted by e-mail and

website, as follows: 

4.42 Tankers proceeding to berths in Kolohamnen must have an

underkeel clearance of 0.5m if fitted with a double bottom or

1m if not.

4.42 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 17 to

24m, sand and gravel, within the outer part of the inlet, but this

roadstead is exposed to S winds.

4.42 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in a depth of 11m,

clay, within an area located W of Kastellet (56°09.6'N.,

14°52.0'E.), an islet lying in the inner part of the inlet. Vessels

anchored in this roadstead are limited to a period of 24 hours

unless permission to stay is received from the authorities.

4.42 Caution.—A submarine cable, which may best be seen on

the chart, extends SE and S from the vicinity of Starno Udde.

4.42 It is reported that the dredged area fronting the oil jetties in

Kolohamnen does not extend past the berths. Vessels should

take care when maneuvering in this vicinity not to overrun the

berths.

4.42 Degaussing ranges lie close N and E of Kastellet islet. The

northernmost range is marked by several dolphins.

4.42 Karlshamn lies within a semi-restricted area. See Pub. 140,

Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and

Adjacent Seas for further details.

4.43 The coast between Karlshamn and Ronneby, 14 miles

E, is generally low with few significant features. There are a

number of wooded areas. The shore is indented by numerous

inlets. Small islands, islets, rocks, and shoals, front the coast

and lie up to about 3 miles seaward.

A number of small harbors, loading places, and anchorages

are situated amongst the off-lying obstructions. Narrow channels lead through the dangers to these facilities but they should

not be used without local knowledge.

4.43 Tarno Island (56°07'N., 14°58'E.) lies 4 miles SE of Karlshamn at the seaward side of the obstructions fronting this

section of the coast. It has a bare summit surrounded by trees.

A small fishing harbor is situated at the N side of the island. A

light is shown from a prominent structure standing close N of

the S extremity of the island.

Vagga (56°10'N., 14°53'E.), a small harbor, is situated on the

SE side of the inlet, 1.5 miles SE of Karlshamn, and used by

fishing vessels. It is protected from S and W by breakwaters

and has a controlling depth of 4m.

4.43 Vettekulla (56°10'N., 14°55'E.), a small harbor and loading

place, is situated in an inlet 2 miles ESE of Karlshamn. A fairway leads NNE to this harbor and can be used by small vessels

with drafts up to 3.5m. There is a small pier with a depth of

3.5m alongside. Small vessels, with local knowledge, can anchor, in a depth of 5m, sand, off the harbor.

4.43 Matvik (56°10'N., 14°58'E.), a loading place, lies within

Matsviktjarden, a small inlet. A prominent beacon stands on a

hill which rises 0.5 mile NNW of the harbor and is partly

wooded. An inshore channel leads E from the approaches to

Karlshamn to this loading place and can be used by vessels

with drafts of up to 8.2m. Another approach channel leads W

and can be used by vessels with drafts up to 5m. There is a pier

with a depth of 3.5m alongside. Vessels can anchor, in depths

of 9 to 14m, clay, within the inlet. Local knowledge is required.

4.43 Guovik (56°12'N., 15°01'E.), a loading place with two

shallow jetties, is situated in an inlet 5 miles E of Karlshamn

and is used by small craft. Vessels, with local knowledge, can

anchor, in a depth of 6m about 1.5 miles seaward of the jetties.

4.43 Jarnavik (56°11'N., 15°05'E.), a loading place, lies in an

inlet 7 miles E of Karlshamn. There is a small jetty with a

depth of 3m alongside. Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 6

to 7m, sand and clay, off the jetty. Vessels can also anchor, in

depths of 12 to 14m, good holding ground, about 1.2 miles SW

of the jetty.

4.43 Guovik and Jarnavik are approached from seaward through a

common channel. A branch then leads W to Guovik while

another leads E to Jamavik. The fairways can be used by small

vessels with local knowledge and drafts up to 5m.

4.43 Caution.—Local magnetic disturbances have been reported

off the coast in this vicinity.

Ronneby (56°11'N., 15°18'E.)

World Port Index No. 24440

4.44 Ronneby, a commercial port, is situated at the mouth

of the Ronneby River. The town stands on both banks of the

river, 2.5 miles above the entrance.

4.44 Winds—Weather.—Fresh to strong W winds may cause the

water level in the harbor and approaches to fall by as much as

0.9m.

4.44 Ice.—In normal winters, ice seldom impedes vessels, but

during severe winters, ice sometimes hinders vessels in February and March.

4.44 Tides—Currents.—The current sets in the same direction

as that of the river. At times, a considerable outflow from the

river can cause difficulties when maneuvering in the harbor.

4.44 Depths—Limitations.—The harbor lies at the head of an

inlet and is fronted by numerous islets, rocks, and shoals. The

Reporting Point Position

8 Northbound 56°07.2'N, 14°53.4'E

9 North and westbound 56°06.9'N, 14°49.0'E

info@karlshamnshamn.se
134 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

main approach channel, which has a least depth of 6.5m, leads

NNE through the obstructions and passes close W of Gasfeten

Light. It then leads E and NNE to the harbor.

4.44 A secondary approach channel leads N, NNW, and NNE

from a position located about 2 miles ESE of Gasfeten Light. It

is only used by small vessels with local knowledge and drafts

up to 3m.

4.44 Quays line both sides of the river mouth. There is 300m of

principal berthage, with depths of 3.5 to 6.5m alongside, at the

W side. There is 100m of principal berthage, with depths of 4.5

to 6.5m, at the E side. There are facilities for general cargo, oil,

bulk, timber, and chemical vessels. Vessels of up to 152m in

length and 6.1m draft can be accommodated.

4.44 Aspect.—Golandet, a large peninsula, forms the SE side of

the outer approach to Ronneby. It is fronted by several rocks,

shoal banks, and reefs.

4.44 Gasfeten, a small islet, lies 4.5 miles SW of the harbor. A

light, equipped with a racon, is shown from a prominent tower,

10m high, standing on this islet.

4.44 The main approach channels are marked by buoys and beacons and are indicated by lighted ranges.

4.44 An aeronautical light is shown from a structure standing 3

miles N of the town. A railroad bridge and a road bridge span

the river close N of the harbor. A water tower situated in the

town is reported to be prominent from offshore.

4.44 Pilotage.—Pilots are provided by and must be obtained from

the main station at Karlshamn. However, all ordering of pilots

and traffic information is carried out by VTS Malmo (see

paragraph 1.18). Vessel must send an ETA and a request for

pilotage at least 12 hours and 5 hours before arrival. For details

of compulsory pilotage in this area, see Karlshamn (paragraph

4.42). For additional information concerning the initial ordering of pilots, see paragraph 1.1 and paragrapk 4.1. 

4.44 Regulations.—Inbound vessels of over 200 grt or over 40m

in length (including towing vessels with a combined length of

over 40m) must report 30 minutes prior to arrival at the quay

on VHF channel 13 to Karlshamn Pilots.

4.44 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 7 to

10m, stiff mud and clay, N of Stora Ekon (56°08'N., 15°13'E.),

an islet. Foreign vessels must anchor in this roadstead.

4.44 Caution.—The port and approaches lie within a restricted

and controlled area. See Pub. 140, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent Seas for further

details.

4.44 Local magnetic disturbances have been reported in the

approaches to the port.

4.45 Between the approaches to Ronneby and Torhamnsudde (56°04'N., 15°51'E.), a point located 20 miles ESE, the

irregular coast is partly wooded with low rocky hills rising

inland. Several large islands and numerous islets, rocks, and

reefs front the mainland and extend up to about 8 miles offshore. Several detached shoal patches, generally marked by

buoys, lie seaward of the outer islands and islets.

4.45 A few small fishing harbors and local anchorage roadsteads

are situated along this stretch of coast and can be approached

through intricate channels by small vessels with local knowledge.

4.45 Torko (56°09'N., 15°25'E.), a small island, lies at the head of

an inlet and has a small harbor. There is a jetty, 80m long, with

a depth of 3m alongside.

4.45 Kuggeboda, a loading place with a shallow pier, is situated

on the mainland, 6 miles SW of Torko. Small vessels, with

drafts up to 5m, can transit a narrow channel and reach the

anchorage off Kuggeboda, which has depths of 4 to 8m, mud.

4.45 Several reef-fringed islets and numerous detached shoals lie

between Kuggeboda and Hasslo Island, 2.5 miles SE. An

approach channel, for vessels with local knowledge, leads E

through these obstructions to Karlskrona and is marked by

beacons.

4.45 Hasslo Island (56°07'N., 15°28'E.) is one of a group of four

low islands fronting Karlskrona. This island is fringed by reef

flats and several detached shoal patches, which are marked by

buoys, extend up to about 2 miles seaward of it.

4.45 Carpaviken, a small fishing harbor, is situated at the SE side

of Hasslo Island and is formed by two breakwaters. The entrance, 18m wide, is approached through a buoyed channel

with a least depth of 4m. Hallarna, another small fishing harbor, is situated at the NW side of Hasslo Island and has a

controlling depth of 4m. 

4.46 Aspo (56°07'N., 15°32'E.), an island, lies on the W

side of the main approach channel leading to Karlskrona.

Numerous obstructions, some marked by buoys and beacons,

lie up to 2 miles S of this island. A conspicuous disued lookout

tower stands on this island.

4.46 Drottningskar, a small and shallow fishing harbor, is situated

at the E side of Aspo. A prominent fort stands at the W side of

the harbor entrance.

4.46 Tjurko (56°07'N., 15°37'E.), an island, lies 1 mile E of Aspo

on the E side of the main approach channel leading to Karlskrona.

4.46 Kungsholmen (56°06'N., 15°35'E.), an islet, lies close W of

Tjurko and is surmounted by a conspicuous fort.

4.46 Sturko (56°06'N., 15°40'E.), an island, lies 3.5 miles SE of

Tjurko and may be identified from offshore by a church, with a

conspicuous steeple, standing on its SE side.

4.46 Ekenabben and Sanda are two small and shallow fishing

harbors which are situated at the E side and at the NW side,

respectively, of Sturko. 

4.46 Vastra Forsankningen Light (56°07'N., 15°35'E.), situated

between Aspo and Kungsholmen, is a sector light shown from

a floodlit dolphin, 6m high. This light is situated on the W side

of the main entrance channel leading to Karlskrona and is

equipped with a racon.

4.46 Numerous islets, rocks, reefs, and shoals, lie in an area extending E from Sturko as far as Torhamnsudde and SE as far as

Utlangan (56°01'N., 15°47'E.). This area has only been partially surveyed. Several narrow channels, some marked by

buoys, lead through the area and are used by local coastal vessels and fishing boats.

4.46 Djupasund (56°06'N., 15°38'E.), a narrow passage, separates the islands of Tjurko and Sturko and is spanned by a fixed

bridge with a vertical clearance of 3m. A lighted range indicates a fairway, with a depth of 4m, which leads N through the

passage to two small fishing harbors.

4.46 Caution.—This section of coast and the offshore islands and

islets lie within a restricted area. Foreign vessels must not enter

the fairways leading to anchorages or loading places without

special permission. See Pub. 140, Sailing Directions (Planning
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 135

Pub. 194

Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent Seas for further

details.

4.46 Local magnetic disturbances have been reported off this section of the coast.

4.46 Several gunnery practice areas lie between Ronneby and

Karlskrona and extend up to about 5 miles offshore. Anchoring

and stopping within these areas is prohibited.

Karlskrona (56°10'N., 15°36'E.)

World Port Index No. 24460

4.47 The port of Karlskrona, which is an extensive naval

base, lies within an inlet entered 10 miles E of Ronneby.

Several islands and islets front the port and afford good shelter.

The town is partly built on islands which are joined to the

mainland.

4.47 Winds—Weather.—The water level in the port may rise or

fall as much as 1m above or below the mean level. Winds from

between N and E raise the level and winds from between NW

and S lower it.

4.47 Ice.—The harbor is usually free of ice.

4.47 Tides—Currents.—Troublesome currents are sometimes

caused along this part of the coast by strong E winds.

4.47 Depths—Limitations.—The main entrance channel leads N

and passes between the islands of Aspo and Tjurko. It has a

least depth of 12m and can be used by vessels with drafts of up

to 10m. An alternate entrance channel, lying 0.5 mile W of the

main channel and running parallel to it, can be used by vessels

with drafts of up to 7m. This alternate channel joins the main

channel close W of Kungsholmen.

4.47 A secondary inshore approach channel, with a least depth of

4.9m, leads from the W into the harbor. It passes N of Hasslo

and Aspo and is narrow. This channel can be used by vessels

with drafts of up to 4.2m, but local knowledge is required. A

bridge, which swings to form an opening 20m wide, spans the

channel.

4.47 Another inshore approach channel, with a least depth of

3.6m, leads from the E. It passes between Torhamnsudde and

Langoren and can be used by vessels with drafts of up to 3.2m.

4.47 The naval base occupies the area S and SW of the town. The

main commercial harbor lies NE of the town. There is 1,500m

of total quayage with depths of 4 to 10m alongside. In addition,

an oil pier has two berths, with depths of 7m and 9m alongside,

which can handle tankers up to 160m in length and 8.5m draft.

4.47 There are facilities for oil, general cargo, passenger, bulk,

and ro-ro vessels. Cargo vessels are limited to a draft of 7m.

4.47 There are several repair drydocks within the port, which can

handle vessels up to 200m in length, 26.2m beam, and 7.5m

draft.

4.47 Aspect.—The approach fairways are indicated by lights and

several lighted ranges. Numerous obstructions lie in the

approaches and those located adjacent to the entrance channels

are marked by lights, buoys, and beacons.

4.47 Karlskrona Angoring Lighted Buoy, marking the entrance of

the main channel, is moored about 3.5 miles SSW of Vastra

Forsankningen Light (56°07'N., 15°35'E.).

4.47 A church, with two prominent towers, is situated in the town

and a conspicuous radio mast stands 1 mile NNE of it. A conspicuous water tower also stands in the vicinity of the town.

4.47 Pilotage.—Pilots are provided by the main station at Karlshamn. However, all ordering of pilots and traffic information

is carried out by VTS Malmo (see paragraph 1.18). Vessel must

send an ETA and a request for pilotage at least 12 hours and 5

hours prior to arrival. For details of compulsory pilotage in this

area, see Karlshamn (paragraph 4.42). Pilots can be contacted

on VHF channel 18, and board in the vicinity of the Karlskrona

Angoring Lighted Buoy (56°03'N., 15°33E.). 

4.47 For additional information concerning the initial ordering of

pilots, see paragraph 1.1 and paragraph 4.1.

4.47 Regulations.—Inbound vessels of over 200 grt or over 40m

in length (including towing vessels with a combined length of

over 40m) must report 30 minutes prior to arrival at the quay

on VHF channel 18 to Karlshamn Pilots. 

4.47 Tankers may not be underway in the port when passenger

ships over 50m in length or other vessels over 70m in length

are also underway in the port.

4.47 The port of Karlskrona can be contacted on VHF channels

14 and 16 

4.47 Swedish Sea Surveillance and Traffic Centero gather and

study information pertinent to all activities at sea. The centers

monitor VHF channel 16 continuously concerning matters

occurring in the vicinity of Karlskrona (56°10'N., 15°35'E.)

and covering the area from Vastervik to Ystad (55°26'N.,

13°50'E.).

4.47 Within Swedish waters, Restructed Military Areas have been

established to guard defence installations and significant places

of Swedish defense. 

4.47 Normally, in peacetime, foreign citizens and foreign vessels

have freedom of access and the right to remain in these areas

without the need for special permission. However, in times of

military preparedness, Swedish statute, special regulations, and

restrictions apply. Details of which are announced in the

Swedish Notices to Mariners. 

4.47 Karlskrona restricted area covers all the approaches to the

port and the the islands of Hasslo (56°06'N., 15°27'E.)on the W

side, on the E and SE to include Sturko (56°06'N., 15°40'E.)

and Utlangan (56°01'N., 15°47'E.).

4.47 Anchorage.—Good and sheltered anchorage can be taken,

in depths of 7 to 22m, mud and clay, within Yttre Redden, the

outer roadstead, which lies between the N part of Aspo and the

N part of Tjurko. Local knowledge is required.

4.47 Caution.—Several submarine cables, which may best be

seen on the chart, lie in the vicinity of the anchorage and across

the entrance channels.

4.47 The approaches to the port lie within a restricted area.

Foreign vessels must not enter the entrance channels without

prior permission. See Pub. 140, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent Seas for further

details.

4.47 Within the archipelago fronting the port, several secondary

channels, which lead to the inner harbors and loading places,

are fitted with submarine barriers. These channels may be

closed for military reasons, if required, and anchoring and fishing are prohibited within them.

Karlskorna Home Page

http://www.karlskrona.se
136 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

4.47 Local magnetic disturbances have been reported in the

approaches to the port.

4.47 Several gunnery practice areas lie in the W and S approaches

to Karlskrona and extend up to 20 miles seaward. In addition,

torpedo firing exercises are conducted on ranges lying in the

approaches to the port. These ranges and areas are marked by

buoys and floats. Red flags and red lights are displayed from

the floats during firing. The local authorities or coastal radio

stations should be contacted for information concerning firings.

4.48 Utlangan (56°01'N., 15°47'E.), a low and bare island,

lies 3.5 miles SSW of Torhamnsudde. A light is shown from a

prominent tower, 13m high, standing on the S extremity of this

island. Foul ground and rocks extend up to about 0.5 mile S of

the island and are marked by a lighted buoy, moored 1.2 miles

SSE of the light.

4.48 Klotet, a dangerous rock, lies close SSE of the S extremity of

Utlangan and is generally marked by breakers.

4.48 Langoren (56°04'N., 15°50'E.), an island, lies 1.5 miles

NNE of Utlangan and about 1 mile SW of Torhamsudde. The E

and inshore approach channel leading to Karlskrona passes N

and NW of this island. A conspicuous beacon, 21m high,

stands on this island. 

4.48 Utklippan (Utklipporna) (55°57'N., 15°42'E.), formed by a

group of rocks, lies 8.5 miles SW of Torhamnsudde and is the

outermost danger in this vicinity. A small and shallow fishing

harbor is situated between the two larger rocks of the group

and is protected by two breakwaters. A light is shown from a

prominent framework tower, 30m high, standing on an old fort

which surmounts a rock at the S end of the group.

4.48 An area of shoals, with depths of less than 7m, extends up to

2.3 miles N and E of the group. 

4.48 Torhamnsudde (56°04'N., 15°51'E.) is a bare point located

4 miles NNE of Utlangan Light. A church, with a spire, stands

l.2 miles NNE of this point and is conspicuous from seaward.

4.48 Torhamn, a small and shallow fishing harbor, is situated 1.5

miles NW of the point and is formed by two breakwaters. A

conspicuous radio mast stands at an elevation of 132m about 3

miles N of the harbor.

4.48 Caution.—An explosives dumping area, which may best be

seen on the chart, lies centered 1.4 miles ESE of Utklippan

Light.

4.48 A small unexploded ordnance areas, which may best be seen

on the chart, lies about 2.3 miles W of Utklippan Light.

4.48 A large unexploded ordnance area, the limits of which may

best be seen on the chart, lies centered 4.5 miles NW of

Utklippan Light.

4.48 Large vessels are advised to stay at least 4 miles S of Utklippan Light when transiting this past of the coast.

Bornholm (Denmark)

4.49 Bornholm (55°00'N., 15°00'E.), a prominent island,

lies in the Baltic Sea about 20 miles ESE of Sandhammaren

and close to many navigational routes. The coasts of the island

have few indentations and generally rise steeply from the shore

except at the S extremity which is low and sandy. They are

fringed by coastal reefs which are steep-to, except off the SW

side.

4.49 The terrain rises inland to a wooded summit, 160m high,

which stands near the middle of the island. A prominent monument, 12m high, surmounts the summit and rises above an area

of trees. A conspicuous radio mast stands 2.5 miles NNW of

the monument and a conspicuous television tower is situated

0.5 mile NNE of it.

4.49 During the summer months, it is common for winds to be of

greater force on the lee side of the island than on the windward

side. At times, it is calm on the windward side while moderate

winds blow on the lee side. These conditions are reversed in

autumn and winter.

4.49 There are no tidal currents along the coasts of the island.

Currents generally follow the direction of the wind and their

rates are negligible. Predominant W and SW winds sometimes

produce a weak surface current. Fresh NW winds, blowing off

the N end of the island, sometimes cause strong currents which

set to the S. These can be dangerous in foggy weather. Water

levels in the vicinity of the island are usually raised by E winds

and lowered by W winds.

4.49 Pilotage.—Deep Sea (Transit) Pilots for vessels entering and

leaving the Baltic Sea are stationed at Bornholm and board

vessels off Hammer Odde, the N extremity of the island. They

are arranged through the DanPilot station, For further information, see Pilotage in paragraph 1.1.

4.49 Caution.—Bornholmsgat TSS, an extensive traffic scheme,

is situated in the passage lying between Bornholm and the

Swedish mainland. A Deep Water Route, which may best be

seen on the chart, extends NE from the NE end of this TSS. For

further information, see paragraph 4.1. 

4.49 Local magnetic disturbances have been reported in the vicinity of Bornholm. It was reported that a compass needle had

been deflected up to 6° in the waters lying off the N coast of

the island.

4.49 Several small danger areas lie off the N and E coasts of

Bornholm and may best be seen on the chart. Anchoring and

fishing are prohibited in these areas due to the residual danger

from bottom mines, gas canisters, and aircraft wreckage.

4.49 Two small prohibited areas, dangerous on account of mines,

lie off the SW coast of Bornholm and may best be seen on the

chart.

4.49 Several wrecks, some dangerous, lie off the coast of Bornholm and may best be seen on the chart.

Utklippan Light
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 137

Pub. 194

4.49 Several submarine cables extend seaward from the W and S

sides of Bornholm and may best be seen on the chart.

4.49 The W coast of Bornholm can be least hospitable during W

prevailing winds, where reefs and rocks front the shore,

especially in the S part. 

4.50 Hammer Odde (55°18'N., 14°46'E.), the N extremity

of Bornholm, is backed by steep cliffs. It appears as a low island from the E and W and is reported to be difficult to distinguish at night. A light is shown from a prominent tower,

12m high, standing on the point.

4.50 Davids Banke (55°22'N., 14°41'E.) lies about 5 miles NW

of Hammer Odde. This isolated bank has a least depth of 11m

and is formed by stones, sand, and gravel.

Hammaren, the N and rocky part of the island, consists of a

hill, 82m high, which rises 1 mile S of Hammer Odde. This hill

is steep-to on its SW side, but slopes gradually to the NE and is

separated from the land in the vicinity by a valley. A disused

round light structure, 21m high, stands near the highest part of

the hill. It is prominent, but obscured from the S.

4.50 The W coast of the island extends 12 miles S to Ronne and

the narrow foreshore is backed, in places, by steep cliffs up to

about 90m high. The S part of this stretch of coast is partly

wooded, low, and sandy.

4.50 Hammerhavnen, a small harbor, lies at the head of a bight

situated close SW of hammer Odde. It is formed by two breakwaters and used by fishing vessels. The entrance, which faces

W, is 30m wide and has a controlling depth of 3.5m, but is

subject to silting. Anchorage can be taken within the bight, in

depths up to 12m, sand and gravel, close offshore, about 0.3

mile S of the harbor. Local knowledge is required.

4.50 Vang (55°15'N., 14°44'E.), a small fishing harbor, is situated

3.4 miles SSW of Hammer Odde. It is formed by two breakwaters and has a controlling depth of 3m.

4.50 A pier, 150m long, is situated 0.3 mile SW of the harbor and

is protected by a breakwater. It is used by vessels loading

granite. The berths at the NW corner of the pier have depths of

5.7 to 7.5m alongside. Vessels up to 100m in length and 15m

beam can be handled.

4.50 Teglkas, a shallow boat harbor, lies 2 miles S of Vang and is

protected by breakwaters. A very conspicuous church, with a

tower, is situated at Rutskirke, 1.4 miles ESE of this harbor.

The church stands on a hill, 130m high, and a small belfry is

located close SW of it.

4.51 Hasle (55°11'N., 14°42'E.) (World Port Index No.

29120), a small and sheltered harbor, is situated 5 miles N of

Ronne. It is protected by two breakwaters and consists of five

basins. Three basins are used by only small craft, fishing

vessels, and pleasure boats. An entrance channel leads E to the

harbor and is indicated by a lighted range. The entrance is 80m

wide and has a depth of 5.5m. Two basins, with depths of 4m

and 5m, provide facilities for commercial vessels. Vessels up to

75m in length, 12m beam, and 4.5m draft can be accommodated.

4.51 A prominent silo stands in the inner part of the harbor. A

prominent church, with a black steeple, is situated in the

middle of the town. A windmill and a wind generator, both

conspicuous, are situated close S and close N, respectively, of

the town.

4.51 Hvideodde (55°07'N., 14°42'E.), a sandy point, is located

1.5 miles N of Ronne. Reefs and sunken rocks extend up to

about 1 mile seaward of this point and are marked by a buoy.

4.51 Anchorage.—During offshore winds, anchorage may be

taken anywhere off the W coast of the island between Hastle

and Hammeren, 6 miles N, in depths of 20 to 30m. Vessels

must leave if the winds shift to the W. Vessels should not

anchor along this coast any farther to the S due to the rocky and

uneven bottom.

4.51 Caution.—Powerful working lights are shown from quarries

situated along this stretch of the coast and should not be

mistaken for navigational lights.

Ronne (55°06'N., 14°42'E.)

World Port Index No. 29110

4.52 Ronne, lying at the SW extremity of Bornholm, is the

principal town and port of the island. The harbor is protected

by two extensive outer breakwaters and two inner ones.

4.52 Ice.—Ice impedes vessels only in severe winters. Normally,

ice appears in the harbor in late January and disappears in late

February.

4.52 Tides—Currents.—The currents are weak and depend on

the direction and force of the winds. The water level rises up to

1.2m with E winds and falls by as much as 0.9m with W winds.

Hammer Odde Light

Ronne
138 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

4.52 Depths—Limitations.—A marina, used by yachts and small

craft, is situated close N of the main harbor.

4.52 The entrance channel leading to the main harbor passes

through several off-lying dangers and obstructions. It leads

ENE and has a dredged depth of 9m.

4.52 The central and inner parts of the harbor have dredged

depths of 8.5m and 7m, respectively. Three basins on the N

side of the harbor provide 1,400m of quayage and have depths

of 5 to 7m alongside. An oil berth, lying on the S side of the

inner harbor, is 110m long and has a depth of 7m alongside. A

new quay, on the S side of the central part, is 250m long and

has a depth of 8.5m alongside. There are facilities for general

cargo, container, bulk, ro-ro, cruise, ferry, tanker, and fishing

vessels. Vessels of up to 200m in length and 8m draft can be

accommodated.

4.52 Aspect.—An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about 2

miles SW of the harbor entrance. The entrance fairway is indicated by a lighted range and obstructions lying adjacent to it

are marked by buoys.

4.52 Knudskirke, a granite building with a tower, stands on a hill,

70m high, which rises 2 miles ENE of the town. It is very

conspicuous from seaward. A low, whitewashed building and a

prominent chimney are situated 2 miles NNE and 1 mile NW,

respectively, of Knudskirke. A conspicuous radio mast stands

2.3 miles NW of Knudskirke.

4.52 A prominent white church, with a red roof and a black

steeple, stands near the NE end of the harbor; another prominent gray church, with a red roof and a steeple, is situated

close NE of it. A conspicuous castle, circular with a red roof, is

situated 0.4 mile S of the white church and a tall chimney

stands close NE of it. Another tall chimney is reported to stand

about 1.5 miles NE of the white church.

4.52 An aeronautical light is shown from a prominent mast standing 7 miles ENE of the harbor.

4.52 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for tankers over 1,500

dwt and recommended for all vessels without local knowledge.

Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board in the vicinity of the

outer approach lighted buoy. For further information, see Pilotage in paragraph 1.1.

4.52 Generally, vessels should send an ETA and request for

pilotage 12 hours and 3 hours in advance. Vessels should then

contact the port on VHF at least 1 hour in advance and 15

minutes prior to arrival. Radar assistance for entering is available from the pilot station.

4.52 Ronne can be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

4.52 Anchorage.—The rocky, uneven bottom in the vicinity of

the port makes anchoring somewhat untenable. It is reported

that vessels can anchor, in depths of 15 to 16m, about 0.6 mile

W of the N outer breakwater head. However, this roadstead is

not safe during strong W winds.

4.53 Galgelokkeodde (55°05'N., 14°48'E.), the SW extremity of Bornholm, consists of steep, high cliffs rising close

S of Ronne. The SW coast of the island is mostly formed of

cliffs, 12 to 18m high, and wooded in parts. It is fringed by

shoals and rocky patches. Arnager, a shallow fishing boat harbor, is situated 3 miles SE of Galgelokkeodde.

4.53 A prominent aeronautical light is shown from the control

tower, 24m high and yellow, of an airport situated 0.8 mile ESE

of Galgelokkeodde.

havn@roennehavn.dk
Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 139

Pub. 194

4.53 Bakkegrund (54°59'N., 14°45'E.), a reef, lies 5 miles

offshore and has a least depth of 5m. It is located at the outer

edge of a shoal area extending S from the coast and is marked

by a buoy. Vessels without local knowledge should pass S of

this reef and the shoal area.

4.53 Ronne Bank (54°55'N., 14°39'E.), with variable depths of

11 to 19m, extends up to about 25 miles SW from the SW side

of the island. Several sunken wrecks and patches of foul

ground lie on this bank and it should be avoided by deep-draft

vessels.

4.53 Adlergrund (54°47'N., 14°21'E.), a shoal area lying on

Ronne Bank, is centered 22 miles SW of Ronne. It has a bottom of rocks and stones and depths of 6 to 11m.

4.53 Raghammer Odde (55°01'N., 14°56'E.), located 9 miles SE

of Ronne, is a point marked by a tower, 18m high, from which

firing exercise signals are displayed. A prominent windmill

stands 1.7 miles ENE of the point.

4.53 Bakkerne, a shallow fishing boat harbor, lies 2 miles SE of

Raghammer Odde.

4.53 Dueodde (54°59'N., 15°05'E.), a low and sandy point, forms

the SE extremity of Bornholm. It is fronted by an area of

shallow, shifting sands which extends up to 1.5 miles seaward

and is steep-to. A light is shown from a prominent tower, 47m

high, standing 0.2 mile N of the point. A prominent disused

light tower, 39m high, stands 0.8 mile N of the point. A prominent white building, with a detached belfry, stands 2.5 miles

NNW of the point. 

4.53 Anchorage, protected from N and NW winds, can be taken,

in depths up to 15m, sand, close E of Dueodde, but winds from

the W raise a heavy swell.

4.53 Caution.—It is reported that Arkona Becken survey

platform (54°47.2'N., 14°10.2'E.), equipped with AIS, has

been established off the W side of Adlergrund.

4.53 Firing exercises are carried out within an area, marked by

buoys, which extends up to 2.5 miles offshore in the vicinity of

Raghammer Odde. When this area is in use, passage through

that part of it lying within Danish territorial waters, is

prohibited. See Pub. 140, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

North Atlantic Ocean and the Adjacent Seas for further details.

4.54 The rocky and cliffy E coast of the island extends

NNE from Dueodde and is fringed by reefs. Winds from the

NE raise the water level along this coast by up to 0.3 to 0.6m

and winds from the SW lower it by the same amount.

4.54 Nekso (Nexo) (55°04'N., 15°08'E.) (World Port Index No.

29085), a small and sheltered harbor, is situated about 4.5

miles NE of Dueodde and mostly used by fishing vessels. It is

protected by two moles and consists of a series of connected

basins. The entrance channel, which leads SW, is indicated by

a lighted range and has a least depth of 5m. A commercial

basin, with quays, is situated at the N side of the harbor and has

a depth of 5m. Vessels up to 78m in length, 21m beam, and

4.5m draft can be accommodated.

4.54 The harbormaster acts as a pilot. Local knowledge is advised. The harbor can be contacted by VHF and requests for

pilotage, with an ETA, must be sent 24 hours, 12 hours, and 4

hours in advance. At times, a current, with a rate of up to 1.5

knots, sets across the entrance and may affect steering.

4.54 Good anchorage can be taken, in depths of 13 to 15m, about

0.5 mile off the harbor. The bottom is uneven and rocky in

some places, but the holding ground is generally good and the

swell is low. This roadstead is reported to be the best along the

E coast of the island.

4.54 Sandkasodde (55°08'N., 15°09'E.) is the southernmost of

three salient points projecting seaward from the promontory

which forms the NE extremity of Bornholm. Svaneke Light is

shown from a prominent tower, 18m high, standing on the

point.

4.54 Arsdale, a small and shallow fishing harbor, lies at the head

of a bight, about 2 miles S of Sandkasodde. Two conspicuous

white windmills stand close N of the town and a white church,

with a tower, stands 2.3 miles W of them. Anchorage can be

taken, in depths of 8 to 11m, good holding ground, S of this

harbor, but onshore winds raise a sea and swell.

4.55 Svaneke (55°08'N., 15°09'E.), a small town, stands

on the promontory close NW of Sandkasodde. It is fronted by a

small harbor, which is protected by two breakwaters and mostly used by fishing vessels. The entrance channel, which leads

WNW, has a least depth of 4.4m and is indicated by a lighted

range. The harbor consists of two basins. The outer basin has a

depth of 4.4m; the inner basin, which is entered through a lock

Dueodde Light

Svaneke Light (Sandkasodde)
140 Sector 4. Germany—Fehmarn Belt to Kap Arkona and Sweden—South Coast 

Pub. 194

gate, has a depth of 3.5m. There is a commercial quay, 231m

long, with a depth of 4.4m alongside. Vessels up to 45m in

length, 8.5m beam, and 4m draft can be accommodated. 

4.55 Local knowledge is advised and local pilots are available

during the day. The harbor can be contacted by VHF and vessels requesting pilotage must send an ETA 24 hours, 12 hours,

and 4 hours in advance.

The NE coast of Bornholm is rocky and steep-to. The shore

is fringed by narrow beaches and backed by high, steep cliffs.

4.55 Listed (55°09'N., 15°07'E.), a small craft harbor, is situated

about 2 miles NW of Sandkasodde and formed by two breakwaters. It consists of four basins which have depths up to 3m.

The harbor is sheltered and fronted by several sunken rocks

and reefs. The entrance, which is 10m wide, should by approached from the N, but local knowledge is essential.

4.55 Gudhjem (55°13'N., 14°58'E.), situated about 8 miles NW

of Sandkasodde, consists of two small harbors. They lie close S

and close N of Sorteodde, the E extremity of a small protruding

peninsula, which is 80m high. The S harbor is mostly used by

fishing vessels and consists of three basins with depths of 2.5

to 4m. It can handle small craft of up to 40m in length and

3.8m draft. The fairway is indicated by a lighted range and

leads SSW to the entrance which is only 11m wide. A church

and a windmill, without sails, stand near this harbor.

4.55 The N harbor, known as Norresand Havn, is also mostly used

by fishing vessels. It consists of a single basin, with a depth of

3.6m, and should be approached from the NW.

4.55 Melsted, a small boat harbor, lies 0.5 mile SSE of the S

harbor. Anchorage, with local knowledge, can be obtained, in

depths of 9 to 13m, on the bank lying SE of this harbor.

4.56 Tejn (55°15'N., 14°50'E.) (World Port Index No.

29040), a sheltered harbor, is situated about 4 miles SSE of

Hammer Odde. It is formed by a mole and a breakwater. The

harbor consists of five basins, with depths of 2.2 to 5m, and is

used by fishing vessels and yachts. Local knowledge is advised. The entrance fairway leads SSE and is indicated by a

lighted range. Anchorage, with offshore winds, can be taken, in

depths of 11 to 13m, about 0.6 mile N of the harbor.

4.56 Allinge (55°17'N., 14°48'E.), a small harbor, is situated 1.8

miles SSE of Hammer Odde and protected by breakwaters. It

consists of two basins, connected by a lock gate, and has

depths of up to 4.5m. Small craft of up to 60m in length, 11.5m

beam, and 4.3m draft can be accommodated. A church, with a

tower, and a windmill stand in the village, but are reported to

be only distinguishable from a short distance. The approach

fairway leads SW and is indicated by range beacons. Local

knowledge is advised. 

4.56 Kampelokkehavnen, a small and shallow boat harbor, lies

close N of Allinge.

Christianso (Denmark)

4.57 Christianso (55°19'N., 15°11'E.), a small group of islets, lies 10 miles NE of Bornholm and consists of Christianso, Frederikso, Graesholm, and Tat. The group is surrounded by several rocks, reefs, and shoals and should only be

approached by vessels with local knowledge.

4.57 The currents setting within the various narrow passages

which lead between the islets attain considerable rates during

stormy weather. The direction of these currents is governed by

that of the wind and current in the Baltic Sea.

4.57 Christianso, the largest islet, is 22m high. A light is shown

from a tower, 16m high, surmounting a very conspicuous fort

which stands on the W side of this islet.

4.57 Frederikso lies close W of Christianso; a light is shown from

a prominent white house, 3m high, standing on its E side. A

conspicuous tower, with a pointed roof, stands on the N side of

this islet.

4.57 Graesholm lies close N of Frederikso and is 10m high. Tat

lies 0.5 mile NNW of Graesholm and is 6m high. A light is

shown from a tower, 2m high, standing on this islet.

4.58 Christianso Harbor (55°19'N., 15°11'E.) (World

Port Index No. 29130) lies within the narrow sound leading

between Christianso and Frederikso. It is divided into two parts

by a bridge which connects the two islets. The bridge, when

open, allows small vessels with drafts of up to 4m to pass

through.

The harbor affords refuge and shelter from stormy weather,

except S gales. However, entry into the harbor is usually

restricted to small craft because of its constriction. A local pilot

is available and, on request by VHF, will embark close seaward

of the entrance fairway.

4.58 Caution.—It is reported (1991) that the area lying within 1

mile of the group has been designated as a bird protection

zone. Within this zone, a speed limit of 12 knots applies and

vessels should keep at least 100m from the outer islets.

4.58 Several small danger areas lie in the vicinity of Christianso

and may best be seen on the chart. Anchoring and fishing are

prohibited in these areas due to the residual danger from bottom mines.Karlskrona (56°10'N., 15°35'E.) and covering the

area from Vastervik to Ystad (55°26'N., 13°50'E.).

Christiano Light
141

Pub. 194

5. 

Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund and Oland

5.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 5 — CHART INFORMATION
143

Pub. 194

SECTOR 5 

SWEDEN—EAST COAST—KALMARSUND AND OLAND

5.0 Plan.—This sector describes Kalmarsund and its approaches, the contiguous mainland between Torhamnsudde and

Krakelund, and the island of Oland. The descriptive sequence

is from S to N. 

General Remarks

5.1 The coasts of the mainland and Oland are low and

often barren, especially the E coast of Oland, where the absence of landmarks on a very low coast makes it easy to overestimate the distance offshore. The variable depths of the

shoals and patches lying in the approaches to Kalmarsund are a

valuable adjunct to safe navigation during fog.

5.1 Anchorage can be taken, in sand and clay, almost anywhere

in the S part of Kalmarsund and off the N part of Oland, but the

N section of Kalmarsund affords unreliable anchorage.

5.1 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory in Swedish coastal waters

and along certain fairways connecting ports along the coast.

The vessels subject to compulsory pilotage vary in type and

size according to location; these vessels are divided into the

following categories: 

1. Category 1—Vessels carrying or with uncleaned tanks

which last carried:

a. Liquefied gas.

b. Liquid chemicals defined in MARPOL73 Supplement 2, Annex 2 as category A, B, or (if vessel does not

have a double-skin hull under all cargo tanks) C.

c. Liquid chemicals which, according to the IMO bulk

chemical code, should be carried in Type 1 or 2 vessels. 

2. Category 2—All other chemical tankers which are

laden or have uncleaned tanks and all laden oil tankers.

3. Category 3—All other vessels. 

5.1 Pilots can be obtained from the main stations at Kalmar, Oskarshamn, and Vastervik for the smaller harbors located along

the coast. For further information, see paragraph 5.6.

5.1 It should be noted that extensive changes to pilotage

procedures within Swedish waters are being carried out. Formerly, all initial ordering of pilots was carried out through the

main VTS systems. However, procedures for the initial ordering of pilots via the Swedish Vessel Reporting System (FRS)

on the Swedish Maritime Administration internet website are

being introduced. In exceptional cases, pilots may be ordered

by e-mail, telephone, facsimile, or VHF. A preliminary request

for pilotage should be made at least 24 hours in advance. A

definitive request for pilotage must be made via the Pilot

Request System at least 5 hours in advance.

5.1 It is reported that initial ordering of pilots for The Sound and

all ports located S and W of Vastervik (57°46'N., 16°39'E.) will

be carried out via the Swedish Vessel Reporting System (FRS)

on the Swedish Maritime Administration internet website.

5.1 For additional information, see the following web site:

5.1 Regulations.—An IMO-adopted Area to be Avoided, the

limits of which may best be seen on the chart, has been established in the vicinity of Norra Midsjobanken (56°14'N.,

17°24'E.), an extensive shoal bank.

Directions—Offshore Routes.—Olands Sodra Grund TSS,,

which may best be seen on the chart, lies centered 12 miles SE

of the S extremity of Oland in the vicinity of Olands Sodra

Grund Light. This TSS is IMO-adopted. An Inshore Traffic

Zone Area lies between the SE end of Oland and the TSS.

Vessels proceeding to the Gulf of Finland should steer NE

for about 72 miles from Olands Sodra Grund TSS to the Off

Gotland Island TSS, which is centered 11 miles SE of Hoburg

Light (56°55'N., 18°09'E.). They should pass NW of the Norra

Midsjobanken Area to be Avoided.

For further route information, see paragraph 4.1 and paragraph 6.1.

5.1 Baltic Deep Water Route.—A Deep Water Route, recommended for vessels with drafts over 12m, has been established

for shipping proceeding to the NE part of the Baltic Sea and

may best be seen on the chart. It extends ENE and NE from the

E end of the Bornholmsgat TSS to the S end of the TSS lying

centered 20 miles NW of Kopu Light (58°55'N., 22°12'E.). The

route passes 13 miles S of Olands Sodra Grund Light and SE of

the Norra Midsjobanken Area to be Avoided.

5.1 It is reported that this recommended route has a least depth

of 25m and is recommended for vessels with drafts up to 15m.

5.1 For further information, see paragraph 4.1 and paragraph

6.1. 

Off-lying Shoals and Dangers

5.2 Olands Sodra Grund (56°04'N., 16°41'E.), a large

shoal, lies 12 miles SE of the S extremity of Oland and has

depths of 10 to 16m. A light is shown from a prominent

floodlit tower, 35m high, standing near the center of the shoal.

A racon is situated at the light.

5.2 Norra Midsjobanken (56°14'N., 17°24'E.), an extensive deSwedish Maritime Administration Home Page

http://www.sjofartsverket.se

Olands Sodra Grund Light
144 Sector 5. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund and Oland 

Pub. 194

tached bank, lies centered 33 miles E of the S end of Oland and

has a least depth of 9.8m (see Regulations in paragraph 5.1).

5.2 Sodra Midsjobanken (55°40'N., 17°25'E.) lies between 30

and 40 miles SE of the S end of Oland. This extensive detached

bank has a least depth of 11m and a number of dangerous

wrecks lie in its vicinity.

5.2 Knolls Grund (57°33'N., 17°28'E.), an extensive rocky

shoal patch, lies centered 16 miles NE of the N end of Oland. It

has a least depth of 9m and is marked by a lighted buoy.

5.2 Caution.—In cloudy and hazy weather, the E coast of Oland

should be given a wide berth as there are no landmarks.

5.2 Local magnetic disturbances are reported to exist off the N

entrance of Kalmarsund.

5.2 Areas of unexploded ordnance, which may best be seen on

the chart, lie about 14 miles SW and 19 miles SSE of the S

extremity of Oland.

5.2 The small harbors situated along the coasts of Oland are

subject to silting. 

Kalmarsund

5.3 Kalmarsund is a navigable passage, 85 miles long,

that separates Oland from the mainland. This sound is about 12

miles wide at its S and N entrances. Due to several islets and

shoals lying near the middle of the sound, the navigable passage is reduced to a width of 1.7 miles. The main channel

fairway and adjacent dangers are marked, except during the ice

season, by buoys and beacons.

5.3 Kalmarsunds Djupranna (56°40'N., 16°24'E.), a main

channel, leads through the narrow central part of the passage

and can be used by vessels up to 7m draft. The fairway within

this channel has a bottom width of 80m and a least dredged

depth of 7.7m over a width of 60m. It is marked by buoys and

is the most constricted passage. Branch channels lead from

Kalmarsunds Djupranna to harbors lying E and W of the main

passage.

5.4 Utgrunden (56°22'N., 16°15'E.), a chain of shoal

patches, lies close E of the middle of the sound and has a least

depth of 3m. It is centered 10 miles NNW of the S extremity of

Oland and can be passed on either side. The main fairway lies

to the W of the chain. A light is shown from a prominent tower,

28m high, standing at the N end of the chain. A racon is

situated at the light.

5.4 It is reported that the northernmost wind generator of a

group of seven stands on the shoal 1.5 miles SSE of Utgrunden Light. These conspicuous wind generators are 65m

high and stand in a line about 1 mile long.

5.4 Mittgrunden (56°28'N., 16°15'E.), a patch of shoals, has a

least depth of 6.4m and is marked by buoys. Its S end lies about

3 miles N of Utgrunden Light and the patch is a N extension of

Utgrunden.

5.4 Tradgardsgrund (56°38'N., 16°22'E.), a shoal with a least

depth of 3.9m, lies on the E edge of the fairway, about 2.5

miles S of Kalmar, and is marked by a lighted buoy. The fairway, which is marked by buoys, is very constricted in this

vicinity. Reefs, which fringe the coast, converge on the sides of

the channel and, for about 4 miles NNE of Tradgardsgrund,

appear to almost block the fairway.

5.4 Skansgrundet Light (56°39'N., 16°23'E.), situated close SE

of Kalmar, is shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 19m

high, and marks the S end of Kalmarsunde Djupranna. Grimskar, an islet, lies on a shallow shoal close W of the light. A

conspicuous beacon surmounts the islet and a lighted buoy is

moored close E of it.

5.4 Huvudet Light (56°40'N., 16°23'E.), situated 1 mile NNE of

Skansgrundet Light, is shown from a prominent floodlit tower,

7m high. The main fairway in Kalmarsunde Djupranna passes

close ESE of this light.

5.5 Osvallsgrundet Light (56°40'N., 16°23'E.), situated

0.3 mile NNE of Huvudet Light, is shown from a prominent

floodlit tower, 7m high. The main fairway in Kalmarsunde

Djupranna passes close ESE of this light.

5.5 The Olands Bridge (Olandsbron) (56°40'N., 16°28'E.), a

fixed bridge supported by heavy columns, spans Kalmarsunde

Djupranna about 1 mile N of Kalmar harbor and connects the

mainland with the island of Oland. The navigable span over the

main channel has a vertical clearance of 36m and a horizontal

width of 80m. Lights shown from the bridge mark the center

and limits of the fairway and a racon is situated on the center

span.

5.5 Krongrundet (56°41'N., 16°24'E.), a shoal with a least

depth of 2m, lies at the NE end of Kalmarsunds Djupranna. A

light is shown from a prominent tower, 11m high, standing on

the NW part of this shoal.

5.5 Masknaggen Light (56°44'N., 16°28'E.) is shown from a

prominent floodlit tower, 11m high, standing on a rock at the S

end of the shoals extending S from Skaggenas. The main

channel passes SE of this light.

5.5 Sillasen (56°46'N., 16°30'E.), a shoal with a least depth of

3m, lies close W of the main channel. A light is shown from a

The Olands Bridge 

The Olands Bridge (Olandsbron)
Sector 5. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund and Oland 145

Pub. 194

prominent floodlit tower, 22m high, standing on the N part of

this shoal. The main fairway lying between Sillasen Light and

Krongrundet Light has a least depth of 9m.

5.5 Slottsbredan (56°56'N., 16°36'E.), a patch of shoals, has a

least depth of 6m and is marked by buoys. It lies E of the main

fairway, about 10 miles NNE of Sillasen. A light is shown from

a prominent floodlit tower, 21m high, standing on the W side

of this patch.

5.5 Damman (57°03'N., 16°42'E.), a patch of shallow shoals,

lies about 8.5 miles NNE of Slottsbredan. A light is shown

from a prominent floodlit tower, 21m high, standing on this

patch. A racon is situated at the light. A conspicuous disused

square light structure stands on a rock, 0.5 mile W of the light.

The main channel leading between Slottsbredan Light and

Damman Light has depths of 9 to 11m, but is closely fringed

by shallow shoals.

Bla Jungfrun (57°15'N., 16°48'E.), a precipitous and conical-shaped island, is 86m high. It lies 12 miles NNE of Damman at the N end of the sound and is the best landmark in this

vicinity when approaching from the N. A light is shown from a

prominent tower, 9m high, standing on the E side of the island.

A prominent disused light tower, 6m high, stands on the W

side.

5.6 Ice.—Ice conditions may occasionally hinder traffic

within Kalmarsund. Generally, ice forms during the middle of

January and starts to melt in March. During severe winters, ice

loosening and melting may not begin until late May. 

Depths—Limitations.—The fairway in the narrows has a

least depth of 7.7m. During daylight, vessels of up to 185m

length, 22m beam, and 7m draft may transit the passage, but

tug assistance may be required. Vessels of over 150m in length

should not navigate in darkness.

5.6 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory within the central part of

Kalmarsund. Pilot boards in the following positions:

5.6 North entrance: near Sillasen (56°46.3'N., 16°30.5'E.) or

near Krongrundet (56°41.7'N., 16°24.6'E.).

5.6 South entrance: near Tradgardsgrund (56°37.4'N.,

16°21.5'E.) or near Utgrunden (56°21.5'N., 16°14.3'E.).

5.6 All pilot engagement and traffic information is carried out by

Malmo VTS. 

5.6 The Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system at Malmo coordinates and administers all pilotage services within the Oresund

and Kalmarsund Maritime Area (see paragraph 1.18). 

5.6 The VTS center at Malmo may be contacted by e-mail, as

follows:

5.6 Pilotage for Helsingborg, Kalshamn, Kalmar, Oskarshamn,

and Vastervik is arranged also through Malmo VTS. 

5.6 Pilotage requests are made in cordination with the Swedish

Vessel Reporting System (FRS) and the Swedish Maritime Administration. 

5.6 A preliminary request for the pilot must be made through the

FRS at least 24 hours in advance; a confirmation ETA should

be sent at least 5 hours in advance. 

5.6 Pilotage is compulsory for the following vessels (see paragraph 5.1):

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. All Category 2 vessels and all Category 3 vessels of

70m length, 14m beam, and 4.5m draft and over.

5.6 Pilots for Kalmarsund can be contacted by VHF and board

vessels approaching from the S about 1 mile SSW of Utgrunden. They board vessels approaching from the N about 1 mile

E of Vastervik Approach Lighted Buoy (57°45'N., 16°55'E.),

or 4 miles SSW of Kungsgrundet (57°41'N., 16°55'E.), or S of

Furo (57°17'N., 16°38'E.).

5.6 Pilots for Kalmar harbor can be contacted on VHF channel

13 and board vessels from the S off Tradgardsgrund (56°38'N.,

16°22'E.). They board vessels from the N near Sillasen

(56°46'N., 16°30'E.) or Krongrundet (56°41'N., 16°24'E.).

5.6 It should be noted that extensive changes to pilotage

procedures within Swedish waters are being carried out. Formerly, all initial ordering of pilots was carried out through the

main VTS systems. However, procedures for the initial ordering of pilots via the Swedish Vessel Reporting System (FRS)

on the Swedish Maritime Administration internet web site are

now introduced. For additional information, see paragraph 5.1.

5.6 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system operates in the central part of Karmarsund. This VTS system (call:

VTS Kalmarsund) is mandatory for the following:

1. All vessels over 300 grt.

2. All vessels over 45m in length.

3. All vessels towing, with a combined length of over

45m.

5.6 Vessels entering Kalmar harbor or passing through Kalmarsund should report to Kalmarsund VTS on VHF channel 13

when passing a position located 1 mile N of Sillasen Light

(56°46'N., 16°30'E.) and when passing Hagbygrundet

(56°32'N., 16°18'E.). The report must state the vessel’s name,

call sign, position, intended route, and destination.

5.6 Vessels must maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF

channel 13 when proceeding between the two reporting points.

They must also contact Kalmarsund VTS upon arrival at and

immediately before departing from a berth, on anchoring or

weighing anchor, on changing their route, on being involved in

an accident or grounding, or to report any navigational concerns which might affect the safety of navigation.

5.6 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in the S part of Kalmarsund, between the entrance and a position about 3 miles S

of Kalmar. Vessels can anchor in suitable depths with good

holding grounds of sand and clay. In the N part of Kalmarsund,

choppy seas and poor holding grounds make anchoring untenable in stormy weather.

5.6 Directions.—From a position SE of Torhammsudde

(56°04'N,. 15°51'E.), vessels should steer NNE for about 25

miles to the vicinity of Utgrunden Light. The main fairway

passes W of this light. It then leads NNE and passes close W of

Tradgardsgrund and close W of Skansgrundet Light. The route

continues NNE through the Kalmarsunde Djupranna buoyed

channel and under the Olandsbron Bridge to Krondgrundet

Light.

5.6 After passing close WNW of Krondgrundet Light, which

marks the N end of Kalmarsunde Djupranna, the main channel

leads NE and passes SE of Masknaggen Light. It then continues NNE to a position located E of Dammen Light, passing

E of Sillasen Light. From Dammen Light, the route leads NNE

toward Bla Jungfrum. Vessels may pass either side of this island, but the channel leading E of it is preferred. The route then

leads NNE to a position located E of Krakelund.

vtsmalmo@sjofartsverket.se
146 Sector 5. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund and Oland 

Pub. 194

5.6 A short alternate channel leads NE and NNE from the

bridge. It passes E of Krongrundet and then rejoins the main

channel. This fairway has no authorized draft and local knowledge is required.

5.6 A secondary channel, with a least depth of 5m, leads NNE

from close WNW of Krongrundet. It passes NW of Masknaggen Light and close W of Sillasen Light.

5.6 Caution.—Ferry traffic may be encountered within Kalmarsund, especially in the vicinity of Kalmar.

5.6 In the vicinity of Kalmarsunds Djupranna, the current does

not set in the direction of the main channel and, with strong

gales, may attain rates of up to 6 knots.

5.6 Vessels in transit through Kalmarsund should not close the

light structures marking the main channel in depths of less than

10m as their foundations extend into the channel.

5.6 Cloud formations around the summit of Bla Jungfrum and

mirage phenomena frequently make illusory changes in the

appearance of the island. The island is a nature reserve and

landing and approaching are subject to numerous restrictions.

5.6 Numerous submarine cables lie within Kalmarsund and may

best be seen on the chart.

5.7 Swedish mainland.—Torhamnsudde (56°04'N.,

15°51'E.) is described in paragraph 4.48. The coast between

this point and Kalmar is low, partly wooded, and fronted along

its entire length by a shoal bank, with depths of less than 10m,

on which lie numerous islets and shallow rocky patches.

Several churches, with prominent steeples, stand along this

stretch of coast.

5.7 Sandhamn (56°06'N., 15°52'E.), a small harbor, lies on the

W side of an inlet 1.5 miles NNE of Torhamnsudde. It is protected by breakwaters and used by fishing vessels. A lighted

range indicates the entrance channel, which has a controlling

depth of 4m. Svanhalla, a small craft and fishing boat harbor, is

situated 1.5 miles NNE of Sandhamn.

5.7 Orranas, a village, is situated 7.5 miles NNE of Torhamnsudde. Several prominent dwellings stand on a ridge in this

vicinity and a conspicuous windmill surmounts a hill, which

rises 2 miles NE of them.

5.7 A conspicuous group of five wind generators stands about 2

miles offshore, 8.5 mile NNE of Torhamnsudde. These wind

generators are 60m high and stand in a line about 0.8 mile long.

5.7 Kristianopel (56°15'N., 16°03'E.), a shallow harbor, is situated on the E side of a narrow spit of land, 8 miles SSW of

Bergkvara. It is very narrow and used only by small craft. A

conspicuous church, with a high tower, stands in the town.

5.8 Bergkvara (56°23'N., 16°06'E.) (World Port Index

No. 24530), a fishing center and small commercial harbor, is

fronted by several islets, rocks, and reefs.

5.8 Depths—Limitations.—The main approach channel leads

W through the off-lying dangers and has a least depth of 6.1m.

It is narrow and tortuous. A secondary approach channel leads

S to the harbor. It has a least depth of 4m and is only used by

small craft.

5.8 The commercial facilities include Viktoria Quay, which is

110m long and has a depth of 6.1m alongside; Modoquay,

which is 110m long and has a depth of 3.4m alongside; and

Silokajen, which is 175m long and has a depth of 5.1m alongside.

5.8 The harbor has facilities for bulk, general cargo, timber, and

fishing vessels. Vessels up to 150m in length and 5.5m draft

can be accommodated.

5.8 Aspect.—Garpen Light is shown from a prominent tower,

27m high, standing on an islet, which lies 1.2 miles E of the

harbor. A prominent beacon stands on an islet lying 1 mile

WSW of the light. The main approach fairway is indicated by

lighted ranges and marked by buoys.

5.8 A silo, 32m high, stands in the N part of the harbor and is

prominent from seaward.

5.8 Pilotage.—Local knowledge is required. Pilots are provided

by the station at Kalmer but must be ordered through Malmo

VTS (see paragraph 1.18). They may be contacted on VHF

channel 13 and board about 1.7 miles SE of Garpen Light.

5.8 For additional information concerning the initial ordering of

pilots, see paragraph 5.1.

5.8 Caution.—Due to sharp bends in the main approach channel, vessels may find maneuvering difficult, especially at night.

5.9 Ekenas (56°31'N., 16°11'E.), a small harbor and loading place, is situated 8 miles NNE of Bergkvara. It consists of a

pier, 30m long, with depths of 2.7 to 4m alongside. Anchorage

is available off the pier. Local knowledge is required.

5.9 Stenso, a small and shallow fishing harbor, is situated about

10 miles NNE of Ekenas. It lies at the NW side of a small

peninsula which extends S from the S side of Kalmar.

5.9 The coast between Ekenas and Stenso is fronted by

numerous shallow shoals which lie up to 2.5 miles offshore.

Kalmar (56°40'N., 16°22'E.)

World Port Index No. 24570

5.10 Kalmar, situated about 1 miles SW of the Olands

Bridge (see paragraph 5.5), is the principal port within Kalmarsund. A large part of the city stands on Kvarnholmen, an island, which is connected by several bridges to the mainland.

The main harbor lies between the S side of Kvarnholmen and

an artificial peninsula. It is protected at the NE side by a detached breakwater.

Garpen Light (Bergkvara)

Kolmar Home Page

http://www.kalmar.se
Sector 5. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund and Oland 147

Pub. 194

5.10 Winds—Weather.—Strong winds may cause difficult conditions in the approaches and in the main entrance channel.

5.10 Ice.—Icebreakers keep the harbor and approaches open,

even during severe winters.

5.10 Tides—Currents.—With fresh to strong winds, powerful

cross-channel currents may be encountered off the harbor and

S of the S entrance to the main channel.

5.10 Depths—Limitations.—The port can be approached from

N and S through Kalmarsunds Djupranna, with short entrance

channels leading to the harbor. The S entrance channel has a

least depth of 8m and can be used by vessels with drafts up to

7.3m. The N entrance channel has a least depth of 7.7m and

can be used by vessels with drafts up to 7m.

5.10 The main harbor basins provide about 4,000m of total quayage with depths of 4.5 to 7.7m alongside. In addition, an oil

terminal berth is situated at the SE side of the artificial peninsula. It is 90m long has a depth of 7.9m alongside.

5.10 There are facilities for container, tanker, passenger, cruise,

bulk, ferry, and ro-ro vessels. Vessels up to 14,000 dwt, 155m

in length, and 7.3m draft can be accommodated in the main

harbor with entry from S. Tankers up to 30,000 dwt, 185m in

length, 22m beam, and 7.3m draft can be handled at the oil

berth with entry from S. 

5.10 Aspect.—The fairways leading to the harbor are indicated

by lighted ranges. Floodlights illuminate the end of the breakwater at night.

5.10 Prominent landmarks include a cathedral, with four spires,

standing near the center of Kvarnholmen; a tall chimney

situated close E of the cathedral; a lighted water tower standing

0.2 mile WSW of the cathedral; and Kalmar Slott, a castle with

five towers, standing between the S end of Kvarnholmen and

the mainland. A conspicuous silo stands on the N side of the

artificial peninsula.

5.10 An aeronautical light is shown at Berga, which is situated

about 1 mile inland, 2.5 miles NNW of the harbor.

5.10 Pilotage.—Pilots are provided by the station in the port. All

ordering of pilots must be made through Malmo VTS (see

paragraph 1.18). For additional information concerning

pilotage within Kalmarsund, see paragraph 5.6.

5.10 For additional information concerning the initial ordering of

pilots, see paragraph 5.1.

5.10 Regulations.—A mandatory VTS system operates in the

approaches to the port (see paragraph 5.6).

5.10 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as

follows: 

1. Radiotelephone: VHF channels 9,12, and 16

2. E-mail: kalmar.hamn@kommun.kalmar.se

5.10 Anchorage.—Vessels with drafts over 6m can obtain

anchorage, in depths of 8 to 13m, fine sand, about 1 mile S of

Tradgardsgrund Lighted Buoy (56°38'N,. 16°22'E.). A wreck,

with a depth of 7.9m, lies 0.5 mile S of the lighted buoy and

should be avoided.

5.10 Small vessels may anchor, in depths of 5 to 6m, clay, about

0.2 mile SW of Huvudet Light (56°40'N,. 16°23'E.).

5.10 Caution.—Limitations of size are in force for entry at night. 

Kalmar to Oskarshamn

5.11 Between Kalmar and Krakelund, 50 miles NNE, the

coast is low, wooded, and indented by several shallow inlets

with minor harbors at their heads. Foul ground fronts the shore

in places and extends sea-ward to fringe the main fairway

channel running through the sound.

5.11 Skaggenas (56°47'N., 16°28'E.), located 6 miles NNE of

Kalmar, is low and densely wooded. This island is very prominent and may easily be identified by its dark color. Several

structures, including a disued light tower, stand on Revsudde,

its SE extremity. A small and shallow fishing harbor lies 0.3

mile NNW of Revsudde and is protected by a breakwater.

5.11 Pataholm (56°55'N., 16°26'E.), a small loading harbor, lies

at the head of a foul bight, 7.5 miles N of Skaggenas. It is approached from Kalmarsund through a fairway channel available to vessels of up to 1,400 nrt and 3.5m draft. Local

knowledge is essential. 

Timmernabben (Tillingenabben) (56°58'N., 16°26'E.) a

small loading harbor, lies 3 miles N of Pataholm. It is approached from the SW through a fairway, marked by buoys,

which leads between numerous shoals. There is a pier, 90m

long, which provides a berth, about 30m long, with depths of 3

to 3.7m alongside. Small vessels with drafts up to 3m can be

accommodated. Vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in

depths of 8 to 13m, clay, on the NE side of the approach channel. 

5.11 Monsteras (57°02'N., 16°27'E.), a small loading harbor, lies

at the head of an inlet, 23 miles N of Kalmar. Stora Okno is the

E extremity of a peninsula that extends 4 miles SE from the

town. Svartoren, an islet, lies 0.5 mile NE of Stora Okno. A

prominent church and a high chimney stand in the town.

Kavershall, a high hill, rises 2.5 miles NE of the town and is

conspicuous. An approach channel, marked by buoys, leads

from Kalmarsund to the harbor and can be used by small vessels up to 2.8m draft. The inner harbor provides 380m of berthage with a depth of 3m alongside. A jetty, 45m long, has a

berth at its head with a depth of 4.5m alongside. Local knowledge is required. Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 9 to

10m, mud and clay, in the outer roadstead.

Vallo (57°07'N., 16°36'E.), a large island, lies 6 miles NE of

Monsteras and is encircled by foul ground. Its SE part is

densely wooded and prominent from N and S. Sando Orskar,

an islet, lies 1.5 miles NW of Vallo and is marked by a prominent beacon. Runno, an island, lies 2.2 miles NW of Vallo and

a small fishing boat harbor is situated at its W side.

Kungsholmen, an islet, lies 0.4 mile SW of the SW extremity

of Vallo and is covered with tall pine trees. Anchorage can be

taken, in depths of 10 to 12m, mud and clay, about 0.2 mile

NW of this islet, but the roadstead is open to N winds.

5.12 Stora Jatterson (57°06'N., 16°34'E.) (World Port

Index No. 24635), an oil and chemical terminal, is situated 10

Kalmar Slott (Kalmar Castle)
148 Sector 5. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund and Oland 

Pub. 194

miles SSE of Oskarshamn. It consists of an open roadstead

protected by a number of islands and islets on the NE side and

the mainland on the S and SW sides. Three conspicuous chimneys stand at a factory in the town.

5.12 Three approach channels lead to the harbor. A secondary

channel leads W and NW from the vicinity of Damman Light.

It is marked by buoys and can be used by vessels with drafts up

to 4.8m. An alternative channel, with a least depth of only

3.9m, leads N to join the secondary channel at a position

located about 2.5 miles NW of Damman Light. The principal

channel leads SW between Runno and Sando Orskar and then

S between Vallo and the mainland. This fairway, which can be

use by vessels up to 7.5m draft, is indicated by lighted ranges

and marked by buoys. A terminal quay is located close NE of

the factory area. It is 140m long and has a depth of 8m alongside. Vessels up to 150m in length and 7.5m draft can be accommodated.

5.12 Paskallavik (57°10'N., 16°28'E.), a small harbor, lies 6

miles S of Oskarshamn and W of Runno. It is sheltered from

nearly all winds. A prominent church and several factory

chimneys stand in the town. The two approach channels are

tortuous and lead between numerous rocks and detached

shoals. Local knowledge is required. The main fairway channel, which is entered E of Runno, rounds the S part of that

island and then leads NW to the harbor. A pier, 100m long, extends SE from the shore and has depths of 4 to 4.6m alongside.

A quay, located close N of the pier, is 90m long and has a depth

of 5m alongside. Vessels with drafts up to 4.2m can be

accommodated.

5.12 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 4 to 13m, mud and

clay, within a roadstead lying NNE of the harbor. It is reported

that this harbor is seldom used.

Oskarshamn (57°16'N., 16°27'E.)

World Port Index No. 24690

5.13 Oskarshamn is situated at the head of an inlet, 6 miles

N of Paskallavik. It is a commercial port and a ferry terminal.

5.13 Winds—Weather.—The harbor and approaches are seldom

closed by ice. If necessary, icebreakers will keep the channels

open.

5.13 Depths—Limitations.—Several channels lead through the

dangers and obstructions lying in the approaches. The main

channel leads WNW and passes S of Furo Light and N of Stotbotten Light. It has a least depth of 11m.

5.13 A secondary approach channel, which can be used by vessels

with drafts up to 4.6m, leads WSW and SW. It passes N of

Furo Light and joins the main fairway close NW of Stotbotten

Light. 

5.13 The harbor is protected by two detached breakwaters, which

form two entrances. The main entrance is 105m wide.

5.13 Klubbdjupshamnen, the outer NE part of the harbor, provides 350m of quayage with a depth of 11m alongside. In addition, there is an oil jetty with a head, 26m wide, and a depth of

11m alongside.

5.13 The shipyard area, located in the SE part of the harbor, provides 580m of quayage with depths of 3 to 8m alongside.

5.13 Sodra Kajen, located in the SW part of the harbor, provides

440m of quayage with depths of 5 to 7.3m alongside.

5.13 The NW part of the harbor provides 1,100m of quayage with

depths of 4.5 to 8m alongside. The channel leading to the W

and inner part of the harbor can be used by vessels with drafts

up to 7.6m.

5.13 There are facilities for general cargo, ro-ro, container, bulk,

tanker, and ferry vessels. Vessels up to 215m in length and

10.5m draft can be accommodated.

5.13 Aspect.—Rocks, reefs, and numerous detached shoals front

the coast to the N and S of the harbor. Furo (57°17'N.,

16°38'E.), a low and barren island, lies 5 miles E of the harbor

and 0.5 mile N of the main approach channel. It is fringed by

reefs on which the sea breaks.

5.13 Finnrevet Light, shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 16m

high, stands on a reef extending from the SE side of Furo.

5.13 Stotbotten Light, equipped with a racon, is shown from a

prominent floodlit tower, 13m high, standing on the N part of a

shoal, with a least depth of 5m, lying 2.5 miles E of the harbor. 

5.13 The approach channels are marked by buoys and indicated

by lighted ranges.

5.13 A church, a water tower, and several high chimneys stand in

the vicinity of the town and are all very conspicuous. The area

surrounding the town is generally low, wooded, and

featureless.

5.13 Pilotage.—A main pilot station is located at Oskarshamn.

Contact can be made when within range on VHF channel 13

and, pilot boards S of Furo (57°17'N., 16°38'.). This station

provides pilots for several harbors, anchorages, and loading

places situated within Kalmarsund. However, all ordering of

pilots and traffic information is carried out by Malmo VTS (see

paragraph 1.18). Vessels should send an ETA and a request for

pilotage at least 12 hours and 5 hours before arrival. 

5.13 Pilotage for the port is compulsory for the following vessels

(see paragraph 5.1):

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 and 3 vessels of 70m length, 14m beam,

and 4.5m draft and over.

5.13 In certain channels between Furo and the harbor, pilotage is

compulsory for the following:

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 vessels of 80m length or 15m beam and

over.

3. Category 3 vessels of 90m length or 16m beam and

over.

Oskarshamn
Sector 5. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund and Oland 149

Pub. 194

5.13 In certain channels leading to and from Simpevarp, pilotage

is compulsory for the following:

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 and 3 vessels of 80m in length, 15m beam,

and 5m draft and over.

5.13 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board about 1.5 miles

SE of Furo.

5.13 For information concerning pilotage and the VTS system

operating within the central part of Kalmarsund, see paragraph

5.6.

5.13 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 12 to

20m, rock and clay, within a roadstead lying NNE of the harbor.

5.13 Caution—Local magnetic disturbances have been reported

in the outer approaches to the harbor.

Oskarshamn to Krakelund

5.14 The coast between Oskarshamn and Krakelund, 14

miles NE, is of uniform height and wooded. Numerous islands

and islets lie offshore and are low and difficult to distinguish

from seaward. Bla Jungfrun, a conspicuous island, is steep-to

except on its SE side. 

5.14 Saltvik (57°18'N., 16°30'E.), a small timber-loading facility,

lies in an inlet 2.8 miles NE of Oskarshamn. It is approached

via a fairway, authorized for drafts up to 3.6m, which joins the

outer part of the channels leading to Oskarshamn. Local knowledge is required. Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 3 to

8m, clay and mud, in the outer part of the inlet. 

5.14 Figeholm (57°22'N., 16°33'E.) (World Port Index No.

24720), a small harbor, lies at the head of an inlet, 7.5 miles

NNE of Oskarshamn. This inlet is encumbered by numerous

islets and shoals. The entrance channel, which is narrow and

toruous, is marked by buoys and beacons. It is authorized for

drafts up to 4m. Local knowledge is required. This former

loading place is reported to be only used by pleasure craft.

5.14 Simpevard (57°25'N., 16°40'E.) is situated 11 miles NNE of

Oskarshamn and 3 miles SW of Krakelund. This small harbor

serves a nuclear power station which stands close NW of it.

5.14 The harbor consists of a basin, with a depth of 6m, which is

protected by a breakwater, 200m long. An outer approach

lighted buoy is moored about 2.5 miles SE of Krakelund

Beacon. A channel, authorized for drafts up to 5.5m, leads W

from the vicinity of this buoy to the harbor. It is indicated by a

lighted range and marked by buoys. A jetty, with two dolphins,

is situated on the inside of the breakwater and forms a berth,

110m long. A quay, 30m long, is situated at the W side of the

basin and is equipped with a ro-ro ramp.

5.14 A conspicuous chimney stands in the vicinity of the power

station and a prominent radio mast is situated 0.3 mile WNW

of it. 

5.14 Krakelund (57°27'N., 16°43'E.), an island, lies close offshore at the E extremity of Upplango. It is marked by a prominent beacon, 12m high, which, from NE, resembles a yacht

under sail.

Oland

5.15 The island of Oland (56°40'N., 16°37'E.), 77 miles

long, is a popular summer resort. It is generally low and partly

wooded. Alvaret, a mostly barren ridge, extends almost the

entire length of the island and rises to a height of 61m. Numerous reefs and shoals front the shores of this island and extend

up to about 3 miles seaward in places.

5.15 Olands Sodra Udde (56°12'N., 16°24'E.), the S extremity of

Oland, is low and barren, but a wood extends between 1 and 3

miles to the N of it. A light is shown from a conspicuous floodlit tower, 42m high, standing on the point.

5.15 A prominent radio mast stands 3 miles NE of the light and a

prominent beacon is situated on the W coast of the island, 1.7

miles N of the light.

5.15 Olandsrev (56°10'N., 16°24'E.), a shoalbank with depths of

less than 10m, extends up to about 5 miles S from Olands

Sodra Udde and is marked by buoys. The sea breaks on the N

part of this bank.

5.15 Olands Sodra Grund lies 12 miles SE of Olands Sodra Udde

and is described in paragraph 5.2.

5.16 West side.—Gronhogen (56°16'N., 16°24'E.), a

small harbor, is situated 4.3 miles N of Olands Sodra Udde and

is protected by two breakwaters. It is used by coasters and

fishing vessels. The entrance, which is 50m wide, faces SW

and has a controlling depth of 4m. The harbor basin provides

240m of berthage. Small vessels with drafts of up to 3.5m can

be accommodated. Local knowledge is advised.

A prominent church, with a red roof, stands 1.2 miles NNE

of the harbor entrance and a tall chimney is situated at a factory

the N side of the town.

Degerhamn (56°21'N., 16°25'E.) (World Port Index No.

24790), a sheltered harbor, lies 9 miles N of Olands Sodra

Udde and is formed by a long curved breakwater and a short

mole.

5.16 Ice.—During the winter, ice is sometimes set into the harbor

by W winds and berthing is hindered.

5.16 Depths—Limitations.—The entrance, which is 55m wide,

faces SSW and has a controlling depth of 6.5m. The entrance

channel, which is 40m wide, leads NE and NNE to the harbor.

The main commercial quay is 140m long and has a depth of

6.4m alongside. There are facilities for tanker and bulk vessels.

Vessels up to 3,500 dwt, 85m in length, and 5.9m draft can be

accommodated.

5.16 Aspect.—The entrance channel is indicated by lighted

ranges and is marked by buoys.

Olands Sodra Udde Light
150 Sector 5. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund and Oland 

Pub. 194

A prominent church stands on a ridge 0.5 mile E of the harbor. Several prominent silos and two chimneys stand in the

vicinity of the harbor. It is reported that three wind gen-erators,

40m high, stand in the vicinity of the main quay.

5.16 Pilotage.—Local knowledge is required. Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of over 70m in length, 14m beam, or 4.5m

draft. Pilots are provided by the station at Kalmar (see paragraph 5.10). However, all ordering of pilots and traffic information is carried out by Malmo VTS (see paragraph 1.18).

5.16 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 9m,

clay, about 2 miles SW of the harbor, but this roadstead is unsafe in W winds.

5.17 Morbylanga (56°32'N., 16°23'E.) a small harbor, lies

11 miles N of Degerhamn and is sheltered except during W

gales. It is used by coasters and pleasure craft. The harbor is

protected by two breakwaters which form an entrance, 35m

wide. Ice seldom closes this harbor, but S and W gales cause

swells to enter. The entrance channel, which is dredged to a

least depth of 3.8m, leads NW to the entrance. It is marked by

buoys and indicated by a lighted range. The main commercial

quay is 170m long and has a depth of 3.8m alongside. Small

vessels with drafts up to 3.6m can be accommodated. Local

knowledge is advised. A prominent church is situated in the

town and a conspicuous radio mast stands 1.5 miles E of it.

Several prominent buildings and a silo stand on the E side of

the harbor. 

5.17 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 7 to 9m, sand and clay,

about 0.7 mile W of the harbor entrance.

5.17 Farjestaden (56°39'N., 16°28'E.), a small harbor, lies 8

miles NNE of Morbylanga. It is used by coasters, fishing vessels, and small craft. The harbor is protected by two breakwaters which form an entrance, 55m wide. The main approach

channel leads ESE and has a least depth of 4.4m. Local

knowledge is advised. The main commercial berth is 80m long

and has a depth of 4m alongside. Small vessels with drafts of

up to 3.4m can be accommodated. 

5.18 Stora Ror (56°45'N., 16°32'E.), a small harbor, lies 6

miles NNE of Farjestaden and is sheltered except during SW

gales. It is used by coasters and fishing boats. The harbor is

protected by two breakwaters, which form an entrance 30m

wide. The entrance channel leads E and has a least depth of

3.6m. Local knowledge is advised. The main commercial quay

is 40m long and has a depth of 3.4m alongside. Small vessels

with drafts of up to 3m can be accommodated.

Ispeudde Light (56°45'N., 16°31'E.) is shown from a prominent tower, 7m high, standing on a point located 0.8 mile SSW

of Stora Ror.

5.18 Borgholm (56°53'N., 16°39'E.) (World Port Index No.

24760), a small commercial harbor, lies 8.5 miles NE of Stora

Ror and is protected by two breakwaters. Ice may close this

harbor during January and February. The main entrance channel, which has a least depth of 5m, leads ESE and E. It is

marked by buoys and indicated by lighted ranges. The inner

part of the harbor is used only by small craft. The outer part

provides 450m of berthage with depths of 4.4 to 5m alongside.

There are facilities for oil, bulk, and ferry vessels. Vessels up to

85m in length and 4.5m draft can be accommodated. Local

knowledge is advised.

5.18 A conspicuous ruined castle stands on a hill, 0.5 mile S of

the harbor, and a large white building, the former royal palace,

is situated 0.4 mile SW of it. A prominent church, with a

pointed spire, is situated in the town. A conspicuous silo, 27m

high, stands on the N side of the harbor. A prominent radio

mast is situated 3.5 miles SE of the town.

5.18 Anchorage can be taken, during good weather, in depths of 7

to 11m, about 1 mile outside the harbor and clear of the shoals.

Local knowledge is required.

Sandvik (57°04'N., 16°52'E.), a small and partly-sheltered

harbor, is situated 13 miles NNE of Borgholm. It is protected

by two curved breakwaters. The entrance, which is 28m wide.

has a controlling depth of 4m. This former loading place is

only used by fishing vessels and pleasure craft. A conspicuous

windmill stands in the vicinty of this harbor. 

5.18 Hornsudde (57°12'N., 16°54'E.), a blunt cape, is located 7.5

miles NNE of Sandvik and marked by a light. During N and

NE gales, heavy swells have been observed on the shoal banks

which extend up to 5 and 7 miles N of the cape.

5.18 Tokenasudde (57°19'N., 17°00'E.), a point, is located 8

miles NNE of Hornsudde. During N and NE gales, heavy

swells have been observed on the shoal banks which front this

stretch of coast. A light is shown from a structure standing on

this point and two prominent radio masts are situated about 1.3

miles E of it.

5.18 Byxelkrok (57°20'N., 17°00'E.), a small harbor, lies 0.5 mile

N of Tokenasudde and is protected by a long breakwater. It is

used by fishing vessels, ferries, and pleasure craft. A narrow

channel leads SE to the harbor entrance and has a controlling

depth of 4.5m. It is marked by buoys and indicated by a lighted

range. Local knowledge is advised.

5.18 The coast between Sandvik and the N end of Oland is steep

and light-colored, with the N section being mostly wooded.

Several groves of trees stand on Alvaret, the ridge backing the

coast.

5.19 Olands Norra Udde (57°22'N., 17°06'E.), a small

peninsula, forms the N end of Oland. A light is shown from a

prominent tower, 32m high, standing on Storgrundet, an islet,

which lies close E of the N extremity of the peninsula. A

prominent radio mast is situated 1.3 miles SW of the light.

5.19 Olands Norra Grund (57°29'N., 17°09'E.), a rocky shoal,

lies about 7 miles N of the N end of Oland. It has a least depth

of 4.4m and is marked by a lighted buoy. Several detached

shoals, with depths less than 8m, lie between the N end of

Tokenasudde Light
Sector 5. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund and Oland 151

Pub. 194

Oland and Olands Norra Grund.

5.19 Anchorage can be taken, in good weather or with S winds, in

a depth of 18m, clay, on a bank lying about 1 mile NE of Storgrundet.

5.19 Grankullaviken (57°22'N., 17°07'E.), a small bay, lies on

the SE side of Olands Norra Udde and is encumbered by rocks

and shoals. Several reefs and islets partially block the entrance.

A channel, with a least depth of 5m, leads SW into this bay. 

5.19 Grankullavik, a small harbor, is situated at the W side of the

bay and has an entrance, 20m wide. It is used by ferries, small

craft, and pleasure boats. The bay is obstructed by ice during

February and March and strong N winds make entry difficult.

5.19 The harbor is closed to commercial shipping. A ruined pier

fronts the site of a sawmill and lumberyard.

5.19 Sheltered anchorage can be taken, in depths of 8 to 9m, clay,

about 0.5 mile ENE of the harbor breakwater. Local knowledge

is advised.

5.19 Caution.—Large vessels are advised to pass well to the N of

Olands Norra Grund.

5.20 East side.—The E coast of Oland is mostly low and

irregular, with only a few prominent landmarks.

Segerstad (56°22'N., 16°34'E.), a blunt point, is located 12

miles NNE of Olands Sodra Udde. A light is shown from a

prominent tower, 22m high, standing on this point.

Grasgardhamn, a small and shallow fishing harbor, lies 3

miles SSW of Segerstad Light and has an entrance, 12m wide.

Skarlov, a small and shallow fishing harbor, lies 3.5 miles N of

Segerstad Light.

Blasinge, a small and shallow fishing harbor, lies 16 miles

NNE of Segerstad Light and is protected by a breakwater.

5.20 Kapelludden (56°49'N., 16°51'E.) is located 29 miles NNE

of Segerstad Light. A light is shown from a prominent framework tower, 32m high, standing on this point.

5.20 Karehamn (56°57'N., 16°53'E.), a small and sheltered harbor, is situated 8.5 miles NNE of Kapelludden Light. It is used

by fishing vessels and pleasure craft. Kareholm, a low and

barren islet, lies 0.5 mile ENE of the harbor and is marked by a

beacon. A channel, 30m wide, leads WNW and SSW to the

harbor and has a controlling depth of 4.4m.

5.20 Unsheltered anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 18m, sand

and clay, about 2.5 miles E of Varholmsudde, a headland

located 2 miles SE of the harbor.

5.20 A shoal, with depths of less than 8m, extends up to about 2.8

miles seaward from a point on the shore located 3.5 miles NE

of Karehamn and is marked by a buoy. It is reported that a

lighted mast stands near the extremity of this shoal. 

5.20 Hogby (57°09'N., 17°03'E.), a small peninsula, is located

12.5 miles NNE of Karehamn. A light is shown from a prominent framework tower, 23m high, standing on the seaward extremity of this peninsula. A prominent dwelling is located near

the light tower. A conspicuous church and a radio mast stand

close W of the peninsula.

5.21 Boda (57°15'N., 17°05'E.), a small fishing harbor, is

Olands Norra Udde Light

Segerstad Light

Kapelludden Light

Hogby Light
152 Sector 5. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund and Oland 

Pub. 194

situated at the SW end of an open bay, about 6 miles NNE of

Hogby Light. It is protected by two breakwaters, which form

an entrance, 32m wide. A channel, with a least depth of 3.5m

over a bottom width of 18m, leads WNW and NW to the harbor. It is marked by buoys and indicated by a lighted range.

Local knowledge is advised. 

5.21 Angjarnsudden (57°18'N., 17°09'E.), the NE extremity of

Oland, is located 10.5 miles NNE of Hogby Light and 4.2

miles SE of Olands Norra Udde (see paragraph 5.19). It is

fronted by shallow shoals which extend up to about 1.5 miles

SE and are marked by a buoy. A prominent beacon stands on

the coast about 2 miles NNW of this point.

5.21 Caution.—Several detached shoals and dangerous wrecks,

which may best be seen on the chart, lie up to 3.5 miles

seaward of the E coast of Oland. Large vessels are advised to

pass well clear of the E side of Oland.
153

Pub. 194

6. 

Sweden—Gotland, Faro, and Gotska Sandon

6.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 6 — CHART INFORMATION
155

Pub. 194

SECTOR 6 

SWEDEN—GOTLAND, FARO, AND GOTSKA SANDON

6.0 Plan.—This sector describes the islands of Gotland, Faro,

and Gotska Sandon. The descriptive sequence is from S to N

along the mainland and the W coast of Gotland, and from N to

S along the E coast of Gotland. 

General Remarks

6.1 Gotland (57°30'N., 18°30'E.), the largest island in the

Baltic, is part of Sweden and lies 45 miles off the coast. It consists of a limestone formation and is a popular tourist destination. The major part of the coast of Gotland is wooded, rising

steeply from the sea to form a plateau, 26 to 43m high. A few

detached hills rise above this plateau. Torsburgen (57°24'N.,

18°44'E.), 68m high, is the highest and stands at the E side. A

peninsula, 9 miles long, forms the S end of Gotland and is

joined to the island by an isthmus, less than 2 miles wide. The

coast of Gotland is indented by numerous shallow bights and

rocks, reefs, and shoals front the greater part of the shore.

Visby and Slite are the two major ports of Gotland.

6.1 Winds—Weather.—Gotland has a very temperate climate.

Winds from the N and W prevail along the W coast in the late

summer and autumn; winds from the E prevail in spring and

late autumn. Winds from the S prevail along the NE coast during the summer.

6.1 Generally, the harbors of the island are clear of ice during

ordinary winters, but some of them may be obstructed between

January and March.

6.1 Tides—Currents.—There are only weak surface currents

around Gotland. The current between the island and the

Swedish coast usually sets SW. Off the E coast of the island,

the current usually sets S or SW and is weaker than off the W

coast.

6.1 Pilotage.—Pilots for harbors and loading places located

around Gotland are provided by the main station at Visby.

However, all ordering of pilots must be made through Oxelosund VTS. Vessels should send an ETA and a request for

pilotage at least 12 hours and 5 hours before arrival.

6.1 Pilotage within the coastal area of Gotland is compulsory

(see paragraph 5.1) for the following:

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 vessels of 80m in length or 15m beam and

over.

3. Category 3 vessels of 90m in length or 16m beam and

over.

6.1 In certain channels to and from Ronehamn, pilotage is compulsory for Category 2 and 3 vessels of 70m in length, 14m

beam, and 4.3m draft and over.

6.1 If the pilot station at Visby is closed (2200 to 0600) or

unmanned, vessels should contact Oxelosund VTS on VHF

channel 9. 

6.1 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board, as follows:

1. Visby—in the roadstead.

2. Storugns—in the outer part of Kappelshamnsviken.

3. Farosund—near Svingrund (57°56'N., 19°01'E.) or S

of Bungeor (57°50'N., 19°07'E.).

4. Slite—in position 57°39.5'N, 18°50.5'E.

5. Ronehamn—southbound vessels off Slite and northbound vessels by agreement.

6. Klintehamn—off the entrance.

6.1 Regulations.—An IMO-adopted Area to be Avoided, the

limits of which may best be seen on the chart, has been

established in the vicinity of Hoburgs Bank (56°40'N,.

18°10'E.), an extensive shoal bank. The area lies centered 24

miles of SSE of Hoburg Light (56°55'N,. 18°09'E.).

6.1 Gotland Restricted Area.—This area covers the NE part of

Gotland, E of 18°55'E, Farosund (57°50'N., 19°00'E.), and the

SW side of Faro, with the exception of the marked channel

throughout. See: Swedish Sea Survailance and Restricted

Military Area in secto;r-paragraph 4.47.

Directions.—Off Gotland Island TSS, which may best be

seen on the chart, lies centered 11 miles SE of Hoburg Light

and is IMO-adopted. An Inshore Traffic Zone is situated

between the SE coast of Gotland and the TSS traffic lanes.

Less depths than charted have been reported to lie outside of

but close to the TSS area and deep-draft vessels are advised to

keep strictly within the lanes.

From the Olands Sodra Grund TSS, which is situated in the

vicinty of Olands Sodra Grund Light (56°04'N., 16°41'E.),

vessels proceeding to the Gulf of Finland should steer NE for

about 70 miles to the Off Gotland Island TSS. They should

then continue NE for about 180 miles to the TSS lying centered 20 miles NW of Kopu Light (58°55'N., 22°12'E.). Vessels

should pass NW of the Norra Midsjobanken Area to be

Avoided and the Hoburgs Bank Area to be Avoided.

For further route information, see paragraph 4.1 and paragraph 5.1.

6.1 Baltic Deep Water Route.—A Deep Water Route, recommended for vessels with drafts over 12m, has been established

for shipping proceeding to the NE part of the Baltic Sea and

may best be seen on the chart. It extends ENE and NE from the

E end of the Bornholmsgat TSS to the S end of the TSS lying

centered 20 miles NW of Kopu Light (58°55'N., 22°12'E.). The

route passes 37 miles SSE of Hoburg Light (56°55'N.,

18°09'E.), S and E of the Hoburgs Bank Area to be Avoided,

and 24 miles SE of Faro Light (57°58'N., 19°21'E.).

6.1 It is reported that this recommended route has a least depth

of 25m and is recommended for vessels with drafts up to 15m.

6.1 For further information, see paragraph 4.1 and paragraph

5.1.

Caution.—Faro and the NE part of Gotland lie within the

Farosund Restricted Area and permission to enter must be

obtained from the authorities.

6.1 Fishing for salmon with drift nets is conducted annually

from September 15 to June 14, within 10 miles of Gotland.

Each fishing boat may have nets, which are formed by units

about 0.6 mile long, up to a combined length of 11 miles. Each

unit of these nets is usually provided with radar reflectors and
156 Sector 6. Sweden—Gotland, Faro, and Gotska Sandon 

Pub. 194
Sector 6. Sweden—Gotland, Faro, and Gotska Sandon 157

Pub. 194

lights. Vessels approaching these fishing boats and nets should

pass well clear and keep a VHF listening watch.

6.1 Local magnetic anomalies exist off the N and W coasts of

Gotland; compass deflections of 2° to 4° have been observed.

6.1 In spring, the ice pressure may cause the coastal approach

channels to fill with large boulders; charted depths, especially

in the fairways leading to the small harbors, should not be

relied upon.

6.1 Because of the non-tidal nature of these waters, the Swedish

authorities have enacted stringent anti-pollution regulations. 

6.1 It is reported that a submarine gas pipeline is being

constructed between Russia and Germany. This pipeline will

extend WSW through the Gulf of Finland and then lead in a

SW direction to the E side of Rugen (54°20'N., 13°44'E.). It

will pass E of Faro (57°57'N., 19°10'E.), E of Hoburgs Bank

(56°35'N., 18°25'E.), and W of Sodra Midsjobanken (55°40'N.,

17°23'E.).

Gotland—West Coast

6.2 Hoburgs Bank (56°40'N., 18°10'E.) extends up to 50

miles S of the S end of Gotland and has depths of 10 to 37m.

Shoal patches, with depths of 12 to 14m, lie on this bank about

28 miles S and SSE of the S end of the island and may best be

seen on the chart (see Regulations in paragraph 6.1).

6.2 Hoburg (56°55'N., 18°08'E.), the SW extremity of Gotland,

is formed by a limestone cliff, 35m high, which is divided by a

deep cleft. Hoburg Light is shown from a conspicuous tower,

22m high, standing on a hill, with an elevation of 37m, which

rises about 1 mile NE of the SW extremity.

6.2 Hoburgsrev, a spit with a least depth of 5.5m, extends about

1.2 miles S from Hoburg and is marked by a buoy.

6.2 Barshagegrund, an isolated shoal patch, lies about 2 miles

SE of Hoburg. It has a least depth of 4.7m and is marked by a

buoy.

Burgsviken (57°03'N., 18°12'E.) is entered between Valar,

located 8 miles NNE of Hoburg, and Nasudden, 2 miles N.

This inlet extends NE and is partly encumbered with rocks and

reefs.

6.2 The coast extending from Hoburg to Valar consists of steep

and barren chalk cliffs. A light is shown from a tower, 6m high,

standing on Valar.

6.2 A radio mast, 147m high, stands on Nasudden and a conspicuous wind generator, 78m high, is situated close E of it. Storgrund, a small islet, lies close off the W side of this N entrance

point.

6.3 Nasrevet (57°03'N., 18°09'E.), a partially abovewater reef, extends about 1.8 miles WSW from Nasudden and

is marked by a light shown from a tower, 9m high, standing 1

mile SW of Storgrund.

6.3 Bockstigen, an isolated shoal patch, lies close SW of the S

edge of Nasrevet. It has a least depth of 5.2m and is marked by

a lighted mast, 40m high.

6.3 It is reported that five conspicuous wind generators, 40m

high, stand in the vicinity of Bockstgen.

6.3 An entrance channel, which can be used by vessels with

drafts of up to 5m, leads ENE into the outer roadstead of

Burgsviken. It passes SSE of Bockstigen and is indicated by a

lighted range. Vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in a

depth of 7m, sand and clay, about 0.6 mile NNE of Valar Light.

Burgsvik (57°02'N., 18°16'E.), a small harbor, lies in the S

part of Burgsviken and consists of a curved pier. It is approached from the outer roadstead through a buoyed channel,

60m wide, with a dredged depth of 4.1m. There is a cargo

berth, 135m long, with depths of 3 to 3.6m alongside. Vessels

up to 60m in length and 3.4m draft can be accommodated.

6.4 Deppo (57°07'N., 18°07'E.), an isolated shoal patch,

lies 3 miles offshore, about 3.7 miles NW of Nasrevet Light. It

has a least depth of 3.8m and is marked by a buoy. Lillgrund, a

shoal patch with a least depth of 5.2m, lies about 6.5 miles

NNW of Deppo and several patches, with depths of less than

10m, are located between them.

Hammarudd (57°16'N., 18°06'E.), a salient point, is located

12.5 miles N of Nasrevet Light. The coast between is high,

steep, densely wooded, and fronted by a coastal shoal with

detached outer patches. From Hammarudd, the coast trends 16

miles in a general N direction to Nyrevsudden and is indented

by numerous coves.

A number of churches stand close inland along this stretch of

coast and are prominent from seaward. Lighted ranges are

occasionally shown from several locations along this stretch of

coast to guide local fishing vessels.

Stora Karlso (57°17'N., 17°58'E.), 52m high, lies 4 miles

WNW of Hammarudd. It is steep-sided and fronted by reefs.

Stora Karlso Light is shown from a prominent tower on a

dwelling, 18m high, standing on the W side of this island.

6.4 Lilla Karlso (57°19'N., 18°04'E.), 66m high, lies 3 miles

NNW of Hammarudd. This island is steep-sided and lightcolored.

6.4 Caution.—Stora Karlso and Lilla Karlso are nature reserves

and permission must be obtained to land or navigate close

inshore of these islands.

6.4 From 15 April to 31 July annually, a small prohibited area

fronting the NE side of Lilla Karlso is in force.

6.4 Several submarine power cables, which may best be seen on

the chart, extend between Stora Karlso and Lilla Karlso and the

W side of Gotland.

6.5 Klintehamn (57°23'N., 18°12'E.) (World Port Index

No. 24960), a small commercial harbor, is situated 8 miles

Hoburg Light
158 Sector 6. Sweden—Gotland, Faro, and Gotska Sandon 

Pub. 194

NNE of Hammarudd at the head of a bight. Its S side is formed

by a narrow tongue of land extending W from the coast. A

prominent silo stands on this tongue of land and a wind

generator is situated near the outer end.

An approach channel, with a least depth of 5.5m, leads NE to

the outer roadstead and is indicated by a lighted range. Its outer

entrance is marked by a lighted buoy. A fairway channel, 30m

wide, leads from the roadstead to the quay and has a dredged

depth of 5m.

A quay, 330m long, is situated along the N side of the tongue

of land and has a depth of 5m alongside. It is protected from

the N and E by a quayed mole which is used by fishing boats

and ferries. The harbor has facilities for ferry, bulk, and ro-ro

vessels. Vessels up to 75m in length and 4.7m draft can be

accommodated. It is reported that the maximum allowable

entry draft has been reduced to 4.5m due to silting.

During good weather or with offshore winds, anchorage can

be taken, in depths of 11 to 14m, sand and clay, within the

outer roadstead. Local knowledge is advised.

6.5 Caution.—Strong SW winds are reported to raise a heavy

sea within the harbor.

6.5 The harbor is usually free of ice, but with continuous W and

NW winds during February and March, it may occasionally be

blocked by drifting ice.

6.6 Utholmen (57°26'N., 18°06'E.), low and barren, lies

about 1 mile offshore, 7 miles N of Lilla Karlso. A disused

light tower is situated at the NE end of this island, but is

reported to be difficult to identify. A house and several trees

stand in the middle of the island. Shoal water extends up to 2

miles SSE and 4 miles NNW of Utholmen. Scharlakansgrund,

a rocky shoal, lies between 1 mile and 2.3 miles N of the island

and is awash in places. Gnisvardsgrund, with a depth of 5.4m,

lies 3.2 miles NNW of the island. The seaward edges of these

shoals are marked by buoys.

Skansudde (57°27'N., 18°07'E.) is located 4 miles NNW of

Klintehamn. A conspicuous disused light tower, 10m high,

stands on this point and a prominent dwelling, with a black

roof, is situated close S of it. Several churches stand along this

part of the coast and are prominent from seaward.

Vastergarn, a small craft and fishing boat harbor, lies close

SE of Skansudde. It is sheltered from the W by Svaltholm, an

islet, which is connected to the main island by a breakwater.

6.6 Ginisvard, a small and sheltered fishing boat harbor, lies 3.2

miles N of Skansudde.

Nyrevsudde (57°32'N., 18°07'E.) is located 5.2 miles NNW

of Skansudde. This conspicuous light-colored headland forms

the W extremity of Gotland.

6.6 The NW coast of Gotland extends 31 miles in a general NE

direction from this headland to Hallshuk. There are few indentations along this section of the coast which is mostly steep-to.

6.6 Stavklint, a steep cliff, stands 2 miles NNE of Nyrevsudde. It

is 43m high and prominent from seaward. Hogklint, another

steep cliff, is located 3.2 miles NE of Stavklint and is wooded

on top.

6.6 Caution.—Several submarine cables extend W from the

vicinity of Hogklint and may best be seen on the chart. Their

landing places are marked by beacons

6.6 Landing is prohibited on Utholmen without special permission.

Visby (57°38'N., 18°17'E.)

World Port Index No. 24950

6.7 Visby, the principal town of Gotland, is situated 9

miles NE of Nyrevsudde. The harbor is protected by two

breakwaters and consists of two basins. It is used by commercial vessels and passenger ferries.

6.7 Winds—Weather.—Stormy weather sometimes raises a

considerable sea outside the harbor with a resulting suction

within the port. Ground swells are frequent. Prevailing winds

are SW in the summer and between NW and NE during the

winter. The harbor is usually free from ice.

6.7 Tides—Currents.—The current usually sets in the direction

of the wind at rates of 2 to 3 knots. Protracted gales from the W

raise the water level in the harbor and gales from the E and SE

lower it. The water level may differ by as much as 0.9m.

6.7 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels should approach the port

from WSW. An entrance channel, dredged to a depth of 9m,

then leads in a NE direction into the outer part of the harbor.

6.7 The inner basin provides 750m of quayage with depths of

5.8 to 7m alongside. It can be used by vessels with drafts up to

6.3m. 

6.7 Three ro-ro berths, with depths of 7 to 8m alongside, are

Stora Karlso Light

Skansudde disused light tower
Sector 6. Sweden—Gotland, Faro, and Gotska Sandon 159

Pub. 194

situated at the E side of the outer basin. An oil berth, 60m long,

is situated at the E side of the S breakwater and has a depth of

8m alongside. There are facilities for cruise, passenger ferry,

ro-ro, tanker, general cargo, and fishing vessels. Tankers up to

130m in length and other vessels up to 200m in length can be

accommodated with drafts up to 7.5m.

6.7 Aspect.—A sector light is shown from a prominent floodlit

structure, 8m high, standing on the W end of the S breakwater.

A light is shown from a prominent structure, 9m high, standing

on the head of the N breakwater. The entrance fairway is indicated by a lighted range which may best be seen on the chart.

6.7 An aeronautical light is shown from a mast, 149m high,

standing at an elevation of 243m about 4 miles SE of the town.

6.7 The coast to the N and S of the town is fronted by cliffs. A

prominent cathedral, with a high tower and several spires,

stands in the town and a tall chimney is situated close E of it. A

prominent water tower, with a pointed roof, also stands in the

town. A conspicuous windmill is situated close NE of the town

and a radio mast stands 0.4 mile NNW of it.

6.7 Pilotage.—Pilots are provided by the main station situated in

the port. However, all ordering of pilots must be made through

Oxelosund VTS. For more details, see paragraph 6.1.

6.7 Anchorage.—In good weather or during offshore winds,

 Visby

Visby 

Visby Harbor
160 Sector 6. Sweden—Gotland, Faro, and Gotska Sandon 

Pub. 194

vessels may anchor within two outer anchorages. These anchorages are located, in a depth of 42m, about 0.3 mile NW of

the head of the N breakwater and, in depths of 18 to 22m, about

0.3 mile NNE of the the head of the N breakwater.

6.7 Caution.—With onshore gales, vessels should not attempt to

enter the harbor without local knowledge as experience has

shown that there is a great danger of stranding in such conditions.

6.8 Stenkyrkehuk (57°49'N., 18°29'E.), the NW extremity of Gotland, is located 12 miles NNE of Visby. The coast between is steep-to. A light is shown from a prominent tower,

15m high, standing on this point.

 Flundreviken, a small fishing boat harbor, is situated 2 miles

NE of Visby and its entrance channel is indicated by a lighted

range. Skalso, another small fishing boat harbor, is situated 2

miles NE of Flundreviken. Its entrance channel, which has a

least depth of 3m, is indicted by two lighted ranges.

The coast in the vicinity of Skalso and extending to Hallshuk, 18 miles NE, is steep and wooded.

A conspicuous church, with a slender spire, stands at Lumelunda, 3 miles SSW of Stenkykehuk Light.

Lickershamn, a small and shallow fishing harbor, lies 2 miles

ENE of Stenkyrkehuk Light and is protected by a breakwater.

Its entrance is indicated by a lighted range. Several houses

standing along the shore in the vicinity of this harbor and a

white house situated in the village of Snipan, 2 miles NE, are

all prominent from seaward.

An aeronautical light is shown from a conspicuous tower

standing at an elevation of 155m about 3 miles ESE of Lickershamn.

It is reported that two conspicuous wind generators are

situated close SE of Lickershamn.

Hallshuk (57°56'N., 18°44'E.), a high and steep point, is

located 11.5 miles NE of Stenkyrkehuk Light and forms the N

extremity of Gotland. A light is shown from a structure standing on the NE side of the point.

6.8 A prominent church is situated at Hall, 2.3 miles S of Hallshuk Light. Norsklint, 44m high, is a conspicuous wooded hill,

which rises about 1.5 miles WSW of Hallshuk Light.

6.9 Kappelshamnsviken (57°54'N., 18°48'E.) is entered

between Hallshuk Light and Svarvnaset, a light-colored cliffy

point, 3 miles E. The shores of this inlet are fronted by reefs,

but access is easy and free of off-lying dangers.

 Gales from the NE and NW sometimes raise dangerous seas

in this vicinity.

6.9 Hallshuk is a promontory forming the W side of the inlet; the

land decreases in height towards the head. The village of Gusstade stands near the shore, 3.5 miles S of Hallshuk Light. 

6.9 Kappelshamn Light is shown from a prominent framework

tower standing near the head of the inlet. Vessels may proceed

S into the inlet using the white sector of this light.

6.9 Blase, a former harbor, is situated at the E side of the inlet,

about 1.5 miles S of Svarvnaset and is no longer in use. A

prominent church stands at the village of Fleringe, about 1 mile

SSE of Blase.

Kappelshamn (57°51'N., 18°47'E.), a small harbor, lies at

the W side of inlet, near the head. A pier, extended by three

dolphins joined by bridges, projects a total length of 150m

from the shore. The E side of this pier provides a berth with a

ro-ro ramp. It is 150m long and has a depth of 6.5m alongside.

The W side of the pier provides a berth, 125m long, with

depths of 2.5 to 4.5m alongside. Vessels up to 5.5m draft can

be accommodated.

6.9 Storugns (57°50'N., 18°48'E.) (World Port Index No.

24940), a small harbor, lies at the E side of the inlet, near the

head, and serves the local limestone quarries. It is formed by a

pier extending S from the head of a short breakwater. The harbor is approached through a channel, 80 to 90m wide, with a

dredged depth of 9.3m. The fairway is marked by buoys and

indicated by a lighted range. A yellow steering light is shown

from the tower of Kappelshamn Light to guide vessels in the

inner part of this channel.

6.9 The inner berth at the pier is 120m long and has a depth of

7m alongside. The outer berth at the pier is 140m long and has

depths of 9.2 to 10m alongside. Vessels up to 25,000 dwt,

160m in length, and 8.8m draft can be accommodated.

6.9 Vessels must send an ETA to the harbor 96 hours and 24

hours in advance, with subsequent amendments of more than 1

hour.

Stenkyrkehuk Light

Hallshuk Light
Sector 6. Sweden—Gotland, Faro, and Gotska Sandon 161

Pub. 194

6.9 Vessels may anchor, in a depth of 13m, clay and sand with

good holding ground, about 1 mile N of the harbor.

6.9 Caution.—A permanent defensive minefield, in which anchoring and fishing are prohibited, is laid within Kappelshamnsviken. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited within this

field and vessels passing through it during thunderstorms do so

at their own risk.

6.9 The N part of the E side of the bay lies within the Farosund

Restricted Area which encompasses the entire NE part of Gotland.

Farosund

6.10 Farosund (57°55'N., 19°03'E.), a navigable passage,

separates Gotland from the adjacent island of Faro and extends

6.5 miles SSE from the vicinity of Vialmsudd.

Vialmsudd (57°55'N., 19°01'E.) is located at the W side of

the entrance to Farosund, 8.5 miles E of Hallshuk Light. This

point is fronted by Svingrund, a reef with rocks awash, which

extends up to about 1 mile N. Svingrund Light is shown from a

prominent tower, 9m high, standing at the outer edge of this

reef.

6.10 Ar, a former harbor, is situated 2 miles W of Vialmsudd and

is no longer used. It is protected by Falholmen, an islet, which

lies close off the coast.

6.10 The passage is approached from the N between Vialmsudd

and Aurgrund, an islet, lying 1 mile E. A light is shown from a

tower, 10m high, standing on the N part of this islet. The fairway

at the N end of the passage narrows to a width of 40m and can be

used by vessels up to 80m in length and 4.6m draft.

6.10 The channel leading through Farosund has depths of 5.6 to

12m, but detached shoals, marked by buoys, lie close to the

fairway.

6.10 Bungeor (57°49'N., 19°07'E.) is a low island, encircled by

foul ground, lying in the middle of the S entrance. A light is

shown from a prominent tower, 14m high, standing at the S

side of this island. A beacon, 7m high, is situated close NNE of

the light 

6.10 Faro Sodra Light (57°51'N., 19°06'E.), a sector light, is

shown from a tower, 7m high, standing 1.5 mile NNW of Bungeor Light.

6.10 The main S approach to Farosund lies between Bungeor and

the promontory of Bungenas, 0.8 mile W. The fairway channel

can be used by vessels up to 80m in length and 5.2m draft.

Smaller vessels with drafts up to 4m can use a channel which

leads NE of Bungeor, but local knowledge is required.

6.10 Pilotage.—Local knowledge is advised. Pilots for the

passage are provided by the main station at Visby. All ordering

of pilots must be made through Oxelosund VTS. For more

details, see paragraph 6.1.

6.10 Caution.—Farosund lies within the Farosund Restricted

Area and permission to enter must be obtained from the authorities. The marked channels leading through the passage are excepted from the restricted area and anchoring is permitted only

in accordance with the regulations.

6.10 Permanent defensive minefields, in which anchoring and

fishing are prohibited, are laid in the vicinity of the approaches

to Farosund. Their landing places are marked by beacons.

6.10 Several submarine cables extend across the passage in the

vicinity of the town of Farosund and may best be seen on the

chart. 

6.10 The water level within the passage rises in the autumn during

N and W storms. It falls in the spring during prolonged S and E

winds. Between January and the middle of April, ice may

block the passage in severe winters.

6.10 Special regulations apply to foreign vessels visiting the town

of Farosund.

6.11 West side.—Haurevlar (57°54'N., 19°02'E.), a point,

is located 1 mile inside the N entrance and marked by a beacon.

A light is shown from framework tower, 8m high, standing 0.2

mile SW of the point.

6.11 Stra, a village situated 1 mile S of Haurevlar, is fronted by a

pier, 90m long. This pier, which has a depth of 5.4m alongside

its S face, is reported to be disused but in good condition.

Small vessels with drafts of up to 5m can berth alongside the S

side.

6.11 Farosund (57°52'N., 19°04'E.) (World Port Index No.

24900), a small harbor, lies 2 miles SE of Stra and is mostly

used by fishing vessels. This main harbor is protected by a

curved brealwater, 300m long. A pier, 60m long, extends from

the shore toward the head of the breakwater and has depths of

2.5 to 6.5m alongside. A jetty, 125m long, extends NW from

the root of the pier and has depths of 3.7 to 4.5m alongside. A

ro-ro ferry berth lies close S of the root of the pier. Small

vessels up to 5.2m draft can be accommodated.

6.11 A marina, protected by two breakwaters, lies close SSE of

the main harbor and a small craft basin, protected by an Lshaped breakwater, is situated about 0.5 mile SSE of it.

6.12 East side.—From a point located 1.2 miles NE of

Vialmsudd, the E side of Farosund is high and wooded.

Aurgrund, an islet, lies on the costal bank, 1.3 miles NNE of

Haurevlar Light. A light is shown from a tower, 10m high,

standing on this islet. Broa, a village, is situated 3 miles SE of

the E entrance point and is the terminal for the ferry from the

town of Farosund.

Klintbroviken, situated 1.5 miles NNW of Broa, is fronted

by a pier, 70m long. Vessels up to 4m draft can use this pier,

but it is reported to be seldom used.

6.12 Ryssudden, the SE entrance point of the sound, is situated

0.9 mile SE of Faro Sodra Light. It is low, rocky, and lightcolored. Several rocks and shoals lie between this point and

Bungeor.

Faro Sodra Light
162 Sector 6. Sweden—Gotland, Faro, and Gotska Sandon 

Pub. 194

6.12 Sodergrund (57°48'N., 19°11'E.) lies about 3 miles SE of

Ryssudden, in the outer approaches to Farosund. This shoal has

a least depth of 9m and is marked by a buoy.

Gotland—East Coast

6.13 The E coast of Gotland is uniform in height and

wooded. Several islands and islets lie close offshore. The NE

side of the island consists of a broad bay which is indented by a

number of inlets and encumbered by numerous shoals. This

bay terminates to the S in a bold headland off which the island

of Ostergarnsholm lies. Several steep-to detached shoal patches lie seaward of the coastal bank along this stretch of coast

and are marked by buoys.

Bungenas (57°49'N., 19°05'E.) (World Port Index No.

24890), a small harbor, is situated on the W side of the promontory which forms the W side of the S entrance of Farosund.

This harbor is reported to be no longer used by commercial

vessels. 

6.13 Furillen (57°46'N., 19°01'E.), a wooded island, is connected

to the shore by a bridge and has a ridge which is prominent

from the S. Skenholmen, a low island, lies 0.7 mile NNE of

Fuillen and is not easily seen from offshore. Several rocks,

awash, and reefs front the E and SE sides of these islands and

are marked by a buoy.

6.13 Rute Missloper, a low rock, lies 1.5 miles SE of Skenholmen

and is marked by a prominent beacon, 6m high. Foul ground

extends up to about 0.7 mile SSW of this rock.

Furillen (57°46'N., 19°00'E.) (World Port Index No. 24870),

a small loading place formed by two piers, is situated on the W

side of the island of Furillen. This facility is reported to be no

longer used by commercial vessels. 

6.14 Grauten (57°44'N., 19°02'E.), formed by two white

rocks, lies at the outer edge of a reef which extends 1 mile SSE

from Furillen. A light is shown from a prominent tower, 11m

high, standing on the easternmost rock.

6.14 Rutegrund, a detached shoal patch, lies about 2.7 miles E of

Grauten Light and is the outermost danger in this vicinity. It

has a least depth of 6.4m and is marked by a buoy.

6.14 Britgrund, with a least depth of 4.8m, lies about 1.4 miles

WSW of Grauten Light. It is situated at the seaward extremity

of a chain of shoals which extends SW from the S end of

Furillen.

6.14 Smojen, a former loading place with piers, lies on the E side

of a peninsula, 2.5 miles W of Grauten Light. A group of eight

prominent wind generators, 55 to 67m high, stands in the vicinity of this village.

6.14 Kyllej, a former loading place with a pier, lies 1.5 miles N of

Smojen and a conspicuous chimney stands about 1.8 miles N

of it.

6.14 Mago (57°41'N., 18°52'E.), a small island, lies in the outer

approaches to Slite, about 6.2 miles WSW of Grauten Light. It

is 10m high and barren. A prominent beacon surmounts the

summit of the island; a light is shown from a prominent tower,

6m high, standing on the S side.

Slite (57°42'N., 18°49'E.)

World Port Index No. 24840

6.15 Slite, a commercial port, serves a large industrial

town. It lies on the SW side of an inlet which is fronted by

several islands.

6.15 Winds—Weather.—Winds from the S sometimes raise a

rough sea within the harbor. During severe winters, ice may

hinder vessels in February and March. The water level in the

harbor may be affected by the prevailing winds.

6.15 Depths—Limitations.—Two channels lead from seaward to

the harbor. The principal channel passes W of Mago and then

leads N and NW between Grundet and Enholmen. It has a least

depth of 8.4m and can be used by vessels with drafts up to

7.8m. A secondary channel, with a least depth of 3.8m, passes

NE of Mago and then leads NW between Grundet and

Asunden.

6.15 Slite Lanthamn, the commercial harbor, is protected by two

breakwaters. The entrance, which is 50m wide, has a controlling

depth of 5.8m. The harbor basin provides 290m of quayage with

depths of 3.5 to 6m alongside. A berth, with a ro-ro ramp, is

situated at the N side of the N breakwater. It is 160m long and has

depths of 6.6 to 7m alongside.

6.15 Slite Industrihamn, located 0.3 mile N of the commercial

harbor, serves a cement factory complex. It consists of a quay and

Grauten Light

Mago Light
Sector 6. Sweden—Gotland, Faro, and Gotska Sandon 163

Pub. 194

two jetties. Oceankajen, 225m long, fronts the shore and has a

depth of 6.8m alongside. Cementpiren projects 130m from the

shore and has a depth of 8.4m alongside both sides. Silopiren

projects 100m from the shore and has a depth of 7.2m alongside

its S side and a depth of 5.5m alongside its N side.

6.15 There are facilities for general cargo, ro-ro, tanker, fishing, and

bulk vessels. Vessels of up to 10,000 dwt, 125m in length, 15m

beam, and 7.8m draft can be accommodated.

6.15 Aspect.—A shoal patch, with a least depth of 5.3m, lies 0.5

mile W of Mago, near the fairway channels, and is marked by a

buoy. Asunden, lying 1 mile E of the harbor, is the largest

island in the approach. It is connected at the N side to the shore

by a reef which is mostly awash. Grundet, a low islet, lies 0.3

mile SW of the S end of Asunden and is marked on its W side

by a light.

6.15 Enholmen lies 0.3 mile W of Grundet. Several conspicuous

fortifications and a prominent house are situated on this islet.

The inner part of the main entrance channel is marked by buoys

and indicated by a lighted range.

6.15 Several prominent silos and a water tower stand in the

harbor. A number of conspicuous chimneys are situated near a

cement factory, close N of the town.

6.15 Pilotage.—Pilots are provided by the main station at Visby.

However, all ordering of pilots must be made through Oxelosund VTS. Pilotage within the port is compulsory for vessels

over 1,600 grt. For more details, see paragraph 6.1.

6.15 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available within the roadstead,

in depths of 6 to 7m, clay and sand, NNW of Grundet.

6.15 Caution.—Several submarine cables lie in the vicinity of the

harbor and may best be seen on the chart.

6.15 The approaches to the port lie partly within the Farosund

Restricted Area. Entry and anchoring are permitted only in

accordance with regulations.

6.15 A permanent defensive minefield, in which anchoring and

fishing are prohibited, is laid in the vicinity of the approaches

to Slite.

6.16 From Slite, the coast trends in a SSE direction for 17

miles to Herrvik and then SSW for 2.8 miles to Sysneudd. The

intervening coast, which is mostly wooded, is indented by

numerous coves.

6.16 A prominent church stands at Gothem, 7 miles SSW of

Mago. Churches standing at Norrlanda, Anga, and Kraklingbo

which are situated 5 miles SSW, 6 miles SSW, and 7.8 miles S,

respectively, of Gothem are also visible from seaward.

6.16 Botvaldvik (57°35'N., 18°48'E.), a fishing harbor, lies 7.2

miles S of Slite and is protected by two moles. The entrance

has a least depth of 3.5m and the fairway is indicated by a

lighted range.

6.16 Sildungen, a small islet, lies on the coastal shoal, 0.7 mile E

of Botvaldvik.

6.16 Anesbadar (57°30'N., 18°53'E.), with a least depth of 2.3m,

lies about 6 miles SSE of Botvaldvik. This shoal, which is

marked by a buoy, is located at the seaward end of a spit which

extends 3 miles NE from the coast. The central part of this spit

is awash.

6.16 Katthammarsvik (57°26'N., 18°51'E.), a fishing boat harbor, lies in the SE part of a bay, 3.5 miles SSW of Anesbadar. It

consists of a pier and a basin, which is protected by breakwaters. The pier is 160m long and has depth of 3m alongside

its outer end. Local knowledge is required.

Grogarnshuvud (57°27'N., 18°53'E.), located 1.5 miles NE

of Katthammarsvik, is a conspicuous and barren promontory

which is steep-to on its N side. The coast between this promontory and Sysneudd, 4 miles S, forms a bold and broad headland which is conspicuous from seaward. Reefs, awash, extend

up to about 1.8 miles E of this headland.

6.16 Torsburgen, a conspicuous hill, rises 5.5 miles SW of Grogarnshuvud. It is 68m high, wooded, and circular with steep

sides and a flat top.

6.17 Ostergarnsholm (57°27'N., 18°59'E.), a low island,

lies 2.5 miles E of Grogarnshuvud. It rises somewhat at the W

end and is fronted by shoals. Foul ground, marked by a buoy,

extends up to 1.8 miles NE and E of the island.

Ostergarn Light is shown from a prominent tower, 29m high,

standing at the E side of the island. Ostergarn Vastra Light is

shown from a structure standing on the W extremity of the

island and a prominent tower is situated close to it.

6.17 A channel, with a least depth of 11m, leads between the W

side of the island and the mainland. It should only be used by

vessels with local knowledge.

6.17 Klints Bank (57°26'N., 19°36'E.), with a least depth of 26m,

lies centered 18 miles E of Ostergarnsholm and may best be

seen on the chart.

Ostergarn Vastra Light

Ostergarn Light
164 Sector 6. Sweden—Gotland, Faro, and Gotska Sandon 

Pub. 194

6.17 Herrvik (57°25'N., 18°56'E.) a small harbor, lies 2.8 mile

NNE of Sysneudd and is protected by two moles. The entrance

is 54m wide and faces NE. The entrance fairway has a depth of

6m over a bottom width of 30m. The harbor has depths of 1 to

4m and is used by fishing vessels and pleasure craft. It is seldom closed due to ice. Vessels with drafts up to 6m can obtain

anchorage, in a depth of 9m, sand, about 1.8 miles NE of the

head of the W mole. However, the roadstead is open to N and E

winds and little protection is offered by Ostergarnsholm. Local

fishermen are available to serve as pilots. 

6.17 Caution.—Between 15 March and 15 June annually, salmon

nets may be laid between the W side of Ostergarnsholm and

the mainland.

6.17 A submarine cable, which may best be seen on the chart,

extends SW from the W side of Ostergarnsholm to the mainland.

6.18 Sysneudd (57°23'N., 18°53'E.) is the S extremity of a

broad and bold headland. From this point, the coast trends 28

miles SW to Faludden and is indented by numerous coves,

bays, and inlets. The shore along this stretch is fronted by

several islets, reefs, and shoals, which extend up to 4 miles seaward in places.

A prominent church stands at Gammelgarn, about 3 miles

WNW of Sysneudd.

Sandviken, a small bay, is entered on the W side of Sysneudd

and is open to S winds. Local knowledge is required because

shoals, with a least depth of 5.5m, lie in the middle of the

entrance. A ruined lime kiln stands at Skags, at the head of the

bay; a large and prominent white house, with a black roof, is

situated close NW of it.

6.18 Ljugarn, a shallow fishing harbor, lies within a point, 6.7

miles SW of Sysneudd. A detached shoal, with a least depth of

8.9m, lies about 3.2 miles E of this harbor.

6.18 Prominent churches stand at Garde and Alskog, which are

situated 4.2 miles and 3 miles W, respectively, of Ljugarn. A

light is shown from a prominent water tank, 12m high, standing near the root of a pier at Ljugarn.

Laus Holmar (57°17'N., 18°46'E.), a group of three low and

grass-covered islets, lies centered 2.5 miles SSE of Ljugarn.

These islets lie on foul ground which extends 2.5 miles NE

from Nabban, a point located 3.5 miles S of Ljugarn. A light is

shown from a tower, 6m high, standing on the E end of Storholm, the southernmost and largest islet of the group. Good

anchorage can be obtained by small craft, in depths of 5 to 9m,

sand and clay, W of the northwesternmost islet of the group.

6.18 Narsholmen (57°13'N., 18°41'E.), a barren peninsula, is

located 6.5 miles S of Ljugarn. It is the S extremity of a coastal

outcropping which commences at Nabban, 2.5 miles NNE. Nar

Light is shown from a prominent tower, 16m high, standing on

the S end of this peninsula.

6.19 Narshamn (57°14'N., 18°40'E.), a small fishing harbor, lies close W of Narsholmen and is protected by two breakwaters. The entrance, which is 25m wide, has a controlling

depth of 4m. A light is shown from a prominent floodlit tower,

6m high, standing on the head of the S breakwater.

6.19 The shoreline between Narsholmen and Grotlingboudd, 9.5

miles SW, recedes W and forms a large bight with depths up to

7m in its N part. The S part is foul and encumbered by shoals

which extend up to about 2.5 miles seaward. Several promient

churches stand along the shore of this bight. A detached shoal

patch, with a depth of 5.4m, lies about 2 miles offshore, 3.5

miles SW of Narsholmen.

Grotlingboudd (57°07'N., 18°27'E.), a peninsula, forms the

S end of the bight and several wind generators stand in its

vicinity.

Innerholmen, an islet, lies close off the NE extremity of the

peninsula and a beacon, 6m high, stands on its N end.

Yetterholmen, another islet, lies 1.3 miles E of Innerholmen

and is fronted by foul ground. Shallow reefs extend up to about

1.5 miles NE and 0.5 mile SW of this islet. Soderbriten, a shoal

with a least depth of 3.8m, lies 1.5 miles E of this islet and is

marked by a buoy. 

6.20 Ronehamn (57°10'N., 18°30'E.) (World Port Index

No. 24810), a small fishing and commercial harbor, is situated

7 miles WSW of Narsholmen. It is sheltered by several islets,

rocks, and shoals which encumber the approaches. 

6.20 Depths—Limitations.—Two buoyed channels lead through

the obstructions in the approaches to the harbor. The principal

channel, which can be used by vessels with drafts up to 4m,

leads WSW and passes close N of Ronehamn Light. It then

continues SW to join the entrance fairway about 1 mile SE of

the harbor. 

6.20 The secondary channel, which can be used by vessels with

drafts up to 3m, leads NNW and NE and passes between the

islets of Innerholmen and Yetterholmen. It then continues

NNW and NNE to join the entrance fairway about 1 mile SE of

the harbor. The entrance fairway, which can be used by vessels

with drafts up to 4m, leads NW from the outer roadstead.

6.20 The harbor is formed by a main pier extending SE from the

shore and a short breakwater. The principal quay, at the W side

of the pier, is 225m long and has a depth of 4.7m alongside. A

quay, at the E side of the pier, is 105m long and has depths of 3

to 3.5m alongside. Vessels up to 70m in length and 4m draft

can be accommodated.

6.20 Aspect.—Ronehamn Ligt is shown from a prominent tower,

11m high, standing at the N end of a shallow shoal lying 1.7

miles E of the harbor. The approach channels are marked by

buoys. The entrance fairway is marked by buoys and is indicated by a lighted range.

6.20 A prominent silo, surmounted by a radio mast, stands near

the main quay. A lighted range, for the use of fishing vessels, is

Nar Light
Sector 6. Sweden—Gotland, Faro, and Gotska Sandon 165

Pub. 194

occasionally shown from Tomtbod, 2 miles NE of the harbor.

6.20 Pilotage.—Local knowledge is advised. All ordering of

pilots must be made through Oxelosund VTS. For more details,

see paragraph 6.1. The harbor is usually blocked by ice during

January and February.

6.20 Caution.—The inner parts of the approach channels are subject to silting.

6.21 Faludden (57°00'N., 18°24'E.), a peninsula, is

located 7.5 miles SSW of Grotlingboudd and a bay is formed

between them. Faludden Tower, a prominent metal tower, 17m

high, (formerly a lighthouse) stands at the E end of this

peninsula. A conspicuous radio mast, 203m high, is situated

close to it. 

Briten, a reef, extends up to about 1 mile ESE from the E

side of Faludden. It has depths of less than 5m and is marked

by a buoy.

6.21 Vandburg (56°57'N., 18°19'E.), consisting of two small

fishing harbors, is situated 4.1 miles SW of Faludden. The entrance channel has a depth of 4.6m.

6.21 Heligholmen (56°55'N., 18°17'E.), a low and cliffy islet, lies

close offshore, 5.5 miles SW of Faludden. A light is shown

from a tower, 9m high, standing on its SE side.

6.21 Lillgrund lies about 1 mile offshore, 2 miles NE of the light.

This shoal area is awash at its W side and is marked by a buoy.

Espebanan, another shoal area, is awash and lies about 1.5

miles farther NE.

Barshageudd (56°55'N., 18°12'E.), a point, is located 3.2

miles WSW of Heligholmen and 2 miles E of Hoburg. Numerous reefs and rocks, some awash, extend up to about 1 mile

seaward of this point and are marked by a buoy. A stranded

wreck lies 0.7 mile SE of the point.

6.21 Caution.—Due to numerous dangers, the coast between

Barshaudden and Faludden should not be approached closer

than 3 miles without local knowledge. All vessels are advised

to stay in depths of 20m and over.

Faro

6.22 Faro (57°55'N., 19°11'E.) is uniformly high and

wooded. This island lies close NE of Gotland and is separated

from the main island by Farosund. The N side of Faro is steepto and light-colored.

Lauterhorn (57°57'N., 19°05'E.), a low point, is located 2.5

miles NE of the N entrance to Farosund. It is white-colored and

steep-to on the W side. Digerhuvud, the most noticeable point

on the NW coast, is located 2 miles NE of this point.

Norsholmen (58°00'N., 19°15'E.) is located 6 miles ENE of

Lauterhorn and separates two bights. A light is shown from a

framework tower standing on this point; a beacon is situated

close ESE of it.

Holmudden (57°58'N., 19°21'E.), located 4 miles ESE of

Norshomen Light, is the E extremity of Avanas, a broad peninsula forming the E end of the island.

Faro Light (57°58'N., 19°21'E.) is shown from a prominent

tower, 30m high, standing on Holmudden. A conspicuous radio

mast stands, at an elevation of 201m, close to the light.

6.22 Ulahau, a group of white sand dunes, is located 4.8 miles

ESE of the light and is visible from both the N and S. A prominent church stands at Faro, 4.2 miles SW of Ulahau, and is

visible from seaward.

6.22 Salvorev (58°03'N., 19°22'E.), an extensive area of reefs and

shallow shoals, extends up to about 9 miles N and 2 miles E of

Faro Light. The shoals in the central part of this area are

formed by shifting ridges of sand, gravel, and rocks. The N end

of the area is marked by a lighted buoy and the sides are

marked by buoys.

Faludden Tower

Faro Light

Norsholmen Light
166 Sector 6. Sweden—Gotland, Faro, and Gotska Sandon 

Pub. 194

6.22 Ava, a village, is situated on a point, 2 miles SW of Faro

Light. Avagrund, a rock awash, lies on an area of foul ground

which extends up to about 1 mile S from a point located 0.5

mile SW of the village.

6.22 Kyrkviken, a bay, indents the SE side of Faro and Hammarsudden, located 5 miles SW of Ava, forms its S entrance point.

This bay is divided into two parts by a reef which extends

about 2 miles SSE from shore. Askugrund, an above-water

rock, lies on this reef, 0.9 mile from the shore.

6.22 Hammarsgrund, a rock awash, lies 1.2 miles ESE of

Hammarsudden, in the approach to the W part of the bay.

6.22 Lavergrund, with a least depth of 2m, and Digergrund, with a

least depth of 5.8m, lie 1.8 miles SE and 3.2 miles ENE, respectively, of Hammarsgrund. These shoals form the outer dangers in this vicinity and are marked by buoys.

6.22 Ryssudden, the S extremity of Faro, is located 3 miles SSW

of Hammarsudden. This point, along with Sodergrund, has previously been described in paragraph 6.12.

Gotska Sandon

6.23 Gotska Sandon (58°22'N., 19°15'E.), a wooded island, lies 20 miles N of Faro and is 42m high. The shoreline

consists of sand dunes and is fronted by shoals. Detached

shoals lie up to 3 miles NW of the NW end of the island and up

to 1 mile E of the E extremity.

6.23 A light is shown from a prominent tower, 24m high, standing on the NW extremity of the island. A light is shown from a

tower, 10m high, standing on Hamnudden, the SW extremity of

the island. A light is shown from a tower, 12m high, standing

on Kyrkudden, the E extremity of the island.

6.23 Gotska Sandon does not afford secure anchorage as the

bottom drops off steeply and stormy weather raises a heavy

sea, even on the leeward side of the island.

Sando Bank (58°14'N., 19°16'E.), with a least depth of

9.5m, extends up to about 13 miles S of Gotska Sandon.

6.23 Kopparsternarna (58°35'N., 19°10'E.), formed by three

sandy shoals, lies centered 9 miles N of Gotska Sandon. It has

a least depth of 1m and is marked by buoys.

6.23 Caution.—Several submarine cables, indicated on the chart,

extend between Gotska Sandon and Faro.

6.23 Gotska Sandon, which is a nature reserve, is included within

the Farosund Restricted Area and permission to enter must be

obtained from the authorities.

6.23 Vessels should give Gotska Sandon a wide berth as surveys

in the vicinity are relatively old and undiscovered dangers may

exist.

Gotska Sandon Light
167

Pub. 194

7. 

Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund to Landsort

7.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 7 — CHART INFORMATION
169

Pub. 194

SECTOR 7 

SWEDEN—EAST COAST—KALMARSUND TO LANDSORT

7.0 Plan.—This sector describes the Swedish coast between

Krakelund, at the NW end of Kalmarsund, and Landsort. The

descriptive sequence is from S to N. 

General Remarks

7.1 The coast between the island of Krakelund and

Landsort, 86 miles NNE, presents very few natural landmarks

that are identifiable from the offing. Numerous islets and rocks

front this stretch of coast. They are joined by shoals and

fronted by detached shallow patches. Variable depths, with

possible uncharted shoals and rocks, lie in the coastal approaches and soundings give no indication of the distance offshore. To facilitate navigation in this area, numerous beacons

and daymarks are situated on the points located adjacent to the

intricate channels leading to the harbors. Local knowledge is

essential for gaining access to the harbors lying along this part

of the coast.

7.1 Rocky shoals lie up to 10 miles offshore in places. These offlying dangers are marked by buoys or beacons. Landsortsdjupet (58°38'N., 18°15'E.), the deepest part of the Baltic Sea,

lies ESE of Landsort.

7.1 Winds—Weather.—The water level range in this area may

be as much as 1.5m. The level usually rises with N and NE

winds and falls with W and SW winds.

7.1 Ice.—During January, February, and March, ice often blocks

the coastal approach channels lying along this coast. However,

icebreakers keep the main channels and harbors open. For information pertaining to ice-breaking vessels, see Pub. 140,

Sailling Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and

Adjacent Seas.

7.1 Pilotage.—Pilotage is mandatory within Swedish coastal

waters which include channels, canals, and inland waterway

passages leading between the harbors. All pilot requests and

traffic information is carried out by VTS Oxelosund for

Braviken, and Gotland. Vessels should send a request for

pilotage and an ETA to Oxelosund VTS at least 12 hours in

advance, with a confirmation 5 hours prior to arrival.

7.1 The VTS traffic center at Oxelosund may be contacted on

VHF channel 9 and 16, and also by e-mail, as follows: 

7.1 The Oxelosund Pilotage Area lies between a line bearing

154° through Ragon (58°48'N., 17°26'E.) and latitude 58°00'N.

Pilotage in this area is compulsory for the following vessels

(see paragraph 5.1):

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 and 3 vessels of 70m in length, 14m beam,

and 4.5m draft and over.

7.1 In certain channels between Gustav Dalen and Vinterklasen,

pilotage is compulsory for the following vessels:

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 vessels of 90m in length or 16m beam and

over.

3. Category 3 vessels of 100m in length or 17m beam

and over.

7.1 In certain channels between Vinterklasen and Oxelosund,

pilotage is compulsory for the following vessels:

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 and 3 vessels of 90m in length or 16m

beam and over.

7.1 In certain channels between Vinterklasen and Norrkoping,

pilotage is compulsory for the following vessels:

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 vessels of 80m in length or 15m beam and

over.

3. Category 3 vessels of 90m in length or 16m beam and

over.

7.1 In certain channels between Gustav Dalen (through Lillhammarsgrun) and Oxelosund Jarnverk, pilotage is compulsory for

the following vessels:

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 and 3 vessels of 90m in length or 16m

beam and over.

7.1 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and usually board 1.5 miles

NNW of Gustav Dalen Light (58°36'N., 17°28'E.) or, by

special arrangement, S of Vinterklasen (58°39'N., 17°08'E.).

7.1 The Malaren/Landsort Pilotage Area extends E and N from

the vicinity of Stora Rotholmen (59°04'N., 18°19'E.) and is

fully described under Sodertalje in paragraph 7.17.

7.1 It should be noted that extensive changes to pilotage

procedures within Swedish waters are being carried out. Formerly, all initial ordering of pilots was carried out through the

main VTS systems. However, procedures for the initial ordering of pilots via the Swedish Vessel Reporting System (FRS)

on the Swedish Maritime Administration internet website are

being introduced. In exceptional cases, pilots may be ordered

by e-mail, telephone, facsimile, or VHF. A preliminary request

for pilotage should be made at least 24 hours in advance. A definitive request for pilotage must be made via the Pilot Request

System at least 5 hours in advance.

7.1 It is reported that initial ordering of pilots for The Sound and

all ports located S and W of Vastervik (57°46'N., 16°39'E.) will

be carried out via the Swedish Vessel Reporting System (FRS)

on the Swedish Maritime Admin-istration internet website.

7.1 For additional information, see the following internet website:

7.1 Regulations.—Speed restrictions are in effect within each

pilotage area and within the coastal approach channels.

7.1 Because of the non-tidal nature of these waters, the Swedish

authorities have enacted stringent anti-pollution regulations.

Directions—Offshore Route.—For information concerning

vtsoxelosund@sjofartsverket.se

Swedish Maritime Administration Home Page

http://www.sjofartsverket.se
170 Sector 7. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund to Landsort 

Pub. 194

the offshore route along this stretch of coast, see paragraph 4.1.

7.1 Caution.—Anchoring or fishing off this stretch of coast are

considered dangerous because of the possibility of mines being

adrift on the bottom, and are prohibited within an area, which

may best be seen on the chart, centered 5 miles SE of Kungsgrundet (57°41'N., 16°54'E.).

7.1 Ice and spring thaws, combined with resultant changes in the

tortuous channels, may cause the charted position of buoys to

become unreliable.

7.1 Local magnetic disturbances are reported to exist along this

stretch of coast.

7.1 Ice channels, with special regulations, lead through the offshore archipelago to several small harbors.

Krakelund to Arko

7.2 Krakelund (57°27'N., 16°43'E.) was described in

paragraph 5.14. The rocky and wooded coast extending

between this island and Arko (58°30'N., 16°58'E.) is very

irregular and indented by several inlets with variable depths.

Between Krakelund and Ido Stangskar, located 14 miles N in

the S approach to Vastervik, the mainland shore is fronted by

several islands, islets, and rocks which extend up to 6 miles

seaward.

7.2 Prominent landmarks along this stretch of coast include the

wooded islands of Vino (57°31'N., 16°42'E.) and Hasselo

(57°50'N., 16°45'E.); Huno Bote (57°34'N., 16°37'E.), a

wooded and round-topped hill, 51m high; Gindriksnasberget

(57°36'N., 16°35'E.), a flat-topped hill, which is 60m high and

steep on its S side; and Vindasen (57°55'N., 16°47'E.), an

extensive wooded hill.

7.2 Ljungskar (57°31'N., 16°47'E.), a bare islet, lies 2 miles E of

Vino and is surmounted by a prominent beacon, 10m high. A

light is shown from a tower, 9m high, standing on this islet.

7.2 Depths—Limitations.—A sheltered inshore channel leads

through the archipelago which fronts the coast between

Krakelund and the seaward approaches to Stockholm. Vessels

with drafts of up to 5m can transit this channel, but local knowledge is required. Several approach fairways lead from seaward, between dangers marked by lights and buoys, to this inshore channel and then to numerous minor, local harbors. The

channel may be entered at its S end via Krakelund, Ljungskar

SE, or Ljungskar E entrances. The Krakelund entrance can be

used by vessels with drafts of up to 3.6m. Ljungskar SE and

Ljungskar E entrances can be used by vessels with drafts of up

to 5 and 6.8m, respectively.

7.2 Keeping in the deep-water sections of the channel, vessels of

up to 5m draft can transit through the archipelago channel from

Krakelund to Landsort.

7.2 Caution.—A local magnetic anomaly is reported to exist

within an area centered about 3 miles E of Ljungskar. Deflections of up to 5° and 6° of the compass have been observed.

7.2 Depths along the tracks in the deep-water sections of the inshore channels may vary and the local authorities should be

contacted for the latest information concerning maximum allowed drafts.

7.3 Blackan (57°29'N., 16°49'E.), a group of shallow and

rocky patches, lies in the outer approaches to the inshore channel and is marked by a lighted buoy.

7.3 Gasfjarden (57°34'N., 16°35'E.), a bay, lies NW of Vino. It

is approached NE of Blackan via a fairway which can be used

by vessels with drafts of up to 6.8m. Anchorage can be taken

within this bay and to the W of Huno Bote in several places

with good holding ground, but local knowledge is required.

7.3 Flivik (57°33'N., 16°35'E.), a small loading place, lies on the

S side of Gasfjarden. There is a pier, in poor condition, with

depths of 2 to 4m alongside. A jetty, used for loading stone, is

situated 1 mile N of the pier. It can accommodate small vessels

with drafts of up to 5.8m.

7.3 Blankaholm, a former timber loading place, lies on the NW

side of Gasfiarden, 3 miles NNW of Flivik. It has 300m of

berthage and can accommodate vessels up to 4.8m draft. This

facility is now only used by pleasure boats and small craft.

7.3 Verkebacksviken (57°40'N., 16°39'E.), a deep and narrow

inlet, is entered 9 miles N of Vino. It is fronted by shoal

patches which extends up to about 7 miles offshore. Handelop

Island (57°41'N., 16°44'E.) and several islets lie in the entrance

to this inlet.

7.3 A fairway leads between the islets in the entrance and allows

vessels with draft of up to 7m to proceed to the head of the

inlet. Vessels up to 105m in length, 16m beam, 34m air draft,

and 7m draft can reach Gunnebo and Verkeback, two loading

places lying 6 miles NW of inlet entrance.

7.3 A small quay at Gunnebo serves an iron works. It is 53m

long and has depths of 4.3 to 4.8m alongside. Vessels can

anchor, in a depth of 25m, clay, off the quay, but local knowledge is required. An outfall pipeline extends seaward in the

vicinity of the quay and its landing place is indicated by a

notice board.

7.3 Verkeback (57°44'N., 16°32'E.) (World Port Index No.

25050) is a small loading place for timber. The quay provides a

berth, 90m long, with depths of 2.4 to 6.7m alongside. Vessels

can anchor, in a depth of 40m, clay, off the quay, but local

knowledge is required. Anchorage can also be taken, in a depth

of 24m, clay, at the head of the inlet, but local knowledge is

required as an outfall pipeline lies in the vicinity.

7.4 Skaftet (57°39'N., 16°35'E.), a loading place, lies on

the SW side of a narrow channel which joins the main fairway

leading into Verkebacksviken. There is 305m of total quayage,

with depths of 3.5 to 5m alongside. Anchorage can be taken in

a depth of 20m, clay, off the quay.

7.4 Ido Stangskar (57°40'N., 16°47'E.), an islet, lies 1.5 miles E

of Handelop Island. A light is shown from a tower, with a

beacon situated close S of it, standing on the N side of the islet.

7.4 Hamnklabbshallan (57°40'N., 16°48'E.), a rock, lies 0.4

mile ESE of Ido Stangskar Light. A light is shown from a

tower, 9m high, standing on this rock.

7.4 Sparo (57°43'N., 16°44'E.), a barren island, lies close off the

coast, 3.2 miles NW of Ido Stangskar. A light is shown from a

tower, 8m high, standing on the S extremity of this island and a

prominent beacon, 24m high, stands on the W side. A prominent chimney is reported to stand 2.3 miles WNW of the

beacon.

7.4 Kungsgrund (57°41'N., 16°54'E.), a shoal, lies 4 miles ENE

of Ido Stangskar and is awash in places. Kungsgrundet Light is

shown from prominent tower, 29m high, standing on this shoal.

A racon is situated at the light.

7.4 The coast in the vicinity of Sparo and Kungsgrund is fronted
Sector 7. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund to Landsort 171

Pub. 194

by numerous islets, rocks, and reefs. Ido (57°43'N., 16°46'E.)

is the easternmost of four islands which lie in the entrance to

Gamlebyviken and is marked by a light. Kroko and Grono are

two islands lying W of Ido. The area around these islands is

encumbered with numerous rocky shoals. Channels, marked by

buoys, lead between the dangers and into Gamlebyviken. The

inshore channel leads between Ido and Stickskar (57°43'N.,

16°45'E.), an islet, which lies close NNW and is marked by a

light. Stangskar (57°44'N., 16°45'E.), an islet, lies 0.8 mile NW

of Stickskar and is marked by a beacon.

7.4 Gamlebyviken (57°44'N., 16°42'E.), a narrow inlet, indents

the coast to the NW of Sparo and is bound to the E by Norrlandet, a peninsula. This inlet, which is entered from the inner

part of Vastervik harbor, has depths of 7.5 to 25m. A fairway

leads through the middle of the inlet and can be used by vessels

up to 75m in length, 15m beam, and 5.5m draft. 

7.5 Gamleby (57°54'N., 16°25'E.), a small commercial

harbor situated at the mouth of Gamblebyan. IThe main quay

lies in the N side of the river has 150m long with depths of 4 to

5.5m alongside. Small vessels with drafts up to 4.5m can be

accommodated alongside. It is reported that cargo is no longer

worked here for the commercial use. 

7.5 During severe winters, Gamleby and the other harbors along

this part of the coast are usually closed by ice from January to

March. 

7.5 Anchorage may be taken by vessels with local knowledge, in

depths of 10 to 25m, mud and clay, within an inlet lying on the

SW side of Gamlebyviken, 7 miles NW of Vastervik.

Vasterbaden (57°45'N., 16°45'E.), a rock, lies 2.5 miles E of

Vastervik. A light is shown from a prominent tower, 15m high,

standing on this rock. A racon is situated at the light.

7.5 Caution.—Due to the possible existence of bottom mines,

an area, within which anchoring and fishing are prohibited, lies

centered 8 miles ENE of Vasterbaden Light and may best be

seen on the chart.

Vastervik (57°46'N., 16°39'E.)

World Port Index No. 25060

7.6 Vastervik, a sheltered harbor, lies within the entrance

of Gamlebyviken and is formed by several islands, connected

by bridges. It is protected on the NE side by Granso, peninsula,

which extends SE from the S end of Norrlandet.

7.6 Depths—Limitations.—Two main approach routes lead

from seaward to Vastervik. The SE approach route, authorized

for drafts up to 6.5m, leads 8 miles NW from a position located

about 5 miles S of Kungsgrundet Light to Idofjarden

(57°42'N., 16°45'E.). It passes SW of Hamnklabbshallan Light

and close E of Ido Stangskar. This route then divides into two

tracks. The easternmost track, which is authorized for drafts up

to 5m, leads N through Idosund, a passage lying between Ido

and Kroko, and then W to the entrance of the inlet. The westernmost track, which is authorized for drafts up to 4.5m, leads

NW and N through Sparosund, a passage lying between Sparo

and Grono.

7.6 The E approach route, which is authorized for drafts up to

8.5m, leads W from the vicinity of Vasterviksangoring Lighted

Buoy toward Vasterbadan Light. It then leads SSW and passes

close SE of the latter light. The track continues though Tallskarshalet, a narrow channel, to the entrance of the inlet.

7.6 Secondary tracks lead N and S to the entrance of the inlet

from the inshore coastal route.

7.6 Lusarna, an island, lies in the inlet and divides the harbor

into outer and inner parts. Blockholm Sound, a narrow channel, passes N of Lusarna and leads into the inner part of the

harbor. It is marked by buoys and has a least depth of 5.8m.

Vessels with drafts up to 5.5m can enter the inner harbor

through this passage.

7.6 Gamlebyviken extends 12 miles NW from the inner part of

the harbor. This inlet can be entered via two canals, one

spanned by a bascule bridge and the other by a low fixed

bridge. The fairway leading through the inlet passes through

the northernmost canal and is authorized for drafts up to 5.5m.

The bascule bridge spanning this canal has a navigable width

of 18m.

7.6 The main commercial facilities in the outer harbor are situated at the E side of Lusarna. The northernmost berth is 150m

long and has a depth of 9.5m alongside; it has a ro-ro ramp at

the S end with a depth of 8.3m alongside. The central berth is

200m long and has a depth of 8.3m The southernmost berth is

100m long and has a depth of 6m alongside. It has been reported that lesser depths outside the S berth of Lusarna have

reduced the maximum authorized draft to 5.2m.

Sparo Light Vasterbaden Light
172 Sector 7. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund to Landsort 

Pub. 194

7.6 Nya Skeppsbrokajen, the main quay in the inner harbor, is

located on the W side. It provides a commercial berth, 240m

long, with a depth of 5.5m alongside and a fishing berth, 290m

long, with a depth of 5.5m alongside.

7.6 There are facilities for tanker, general cargo, ro-ro, container, bulk, and passenger vessels. Vessels up to 25,000 dwt,

165m in length, 25m beam, and 8.5m draft can be accommodated.

7.6 Aspect.—Vasterviksangoring Lighted Buoy (57°45'N.,

16°55'E.), an outer approach lighted buoy, is moored about 3.8

miles N of Kungsgrundet Light.

7.6 Buoys and beacons mark the numerous rocks, islets, and

shoals which lie adjacent to the approach tracks and channels.

The main fairways are indicated by lighted ranges which may

best be seen on the chart.

7.6 Granso Kanal, a shallow canal, leads N between the NW end

of the Granso peninsula and the SE end of the Norrlandet

peninsula. It is spanned by a fixed bridge.

7.6 A prominent church and a conspicuous water tower stand in

the town.

7.6 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots are provided by

the station at Oskarshamn and may be contacted (call:

Vastervik Pilot) on VHF channel 13. They board about 1 mile

E of Vasterviksangoing Lighted Buoy or about 4 miles SSW of

Kungsgrundet Light.

7.6 All ordering of pilots and traffic information is carried out by

Malmo VTS (see paragraph 1.18).

7.6 For additional information concerning the initial ordering of

pilots, see paragraph 7.1.

7.6 Regulations.—Speed limits are in force within the harbor

areas.

7.6 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained, in depths of

12 to 23m, clay bottom, within Lindodjupet, about 0.2 mile

SW of the S extremity of Sparo. Anchorage can be obtained, in

depths of 10 to 25m, loose mud bottom, within the outer

harbor, SE of Lusanara. Anchorage can be obtained, in depths

of 10 to 15m, loose mud bottom, within the inner harbor, W of

Lucerna. Local knowledge is required for these roadsteads.

7.6 Caution.—A power cable, with a vertical clearance of 30m,

spans Sparosund.

7.6 Currents with a velocities of 3 to 4 knots may be encountered within Sparosund.

7.6 Several submarine cables lie in the approaches and may best

be seen on the chart.

7.6 Local knowledge is necessary when using any of the entrance fairways.

7.7 Haradskar (58°09'N., 16°59'E.), a small and prominent island, lies 25 miles NNE of Vasterbaden. The coast between is fronted by numerous islets, rocks, and shoals. A light

is shown from a prominent tower, 29m high, standing on the S

end of this island.

Numerous small loading places and fishing harbors lie

within the inlets which indent this section of the shore. Several

channels lead through the offshore obstructions and may be

used by vessels with local knowledge.

Between Haradskar and Arko, 20 miles N, the inlets, which

indent the coast, cannot be entered from the open sea. Numerous islets and rocks front the shore and extend up to 12 miles

seaward in places. A passage, entered 3.5 miles NW of Haradskar, joins the inshore channel and leads to the small har-bors

of Arko, Soderkoping, and Mem. The mainland is generally

too low in this vicinity to be seen from offshore. Gubbo Kupa,

a hill, stands on the S side of an island, 3 miles NNW of Haradskar. It is 30m high, surmounted by a beacon, and visible from

seaward.

7.7 Sandsankan (58°19'N., 17°10'E.), a rock, lies 11.2 miles

NNE of Haradskar. A light is shown from a tower, 15m high,

standing on this rock.

7.7 Nielsengrund (58°17'N., 18°00'E.), an off-lying isolated

shoal, lies about 26 miles E of Sandankan Light and has a least

depth of 15m.

7.7 Caution.—Due to the possible existence of bottom mines,

an area, within which anchoring and fishing are prohibited, lies

centered 5 miles SE of Haradskar and may best be seen on the

chart.

7.7 An unsurveyed area, which may best be seen on the chart,

lies between the inshore channel and the open sea and extends

between Haradskar and Arko.

7.8 Mem (58°29'N., 16°25'E.), a small harbor, lies at the

head of Slatbakenand, 17 miles W of Arko. It has a depth of

3m and is used by pleasure craft. Small vessels may anchor, in

depths of 6 to 12m, clay, close off Killingholm, an islet lying

0.4 mile E of the harbor. 

7.8 Gota Kanal (58°29'N., 16°25'E.), 103 miles long, is the

longest canal in Sweden. It connects the Baltic Sea, in the vicinity of Mem, to the E side of Lake Vanern, via Lake Vattern.

There are 58 locks, each 35m long and 7.2m wide, along the

canal and it is spanned by 48 bridges. The canal has a minimum depth of 2.9m. Vessels up to 30m in length, 7m beam,

22m air draft, and 2.8m draft can transit. The canal is reported

to be closed to commercial vessels and is used only by small

craft and pleasure boats.

7.8 Trollhatte Kanal, in conjunction with the Gota Alv River,

extends from the small port of Vanersborg, at the S end of Lake

Vanern to Goteborg (57°42'N., 11°57'E.).

7.8 Arko (58°30'N., 16°58'E.), an island, lies close E of the Vikbolandet Peninsula and is separated from it by Arkosund, a

passage, which leads NW into Gransosund. The island is

fronted by rocks, reefs, and shoals, except on its SW side. A

Haradskar Light
Sector 7. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund to Landsort 173

Pub. 194

beacon, 20m high, stands on the SE side of the island and a

prominent disused light tower, 11m high, is situated on the N

side of Viskar, 0.2 mile SSE of it. Maro Kupa, a bare and

prominent hill, stands on the S end of Lanjo, a wooded island

lying 3.5 miles S of the beacon.

7.8 Arkosund (58°29'N., 16°57'E.), the passage leading W of

Arko, can be used by vessels with drafts up to 5.5m. The inshore channel leads through Barosund and into Arkosund.

Local knowledge is required.

7.8 Gransosund (58°31'N., 16°54'E.), a NW continuation of

Arkosund, leads W of Granso, an island lying 2 miles NW of

Arko. This marked channel can be used by vessels with drafts

up to 5.5m. Two fairways, marked by lights and buoys, lead

NNE and NNW from Gransosund. The former fairway passes

close W of Maro (58°34'N., 16°53'E.), an island marked by a

light, and continues ENE along the coast to Oxelosund. Both

fairways can be used by vessels with drafts up to 5m.

Arko to Enskar

7.9 The irregular and wooded coast lying between the

islands of Arko and Enskar (58°41'N., 17°29'E.), 20 miles NE,

forms a bight which is fronted by numerous obstructions. The

coast is indented by several inlets and numerous small harbors

and loading places lie within them. Several passages lead between the obstructions into these inlets. The fairways are indicated by lighted ranges, lights, and buoys, but local knowledge

is required.

7.9 Variable depths and detached rocky shoals, with depths of

less than 4m, lie up to 9 miles E of Arko and 5 miles SE of Enskar.

7.9 Norra Fallbadan (58°27'N., 17°06'E.), a group of rocks,

awash, lies centered 5 miles SE of Arko. A light is shown from

a prominent tower, 17m high, standing on these rocks.

7.9 Havringe (58°36'N., 17°19'E.), an islet, lies at the center of

an extensive group of rocks and shoals, 11.6 miles NE of Norra

Fallbadan Light. A large and prominent beacon, 19m high,

stands on the W side of this islet and a small floodlit beacon

stands at the NW extremity. Another small beacon is situated

on a rock lying close W of the NW extremity of the islet. Foul

ground and obstructions extend up to 4 miles E and S of the

islet.

7.9 Vastra Korpen Light (58°36'N., 17°19'E.) is shown from a

prominent floodlit tower, 7m high, standing on a small islet

close NE of Havringe.

7.9 Gustaf Dalen Light (58°36'N., 17°28'E.) is shown from a

prominent floodlit tower, 26m high, standing on a shoal, about

5 miles E of Havringe. A racon is situated at the light.

7.9 Norra Krankan (58°37'N., 17°23'E.), a rock, lies 2.3 miles

ENE of Havringe. A light is shown from a prominent floodlit

tower, 11m high, standing on this rock. A racon is situated at

the light.

7.9 Gullangsberg (58°37'N., 16°56'E.), a steep-to and conspicuous promontory, is located 8 miles N of Arko. Kummelberg, a

wooded hill, rises 2.3 miles NNW of this promontory. It is

802m high and prominent.

7.9 Caution.—Unsurveyed areas, within which uncharted

shoals may lie, front the coast between Arko and Enskar and

may best be seen on the chart.

7.10 Braviken (58°38'N., 16°35'E.), an extensive inlet,

extends 23 miles W of Gullangsberg and is encumbered by

rocks, reefs, and shoals which constrict the navigable passages.

The main fairways are indicated by sector lights and lighted

ranges, and the obstructions lying adjacent to the channels are

marked by buoys. Several small loading places are situated

within this inlet and may be used by vessels with local

knowledge. The port of Norrkoping lies near the head of the

inlet. For VTS and pilotage, see para 7.1. 

7.10 Ice.—The port approaches are kept open during the winter

by icebreakers. Ice bridges may be established during the winter in the inner part of the inlet when the ice is strong enough to

support road traffic. 

7.10 Depths—Limitations.—Two principal entrance channels

lead into Braviken and may best be seen on the chart. The main

S channel, which is less than 200m wide in places, leads about

7.5 mile NW from a position located 5 miles S of Gustaf Dalen

Light (58°36'N., 17°28'E.). It then leads about 2 miles WNW

and passes close NE of Havringe (58°36'N., 17°19'E.) and

close SW of Vastra Korpen Light. This track continues in a

WNW direction and joins the main deep-water channel, 1.5

miles WNW of Havringe. This route can be used by vessels

with drafts up to 6m. Local knowledge is required.

7.10 An alternate route leads 6.5 miles WNW from a position

located 2.5 miles SSE of Gustaf Dalen Light and joins the main

S channel close ESE of Havringe.

7.10 The main N channel, the principal deep-water route, leads in

Havringe Beacon

Gustaf Dalen Light
174 Sector 7. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund to Landsort 

Pub. 194

a NNW direction and passes close E of Gustaf Dalen Light

(58°36'N., 17°28'E.). It then leads NW and W, passing N of

Norra Krankan Light (58°37'N., 17°23'E.). This track

continues W for about 10 miles to Vinterklasen (58°38.5'N.,

17°08.0'E.), S of Oxelosund. Vessels with drafts up to 15.3m

can proceed in this channel as far as Syd Vinterklasen, a

lightening anchorage area lying 6 miles WNW of Havringe.

Vessels with drafts up to 12.6m can proceed farther W for

about 26 miles to the anchorage at Norrkoping.

7.10 Vessels with suitable drafts can also approach from the E.

They may proceed in a W direction and pass N of Gustaf Dalen

Light. This track then joins the main N channel about 1.7 miles

NNW of Gustaf Dalen Light.

7.10 An alternative channel, authorized for drafts up to 6m, runs

almost parallel to and S of the main deep-water route between

Vinterklasen, S of Oxelosun, and Gullangsberget (58°37'N.,

16°56'E.).

7.10 From the vicinity of Havringe, other passages lead NW to

Oxelosund and Nykoping, and N via Tvaren to harbors in the

approaches to Stockholm.

7.10 Caution.—Local magnetic anomalies exist in the offshore

approaches to Braviken.

7.10 Large unsurveyed areas, which may best be seen on the

chart, lie in the approaches to Braviken.

Norrkoping (58°35'N., 16°12'E.)

World Port Index No. 25190

7.11 Norrkoping, a large commercial port, lies 3 miles

above the mouth of the Motala River, which discharges into the

head of Braviken. The Swedish Hydrographic Office is situated

here.

7.11 Winds—Weather.—The mean water level may be raised by

up to 0.9m by prevailing E winds and lowered by as much as

0.6m by prevailing W winds.

7.11 Depths—Limitations.—The two principal entrance channels leading into Braviken have been previously described in

paragraph 7.10. The main channel leading from the vicinity of

Havringe to the port is about 35 miles long and follows the N

shore of the inlet to the anchorage roadstead off Stora Juten.

Vessels with drafts up to 12.6m can proceed through the inlet,

under normal conditions, to this anchorage.

7.11 From the vicinity of Stora Juten, a channel, dredged to a

depth of 12.3m, leads SW to Pampus Oil Terminal and the entrance to the Lindo Canal. This canal leads to the inner harbor

and is dredged to a depth of 9.5m.

7.11 The inner harbor has about 4,500m of total quayage with

depths of 5 to 9m alongside. There are facilities for ro-ro, ferry,

and passenger vessels. Vessels up to 190m in length and 8.4m

draft can be accommodated.

7.11 Pampushamnen is located on the E side of Handelo, 2 miles

NE of the town. The bulk quay is 460m long and has a depth of

12m alongside. A ro-ro berth, 80m long, is situated at the SE

end of the quay and has a depth of 9m alongside. The oil

terminal has three berths, 180 to 230m long, with depths of 7.5

to 12m alongside.

7.11 Bravikenshamn is located on the SE side of the Malmolandet

peninsula, 3.5 miles NE of the town. It is fronted by several

small islets. The paper quay is 126m long and has a depth of

8.8mm alongside. A ro-ro berth is situated at the SW end of the

quay and has a depth of 6.8m alongside. It consists of dolphins

and is 135m long.

7.11 Djuronshamn is located on the NW part of the Djuron peninsula, 5 miles NE of the town. Lilla Juten, a small islet, lies

close W of this harbor. The main grain berth is 160m long and

has a depth of 12.2m alongside.

Norrkoping—Inner Harbor

Norrkoping—Pampushamnen

Norrkoping—Bravikenshamn
Sector 7. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund to Landsort 175

Pub. 194

7.11 The port has facilities for general cargo, passenger, ferry,

bulk, tanker, container, and ro-ro vessels. Dry cargo vessels up

to 43,700 dwt, 183m in length, and 11.4m draft can be accommodated. Tankers up to 66,800 dwt, 236m in length, 33.3m

beam, and 11.4m draft can be accommodated.

7.11 Aspect.—A conspicuous aeronautical light is shown from a

structure standing 1.5 miles SE of the town. A prominent tank

farm is situated in the vicinity of the harbor. 

7.11 Pilotage.—All ordering of pilots for Norrkoping must be

made through Oxelosund VTS (see paragraph 7.1).

7.11 For additional information concerning the initial ordering of

pilots, see paragraph 7.1. 

7.11 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system has

been established within the approaches to Braviken and is

managed by the pilot station at Oxelosund. The system is mandatory for vessels over 300 grt, vessels over 50m in length, and

towing vessels if the length including the tow is over 50m. 

7.11 The Oxelosund VTS area includes the waters enclosed between Norrkoping, Kallvik (58°47'N., 17°29'E.), Hartso Stangskar (58°42'N., 17°28'E.), Gustaf Dalen Light, and Arkosund.

7.11 This VTS system is designed to prevent large vessels, constrained by their draft, from being impeded while in the sections of the channel extending from Falkensgrund (58°37'N.,

17°02'E.) to Munken (58°37'N., 16°58'E.) and from Stora Juten

(58°30'N., 16°20'E.) to Norrkoping. All vessels should obtain

traffic information prior to transiting these sections

7.11 Vessels must report to the VTS traffic center on VHF

channel 9, as follows:

1. On entry to or exit from the VTS area.

2. On passing Gustaf Dalen Light (58°37'N., 17°28'E.),

Vinterklasen (58°38'N., 17°07'E.), Hargo (58°36'N.,

16°54'E.), Algersgrund (58°39'N., 16°27'E.), and Arkosund

(58°29'N., 16°57'E.).

3. Upon arrival and immediately before departure from a

berth or anchorage; when changing from an intended route;

and on being involved in a grounding, or collision, or any

other occurrence causing any defect in navigation or maneuvering equipment.

7.11 All reports should include name, call sign, position, intended

route, and destination.

7.11 The VTS traffic center at Oxelosund may be contacted by email, as follows:

7.11 Anchorage.—Designated anchorage areas are centered

about 2 miles SSE and 2.5 miles ENE of Gustaf Dalen Light

(58°37'N., 17°28'E.) and may best be seen on the chart.

7.11 During good weather, vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in a depth of 9m, clay, close inside of Havringe. Anchorage, where suitable, can also be taken throughout Braviken.

Sheltered anchorage can be taken, in depths of 12 to 16m, clay,

within the roadstead at Pampus, 0.4 mile SW of Stora Juten

Light (58°38'N., 16°20'E.).

7.11 Caution.—Several lie across the fairway channel and may

best be seen on the chart.

7.11 Islets, rocks, reefs, and shoal patches, too numerous to describe, lie adjacent to the entrance fairway and are best seen on

the chart. Strict adherence to the marked fairways is advisable

as uncharted shoal patches may also lie in the vicinity of the

channels.

7.12 Falkens Grund Light (58°37'N., 17°02'E.) is shown

from a prominent floodlit tower, 7m high, standing on a rock at

the N side of the entrance to Braviken.

The coast between this light and Enskar (58°41'N.,

17°28'E.), about 14 mile ENE, is rocky, wooded, and fronted

by innumerable obstructions and detached shoals. Several inlets indent the shore and are accessible by passages which lead

between the dangers. These passages should only be used by

vessels with local knowledge.

7.12 Hargberg, a conspicuous wooded hill, rises on the NW side

of Hartso Island (58°43'N., 17°28'E.) and has a prominent bare

patch on its S side.

7.12 Lillhammarsgrund (58°40'N., 17°20'E.), an islet, is located

3.2 miles NNW of Norra Krankan. A light is shown from a

prominent tower, 12m high, standing on this islet. A racon is

situated at the light.

7.12 Marsviken (58°39'N., 17°04'E.), an inlet, is entered between

Falkens Grund Light and Oxelosund. It is fringed by shoals and

fronted by several islets. A branch passage, authorized for

drafts up to 4.3m, leads NW into the inlet from the N side of

the entrance to Braviken. A dredged entrance channel, marked

by buoys, leads from the anchorage roadstead at the head of the

inlet into a small harbor. It has a depth of 4.4m and can be used

by vessels up to 3.5m draft. The harbor has a pier, 70m long,

with a depths of 3.9m alongside. Anchorage can be taken, in

depths of 7 to 12m, clay, near the head of the inlet. Local

knowledge is required as several submarine cables and pipelines lie across the inlet.

Oxelosund (58°40'N., 17°07'E.)

World Port Index No. 25280

7.13 Oxelosund, an industrial port, is situated on a peninsula, 7.5 miles WNW of Havringe. The port includes the facilities at Jarnverk, a steelworks basin, located at the E side of the

peninsula, 1 mile NE of the main harbor.

7.13 Winds—Weather.—The harbor, which is open to the S, is

sheltered from strong S winds by the outer islands and rocks,

but some ground swell may be encountered.

7.13 Ice.—During severe winters, ice may hinder vessels between

January and April, but the main entrance channel is kept open

by icebreakers.

7.13 Depths—Limitations.—The wooded peninsula, on which

Norrkoping—Djuronshamn

vtsoxelosund@sjofartsverket.se
176 Sector 7. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund to Landsort 

Pub. 194

the port lies, is fronted at the E and SE sides by an extensive

bank containing numerous islands, islets, rocks, and shoals.

Most of the larger islands are situated SE of the harbor and

provide good protection.

7.13 For information concerning the main approach channels

leading into the entrance of Bravikean from seaward, see paragraph 7.10. The main entrance channel branches NW from the

principal N route within Bravikean at a position located about

1.2 miles SE of Vinterklasen (58°38.5'N., 17°08.0'E.); it is authorized for drafts up to 15.3m.

7.13 A secondary channel, authorized for drafts up to 6m, leads

ENE and NE from the N side of Braviken. This narrow channel

leads through the obstructions fronting the port and passes

about 0.3 mile NNW of Vinterklasen before joining the main

entrance fairway.

7.13 Another secondary channel, authorized for drafts up to 3.9m,

leads SW from the alternate Nykoping entrance channel and

joins the main fairway 0.4 mile NNE of Vinterklasen.

7.13 The entrance channel leading to Jarnverk branches off from

the main approach route to Nykoping. It leads WNW and

WSW for about 3.5 miles to the basin.

7.13 The main harbor provides about 1,050m of quayage with

depths of 2.3 to 16.5m alongside. The main berth is 250m long.

There are two ro-ro berths with depths of 6.9m and 8m alongside. There are facilities for bulk, general cargo, container, roro, tanker, and ferry vessels. Generally, cargo vessels up to

265m in length, 41m beam, and 14.3m draft can be accommodated. Tankers up to 265m in length and 12.8m draft can be

accommodated. It was reported that a vessel of 110,000 dwt

with a draft of 14.5m had been handled within the port. 

7.13 There is a quay at Jarnverk, 300m long, with a depth of 9.5m

alongside. Vessels up to 25,000 dwt and 9.2 draft can be accommodated.

7.13 Aspect.—A conspicuous water tower stands in the E part of

the town. A prominent church is situated in the NW part of the

town. Several prominent chimneys stand in the vicinity of the

steelworks at Jarnverk.

7.13 Several islands lie in the entrance to the harbor and may best

be seen on the chart. The entrance fairway leads NW and is

indicated by lighted ranges. Several rocks and detached shoal

patches lie close to the edge of the fairway and are marked by

lights, buoys, and beacons.

7.13 Pilotage.—All ordering of pilots must be made through

Oxelosund VTS (see paragraph 7.1).

7.13 For additional information concerning the initial ordering of

pilots, see paragraph 7.1. 

7.13 Regulations.—The port lies within the Oxelosund VTS

area. For more information, see paragraph 7.11 (Norrkoping).

7.13 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 30 to

39m, clay, about 0.5 mile W of Vinterklasen (58°38.5'N.,

17°08.0'E.). Anchorage can be taken in the approach to Jarnverk, in a depth of 22m, clay, about 0.7 mile ENE of Kolhalsen

Light (58°41.5'N., 17°10.7'E.). 

7.13 For the outer designated anchorage areas, see paragraph 7.11

(Norrkoping).

7.13 Caution.—Islets, rocks, reefs, and shoal patches, too numerous to describe, lie adjacent to the entrance fairway and are

best seen on a large scale chart of the area. Strict adherence to

the marked fairways is advisable as uncharted shoal patches

may also lie adjacent to the channels.

7.13 A permanent defensive minefield lies in the approach to the

harbor and may best be seen on the chart. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited within the field and vessels passing through

it during a thunderstorm do so at their own risk.

Nykoping (58°45'N., 17°01'E.)

World Port Index No. 25290

7.14 The port of Nykoping is situated 5.5 miles NNW of

Oxelosund in the NW part of Stadsfarden. It is formed by the

outer part of the Nykoping River.

7.14 Winds—Weather.—The harbor and approaches are sheltered from bad weather.

7.14 Ice.—Between January and the middle of March, ice may

obstruct the entrance channel and harbor basin, but icebreakers

generally keep the port open.

7.14 Tides—Current.—The river creates a weak current which,

during the spring flood, sometimes causes maneuvering problems within the inner part of the harbor.

Oxelosund

Oxelosund Steel Berth
Sector 7. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund to Landsort 177

Pub. 194

7.14 Depths—Limitations.—Two approach channels lead to the

anchorage roadstead in Orsbaken (58°42'N., 17°10'E). The

principal channel, which can be used by vessels with drafts up

to 10.8m, is entered between Norra Krankan and Enskar, 4.5

miles NNE. From a position located 2 miles N of Gustaf Dalen

Light (58°36'N., 17°28'E.), this route leads NW for about 12

miles to the roadstead. It passes NE of Lillhammarsgrund

Light (58°40'N., 17°20'E.) and NE of Norra Masklubbshallan

Light (58°40.2'N., 17°17.1'E.).

7.14 A secondary channel, which can be used by vessels with

drafts up to 5m, branches off from the main N channel leading

into Braviken. From a position located 0.8 mile NNW of Havringe, this route leads NW through the archipelago for about 7

miles to the roadstead.

7.14 The entrance channel leads NW and WNW for about 4 miles

from the N side of the roadstead in Orsbaken to the harbor. It is

dredged to a depth of 5.4m, over a bottom width of 30m, and

can be used by vessels with drafts up to 4.9m.

7.14 The main quay, with a ro-ro ramp at the N end, is 140m long

and has a depth of 6m alongside. The remaining part of the harbor basin provides 560m of berthage with depths of 3.2 to 5.4m

alongside. There are facilities for general cargo, bulk, and ro-ro

vessels. There are also extensive facilities for pleasure craft.

Generally, Vessels up to 100m in length, 15m beam, and 4.9m

draft can be accommodated.

7.14 Aspect.—The approach channels are indicated by sector

lights and lighted ranges. Several rocks and detached shoal

patches lie close to the edge of the fairway and are marked by

lights, buoys, and beacons.

7.14 A prominent fixed bridge spans the head of the harbor basin

and a conspicuous water tower is situated in the town.

7.14 Pilotage.—All ordering of pilots must be made through

Oxelosund VTS (see paragraph 7.1).

7.14 For additional information concerning the initial ordering of

pilots, see paragraph 7.1. 

7.14 Regulations.—The port lies within the Oxelosund VTS

area. For more information, see paragraph 7.11 (Norrkoping).

7.14 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 22m,

clay, in the S and central parts of the roadstead in Orsbaken

(58°42'N., 17°10'E.). This roadstead is sheltered, except during

SE winds.

7.14 For the outer designated anchorage areas, see paragraph 7.11

(Norrkoping).

7.14 Caution.—Entry to the harbor at night is restricted to vessels up to 1,000 dwt.

7.15 The coast between Nykoping and Enskar (58°41'N.,

17°29'E.) is fronted by innumerable islets, rocks, and shoals

which may best be seen on the chart. The inshore coastal

channel leads NE from Ledskar Light (58°42'N., 17°13'E.)

through the offshore archipelago to a position E of Bergo Islet

(58°45'N., 17°25'E.). It then joins the approach fairway which

leads N and passes W of Enskar. This latter fairway can be

used by vessels with drafts up to 6.7m. The inshore coastal

channel from Bergo divides W of Savo Island. One branch

rounds the N end of the island and leads SE; the other branch

leads E through Savosund (58°46'N., 17°29'E.), where it

rejoins the first branch. Vessels with drafts up to 6m and 4.2m

can use the N branch and E branch, respectively.

7.15 Enskar (58°41'N., 17°28'E.), a sparsely-wooded island, lies

about 7 miles NE of Havringe and has a prominent white patch

on its S extremity.

Enskar to Landsort

7.16 The wooded, rocky, and irregular coast extending

between Enskar and Landsort is fronted by numerous islets,

rocks, and shoals. Several inshore and coastal channels lead

through these obstructions. The principal channel leads N to

Sodertalje Harbor and the entrance of the inland waterway

system. There are few natural landmarks in this vicinity, except

Landsort.

7.16 Sector lights, buoys, and beacons mark many of the obstructions lying near the approach and entrance fairways. Detached shoals extend up to 5 miles seaward of Enskar and

Landsort. There are areas of deep water between many of these

obstructions, but without local knowledge only the prescribed

and charted fairways should be used.

7.16 Between Enskar and Landsort, the coastline turns abruptly N

and is indented by several inlets. These inlets are fronted by

dangers through which narrow fairways lead to several minor

loading places. The inshore coastal channel, after leaving

Savosund, leads E between the dangers and joins the Sodertalje

approach fairway, about 4 miles NW of Landsort.

7.16 Prominent landmarks in this vicinity include Storro

(58°41'N., 17°33'E.), a high and barren island, which lies 2.5

miles ENE of Enskar; and a high lookout tower standing on the

island of Lacka (58°45'N., 17°34'E.).

7.16 Hallsviken (58°53'N., 17°28'E.), a small loading place, lies

at the head of an inlet, 15 miles NW of Landsort. It is approached through an inlet, 5 miles long, which has depths of 7

to 27m and is fringed by reefs. The inshore coastal channel,

with a least depth of 6.7m, leads to the entrance of this loading

place. Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 8 to 15m, clay,

throughout the inlet, but local knowledge is required. 

7.16 Morko (58°59'N., 17°40'E.), an island 10 miles long, lies in

the middle of the inlet leading to Sodertalje. Palsundet, a constricted passage, extends N between Morko and the mainland.

It has a least depth of 3m and is spanned by a bridge. A ferry

and a submarine cable cross the passage, 4.2 miles N of the

bridge.

7.16 Oaxen (58°58'N., 17°43'E.), an island, lies close E of Morko

and adjacent to the approach fairway leading to Sodertalje.

Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 13 to 27m, clay, E of the

island or, in depths of 10 to 22m, clay, S or W of the island.

7.16 Stora Vika (58°56'N., 17°47'E.) a small harbor, lies at the E

side of an inlet located 3 miles SE of Oaxen. A branch fairway

leads NNE from the main Sodertalje approach channel to this

harbor. A quay, 200m long, fronts a cement works and has

depths of 6 to 7m alongside. Vessels with drafts up to 6.3m can

be accommodated. 

Sodertalje (59°11'N., 17°39'E.)

World Port Index No. 25320

7.17 The port of Sodertalje stands on both sides of the head

of an inlet in the vicinity of the entrance to the Sodertalje

Canal. It lies 28 miles NNW of Landsort and 22 miles SW of

Stockholm. The port serves as an important link between the
178 Sector 7. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund to Landsort 

Pub. 194

Baltic Sea and the Swedish inland waterway system. The canal

leads N into Lake Malaren, an extensive inland sea encumbered by numerous islands.

7.17 Ice.—Between January and the end of March, ice may hinder vessels entering the port or the Sodertalje Canal.

7.17 Depths—Limitations.—An intricate approach fairway

leads to Sodertalje from W of Landsort and local knowledge is

necessary for transit. Vessels should approach the pilot boarding position from the S and pass about 0.3 mile E of Landsorts

Angoring Lighted Buoy (58°40'N., 17°52.0'E.). This main

approach fairway can be used by vessels with drafts up to 9m

as far as the outer part of the harbor, S of the canal entrance.

7.17 The port consists of several berthing areas. The main commercial facilities lie on each side of the harbor fairway and S of

the canal entrance.

7.17 Sydhamnen, at the W side, has four ro-ro berths. The berths

are 100 to 160m long and have depths of 6.4 to 9.8m alongside.

7.17 Oljehamnen, the oil harbor, lies close above Sydhamnen. It

has two berths, 70 and 120m long, with depths of 10.1m and

6.9m alongside, respectively.

7.17 Igelstahamnen, a bulk harbor, lies close above Oljehamnen

at the E side. It has a quay, 145m long, with a depth of 10.5m

alongside.

7.17 Uthamnen, the outer harbor, lies adjacent to the canal entrance. The N part has a cargo quay, 90m long, with a depth of

8m alongside. The S part has a bulk jetty berth, 130m long,

with a depth of 8.4m alongside. Another quay, located in the N

part, provides 280m of berthage but is no longer used. 

7.17 Maren, a basin, lies close S of the canal lock. It has depths of

3 to 4m and is used by yachts and small craft.

7.17 The port has facilities for general cargo, container, bulk, and

ro-ro vessels. Vessels up to 35,000 dwt, 200m in length, 32m

beam, and 9m draft can be accommodated.

7.17 Vessels with air drafts up to 50m can enter Sydhamnen, but

are limited beyond this S harbor to air drafts of 40.5m.

7.17 The Sodertalje Canal connects Uthamnen, the outer harbor,

with Lake Malaren and is about 3 miles long. It is 61m wide

and has depths of 7.6 to 8.4m. Generally, vessels are limited to

a maximum draft of 6.8m, but vessels with drafts up to 7m can

transit with prior special permission. A lock is located in the

central part of the canal and limits the size of vessels transiting.

It is 135m long and 19.6m wide, with a depth of 8m over the

sill. Vessels are limited to a maximum length of 124m. A

vessel with a beam of 17m can transit with a draft up to 6.8m

and a vessel with a beam of 18m can transit with a draft up to

6.5m.

7.17 The canal is spanned by five bridges and vessels are limited

N of Sodertalje to an air draft of 34m.

7.17 Malarhamnen, a small harbor, lies at the N end of the canal.

It provides 280m of berthage, with depths of 3 to 6m alongside.

This harbor is mainly used by vessels waiting to transit the

canal. Snackvikshamnen is located close NW of Malarhamnen.

This quay is 80m long and has a depth of 5.5m alongside.

7.17 Vessels up to 8,000 dwt and 6.8m draft can reach Stockholm

and Malaren via the lake.

7.17 Aspect.—The approach channel is marked by lighted

ranges, sector lights, and buoys. The numerous dangers lying

adjacent to the fairway may best be seen on local Swedish

charts of the area. A number of conspicuous silos stand in the

harbor area.

7.17 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory in the Malaren/Landsort

Traffic Area (see Regulations) for the following vessels (see

paragraph 5.1): 

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 and 3 vessels of 70m in length, 14m beam,

and 4.5m draft and over.

7.17 In certain channels between Landsort and Nynashamn,

pilotage is compulsory for the following vessels:

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 vessels of 90m in length or 16m beam and

over.

3. Category 3 vessels of 100m in length or 17m beam

and over.

7.17 All ordering of pilots within the area must be made through

the Traffic Information Center of the Malaren/Landsort VTS at

Sodertalje (Sodertalje Pilots). Vessels should send an ETA and

request for pilotage at least 12 hours in advance of arrival at the

boarding place with a confirmation at least 5 hours in advance.

7.17 Vessels intending to enter Lake Malaren with a draft of 7m

must request special permission at least 48 hours in advance.

7.17 Boarding positions can be discussed with the pilot vessel on

VHF channel 11 after first calling on VHF channel 68.

7.17 Pilots generally board about 2 miles S of Landsort Light or

near Nynashamn Approach Lighted Buoy (58°45'N., 18°11'E.)

for large vessels. Pilots also board at the Sodertalje station on

Slussbron Lock (59°11'N., 17°39'E.).

7.17 For additional information concerning the initial ordering of

pilots, see paragraph 7.1. 

7.17 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) reporting

system operates within the Malaren/Landsort Traffic Area. It is

mandatory for all vessels over 300 grt, all vessels over 45m in

length, and towing vessels with tow lengths exceeding 45m.

7.17 The Malaren/Landsort Traffic Area has a seaward limit

bounded by a line joining Stora Rotholmen (59°04'N.,

18°19'E.), Langbaling (59°00'N., 18°23'E.), Stuphall

(58°°41'N., 18°°00'E.), Landsorts Angoring Buoy (58°°41'N.,

17°°52'E.), Hartso Stangskar (58°41'N., 17°28'E.), and

Savosund (58°46'N., 17°29'E.).

7.17 Vessels within the VTS area must maintain a continuous

listening watch on VHF channel 68. Vessels unable to maintain channel 68 watch may, on request, use VHF channel 16. 

7.17 The VTS traffic center covers the area for vessels entering

Sodertalje Kanal (divided by a lock into Norra Kanalen and

Sodra Kanalen). 

7.17 The VTS may be contacted on VHF channel 68, and also by

e-mail, as follows: 

Sodertalje—Sydhamnen

vtssodertalje@sjofartsverket.se
Sector 7. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund to Landsort 179

Pub. 194

7.17 Vessels must report to the Traffic Information Center at

Sodertalje, as follows:

1. Upon entering or leaving the Malaren/Landsort traffic

area. Reports by vessels proceeding into the area should include name, call sign, position, intended route, and destination.

2. Upon arrival at or before departing a berth or an anchorage; when changing from the intended route; and on being involved in a grounding, or collision, or any other occurrence

causing any defect in navigation or maneuvering equipment.

3. Upon passing the designated reporting points at

Tiljandersknalt (58°45'N., 17°49'E.), Skanssundet (59°04'N.,

17°41'E.), and Flasklosa (59°07'N., 17°41'E.).

7.17 Upon request, the Malaren/Landsort Traffic Information

Center will provide details of other vessels navigating in the

near vicinity, passage information, ice conditions, and other

pertinent facts. 

7.17 A similar VTS system serves the Sodertalje Canal and the

inland waters to the N of it.

7.17 Speed restrictions are in force throughout parts of the

approach fairway, the harbor, and the canal.

7.17 Anchorage.—Anchorage areas, designated for large vessels,

lie centered 9 miles SSW and 10 miles ESE of Landsort Light

and may best be seen on the chart. Anchorage can be taken, in

depths of 8 to 12m, mud and clay, within the outer part of the

harbor. Anchorage can also be obtained, in depths of 8 to 16m,

gravel over clay, within Lina Inlet, 2 miles N of Sodertalje.

7.17 Caution.—A power cable, with a vertical clearance of 42m,

spans the main approach fairway near the entrance of the canal.

7.17 A survey revealed a depth of 7.5m in position (59°30.9'N.,

16°44.0'E.). 

7.17 A railroad bridge, with a vertical clearance of 40.5m, spans

the port between Sydhamnen and Igelstahamnen.

7.17 A restricted area is situated in the approaches to the port and

vessels must stay in the fairway channel routes.

7.17 Ferries cross the main approach fairway in the vicinity of the

narrows at Skanssund.

7.18 Vasteras (59°37'N., 16°33'E.) (World Port Index No.

25395), the largest inland port of Sweden, lies on the NW side

of Lake Malaren, about 50 miles from Sodertalje and 60 miles

from Stockholm.

7.18 Ice.—Between January and March, ice in the approach

canals may hinder vessels, but the port is kept open by icebreakers.

7.18 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels with drafts up to 6.8m can

reach the port. From the N entrance of the Sodertalje Canal, the

fairway leads 4.5 miles NNW to the SE corner of Lake

Malaren. A main deep-water channel then leads across the lake

in a predominantly WNW direction to Vasteras.

7.18 Locks in the Sodertalje Canal limit the size of vessels to

124m in length, 18m beam, and 6.8m draft. Hammarbyleden,

the channel leading to the port from Stockholm, has a least

depth of 6.1m. A canal lock in this channel is 115m long,

17.4m wide, and has a depth of 7m over the sill. It limits the

size of vessels transiting to 110m in length, 15m beam, and

5.6m draft.

7.18 The W (Vastra) harbor basin has 930m of commercial quayage

with depths of 7.4 to 7.6m alongside. The E (Ostra) harbor basin

has 790m of commercial quayage with depths of 5 to 7.6m

alongside. It also provides 130m of berthage for ferries, with

depths of 4 to 4.5m alongside.

7.18 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 2.6m when closed, spans

the entrance to the E harbor basin. It has a passage, 30m wide,

when open.

7.18 The oil terminal berth is 125m long and has depths of 6 to 7.6m

alongside. There are facilities for container, ro-ro, tanker, and bulk

vessels. Vessels of up to 10,400 dwt and 6.8m draft can be accommodated.

7.18 Aspect.—Lights, pilings, beacons, and buoys mark the sides,

turns, and directions of the fairway leading to the port.

Numerous dangers lie adjacent to the channel and are marked

by beacons and buoys. A number of conspicuous silos and

tanks stand in the vicinity of the harbor.

7.18 Caution.—Numerous lie across the channel and may best be

seen on the chart.

7.19 Koping (59°31'N., 16°00'E.) lies at the extreme W

end of Lake Malaren, 60 miles WNW of Stockholm. The port

is accessible via the canals and channels leading from Sodertalje and Stockholm. It is open year round; icebreakers are used

when necessary.

7.19 Depths—Limitations.—The entrance fairway has a dredged

depth of 7.6m and a width of 60m. The oil terminal jetty, with

mooring dolphins, is located at the NE side of the outer basin.

It has an outer berth, 65m long, with a depth of 7.6m alongside

and an inner berth, 65m long, with a depth of 5.8m alongside.

7.19 The central basin has a grain storage quay at the NE side. It

is 80m long and has a depth of 7.6m alongside. A cement quay

is located at the SE side. It is 110m long and has a depth of

7.6m alongside. There is also 605m of commercial quayage,

with depths of 6.2 to 7.6m alongside, located close NW of the

cement quay. The old inner basin has 194m of quayage with a

depth of 4.5m alongside.

7.19 There are facilities for container, tanker, general cargo, and

bulk vessels. Vessels of up to 8,800 dwt, 124m in length, and

6.8m draft can be accommodated.

7.19 Aspect.—A number of conspicuous silos and a prominent

chimney stand in the vicinity of the harbor.

7.19 Caution.—A power cable, with a vertical clearance of 35m,

spans the fairway in the vicinity of the harbor.

7.20 Landsort (58°44'N., 17°52'E.) is located at the S end

of Oja, 12.5 miles ENE of Enskar. Landsort Light is shown

from a prominent tower, 25m high, standing at Landsort.

Landsort Light
180 Sector 7. Sweden—East Coast—Kalmarsund to Landsort 

Pub. 194

Landsorts Angoring Lighted Buoy is moored about 4 miles S

of this light.

7.20 Bredgrund (58°43'N., 17°52'E.), a detached shoal, lies 0.5

mile SSE of Landsort. A light is shown from a prominent

floodlit tower, 19m high, standing on this shoal. A racon is situated at the light.

7.20 Detached shoals, awash, and drying rocks lie up to about 5

miles E and 3.5 miles ESE of Bredgrund.

7.20 Caution.—A restricted area, the limits of which are shown

on the chart, lies in the vicinity of Landsort.

7.20 Local magnetic disturbances are reported to exist in the

vicinity of Landsort. 
8. 

Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma

8.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 8 — CHART INFORMATION
183

Pub. 194

SECTOR 8 

SWEDEN—EAST COAST—LANDSORT TO ARHOLMA

8.0 Plan.—This sector describes the Swedish coast, the approaches, and the off-lying dangers between Landsort and Arholma, 79 miles NNE. The descriptive sequence is S to N.

General Remarks

8.1 The irregular, rocky, and wooded coast between

Landsort and Bjorko, 80 miles NNE, is fronted by Stockholm

Skargard, an archipelago interspersed by innumerable dangers,

which extends up to about 30 miles offshore in places. There

are few prominent landmarks, although several islands in the S

part of the archipelago are high enough to be identified. Conspicuous light structures mark the seaward side of the Skargard. Depths in the approaches to the archipelago are very

irregular. Soundings are of little help in approach fairways, as

depths near the outer shoals are often greater than those lying a

few miles seaward. Numerous branch fairways and inner passages lead between the various dangers.

Much of the archipelago consists of uncharted dangers and

strict adherence to the prescribed fairways is advocated. The

40m curve closely contains the majority of dangers lying off

this coast. The major port of Stockholm and the lesser ports of

Nynashamn and Norrtalje lie along this stretch of coast. A

number of small harbors are situated within the archipelago but

are used only by small craft, local ferries, and pleasure boats. 

8.1 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory in Swedish coastal waters

and along certain fairways connecting ports along the coast.

The vessels subject to compulsory pilotage vary in type and

size according to location; these vessels are divided into the

following categories: 

1. Category 1—Vessels carrying or with uncleaned tanks

which last carried:

a. Liquefied gas.

b. Liquid chemicals defined in MARPOL73 Supplement 2, Annex 2 as category A, B, or (if vessel does not

have a double-skin hull under all cargo tanks) C.

c. Liquid chemicals which, according to the IMO bulk

chemical code, should be carried in Type 1 or 2 vessels. 

2. Category 2—All other chemical tankers which are

laden or have uncleaned tanks and all laden oil tankers.

3. Category 3—All other vessels. 

Directions—Offshore Route.—The offshore route leading

from the S to the Gulf of Bothnia (see paragraph 4.1) passes

though the Ahvenanmeren Deep-Draft Channel and the Aland

Sea.

The Ahvenanmeren Deep-Draft Channel is swept to a least

depth of 18m and is authorized for drafts up to 15.3m. It can be

used by all vessels.

The channel can be entered W of Bogskar Light (59°30'N.,

20°21'E.) and W of Svenska Bjorn Light (59°33'N., 20°01'E.).

It leads 4 miles N and turns NW, passing, with a minimum

width of 1 mile, N of the remnants of Armbagen Light

(59°38'N., 19°58'E.), N of Troskeln Vastra Light (59°40'N.,

19°52'E.), and S of Troskeln Ostra Light (59°40'N., 19°55'E.).

The route then continues in a NW direction, passing SW of

Flotjan Light (59°49'N., 19°47'E.). 

8.1 For a description of the the routes and dangers lying N of

Flotjan Light, see Pub. 195, Sailing Directions (Enroute) Gulf

of Finland and Gulf of Bothnia.

Stockholm Skargard—Entrances

8.2 There are four principal entrances leading into Stockholm Skargard. The designated routes through them are shown

on the chart.

The entrances and the distances to Stockholm with

authorized drafts are as follows:

1. Landsort Entrance (58°42'N., 17°52'E.) with an

authorized draft to Stockholm of 10m—has a distance of

about 80 miles.

2. Sandhamn Entrance (59°15'N., 19°02'E.) with an

authorized draft to Stockholm of 11m—has a distance of

about 42 miles. This entrance provides the shortest and most

direct route.

3. Soderarm Entrance (59°46'N., 19°25'E.) with an

authorized draft to Stockholm of 8m—has a distance of

about 55 miles.

4. Arholma Entrance (59°54'N., 19°05'E.) with an

authorized draft to Stockholm of 7m—has a distance of

about 55 miles. 

8.2 Channels that may be used by foreign merchant vessels

when navigating in Stockholm Skargard are, as follows:

1. Landsort to Sodertalje (see paragraph 7.17).

2. Landsort to Dalaro (59°08'N., 18°25'E.).

3. Dalaro to Stockholm, through Kanholmsfjarden

(59°20'N., 18°48'E.) or Vindostrom (59°18'N., 18°40'E.).

4. Jungfrufjarden (59°09'N., 18°23'E.) to Baggensfjarden (59°18'N., 18°20'E.).

5. Sandhamn to Stockholm, known as Sandhamnsleden.

6. Furusund (59°40'N., 18°55'E.) to Kanholmsfjarden,

through Ostra Saxarfjarden (59°27'N., 18°30'E.).

7. Kanholmsfjarden to Granhamnsfjarden (59°43'N.,

19°08'E.), known as Rodlogaleden.

8. The Alands Sea to Furusund, through Soderarm Entrance or through Arholma Entrance, known as Arholmasleden.

9. Furusund to Stockholm, known as Furusundsleden.

8.2 Ice.—Stockholm Skargard is usually frozen over from

December to March. Seaward of the archipelago, the sea is

generally ice-free, but with onshore winds, drift ice may be

troublesome. Icebreakers keep the principal entrances and

channels through the archipelago open to shipping. ComSwedish Maritime Administration Home Page

http://www.sjofartsverket.se
184 Sector 8. Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma 

Pub. 194

pressed air tubes to prevent ice formations are laid across the

fairways and approach channels. Notice boards and lights mark

the landing places of tubes, submarine cables, and pipelines.

Ice Reporting and Advice Services and Instructions for

Mariners in Fairways with Ice are contained in Special Regulations promulgated for shipping in the Stockholm Skargard

during the ice season. Vessels should consult the Stockholm

Harbor Administration and Pilot Authority for the latest ice information.

8.2 Tides—Currents.—The current from Simpnasklubb Light

(59°54'N., 19°05'E.) usually sets SW throughout Stockholm

Skargard. It passes Landsort and may attain a rate of 2 knots at

times. Currents close offshore and in the approach channels

through the archipelago may run in different directions and are

opposed to the current farther offshore. In the outer approaches

to the archipelago there is usually a current setting W.

8.2 Pilotage.—Pilotage within the area described in this sector

is controlled by two pilot stations. Pilots for the Landsort Entrance area are controlled by the Malaren/Landsort Traffic Area

station situated at Sodertalje. All ordering of pilots within the

traffic area must be made through the Traffic Information Center of Sodertalje VTS. Pilots generally board about 2 miles S of

Landsort Light or (for large vessels) near Nynashamn Approach Lighted Buoy (58°45'N., 18°11'E.).

8.2 For further information concerning pilotage within the

Malaren/Landsort Traffic Area, see paragraph 7.17 (Sodertalje).

8.2 Pilots for the Sandhamn, Soderarm, and Arholma Entrances

are controlled by the station at Stockholm. All ordering of

pilots in the area between 59°00'N and 60°00'N, except the

Malaren area, must be carried out through the Traffic Information Center of Stockholm VTS. This VTS center can be

contacted on VHF channel 73.

8.2 Vessels should send an ETA and request for pilotage at least

12 hours in advance of arrival at the boarding place with a confirmation at least 5 hours in advance.

8.2 Pilotage is compulsory (see paragraph 8.1) in this area for

the following vessels: 

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 and 3 vessels of 70m in length, 14m beam,

and 4.5m draft and over.

8.2 In certain channels to and from Gustavsberg, pilotage is

compulsory for the following vessels:

1. All Category 1 vessels.

2. Category 2 and 3 vessels of 60m in length, 9m beam,

and 4m draft and over.

8.2 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board, as follows:

1. At the Sandhamn Entrance—About 2 miles SE of

Revengegrundet Light (59°15'N., 19°01'E.).

2. At the Soderarm Entrance—NW or SE of Tjarven

Light (59°48'N., 19°22'E.).

3. At the Arhoma Entrance—NNW of Simpnasklubb

Light (59°54'N., 19°05'E.).

8.2 For additional information concerning the initial ordering of

pilots, see paragraph 8.1.

8.2 Regulations.—Two Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) systems

operate within the area described in this sector. Sodertalje VTS

covers the S part, which includes the Malaren/Landsort Traffic

Area and the Landsort Entrance. The Traffic Information Center of this VTS may be contacted on VHF channel 68.

8.2 For further information concerning Sodertalje VTS and the

Malaren/Landsort Traffic Area, see paragraph 7.17 (Sodertalje). 

8.2 Stockholm VTS operates in the N part of the area described

in this sector. It is mandatory for vessels over 300 grt, vessels

over 50m in length, and towing vessels where the length including tow is over 50m.

8.2 The Stockholm VTS Traffic Area is bounded by the following points:

1. Stora Rotholmen (59°04'N., 18°19'E.). 

2. Revengegrundet Light (59°15'N., 19°01'E.).

3. Soderarm Light (59°45'N., 19°24'E.).

4. Simpnasklubb Light (59°54'N., 19°05'E.).

5. Svartklubben (60°10'N., 18°50'E.).

6. Djursten (60°22'N., 18°24'E.).

7. Hammarbylussen (59°18'N., 18°05'E.).

8.2 The VTS Traffic Information Center will pass navigational

and traffic details to vessels as required. Within the VTS area,

all vessels must keep a continuous listening watch on VHF,

channel 73, and report, as follows:

1. 30 minutes prior to arrival at the pilot boarding position.

2. When passing the designated calling-in-points which

are shown on the charts.

3. On arriving at or departing from a berth, when anchoring or weighing anchor, when changing the intended

route, and on the occurrence of any incident.

4. On leaving the VTS area.

8.2 The initial report must include vessel’s name, call sign, position, intended route, destination, draft if over 6m, length if over

150m, and if vessel is a tanker. 

Caution.—The numerous dangers, lying in the approaches

and adjacent to Stockholm Skargard, are described with the

off-lying dangers and the entrance channels leading through

the archipelago. Several extensive danger areas, within which

navigation is prohibited, lie between the approach channels

leading to Stockholm and the coast. All of the principal channels leading through the archipelago to Stockholm, and much

of the contiguous coast, lie within either Protected or Restricted Areas.

8.2 Several areas within which anchorage, navigating, and landing are prohibited exist in the archipelago. They are described

if in proximity to the main channels. All areas are marked by

aids or by notice boards.

8.2 In addition, there are several areas within which gun firing

practices are conducted or which are used as torpedo launching

ranges.

8.2 Defensive minefields are laid in the seaward entrances of the

principal approach channels. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited within these fields and vessels passing through them

during thunderstorms are also cautioned that they do so at their

own risk. See Pub. 140, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

North Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent Seas for regulations

concerning vessels entering or de-parting Swedish waters.

8.2 Swedish Surveillance and Traffic Centero gather and study

information pertinent to all activities at sea. The centers

monitor VHF channel 16 continuously in the area at: 

8.2 Within Swedish waters, Military Procted Areas have been

established to guard defence installations and significant places

of Swedish defense. 
Sector 8. Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma 185

Pub. 194

8.2 Normally, in peacetime, foreign citizens and foreign vessels

have freedom of access and the right to remain in these areas

without the need for special permission. However, in times of

military preparedness, Swedish statute, special regulations, and

restrictions apply. Details of which are announced in the

Swedish Notices to Mariners. 

8.2 The government of Sweden proclaims that no foreigner may

enter a fortified area, govern-ment reserve, establishment,

installation, aircraft, vessels, or property that belong to the

defense authorities of Sweden.

8.2 Frequent gunnery (artillery) exercises are performed by the

Swedish Navy within areas in the vicinity of Landsort, Uto and

Huvudskar. Warnings of special gunnery exercises are issued

by Sveriges Radio, requesting mariners to avoid the areas.

8.2 There are four restricted areas and one semi-restricted area

lying in the vicinity of Landsort ; their approximate boundaries are, as follows:.

1. Landsort Restricted Area.—The area covers as

follows: From the vicinity of (58°47'N., 18°00'E.) extends

NE to the N of Nattaro (58°53'N., 18°08'E.).

2. Huvudskar Restricted Area.—The area covers as

follows: From the vicinity of (58°59'N., 18°29'E.) extends

WNW to the N point of Uto (58°57'N., 18°15'E.) then leads

to the S part of Orno (59°05'N., 18°26'E.).

3. Musko Restricted Area.—The area covers as

follows: From the vicinity of (59°02'N., 18°07'E.) encloses

the island and the waters W to the mainland. 

4. Morto-Bunsons Restricted Area.—The area covers

as follows: From the vicinity of (59°08'N., 18°29'E.) extends

2 miles SSW to toward Kvarnon.

5. Uto Semi-restricted Area.—The area between the

Landsort, Musko, and Huvudskar restricted areas is known

as the Uto Semi-restricted Area. 

8.2 Uto Artillery Range.—During firing exercises at this range,

navigation is periodically prohibited within an area, with a

radius of 13 miles, centered on position 58°56.95'N,

18°15.70'E. This area is patrolled during exercises and the following signals are shown, as follows:

1. A yellow rotating light is displayed from Uto Kvarn

windmill.

2. A yellow rotating light and a fixed red light (visible

between 278° and 015°) are displayed from the Uto Firing

Range Light (58°57'N., 18°16'E.).

3. A red flag by day and a red light at night are displayed

from Uto Sakerhetspost No. 1 (safety post) (58°55'N.,

18°13'E.), at the SW extremity of the area, and from Uto

Sakerhetspost No. 2 (58°57'N., 18°17'E.) at the NE extremity of the area.

Stockholm Skargard—Approaches

8.3 Landsort (58°44'N., 17°52'E.) and Bredgrund

(58°43'N. 17°52'E.), located near the S of Oja Island, are

described in paragraph 7.20. The S approach channel leading

through the archipelago to Stockholm passes E of Landsort.

8.3 As there are few natural landmarks on approaching this

coast, the light structures and buoys marking the outer dangers

are especially valuable aids in establishing positions. Several

conspicuous and wooded islands lie long the S part of this

rugged coast and include Mallsten (58°51'N., 18°02'E.), Nattaro (58°53'N., 18°07'E.), Alo (58°55'N., 18°13'E.), and Uto

(58°57'N., 18°15'E.).

8.3 A windmill, standing on top of a high hill on the NW side of

Uto, is very conspicuous from offshore. A prominent monument stands on an islet lying about 4 miles W of the windmill.

The island of Nattaro has dark shores, while the island of Uto

has several light red high cliffs which slope seaward. The high

and wooded S summit of Mallsten, lying in the narrows W of

Uto, is prominent.

8.3 Gunnarstenarna (58°46'N., 18°03'E.), a group of moderately-high islets, lies about 6 miles E of Landsort Light. A light

(Hallorna) is shown from the northeasternmost islet.

8.3 Nynashamn Approach Lighted Buoy is moored about 4.5

miles ESE of the light.

8.3 Huvudskar (58°58'N., 18°34'E.), a group of islands, lies at

the outer end of a chain of islands and shoals which extend up

to 7 miles E from the NE end of Uto. Shoals and rocks extend

up to 1.5 miles E of this group and vessels should not approach

them without local knowledge. Lokskar, the northernmost and

highest of the islands is surmounted by a prominent cairn.

8.4 Huvudskar Light (58°58'N., 18°34'E.), shown from

a prominent tower, 16m high, stands on the southernmost

island of the group. 

8.4 The numerous islands lying between Huvudskar and

Bullero, 17 miles NNE, are difficult to identify. Vindaban, a

group of rocks, lies about 3 miles NE of Huvudskar; a light is

shown from the highest rock when required by local fishing

vessels.

8.4 Norsten, lying about 5 miles NNE of Huvudskar, is bare with

a rocky hill of moderate height on it. Demban, with a least

depth of 2.2m, lies about 3.8 miles E of Norsten. An area of

shoal water extends up to about 1.5 miles E of Demban and is

marked at its seaward extremity by a buoy.

8.4 Sjalberget (59°04'N., 18°48'E.), lying about 5 miles NE of

Norsten, consists of two rocks; the N and higher rock is 4m

high and gray in color. 

8.4 Bullero (59°12'N., 18°51'E.) is high and bare with a prominent hummock rising at its N end. A tower stands 0.3 mile N

of the S end of the island.

Huvudskar Light
186 Sector 8. Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma 

Pub. 194

8.4 Almagrundet Light (59°09'N., 19°08'E.), equipped with a

racon, is shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 30m high,

standing 21 miles NE of Huvudskar. It marks the easternmost

danger lying near the main approach channel of the Sandhamn

Entrance. Almasgrund, a large shoal area, has a least depth of

5.8m and extends up to 3 miles WNW of the light.

8.4 Svenska Hogarna (59°27'N., 19°30'E.) is a group of bare

islets lying 20 miles NE of Almagrundet Light. A light is

shown from a prominent tower, 18m high, standing on Storon,

the largest islet of the group. Rocky shoals extend up to about 4

miles seaward of this group.

8.4 Kopmansgrund (59°29'N., 19°40'E.) is a pinnacle rock

lying 5 miles NE of Svenska Hogarna. A shoal, marked by a

buoy, lies about 1.8 miles NE of Kopmansgrund and has a least

depth of 9.5m.

8.4 Svenska Bjorn Light (59°33'N., 20°01'E.), equipped with a

racon, is shown from a prominent tower, 32m high with a helicopter platform, standing on Sodra Klatten, a shoal.

8.4 Sodra Klatten, along with Norra Klatten, another shoal lying

1 mile NW, has a least depth of 10m. These shoals lie at the E

edge of the dangers extending up to over 30 miles from the

Swedish mainland.

8.4 Bogskar (59°30'N., 20°21'E.), a group of rocks fronted by

shoals, is the southernmost danger in the Aland archipelago. A

light is shown from a prominent tower with a building and

wind generator, 46m high, standing on the westernmost rock.

A racon is situated at the light. On the easternmost and highest

rock, lying about 2.5 miles ENE of the light, there is a beacon.

8.4 Armbagen (59°38'N., 19°58'E.), a shoal, has a least depth of

6.7m and lies about 5 miles NNW of Svenska Bjorn Light. A

light is shown from a mast with a helicopter platform, 20m

high, standing on this shoal. A racon is situated at the light.

8.4 Troskeln (59°39'N., 19°50'E.), an extensive shoal, lies about

9 miles NNW of Svenska Bjorn Light and has a least depth of

7.6m. 

8.5 Troskeln Vastra Light (59°40'N., 19°52'E.) is shown

from a mast with a helicopter platform, 20m high, standing

about 1.2 miles E of the shallowest part of the shoal, 4.6 miles

NW of Armbagen. A racon is situated at the light.

8.5 Troskeln Ostra Light (59°40'N., 19°55'E.) is shown from a

mast with a helicopter platform, 20m high, standing 3 miles N

of Armbagen.

Almagrundet Light

Svenska Hogarna Light

Svenska Bjorn Light

Bogskar Light
Sector 8. Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma 187

Pub. 194

8.5 Svenska Stenarna (59°35'N., 19°35'E.), a group of high and

light-colored islets, lies 13.5 miles W of Svenska Bjorn Light.

The largest islet is marked by a beacon, 12m high.

8.5 Ice.—Icebreakers keep the main channels open all year, but

branch passages are often closed during severe icing.

8.5 Depths—Limitations.—The entrances providing access

routes to Stockholm are, as follows:

1. Landsort Entrance (58°42'N., 17°52'E.), authorized

for a draft of 10m.

2. Sandhamn Entrance (59°15'N., 19°02'E.), authorized

for a draft of 11m.

3. Soderarm Entrance (59°46'N., 19°22'E.), authorized

for a draft of 8m.

4. Arholma Entrance (59°54'N., 19°05'E.), authorized

for a draft of 7m.

8.5 Caution.—Anchoring is prohibited within the following

areas:

1. A minefield lying SE of Nynashamn.

2. A torpedo firing range within Mysingen and covering

an area between Musko and Uto. 

3. A minefield lying between Uto and Orno. 

4. A minefield lying in Horsfjorden, between Galon and

Musko. 

5. A submarine cable area lying along the N and NW

sides of Nattaro (58°53'N., 18°07'E.).

Stockholm—South Approach (Landsort Entrance)

8.6 Landsort (58°44'N., 17°52'E.), previously described

in paragraph 7.20, lies on the W side of the entrance to the S

approach channel. Between Landsort and Dalaro (59°08'N.,

18°25'E.), 29 miles NNE, the coast is fronted by numerous

dangers which extend to the E. The principal channel from

Landsort leads between these dangers and the off-lying islands.

8.6 The S approach channel leading to Stockholm, from E of

Landsort, passes through several deep-water bays and joins the

E and principal approach channel in Kanholmsfjarden

(59°20'N., 18°47'E.), 45 miles NE of Landsort. These bays

contain numerous dangers which are marked by lights and

buoys. The light sectors indicating the fairways should be

strictly followed.

Skrapan (58°47'N., 17°59'E.), an islet, lies NE of Landsort.

A light is shown from a prominent tower, 11m high, standing

on this islet.

8.6 Viksten (58°47'N., 17°57'E.), a group of islets, lies centered

0.8 mile E of Skrapan. A light (Viksten Nordvastra) is shown

from a tower standing on the NW side of the northernmost

islet. A prominent beacon is situated on the southernmost islet.

8.6 Mallsten (58°51'N., 18°02'E.), an island, lies 4.2 miles NE

of Viksten.

8.6 Masknuv Light (58°51'N., 18°01'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 10m high, standing on an islet located in the

S entrance to Dalaro Channel. A conspicuous disused tower is

situated close E of the light. This islet lies at the seaward end of

a shallow reef which extends about 0.6 mile W from the NW

side of Mallsten.

8.6 Vastergrund Lighted Buoy (58°50'N., 18°00'E.) is moored

about 1.4 miles SW of the S end of Mallsten.

8.6 Ostra Roko (58°54'N., 18°05'E.), an islet, lies 3.2 miles

NNE of the N end of Mallsten and is marked by a light. 

8.7 Mysingeholm (59°00'N., 18°16'E.) and Soderhall,

two islets lying 0.7 mile apart, lie about 8 miles NE of Ostra

Roko and are marked by lights.

8.7 Lilla Rotholmen (59°04'N., 18°20'E.), an islet marked by a

light, lies in the constricted fairway, W of Orno (59°04'N.,

18°26'E.). Numerous patches, with depths of less than 5m, lie

close to the fairway to the N and S of this islet and are marked

by buoys. The navigable fairways leading N of Lilla Rotholmen extend as far as Dalaro, but are constricted and encumbered with islands.

8.7 Aspo (59°07'N., 18°25'E.), Stenholm (59°08'N., 18°25'E.),

and Genbote (59°08'N., 18°27'E.) are islands lying adjacent to

the fairways in the narrows to the S of Dalaro.

8.7 Piltholm (59°08'N., 18°27'E.), an islet, and Piltholmsknall

(59°09'N., 18°28'E.), a rock marked by a light, lie on foul

ground adjacent to the fairway.

8.7 Fjardhallan (59°09'N., 18°33'E.) and Kofotsgrund (59°13'N.,

18°37'E.) are detached patches lying close to the fairway.

8.7 Langholmen (59°18'N., 18°46'E.), an island, lies in the S

approach to Stockholm and is marked by a light.

8.8 Herrhamra (58°48'N., 17°50'E.), a harbor of refuge,

lies 3 miles N of Landsort and is approached through Herrhamraleden, a channel, which separates the islands from the shoals

N of Oja and S of Toro. Narrow and buoyed fairways, available for drafts up to 4.5m, lead E and W of Landsort to the harbor and roadstead anchorage. The inshore coastal fairway leads

through this roadstead area and joins the main fairway to the N

of Viksten. Anchorage can be taken, in depths up to 12m, clay,

close NE of Krokskar Beacon (58°47.2'N., 17°50.7'E.).

Depths—Limitations.—The main channel leading to

Stockholm from the Landsort Entrance is authorized for drafts

up to 10m during daylight.

Vessels should approach Landsort from the S using the white

sector of Bredgrund Light. They should pass between the

buoys marking Storpallan shoal (58°41.8'N. 17°53.0'E.) and

Bonden shoal (58°42.1'N. 17°51.0'E.).

From the pilot boarding position located S of Landsort, the

track leads N and NNE to pass about 0.3 mile ESE of Bredgrund Light (58°43'N. 17°52'E.). It continues NE and NNE to

pass between Skrapan and the S end of Viksten. The track then

leads in a NNE direction and passes close WNW of Vastergrund Lighted Buoy (58°50'N., 18°00'E.) and W of Masnuv

Light.

Between the vicinity of Vastergrund Lighted Buoy and MasSkrapan Light
188 Sector 8. Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma 

Pub. 194

nuv Light, this main channel merges with the route, authorized for drafts up to 15.3m, leading to Nynashamn (see paragraph 8.9).

An alternate route, authorized for drafts up to 6.6m, leads

NNE from the vicinity of Landsort. It passes close WNW of

the N end of Viksten and rejoins the main track W of Masnuv

Light. Vessels may also proceed through Danziger Gatt

(58°51'N. 18°04'E.), which has a least depth of 9.8m, to join

the main channel N of Mallsten.

From Masknuv Light, the track leads 15 miles NE to the

anchorage roadstead lying S of Langgarn Light (59°04'N.

18°18'E.). It passes close NW of Ostra Roko Light and between the islets of Mysingeholm and Soderhall.

8.8 From S of Langgarn Light, the main channel continues for

26 miles NE into Kanholmsfjarden (59°22'N., 18°45'E.). In

Kanholmsfjarden, the main channel intersects with the Sandhamn Entrance channel, about 1.2 miles NNW of Yxhammarskobben Light (59°19'N., 18°49'E.), and leads 32 miles

NW to Stockholm.

8.8 The channels are marked by aids for day and night transits,

but the draft limitations at night vary. Information concerning

the size and draft requirements for night transits may be requested by contacting the Stockholm VTS Traffic Information

Center.

8.8 Pilotage.—Pilots for the Landsort Entrance area are provided by the Malaren/Landsort Traffic Area station situated at

Sodertalje. All ordering of pilots must be made through Sodertalje VTS (see paragraph 8.2).

8.8 Regulations.—Speed limits are in force within some sections of the fairway channels.

8.8 The Landsort Entrance is located within the Malaren/Landsort Traffic Area and is covered by Sodertalje VTS (see paragraph 8.2).

8.8 Anchorage.—There is an anchorage area for large vessels,

with depths of 20 to 70m, lying centered 8 miles SSW of

Bredgrund Light. Another anchorage area, with depths of 15 to

40m and good holding ground, lies W of Oja and 0.7 mile from

Landsort Light. A protected anchorage area, with depths of 15

to 40m, good holding ground, lies 1 mile NE of Ostra Roco

Light. An anchorage area, with depths of 12 to 30m, over a

thick and loose clay bottom, lies NE of Myseingeholm.

8.8 Several anchorage areas, with depths up to 40m, clay bottom, lie 5 miles SW of Dalaro, between Stora Rotholmen and

Galon.

8.8 Caution.—Most of the anchorage roadsteads lie within protected or controlled areas and special rules apply to foreign

vessels.

Nynashamn (58°54'N., 17°58'E.)

World Port Index No. 25330 

8.9 Nynashamn, an industrial port, has one of the largest

oil refineries in Sweden. The harbor, which also serves as a

ferry terminal, is situated 10.5 miles NNE of Landsort. It lies

between the island of Bedaron and the town. The oil terminal is

situated at the N end of the port, between the mainland and the

island of Brunsviksholmen.

8.9 Winds—Weather.—Continuous winds from the W and NW

raise the water level and winds from the E and SE winds lower

8.9 Depths—Limitations.—The main approach route leading

from seaward is authorized for drafts up to 15.3m. It leads NW

from the vicinity of Nynashamn Approach Lighted Buoy

(58°45'N., 18°11'E.) and passes about 0.8 mile NE of Gunnarstenarna (Hallorna) Light. The route then rounds Vastergrund

Lighted Buoy (58°50'N., 18°00'E.) to the W and leads NNE to

a position close W of Masknuv Light (58°51'N., 18°01'E.).

From this light, the route continues in a N direction and passes

about 0.3 mile W of Orngrund Light (58°53.9'N., 18°01.4'E.).

It then leads NNW, NW, and SW to the harbor entrance.

8.9 An alternate approach channel leads WSW and NW from a

position located 0.4 mile W of Ostra Roko Light (58°54'N.,

18°05'E.). It passes N of Orngrund Light (58°53.9'N.,

18°01.4'E.) and merges with the main channel.

8.9 A secondary approach channel, authorized for drafts up to

4m, leads into the S part of the harbor. It leads in a N direction

from a position located about 0.5 mile NNE of Viksten Nordvasta Light (58°47'N., 17°57'E.).

8.9 The harbor has general depths of 9 to 28m. A detached

shoal, with a least depth of 5.4m, lies in the middle of the harbor and is marked by lighted and unlighted buoys.

8.9 The ferry terminal provides three berths with ro-ro facilities.

The largest is 210m long and has a depth of 8m alongside. Roro ferries with drafts up to 7.5m can be handled.

8.9 The oil terminal has six berths. East Quay consists of No. 1

Berth, which is 100m long and has a depths of 17.5m alongside. West Quay consists of No. Berth 2, No. Berth 3, and No.

Berth 4, which have a combined length of 155m and depths of

10 to 12.9m alongside. No. 5 Berth, a detached berth, is 75m

long and has a depth of 5.2m alongside

8.9 Vessels up to 200,000 dwt, 300m in length, and 15.3m draft

ca be accommodated.

8.9 Aspect.—Several conspicuous tanks and chimneys stand in

the vicinity of the oil terminal.

8.9 Pilotage.—Pilots for the port are provided by the Malaren/

Landsort Traffic Area station situated at Sodertalje. All ordering of pilots must be made through Sodertalje VTS (see paragraph 8.2).

8.9 For additional information concerning the initial ordering of

pilots, see paragraph 8.1.

8.9 Regulations.—The approaches to the port are situated

within the Malaren/Landsort Traffic Area and are covered by

Sodertalje VTS (see paragraph 8.2).

8.9 Vessels should send an ETA to the oil terminal at least 24

hours in advance.

Nynashamn
Sector 8. Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma 189

Pub. 194

8.9 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 8 to

10m, clay and stones, abreast the wharves in the SW part of the

harbor. Anchorage can also be taken farther N, in depths of 13

to 31m, clear of Ankargrundet.

8.9 A designated anchorage area for large vessels (VLCCs) lies

centered 6 miles SE of Gunnarstenarna (Hallorna) Light.

8.9 Caution.—The fairway leading to the oil berths is closed to

shipping when tankers are berthed alongside.

8.9 Mooring lines are laid in an E direction across the channel to

Brunsviksholmen and to several floodlit mooring buoys which

are situated S and SW of the S end of the island. The landing

places are marked by warning notices, illuminated at night, and

flashing red lights.

8.9 Several submarine cables lie across the fairways and may

best be seen on the chart.

8.10 The irregular coast extending between Nynashamn

and Dalaro, 19 miles NE, is fronted by Musko Island

(59°00'N., 18°07'E.) and Galon Island (59°05'N., 18°16'E.).

Both of these islands are fringed by rocks, reefs, and shoals

which extend up to 0.5 mile from the edge of the S approach

fairway leading to Stockholm.

8.10 Most of the coastal waters and offshore islands lie within

restricted or semi-restricted areas and vessels must navigate

within the designated fairways. The limits of these restricted

areas are shown on local coastal charts. See Pub. 140, Sailing

Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and

Adjacent Seas for details.

8.11 Dalaro (59°08'N., 18°25'E.), lying at the E extremity

of the coast extending from Nynashamn, is situated across the

narrows from and NW of Orno (59°04'N., 18°25'E.). This harbor is reported to be used primarily by small craft and pleasure

boats. 

A shallow canal, spanned by bridges, separates Dalaro from

the mainland. It provides access, via Granofjarden (59°11'N.,

18°26'E.) to Stockholm for small craft. The main S approach

channel, which leads between several islands and numerous

shoals, is marked by lights and buoys. Anchorage can be taken,

in depths of 13 to 27m, sand, in a bay lying off the SW end of

Dalaro. Local knowledge is required.

8.11 The coast extending NW from Dalaro to Stockholm is

fronted by numerous islands and islets which are encircled by

rocky shoals. Several branch fairways, marked by buoys, lead

between these obstructions to Stockholm.

8.11 Saltsjobaden (59°17'N., 18°19'E.), a resort fronted by a

small harbor, is situated 9 miles NNW of Dalaro. It can be approached via a channel which is authorized for drafts of up to

4.2m. This harbor is reported to be used primarily by small

craft and pleasure boats. 

8.11 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 9 to to 12m, clay, off a

small bay fronting the SE part of the town.

8.11 Gustavsberg (59°19'N., 18°23'E.) (World Port Index No.

25360), a small harbor, lies at the head of a constricted inlet, 4

miles NE of Saltsjobaden. It is approached through a narrow

channel, which is marked by buoys and spanned by a road

bridge with a vertical clearance of 22m over a width of 30m.

8.11 There are extensive facilities for pleasure craft. The commercial quay is 74m long and has a depth of 4.8m alongside.

Small vessels with drafts up to 4.2m can be accommodated.

Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 10 to 25m, clay, off the

entrance to the approach channel.

Stockholm—East Approach (Sandhamn Entrance)

8.12 The Sandhamn Entrance is fronted by several islands,

a number of groups of islets, and numerous shoal patches,

which may best be seen on the chart. The intricate part of the

approach channel leading to Stockholm extends generally NW

and SW through several bays and sounds. Several islands and

islets, lying within these bays, are prominent.

When approaching this entrance from seaward, a group of

radio towers standing at Stavsnas (59°17'N., 18°43'E.) are reported to be conspicuous. A tall radio mast, situated about 1

mile NW of the group of towers, is also reported to be conspicuous.

Sandon (59°17'N., 18°56'E.) is the largest and southwesternmost of a group of islands lying in the E approaches to

Stockholm. Its S part is fringed by a shallow bank.

8.12 Sandhamn (59°17'N., 18°55'E.) (World Port Index No.

25370), a resort village, is situated on the NE side of Sandon. It

is fronted by a small harbor which is protected by two breakwaters. This harbor is used only by small craft, local ferries,

and pleasure boats.

8.12 Utkiken Tower (59°17.2'N., 18°54.7'E.), equipped with a

racon, stands close SW of Sandhamn.

8.12 Conspicuous towers stand on the islands of Gronskar

(59°17'N., 19°02'E.), Korso (59°17'N., 18°57'E.), and Lokholm

(59°18'N., 18°56'E.).

8.12 Svangen Light (59°16'N., 18°59'E.) is shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 15m high, standing on a detached rock

lying 1.4 miles ESE of the S end of Sandon.

8.12 Sodraskargarden, an extensive group of islets, lies centered

on an area of foul ground 1.5 miles SW of Svangen Light.

Brandskargarden, a group of barren islets, lies centered 1.3

miles SW of Sodraskargarden. The islets appear as brown hills

and are conspicuous from seaward.

8.12 Revengegrundet Light (59°15'N., 19°01'E.), equipped with

a racon, is shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 21m high,

standing on a detached shoal, 1.6 miles SE of Svangen Light.

8.13 Sodergrundan (59°15'N., 19°03'E.), a shoal area

with parts awash, lies 1.2 miles E of Revengegrundet Light and

is marked by a lighted buoy moored on its S side.

8.13 Prejaren (59°13'N., 19°07'E.), a detached shoal patch, lies

4.1 miles SE of Revengegrundet Light. It has a least depth of

9.3m and is marked by a lighted buoy moored close E.

8.13 Almagrundet Light (59°09'N., 19°08'E.), previously described in paragraph 8.4, is situated 6.7 miles SSE of Revengegrundet Light in the outer approaches.

Depths—Limitations.—The main channel leading to

Stockholm from the Sandhamn Entrance is authorized for

drafts up to 11m.

The main route (Sandhamn Passage) is 36 miles long. It

joins the main channel leading from the Landsort Entrance, in

Kanholmsfjarden (59°20'N., 18°47'E.).

From a position located about 5 miles E of Almagrundet

Light (59°09'N., 19°08'E.), the route leads NW for 10 miles. It
190 Sector 8. Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma 

Pub. 194

passes 0.3 mile NE of Prejaren Lighted Buoy (59°13'N.,

19°07'E.), 0.3 mile SW of Sodergrunden Lighted Buoy

(59°15'N., 19°03'E.), and 0.3 mile NE of Revengegrundet

Light (59°15'N., 19°01'E.). The track then leads NW, WNW,

and WSW to round Svangen Light (59°16'N., 18°59'E.). It continues NW and N along the W side of Sandon.

An alternate route, with a least depth of 21m, leads in a N

direction for about 6 miles from a position located 4 miles W

of Almagrundet Light and joins the main channel close SE of

Revengegrundet Light.

Sandhamnssundet, a narrow passage, leads along the NE

side of Sandon and joins the main channel close NNW of the N

end of the island. This passage is only 30m wide and is limited

to small vessels up to 300 grt and 5m draft.

From close N of the N end of Sandon, the main route leads

NW into the S part of Kanholmsfjarden (59°20'N., 18°47'E.). It

passes close SW of Getholmen Light (59°18.1'N., 18°52.5'E.),

close NE of Yxhammarskobben Light (59°18.8'N.,

18°48.6'E.), and close SW of Gastholmsgrundet Light

(59°19.1'N., 18°48'6E.). The channel leading NE from the

Landsort Entrance merges into this main route at a position

located about 1.2 miles NNW of Yxhammarskobben Light.

A secondary channel, with a least depth of 9m, leads NW

and W from a position located 0.6 mile NE of Svangen Light.

It passes NE of Korso and N of Bjorko and joins the main route

close ESE of Getholmen Light.

The main route continues NW through Kanholmsfjarden and

then leads W along the N side of Vindo (59°21'N., 18°42'E.) to

a position located close S of Kalvon (59°22.5'N., 18°36.5'E.).

From the island of Kalvon, the route trends NW, passing close

NE of Sando Sugga Light (59°23'N., 18°34'E.) and Nyvarp

Light (59°24'N., 18°31'E.), to a position located 1.3 miles SE

of Valoarna Light (59°26'N., 18°30'E.). From this position, the

main route continues NW and passes 0.2 mile W of Valoarna

Light. It then trends WNW to a position located close S of

Ostra Algogrundet Light (59°26.7'N., 18°24.8'E.).

From close S of Ostra Algogrundet Light, the route leads

WSW and SSW, passing through the southbound lane of the

TSS, to a position located 0.2 mile W of Tisterogrundet Light

(59°25.9'N., 18°23.5'E.). It then leads SE and S, through the

Oxdjupet narrows, to a position located close W of Sodernas

Light (59°21.7'N., 18°27.1'E.), in the N part of Torsbyfjarden.

From close W of Sodernas Light, the main route leads SW

for about 0.5 mile, in the southbound lane of the TSS, and then

trends WNW to pass close N of Lagnogrundet Light

(59°21.5'N., 18°24.9'E.). It continues WNW through Langholmfjarden, passing between Tynningo Light (59°22.3'N.,

18°23.3'E.) and the N side of Bergholmen island, to a position

located close SW of Bogesund Light (59°22.9'N., 18°18.2'E.).

The route then leads SW, passing close NW of Granholmen

Light (59°22.7'N., 18°17.7'E.) and SE of Alvviksgrundet Light

(59°21.8'N., 18°15.5'E.), to a position located close NW of

Kungshamn Light (59°20.1'N., 18°12.6'E.). It then continues

W and NW, passing N of Libertus Light (59°19.9'N.,

18°10.6'E.), into the port of Stockholm.

8.13 The fairway channels are marked by aids for day and night

transits, but the draft limitations at night vary. Information

concerning the size and draft requirements for night transits

may be requested by contacting the Stockholm VTS Traffic

Information Center.

8.13 Several seconday routes lead through the archipelago and

may best be seen on the chart. Two inner channels lead N from

Kanholmsfjarden (59°20'N., 18°47'E.) to join the main Soderarm Entrance route. Rodlogaleden, also known as Majaleden,

is authorized for drafts up to 7m. This channel leads NNE for

28 miles to join the main route in Granhamnsfjarden (59°43'N.,

19°08'E.). Husaroleden, a secondary channel, is authorized for

drafts up to 4.2m. It leads N for 22 miles to join the main route

at a position located 2 miles NE of Furusund (59°40'N.,

18°55'E.). 

8.13 Pilotage.—Pilots for the Sandhamn Entrance area are controlled by the station at Stockholm. All ordering of pilots in the

area must be carried out through the Traffic Information Center

of Stockholm VTS (see paragraph 8.2).

8.13 Regulations.—The Sandhamn Entrance is situated within

the Stockholm VTS Traffic Area (see paragraph 8.2).

8.13 The channels leading through this entrance lie within a

restricted area and all vessels must keep strictly to the

designated fairways when enroute to Stockholm.

8.13 Speed limits are in force within some sections of the fairway

channels.

8.13 Vessels over 800 grt are not allowed to meet in the sections

of the main route situated within Oxdjupet Narrows and N of

Bergholmen Island.

8.13 A ferry crosses the channel in the vicinity of Oxdjupet narrows.

8.13 In the Stockholm VTS Traffic Area, vessels are allowed to

anchor only by special permission.

8.13 Anchorage.—A designated outer anchorage area lies centered 1.5 miles SE of Revengegrundet Light and has depths of

28 to 51m.

8.13 Caution.—Anchoring is prohibited within an explosives

dumping ground area lying centered 0.5 mile E of Stora Fjardholmen (59°21'N., 18°50'E.).

8.13 A defensive minefield lies within Oxdjupet Narrows and

fairways leading through it are marked by beacons and buoys.

Vessels are cautioned not to anchor or fish in the field and they

should also avoid passing through it during a thunderstorm.

8.13 Two extensive areas, within which surveys are incomplete,

lie on each side of the Sandhamn Entrance and may best be

seen on the chart.

8.13 Two restricted areas lie in the vicinity of the E approach and

are listed below.

8.13 Sandhamn Channel West Restricted Area.—This area is

bounded by a line joining the following positions:

1. The NW extremity of Sandon (59°17'N., 18°54'E.).

2. Ljusharan (Gjusharan) (59°18'N., 18°55'E.).

3. Ingboskar (Ingboskaret) (59°19'N., 18°54'E.).

4. Sommaro (59°19'N., 18°52'E.).

5. Yxhammarskubben Light (59°19'N., 18°49'E.).

6. Torskkobben (59°19'N., 18°48'E.).

7. The N extremity of Rumaro (59°18'N., 18°47'E.).

8. The NE extremity of Rumaro.

9. Lilla Hastskar (59°15'N., 18°53'E.).

10. The E extremity of Stora Hastskar (59°15'N.,

18°54'E.).

11. The NW extremity of Sandon (59°17'N., 18°53'E.).

8.13 Sandhamn Channel East Restricted Area.—This area is

bounded by a line joining the following positions:

1. The W extremity of Krokso (59°18'N., 18°56'E.).
Sector 8. Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma 191

Pub. 194

2. An islet (59°17'N., 18°57'E.).

3. Ronnskar (59°18'N., 19°00'E.).

4. The W extremity of Krokso.

Stockholm—North Approach (Soderarm and

Arholma Entrances)

8.14 Soderarm Entrance is fronted by several groups of

islets and a number of detached shoal patches, which may best

be seen on the chart.

Soderarm (59°45'N., 19°24'E.) is the northernmost and largest of a group of islets and rocks lying centered 19 miles N of

Svenska Hogarna Light (59°27'N., 19°30'E.). The tower of a

disused lighthouse, 21m high, stands on this islet and is prominent.

Hummelgrund, a shoal patch, lies 1.6 miles ENE of Soderarm Light. It has a least depth of 7.2m and is marked by a buoy.

8.14 Tjarven Light (59°48'N., 19°22'E.) is shown from a prominent building standing on an islet lying on a foul area, 2.6

miles NW of Soderarm.

8.14 Remmargrund Light (59°46'N., 19°19'E.), equipped with a

racon, is shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 20m high,

standing on a rock, 2.5 miles SW of Tjarven Light.

8.14 A detached shoal patch, with a depth of 7.7m, lies 0.2 mile N

of the light and is marked by a buoy.

8.14 Caution.—An area in which anchoring, diving, and fishing

are prohibited lies centered about 6 miles NE of Tjarven Light

and may best be seen on the chart. A wreck, with unexploded

ammunition, lies in this area.

8.15 Arholma Entrance, situated between the islands of Arholma and Bjorko, is encumbered with a number of islets and

shoals, which may best be seen on the chart.

8.15 Arholma (59°51'N., 19°08'E.), an island, lies in the N part

of the archipelago and is fronted on its E side by numerous

islets and shoals. A conspicuous beacon, 16m high, is situated

on the W and tallest part of this island.

Note.—For a description of the waters lying N and E of Arholma, see Pub. 195, Sailing Directions (Enroute) Gulf of Finland and Gulf of Bothnia.

8.15 Simpnasklubb Light (59°54'N., 19°05'E.), equipped with a

racon, is shown from a prominent floodlit tower, 16m high,

standing on a rock, 2.3 miles NW of the N extremity of

Arholma. Norrbadan, a shoal with rocks awash, lies centered

0.4 mile ENE of the light and is marked by a buoy.

8.15 Vaddo Kasberg, an isolated hill, stands 8.5 miles NW of

Simpnasklubb Light and is conspicuous from seaward.

Soderarm Tower (former lighthouse)

Tjarven Light

Remmargrund Light

Simpnasklubb Light
192 Sector 8. Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma 

Pub. 194

8.15 Bjorko (59°51'N., 19°02'E.), an island, lies contiguous to

the mainland coast close W of Arholma. Several lights are

shown from salient points along the E side of this island. Two

conspicuous radio masts stand in the S part of the island, 3.4

miles SSW of Simpnasklubb Light.

8.15 Hogskar (59°52'N., 19°06'E.), an off-lying islet, lies 1.6

miles SSE of Simpnasklubb Light and a conspicuous beacon,

6m high, stands on its W side. Skrivaren, an islet, lies close NE

of Hogskar and a prominent beacon, consisting of a former

light tower, 9m high, is situated on its NW side.

8.15 Granhamnsljarden (59°43'N., 19°07'E.) is a bay lying 10

miles S of Simpnasklubb Light. From a broad peninsula located close W of this bay, the coast extends SW to Stockholm and

is fronted by numerous dangers.

8.15 A few major inlets lie within the archipelago fronting Stockholm and separate the northernmost islands of Arholma,

Bjorko, and Vato (59°20.1'N., 18°12.6'E.).

8.15 Norrtaljeviken (59°47'N., 18°53'E.), an inlet leading to the

port of Norrtalje, extends W and indents the coast S of Vato

(59°48'N., 18°58'E.).

Depths—Limitations.—The main channel leading to

Stockholm from the Soderarm Entrance is authorized for drafts

up to 8m.

The main channel leading to Stockholm from the Arholma

Entrance is authorized for drafts up to 7m.

8.15 From a position located 3 miles E of Tjaven Light (59°48'N.,

19°22'E.), the Soderarm Entrance main route leads WSW and

passes about midway between this light and Soderarm Light

(59°45'N., 19°24'E.). It continues WSW and passes close SSE

of Remmargrund Light (59°46'N., 19°19'E.). A secondary

channel, which is very narrow, detours from the main route and

passes on the N side of this light.

8.15 An alternate entrance channel, authorized for drafts up to

8m, leads SSW from a position located 2 miles NNW of

Tjaven Light and joins the main route close W of Remmargrund Light.

8.15 A secondary entrance route (winter channel), with no authorized draft, is entered about 3 miles ESE of Soderarm Light. It

initially leads SW and W to round the S end of the Soderarm

shoal area. The route then leads in a NW direction through

Idskarsfjarden (59°43'N., 19°20'E.) to join the main route

WSW of Remmargrund Light. This channel, which is marked

by unlighted beacons, may only be used by day.

8.15 After passing Remmargrund Light, the main Soderarm

Entrance route continues WSW through Granhamnsfjarden

(59°43'N., 19°08'E.) to a position located 0.3 mile SE of

Kapellskar Light (59°43.1'N., 19°04.7'E.). This route passes

either close NNW or SSE of Lerskarsgrund Light (59°44.3'N.,

19°13.4'E.).

8.15 From a position located 1.5 miles NNW of Simpnasklubb

Light (59°54'N., 19°05'E.), the Arholma Entrance main route

leads SSE and S between Bjorko and Arholma. This route

initially passes close WSW of Simpnasklubb Light and leads

between the E side of Bjorko and the off-lying dangers. It is

extremely narrow in places.

8.15 An alternate entrance channel, authorized for drafts up to

7m, leads in a SW direction through the off-lying dangers from

a position located 2.5 miles E of Simpnasklubb Light. This

channel passes close NW of the beacons standing on Skrivaren

and Hogskar and then merges into the main route.

8.15 From W of the S end of Arholma, this main route leads SSE

and SSW to join the main Soderarm Entrance route at a position located 0.3 mile SE of Kapellskar Light. It passes close W

of Tyvo Light (59°46.5'N., 19°07.4'E.) and Tjocko Light

(59°45.3'N., 19°06.2'E.).

8.15 From Kapellskar Light, the main Soderarm Entrance route,

which is known as Furusundleden in this vicinity, leads SW to

a position located 0.2 mile S of Vaxlet Sodra Light (59°35.1'N.,

18°43.9'E.). This route passes close NW of Furusund Light

(59°39.8'N., 18°56.0'E.) and SE of Hakholmarna, a group of

islets and rocks, lying in the middle of the channel, 1.8 miles

NE of Vaxlet Sodra Light.

8.15 A secondary branch track, with no authorized draft, leads

SW and passes NW of Hakholmarna. It then rejoins the main

route in the vicinity of Vaxlet Sodra Light.

8.15 From Vaxlet Sodra Light, the main route leads SW and SSW

for 13 miles to join the main route, authorized for drafts up to

11m, leading to Stockholm from the Sandhamn Entrance (see

paragraph 8.12). This route passes 0.2 mile NW of Lunsen

Light (59°34.5'N., 18°41.0'E.), close NW of Ryssmasterna

Light (59°31.9'N., 18°32.8'E.), and close SE of Gullholmen

Light (59°31.4'N., 18°31.2'E.).

8.15 From Gullholmen Light, the route leads in a SW direction to

join the Sandhamn Entrance route at a position located close S

of Ostra Algogrundet Light (59°26.7'N., 18°24.8'E.). It passes

0.2 mile SE of Vallersvik Light (59°29.9'N., 18°27.5'E.) and

then leads between the islet of Stora Blothholmen (59°29.2'N.,

18°27.5'E.) and the mainland to the W. The route continues

SSW, passing close E of Mjolko Light (59°27.4'N.,

18°25.7'E.), and rounds Ostra Algogrundet Light to the SE to

merge with the main Sandhamn Entrance channel.

8.15 An alternative channel, authorized for drafts up to 8m, leads

in a S direction from close SE of Gullholmen Light to join the

main Sandhamn Entrance channel. It rounds the islet of Ostra

Strangarma (59°26.5'N., 18°29.8'E.) to the SE and merges into

the main route at a position located of 0.3 mile WNW of

Valoarna Light (59°26.0'N., 18°29.9'E.) (see paragraph 8.13).

8.15 An alternative branch channel, authorized for drafts up to

6m, leads in a SW direction from close W of the islet of Stora

Blothholmen. It trends SW and then SSE to join the main route

at a position located about 0.3 mile W of Tisterogrundet Light

(59°25.9'N., 18°23.7'E.) (see paragraph 8.13).

8.15 The fairway channels are marked by aids for day and night

transits, but the draft limitations at night vary. Information

concerning the size and draft requirements for night transits

may be requested by contacting the Stockholm VTS Traffic

Information Center.

8.15 Pilotage.—Pilots for the Soderarm and Arholma Entrances

are controlled by the station at Stockholm. All ordering of

pilots in the area must be carried out through the Traffic

Information Center of Stockholm VTS (see paragraph 8.2).

8.15 For additional information concerning the initial ordering of

pilots, see paragraph 8.1.

8.15 Regulations.—The Soderarm and Arholma Entrances are

situated within the Stockholm VTS Traffic Area (see paragraph

8.2).

8.15 Most of the coastal waters and off-lying islands and islets lie

within restricted or semi-restricted areas and vessels must navigate only within the designated fairways.
Sector 8. Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma 193

Pub. 194

8.15 Caution.—Numerous submarine cables are laid across the

main approach channels and may best be seen on the chart.

8.15 Extensive areas, within which surveys are incomplete, border the inner channels and may best be seen on the chart.

8.16 Fejan (59°44'N., 19°10'E.), an island, has a small

sheltered harbor located at its NE side. There are two small

piers with a depth of 3.7m alongside. An anchorage roadstead,

with depths of 16 to 22m, clay and stones, lies SE of the island.

8.16 Norrtalje (59°46'N., 18°43'E.) (World Port Index No.

25420), a small commercial harbor, lies at the head of Norrtaljeviken (59°47'N., 18°53'E.) and is approached from Tjockofiarden (59°46'N., 19°06'E.). The fairway channel, which is

marked by buoys and lights, leads through the inlet to the harbor and is authorized for drafts up to 6m. A dredged entrance

channel, indicated by a lighted range, leads into the harbor.

Several prominent silos stand in the vicinity of the harbor.

8.16 The main commercial quay is 320m long and has depths of

3.1 to 5.6m alongside. A ferry terminal, in the NE part of the

harbor has two berths with depths of 5.6 to 6.6m alongside.

There are facilities for general cargo, bulk, ro-ro, and ferry vessels. Vessels with drafts up to 6m can be handled. Anchorage is

available, in a depth of 6m, clay, off the harbor.

8.17 Vaxholm (59°24'N., 18°20'E.) (World Port Index No.

25390), an island, has a small commercial harbor at its E end.

The harbor, which is mostly used by pleasure craft and yachts,

can be approached through a channel, marked by buoys, which

leads S of Rindo (59°24'N., 18°25'E.). It can accommodate

small vessels with drafts up to 6m. There are several quays

with depths of 4.5 to 7.8m alongside. Anchorage can be taken,

in depths of 20 to 25m, clay, in bays lying S and N of Vaxholm.

8.17 Telegrafberget (59°21'N., 18°14'E.), an oil terminal, is

situated on the SE shore of Halvkakssundet, about 4 miles E of

Stockholm. A quay with mooring dolphins provides a berth,

95m long, with a depth of 12m alongside. Tankers up to 125m

in length and 11m draft can be accommodated.

8.17 Stora Hoggarn (59°22'N., 18°18'E.), a small island, lies E

of Lidingon, 6 miles NE of Stockholm. An oil terminal is

situated at the NE side of the island. It consists of an offshore

jetty, 120m long, with depths of 11.7 to 12.2m alongside. It is

reported (1998) that this terminal is not operational.

8.17 Bergs (59°19'N., 18°10'E.), an oil terminal, lies E of Stockholm at the SE end of Lilla Vartan. It can be reached directly

from the main approach route. The main quay is 90m long and

has a depth of 13m alongside. Tankers up to 200m in length

and 11m draft can be accommodated.

8.17 Lidingo (59°22'N., 18°12'E.), an island, fronts Stockholm

and is encircled by navigable channels. An oil terminal pier

(Rasta) is situated at the E side of this island and can be used

by tankers up to 180m in length and 11m draft.

Stockholm (59°20'N., 18°05'E.)

World Port Index No. 25380 

8.18 Stockholm, a major port of Sweden, lies in the lee of

the archipelago and 30 miles from the sea. Several channels

lead from the Baltic Sea to the port. The commercial harbor

area extends for 6 miles and consists of at least twenty separate

installations situated on the mainland and adjacent islands,

connected by a series of about 35 bridges. The harbor is connected to the inland waterway system via Lake Malaren. There

are also several small craft basins and marinas.

8.18 Ice.—Ice is prevalent in the archipelago fronting Stockholm

during the ice season, December through March. The harbor

and approaches, including the seaward entrances, are kept open

by icebreakers.

8.18 During the winter, ice bridges are periodically established

within some sections of the approach channels.

8.18 Winter Navigation.—The Swedish Maritime Administration, Ice-breaking Division, in Gothenburg, operates 10 ice

breakers around the Swedish coast during the winter and

maintains a 24-hour operatioon. further information can be

found in Pub. 140, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) North

Atlantic Ocean and the Adjacent Seas.

8.18 Tides—Currents.—There are no tidal changes of the water

level in the harbor. However, the normal range of the water

level in the port is from 0.6m above to 0.4m below the mean

level. The only current occurs in the inner part of the harbor

when Lake Malaren discharges through the open lock gates.

An upstream current prevails occasionally in the channel. 

8.18 Depths—Limitations.—The main approach route (Sandhamn Entrance) is authorized for drafts up to 11m.

8.18 Lilla Vartan, a passage, extends NW from the vicinity of

Libertus Light (59°19.9'N., 18°10.6'E.) and contains the prinStockholm (ferry terminal)

Stockholm—Old City
194 Sector 8. Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma 

Pub. 194

cipal commercial basins of Loudden, Frihamnen, Vartahamnen, and Gasverkshamnen. Strommen, another passage, extends W along the SE side of the city and contains general cargo basins and passenger facilities.

8.18 Two bridges, located close together, span the N part of Lilla

Vartan and connect Lidingo Island with Stockholm. Gamla

Lidingobron, the old bridge, has a fixed main arched span,

135m long, with a vertical clearance of 5.3m. A bascule

section, located at its SW end, has a navigable width of 18.7m.

This bascule section has a vertical clearance of 4.3m when

closed.

8.18 Nya Lidingobron, the new bridge, is situated close SE of the

old bridge. This bridge is a fixed bridge with nine pillars. It has

a vertical clearance of 11.5m over a navigable width of 22m in

line with the bascule section of the old bridge.

8.18 Loudden, the oil terminal, is situated at the SW end of Lilla

Vartan. A pier extends ENE from the shore and has depths of

11.9m alongside. Jetties extend N and S from the root of the

pier and have depths of 8.9 to 10.4m alongside. 

8.18 Frihamnen, which includes a container terminal, is situated

close NW of the oil terminal. It consists of a pier and an enclosed basin. The basin provides 1.160m of quayage with

depths of 8.5 to 10.1m alongside. A quay, situated on the outer

side of the pier, is 530m long and has depths of 7.1 to 8.1m

alongside.

8.18 Vartahamnen, situated close NW of Frihamnen, consists of

three sections. The S section has an oil jetty and a bulk terminal. The oil jetty is 32m long and has a depth of 10.9m alongside. The bulk terminal provides 430m of quayage with a depth

of 7.5m alongside. The N section provides 800m of quayage,

including a combined bulk coal and oil jetty, with depths of 3.5

to 11.9m alongside. In addition, there is a train ferry berth,

160m long, with a depth of 9m alongside.

8.18 The central section, a basin, provides 680m of quayage, including two ro-ro ferry berths, with depths of 8.1 to 9.1m

alongside.

8.18 Gasverkshamnen, in the vicinity of the W end of the bridges,

has a main quay, 160m long, with a depth of 9.2m alongside

and another quay, 75m long, with a depth of 5.7m alongside.

8.18 Stadsgardshamnen, situated on the S side of Strommen,

provides 1,920m of quayage, including a ferry terminal, with

depths of 4.7 to 9.5m alongside. 

8.18 The port, which provides about 17,700m of total berthage,

also includes many private terminals and a number of repair

yards. There are facilities for ro-ro, passenger, bulk, ferry,

tanker, container, chemical, and general cargo vessels.

8.18 Cargo vessels up to 245m in length and 35m beam, and

tankers up to 250m in length and 32m beam, can be accommodated with drafts up to 11m.

8.18 Aspect.—Kaknas Tower (59°20.1'N., 18°07.6'E.), 150m

high and prominent, stands about 1.6 miles SSE of the Gamla

Lidingobron Bridge and may be seen from the entire harbor

area.

Stockholm (spires)

Stockholm—Skargard

Stockholm—Varthamnen

Kaknas Tower
Sector 8. Sweden—East Coast—Landsort to Arholma 195

Pub. 194

8.18 Pilotage.—Pilots for the harbor facilities are controlled by

the main station at the port. All ordering of pilots in the area

must be carried out through the Traffic Information Center of

Stockholm VTS (see paragraph 8.2).

8.18 Regulations.—The port and approach channels are situated

within the Stockholm VTS Traffic Area (see paragraph 8.2).

8.18 Vessels bound for the port must send an ETA 3 hours in

advance of arrival.

8.18 Speed regulations are in effect within the approach channels.

8.18 Anchorage.—An anchorage area, designated for tankers,

lies at the SE end of Lilla Vartan. It has depths of 16 to 23m

and is located 0.4 mile W of Libertus Light (59°19.9'N.,

18°10.6'E.). 

8.18 Anchorage is prohibited throughout the harbor area except

within the authorized and designated areas. Vessels can anchor

only by special permission and in places directed by the harbor

authorities.
Pub. 194

9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran

9.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 9 — CHART INFORMATION
199

Pub. 194

SECTOR 9 

GERMANY AND POLAND—KAP ARKONA TO MYS TARAN

9.0 Plan.—This sector describes the S shore of the Baltic Sea

from Kap Arkona to Rozewie. It then describes the broad bight

of the Gulf of Gdansk and the coast to the E as far as Mys

Taran. The descriptive sequence is from W to E. 

General Remarks

9.1 From Kap Arkona to Rozewie, a distance of 172

miles, the coast is predominately high and wooded. On the

approach from seaward, Kap Arkona and the steep headland of

Rozewie are salient points. Between these two positions,

Swinoujscie and Szczecin lie at the head of a bight, and

Sassnitz is situated on the E side of Rugen Island. 

9.1 The coast between Rozewie and Mys Taran includes the

major ports of Gdynia and Gdansk, both situated near the head

of the Gulf of Gdansk (Gulf of Danzig). Swept channels lead

through the approaches to these ports. The W side of the bight

is interrupted by the Hel Peninsula which is flat, mostly

wooded, and projects 18 miles SE. The coast to the S of Rozewie is steep and barren. A wooded range of hills stands near

the coast and terminates abruptly close to the head of the bight. 

9.1 Between Baltiysk and Mys Taran, dunes give way to rugged

cliffs, above which the land increases in elevation toward the

cape. Between Kap Arkona and Rozewie, the S shore of the

Baltic Sea is fronted by shoals that extend up to about 1 mile

seaward, except in areas where bays and river outlets indent the

coast. Shoal banks in these areas extend as far as 10 miles

offshore. Depths between 92 and 110m lie in the outer part of

the Gulf of Gdansk and decrease gradually toward the head of

the bight. Nearing the coast, the bottom is formed of soft clay

mixed with sand. Between Baltiysk and Mys Taran, the bottom, in depths of less than 10m, is rocky in numerous places.

9.1 Pilotage.—Deep sea pilots are available for the Baltic Sea.

Requests for deep sea pilotage for the Polish coastal area of the

Baltic Sea should be forwarded 24 hours in advance through

the local agents at Swinoujscie, Szczecin, Gdynia, or Gdansk.

9.1 Regulations.—Vessels approaching the ports of Sassnitz,

Mukran, Wolgast, and Stralsund are required to participate in

mandatory Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) systems. For further

details, see Regulations under each port description.

9.1 Due to the non-tidal nature of these waters, the German and

Polish authorities have enacted stringent anti-pollution regulations.

9.1 Directions.—Vessels transiting the German waters to the N

of Rugen must follow the routes established which lead from

position 54°47'N,12°58'E to Arkona Lighted Buoy (54°46'N.,

13°34'E.).

9.1 The offshore route then leads generally E for 160 miles to a

position N of Rozewie (54°50'N., 18°20'E.). It passes S of

Ronne Bank (54°49'N., 14°35'E.) and N of Stolpe Bank

(54°55'N., 16°39'E.).

9.1 The coastal route leads SSE for about 30 miles from Arkona

Lighted Buoy to Swin-N Lighted Buoy (54°20'N., 13°38'E.). 

9.1 Caution.—In the waters described within this sector, vessels

should navigate along the recommended routes and in the

buoyed fairway channels. Not all of the areas described have

been swept for mines. However, the danger from mines to

surface vessels is not considered greater than other hazards to

navigation. Anchoring, fishing, and working on the sea bed

should still be considered dangerous.

9.1 Several restricted areas, which are periodically closed to

navigation and fishing, lie off the Polish coast. For further details, see Pub. 140, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) North

Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent Seas.

9.1 Oil and gas exploration structures and facilities, with their

associated pipelines and obstructions, may be encountered

within the waters described in this sector.

9.1 A submarine gas pipeline is being constructed between

Russia and Germany. This pipeline will extend WSW through

the Gulf of Finland and then lead in a SW direction to the E

side of Rugen (54°20'N., 13°44'E.). It will pass E of Faro

(57°57'N., 19°10'E.), E of Hoburgs Bank (56°35'N., 18°25'E.),

and W of Sodra Midsjobanken (55°40'N., 17°23'E.).

Kap Arkona to Sassnitz

9.2 Kap Arkona (54°41'N., 13°26'E.), marked by a light,

forms the N extremity of Rugen and has been previously described (see paragraph 4.22).

9.2 Adlergrund (54°47'N., 14°24'E.), an area of foul ground

and rocks, has a least depth of 4.5m and lies centered 31 miles

ENE of Kap Arkona.

9.2 Tides—Currents.—The water level at Kap Arkona usually

rises with winds from NW through N to ESE. It may rise as

much as 2m above the mean level during strong gales from

between NNE and NE. The water level usually falls with winds

from SE through S to WNW. It may fall as much as 1.5m

during gales from SW.

9.2 The current offshore is negligible, but in the immediate

vicinity of the coast, it can be quite considerable and caution is

necessary, particularly when approaching from the E.

9.2 Pilotage.—Pilots for Sassnitz, Mukran, Wolgast, Greifswalder Bodden, and Peenestrom are provided by the station at

Stralsund. For details, see paragraph 4.23.

9.2 Regulations.—A speed limit is enforced in the Palmer-OrtRinne Channel. Vessels must navigate in the center of the

channel and at a minimum speed, consistent with maintaining

steerage way. Passing and overtaking are prohibited in the

channel.

9.2 Caution.—In poor visibility, caution must be exercised to

avoid mistaking the high land in the vicinity of Baken Berg

with Kap Arkona, 4.5 miles ENE.

9.2 A dangerous wreck, the position of which is doubtful, lies 9

miles NNW of Kap Arkona.

9.3 Tromper Wiek (54°37'N., 13°30'E.), a bay lying S of

Kap Arkona, is formed by the peninsulas of Wittow and Jasmund which are joined together by a low, narrow, wooded, and
200 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

sandy isthmus known as Schaabe (54°35'N., 13°23'E.). Jasmund (54°34'N., 13°40'E.) extends E for about 6 miles to

Ranzow (54°35'N., 13°38'E.), its N extremity. The bay has

general depths of 9 to 20m, but its N and S shores are fringed

by rocky shoals.

A conspicuous radio mast, 73m high, stands 3.5 miles SW of

Kap Arkona Light and a prominent tower is situated 3.4 miles

SSE of it.

9.3 Kollicker Ort Light (54°34'N., 13°41'E.) is shown from a

structure, 6m high, standing on the E side of Jasmund, about

halfway up the steep foreshore. This light structure is reported

to be difficult to identify by day.

9.3 Three conspicuous radio masts, 121m high, stand near the N

coast of Jasmund, 2.6 miles WNW of Kollicker Ort Light.

9.3 Stubnitz, at the E end of Jasmund, consists of wooded, chalk

cliffs. These cliffs are about 135m high at the shoreline and rise

to 160m about 0.5 mile inland. They fall steeply to the sea and

the rocky shoalbank fronting the coast is steep-to.

9.3 Caution.—A firing practice area, the limits of which may

best be seen on the chart, lies about 9 miles ENE of Kollicker

Light.

9.3 Several dangerous wrecks lie in the approach to Proper Wiek

and may best be seen on the chart.

Sassnitz (54°31'N., 13°39'E.)

World Port Index No. 28840

9.4 Sassnitz, lying on the SE side of Jasmund, is an important fishing center with a highly developed processing industry. It also serves as the terminal for railroad and passenger

ferry vessels from Trelleborg, Sweden.

9.4 Depths—Limitations.—The harbor is protected by a breakwater, about 0.7 mile long, which extends SW from the shore.

There are eight berths within the harbor, 110 to 230m long,

with facilities for ro-ro vessels. Vessels up to 7.2m draft can be

accommodated.

9.4 Vessels over 135m in length must employ the services of a

tug.

9.4 Aspect.—Sassnitz Approach Lighted Buoy is moored about

3.2 miles ENE of the harbor. The fairway channel leading into

the harbor is marked by lighted buoys and indicated by a

lighted range. A conspicuous radio mast, 226m high, stands

about 1 mile NNW of the harbor entrance.

9.4 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots are provided by

Stralsund pilotage service and generally board in the vicinity of

Landtief B Lighted Buoy (54°17'N., 13°46'E.), Sassnitz

Lighted Buoy (54°33'N., 13°46'E.), Mukran No. 2 Lighted

Buoy (54°26'N., 13°43'E.), or Osttief 2 Lighted Buoy

(54°12'N., 13°52'E.). For further information, see paragraph

4.23.

9.4 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system has

been established in the approaches to the port. It is controlled

by the Sassnitz/Mukran Traffic Control Office and is mandatory for the following:

1. Vessels over 50m in length, including composite

units.

2. Vessels carrying dangerous goods in bulk (gas, chemicals, petroleum, or petroleum products).

3. Unloaded tankers if not cleaned, degassed, or completely inerted after carrying petroleum or petroleum products with a flashpoint below 35°C.

4. Nuclear-powered vessels.

9.4 The format for the Sailing Plan (SP) and Position Reports

(PR) is stated under Kieler Forde in paragraph 3.65.

9.4 Vessels entering the VTS Area of Sassnitz/Mukran must

maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF channel 13 or

16. It is mandatory to send the following reports:

1. Sailing Plan (SP)—An SP must be sent to Sassnitz/

Mukran Traffic Center on VHF channel 13, as follows:

a. When entering the VTS Area from seaward 30 minutes before passing the harbor entrance.

b. Before leaving a harbor or berth within the VTS

Area of Sassnitz/Mukran.

2. Position Report (PR)—A PR must be sent to Sassnitz/

Mukran VTS Traffic Center on VHF channel 13, as follows:

a. When entering or leaving an anchorage within the

VTS Area of Sassnitz/Mukran.

b. After the pilot has boarded.

c. When entering or leaving the fairway.

d. When passing (inbound only) Sassnitz Lighted

Buoy (54°33'N., 13°46'E.) and position 54°26.0'N,

13°42.5'E (Mukran).

9.4 Deviation Reports (DR) and Incident Reports (IR) must also

Kollicker Ort Light

Sassnitz
Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 201

Pub. 194

be sent to Sassnitz/Mukran VTS Traffic Center on VHF channel 13. 

9.4 Information broadcasts are made by VTS Sassnitz Traffic on

VHF channel 13 in German (and on request, in English) on

request and at 0115, 0515, and every 2 hours thereafter until

2115. The broadcast includes information relevant to the safe

passage through the VTS area; general fairway and traffic situation details; local storm warnings, weather messages, visibility, and ice reports; casualties; and dredging operations.

9.4 Anchorage.—Sassnitz Reede, a roadstead marked by buoys,

provides good anchorage, in depths of 10 to 18m, about l.5

miles SE of the harbor entrance. Vessels using this roadstead

should not proceed into depths less than 10m.

9.4 Caution.—Anchoring and fishing are prohibited in and

close to the approach channel.

Sassnitz to Sudperd

9.5 The coast between Sassnitz and Sudperd forms Prorer

Wiek (54°27'N., 13°40'E.). This bay terminates at Granitzer

Ort (54°24'N., 13°40'E.), a high and wooded point, located 6.5

miles S of Sassnitz. There are depths of 12 to 17m in the outer

part of Prorer Wiek and depths of 9m lie up to about 1 mile offshore. The bottom is formed of fine sand and shells, and

several rocks lie off the N shore. A sandy isthmus forms the

inner side of the bay.

9.5 Mukran Harbor (54°29'N., 13°35'E.), a ferry terminal, lies

on the W side of Prorer Wiek, 2.5 miles SW of Sassnitz. It is

protected on the E side by a mole, which is 1,320m long and

marked by a light.

9.5 Sudkai Light is shown from a structure standing on the foreshore, 0.7 mile WNW of the head of the mole. A finger pier,

216m long, extends from the shore and has a depth of 9.5m

alongside. Another pier, 230m long, has a depth of 8.5m

alongside. These piers provide berthing facilities on either side

for ro-ro ferries. Vessels up to 8m draft can be accommodated.

9.5 The Sassnitz VTS traffic control office is reported to direct

all vessels in the harbor and approaches, and provide navigational information. The harbor authorities can be contacted

on VHF channel 19 or 21.

9.5 In the approach to Prorer Wiek, Lietzow Castle, standing

about 2.5 miles W of Mukran, is conspicuous from seaward.

Several large blocks of houses stand on the foreshore at Prora,

about 2 miles S of Mukran, and are also prominent from

seaward.

9.5 Prora Disused Light Tower, 31m high, stands 3 miles S of

Mukran, on the central shore of the bay, and is conspicuous.

9.5 A conspicuous monument stands at a high elevation, 8 miles

W of Granitzer Ort, the S entrance point of the bay. Several

prominent resort buildings are situated at Binz, 1.7 miles W of

Granitzer Ort. A chimney, 126m high, stands 1 mile NW of

Binz and is prominent from seaward.

9.5 Caution.—A fishery protection area, which may best be

seen on the chart, lies 1 mile ENE of the disused light tower at

Prora. Several marine farms may be found within this area

between March and November.

9.6 Nordperd (54°21'N., 13°46'E.), a point situated 5

miles SE of Granitzer Ort, lies at the E extremity of Rugen and

may be easily recognized from seaward. It is high, wooded,

and has steep, clay sides. A conspicuous radio mast, 118m

high, stands 0.5 mile W of the point. Two prominent water

towers, 74m and 72m high, are situated close W of this mast.

9.6 Several prominent building stand at Sellin, a resort, which is

situated 3.5 miles NW of the point.

9.6 Landtief A Lighted Buoy (54°21'N., 13°51'E.) is moored

about 3 miles ENE of Nordperd. 

9.6 The low coast in the vicinity of Nordperd is backed by four

separate and high hills which appear as islands from offshore.

9.6 Sudperd (54°16'N., 13°43'E.) is located 4.5 miles SSW of

Nordperd and surmounted by a prominent radio mast, 63m

high. This point, 38m high, is steep on its S side, but slopes

gradually to a low and sandy beach on the N side. Thiessow, a

prominent village standing on the shore of a small bay, is situated close W of the point.

Mukran

Lietzow Castle

Prora Disused Light Tower
202 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

Thiessower Steintrendel, a rocky patch, lies about 1.5 miles

E of Sudperd. It has a least depth of 2.8m and is marked by a

buoy.

9.6 Landtief B Lighted Buoy (54°17'N., 13°46'E.) is moored

about 1.6 miles NE of Sudperd. 

9.6 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken within Prorer Wiek,

in depths of 3 to 4.5m, inside Seehunds Riff (54°25'N.,

13°40'E.). Anchorage can also be taken, in depths of 4 to 6m,

close NE of Binz. Anchorage, with offshore winds, can be obtained, in depths of 8 to 9m, sand, between Sudperd and Nordperd.

9.6 Caution.—Between Nordperd and Sudperd, a fishing area,

which may best be seen on the chart, extends up to about 2

miles from the shore. Shipping is prohibited within this area

from 1 February to 31 October, annually.

Greifswalder Bodden

9.7 Greifswalder Bodden (54°14'N., 13°32'E.), a large

bay, is entered from the E between Sudperd and the N end of

Usedom (54°11'N., 13°48'E.). Several channels lead from seaward through the bay to small ports on Rugen Island (54°20'N.,

13°20'E.) and the mainland. There are also several small harbors which are used only by small craft, fishing vessels,

pleasure boats, and local ferries. Wolgast is the principal port

in this area; however, the bay also forms the main access route

to Stralsund (see paragraph 4.23). The N side of the bay is

formed by the S coast of Rugen. The shores are heavily indented and irregular, with broad outcroppings of terrain, high

cliffs, valleys, and peninsulas. These outcroppings are backed,

in many places, by inland lakes. Numerous shoals and reefs,

with deep water between them, front the coast.

9.7 Rugischer Bodden (54°18'N., 13°33'E.) is the N part of the

bay. The coast forming the S side of the bay is low-lying and

mostly wooded. Danische Wiek (54°08'N., 13°28'E.), lying at

the SW corner of the bay, is an inlet into which the Ryk River

(54°06'N., 13°27'E.) flows. The mouth of the Peene River lies

close W of Usedom, at the SE side of the bay.

9.7 Ice.—During severe winters, heavy ice formation may

prevent shipping in the bay from about December 15 to March

31. In average winters, shipping can be hindered by ice for up

to about 6 weeks and suspended for up to 2 weeks. The bay is

usually frozen over during January and February. Storms from

the SW and S clear the bay of ice within 24 hours. Ice barriers

may form on the flats on both sides of the dredged fairways in

Landtief, Osttief, and Palmer Ort Channel.

9.7 Tides—Currents.—The surface currents follow the wind

direction in Greifswalder Bodden. With strong winds from

between N and NE, the current sets S and SW at rates of 4 to 6

knots. With S winds, the current divides at Sudperd with one

branch setting along the S side of Rugen Island and turning SW

to unite with the E current. With winds from E through S to W,

the current sets N and NE at rates of 2 to 5 knots. In calm

weather, a strong current usually sets SW with LW in the Baltic Sea and the reverse with HW. Strong SW and NE winds

lower or raise the water level as much as 0.9m, respectively.

9.7 Depths—Limitations.—An extensive sand flat, rising gradually from the sea and dropping abruptly towards the bay, lies

in the E entrance of Greifswalder Bodden and may best be seen

on the chart. This flat has shallow depths of less than 2m in

many places. It is enclosed by the 5m curve and is widest between the islands of Greifswalder Oie and Ruden (see paragraph 9.8). Several dredged channels lead across the flat into

Greifswalder Bodden. The bay has general depths of 6 to 11m

with a bottom formed of sand and mud, but several detached

and shallow patches lie up to 2.5 miles off the islands and

peninsulas. Passages with depths of 7 to 9m lead to the minor

ports, but should be used only by vessels with local knowledge.

The coastal shoal bank, with depths of less than 4m, extends up

to about 1.5 miles offshore along the S and W sides of the bay.

9.7 Pilotage.—Pilotage is provided by the station at Stralsund.

Pilots may be contacted by VHF and board in the vicinity of

Landtief B Lighted Buoy (54°17'N., 13°46'E.) or Osttief 2 (02)

Lighted Buoy (54°12'N., 13°52'E.). For further information,

see paragraph 4.23.

9.7 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system, VTS

Wolgast, has been established in the approaches to Greifswalder Bodden. It is mandatory for the following:

1. Vessels over 20m in length, including composite

units.

2. Vessels carrying dangerous goods in bulk (gas,

chemicals, petroleum, or petroleum products). 

3. Unloaded tankers if not cleaned, degassed, or completely inerted after carrying petroleum or petroleum products with a flashpoint below 35°C.

4. Nuclear-powered vessels.

9.7 The format for the Sailing Plan (SP) and Position Reports

(RP) is stated under Kieler Forde in paragraph 3.65.

9.7 Vessels entering the Wolgast VTS Area must maintain a

continuous listening watch on VHF channel 9 or 16. It is

mandatory to send the following reports:

1. Sailing Plan (SP)—An SP must be sent to VTS Center

Wolgast Traffic on VHF channel 9, as follows:

a. When entering the VTS Area from seaward 30

minutes before passing Osttief Lighted Buoy (54°13.4'N.,

13°59.7'E.).

b. Before leaving a harbor or berth within the VTS

Area of Wolgast.

2. Position Report (PR)—A PR must be sent to VTS

Center Wolgast Traffic on VHF channel 9, as follows:

a. After embarking the pilot. 

b. When leaving the fairway.

c. When entering or leaving an anchorage or berth

within the VTS Area of Wolgast.

d. When passing (N approach)—Osttief Lighted

Buoy, Lighted Buoy O30 (54°12.4'N., 13°42.8'E.), and

Lighted Buoy PN12 (54°08.4'N., 13°45.2'E.) or (E approach)—Lighted Buoy Peenestrom Sud/H1 (53°49.4'N.,

13°58.0'E.) and Zecherin Road Bridge.

9.7 Information broadcasts are made by VTS Wolgast Traffic on

VHF channel 9 in German and in English beginning at 0115,

then every 2 hours between 0515 and 2115. The broadcasts include information relevant to safe passage through the VTS

area and general fairway. Reported conditions include traffic

situation details, local storm warnings, weather messages,

visibility, ice reports, casualties, and dredging operations. 

9.7 The Wolgast Port Office can be contacted, as follows::

1. Radiotelephone: VHF channel 15

2. E-mail: wolgast-hafen@t-online.de

3. Internet: http://www.wolgast-port.de
Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 203

Pub. 194

9.7 Landtief Channel (54°16'N., 13°44'E.), leading into the N

part of Greifswalder Bodden, lies outside the Wolgast VTS

area and within the Stralsund East VTS area (see paragraph

4.23).

9.7 Anchorage.—A designated anchorage area, marked by

buoys, lies centered about 0.8 mile SE of the N end of Ruden.

It provides good anchorage, in depths of 7 to 8m, mud.

9.7 Caution.—Several patches of foul ground and several

dumping ground areas, which may best be seen on the chart, lie

in the approaches to Greifswalder Bodden.

9.7 Several submarine cables lie in the approaches to Greifswalder Bodden and may best be seen on the chart.

9.7 Extensive fishing takes place within the S half of Greifswalder Bodden throughout the whole year. Between February

and June, fishing takes place in the N half of the bay. Fixed-net

herring fishing also takes place from May to March. Several

fishing buoys are moored in the bay, but generally clear of the

fairways.

9.7 Special regulations apply within Greifswalder Bodden and

commercial vessels should not deviate from marked fairways

due to the existence of numerous dangers.

9.7 Numerous small craft and pleasure boats may be encountered within Greifswalder Bodden. 

9.8 Off-lying islands and banks.—Greifswalder Oie

(54°15'N., 13°55'E.), an island, is located about 7 miles ESE of

Sudperd at the E end of the shallow flat. Greifswalder Oie

Light is shown from a prominent tower with a dwelling, 39m

high, standing on the NE end of this island. A small fishing

harbor is located at the SW end of the island. Numerous sunken rocks and wrecks lie in an area centered about 2.5 miles E of

the island and may best be seen on the chart.

9.8 Ruden (54°12'N., 13°46'E.) is a low island lying about 5

miles SW of Greifswalder Oie. A conspicuous stone tower,

20m high, stands at the S end of the N section of the island.

The S end of the island is formed by a long and sandy tongue

of land which is very flat and can only be seen from about 2

miles seaward. A directional sector light is shown from this

island. A small craft harbor is located at the E side of the N part

of the island.

Directions.—Two principal approach channels, marked by

buoys, lead into Greifswalder Bodden (see paragraph 9.7). The

recommended routes and fairways leading across the bay may

best be seen on the chart. They are marked by lighted buoys.

9.8 Caution.—During August to October, fishing nets extend up

to 5 miles offshore from the N, E, and SE sides of Greifswalder

Oie.

9.8 Landing on Ruden is prohibited.

9.9 Landtief (54°16'N., 13°44'E.), the N channel, has a

least depth of 6.9m and is dredged through the sand flat for a

distance of about 2.5 miles. It is entered about 0.8 mile E of

Sudperd and extends SW for 5.5 miles to join Osttief Channel,

4 miles W of Ruden. Generally, vessels with drafts up to 5.2m

can use this channel. However, with special permission, vessels

with drafts up to 6m, have transited to Stralsund. 

9.9 Landtief A Lighted Buoy (54°21'N., 13°51'E.), moored

about 3 miles E of Nordperd, and Landtief B Lighted Buoy

(54°17'N., 13°46'E.), moored about 1.6 miles NE of Sudperd,

mark the outer approaches to this channel.

9.9 Osttief (54°12'N., 13°52'E.), the S channel, is entered about

3 miles SW of Greifswalder Oie Light. It extends WNW for

about 2 miles, SW for about 1 mile, and rounds the S end of

Ruden. The channel then continues W for 1.5 miles and NNW

for 1 mile to Lighted Buoy 030 (54°12.4'N., 13°42.8'E.). It

then extends W for about 11 miles to the entrance of the

Palmer-Ort (Stralsund) channel.

9.9 Osttief Lighted Buoy (54°13.4'N., 13°59.7'E.) is moored

about 3 miles SE of Greifswalder Oie Light and marks the

outer approach to the channel. This channel has a least depth of

6m and is available to vessels with drafts up to 5.2m. However,

due to the narrowing of the channel and silting, a one-way

traffic system is in operation with vessels proceeding E taking

preference over vessels proceeding W.

That part of Greifswalder Bodden lying N of a line extending between Sudperd and Palmer Ort (54°13'N., 13°24'E.),

12 miles WSW, is known as Rugischer Bodden. It is indented

by a broad bight and several small bays.

Zickerer See (54°17'N., 13°42'E.), a small bay, is entered

about 1.7 miles NW of Sudperd and is fronted by an extensive

shoal, Thiessower Haken, which extends up to about 2 miles

SSE. Zickersches Hoft, a bold promontory, rises 2.3 miles

WNW of Sudperd and forms the extreme W side of this bay.

Klein Zicker, 38m high, extends about 1 mile NW from Sudperd. The outer end of this small peninsula forms the E entrance point of the bay.

Gross Zicker, rising 2.6 miles NW of Sudperd, is 66m high

and conspicuous from seaward. Reddevitzer Hoft (54°19'N.,

13°37'E.), a steep point, is located 4.3 miles NW of Sudperd. It

is 15m high and lies at the outer end of a long, narrow peninsula, which extends WSW.

9.9 Lauterbach (54°20'N., 13°30'E.), a resort, is located on the

N shore of Rugischer Bodden and fronted by a small harbor.

The harbor is formed by two moles, which are protected by detached breakwaters. It is used by coasters, pleasure craft, and

fishing boats. The main commercial quay is 230m long and has

a depth of 5m alongside. Anchorage is available, in a depth of

6m, in the roadstead.

9.9 Palmer Ort (54°13'N., 13°24'E.), a prominent point, is

Greifswalder Oie Light 
204 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

located at the S extremity of the Zuder Peninsula, which forms

the S part of Rugen.

9.9 Palmer Ort Channel (54°13'N., 13°24'E.) is entered close S

of Palmer Ort and leads NW for about 2 miles acoss the flats to

the E end of Die Strelasund. It is 40m wide and dredged to a

depth of 7.5m. Fairways lead 14 miles through Die Strelasund,

which separates Rugen from the mainland, to Stralsund (see

paragraph 4.23).

9.9 Koos (54°10'N., 13°25'E.), an island, is located close off the

mainland, about 2.5 miles S of Palmer Ort. Extensive shoals

front the mainland in this vicinity and lie in approach to Die

Strelasund.

9.9 The S side of Rugen, forming the N of the Die Strelasund, is

indented by several shallow inlets. Drigge (54°17'N.,

13°09'E.), a salient peninsula, projects into Die Strelasund

about 9.5 miles from Palmer Ort. Winding reaches lead SW

and W of Drigge. Danholm (54°19'N., 13°06'E.), an island

fronting Stralsund, lies on the W side of the channel, 1.5 miles

from the S end of Drigge. Rugendamm, a dam, connects Rugen

with the mainland at Stralsund. It runs in a NE direction across

the NW part of Danholm (see paragraph 4.23).

9.9 Caution.—The ranges indicating the channels leading

through Die Strelasund do not necessarily mark the center of

the fairways, especially in the inner approaches to Stralsund.

9.9 Several stranded wrecks lie between Koos and Riems.

9.10 Between Koos and Usedom (54°11'N., 13°48'E.), 13

miles E, the coast is partly wooded, steep in places, and

indented by two shallow inlets.

9.10 Wieck (54°06'N., 13°27'E.), a village and suburb of Greifswald, is situated at the SW side of Danische Wiek, near the

mouth of the Ryk River. The village, within which a prominent

church stands, is fronted by a small harbor. The harbor, which

is used by small coasters and fishing boats, is formed by two

moles. A dredged channel, 40m wide, leads S to the harbor

entrance and has a least depth of 4m. Small vessels, with drafts

up to 3.5m, can be accommodated.

9.10 Greifswald (54°05'N., 13°23'E.), a university town, stands

on the S side of the Ryk River, 2.5 miles above its mouth. A

harbor, about 0.7 mile long, fronts the town and extends along

the sides of the river. It is only used by pleasure boats and small

craft with drafts up to 2.5m.

9.10 Ladebow (54°06'N., 13°27'E.), a small harbor, is located 0.5

mile NW of Wieck and has depths of 4.4 to 5.9m. The approach channel has a dredged depth of 6m. Vessels up to 90m

in length and 13m beam can be accommodated at a commercial wharf.

9.10 Usedom, the island lying close E of the mainland at the S entrance of Greifswalder Bodden, forms the E side of the Peene

River.

9.11 The Peene River (54°10'N., 13°45'E.) is the W

branch of the Oder River (Odra River). It extends for 29 miles

between the mouth and Kleines Haff (53°45'N., 14°04'E.), an

inland sea which forms the W part of Stettiner Haff (54°48'N.,

14°15'E.). Stettiner Haff is also known to the Polish as Zalew

Szczecinski. Wielki Zalew (Groszez Haff) (53°46'N., 14°24'E.)

forms the E part of Stettiner Haff. The river, which is shallow,

together with Kleines Haff and Wielki Zalew forms the W

approach to the ports of Swinoujscie (53°55'N., 14°16'E.) and

Szczecin (53°25'N., 14°35'E.). From a point located close W of

Usedom, the river follows a tortuous course through several

large bays, of which Achterwasser (54°00'N., 14°00'E.) is the

largest. Achterwasser lies on the E side of Peenestrom and is

separated from the sea by a narrow ridge of land protected by

dikes.

9.11 Ice.—Ice forms in the river and channels earlier than in the

approaches through Greifswalder Bodden, but the strong

current frees the river of ice sooner than the bay. Strong NW

winds sometimes carry ice from the bay into the river.

9.11 Tides—Currents.—The currents rarely exceed a rate of 2.5

knots. With SE to W winds, the current sets into the bay; with

E to NW winds, it sets into Wielki Zalew.

9.11 Depths—Limitations.—Tonnenbank Rinne, the main entrance channel, leads SSW from near the S end of Rugen to the

N end of the Peenestrom waterway. The fairway is 70m wide

and has a dredged depth of 6.5m as far as Peenemunde. The

channel leading from Peenemunde to Wolgast is 40m wide and

has a dredged depth of 6.5m. Knaakrucken, a sec-ondary

entrance channel, leads SSE and joins the main channel about

1.7 miles SSW of the S end of Rugen. It is 40m wide and has a

dredged depth of 5m. 

9.11 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for commercial vessels

between the entrance of the Peene River and Westklune

(53°51'N., 13°55'E.). Pilotage is provided and arranged by the

station at Stralsund (see paragraph 4.23). 

9.11 Caution.—An area, in which fishing and anchoring are prohibited, extends N and E from the NE side of Usedom. This

area, which is marked by buoys, contains numerous shallow

wrecks and may best be seen on the chart.

9.11 The authorities should be contacted to ascertain the latest information concerning depths and currents in the fairways because the river is subject to frequent silting.

9.12 Peenemunde (54°08'N., 13°46'E.), lying on the E

side of the river, has a large basin, which is used by vessels to

discharge coal at the power station, and a small basin close SE.

The basins have depths of 3 to 5m.

9.12 An airfield is situated close N of Peenemunde at the NW end

of Usedom. Freest and Kroslin, two small fishing harbors, are

situated on the W side of the river 1.2 miles W and 0.8 mile

SSW, respectively, of Peenemunde. Karlshagen, another fishing harbor, lies about 2 miles SE of Peenemunde, at the E side

of the river.

9.12 Regulations.—Speed in the Peenestrom waterway is restricted to 10 knots.

9.12 Caution.—An overhead powerline, with a vertical clearance

of 50m, spans the Peenemunde waterway channel, about 1 mile

S of Peenemunde.

9.13 Wolgast (54°03'N., 13°47'E.) (World Port Index No.

28828), a sheltered port, lies on the W side of the river, about 6

miles above Peenemunde. Schloss Insel, an island, lies at the

W side of the river and fronts the town.

9.13 Ice.—Ice closes the harbor each year from 1 to 5 weeks,

depending on the severity of the winter.

9.13 Depths—Limitations.—A bascule road bridge spans the

river at Wolgast and has a main navigable passage, 30m wide.

When closed, the bascule section has a vertical clearance of

5.2m. A fixed section, located E of the bascule lifting section,
Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 205

Pub. 194

also provides a navigable passage, 40m wide, with a vertical

clearance of 4.2m.

9.13 The harbor, which includes a large shipyard, provides about

1,500m of riverside berthage and extends N and S of the road

bridge. The main commercial berths have a depth of 6m alongside. The harbor is used mostly by local coasters and inland

waterway craft. Vessels up to 150m in length and 5.7m draft

can be accommodated.

9.13 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots are provided and

arranged through the station at Stralsund (see paragraph 4.23).

9.13 Regulations.—For information concerning Wolgast VTS,

see paragraph 9.7.

9.13 Speed in the harbor is restricted to 4.3 knots.

9.13 Anchorage.—The limited width of the channel prevents safe

anchoring.

Zatoka Pomorska, Swinoujscie, and Szczecin

9.14 Zatoka Pomorska (Pomeranian Bay) (54°08'N.,

14°15'E.), known by the Germans as Oder Bucht, lies at the

head of a broad inlet which forms the southernmost part of the

Baltic Sea. The coast is generally low and wooded, but is

higher to the SW and SE than to the S.

9.14 Ordzana Lawica (Oder Bank) (54°20'N., 14°25'E.), an extensive shoal area, has a least depth of 4.8m and lies in the N

part of the bay. The approach routes to Swinoujscie pass W or

S of this bank.

9.14 Ice.—During severe winters when NE winds predominate,

the bay is filled with floating ice which forms ice fields. These

fields may extend for several miles offshore in prolonged

freezing weather. Much of the ice comes from the rivers and

Greifswalder Bodden.

9.14 Tides—Currents.—The current in the bay sets with the prevailing winds. A current setting E predominates and attains a

rate of about 2 knots along the coast. It is reported to be

strongest at about 4 miles from the shore.

9.14 Aspect.—At the W side of the bay, the church, with two

towers, standing at Zinnowitz (54°05'N., 13°55'E.) is very conspicuous. A prominent radio mast, 42m high, stands near the

coast, 4 miles ESE of Zinnowitz. Strekelsberg, 59m high, rises

close S of this tower and is the most elevated part of this

section of the coast.

9.14 Prominent churches, with tall spires, stand at the resorts of

Heringsdorf and Ahlbeck, which are situated close to the coast

7.8 miles and 9 miles, respectively, SE of Strekelsberg.

9.14 The border between Germany and Poland is situated about

1.5 miles SE of Ahlbeck (53°57'N., 14°12'E.) and is indicated

by a beacon.

9.14 At the E side of the bay, a conspicuous church, with a tall

tower rising above some trees, stands near the coast at

Miedzyzdroje (53°56'N., 14°27'E.). A conspicuous church also

stands at Lubin, 3.5 miles S of Miedzyzdroje. It is situated on

the W shoulder of the hills in that area.

9.14 Kikut Light (53°59'N., 14°35'E.) is shown from a prominent

stone tower, 18m high, standing 6 miles NE of Miedzyzdroje.

A prominent church is situated 1.8 miles SE of the light.

9.14 A dangerous wreck lies about 6.5 miles N of the light and is

marked by a lighted buoy.

9.14 Caution.—Vessels navigating in the bay should stay close to

the designated recommended routes, tracks, and fairways. In

addition to the charted hazards there may be others that have

not been discovered. 

Approach to Swinoujscie

9.15 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel from

the E leads WSW for 12.5 miles from a position about 7.5

miles N of Kikut Light (53°59'N., 14°35'E.). It joins the inner

approach channel in the vicinity of Lighted Buoy No. 3 and

Lighted Buoy No. 4, about 4.5 miles N of the port entrance.

9.15 The main approach channel from the N leads SE for 9 miles

from Swin-N Lighted Buoy (54°20'N., 13°58'E.) to Lighted

Buoy N2 (54°15'N., 14°11'E.). It then leads in a SSE direction

for about 10 miles, passing Lighted Buoy N4 (54°07'N.,

14°13'E.), to Lighted Buoy N5 (54°05'N., 14°14'E.), which is

moored in the N part of the roadstead.

9.15 The inner approach channel, a continuation of the N

approach channel, is marked by lighted buoys and leads from

the roadstead to the harbor entrance. It is dredged to a depth of

14m over a width of about 150m, but is subject to siltation.

9.15 A route, which may be seen on the chart, leads from the N to

No. 3 Anchorage Area. It extends 8 miles S from the vicinity of

Fairway Lighted Buoy (53°27'N., 14°06'E.). Areas, within

which less water than charted exists, lie close to this route.

9.15 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 69m, spans

the river channel, l.5 miles SW of the light. It is supported by

two prominent lattice towers, each 120m high.

9.15 Aspect.—Lighted Buoy N2 (54°15'N., 14°11'E.) is equipped

with a racon. The inner approach channel is marked by lighted

buoys and indicated by a lighted range.

9.15 Swinoujscie Light is shown from a prominent round brick

tower on a square building, 65m high, standing at the E side of

the entrance.

9.15 The large buildings of the baths and several church spires

stand about 1 mile W of the light. A conspicuous signal station

tower stands close SE of the root of the E breakwater.

9.15 The E breakwater, 1,400m long, is illuminated at night by

orange floodlights.

9.15 Pilotage.—Pilots are available 24 hours and are provided by

the Swinoujscie-Szczecin pilot station.

9.15 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 40m in length, all

Swinoujscie Light
206 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

vessels carrying dangerous cargo, all passenger vessels, and all

vessels shifting berth within the port areas.

9.15 Pilots board, as follows:

1. At position PILOT-3, in the vicinity of the Lighted

Buoy N2 (54°15'N., 14°11'E.), for vessels with drafts of

11.0 to 12.8m (fresh water).

2. At position PILOT-2, in the channel between

Lighted Buoy No. 1 and Lighted Buoy 2 (54°02'N.,

14°14'E.), for vessels with drafts of 7.0 to 11.0m (fresh

water).

3. At position PILOT-1, in the channel between

Lighted Buoy No. 5 and Lighted Buoy No. 6 (53°59'N.,

14°16'E.), for vessels with drafts of less than 7.0m (fresh

water).

4. At the anchorage area when the vessel is anchored.

5. At Gate No. 2 when the vessels sails from the

Polish-German border line (situated at Zalew Szczcinski).

9.15 Inbound vessels should request pilotage 4 hours in advance

of arrival. Outbound vessels and vessels shifting berth should

request pilotage 2 hours in advance.

9.15 Inbound vessels should contact, as appropriate, either

Swinoujscie Pilot, on VHF channel 14, or Szczecin Pilot, on

VHF channel 68. The following information must be included

in the report:

9.15 Vessels requiring a licensed Deep-Sea Pilot for the Baltic

Sea should send a request to the pilot station 24 hours in advance. 

9.15 Regulations.—A Registration System has been established

within the Bay of Pomerania in order to protect the shores and

increase the safety of shipping.

9.15 This system was introduced for vessels sailing to Swinoujscie, Szczecin, Stepnica, and Trzebiez. It is compulsory for all

vessels 20m or more in length and all vessels which, because of

exceptional circumstances, pose a threat to navigation or the

environment.

9.15 Vessels passing the latitude of 54°30'N or the longitude of

14°45'E must report to Swinoujscie Traffic on VHF channel

12. Permission to enter the Port of Swinoujscie must be obtained from the authorities. The report should be formatted, as

follows:

1. The code word REPLINE SWIN.

2. Name, call sign, flag, and IMO number.

3. Position (latitude and longitude).

4. Destination (port).

5. Nature and quantity of any dangerous cargo.

6. Circumstances capable of affecting the safety of shipping and the cleanliness of the environment.

9.15 Traffic Control.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system

operates in the port areas of Swinoujscie and Szczecin.

9.15 The system is mandatory for the following vessels:

1. All vessels 20m or more in length (including composite units).

2. All vessels carrying dangerous cargo.

3. Unloaded tankers if not degassed after carrying dangerous cargo.

4. Passenger vessels.

9.15 Vessels navigating in the area from Zatoka Pommorska (Bay

of Pomerania) to Gate No. 1 (53°48.5'N., 14°20.6'E.) should

report to Swinoujscie Traffic (VHF channels 12, 16, and 70).

9.15 Vessels navigating in the area from Gate No. 1 (53°48.5'N.,

14°20.6'E.) to the Port of Szczecin should report to Szczecin

Traffic (VHF channels 16 and 69). Vessels required to report

must maintain a continuous listening watch, as appropriate, on

either VHF channel 12 (Swinoujscie VTS) or (Szczecin VTS)

on VHF channel 69 .

9.15 The seaward limit of the Swinoujscie VTS area is indicated

by a line connecting the following positions:

a. 53°55.7'N, 14°13.6'E. (German-Poland border)

b. 53°59.3'N, 14°14.5'E.

c. 54°07.6'N, 14°12.1'E.

d. 54°07.6'N, 14°16.8'E.

e. 53°54.6'N, 14°20.2'E. (coastline)

9.15 The Szczecin VTS area extends S of Brama Torowa 1

(53°48.2'N., 14°20.1'E.).

9.15 Inbound vessels requesting pilotage must send a Sailing Plan

(SP) to the Swinoujscie VTS Center 2 hours prior to their ETA

at the pilot boarding position.

9.15 Other inbound vessels must send an SP 15 minutes before

entering the VTS area.

9.15 The SP should be formatted, as follows:

Swinoujscie Signal Station

Designator Information Required

A Vessel name, call sign, and flag.

U Length (meters) and grt.

O Maximum draft.

J ETA at pilot boarding position.

I Port of destination. Designator Information Required

A Vessel name, call sign, IMO number, and

flag.

C or D Position.

H Point of entry into VTS system.

J ETA at pilot boarding position (PILOT-1,

PILOT-2, or PILOT-3). 
Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 207

Pub. 194

9.15 Inbound vessels requesting pilotage must also send a

Position Report (PR) to the Swinoujscie VTS, as follows:

1. 15 minutes before entering the VTS area.

2. When passing the Reporting Points.

3. When anchoring within the VTS area.

4. Fifteen (15) minutes prior to leaving an anchorage

within the VTS area.

5. Pilot embarkation or disembarkation.

6. When leaving or entering the fairway.

7. When berthing or leaving a berth.

9.15 The PR consists of (A1) name and call sign, (D) position,

and (L) intended track.

9.15 The Reporting Points are, as follows: 

1. The head of the E breakwater (Swinoujscie) (VHF

channel 12).

2. Dolphin No. 80 (53°27'N., 14°36'E.) (VHF channel

69).

3. Brama Torowa 1 (Southbound) (53°48.2'N.,

14°20.1'E.) (VHF channel 12).

4. Brama Torowa 1 (Northbound) (53°48.6''N.,

14°20.9'E.) (VHF channel 69).

5. Brama Torowa (53°39.9'N., 14°32.0'E.) (VHF

channel 69).

6. When leaving a port within the VTS area.

7. When leaving the VTS area.

9.15 A Deviation Report (DR) must be sent to the relevant VTS

Traffic Center by vessels changing their SP. The DR consists of

(A1) name and call sign, (D) position, and the changed designators.

9.15 An Incident Report (IR) must be sent to the relevant VTS

Traffic Center by vessels observing or taking part in an accident that impairs safety or the environment. The IR consists of

(A1) name and call sign, (C or D) position, and (Q) details of

damage.

9.15 For additional information concerning ETA messages for

vessels carrying dangerous cargo, see paragraph 9.16. 

9.15 Szczecin VTS broadcasts bulletins on VHF channel 13 in

Polish (and in English on request) at 0533, 1133, 1733, and

2333. The bulletins include information relevant to the safe

passage of ships through the entire VTS area. Both Swinoujscie VTS and Szczecin VTS will provide traffic information for

the fairway on VHF channel 13, on request.

9.15 Compulsory tug requirements are in force for vessels

entering Swinoujscie and Szczecin. Vessels should contact the

pilot for further information.

9.15 Caution.—During bad weather, the topmarks of the buoys in

the vicinity of Oder Bank may be missing and the lights extinguished.

9.15 Vessels should keep close to the range alignment of the inner

approach channel in order to remain within the dredged section.

9.15 Fishing nets may extend up to 3 miles from the shore to the

W of the harbor entrance.

9.15 Several wrecks and foul patches lie in the approaches to the

port and may best be seen on the chart.

9.15 Vessels should not approach within 20m of the E breakwater

at a point about 120m S of the head as the old breakwater

foundation projects into the channel.

Swinoujscie (53°55'N., 14°16'E.)

World Port Index No. 28820 

9.16 Swinoujscie, located at the mouth of the Rzeka

Swina, is the outport and transhipment base for Szczecin. It is

also a naval base, a deep-sea fishing center, and a resort. The

entrance to the river, which is protected by breakwaters, is the

central of three mouths of the Rzecka Odra.

9.16 Winds—Weather.—Strong NE winds cause heavy seas in

the roadstead off the port.

9.16 Ice.—The mouth of the river is generally free of ice and

icebreakers keep the port open. Icebreaking assistance will be

provided on the recommendation of the Port Captain only to

vessels of an ice class with engines of adequate power. Vessels

not of an appropriate ice class, which sail in ice conditions, do

so at their own risk and any action involved in freeing them

from ice will be carried out at their cost. Details concerning ice

conditions and routes will be provided by VTS Swinoujscie

and VTS Szczecin. For further information, see Pub. 140,

Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and

Adjacent Seas.

9.16 Tides—Currents.—The strength of the current depends on

the wind force. Off the entrance to the port, E and W winds

cause a set across the entrance. Light winds, from any direction, usually cause an outgoing current between the breakwaters. Strong N and NW winds cause an inward current which

may attain rates of up to 4 knots during heavy rainfall or after a

G Last port of call.

I Port of destination.

P Details of any dangerous cargo.

Q Details of defects, damage, or deficiencies. 

L Intended track.

T Name of agent.

U Length, beam, GRT, and type of vessel. 

W Total number of passengers (only for 

passenger vessels). 

Designator Information Required

Swinoujscie Channel
208 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

calm. The water level may rise or fall about 0.6m from the

mean level. Storms from the NE raise the level about 2m and

storms from the S lower it about 1m, but these maximum fluctuations are uncommon.

9.16 Depths—Limitations.—The port facilities, which include

major bulk terminals, consist of several harbor basins and river

berths. Generally, vessels up to 70,000 dwt, 270m in length,

and 12.8m draft can be accommodated. It is reported that a

vessel of 87,000 dwt, with a draft of 12.8m, has been handled.

9.16 The following principal berths are located in Swinoujscie:

1. Portowcow Quay, 245m long, can handle vessels up

to 11.9m draft and is mainly used for bulk and general cargo.

2. Gornikow Quay, 290m long, can handle vessels up to

12.8m draft and is used for bulk coal cargo.

3. Wladyslawa IV Quay, 407m long, can handle vessels

up to 10m draft and is mainly used by passenger and cruise

vessels.

4. Chemikow Quay, 282m long, can handle vessels up to

12.8m draft and is used for bulk cargo.

5. Hutnikow Quay, 330m long, can handle vessels up to

12.8m draft and is used by bulk and container vessels.

6. Porta Petrol Quay, 272m long, can handle vessels up

to 11m draft and is used by tankers.

7. Rozladunkowe Quay, 600m long, can handle vessels

up to 9.5m draft and is used by bulk and container vessels.

9.16 There is also a ferry terminal consisting of five quays, 154 to

206m long. It is used by ro-ro, cruise, and passenger ferry vessels, with drafts up to 7m.

9.16 Pilotage.—See Pilotage under Approach to Swinoujscie in

paragraph 9.15.

9.16 Regulations.—Vessels navigating in the approaches over

160m in length or over 7.32m draft are deemed to be constrained in their ability to maneuver and should display the

appropriate shapes and lights.

9.16 All loaded and empty tankers, not degassed after carrying

dangerous cargo, should send an ETA message 24 hours in

advance of arrival to the Swinoujscie VTS. The message

should include the date of validity of the Civil Liability

Certificate and the Master’s declaration of full maneuverability

of the vessel. An ETA confirmation message should also be

sent 6 hours in advance. 

9.16 All vessels carrying dangerous cargo, other than tankers,

should send an ETA message 24 hours in advance of arrival to

the Swinoujscie VTS. Vessels should also provide the Harbormaster or Swinoujscie VTS Center with a document of compliance with special requirements for ships carrying dangerous

cargo and a stowage plan or dangerous goods manifest.

9.16 A speed limit of 8 knots is enforced in the roadstead for large

vessels and a limit of 12 knots is enforced for vessels with

drafts less than 3m.

9.16 See Regulations under Approach to Swinoujscie in paragraph 9.15.

9.16 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in six designated

areas which may best be seen on the chart.

9.16 Anchorage Area No. 1A lies E of the entrance channel and

can be used by vessels with a maximum draft of 7m.

9.16 Anchorage Area No. 1B lies W of the entrance channel and

can be used by vessels with a maximum draft of 6m.

9.16 Anchorage Area No. 2A lies E of the Lighted Buoy N5 and

can be used by vessels with a maximum draft of 9.5m.

9.16 Anchorage Area No. 2B lies S of and adjacent to area No.

2A and can be used by vessels with a maximum draft of 11m.

9.16 The quarantine anchorage lies close N of area No. 2B and

can be used by vessels with a maximum draft of 10m.

9.16 Anchorage Area No. 3 lies 3 miles NNW of the Lighted

Buoy N2 and can be used by vessels with a maximum draft of

12.8m.

9.16 Caution.—Anchorage is prohibited within 0.2 mile on either

side of the entrance range line and in the vicinity of the remains

of a wreck, with a depth of 10.5m, lying about 4.5 miles NNE

of Swinoujscie E breakwater head.

9.16 A power cable, with an overhead clearance of 64m, spans the

channel in the vicinity of the port.

9.16 Ferries cross the river at a point about 0.7 mile SW of the

light.

Approach to Szczecin

9.17 Szczecin is approached from Swinoujscie through a

dredged channel, 37 miles long and 90m wide. The channel is

marked by lighted beacons and lighted buoys, and indicated by

lighted ranges. The fairway has depths of 9.5 to 10.5m, but

requires periodic dredging.

Swinoujscie Entrance 

Swinoujscie Ferry Terminal from SW
Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 209

Pub. 194

9.17 Mielinski Kanal (53°54'N., 14°15'E.) and Piastowski Kanal

(53°50'N., 14°19'E.) form the channel between Swinoujscie

and Wielki Zalew, the inland sea.

9.17 Mielino Island (53°53'N., 14°17'E.) forms the E side of

Mielinski Kanal. The Stara Swina (53°52'N., 14°17'E.) flows E

of this island and forms the S side of Wolin (53°54'N.,

14°21'E.).

9.17 Zalew Szczecinski, an inland sea, has depths of 2.7 to 9.6m.

The dredged channel which leads from Piastowski Kanal to

Roztoka Odrzanska (53°39'N., 14°35'E.), 11 miles SE, is 119m

wide, but is subject to silting. Wielki Zalew is the E part of

Zalew Szczecinski and is known to the Germans as Stettiner

Haff. Kleines Haff is the W part of Zalew Szczecinski.

9.17 Zalew Szczecinski lies within the delta of the Rzeka Odra

and flows into the Baltic Sea through three branches; Peenestrom flows from Kleines Haff, Rzeka Swina discharges at

Swinoujscie, and Rzeka Dziwna discharges E of the island of

Wolin. The water within Zalew Szczecinski is salty, especially

in the NW part, but it becomes fresh in the vicinity of Roztoka

Odrzanska.

9.17 Wolin Island (53°55'N., 14°30'E.) extends ENE between

Swinoujscie and the Dziwna River (54°02'N., 14°44'E.). It is

sandy and wooded.

9.17 Lubin (53°52'N., 14°26'E.), in the NE part of Wielki Zatew,

and Wolin (53°51'N., 14°36'E.), in the W part, are both small

and shallow ports. The narrow fairways leading to these

harbors are marked by buoys and indicated by lighted ranges.

9.17 Chelminek (53°41'N., 14°32'E.), an artificial island, lies in

the entrance to Roztoka Odrzanska and regulates the current.

The main approach channel leading to Szczecin passes W of

this island. Secondary channels lead to Stepnica (53°39'N.,

14°38'E.) and Trzebiez (53°40'N., 14°31'E.), both local

harbors lying at the E and NW sides of Roztoka Odrzanska,

which are used by fishing vessels, pleasure craft, and small

ferries. A church stands 0.3 mile NNE of the harbor at Stepnica

and is prominent when viewed from the channel in the bay.

9.17 Police (53°34'N., 14°34'E.), a local harbor, has a large chemical plant for fertilizers. Mijanka Quay, with a depth of 10m

alongside, can handle vessels of up to 140m in length and 8.4m

draft. Barkowe Quay, with a depth of 4.5m alongside, can

handle vessels of up to 75m in length, 12m beam, and 4m draft.

Sea Port Quay is 415m long and can accommodate vessels

with a maximum draft of 9.15m.

9.17 Kanal Inski Nurt, entered 2 miles SE of Police at the E side

of the river, connects with Jezioro Dabie, an extensive lake

with depths up to 3.5m.

9.17 Winds—Weather.—The water level in Zalew Szczecinski

rises and falls about 0.4m, respectively, with N and S winds.

9.17 Ice.—Ice forms earlier in the inland sea than in the various

reaches of the channel. During the ice period, which averages

about 60 days, vessels are accompanied by icebreakers and

tugs as wind-driven ice can set then onto the shoals.

9.17 Depths—Limitaions.—For details of permitted entry

length, beam, and draft, see the information and associated

table in paragraph 9.18.

9.17 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken within an area,

marked by buoys, lying in Wielki Zalew, on the NE side of the

fairway. This area extends NE and NW of Brama Tower No. 2

and may best be seen on the chart. It is limited to vessels of up

to 200m length and 4.9m draft.

9.17 Anchorage can also be taken by vessels of up to 100m in

length and 4.6m draft in an area lying NE of the fairway

channel, close NW of Chelminek Island.

9.17 Anchorage can be taken by vessels of up to 180m in length

and 5.2m draft in an area lying E of the fairway and centered

0.5 mile S of Mankow Front Range Light (53°37'N., 14°36'E.).

9.17 Anchorage can be taken by vessels of up to 100m in length

and 6.1m draft in an area lying close W of the fairway, l.5 miles

N of Police.

9.17 Anchorage can be taken by vessels of up to 8.5m draft in an

area lying close SW of the fairway at Police. Anchorage can

also be taken by vessels of up to 100m in length and 4.9m draft

in an area lying close E of the fairway, in the entrance to Kanal

Inski Nurt. 

9.17 Caution.—An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of

55m, spans the channel close N of Kanal Inski Nurt.

9.17 Numerous fishing nets are laid in Zalew Szczecinski and

vessels should stay within the marked fairway channels.

9.17 A submarine gas pipeline extends across the fairway about 3

miles N of Police.

Szczecin (Stettin) (53°24'N., 14°32'E.)

World Port Index No. 28823 

9.18 Szczecin lies 35 miles from the Baltic Sea and stands

on both sides of the Odra River. It is a major maritime outlet

for the Silesian industrial region of SW Poland and is connected to an extensive inland waterway system. The port also

serves as an important shipbuilding and ship repair center.

9.18 Winds—Weather.—Winds from between NW and NE raise

the water level and winds from between the SW and SE lower

it. The level may vary by as much as 1.5m from the mean.

9.18 Depths—Limitations.—The port facilities extend up to 6

miles S along the banks of the river. Generally, vessels up to a

maximum length of 210m, a maximum draft of 9.15m (fresh

water), or a maximum beam of 31m can be accommodated.

However, it is reported that a vessel of 223m in length and 32m

beam has been handled, with special permision.

Szczecin from N
210 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

9.18 The maximum length of vessels permitted to enter varies in

accordance with the maximum beam and maximum draft. The

relationship between permissible lengths, beams, and drafts for

vessels over 160m in length is shown in the following table:

9.18 The port has over 18 miles of quayage. The main commercial cargo facilities include 6,900m of total berthage, with

depths of 6 to 9.2m alongside. There are terminals for the

handling of general cargo, bulk, oil, container, and ro-ro vessels.

9.18 The following principal cargo berthing areas are located

within Szczecin:

1. The Rzeka Odra Area provides 20 berths along the W

bank of the river. The main quay is Huta (Kra 1), 420m long,

with depths of 8.1 to 8.3m alongside. This quay can handle

vessels up to 8.2m draft and is used mainly for bulk ore

cargo.

2. The Ewa Peninsula Area provides nine berths. The

main berths include Polskie, 260m long, with depths of 8.1

to 9.2m alongside; Zbozowe, 220m long, with depths of 8.2

to 9.2m alongside; Slowackie, 560m long, with a depth of

9.1m alongside; and Czeskie, 400m long, with a depth of

9.1m alongside. Polskie can handle vessels up to 9.15m draft

and is mainly used for general cargo. Zbozowe can handle

vessels up to 9.15m draft and is used for bulk grain cargo.

Slowacki and Czeskie can handle vessels up to 8.9m draft

and are used mainly by container and ro-ro vessels.

3. The Lasztownia (Central Port) Area, formed by Basin

Zachodni and Basin Wshodni, provides ten berths. The main

berth is Wegierskie, 590m long, with depths of 8.2 to 9m

alongside. This berth can handle vessels up to 8.9m draft and

is used mainly for general cargo.

4. The Industrial Port Area, which provides 21 berths, is

formed by Basin Gorniczy, Basin Gornoslaski, Basin Notecki, and Basin Warty. The main berths include Katowickie,

525m long, with depths of 8.2 to 9.2m alongside; and Gornoslaski, 285m long, with a depth of 9.2m alongside. Both of

these berths can handle vessels up to 9.15m draft and are

used mainly for bulk ore cargo.

5. The Parnica Area, which provides 16 berths, includes

Kanal Pryemyslowy, Kanal Dunczyca, and Basin Cichy. The

main berth is Parnica, 295m long, with a depth of 7.2m

alongside. This berth can handle vessels up to 7m draft and

is used for liquid bulk cement and tar.

9.18 Pilotage.—See Pilotage under Approach to Swinoujscie in

paragraph 9.15.

Szczecin—Grodzki Channel from S

Maximum Beam

25m 28m 31m

Length Maximum Draft

160m 9.15m 9.15m 9.15m

180m 8.93m 8.78m 8.63m

190m 8.73m 8.58m 8.43m

210m 8.48m 8.33m 8.17m

Szczecin—EWA Grain Terminal

Szczecin—Bulk Terminal
Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 211

Pub. 194

9.18 Regulations.—Vessels over 200m in length or over 9m

maximum draft may enter or leave the port during daylight

only and in a visibility of at least 2 miles. Vessels between

180m and 200m in length may enter or leave the port at night

and in a visibility of at least 2 miles, only with special permission.

9.18 All loaded and empty tankers, not degassed after carrying

dangerous cargo, should send an ETA message 24 hours in

advance of arrival to Swinoujscie VTS and Szczecin VTS. The

message should include the date of validity of the Civil Liability Certificate and the Master’s declaration of full maneuverability of the vessel. An ETA confirmation message should

also be sent 12 hours in advance.

9.18 All vessels carrying dangerous cargo, other than tankers,

should send an ETA message 24 hours in advance of arrival to

the Swinoujscie VTS Center and the Szczecin VTS Center.

Vessels should also provide the Harbormaster at Swinoujscie

and the Harbormaster at Szczecin with a document of compliance with special requirements for ships carrying dangerous

cargo and a stowage plan or dangerous goods manifest.

9.18 See Regulations under Approach to Swinoujscie in paragraph 9.15.

9.18 Caution.—Several submarine cables cross the channel and

may best be seen on the chart.

9.18 Navigation is prohibited within Oder Zachodnia, the W

branch of the river, and in the vicinity of the shipyards, except

for authorized vessels.

Zatoka Pomorska to Rozewie

9.19 Rzeka Dziwna (54°01'N., 14°44'E.) is entered 17

miles ENE of Swinoujscie. Dziwnow Dolny, a small fishing

harbor, lies on the N bank of the river mouth. An outer

approach lighted buoy is moored about 2.3 miles NW of the

river entrance and the channel is indicated by a lighted range.

9.19 A conspicuous church stands in the resort of Dziwnow

Gorny, 2.3 miles E of the river entrance. A narrow and shallow

channel leads from the river entrance to Wolin, 12 miles SSW.

9.19 The coast between Rzeka Dziwna and Rosewie, 136 miles

distant, is uniform and consists of sand dunes. Numerous

coastal lakes lie beyond these dunes and are connected to the

Baltic Sea by shallow rivers. The coast between Rzeka Dziwna

and Kolobrzeg, 31 miles ENE, is wooded in many places and

several resorts are situated along the shore.

9.19 Tides—Currents.—Onshore winds can cause a considerable

current along this section of the coast. Vessels navigating up to 6

miles offshore and steering courses parallel to the coast have

reported encountering a S set.

9.19 Caution.—During the period 15 March to 15 June annually,

numerous fishing vessels, with drift nets, may be encountered

within 15 miles of the coast between longitudes 15°E and

18°E.

9.19 Several dangerous wrecks lie off this stretch of the coast and

may best be seen in the chart.

9.19 A submarine pipeline, marked by a buoy, extends about 0.7

mile NNW from a point on the shore located about 1 mile ENE

of the mouth of the Rzeka Dziwna. 

9.20 Niechorze (54°06'N., 15°04'E.), a summer resort, is

situated 13 miles ENE of Rzeka Dziwna. A light is shown from

a conspicuous tower with a dwelling, 45m high, standing on

the foreshore.

9.20 Several local churches in the area are prominent from seaward. A conspicuous church stands near the shore at Trzesacz,

a resort, situated 3 miles WSW of Niechorze. Churches, each

with a prominent tower, stand at Trzebiatow and Sadlno which

are situated inland 7.5 miles ESE and 4.2 miles SE, respectively, of Niechorze.

9.20 Rzeka Rega (54°09'N., 15°17'E.) enters the sea 8.5 miles

ENE of Niechorze. Mrzezyno and Glebokie, both summer

resorts, are fronted by small fishing harbors and lie on the E

and W banks, respectively, of the river mouth. The church in

Mrzezyno has a pointed tower and is conspicuous from offshore. 

9.20 Prominent churches also stand at Sieradowo and Korzyslno

which are situated 4.5 miles ESE and 8 miles E, respectively,

of the river mouth.

9.20 Dzwirzyno, a resort, is fronted by a small fishing harbor. It

lies at the mouth of Kanal Resko, 4 miles ENE of Rzeka Rega.

A beacon stands near the shore about 0.5 mile E of the entrance. Refer to the graphic on the new Traffic Separation

Scheme in Sec. 4.53.

9.21 Kolobrzeg (Kolberg) (54°11'N., 15°33'E.) (World

Port Index No. 28800), a loading place and fishing center, lies

at the mouth of the Parseta River. This river discharges into the

Baltic Sea, 10 miles ENE of the Rzeka Rega.

9.21 Ice.—Ice usually does not constitute an obstacle to shipping

in the vicinity of the port. Freezing may occur during January,

but for only about one week. During severe winters with

onshore winds, the harbor is sometimes closed by drift ice, but

it clears out quickly with offshore winds.

9.21 Tides—Currents.—The coastal currents set E or W across

the harbor entrance, depending on the wind direction. They

attain rates of 3 knots during prolonged periods of stormy

weather. The river current sets outward at a rate of about 1 knot

and reaches a rate of 3 knots after continuous rainfalls. The

water level generally varies up to about 0.3m above and below

the mean level. Gales from the N raise the level as much as 1m

Niechorze Light
212 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

and gales from the S lower it an equal amount.

9.21 Depths—Limitations.—There is a total of 2,500m of berthage, with depths of 2 to 6m alongside. Generally, vessels are

restricted to a maximum length of 75m, a maximum beam of

13m, and a maximum draft of 4.7m. Vessels up to 2,000 dwt

have been accommodated in the harbor. 

9.21 Aspect.—A light is shown from a prominent tower, 30m

high, standing near the root of the E breakwater.

9.21 Conspicuous landmarks include Kolobrzeg Cathedral, with

its truncated tower, standing 1 mile SSE of the head of the E

breakwater; a grain elevator standing on the E side of the

harbor; and a six-story building situated in the vicinity of the

harbor. Prominent landmarks include an old fort which is

formed by a circular structure and surmounted by a lighthouse;

a barracks-like hotel situated close SE of the fort; and two

pointed towers standing 0.2 mile E of the hotel.

9.21 An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about 2.7 miles

NNW of the harbor entrance.

9.21 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 150 grt.

Requests for pilotage should be sent at least 1 hour before

arrival. Pilots may be contacted by VHF and board about 0.5

mile N of the harbor entrance.

9.21 Anchorage.—The best anchorage berth, in depths of 12 to

14m, lies with the church at Trzebiatow (54°04'N., 15°16'E.)

bearing 228°. At night, anchorage may be obtained, in a depth

of 12m, with the light bearing 133°.

9.21 Caution.—Vessels should not attempt to enter the harbor

when heavy gales raise a sea in the entrance.

9.21 Attention should be paid to the current which sets across the

harbor entrance; vessels should exercise care in order to avoid

a sheer.

9.21 Several wrecks lie in the approaches to the port and may best

be seen on the chart.

9.21 It is reported that prolonged stormy weather may cause

silting within the port.

9.21 Anchoring and fishing are prohibited in an area, the limits of

which are shown on the chart, lying centered 9 miles N of the

harbor entrance.

9.21 A submarine cable extends seaward in a NW direction from

the vicinity of the harbor.

9.22 The coast between Kolobrzeg and Darlowo, 34 miles

ENE, is mostly low and sandy. It is backed by wooded spurs in

places and by two large lakes in the vicinity of Darlowo.

Several shallow streams lead from these lakes into the sea.

9.22 Gaski Light (54°15'N., 15°52'E.) is shown from a prominent tower with a dwelling, 15m high, standing on the coast

amidst trees, 12 miles ENE of Kolobrzeg. A conspicuous

church, with a spire, is situated near the foreshore, 3 miles E of

the light.

9.22 A densely-wooded and prominent hill stands 5.5 miles inland,

12.5 miles ESE of Gaski Light. It rises to a height of about 140m

and is surmounted by a lookout tower, 10m high, and a conspicuous monument.

9.22 Mielno (54°15'N., 16°03'E.), a coastal summer resort, lies

7.5 miles E of Gaski Tower. A dangerous wreck, marked by

buoy, lies about 1.7 miles offshore, 9.5 miles NE of this resort.

Kolobrzeg Entrance

Kolobrzeg Light

Gaski Light
Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 213

Pub. 194

9.22 Caution.—Several submarine cables extend seaward in a

NW direction from the vicinity of Mielno and may be seen on

the chart.

9.23 Darlowo (Rugenwalde) (54°26'N., 16°25'E.) (World

Port Index No. 28790), a small harbor, lies at the mouth of the

Wieprza River. It consists of several basins and is protected by

two breakwaters. 

9.23 Ice.—During normal winters, the river current keeps the

harbor clear of ice. In severe freezing, ice usually forms in the

roadstead or following N winds, blocks the harbor entrance.

This can occur between the middle of February and the middle

of March.

9.23 Tides—Currents.—The coastal currents set NE and SW

across the harbor entrance, depending on the wind direction.

With storms blowing parallel to the coast, these currents attain

rates of 2 to 3 knots. Winds from between S and SE usually

produce only a weak current. The river current depends on the

wind and the water level, and usually flows outward. In the

spring and during a thaw, the river current attains a rate of 4

knots. The water level usually varies up to 0.2m below and

above the mean level. Gales from the N raise the water level as

much as 1.5m and gales from the S lower it as much as 0.6m.

9.23 Depths—Limitations.—The harbor entrance is 38m wide

and has a depth of 7m. A drawbridge spans the channel close

inside the river mouth and has an opening, 14.9m wide.

9.23 There is 1,100m of total quayage with a depth of 4.5m

alongside. Vessels are restricted to a maximum length of 75m

and a maximum draft of 4m. The harbor is mostly used by

coasters and fishing vessels. Vessels of up to 1,500 dwt have

been accommodated in the harbor.

9.23 Aspect.—A light is shown from a prominent tower, 21m

high, standing near the root of the NE breakwater. A conspicuous church, with a pointed turret, stands 1.7 miles ENE of the

light. Several prominent buildings and a grain elevator are

situated near the harbor and may be identified from seaward. A

prominent observation tower stands 0.5 mile W of the harbor.

9.23 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 150

grt. Pilots are available between 0600 and 2200; vessels must

send an ETA at least 2 hours in advance. Pilots may be contacted by VHF and board in the roadstead off the harbor entrance.

9.23 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 16m

within the roadstead, about 1.5 miles NW of Darolo Light.

9.23 Caution.—Vessels should not attempt to enter the harbor

when strong onshore winds raise a sea in the narrow entrance.

9.24 Jaroslawiec (54°32'N., 16°33'E.) lies 8.5 miles NE of

Darlowo. The coast between is composed of sand dunes which

are backed by hilly ranges rising 3 to 5 miles inland. At

Jaroslawiec, the coast is formed by steep, white, and partly

wooded cliffs. Jaroslaweic Light is shown from a prominent

tower, 31m high, standing near a dwelling on the top of the

cliffs.

9.24 A church, with a prominent steeple, stands 1 mile inland,

about 2 miles SW of the light.

9.24 From Jaroslawiec, the coast extends 11.5 miles ENE to

Ustka and is mostly composed of high sand dunes. It is partly

wooded and backed, in places, by lakes. Several high hills and

church steeples are situated inland and are visible from seaward.

9.24 Stolpe Bank (54°55'N., 16°39'E.), an extensive bank, is

known as Lawica Slupska to the Poles. It has a least depth of

7.8m and lies centered 24 miles NNE of Jaroslawiec Light.

Refer to the graphic on the new TSS in Sec 4.53. 

9.25 Ustka (Stolpmunde) (54°35'N., 16°51'E.) (World Port

Index No. 28770), a small commercial harbor, lies at the mouth

of the Slupia River. It consists of several basins and is protected by two breakwaters, about 320m long, which extend

almost parallel to each other.

9.25 Ice.—During normal winters, the port usually remains open,

but drift ice may be carried into the harbor by offshore winds.

In severe winters, ice may form for 2 to 3 weeks, but swells

break it up and the outgoing river current quickly clears the

harbor. 

9.25 Tides—Currents.—The coastal currents set E or W across

the entrance, depending on the wind direction. They attain

rates of up to 2 knots with stormy weather. The outgoing river

current is noticeable with offshore winds, and during spring

thaws may attain a rate of 3 to 4 knots. Gales from between

NW and NE raise the water level by about 1m; gales from

between SW and SE lower it by about 1m.

9.25 Depths—Limitations.—There are depths of 5.5m in the

Darlowo Light

Jaroslawiec Light
214 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

entrance channel, which is 40m wide, and 4 to 5.2m in the river.

Concrete quays line the river banks and provide 2.500m of

berthage. The harbor is mostly used by coasters and fishing vessels. During normal weather conditions, vessels up to 58m in

length, 11.5m beam, and 4.5m draft can be accommodated.

9.25 Aspect.—A light is shown from a conspicuous stone building with an octagonal tower, 22m high, standing near the root

of the E breakwater. A beacon stands 2.5 miles WSW of the

light. A conspicuous church, with a slender spire, stands 0.4

mile SSE of the light. Several chimneys and buildings stand on

the E side of the harbor and are visible from seaward.

9.25 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 150 grt,

vessels 40m in length and over, and all vessels carrying dangerous cargo. Pilots are available from 0600 to 2200; vessels

should send a request for pilotage and an ETA at least 2 hours

in advance. Pilots may be contacted by VHF and board about 1

mile NW of the harbor entrance.

9.25 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 12 to

14m, between 0.5 mile and l.3 miles NW of the breakwaters.

9.25 Caution.—It is inadvisable to attempt to enter the harbor

with fresh to strong onshore winds as the heavy seas and

coastal current tend to set vessels onto the breakwaters.

9.26 Rowek (Rowy) (54°40'N., 17°03'E.), a summer resort

and fishing center, lies at the mouth of the Lubawa River, 8.5

miles NE of Ustka. The coast between Ustka and this resort

consists of high dunes. The harbor is used by small craft and

local knowledge is required. The harbor entrance is 12m wide

and is indicated by a lighted range. A rocky patch, with a least

depth of 4m, lies off the harbor entrance and is marked by a

buoy. Several fishing craft, with nets and lines, may generally

be encountered in the vicinity of this rocky patch. A power

cable spans the entrance fairway and restricts vessels to an air

draft of 6.8m.

9.26 Czolpino (54°43'N., 17°15'E.) is located 6.7 miles NE of

Rowek. A light is shown from a prominent tower, 25m high,

standing on a high sand dune, about 0.5 mile from the shore.

9.26 A conspicuous hill, 115m high, stands 3.7 miles SSW of the

light and is surmounted by a beacon.

9.26 Leba (54°46'N., 17°33'E.), a shallow harbor, lies at the

mouth of the Leba River, 11 miles ENE of Czolpino. This river

forms the outlet for a lake which lies about 1 mile to the W.

The harbor, formed by two moles, has an entrance 30m wide

and is subject to silting. It is used by small craft and fishing

boats with local knowledge. An outer approach lighted buoy is

moored about 1 mile NNE of the entrance.

9.26 A church, standing in the town, and a castle, standing on a

dune close E of the harbor, are prominent from seaward.

9.26 Stilo Light (54°47'N., 17°44'E.) is shown from a conspicuous tower, 33m high, standing on the summit of a sand dune

ridge, 0.5 mile inland and 6.5 miles ENE of Leba. A tower,

13m high, stands near the coast to the N of this light.

9.26 A stranded wreck lies close offshore, about 2 miles W of

Stilo Light.

9.26 It was reported that several lighted dolphins are situated

about 4 miles ENE of Stillo Light and extend up to 0.4 mile

offshore.

9.26 The coast extendind 21 miles E from Stilo Light to Rozewie

is wooded with beacons marking several of the higher sand

dunes. A prominent church, with two towers, stands at Zarnowiec, situated 2.3 miles inland and 11 miles E of Stilo Light.

9.27 Rozewie (54°50'N., 18°21'E.), 54m high, is a precipitous headland. Rozewie Light is shown from a prominent

Ustka Light

Czolpino Light

Stilo Light
Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 215

Pub. 194

tower, 29m high, standing on this headland. A disused light

tower, 20m high, is situated close WNW of the light. Two

prominent mills stand about 1 mile SW of Rozewie Light.

9.27 Rozewie Cap Oil Field (Oil Field B3) (55°29'N., 18°11'E.)

lies centered about 40 miles N of Rozewie Light. Baltic Beta

Oil Production Platform, equipped with racon, is located in this

field and an SBM is moored 0.8 mile SSW of it. Several other

platforms, some equipped with racons, are situated within this

field. A submarine pipeline extending from this field to

Wladyslawowo, 42 miles SSE, is best be seen on the chart.

9.27 A restricted area, with a radius of 2.5 miles, lies centered on

the Baltic Beta Platform. Vessels are prohibited from entering

this area without prior permission.

9.27 An exploration area, the limits of which may best be seen on

the chart, extends about 19 miles ESE from the oil field.

Gulf of Gdansk

9.28 The Gulf of Gdansk (Zatoka Gdanska), formerly

known as the Gulf of Danzig, lies between Rozewie and Mys

Taran, 57 miles E.

9.28 Ice.—Ice in the gulf appears in the latter half of December or

in January, and usually clears about the middle of March. The

harbors lying in the gulf are only rendered difficult to enter

because of ice in very severe winters. 

9.28 Tides—Currents.—The currents in the gulf depend largely

on the strength and direction of the winds. In calm conditions,

a weak current usually flows NW along the coast.

9.28 The water level in the gulf may vary by as much as 1m.

Strong S winds cause the level to fall and strong N winds cause

it to rise.

9.28 Regulations.—GDANREP, a mandatory ship reporting system, is in operation in the approaches to Gdynia/Gdansk. The

following vessels are required to report to the Gulf of Gdansk

Vessel Traffic Service (VTS): 

1. All passenger vessels. 

2. All vessels of 150 gross tons and over.

3. All vessels engaged in towing.

9.28 The VTS Center (call sign: VTS Zatoka Gdanska) can be

contacted on VHF channels 16, 18, 20, 69, 70, and 71. The

working languages are English and Polish. 

9.28 The VTS area is bounded by the following positions: 

a. 54°45.0'N, 18°32.6'E.

b. 54°45.0'N, 19°06.4'E.

c. 54°44.0'N, 19°08.1'E.

d. 54°43.1'N, 19°09.9'E.

e. 54°40.7'N, 19°15.0'E.

f. 54°36.2'N, 19°24.2'E.

g. 54°32.0'N, 19°31.0'E.

h. 54°27.5'N, 19°38.3'E.

9.28 All vessels navigating within the VTS area shall maintain a

continuous listening watch on VHF channel 71. Vessels which

have taken positions within a roadstead or the anchorage area

of a port shall maintain a continuous listening watch on the

appropriate channel for the Harbormaster of the port. Gdansk

Harbormaster may be contacted on VHF channel 14; Gdynia

Harbormaster may be contacted on VHF channel 12.

9.28 Zatoka VTS Center may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

9.28 All vessels entering the VTS area, including those on

passage through the area and not calling at a port, must send a

Sailing Plan Report to the VTS Center when crossing the outer

boundary.

9.28 The Sailing Plan Report must be formatted, as follows:

Rozewie Light

Rozewie Disused Light Tower

vts@umgdy.gov.pl

vtscentrum@umgdy.gov.pl

Designator Information Required

A Vessel name, call sign, and flag.

C or D

Position (C—latitude and longitude in 

a 4-digit group suffixed N and a 5-

digit group suffixed E).

Position (D—true bearing and distance from a prominent landmark).

E True course (3 digits).

F Speed (in knots and tenths—3 digits).
216 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

9.28 All vessels leaving the VTS area must report to the VTS

Center when crossing the outer boundary. The report must include items designated A, C or D, I, and W from the above

table.

9.28 All vessels must send a Position Report, which includes

items designated A and C or D from the above table, when

passing the following Reporting Points (see Directions):

1. Hel Lighted Buoy (Inbound and outbound—VHF

channel 71).

2. ZN Lighted Buoy (Inbound and outbound—VHF

channel 71).

3. GD Lighted Buoy (Inbound—VHF channel 12;

outbound— VHF channel 71).

4. NP Lighted Buoy (Inbound—VHF channel 14; outbound—VHF channel 71).

5. PP Lighted Buoy (Inbound—VHF channel 14; outbound—VHF channel 71).

9.28 The following vessels bound for a port within the VTS area

(or their agents) are required to send an ETA Report to the VTS

Center in addition to the Sailing Plan Report: 

1. All passenger vessels.

2. All cargo vessels of 150 grt and over.

3. All vessels, regardless of tonnage, carrying dangerous

cargo or which, as a result of exceptional circumstances,

present a risk of collision or of environmental pollution.

9.28 The ETA Report must be sent at least 24 hours prior to

arrival (72 hours for tankers with dangerous cargo or non gasfree and 48 hours for gas-free tankers); at the time of leaving a

previous port if the voyage is less than 24 hours; or as soon as

the information becomes available if the port of call is

unknown or changes during the voyage.

9.28 The ETA Report must be formatted, as follows:

9.28 All vessels must send a report to the VTS Center on

discharge or possible discharge overboard of dangerous cargo,

harmful materials, oil, or polluting substances.

9.28 All vessels transporting dangerous or polluting cargo must

have the following information available:

1. The proper technical names, IMO classes, and quantities of the cargo.

2. Confirmation that there exists a list or manifest and a

cargo plan giving details of the cargo and the distribution on

the vessel. 

3. The date of validity of the certificate of financial insurance (for tankers transporting more than 2,000 tons of oil

cargo).

9.28 All vessels must send a report (ER) to the VTS Center

regarding any incident or accident affecting the safety of navigation, the safety of the environment, or the safety of traffic.

9.28 The VTS Center broadcasts navigation and weather information in Polish at 0005, 0705, 1305, and 1905; in English at

0020, 0720, 1320, and 1920; and on request.

9.28 Two IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Schemes, for vessels

proceeding to and from ports on the SW side of the Gulf of

Gdansk, can best be seen on the chart. Rule 10 of the 72 COLREGS applies in both schemes. 

9.28 Directions.—If bound for Nowy Port, Gdansk, or Gdynia,

vessels should steer for the seaward end of the TSS, which is

situated about 6.5 miles NE of Hel Light (54°36'N., 18°49'E.).

Vessels should proceed SSW for 5 miles, in the inward bound

traffic lane, to Hel Lighted Buoy (54°35'N., 18°53'E.), which is

moored about 2.7 miles ESE of Hel Light. They should then

continue SW for 5 miles to the vicinity of GN Lighted Buoy

(54°32'N., 18°48'E.). The inward bound traffic lane passes W

of Hel Lighted Buoy.

9.28 If bound for Gdynia, vessels should steer a course of

271.7°from GN Lighted Buoy toward GD Lighted Buoy,

moored 4.5 miles W, where the pilot embarks. 

9.28 If bound for Nowy Port or Gdansk, vessels should steer a

course of 221° from GN Lighted Buoy for 5.2 miles to NP

Lighted Buoy (54°28'N., 18°42'E.). Vessels should then steer

into the approach channel for the port or, if directed, proceed to

the anchorage area.

9.28 Vessels bound for Port Polnocny should steer for the seaward

end of the TSS, which is situated about 10 miles ENE of Hel

Light (54°36'N., 18°49'E). They should proceed SSE for about

4 miles, in the inward bound traffic lane, to ZN Lighted Buoy

(54°37'N., 19°06'E.), which is moored about 10 miles E of Hel

Light. Vessels should then continue SSW for 12 miles to the

vicinity of ZS Lighted Buoy (54°27'N., 18°58'E.) and WSW

for about 2 miles to PP Lighted Buoy (54°26'N., 18°54'E.). The

inward bound traffic lane passes W of ZN Lighted Buoy and

ZS Lighted Buoy.

9.28 Unless proceeding to the anchorage, vessels should steer

I

Destination and ETA (6-digit group of 

day of month, hours, and minutes in 

GMT/UTC time).

O Maximum draft (4-digit group of 

meters and centimeters).

P Cargo and brief details of any dangerous cargo.

Q or R

Q—Brief details of defects, damage, 

or deficiencies. 

R—Brief details of type of pollution 

or dangerous cargo lost overboard.

T Agent or owner.

W Total number of persons on board.

X Any other appropriate information.

Designator Information Required

A Vessel name, call sign, and flag.

G Name of last port of call.

I

Destination and ETA (6-digit group of 

day of month, hours, and minutes in 

GMT/UTC time).

Designator Information Required

P Cargo and brief details of any dangerous cargo.

T Agent or owner.

U Length, beam, tonnage, and type of ship.

W Total number of persons on board.

Designator Information Required
Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 217

Pub. 194

WSW for about 2.7 miles from the vicinity of PP Lighted Buoy

to PP1 Lighted Buoy, which marks the seaward approach to the

dredged entrance channel.

9.28 Two-way traffic lanes join the route described above between Hel Lighted Buoy and ZN Lighted Buoy, between GN

Lighted Buoy and ZS Lighted Buoy, and between GD Lighted

Buoy and NP Lighted Buoy. Vessels transiting between the

approaches to Gdynia and the approaches to Gdansk should

use these lanes or navigate in the main traffic lanes of the TSS.

9.28 Caution.—Former mine danger areas, in which vessels are

cautioned against anchoring or fishing, lie within the Gulf of

Gdansk and may best be seen on the chart. For additional information concerning mine danger areas, see Pub. 140, Sailing

Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and

Adjacent Seas.

9.28 Oil platforms and associated installations may be encountered in the approaches and off the shores of the gulf.

9.28 Numerous fishing craft may be encountered in the gulf

during the spring and autumn. Seine nets, over 1 mile long,

may be in use and are marked floats, flags, and lights. 

9.28 Vessels are cautioned not to rely on floating aids in the approaches to the gulf during ice periods as they may be changed

or removed.

9.28 Firing exercise areas, within which fishing and navigation

are temporarily prohibited, lie in the Gulf of Gdansk. For further information concerning these areas, see Pub. 140, Sailing

Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and

Adjacent Seas.

9.28 It has been reported that two mooring buoys have been

established in the NE approaches to the gulf, in a position lying

about 23 miles NW of Mys Taran (54°58'N., 19°59'E.). 

9.29 Gulf of Gdansk—Northwest side.—The coast extends SE for 4 miles from Rozewie to the root of the Hel Peninsula (54°40'N., 18°45'E.). It then extends S to Gdynia and is irregular and steep. The shore is formed of bare cliffs fronted by

a narrow beach.

9.29 A conspicuous hill, 68m high, stands 1 mile SE of Rozewie

and is surmounted by a tower.

9.29 Wladyslawowo (54°48'N., 18°25'E.), a small harbor, lies at

the root of the Hel Peninsula and is mostly used by fishing vessels. It is protected by two breakwaters, 400m and 700m long,

which form an entrance, 70m wide. Vessels of up to 75m in

length and 4m draft can be accommodated. There are five

wharves, 140 to 300m long, with depths of 4.5 to 5.5m alongside. The entrance channel has a depth of 5m, but is subject to

continuous change. It is reported that a shoal, with a depth of

2.2m and marked by a buoy, extends across the entrance

channel. 

9.29 An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about 0.7 mile

ENE of the harbor entrance. A prominent church, with a spire,

stands in the town and a conspicuous fishery building, with a

slender tower, is situated 0.4 mile ESE of it.

9.30 The Hel Peninsula (Mierzeja Helska) (54°40'N.,

18°45'E.) extends for 18 miles and its seaward side is fringed

by shoals of hard sand and fronted by a narrow beach.

9.30 A conspicuous church, with a spire, stands at Kuznicka, 7.2

miles SE of Wladyslawowo. Another conspicuous church, with

a tower and a cupola, stands at Jastarnia, 11 miles SE of

Wladyslawowo.

9.30 Jastarnia Light (54°42'N., 18°41'E.) is shown from a prominent tower, 13m high, standing 0.5 mile SE of the church. It is

reported that another prominent tower stands close NW of the

light.

9.30 On the seaward side of the peninsula, a line of wooded dunes

extends along the whole length. From the vicinity of Jastarnia,

a dense forest extends to the SE end.

9.30 Hel Light (54°36'N., 18°49'E.) is shown from a prominent

tower, 38m high, standing close to the S extremity of the peninsula. Several deviation beacons, for the adjustment of compasses, are situated in the vicinity of the light.

9.30 Gora Szwedow Beacon, a framework tower, 17m high,

stands about 1.5 miles N of Hel Light and is prominent.

9.31 Hel (54°36'N., 18°48'E.), a fishing harbor and summer resort, lies on the W side of the S extremity of the peninsula. The outer part of the harbor is formed by two breakwaters

and is sheltered from N and W winds. The inner part is

enclosed by two moles which form an entrance, 50m wide. A

Jastarnia Light

Hel Light
218 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

small naval harbor lies 1 mile NW of the fishing harbor and is

formed by two jetties. Vessels with drafts up to 3.7m can enter

Hel. The main quay is 146m long and has a depth of 5m

alongside the N end.

Lighted Buoy HL-S is moored close off the S end of the

peninsula and marks the edge of the coastal shoal.

Zatoka Pucka forms the NW part of the Gulf of Gdansk. This

bay is entered between the S end of the Hel Peninsula and

Cypel Oksywski, a bluff, located 9 miles WSW. Several small

rivers discharge into the W side of the bay. The outer part of

the bay has depths of 12 to 55m which decrease gradually

toward the mainland and the head. During onshore storms,

excellent anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 11 to 40m,

within the bay, but clear of the submarine cables.

9.31 Caution.—A restricted area, within which foreign vessels

are prohibited, lies E and N of Hel Light. It extends up to 2.7

miles offshore and may best be seen on the chart.

9.31 Several submarine cables extend across the entrance to

Zatoka Pucka and may be best seen on the chart.

9.31 Numerous wrecks, obstructions, and foul patches lie in

Zatoka Pucka and may be best seen on the chart.

9.31 Several protected fish spawning areas lie in Zatoka Pucka

and may best be seen on the chart.

9.31 Several buoys are periodically moored across the entrance to

Zatoka Pucka; they are for fishery purposes and have no navigational significance.

9.31 A measured distance, marked by beacons and buoys, lies off

the S side of the peninsula, about 2 miles NW of Hel.

9.31 It is reported that most of the lighted buoys moored in

Zatoka Pucka are removed during the winter.

9.32 Jastarnia (54°42'N., 18°41'E.), a small fishing harbor, lies 7.5 miles NW of Hel Light. It is approached through a

channel, marked by a lighted range, and entered through an

entrance, 60m wide. An outer approach lighted buoy is moored

about 1 mile S of the harbor entrance and a lighted beacon

stands on the W side of the fairway. The harbor has general

depths of 4.5 to 5m and there are depths of 2.5 to 4.4m alongside the quays.

9.32 Kuznica (54°44'N., 18°35'E.), a small and shallow fishing

harbor, lies 4 miles NW of Jastarnia. It is approached through a

channel indicated by a lighted range. An outer approach

lighted buoy is moored about 1 mile SE of the harbor entrance.

A buoy is moored about 3 miles SE of the harbor entrance and

marks the W edge of the coastal shoal in this vicinity. 

9.32 Caution.—Vessels should stay well clear of the dangerous

wreck lying 1 mile SSE of the safe water KUZ Lighted buoy

(54°44.0'N., 18°35.5'E.). 

9.32 Puck (54°44'N., 18°25'E.), a small and shallow harbor, lies

on the NW side of Zatoka Pucka, opposite Kuznica. It is used

by fishing boats and pleasure craft. A buoyed channel, with a

depth of 3m, leads across the shoals lying in the approaches. A

church standing in Puck has a prominent tower which is visible

from all parts of the bay. Another church situated at Swarzewo,

2.3 miles N of Puck, has a prominent spire that can be easily

identified.

9.32 A beacon stands on Cypel Rzucewski, a wooded point,

located 2.7 miles SE of Puck. A castle, with a conspicuous

tower rising above the woods, and the conspicuous chimney of

a brickworks stand close S of the beacon.

9.32 Cypel Rewski, a narrow tongue of land, extends 0.8 mile

NNE from a point located 4 miles SSE of Cypel Rzucewski.

Rybitwia Mielizna, a drying shoal, extends 4.5 miles SW from

a point located close S of Kuznica. A channel leads between

this narrow tongue of land and the S end of the shoal.

9.32 Cypel Oksywski, a bluff, forms the W entrance point of the

bay. It is located 6 miles SSE of Cypel Rewski and also forms

the N entrance point of Gdynia.

Gdynia (54°32'N., 18°33'E.)

World Port Index No. 28740

9.33 Gdynia, a large port, lies in the SW part of the Gulf of

Gdansk and has extensive shipbuilding facilities. It also serves

as a transshipment center for inland cargo. The harbor extends

2 miles S of Cypel Oksywski and is fronted by detached

breakwaters. It is sheltered from NW seas and winds by the Hel

Peninsula.

9.33 Ice.—During most winters, the roadstead and the port are

usually free of ice. Only during prolonged freezing weather

Gdynia—Outer Harbor 

Gdynia—Inner Harbor 
Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 219

Pub. 194

does ice form in the harbor basins. Winds of gale force may

sometimes move drift ice from other parts of the bay into the

vicinity of the harbor and render navigation difficult. If necessary, icebreakers keep the approach channel and the harbor

open. The water level may vary by as much as 0.9m. It is raised

by N winds and lowered by S winds.

9.33 Tides—Currents.—The tides are not significant. The

surface currents depend on the wind direction and a N flow

predominates. With N and NE winds, the current flows S and

attains rates of up to 2 knots.

9.33 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel is 150m

wide and dredged to a depth of 14m. Generally, vessels up to

245m in length and 13m draft can enter the harbor.

9.33 Commercial vessels must enter the harbor through the main

(center) entrance, which is 150m wide. They are prohibited

from using the N entrance.

9.33 The port has 5.8 miles of total commercial quayage with

depths of 7.5 to 16m alongside. There are facilities for general

cargo, petroleum, LPG, bulk, ore, container, passenger, and roro vessels.

9.33 In addition, there are extensive repair and building facilities.

Generally, vessels of up to 200,000 dwt can be constructed in

the port, but vessels of up to 400,000 dwt can be constructed by

using sectional building methods. 

9.33 The principal berths, with the maximum allowable alongside

draft, are listed in the accompanying table.

Gdynia—Bulk Terminal 

Gdynia—Passenger Terminal 

Gdynia—General Cargo Basin 

Gdynia—Berth Information

Wharf Length Draft (Max)

Outer Harbor

French Wharf 513m 13.0m

Fuel Base Wharf 250m 10.1m

Port Channel 2,963m 10.3m

Finnish Wharf 208m 9.5m

Slovakian Wharf 182m 8.9m

Norwegian Wharf 264m 7.8m

Northern Breakwater 368m 9.5m

South Channel 1,296m 8.1m

Engineer Wharf 252m 7.2m

Iceland Wharf 196m 7.4m

Basin No. I

Pomerania Wharf 626m 6.9m

President Wharf 263m 7.8m

Cutter Wharf 630m 7.1m

Basin No. II

English Wharf 662m 8.5m

Silesian Wharf 467m 8.5m

Basin No. III

Swedish Wharf 713m 10.5m

Danish Wharf 387m 6.5m

South Pier 112m 7.4m

North Pier 116m 5.7m

Belgian Wharf 118m 6.8m

French Wharf 112m 8.8m

Dutch Wharf 500m 10.8m

Basin No. IV

Polish Wharf 1,118m 11.2m

Rotterdam Wharf 301m 7.7m

Indian Wharf 1,009m 11.3m

Basin No. V

U.S. Wharf 819m 8.7m
220 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

9.33 Aspect.—The breakwaters protecting the port extend S for

about 1.5 miles and provide three entrances. Numerous concrete boulders lie close to the seaward side of the main breakwater. The main harbor entrance fairway is marked by lighted

buoys and indicated by a lighted range, which may best be seen

on the chart.

9.33 The low sandy coast in the vicinity of the port is backed by

wooded hills. Prominent landmarks include several radar masts

standing close N of the port; the port authority building with a

control (signal) tower, 28m high, standing on the S side of the

entrance to the inner harbor; a grain elevator standing 0.5 mile

W of the signal tower; and a lattice tower standing at the meteorological office, 0.8 mile S of the signal tower. An illuminated cross surmounts a hill, 48m high, which rises about 0.3

mile S of meteorological office. This cross is reported to be

visible at night from the entire gulf.

9.33 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for the following vessels:

1. Vessels of 60m and over in length.

2. All vessels carrying hazardous cargo.

3. All vessels not gas free.

4. Vessels overloaded or exceeding trim.

5. Vessels with a dangerous list.

6. Damaged vessels which may cause environmental

pollution.

9.33 Pilots can be contacted by VHF and board vessels with a

draft exceeding 9m or carrying hazardous cargo in the vicinity

of GD Lighted Buoy (54°32'N., 18°40'E.), which is moored

about 3.5 miles E of the harbor entrance, or at the appropriate

anchorage. Pilots board vessels with a draft of 9m and less before G1 Lighted Buoy/G2 Lighted Buoy (54°32'N., 18°35'E.). 

9.33 Vessels should send a request for pilotage and an ETA as

soon as possible but not later than 2 hours prior to arrival at the

boarding place. The message, which may be sent via Gdynia

Radio, who will coordinate with the pilot station, should include the vessel’s name, length, beam, summer draft, maximum draft, and ETA.

9.33 A confirmation message should be sent to the pilot station 1

hour before arrival. Inbound vessels must establish contact by

VHF with the pilot station prior to entering the pilotage district.

9.33 The pilot station may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

9.33 The port may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

9.33 Regulations.—For details of the Vessel Traffic Service

(VTS) system operating in the approaches, see Regulations for

the Gulf of Gdansk in paragraph 9.28.

9.33 A speed limit of 7 knots is enforced in the roadstead.

9.33 In the South Channel, with E winds greater than Force 3, the

harbormaster may place restrictions on vessels with lengths

greater than 150m.

9.33 The N harbor entrance is only for the use of naval vessels.

9.33 Compulsory tug requirements are in force for vessels entering the port, as follows:

1. Vessels over 90m in length must employ one tug.

2. Vessels over 131m in length or 8m draft must employ

two tugs.

3. Vessels over 166m in length or 9m draft must employ

three tugs.

4. Vessels over 200m in length must employ four tugs.

5. An additional tug may be added by the harbor authorities for vessels carrying dangerous and/or inflammable

cargo.

9.33 Anchorage.—There are three designated anchorage areas

which may best be seen on the chart. Anchorage Area No. 1 is

centered about 1 mile E of the main breakwater on the S side of

the approach fairway. It has depths of 10 to 15m, sand and

shells, and can be used by vessels with drafts of less than 9m.

Anchorage Area No. 2 lies close E of Anchorage Area No. 1

and can be used by vessels with drafts of 9m and over. Anchorage Area No. 3 is centered about 5 miles E of the main

breakwater and can be used by tankers.

9.33 Caution.—Several submarine cables lie in vicinity of the

harbor and may best be seen on the chart.

9.33 Several restricted areas lie N of the main entrance fairway

and may best be seen on the chart.

9.33 A spoil ground area, the limits of which are shown on the

chart, lies about 5 miles ENE of the harbor entrance and is

marked by a lighted buoy.

9.34 Sopot (54°27'N., 18°34'E.), a resort, is located 4.5

miles S of Gdynia. A pier fronts the town and extends about

500m seaward. A light is shown from a tower surmounting a

building situated close to the root of the pier. A prominent

church, with a pointed tower, stands 0.3 mile SW of the light.

Czech Wharf 216m 9.3m

Romanian Wharf 879m 9.7m

Basin No. VI

Hungarian Wharf 252m 9.4m

Basin No. VII

Helskie I Wharf 798m 10.4m

Helskie II Wharf 178m 10.4m

Gdynia—Port Authority Control Tower 

Gdynia—Berth Information

Wharf Length Draft (Max)

dysp@unipil.pil

kapitanat.gdynia@umgdy.gov.pl
Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 221

Pub. 194

A prominent hotel, with a green-roofed cupola, and a prominent tower stand close NW and 0.5 mile SE, respectively, of

the root of the pier. Two conspicuous radio masts stand on a

hill which rises close N of the town.

9.34 Cypel Redlowski, a prominent bluff, is located 2.3 miles N

of Sopot. Orlowo, situated 0.7 mile S of the bluff, is fronted by

a pier which extends 240m seaward. A conspicuous long building stands on the beach in the vicinity of the pier. It is reported

that a submarine concrete retaining wall is being con-structed

close offshore between Orlowo and Cypel Redlowski.

9.34 Gora Donas Beacon (54°28'N., 18°26'E.) stands on a hill, at

an elevation of 206m, about 5 miles WSW of Cypel Redlowski

and is prominent from seaward.

9.34 Caution.—A restricted area, which may best be seen on the

chart, extends up to 1.5 miles from the shore between Gdynia

and the vicinity of Gdansk. This area is a fish sanctuary and is

closed to normal coastal navigation.

Gdansk (54°21'N., 18°40'E.)

World Port Index No. 28710 

9.35 Gdansk, an extensive port, includes Nowy Port, the

inner harbor area; and Port Polnocny (Northern Port), a bulk

and oil terminal. The port lies at the W end of the W branch of

the Rzeka Wisla, formerly known as the River Vistula. The W

branch is called the Martwa Wisla.

9.35 The main port is entered between the W breakwater, which is

very short, and the E breakwater which is comparatively long.

The town of Nowy Port stands on the SW side of Kanal

Portowy, an artificial extension of the river, which now forms

the main harbor. The city of Gdansk, known to the Germans as

Danzig, is situated on both banks of the river to the S of Nowy

Port. Port Gdansk consists of quayed river banks and several

basins. It is an extensive shipbuilding and repair center. The

port also serves as a transshipment terminal and is connected to

the inland waterway system.

9.35 Port Polnocny (Northern Port) is protected by a main

breakwater, which extends about 1 mile ENE from a section of

reclaimed land fronting the coast, and a detached breakwater.

9.35 Winds—Weather.—The port is sheltered by the shores of

the bay and from the prevailing NW and W winds by the Hel

Peninsula. A breakwater, situated at the harbor entrance,

provides partial protection from rough seas and prevents the

movement of silt into the river mouth. Gales from the N can

raise a high sea in the entrance, making entry hazardous at

times.

9.35 Ice.—Prolonged freezing weather accompanied by onshore

winds sometimes causes ice to form in the roadstead and off

the harbor entrance. Offshore winds quickly move the ice out

to sea. Shipping is only hindered during severe winters, but

icebreakers keep the channels open unless unusual conditions

prevail.

9.35 Tides—Currents.—The tidal current is negligible. The

surface currents depend on the wind direction. At the entrance,

a current flowing W occurs with E winds and a current flowing

E occurs with W winds. These currents attain average rates of 1

knot, but have been reported to attain a rate of 2 knots at times.

During calm weather, a slight current flowing NW is caused by

the Rzeka Wisla entering the gulf. This current always flows

seaward, even with a strong NW wind, and attains a rate of less

than 1 knot.

9.35 The water level may vary as much as 1.6m above and 1.1m

below the mean level. A sluice separates the port from the main

channel of the river and silting is not a major problem.

9.35 Depths—Limitations.—There is 6,600m of total commercial

quayage with depths of 6.8 to 15.2m alongside. There are facilities for general cargo, bulk, timber, tanker, passenger, container,

and ro-ro vessels. The port is equipped with a new ro-ro floating

berth which can operate at every general cargo quay. In addition,

there are extensive repair facilities with a floating dry dock. Oil

drilling rigs are also serviced here.

9.35 The river entrance is limited to vessels up to 225m in length,

30m beam, and 10.2m draft.

9.35 Limitations for vessels carrying particular cargo are as follows:

1. Vessels with bagged goods are limited to a maximum

draft of 9.75m and a maximum length of 190m.

2. Tankers carrying liquid fuel are limited to a maximum

draft of 9.45m and a maximum length of 180m; tankers

carrying edible oils, etc., are limited to a maximum draft of

7.9m and a maximum length of 150m.

3. Vessels carrying timber are limited to a maximum

draft of 7.6m and a maximum length of 140m.

9.35 At Port Polnocny (Northern Port), the bulk coal and ore

terminal can handle vessels up to 300m in length and 15m

draft.

9.35 The Liquid Fuel Terminal consists of an L-shaped jetty, a

main platform, and four dolphins. The jetty can be used by vessels up to 305m in length and 15m draft.

9.35 An approach channel leading to Port Polnocny is entered 2.5

miles WSW of the W end of the TSS. It is 250m wide and has

a dredged depth of 17m.

Sopot Light

Gdansk—Port Polnocny (Northern Port)
222 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

9.35 The principal berths at Nowy Port (54°25'N., 18°40'E.)

(World Port Index No. 28720), with the maximum allowable

alongside draft, are listed in the accompanying table.

9.35 The principal berths at Port Polnocny (Northern Port)

54°24'N., 18°43'E.) (World Port Index No. 28715), with the

maximum allowable alongside draft, are listed in the accompanying table.

9.35 A Laser Docking System is located at the Ore Terminal. It

displays the lateral distance (in meters) of the vessel from the

dolphin docking line and the vessel’s closing speed (in centimeters/second). In addition, speed is indicated, as follows:

1. Green light—safe speed.

2. Yellow light—excessive speed.

3. Red light—exceeding the safe speed limit.

9.35 The specifications of this system can be obtained from the

pilot.

9.35 Aspect.—A dredged channel, entered 2.5 miles NNE of the

breakwater, leads to the main harbor entrance. It is marked by

lighted buoys and indicated by lighted ranges. A conspicuous

tower stands at Oliwa, 2.7 miles W of the harbor entrance. A

church, with a conspicuous tower, and a conspicuous long

Nowy Port—Berth Information

Wharf Length Draft (Max)

Wladyslawa IV Basin

Western Wharf 70m 3.9m

WOC-I Wharf 640m 9.4m

WOC-II Wharf 570m 9.4m

Port Channel

Capt. Ziolkowskiego 

Wharf 125m 6.2m

Oliwskie Wharf 600m 10.2m

Five Pipes Wharf 370m 7.3m

Grain Wharf 660m 7.4m

Wislane Wharf 1,160m 10.2m

Przemyslowe Wharf 500m 7.9m

Szczecin Wharf 275m 9.9m

Westerplatte Wharf 1,170m 8.5m

Polish Mail Wharf 315m 10.1m

Port Free Zone 1,070m 8.4m

Ferry Terminal 130m 6.5m

Gorniczy Basin

Coal Wharf 870m 8.6m

Administration Wharf 125m 4.9m

Ore Wharf 744m 10.2m

Kaszubski Canal

Chemical Wharf 270m 8.4m

Industrial Wharf 665m 6.4m

Sulphur Wharf 665m 10.2m

Port Polnocny—Berth Information

Wharf Length Draft (Max)

Liquid Fuel Terminal 

(four berths) 1,900m 9.6 to 15.0m

Coal Terminal 765m 15.0m

Ore Terminal 600m 15.0m

LPG Terminal 220m 9.5m

Gdansk—Passenger Terminal (Oliwskie Quay)

Gdansk—Container Terminal (Szczecinskie Quay)

Gdansk—Bulk Terminal (Rudowe Quay) 
Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 223

Pub. 194

white building stand close to the shore, 1 mile W of the harbor

entrance. 

9.35 A prominent disused light tower, 37m high, stands on the W

side of the harbor, 0.2 mile S of the W breakwater.

9.35 A prominent war memorial, 24m high, stands on a mound at

the E side of the harbor, 0.2 mile E of the disused light tower. It

is in the form of a sword hilt thrust into the ground and is

floodlit at night.

9.35 A prominent church, with twin spires, stands on the W side

of the river, 0.5 mile SE of the memorial.

9.35 Wisloujscie Fort, with a prominent tower, stands on the E

side of the river, 0.3 mile S of the church.

9.35 The approach fairway leading to Port Polnocny (Northern

Port) is marked by lighted buoys, lighted beacons, and a lighted

range.

9.35 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for the following vessels:

1. Vessels 50m and over in length.

2. All vessels carrying dangerous cargo.

3. Vessels overloaded.

4. Damaged vessels that may cause pollution to the

environment.

9.35 A request for pilotage and an ETA should be sent at least 2

hours in advance. Pilots can be contacted by VHF. Pilots for

Nowy Port board near Lighted Buoy NP (54°28'N., 18°42'E.);

pilots for Port Polnocny board near Lighted Buoy PP

(54°26'N., 18°54'E.).

9.35 The port may be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

9.35 Regulations.—For details of the Vessel Traffic Service and

Reporting (VTS) system operating in the approaches, see Regulations for the Gulf of Gdansk in paragraph 9.28.

Gdansk—Port Polnocny Coal Terminal

Gdansk Disused Lighthouse

Gdansk War Memorial

Gdansk—Port Polnocny Harbor Control Tower

Gdansk—Wisloujscie Fort

kpgdan@umgdy.gov.pl
224 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

9.35 Entry and departure are controlled by the port authorities and

permission must be obtained before proceeding into the port or

anchoring in the roadste

9.35 All vessels over 2,000 grt entering the port are required to

use the service of tugs.

9.35 Vessels carrying explosives or dangerous cargo are not

allowed to enter the port at night.

9.35 It is customary for vessels entering the port to salute, by

dipping their flag, when passing the war memorial.

9.35 Anchorage.—There are five designated anchorage areas in

the roadstead which may best be seen on the chart.

9.35 Anchorage Area No. 1 is designated for small vessels with

drafts of up to 9m. Anchorage Area No. 2 is designated for

vessels with drafts of up to 10.5m draft; and Anchorage Area

No. 3 is designated for vessels with drafts of up to 12m.

Anchorage Area No. 1, Anchorage Area No. 2, and Anchorags

Area No. 3 may be used by vessels of up to 225m in length.

9.35 Anchorage Area No. 4 is for the use of bulk carriers with

drafts of up to 16m. Anchorage Area No. 5 is for the use of

large tankers with drafts of up to 19.5m.

9.35 Caution.—Vessels should not approach close to the E

breakwater head as depths in the vicinity are reported to be less

than shown on the chart.

9.35 Several lie across the harbor area and may best be seen on

the chart.

9.35 Several overhead power cables, which may best he seen on

the chart, span the river and have a minimum vertical clearance

of 61m.

9.35 Ferries cross the river at several points and the landing places

are marked by beacons.

9.35 A spoil ground area, the limits of which are shown on the

chart, lies about 8 miles NE of the harbor entrance and is

marked by a lighted buoy.

9.35 An isolated shoal patch, with a least depth of 8.4m, lies

about 0.5 mile ENE of the entrance to the main fairway

channel and is marked by a lighted buoy.

9.35 An isolated shoal patch, with a least depth of 11m, lies close

S of GP Lighted Buoy. It is located about 1 mile E of the entrance to the Port Polnocny approach channel and is marked by

a lighted buoy.

9.35 Due to the narrowness of the river, vessels proceeding

upriver must turn around in the basin lying off the entrance to

Basen Ostrowica I (54°23'N., 18°39'E.), before berthing.

9.36 Wisla Smiala (54°23'N., 18°47'E.), lying 2.5 miles

SE of Port Polnocny, is the E outlet of the Martwa Wisla. The

river entrance is protected, on the E side, by a breakwater and

has a depth of 3.4m. 

9.36 Local knowledge is advised and it is dangerous to enter with

strong N winds. A lighted buoy is moored about 1.2 miles N of

the entrance and marks the NE edge of the coastal bank. The

river is entered by local small craft and fishing vessels with

drafts of up to 2.5m.

9.36 Przekop Wisla (54°22'N., 18°57'E.) is the principal outlet of

the Wisla River. Due to the outflow, there is considerable

silting in the mouth of the river. The banks at the entrance and

the channel leading from seaward are also subject to frequent

changes. Shallow depths extend about 1 mile seaward from the

mouth. A lighted buoy is moored about 0.7 mile N of the river

mouth and marks the entrance to the approach channel. The

entrance has a depth of 2m and is used by small craft and fishing vessels, but up-to-date local knowledge is required.

9.36 A stranded wreck is reported to lie at the E side of the river

mouth. A dune, which is 33m high and rises about 2 miles

WSW of the river mouth, is surmounted by a prominent beacon.

9.36 Mikoszewo, a fishing village, stands 1.5 miles S of the river

mouth, on the E side of the river. Swibno, another fishing village, stands on the W side of the river. The Wisla River, to the S

of Swibno, is connected with the inland waterway system

which extends W to Gdansk and E to Frisches Haff.

9.37 Gulf of Gdansk—East side.—Mierzeja Wislana

(Baltiyskaya Kosa) (54°25'N., 19°35'E.) forms the low section

of coast, less than 1 mile wide, which curves gradually NE for

about 30 miles to Baltiysk. This narrow section of land rises to

heights of between 15 and 30m in places and forms the NW

side of Zalew Wislany.

9.37 Krynica Morska Light (54°23'N., 19°27'E.) is shown from

a prominent tower, 27m high, standing on a dune. 

9.37 The border between Poland and Russia lies about 8 miles NE

of this light and is marked by lighted beacons.

9.37 Shchukinskiy (Scukinskiy) Light (54°31.6'N., 19°44.5'E.) is

shown from a framework tower, 29m high, standing 5.5 miles

NE of the border.

9.37 Caution.—A restricted area, within which anchoring and

fishing are prohibited, lies between the border and Mys Taran

(54°58'N., 19°59'E.). It extends up to 12 miles offshore and

may best be seen on the chart.

9.37 A mine training area, the limits of which are shown on the

chart, lies 9 miles NW of Shchukinskiy Light. Anchoring and

fishing are prohibited within this area and vessels are recommended not to navigate within it.

Baltiysk (Kaliningrad) (54°38'N., 19°54'E.)

World Port Index No. 28680 

9.38 Baltiysk, the site of a naval base, lies on the E side of

the Gulf of Gdansk, at the N end of Baltiskaya Kosa (Mierzeja

Krynica Morska Light
Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 225

Pub. 194

Wislana). It is situated at the S end of the peninsula which

forms the W side of Primorskiy Zaliv (54°40'N., 20°00'E.), a

shallow bay lying adjacent to the port.

Baltiysk is the outport for Kaliningrad (Konigsberg) and has

little commercial importance. Vessels transit to Kaliningrad

through a canal which extends across the N part of Kaliningradskiy Zaliv.

Kaliningrad (54°42'N., 20°29'E.) (World Port Index No.

28690), situated 20 miles E of Baltiysk, stands on both banks

of the Reka Pregolya, about 5 miles from the river mouth. It is

a river port, with several basins, and is connected to the inland

waterway system. 

9.38 Winds—Weather.—Gales from NE through E to SW may

lower the water level by as much as 1.2m. Opposing winds

may raise the level by as much as 1.8m, but such large fluctuations are unusual. Winds in the Baltic Sea and a heavy outflow from inland rivers influence the water level in this vicinity. 

9.38 Ice.—The port is generally ice free, but under extreme conditions some ice may appear in the canal between December

and March. The Port Authority may employ tugs for clearing

the fairway. Due to the strong outgoing currents, the port entrance seldom freezes over. During the spring thaw, ice conditions, lasting 3 to 4 days, sometimes make the entrance hazardous for normal port operations.

9.38 Tides—Currents.—The tides are negligible. Gales from

between SW and NW cause a current to set to the N at a rate of

up to 4 knots along the seaward side of Mierzeja Wislana. This

current meets the outbound current flowing into the Baltic Sea

near Baltiysk and raises a rough sea off the harbor entrance.

Gales from between NW and NE cause a current to flow to the

S across the harbor entrance. Currents flowing in and out of the

harbor fairways depend on the wind force and direction and are

very variable during each day. When N winds are blowing in

the upper part of the Baltic Sea and S winds are blowing in the

vicinity of Baltiysk, a strong inward current is reported to flow

into the port.

9.38 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel, up to about

0.5 mile seaward of the breakwaters, has a least depth of

10.3m. The entrance channel, leading between the breakwaters, has a controlling depth of 9.5m. The harbor fairway

leading to the principal basins has a controlling depth of 9.1m.

9.38 The Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal, 17.5 miles long, leads

from Baltiysk to the harbor at Kaliningrad and has a controlling depth of 9m. The canal is separated from Kaliningradskiy

Zaliv for most of its length by dams, which consist of timber

walls with stone fillings. Trees, bushes, and reeds surmount the

dams. The least bottom width in the enclosed sections is 40m

and the least bottom width in the open sections is 65m.

9.38 Generally, vessels can transit the canal with drafts up to 7.7m

from February to May, up to 8m from June to October, and up

to 7.9m from November to January.

9.38 The Commercial Seaport basin at Kaliningrad has 20 berths,

with a total of 3,017m of quayage, and depths of 7.2 to 9.6m

alongside. The Fishery Port basin has depths of 5 to 7m

alongside. The port has facilities for general cargo, container,

ro-ro, tanker, and bulk vessels. In addition, it is the base for a

large fishing fleet. Cargo vessels up to 170m in length and 25m

beam can transit the canal. Tankers up to 140m in length and

25m beam can transit the canal.

9.38 Aspect.—The shore in the vicinity of the port is very low

and the wooded groves standing on the coastal spit appear as

islands from seaward. Baltiysk Light is shown from a tower,

32m high, standing at the S end of the town, on the N side of

the entrance. A prominent watch tower stands close W of the

light.

9.38 An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about 6 miles

WNW of Baltiysk Light. The approach channel is indicated by

a lighted range which may best be seen on the chart.

9.38 Prominent water towers stand in the town and 1 mile NE of

it. The conspicuous chimney of a locomotive shed stands in the

town. A hill, with a conspicuous steep and yellow side, rises

about 1 mile ENE of Baltiysk Light.

9.38 The canal leading from Baltiysk to the Kaliningrad is

marked by lighted beacons.

9.38 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels except

leisure craft. Vessels should send a request for pilotage and an

ETA at least 24 hours in advance through the agent with a confirmation 4 hours prior to arrival. Pilots can be contacted by

VHF and generally board about 1.5 miles WNW of the entrance to Baltiysk.

9.38 Vessels requiring deep-sea pilotage through the Baltic Sea

from Baltiysk should send a request to the pilot control station

at Saint Petersburg (59°56'N., 30°18'E.).

9.38 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system operates in the approaches to the port. This system, which is mandatory, regulates the movements and anchoring of all vessels. It

also broadcasts marine safety information.

9.38 The VTS area of control includes the following:

1. The water area of the outer roadstead of Baltiysk

bound by a 7-mile radius centered on the North Entrance

Point (54°38.97'N., 19°52.28'E.).

2. The Kaliningrad sea channel.

9.38 Inbound vessels should make an initial call to the Baltiysk

Traffic Center on VHF channel 74 or 16, 12 hours prior to

arrival in the roadstead. After establishing communication,

vessels should provide the following information:

1. Name.

2. IMO number.

3. Call sign.

4. Name of owners.

5. Name of master.

6. ETA at roadstead.

Baltiysk Light
226 Sector 9. Germany and Poland—Kap Arkona to Mys Taran 

Pub. 194

7. Dimensions.

8. Draft (fore and aft).

9. Destination.

10. Last port of call.

11. Number of crew.

12. Number of passengers.

9.38 Kaliningrad Traffic Center (Kaliningrad 9) can be contacted

on VHF channel 67.

9.38 It is reported that the traffic in the canal is one-way. Inbound

traffic proceeds from 0300 to 0400 and from 1500 to 1600.

Outbound traffic proceeds from 0800 to 1100 and from 2000 to

2300. Vessels over 135m in length must transit the canal by

daylight only and the traffic schedules will be adjusted

accordingly.

9.38 Anchorage.—Four designated anchorage areas, the limits of

which are shown on the chart, lie in the approaches. Area No.

66 lies centered 4.5 miles NW of the light on the N side of the

fairway. Area No. 68B lies centered 3.5 miles WNW of the

light close to the S side of the fairway. Area No. 68 lies centered 3.8 miles WNW of the light and close SW of Area No.

68B. Area No. 68A lies centered 2.3 miles W of the light and

adjacent to the SE limits of Area No. 68 and Area No. 68B.

Attention is drawn to a number of obstructions which lie within

or near to these anchorage areas.

9.38 Caution.—Several dangerous wrecks and obstructions in the

vicinity of the port entrance may best be seen on the chart. 

9.39 Frisches Haff (54°27'N., 19°45'E.) is the common

name for the large lagoon, about 50 miles long and 5 miles

wide, which is separated from the Gulf of Gdansk by Mierzeja

Wislana and Baltiyskaya Kosa. It is called Zalew Wislany in

Polish and Vislinskiy Zaliv in Russian. Zalew Elblaski, into

which several rivers discharge, is the SW part of the gulf.

Kaliningradskiy Zaliv, the NE part of the gulf, extends as far as

the mouth of the Pregolya River. Primorskiy Zaliv indents the

N side of the gulf, near Baltiysk.

9.39 The lagoon has average depths of 2.5m in the SW part and

4.7m in the NW part. The water level is also dependent on the

wind and varies considerably. Prolonged NE winds can raise

the level in the SW part and the adjacent rivers by as much as

0.9m. Strong W winds usually lower the water level.

9.39 The entire lagoon is frozen over during the winter season.

All navigation ceases, except in the main channel leading to

Kaliningrad, and all floating aids are removed. Vehicles often

cross the lagoon over the ice. In the W part of the gulf, the river

currents cause the ice to break up and move seaward before it

occurs in the E part.

9.39 The bottom mostly consists of soft clay and mud, mixed with

sand. Numerous large boulders lie on the hard sand which

fringes the lagoon. Many of the bights indenting the shores are

filled with marshes and reeds. Numerous wrecks and derelicts,

mostly unmarked, lie scattered throughout the lagoon. 

9.39 A channel, with a depth of about 4m, leads SE from Baltiysk

to Nasypnoy Light (54°36'N., 19°56'E.). Shallow channels lead

ESE to the vicinity of Kaliningrad and through the center of the

lagoon. These channels are used by small craft to reach several

local harbors loading places.

Baltiysk to Mys Taran

9.40 Between Baltiysk and Mys Taran, 20 miles N, the

terrain backing the coast rises gradually and becomes steep and

cliffy in the N part. The shore extending as far as Zaltniken

(54°47'N., 19°59'E.) consists of low, wooded sand dunes and is

fronted by a sandy, fringing shoal which extends up to less than

1 mile seaward. To the N of Zaltniken, the coast is formed of

cliffs and appears yellow in color.

9.40 Obzornyy Light (54°50'N., 19°57'E.) is shown from a

prominent tower, 22m high, standing near the shore, 8 miles S

of Mys Taran. Gora Bol’shaya, a conspicuous wooded hill, is

89m high and rises 2 miles NE of the light.

9.40 A church, a water tower, and several factory chimneys stand

at Yantarnyy, 5.5 miles SSW of Mys Taran, and are all prominent from seaward. Several conspicuous lights, situated at the

amber mines, are occasionally exhibited in the vicinity of Yantarnyy.

9.40 Mys Taran (54°58'N., 19°59'E.) is described in paragraph

10.2.

9.40 Caution.—Fishing nets may be encountered up to 5 miles

offshore along this stretch of the coast.

9.40 Several isolated shoal patches and numerous wrecks, some

marked by buoys, lie off this stretch of the coast and may best

be seen on the chart.

Obzornyy Light
227

Pub. 194

10. 

Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches

10.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 10 — CHART INFORMATION
229

Pub. 194

SECTOR 10 

LITHUANIA AND LATVIA—MYS TARAN TO OVISI AND THE GULF OF RIGA AND APPROACHES

10.0 Plan.—This sector first describes the coast, the approaches,

and the off-lying dangers between Mys Taran and Ovisi, 170

miles NNE. It then describes the coast between Ovisi, on the S

side of the entrance to Irbeni Vain (Irbe Strait), and Osmussaar

Island (59°18'N., 23°22'E.), lying on the S side of the entrance

to the Gulf of Finland. A description of the Gulf of Riga then

follows.

General Remarks

10.1 The section of the coast extending from Mys Taran to

Ovisi has few indentations. To the NE of Ovisi, Irbeni Vain

leads to the Gulf of Riga. The 20m curve lies up to 12 miles

offshore in the S part of this section of coast and to the N of

Ovisi it extends across the entrance to Irbeni Vain. Numerous

off-lying dangers and foul ground areas lie off the coast and

may best be seen the chart.

10.1 Regulations.—GOFREP, a mandatory ship reporting system

under SOLAS, has been established in the Gulf of Finland and

its approaches. This system is operated by the VTS centers at

Tallinn (VHF channel 61), Helsinki (VHF channel 60), and

Saint Petersburg (VHF channel 74).

10.1 Vessels not equipped with an Automatic Identification System (AIS) and entering the area from the W are recommended

to send a report to the relevant VTS traffic center at least 1 hour

in advance.

10.1 The W limit of the reporting area is formed by a line joining

the following points:

1. Bengtskar Light (59°43'N., 22°30'E.).

2. 59°33.3'N, 22°30.0'E.

3. 59°10.0'N, 21°30.0'E.

4. Ristna (Kopu Poolsar) (58°56'N., 22°03'E.).

10.1 For further information concerning GOFREP, see Finland in

Pub. 140, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic

Ocean and Adjacent Seas.

10.1 Directions.—For vessels proceeding along the offshore

route, Traffic Separation Schemes (TSS) lie centered about 20

miles NW and 40 miles NNE of Kopu Light (58°55'N.,

22°12'E.) and may best be seen on the chart.

10.1 A Deep Water Route, which is recommended for vessels

with drafts over 12m, leads ENE and NE from the E end of

Bornholmsgat TSS into the S end of the TSS lying 20 miles

NW of Kopu Light. It passes S and E of Gotland and may best

be seen on the chart.

10.1 For further information, see paragraph 4.1, paragraph 5.1

and paragraph 6.1.

10.1 Caution.—It has been reported that all navigational aids in

the SE part of the Baltic Sea, including the Gulf of Riga, may

be unreliable. Vessels should exercise extreme caution when

identifying these aids.

10.1 For information concerning mine danger areas and regulated

areas lying off this part of the coast, see Pub. 140 Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent

Seas.

10.1 It is reported that a large ODAS buoy is moored about 36

miles NW of Ristna Light (58°56'N., 22°03'E.).

10.1 It is reported that a submarine gas pipeline is being constructed between Russia and Germany. This pipeline will extend WSW through the Gulf of Finland and then lead in a SW

direction to the E side of Rugen (54°20'N., 13°44'E.). It will

pass E of Faro (57°57'N., 19°10'E.), E of Hoburgs Bank

56°35'N., 18°25'E.), and W of Sodra Midsjobanken (55°40'N.,

17°23'E.). (

Mys Taran to Ovisi

10.2 From Mys Taran to Klaipeda, 60 miles NNE, the

coast is indented by a large arc which extends to the SE. 

10.2 Mys Taran (54°58'N., 19°59'E.), the E extremity of the Gulf

of Gdansk (Gulf of Danzig), is a bold and cliffy point, 33m

high. A light is shown from a prominent tower, 30m high,

standing on this point. A radiobeacon is situated at the light.

10.2 A reef, with depths of less than 5m and steep-to on its seaward side, extends up to 0.3 mile offshore, about 1.3 miles SW

of Mys Taran. Another reef extends up to about 1 mile N of the

point and is marked by a lighted buoy. 

10.2 Vessels proceeding toward Mys Taran in low visibility are

advised to keep to seaward of the 30m curve and to not approach within 2.5 miles of the light.

10.2 The partly-wooded coast extending between Mys Taran and

Zelenogradsk, 17 miles E, decreases gradually in steepness and

height. The most conspicuous landmarks along this stretch include the church standing at Primor’ye (Gross Kuren) 2.3

miles ESE of Mys Taran; the high water towers standing 2.5

miles and 4 miles E of the church, and the fishing harbor of Pionerskiy lying 8 miles E of Mys Taran.

Mys Taran Light
230 Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 

Pub. 194

10.2 Pionerskiy, protected by two breakwaters, has an entrance,

70m wide, and depths of 5 to 10m. The approach channel has a

least depth of 8.5m, but is subject to silting.

10.2 Mys Gvardejskiy (54°58'N., 20°16'E.) is located 2 miles E

of Pionerskiy. A light is shown from a prominent framework

tower, 40m high, standing on this headland.

10.2 Anchorage Area No. 65, which may best be seen on the

chart, lies centered about 4 miles NNE of the light.

10.2 Caution.—Several submarine cables, which may best be

seen on the chart, extend seaward from the vicinity of Mys

Gvardejskiy.

10.3 Zelenogradsk (54°58'N., 20°29'E.), a resort, is situated 7 miles E of Mys Gvardejskiy. The town is conspicuous

from seaward with its houses, church, and water tower. A

prominent tower stands about 1.7 miles ENE of this resort. 

10.3 Between Zelenogradsk and Klaipeda, a narrow and sandy

peninsula extends NE and then N for 52 miles. This peninsula

is known as Kurskaya Kosa to the S of latitude 56°16'N and

Kursiu Nerija to the N. The peninsula separates Kurskiy Zaliv

from the sea (see paragraph 10.5). It consists of a series of

white sand dunes and, for the greater part, is covered by trees.

The dunes attain heights of up to 61m and are visible from a

considerable distance.

10.3 Lesnoy Light (55°01'N., 20°37'E.) is shown from a prom-inent framework tower, 40m high, standing near the shore 5 mile

NE of Zelenogradsk. 

10.3 Rybachiy Light (55°10'N., 20°51'E.) is shown from a prominent framework tower, 24m high, standing on a dune 12.7

miles NE of Lesnoy Light.

10.3 Nidden Light (Nida Light) (55°18'N., 21°00'E.) is shown

from a prominent tower, 29m high, standing in a fishing village

on Kurskiy Zaliv, 10 miles NE of Rybachiy Light. A conspicuous steeple is situated in the village, but is partially hidden by

dunes and trees.

10.3 The border between Russia and Lithuania is situated about

1.7 miles S of Nidden Light.

10.3 Yuodkrante Light (55°33'N., 21°07'E.) is shown from a

prominent framework structure, 20m high, standing 15.5 miles

NNE of Nidden Light (Nida Light).

10.3 Caution.—An oil production platform, equipped with a light

and a racon, is situated about 14.5 miles W of Nidden Light. A

submarine pipeline, which may best be seen on the chart, extends in a SSW direction from this platform to the shore.

10.3 A measured distance (2,041m), which may best be seen on

the chart, is situated about 3 miles S of the Klaipeda harbor entrance and is marked by buoys and beacons. 

Klaipeda (55°43'N., 21°07'E.)

World Port Index No. 28660 

10.4 Klaipeda, formerly known as Memel, is situated in

Lithuania and lies on the inner side of Kursiu Marios (Morskoy

Kanal), a narrow strait connecting Kurskiy Zaliv (Kurisches

Haff) with the Baltic Sea (see paragraph 10.5). Juru Kanalas,

the harbor fairway, extends from the port entrance to the S end

of the suburb of Smelte, 4.5 miles SSE. The city stands on the

N and S sides of the Dange River, which flows into the E side

of Juru Kanalas, 2 miles SE of the port entrance.

10.4 Winds—Weather.—From October through March, the prevailing winds are from the SE; from May to September, W and

NW winds prevail. It is seldom calm at this port. Storms from

the W often cause confused swells near the port entrance (see

Caution). Fog occurs more frequently between November and

May and is usually dense and prolonged.

10.4 Ice.—Ice begins to appear in the first half of December and

is usually gone by the end of March. Drift ice from the N usuLesnoy Light

Nidden Light

Klaipeda Entrance 
Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 231

Pub. 194

ally stays near the coast, leaving the open sea clear. However,

sometimes the reverse may occur. The S part of the port area,

the section of the Dange River close above its mouth, and Kurskiy Zaliv are usually covered by ice every winter for an extended period of time. That part of the harbor area lying N of

the Dange River mouth rarely freezes, although the entrance to

the port may be jammed with ice floes for several days. If this

ice remains for a long period, tugs are sent to clear the fairway.

10.4 Tides—Currents.—Changes in the water level have a seiche-like character. The vacillation is usually sudden, of short

duration, and intensive. The greatest changes in the water level

are caused by surging and receding and occur in autumn and

winter. Variations in the water level are reported to reach, at

times, as much as 0.9m above and below the mean sea level.

However, variations of 0.6m or more are a rare occurrence and

small variations, of about 0.3m, are reported to be more frequent. An increase of the water level occurs during strong W,

through N, to NE winds and sometimes SW winds. A de-crease

of the water level occurs during S to E winds. 

10.4 During W to WNW storm winds, strong swells often enter

the port and run along the quays. At such times, vessels

moored alongside the outer quays should, in advance, leave

their berths and anchor in the inner or outer anchorages (see

Caution).

10.4 The coastal current usually sets N across the port entrance

and attains a maximum rate of 2 knots. However, the current

may set S with strong N winds. The current within the harbor is

usually outgoing, but an incoming flow has been observed

when the coastal current is setting S. The outgoing current may

attain rates up to 3 knots in the spring (see Caution).

10.4 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel, indicated

by a lighted range, is about 150m wide and is maintained at a

dredged depth of 14.5m. The harbor fairway (Juru Kan-alas),

which varies in width between 180m and 300m, is main-tained

at dredged depths of 10 to 14m.

10.4 Vessels with drafts up to 12.5m are authorized to navigate as

far as Winter Harbor; with drafts up to 10.5m as far as Bega

Pier; and with drafts up to 8.5m as far as Timber Har-bor.

10.4 The port facilities are located along the E side of the harbor

fairway.

10.4 The Oil Terminal is situated 0.7 mile inside the port entrance. It provides three berths, 250 to 274m long, and can handle tankers up to 12.5m draft.

10.4 Klasco Commercial Quay extends for about 1 mile from the

S end of the Oil Terminal to Winter Harbor (Ziemos Uostas), a

basin. This quay and the N part of the basin provide 15 berths,

95 to 264m long, with depths of 6.5 to 13.5m alongside. These

berths, which can handle vessels up to 12.5m draft, are used

mostly for general cargo.

10.4 A shiprepair yard and a shipbuilding yard are situated 0.5

mile S of the Winter Harbor and close S of the mouth of the

Dange River. It has been reported that a quay fronting the repair yard is used as a passenger ship terminal.

10.4 Bega Pier, located 1.3 miles above Winter Harbor, projects

WNW from the shore and Bega Quay extends NNW for about

0.5 mile from its root. This quay and pier provide seven berths,

224 to 360m long, with depths of 5 to 12m alongside. These

berths, which can handle vessels up to 10.5m draft, are used for

bulk cargo.

10.4 Timber Harbor (Malku Ilanka), a large basin, lies in the SE

part of the port, about 5 miles above the entrance. A peninsula

forms the W side of this basin. Kaiules Nugara, an islet, lies

close W of the N end of this peninsula and on the N end of an

extensive shallow sand bank. The main channel of the strait

passes W of this islet and bank.

10.4 A ro-ro ferry terminal, with a finger pier, is situated at the N

end of the peninsula which forms the W side of Timber Harbor.

The terminal provides six berths, 20 to 210m long, with depths

of 5 to 10m alongside. Vessels up to 7.5m draft can be handled.

10.4 A container terminal quay, 450m long, is situated on the SW

side of Timber Harbor. It has a depth of 10m alongside and can

handle vessels up to 8.5m draft.

10.4 An extensive ship repair facility, with five finger piers, is sitKlaipeda—Oil Terminal uated in the SE part of Timber Harbor.

Klaipeda—Passenger Terminal 

Klaipeda—Ro-Ro Ferry Terminal 
232 Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 

Pub. 194

10.4 A finger pier, located in the NE part of Timber Harbor, is

used as a container terminal. It provides two berths, 127m and

128m long. The berths have a depth of 10m alongside and can

handle vessels up to 8.5m draft.

10.4 In addition to the facilities described above, the port also has

numerous riverside berths. There is a total of 19,200m of main

quayage within the harbor.

10.4 The port provides facilities for tanker, ro-ro, container, general cargo, passenger, bulk, and fishing vessels. Generally, vessels up to 270m in length and 12.5m draft can be accommodated.

10.4 It is reported that vessels with drafts up to 13.5m have been

handled within the port, with special permission.

10.4 There are also extensive repair facilities, including six floating dry docks. The largest is 216m long and 41.5m wide.

10.4 An extensive inland waterway system, including Kurskiy

Zaliv and several rivers, connects the port to Kallingrad.

10.4 Aspect.—When approaching the port, the forest located in

the vicinity of the city is very conspicuous and visible at a considerable distance to seaward. A prominent radio mast stands

2.7 miles N of the harbor entrance. Lights are shown from both

breakwater heads. The breakwaters are reported to be radar

conspicuous.

10.4 An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about 3 miles W

of the port entrance. The entrance fairway is indicated by a

lighted range. Klaipeda Light (rear range) is shown from a

prominent tower, 40m high, standing on the N side of the entrance, 0.6 mile E of the breakwater heads.

10.4 Several prominent oil tanks stand on the N side of the harbor

fairway close inside the port entrance. The E side of Juru Kanalas, the harbor fairway, is fronted by industrial plants, quays,

and cranes. The W side is mostly tree-covered and designated

as a wildlife reserve.

10.4 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Deep sea and local pilots

are available from the port, except in dense fog or with NW

winds of over Force 7. Pilots can be contacted by VHF on

channels 9 and 16, and board in the Outer Approach Lighted

Buoy No. 1 (55°44'N., 21°00'E.). During bad weather, pilots

board at the inner roadstead. 

10.4 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system operates in the approaches to the port. It is a mandatory system

which applies to all vessels navigating within the port and up to

Outer Approach Lighted Buoy No. 1 (55°44'N., 21°00'E.).

10.4 While underway within the area, all vessels should maintain

a continuous listening watch on VHF channel 9. When at anchor, they should maintain a continuous listening watch on

VHF channel 16.

10.4 All vessels should send an ETA message to the Port Despatcher (call sign: Klaipeda Radio 2) 72 hours, 48 hours, and

24 hours prior to arrival. If the voyage is shorter than the previous times, the message should be sent immediately on departure from the last port of call. The initial message should

include the following information:

1. Vessel’s name, call sign, IMO number, and MMSI.

2. Flag.

3. Port of registry.

4. Speed.

5. Vessel’s main particulars.

6. Maximum fresh water draft.

7. Cargo details.

8. Number of persons on board.

10.4 All vessels should contact the VTS Center (call sign: Klaipeda Radio 5 Traffic) 2 hours prior to arrival on VHF channel 9

and report their name, flag, and fresh water draft.

10.4 All vessel movements within the area are subject to per-mission being granted by the VTS Center. Such permission expires

after 20 minutes and must be reinstated. Vessels should repeat

all instructions received from the VTS Center.

10.4 In the case of radio failure, vessels should leave the traffic

lane (approach channel) and anchor or drift while attempting to

reestablish contact. 

10.4 Radar assistance is compulsory for ferries, tankers, vessels

carrying dangerous cargo, vessels constrained by their draft,

and for all vessels when the visibility is reduced to less than 2

miles. However, radar assistance may be provided at any time

on request.

10.4 The Klaipeda VTS Center can be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

10.4 The Klaipeda Harbormaster can be contacted by e-mail, as

follows:

10.4 Vessels with drafts of over 7m are considered to be constrained by their draft and should display the appropriate lights

or shapes.

10.4 Tankers must berth with their bow toward the port entrance,

unless special permission is granted by the authorities.

10.4 All movement of vessels within the port is prohibited during

wind speeds of over 40 knots.

10.4 Vessels within the port should not exceed a speed of 6 knots.

10.4 Anchorage.—All foreign vessels should anchor within the

designated areas, which may best be seen on the chart, lying

centered about 6 miles WNW and 6 miles WSW of the harbor

entrance. These areas have depths of 33 to 39m.

10.4 Caution.—Vessels anchored within the designated foreign

vessel anchorage areas should be prepared to put to sea if

strong W winds commence. Similarly, during strong SW to

NW winds, dangerous surges occur within the port and vessels

should put to sea.

Klaipeda Light (rear range)

info@port.lt

ukt@port.lt-kapitanat
Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 233

Pub. 194

10.4 During very strong S winds, steep seas form in the vicinity

of the port entrance and vessels have reported experiencing

maneuvering difficulties. Entry at such times is not recommended (see Tides—Currents).

10.4 When entering the port, vessels should exercise caution due

to the strong current, which sets across the line of approach

(see Tides—Currents).

10.4 It is reported (2005) that several of the navigation aids located on the E side of the harbor fairway (Juru Kanalas) are obscured at times by cranes.

10.4 Vessels must anchor only within the designated areas as

former mined areas, which may best be seen on the chart, front

the coast to the N and S of the approach channel.

10.4 The approach channel and harbor fairway (Juru Kanalas)

vary in depth, particularly during the floods in spring and also

after prolonged N or NW gales. Dredging is frequently carried

out to maintain the authorized minimum depths. Vessels should

contact the authorities for the lastest information.

10.4 Discolored water flowing out of Kursiu Marios is reported to

extend up to 5 miles offshore in the vicinity of the port.

10.4 A spoil ground area, marked by a buoy, lies centered 11.5

miles SW of the port entrance and may best be seen on the

chart.

10.4 Several self-propelled ferries cross the harbor fairway within

the port.

10.5 Kurskiy Zaliv (55°20'N., 21°10'E.), also known as

Kurisches Haff, is a lagoon or inland sea which, along with

Kursiu Marios (Morskoy Kanal), extends about 50 miles S of

the entrance to Klaipeda. It is separated from the Baltic Sea by

Kurskaya Kosa, a narrow peninsula.

Kursiu Marios, a strait, is that part of the lagoon lying N of

latitude 55°16'N and is situated in Lithuania. Kurskiy Zaliv, the

S part of the lagoon, is situated in Russia.

10.5 The lagoon is closed by ice during the winter season. Local

knowledge is necessary for transiting the lagoon, but pilots are

not available. The lagoon has general depths of 1 to 2.5m in its

N part and 3 to 5.5m in its S part. A channel, marked by buoys,

leads through the N part and passes close to the E side of Kurskaya Kosa. Vessels with drafts of up to 4m and local knowledge can proceed in this channel from Klaipeda to Lesson

(55°01'N., 20°37'E.), lying 46 miles SSW.

10.5 The water level within the lagoon usually rises about 0.3m

with N winds and falls about 0.2m with S winds. An increase

of water level of 1.1m and a decrease of 0.7m have been observed when the lagoon was free of ice, but these variations are

rare. 

10.5 Yuodkrante, a resort, is situated 10 miles S of Klaipeda, on

the E side of Kurskaya Kosa. Nida, another resort, and Rybachiy, a fishing harbor, lie 14 miles and 24 miles, respectively,

SSW of Yuodkrante. Several rivers enter the E side of Kurskiy

Zaliv and connect the lagoon to an inland waterway system.

Several small fishing harbors lie near the mouths of these rivers. The E side of the lagoon is low and mostly wooded. 

10.6 Palanga (55°56'N., 21°04'E.), a village, is situated 12

miles N of Klaipeda and is fronted by a small boat harbor. A

prominent red church, with a tall spire, stands in the village.

The intervening coast is hilly and wooded. Gora Biruta, a conspicuous hill, 17m high, rises 1 mile S of Palanga. A prominent

radio mast stands 2.7 miles N of Klaipeda harbor entrance.

From Palanga to Liepaja, 34 miles N, the coast is low, uniform, and backed by sand dunes. Some of these dunes are bare

and some of them are wooded. Several villages stand among

these dunes and, in places, are fronted by white sandy beaches.

The coastal bank lying between Klaipeda and Liepaja extends

up to 3 miles offshore in places.

10.6 Gora Tyupa (56°17'N., 21°00'E.), 34m high, is a chain of

low hills rising slightly above the flat, wooded surroundings.

Several of these hills are surmounted by a few trees.

10.6 Sventoji Light (56°01'N., 21°05'E.) is shown from a prominent framework tower, 39m high, standing in the village of

Sventoji, 6.5 miles N of Palanga. The village is fronted by a

small and shallow fishing boat harbor.

The boundary between Lithuania and Latvia is situated about

2.3 miles N of Sventoji.

10.6 Butinge Oil Terminal (56°03'N., 20°58'E.), consisting an

SPM, lies 3.7 miles WNW of Sventoji Light, in a depth of

20m. A prohibited area, 0.5 mile wide, extends ENE from the

terminal to the shore. A lighted fairway buoy is moored about

6.5 miles WSW of the terminal. 

10.6 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels approaching

Butinge Marine Terminal and will board within 11 miles of the

terminal or in the anchorage area. Vessel ETA should be sent 5

days, 72 hours, 48 hours, and 12 hours prior to arrival; thereafter vessels are to confirm their ETA 4 hours prior to arrival at

the pilot boarding area by VHF on channel 16 or 71, or by email as follows:

10.6 The Loading Master onboard the tanker shall advise Klaipeda VTS prior to vessel movement to and from the SPM. 

10.6 An anchorage area, which may best be seen on the chart, lies

centered 8 miles SW of the terminal. A channel, within which

anchoring and fishing are prohibited, leads from the N side of

the anchorage area to the terminal. Vessels up to 150,000 dwt

and 16m draft can be accommo-dated (2004). 

10.6 Caution.—A wreck lies in the N part of the anchorage area

in position 55°58.9'N, 20°46.0'E; a foul patch lies close W of

the anchorage area.

Sventoji Light

marine@nafta.lt
234 Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 

Pub. 194

10.6 A lighted buoy marks a 15m patch lying 0.5 mile E of the

SPM.

10.6 Only authorized vessels may enter the area associated with

Butinge Oil Termial. 

10.6 Pape Light (56°09'N., 21°01'E.) is shown from a prominent

metal framework tower, 22m high, standing 7.8 miles N of

Sventoli. boat harbor.

10.6 Bernati Light (56°23'N., 20°59'E.) is shown from a prominent framework tower, 21m high, standing 13.8 miles N of

Pape Light.

10.6 Caution.—Several wrecks and obstructions lie off this section of coast and may best be seen on the chart.

10.6 A prohibited area, the limits of which are shown on the chart,

lies centered 5 miles N of Pape Light and extends up to 3.5

miles seaward from the coast.

Liepaja (56°31'N., 21°01'E.)

World Port Index No. 28640 

10.7 Liepaja, formerly known as Libau, is situated within

Latvia and lies at the N end of a comparatively low and narrow

tongue of land. This tongue separates Liepajas Ezers, a shallow

lake, from the sea. The port is a major naval base. It consists of

Outer Harbor which is enclosed by breakwaters; Commercial

Harbor, with a wide quay on its S side; Town Canal Harbor

which separates the old and new sections of Liepaja; Winter

Harbor which is used for the handling of oil and timber shipments; and Naval Harbor which lies on the E side of Outer

Harbor. 

10.7 Winds—Weather.—Strong W and N winds sometimes

cause cargo handling within Commercial Harbor to be difficult

or impossible. 

10.7 Ice.—Ice does not impede navigation during normal winter

seasons. If necessary, icebreakers keep the harbor open to shipping. The average period of ice lasts from the first week of January to the beginning of March. 

10.7 Tides—Currents.—The current in the vicinity of the port

runs parallel with the coast and sets in a predominantly N direction. With fresh winds, it may attain a rate of up to 2 knots.

The water level may fall as much as 0.6m with E winds and

rise as much as 0.9m with W winds.

10.7 Depths—Limitations.—A coastal bank, with depths of 6 to

10m, extends up to about 3.5 miles W from the vicinity of the

port. An approach channel leads ENE through the dangers in

the approaches; it is 100m wide and has a dredged depth of

10.4m. This channel is subject to silting. 

10.7 The harbor has three entrances. Ziemelu varti, the N entrance, is 265m wide and has a depth of 8.1m. Permission to

use this entrance must be received from the naval base. Vidus

varti, the middle entrance, is 213m wide and has a depth of 9m.

Dienvidu varti, the S entrance, is 235m wide and has a depth of

11m.

10.7 The oil terminal has a quay, 100m long, with a depth of 7.5m

alongside. Tankers up to 150m in length and 7m draft can be

accommodated.

10.7 The Commercial Harbor provides about 3,000m of total berthage, with depths of 4.5 to 9.5m alongside. There are facilities for ro-ro, bulk, general cargo, timber, container, and passenger vessels. Vessels up to 50,000 dwt, 200m in length, 30m

beam, and 8.5m draft can be accommodated.

10.7 It is reported (2000) that new berths are being built and extensive construction is being carried out within the port. 

10.7 Aspect.—Several high buildings stand along this low coastal

area and are visible from a considerable distance to seaward.

Conspicuous landmarks in the vicinity of the port include the

cathedral; a pilot watch tower; a white building, 18m high; and

several chimneys.

10.7 The main approach channel is marked by buoys and indi-cated by a lighted range. A light is shown from a prominent tower,

30m high, standing in the S part of the harbor. Outer Approach

Lighted Buoy A is reported to be moored about 6 miles WSW

of the light.

10.7 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels carrying

dangerous goods and all other vessels over 700 grt, unless a

valid exemption certificate is held.

10.7 Vessels should send a request for pilotage through the Vessel

Traffic Service (see Regulations). Pilots can be contacted by

VHF and generally board about 6 miles WSW of the light in

the vicinity of Outer Approach Lighted Buoy A.

10.7 Regulations.—A mandatory Vessel Traffic Service (VTS)

system operates within the port and the outer approaches. All

vessels must contact the VTS center through their agent (in

writing) at least 48 hours prior to arrival and report their ETA.

All vessels must then repeat their initial ETA message through

the agent 24 hours in advance.

10.7 These messages must include the following information:

1. Vessel’s name, flag, and call sign.

2. Date and time.

3. Last port of call.

4. ETA.

5. Draft.

6. Size and nature of cargo.

Pape Light

Liepaja Harbor Light
Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 235

Pub. 194

7. Length, beam, tonnage, and type of ship.

8. Vessel’s agent.

9. Information about infectious diseases onboard.

10. Miscellaneous information as appropriate.

10.7 All vessels must report 2 hours before arrival, but not less

than 1 hour from Outer Approach Lighted Buoy A, to the VTS

center on VHF channel 11. Vessels must state their name, call

sign, flag, position (bearing and distance from a landmark),

and any changes to their previous entry reports. 

10.7 All reports and other relevant information will be forwarded

to the pilots by the VTS.

10.7 All vessels passing through the VTS area but not entering the

port must contact the VTS center on VHF channel 11. Such

vessels must state their name, call sign, position, intended

route, and details of any dangerous cargo. 

10.7 In addition to the entire harbor, the VTS area covers the waters outside the port within a line joining the following points:

a. 56°31.1'N, 20°59.2'E.

b. 56°31.1'N, 20°58.5'E.

c. 56°27.0'N, 20°58.5'E.

d. 56°27.0'N, 20°41.8'E.

e. 56°35.0'N, 20°45.7'E.

f. 56°35.0'N, 20°59.5'E.

g. 56°33.8'N, 20°59.0'E.

h. 56°33.5'N, 20°59.9'E.

10.7 The Liepaja VTS center can be contacted by VHF on channel 11 16 and by e-mail, as follows: 

10.7 Anchorage.—Anchorage off the port is tenuous during

winds from between SW and NW. Three designated anchorage

areas are situated in the roadstead and may best be seen on the

chart. Anchorage Area L1 lies centered 3 miles WSW of the

light. It has depths of 8 to 10m and is used by small vessels.

Anchorage Area L2 lies centered 5 miles WNW of the light. It

has a depth of 15m and is used by general vessels. Anchorage

Area L3 lies centered 8 miles W of the light. It has a depth of

28m and is used by deep-draft vessels.

10.7 Caution.—In reduced visibility, vessels are advised not to

approach the port in depths of less than 18m unless their position has been accurately determined.

10.7 Several shoals and obstructions lie in the approaches to the

port and may best be seen on the chart.

10.7 A local magnetic anomaly exists in the vicinity of the port.

10.7 Submarine cables, which may best be seen on the chart, extend seaward from a point on the shore located close S of the

port.

10.7 Due to the influence of the current, which sets at right angles

to the approach fairway, deep-draft vessels should maintain

sufficient speed in order to remain accurately on the range line.

10.7 The harbor entrances are subject to frequent silting and the

authorities should be contacted for information concerning the

latest depths in the channels.

10.7 It is reported (2001) that the N entrance to the harbor is temporarily closed.

10.8 Akmenrags (56°50'N., 21°03'E.) lies 17.5 miles N of

Liepaja and the intervening coast is sandy and bordered by

sand dunes. The land located between these dunes and the

woods, which stand about 0.5 mile inland, is extensively cultivated. A light is shown from a prominent stone tower, 37m

high, standing at Akmenrags.

10.8 Prominent landmarks along this stretch include the village

and church of Saraiki, situated 9.5 miles NNE of Liepaja, and

the village and church of Ziemupe, situated 4.5 miles N of Saraiki.

10.8 Pavilosta (56°53'N., 21°11'E.), a small harbor, lies 5 miles

NE of Akmenrags. It is formed by two breakwaters which extend seaward from the mouth of the Saka River. The harbor entrance, which is 40m wide, has a depth 3.2m, but is subject to

silting. A conspicuous chimney stands at a distillery, 1.7 miles

SE of the harbor. The harbor is used by fishing vessels and

coasters. Vessels up to 80m in length and 3m draft can enter. 

10.8 To the N of Pavilosta, the woods standing along the coast approach and border the shoreline. A conspicuous mill stands at

Sarnate, 16 miles NE of Pavilosta.

10.8 Uzava Light (57°13'N., 21°25'E.) is shown from a prominent tower with a dwelling, 19m high, standing on a partly

wooded and sandy hill which rises 5 miles N of Sarnate. A racon is situated at the light.

10.8 Somnitelania Bank (57°18'N., 21°22'E.) lies 1.7 miles offshore, 5.5 miles NNW of Uzava Light. This bank has a least

depth of 4.4m and is marked by a lighted buoy. 

10.8 Caution.—Several dangerous wrecks lie off this stretch of

coast and may best be seen on the chart. Vessels are advised to

stay at least 4 miles seaward of the shore.

10.8 A mine exercise area lies centered about 20 miles W of Akmenrags Light, but its limits are subject to change without notification.

Ventspils (57°24'N., 21°32'E.)

World Port Index No. 28620 

10.9 Ventspils is situated in Latvia and lies at the mouth of

the Venta River. It is protected by two breakwaters and extends

in an E direction for about 2 miles between the entrance of the

river and a railroad bridge. An oil terminal is located close inside the breakwaters at the N side of the mouth of the river.

10.9 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds are from the SW.

Calms seldom occur in the vicinity of the harbor. Fog, which

occurs during weak SE and SW winds, is most frequent between March and June.

10.9 Ice.—Ice may be present from the middle of December to

vts@lsez.lv

Akmenrags Light
236 Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 

Pub. 194

the middle of April, but the harbor is never closed. Ice may

hinder shipping during January and February and when NW

winds carry it into the outer harbor. At such times, icebreakers

will assist vessels entering. Winds from the E and an outgoing

current clear ice from the river and inner part of the harbor. 

10.9 Tides—Currents.—The tides are negligible, but the water

level fluctuates with wind and ice conditions. The water level

rises with strong winds from between NW and SW. It falls with

winds from between N and SE. In spring, when the ice is in

motion, the water level is generally 1.2 to 1.5m higher than

usual; in places, the level may be as much as 2m higher. At other times, a difference of 0.3m above or below the mean level is

more frequent. 

10.9 The current sets N or S along the coast in the approaches to

the port depending on the wind. It may attain rates of 3 to 4

knots. Currents in the river set at an average rate of 1 knot, increasing to 2 knots near the entrance. In early spring and during the ice breakup, the current in the river may attain a rate of

4 knots. 

10.9 Depths—Limitations.—The NW approach channel leads

SE from Lighted Buoy B and is swept to a depth of 14.8m

(2006). The W approach channel leads ESE from Lighted

Buoy A and is swept to a depth of 16.8m. It joins the NW channel about 1 mile NW of the harbor entrance. 

10.9 The channel leading through the outer harbor is reported to

be 100m wide and dredged to a depth of 15m. The river channel is reported to be dredged to a depth of 14m for 1 mile.

10.9 There are three liquefied gas berths with depths of 8.4 to

15.3m alongside. There are six tanker berths with depths of

11.3 to 15.3m alongside. There are 23 riverside cargo berths

with facilities for ro-ro, bulk, general cargo, container, and

chemical vessels. Tankers up to 270m in length and 15m draft,

and cargo vessels up to 230m in length and 14.2m draft, can be

accommodated.

10.9 Aspect.—To the N of the port, the coast is low and sandy. To

the S, the coast is higher and consists of a chain of sand dunes

covered with sparse woods. From a distance of between 6 and

10 miles offshore, this chain appears as a dark line. At a distance of about 3 miles, the slopes of the sand dunes become

visible and are conspicuous due to their light color.

10.9 A light-colored sand dune, backed by woods, rises at Busnieku, 4.5 miles NE of the port entrance and is very conspicuous; it is surmounted by a beacon (former light tower). A

prominent railroad runs N and parallel to the coast from the

port.

10.9 Lighted Buoy B (57°28.5'N., 21°25.9'E.) is moored about 5

miles NW of the harbor entrance and marks the seaward entrance of the NW approach channel.

10.9 Lighted Buoy A (57°26.3'N., 21°24.7'E.) is moored about 4

miles WNW of the harbor entrance and marks the seaward entrance of the W approach channel.

10.9 Both approach channels are marked by lighted buoys and are

indicated by lighted ranges. The rear range light of the NW

channel is shown from a prominent framework tower, 35m

high, standing 1.5 miles SE of the harbor entrance.

10.9 The port of Ventspils can be identified from a considerable

distance by a conspicuous church, with a tall spire, standing in

the center of the town on the S side of the river. A conspicuous

pilot watch tower, 20m high, stands close E of the root of the S

breakwater. A prominent group of storage tanks is situated near

the root of the N breakwater.

10.9 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 70m

in length and all vessels carrying dangerous cargo (oil, chemicals, or gas) regardless of length. Pilots must be ordered

through the VTS center (see Regulations).

10.9 Pilots can be contacted by VHF on channels 9, 14, and 16

and usually board in the vicinity of Lighted Buoy B or Lighted

Buoy A. 

10.9 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system operates in the approaches to the port. The system is manda-tory

and applies to all vessels navigating within the VTS area. The

area includes all the waters of the port, including the outer

roadstead, and is bounded by a line joining the following positions:

a. 57°20.9'N, 21°29.3'E.

b. 57°25.4'N, 21°22.6'E.

c. 57°32.3'N, 21°30.3'E.

d. 57°26.3'N, 21°35.9'E.

10.9 Vessels must send their ETA and a request for pilotage

through the agent to the Harbormaster 72 hours in advance.

Vessels must then send an ETA 24 hours and 4 hours prior to

arrival.

10.9 Vessels must contact the VTS Control Center, on VHF channel 16 or 9, 2 hours prior to arrival (not later than 1 hour prior

Ventspils—Outer Harbor

Ventspils—Entrance
Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 237

Pub. 194

to arrival) at either Lighted Buoy A (Ventspils West) or Lighted

Buoy B (Ventspils Main).

10.9 A continuous listening watch must be maintained in the outer roadstead on VHF channel 16, when proceeding to the port

on VHF channel 9, and when alongside the berth (if tele-phone

is not available) on VHF channel 16.

10.9 Shore-based radar assistance, ordered by the VTS, is compulsory for the following vessels arriving and departing the

port:

1. All vessels over 150m in length.

2. All vessels over 12,000 grt.

3. All vessels with drafts over 11.5m.

4. All vessels carrying dangerous cargo (oil, chemicals,

or gas).

10.9 The Ventspils Harbormaster and VTS center can be con-tacted by e-mail, as follows:

10.9 Tugs are compulsory for vessels over 90m in length. 

10.9 Speed limits are in force within the port.

10.9 Anchorage.—Designated anchorage areas, which may best

be seen on the chart, lie centered from the port entrance as follows: 

1. Area V-1, lying 6 miles N, is for liquid chemical,

LNG tankers, and quarantine.

2. Area V-2, lying 8 miles NW, is for large vessels with

drafts over 10m.

3. Area V-3, lying 4 miles NW, is for oil tankers and

dangerous goods. An obstruction, with a depth of 18m, lies

in the W part of this area.

4. Area V-4, lying 2.5 miles N, is for small vessels with

drafts less than 5m.

5. Area V-5, lying 3.5 miles NW, is for general cargo

(non-dangerous) vessels with drafts of 5 to 10m.

10.9 Caution.—Several dangerous wrecks and obstructions,

which may best be seen on the chart, lie in the approaches to

the harbor entrance.

10.9 Several submarine cables, which may best be seen on the

chart, extend seaward from a point located on the shore about 1

mile SSW of the port.

10.9 The approach channels and harbor are subject to frequent

silting, particularly after storms. The authorities should be contacted for information concerning the latest depths.

10.9 Anchoring in the outer roadstead areas is dangerous during

strong W winds.

10.9 The approaches to the port lie within a former mine area and

vessels are advised to anchor only within the designated areas.

10.9 Spoil ground areas and disused spoil areas, the limits of

which may best be seen on the chart, lie close off the coast and

extend up to about 6 miles N of the harbor entrance.

10.9 A prohibited area, within which measuring instruments are

located, lies centered 2.7 miles NW of the harbor entrance. It

has a radius of 0.5 mile and is marked by a lighted buoy.

10.9 Banks of sand frequently form off the breakwater heads and

vessels should not pass close to them.

10.10 Ovisi (57°34'N., 21°43'E.), a low and sandy point, is

located 12 miles NNE of Ventspils and can be readily iden-tified by its light color. The shore located inland of the point is

wooded. A light is shown from a prominent tower, 37m high,

standing on this point.

10.10 Ovisi Seklis (57°36'N., 21°40'E.), a shoal area which is part

of the coastal bank, extends up to about 5 miles NW of Ovisi.

This shoal area, which is generally sandy with a few rocks, has

a least depth of 2.8m and is marked on the W and N sides by

buoys. A number of dangerous wrecks, which can best be seen

on the chart, lie within the 20m curve in the vicinity of this

shoal bank.

The Gulf of Riga and Approaches

10.11 Saaremma (58°16'N., 22°36'E.) an Estonian island,

is composed chiefly of limestone and is thickly wooded. Its SE

coast forms the NW shore of the Gulf of Riga. The coast of

Saaremma is very indented with numerous peninsulas pro-jecting seaward between the bays. Two of these peninsulas, Sorve

Poolsaar at the S side and Tagamoisa at the NW side, are most

worthy of note. Generally, the island is flat and low, but it rises

slightly in the middle and at the N end. The summit of the island stands in the NW part where a wooded hill rises above the

surrounding plain.

10.11 Hiiumaa (Hiumaa) (58°53'N., 22°36'E.) is separated from

the N side of Saaremma by Soela Vain, a shallow channel. This

island is flat and marshy in the interior, but the land rises gradually toward the N end. Several wooded hills, 25m high, rise

along the NE coast. The NW side of the island is low and less

wooded than the NE. Kopu Poolsar, a densely wooded peninsula, forms the W extremity of Hiiumaa and rises to a height of

68m.

10.11 Soela Vain leads E into Vainameri and can be used only by

vessels, with local knowledge, up to 40m in length and 3m

draft.

10.11 Bezymyannaya (57°43'N., 20°59'E.), a shoal bank, lies centered 25 miles WNW of Ovisi. It has a least depth of 9.8m and

the E and W sides are marked by lighted buoys. 

10.11 Banka Vinkova (57°40'N., 21°20'E.), a shoal bank with a

least depth of 7.6m, lies about 11.5 miles NW of Ovisi and is

marked on its W side by a lighted buoy. Depths of less than

20m extend up to about 4.5 miles W, 3 miles N, 1.5 miles S,

and 2 miles W of the shallowest part of this bank.

10.11 Chidova Nova (57°54'N., 21°13'E.), a shoal bank with a

least depth of 22m, lies about 25.5 miles NW of Ovisi. An isolated shoal patch, with a depth of 11m, lies about 3.7 miles E of

this bank.

10.12 Saaremma—West side.—Sorve Poolsar (58°03'N.,

22°10'E.), a peninsula, projects 16 miles SSW from the S extremity of Saaremma. Sorve Saar (Sorve Ots), a sandy spit, extends about 0.9 mile S from the S end of this peninsula. It is narrow and mostly above-water. Vesitukimaa, a narrow islet, lies 0.5

mile SW of the S extremity of the spit.

Sorve Saar Light (Sorve Ots) (57°55'N., 22°03'E.) is shown

from a prominent round tower, 52m high, standing 0.4 mile

NNE of the S extremity of the spit.

10.12 A shoal flat, with depths of less than 5m, extends about 7

miles S and SW from the light into the N side of Irbeni Vain

(Irbe Strait) and is marked by a buoy (see paragraph 10.19).

10.12 A ridge of hills extends from Montu, located 3.5 miles NE of

regina@vok.lv
238 Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 

Pub. 194

Sorve Saar, to Ansekula, located 9.5 miles farther NNE. The W

side of this ridge, which attains an elevation of 28m, slopes

gradually and consists of several conical hills covered with

pine trees. The E side of the ridge is moderately steep.

10.12 Loode Neem (57°59'N., 22°00'E.) is located on Sorve Poolsar, 4.7 miles NNW of Sorve Saar Light. The coast between is

low and wooded. A light is shown from a tower, 15m high,

standing on this point.

10.12 Jamaja, a village, is situated 3 miles NE of Loode Neem. It is

the site of a church, with a tall tower and a pointed roof, which

is a prominent landmark when the sun is bearing W. Kaunispe

is situated 1.7 miles NNE of Jamaja. Small vessels, with local

knowledge, can obtain good anchorage, sheltered from W and

N winds, in depths of 4 to 6m, good holding ground, off this

village. 

10.12 The coast between Jamaja village and the W entrance point

of Lou Laht, about 5 miles NNE, is flat and rocky, with a few

small hills covered by fir trees.

10.13 Lou Laht (58°05'N., 22°10'E.) indents the coast

about 10 miles N of Sorve Saar Light. The W entrance point of

this bay is conspicuous. The bay affords anchorage to small

vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 5 to 7m, mud and

sand. The anchorage is sheltered, except from strong NW

winds. A low and grassy islet lies close off the W entrance

point of Lou Laht and a shallow reef extends up to about 1 mile

N of it.

10.13 Ariste Laht (58°09'N., 22°11'E.) affords good anchorage to

small vessels and is entered NNE of Lou Laht. The coasts of

this bay are low and sparsely wooded. However, the bay is encumbered with numerous rocks, reefs, and shoals and should

not be entered without local knowledge. The entrance channel

has a least depth of 4.4m. 

10.13 Meelaiuneen (Elda poolsaar) (58°19'N., 21°50'E.), located

20 miles NNW of Loode Neem Light, is a point where the

nearby land rises to a ridge, 13m high. Laimadal, a shoal with a

least depth of 2.3m, lies about 5 miles SW of this point. The

sea is reported to break on this shoal in fresh winds. Several

isolated and shallow shoals lie between Meelaivneen and Laimadal and may best be seen on the chart.

10.13 Loonalaid (58°20'N., 21°48'E.), a low and inhabited islet,

lies near the outer end of the foul ground which extends up to

about 3.5 miles NW of Meelaivneen. This islet is covered with

grass and bushes and is fringed by gravel, sand, and rocks. Salava, lying 0.5 mile S of Loonalaid, and Noota Maa, lying 0.5

mile NW Loonalaid, are both low islets, also covered with

grass and bushes. Foul and rocky ground extends up to about

1.7 miles SSW and 1 mile W of Salava. 

10.13 Atla Laht (58°19'N., 21°53'E.) is entered between Loonalaid and the SW side of Vilsandi Saar, 2.3 miles NE. This bay

has depths of 3 to 5m in the middle and its shores, on either

side, are low and consist of gravel and numerous large rocks.

The village of Atla stands at the head of the bay and is backed

by a ridge, 12m high. A prominent windmill is situated at the

village. Anchorage, sheltered from all winds, can be obtained

by small vessels with local knowledge, in a depth of 4m, sand,

near the head of Atla Laht.

10.13 The central part of Eeriksaar, a low peninsula, is located on

the NE side of Atla Laht and is wooded. A few prominent villages and windmills are situated along this part of the penin-sula.

10.14 Vilsandi Saar (58°23'N., 21°52'E.), an island, lies 2.5

miles NE of Loonalaid. It consists of two parts joined by an

isthmus. The E part is formed by low meadow land and the W

part is wooded. A village stands on the S side of the W part.

10.14 Vilsandi Light (58°19'N., 21°50'E.) is shown from a prominent round tower, 37m high, standing on the W extremity of

Vilsandi Saar. Vesiloo, an islet 4m high, lies close off the N

side of the island, 1 mile NE of the light.

Sorve Saar Light

Loode Neem Light Vilsandi Light
Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 239

Pub. 194

10.14 Suurkuiv (58°23'N., 21°40'E.), a dangerous rocky patch,

lies on the outer edge of a shoal bank which extends up to 5

miles W from the W extremity of Vilsandi Saar. It is marked by

a buoy moored off its W side.

10.14 Mustpank (58°22'N., 21°33'E.), a shoal with a least depth of

7.2m, lies about 9.2 miles W of Vilsandi Saar Light. 

10.14 Uuskuiv (58°19'N., 21°33'E.), a rocky shoal patch, lies

about 9.5 miles WSW of Vilsandi Saar and has a least depth of

4.9m.

10.14 A shoal, with a depth of 8.8m, lies about 15 miles WSW of

Vilsandi Light and an isolated patch, with a depth of 9.4m, lies

about 1 mile SW of it.

10.14 Pletseva Banks (58°11'N., 21°02'E.), with a least depth of

18m, lie about 27 miles WSW of Vilsandi Light and form the

outermost known dangers in this area. Numerous other dangers

lie on these banks and may best be seen on the chart. 

10.14 Kihelkonna Laht (58°23'N., 21°58'E.), a bay, is approached

between Vilsandi Saar and the S extremity of Harilaid, a low

peninsula located 4.5 miles N. From a distance, Harilaid,

which forms the W extremity of the large peninsula of Tagamoisa, appears as an island. The bay, which affords anchorage,

in depths of 11 to 13m, sand, is open to the NW, but heavy seas

do not reach the roadstead as it is protected by shoals. A

church, with a high tower, stands in the village of Kihelkonna

which is situated near the head of the bay. 

10.14 Jaagurahu (58°24'N., 21°58'E.), a loading place, lies 2

miles E of the NE extremity of Vilsandi Saar. There is a pier,

230m long, with a depth of 4.9m alongside the head. A channel, with a least depth of 4.3m, leads from seaward to the pier,

but local knowledge is necessary. Small vessels with local

knowledge can obtain anchorage, in a depth of 5m, mud and

sand, about 0.5 mile S of the head of the pier.

10.14 Kiipsaare Nukk (58°30'N., 21°52'E.), the NW extremity of

Harilaid, is fronted by dangers which extend up to about 2.5

miles NW of it.

10.14 Caution.—Anchoring and fishing are prohibited within an

area lying between Panganeem, the NE extremity of Vilsandi

Saar, and the mainland coast, 1.5 miles ENE.

10.15 Taga Laht (58°29'N., 22°06'E.), a bay, is entered between Undva Nina (Undva Neem), located 2.5 miles ENE of Kiipsaare Nukk, and Ninase Pank, located 9 miles ENE. The coast

rises to the E of Undva Nina, which is low and sandy, and forms

limestone cliffs. These cliffs become precipitous at Suuri-ku

Pank, about 2.7 miles E. Several white sand cliffs, known as

Veeri Magi, stand at the middle of the W side of Taga Laht.

10.15 During the navigation season, a light is shown from a beacon, 10m high, standing on Merise Neem (58°30'N., 22°09'E.),

3.5 miles SW of Ninase Pank.

10.15 Large vessels can obtain anchorage, in depths of 15 to 18m,

sand and mud, with good holding ground, about 2.5 miles SW

of Merise Neem. However, they must remain clear of a dangerous wreck lying near the W side of the bay and a marine

farm situated 3 miles SW of Merise Neem. Although the bay is

open to the N, vessels can remain here during strong N winds.

Small vessels can anchor, in a depth of 5m, sand and mud,

about 0.7 mile offshore, at the E side of the head of the bay. 

10.15 Kudemaa Laht (Kudema Laht) (58°31'N., 22°16'E.) is entered between Ninase Pank and Panga Nukk (Panga Pank), 3

miles NE. Both entrance points of this bay are faced with cliffs.

A light is shown from a framework structure, 30m high, standing on Panga Nukk, which rises to a height of 24m. A church,

white with a dark roof, stands at Mustjala, 1.5 miles S of the

SW corner of the bay, and can be seen over the trees. The village of Ninase, situated 1.5 miles SSE of Ninase Pank, can be

readily identified by several windmills and a prominent white

house. The shores of the bay are mostly low, wooded, and bordered by rocks and sand.

10.15 Laidu, a flat islet, is situated 3 miles S of Panga Nukk Light.

It is fringed by rocks and lies on the edge of the shore bank

which extends from the E side of the bay.

10.15 Vessels of considerable size can obtain anchorage, during

offshore winds, in depths of 12 to 20m, sand, between Laidu

and the village of Ninase. However, they should not remain at

anchor with N or NW winds which send heavy seas into the

bay.

10.15 The coast extends 9.5 miles ENE between Panga Nukk and

Pammanina, the N extremity of Saaremaa, and is low and

wooded. The shore is bordered by a sandy and rocky beach

with several large above-water rocks on it.

10.15 Saaremaa Harbor (58°32'N., 21°14'E.) is located within

Kudemaa Laht close to the village of Ninase. It is administered

by the Port of Tallinn and is mostly used by cruise ships. There

are also facilities for pleasure craft.

10.15 Depths—Limitations.—The harbor provides an L-shaped

quay, with 460m of berthage and depths of 3 to 10m alongside.

Vessels up to 200m in length, 30m beam, and 9.6m draft can be

accommodated alongside.

10.15 Pilotage.—Pilots are available. They may be contacted by

VHF and will board vessels about 2 miles N of Ninase Pank.

10.15 Caution.—Entry during strong NW winds may be difficult.

10.16 Hiiumaa—West side.—The S extremity of Hiiumaa

is located 3 miles N of Pammanina, the N extremity of Saaremaa. The water area lying between these two points is foul, encumbered with numerous rocks, and does not appear to be

navigable. The S part of the W coast of Hiiumaa is so low that,

at first sight, it appears to be a chain of small islets.

10.16 Ristna (58°56'N., 22°03'E.) is a point forming the W termination of Kopu Poolsaar, a peninsula, which projects from the

W side of Hiiumaa. A light is shown from a prominent round

tower, 30m high, standing on this point.

10.16 A range of hills extends for the length of the peninsula and

rises to a height of 68m at Tornimagi. Andresemagi, a prom-inent peak, rises 1.2 miles ENE of Tornimagi and is 54m high. A

sandy ridge extends up to about 2 miles W from Tornimagi.

10.16 Kopu Light (58°55'N., 22°12'E.) is shown from a prominent

square tower, 36m high, standing on Tornimagi, 4.7 miles ESE

of Ristna Light.

10.16 The coast extending between the S extremity of Hiiumaa and

Ristna Light is fronted by an extensive shore bank, with depths

of less than 5m, which extends up to about 5 miles seaward in

places. Several dangers lie on this bank and local knowledge is

required to approach the coast. 

10.16 Neupokojevimadalik (58°55'N., 21°51'E.), a large detached

shoal area, has a least depths of 9m and lies about 7 miles

WSW of Ristna Light. It forms the outermost danger in this vicinity. This shoal area should not be confused with an iso-lated

shoal patch of the same name which lies 7.5 miles SE of Ristna

Light. This patch has a least depth of 2.9m and is marked by a
240 Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 

Pub. 194

buoy.

10.16 Kaleste (58°55'N., 22°08'E.), a village, is situated 3 miles

SE of Ristna. Small vessels, with local knowledge, can obtain

anchorage, in a depth of 5m, sand, 0.5 mile off the village, but

the roadstead is exposed to winds from between W and SW. A

range, consisting of a beacon in line with Kopu Light, indicates

the approach channel leading to the roadstead which has a least

depth of 5m.

10.17 Hiiumaa—Northwest side.—Fog often occurs off

the NW coast of Hiiumaa and is most frequent during April

when visibility is usually reduced to less than 1 mile.

10.17 From Ristna, the NW coast of the island trends in a NE direction for about 18 miles. It consists of two deep inden-tations

and numerous small coves of no particular significance.

Shoals, with depths of less than 3m, lie close within the 20m

curve and up to about 8 miles offshore. The sea breaks on

many of these shoals with onshore gales and the white stony

bottom can be seen from a considerable distance in calm

weather.

10.17 A detached shoal patch, with a least depth of 11.4m, lies

about 10 miles N of Ristna Light.

10.17 Vinkovimadalik (59°11'N., 22°19'E.), a shoal area with a

least depth of 8m, lies about 17 miles NE of Ristna Light and is

marked by a lighted buoy at its NW side. This shoal area forms

the outermost known danger in this vicinity.

10.17 Tahkuna Nina (59°05'N., 22°36'E.) is the NW extremity of

the broad peninsula which forms the N end of Hiiumaa. It is

low and covered with dense pine woods. The shore in this vicinity is sandy with numerous large above-water rocks. Tahkuna

Light is shown from a prominent tower, 43m high, standing on

this point.

10.17 Serbinimadalik (59°14'N., 22°42'E.), a shoal patch with a

least depth of 13.2m, lies about 9.7 miles NNE of Tahkuna Nina Light.

10.17 Appalomadalik (Apollo) (59°13'N., 22°51'E.), a shoal area

with a least depth of 6m, lies about 9.8 miles NE of Tahkuna

Nina Light and is marked by a buoy.

Directions.—The coastal route along this section leads

NNW for about 30 miles from the vicinity of Lighted Buoy

No. 1 (57°51'N., 21°37'E.), which is moored in the approach to

the Irbenskiy Strait, about 15 miles WSW of Sorve Saar Light.

After clearing the dangers lying W of the island of Vissandi

Saar, the route then leads NNE for about 45 miles to a position

W of Kopu Light (58°55'N., 22°12'E.).

10.17 Traffic Separation Schemes (TSS) are centered 20 miles NW

and 40 miles NNE of Kopu Light and may best be seen on the

chart.

The Gulf of Riga

10.18 The Gulf of Riga (Rizhskiy Zaliv) is also known as

Rigas Juras Licis (Livi Laht) is bounded by the coast of Latvia,

on the S side, by Saaremaa and Muhu, on the N side, and by

Ristna Light

Kopu Light

Tahkuna Light
Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 241

Pub. 194

the coasts of Latvia and Estonia, on the E side. The Latvian

side of the gulf is generally low and sandy with occasional

cliffs. Low ridges, formed by sandy and wooded hills, back the

coast and several large boulders fringe the shore. The Estonian

side of the gulf is very irregular and low. It consists of numerous rocky peninsulas and bights which are backed by woods.

Many small villages and summer resorts are situated along the

coasts of the gulf. Ruhnu, an isolated island, lies in the central

part of the gulf. The gulf has very few conspicuous landmarks,

but is marked by numerous navigational aids.

10.18 Winds—Weather.—In the Gulf of Riga, the prevailing

winds are from between S and SW. Fog is prevalent from October until April. 

10.18 Ice.—In normal winters, pack ice appears in December and

fast ice forms along the shores in the latter part of this month.

During severe winters, almost the whole gulf may be frozen

over. In February, the gulf may be frozen over to almost the

middle where heavy pack ice accumulates. The ice generally

forms very quickly, especially in the S part of the gulf. Ice

pressure may set in without warning and sometimes forms

against the direction of the wind.

10.18 The ice begins to melt in March and fast ice may have disappeared from the shores by the end of the month. However, pack

ice may still be encountered. By the middle of April, ice is usually found only in the N part of the gulf. 

10.18 As long as the ice within the gulf is not in motion, it is

scarcely dangerous to shipping. However, vessels should be

prepared at all times to stop the engines quickly in the event

that their condensers become clogged with brash ice.

10.18 At times, the ice floes begin to push upward so that they become stacked vertically over one another. This action, often

lasting only a few minutes, results in the forming of a large

structure of ice known as a “Torosse.” These structures of ice,

according to reports, may stand up to 12m above the water level. When the ice is in motion, the danger becomes very great. If

the wind and the current are in the same direction, the ice often

moves quickly and can easily attain speeds of up to 8 knots. To

resist the great pressure formed by this movement of ice, vessels must be specially constructed. 

10.18 Tides—Currents.—In the Gulf of Riga, the currents are irregular and set inward from Muhu Vain and through Irbeni

Vain. During continued calm weather, the current sets S

through Muhu Vain and attains rates of 0.5 to 0.8 knot. With

strong W or SW winds, the inward flow from the Baltic Sea

may become quite strong and the current, which sets E, may be

diverted on striking the E shore of the gulf. This current then

sets N and flows into Muhu Vain at rates of 1 to 1.5 knots. In

calm weather, the current usually sets N or S along the E shore

of the gulf according to the direction of the wind preceding the

calm, but its rate does not exceed 0.5 knot. 

10.18 Variations of the water level in the gulf occur according to

the wind direction. Winds from the S and SW cause the highest

levels and winds from the NE cause the lowest. These variations seldom exceed 0.5m, but they may reach 1 to 1.2m during

autumn and winter.

10.18 Regulations.—In Latvian waters, during the ice navigation

season, the responsibility for the control and operation of the

ice services and icebreaker is divided between the harbor-masters of the ports of Liepaja, Ventspils, and Riga. The dates and

implementation of any rules imposed are approved by the relevant port authorities. In addition, the harbormaster at Riga has

responsibility for winter navigation in the Irbe Strait, the main

entrance to the gulf. Certain restrictions on size, engine capacity, and ice class construction apply to vessels intending to pass

through the strait and call at ports in the gulf, dependent on

prevailing conditions.Vessels with less than Lloyds Ice Class 3,

or equivalent, are prohibited from entering the waters in question. Vessels bound for, or leaving the port of Riga, must forward a report, with full details of vessel and cargo, to the

harbormaster at Riga at least 24 hours in advance.

10.18 It is reported that all vessels bound for Riga or other ports on

the coast of Latvia within the gulf are prohibited to enter the

Irbe Strait and the gulf or to leave these ports independently

without a special permit issued each time by the Captain of the

icebreaker. The permit takes into account the actual ice condition in the area after being approved by the harbormaster at

Riga.

10.18 In Estonian waters, vessels that have requested icebreaker

assistance should await the icebreaker at a position near the E

end of the TSS situated off Kopu Poolsaar at Hiiumaa Island

(58°55'N., 22°30'E.). The icebreaking service is controlled by

Tallinn VTS. For details of the icebreaking service, see Pub.

140, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean

and Adjacent Seas.

10.18 Caution.—Local magnetic anomalies are reported to exist in

the SE part of the Gulf of Riga. 

10.18 Former mine areas lie within the gulf and vessels are advised

to anchor only within the designated areas and follow the designated routes.

10.19 Irbeni Vain (Irbenskiy Strait) (Irbe Strait) (57°40'N.,

22°08'E.), a strait, is the W and main entrance to the Gulf of

Riga. It is formed, on the S side, by the section of the mainland

extending between Ovisi and Kolkasrags, 31 miles ENE. Sorve

Poolsaar, located 23 miles NNE of Ovisi, forms the N side of

the strait. The shores of the strait are low with no natural landmarks. 

10.19 Several shoals, with depths in places of less than 11m, lie between 7 and 11 miles N of Ovisi. For the purpose of buoyage,

these dangers are considered to form one extensive shoal area. 

10.19 Michailova Seklis (57°44'N., 21°42'E.), the northernmost

and largest shoal in the above area, has a least depth of 5m.

10.19 The coast between Ovisi and Kolkasrags, 31 miles ENE, is

low and sandy. Several sand hills, of moderate height and covered with trees, rise close inland of the shoreline.

10.19 Mikeltornis Light (57°36'N., 21°58'E.) is shown from a

conspicuous concrete tower, 56m high, standing at Mikelbaka,

8.5 miles ENE of Ovisi Light. It is reported (2007) that a racon

is situated at this light tower.

10.19 Sorve Saar Light is shown from a prominent tower standing

on the N side of the strait, about 19 miles N of Mikeltornis

Light (see paragraph 10.12).

10.19 Irbenskiy Light (57°45'N., 21°44'E.), equipped with a racon, is shown from a prominent structure, 35m high, stand-ing

on the SW side of the main channel, 12.5 miles NW of Mikeltornis Light.

10.19 Lighted Buoy No. 1 (57°51'N., 21°37'E.) is moored about 7

miles NNW of Irbenskiy Light and marks the seaward entrance

of the channel leading through Irbeni Vain.

10.19 Zieliekalni, a range of hills, rises about 19 miles E of Ovisi
242 Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 

Pub. 194

and is 50 to 77m high. A conspicuous church, with a spire,

stands 1.5 miles inland at Mazirbe, 20.5 miles ENE of Ovisi. It

can be seen from seaward rising above a group of trees.

10.19 Sikragciema Light (57°39'N., 22°13'E.) is shown from a

prominent framework tower, 27m high, standing 8.7 miles

ENE of Mikeltornis Light.

10.19 Kolkasrags (57°46'N., 22°36'E.), located about 14 miles NE

of Sikragciema Light, terminates in a sandy point with woods

standing close inland. Two prominent churches are situated 0.7

mile SW of this cape. A reef, with depths of less than 5m, extends up to about 3.2 miles NNE of Kolkasrags and is steep-to

on its N and E sides.

10.19 Kolka Light (57°48'N., 22°38'E.), equipped with a racon, is

shown from a prominent tower with dwellings, 21m high,

standing on an artificial islet lying near the extremity of the

reef.

10.19 Vessels can obtain anchorage, sheltered from W and SW

winds, in a depth of 14m, sand, about 2 miles offshore, under

the lee of Kolkasrags. However, vessels must be ready to leave

this anchorage quickly should the wind shift to the E.

10.19 A conspicuous framework beacon (former light tower)

stands at Saunagciema, about 5 miles SW of Kolkasrags, and is

21m high.

10.19 Winds—Weather.—In the strait, the prevailing winds are

from the S, SW, and W and sometimes cause high waves. Fog

within the strait occurs most frequently during spring. 

10.19 Tides—Currents.—Between Ovisi and Kolkasrags, the current varies according to the strength and direction of the wind,

attaining, at times, rates of 1 to 1.5 knots. With continued W

winds, a current often sets NW around Kolkasrags. It then sets

across the direction of the wind and often causes a confused

sea in the vicinity of the reef extending from the cape.

10.19 Directions.—Navigation through Irbeni Vain (Irbe Strait) is

via a channel, which is marked by lighted buoys, and presents

few difficulties. However, in low visibility, caution is advised

due to the current.

10.19 Vessels with drafts of 10m and over should steer for Lighted

Buoy No. 1 (57°51'N., 21°37'E.). Such vessels approaching

from the S, should pass W and clear of Bezymyannaya

(57°43'N., 20°59'E.) before steering ENE towards Lighted

Buoy No. 1.

10.19 An alternate route leads 18 miles NNE to the vicinity of

Lighted Buoy No. 1 from W of Ovisi Light (57°34'N.,

21°43'E.). It passes between a dangerous wreck lying 2 miles

WSW of Lighted Buoy No. 5 (57°40'N., 21°33'E.) and the E

side of Banka Vinkova (57°40'N., 21°20'E.).

10.19 The main channel leads 13.5 miles SE from Lighted Buoy

No. 1 to Lighted Buoy No. 4 (57°40'N., 21°52'E.), passing NE

of Irbenskiy Light. It then leads ENE for about 26 miles to

Lighted Buoy No. 8 (57°51'N., 22°37'E.), which is moored 3

miles N of Kolka Light. The fairway is about 1 mile wide and

has a least depth of 15m on the centerline.

10.19 A secondary route for small vessels leads about 9.5 miles E

from the vicinity of Lighted Buoy No. 5 (57°40'N., 21°33'E.)

and joins the main channel at Lighted Buoy No. 4 (57°40'N.,

21°52'E.).

10.19 Recommended routes, which may best be seen on the chart,

lead, respectively, SE and ENE from Lighted Buoy No. 8

(57°51'N., 22°37'E.) to Riga and Parnu.

10.19 Caution.—Several wrecks, with depths of less than 15m, lie

at the sides of the main channel and may best be seen on the

chart.

10.20 Ruhnu Saar (57°48'N., 23°14'E.), an off-lying island,

belongs to Estonia and lies in the Gulf of Riga, about 20 miles

E of Kolkasrags. The W side of the island is low, but the E side

is hilly, wooded, and rises to a height of 30m. The NE and E

coasts of the island are low, steep, and formed by reddish cliffs

of sand and rock. A village is situated in the middle of the island. Ruhnu Saar Light is shown from a prominent tower, 40m

high, standing, above the tree tops, on the SE side of the summit of the island. 

10.20 Gretagrund, a shoal bank, lies centered about 2.5 miles off

the SE end of the island and has a least depth of 2.2m. A deep

passage leads between this shoal bank and the coastal bank

fringing the island. The coastal bank, with depths of les than

5m, extends about 2.5 miles NNW from the N end of the island

and is marked by a buoy.

10.20 Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, sheltered from W and SW winds, off the SE side of the island. The

roadstead has depths of 9 to 18m, sand, and lies between 0.5

mile and 1.2 miles off the S extremity of the island.

10.20 Caution.—Several military practice areas lie within the gulf

to the S of Ruhnu Saar. For further information, see Pub. 140

Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and

Adjacent Seas.

The Gulf of Riga—West Side

10.21 The coast extending between Kolkasrags and the

mouth of the river Daugava, 62 miles SE, is mostly low and

Kolka Light

Ruhnu Saar Light
Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 243

Pub. 194

sandy. It is backed, in some places, by low and wooded hills.

Several villages are situated along this stretch of coast.

10.21 Gipka Light (57°34'N., 22°39'E.) is shown from a prom-inent framework tower, 30m high, standing 11.5 miles SSE of

Kolkasrags.

10.21 Roja (57°30'N., 22°49'E.), a small harbor, is located 6.5

miles SE of Gipka Light. It is protected by two breakwaters

which extend about 400m seaward from a river mouth. A detached breakwater, in ruins, lies close offshore, to the S of the

harbor. A main directional light is shown from a prominent

framework tower, 20m high, standing in the vicinity of the harbor. An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about 1 mile

NNE of the breakwater heads. The harbor has depths of 3 to

5m and is used by coasters, fishing vessels, and pleasure craft.

Vessels up to 90m in length, 15m beam, and 4.2m draft can be

accommodated. Local knowledge is required.

10.21 Mersrags (57°22'N., 23°08'E.), a low and sandy point, is located 28 miles SE of Kolkasrags and covered with pine woods.

An isolated rocky shoal patch, with a depth of 3.6m, lies 0.5

mile NNE of the point and is marked by a buoy. A light is

shown from a prominent tower, 19m high, standing on the

point.

10.21 Mersraga Osta, a small harbor, lies 2 miles SSE of Mersrags

Light at the mouth of a river which forms the outlet of an inland lake. The village stands on the N side of the river entrance. An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about 2 mile

E of the harbor. The harbor is used by coasters, fishing vessels,

and pleasure craft. Vessels up to 80m in length, 12m beam, and

4m can be accommodated.

Engure (57°10'N., 23°14'E.), a small and shallow harbor,

lies 12.8 miles SSE of Mersrags Light and is used by fishing

boats and pleasure craft. A light is shown from a prominent

framework tower, 19m high, standing close N of the harbor. 

10.21 Ragaciems (57°02'N., 23°30'E.) is a low sandy point lying

23 miles SSE of Mersrags Light. Conspicuous churches stand

at Sloka and Dubulti which are situated 7 miles SE and 10

miles ESE, respectively, of this point. Ragaciems Light is

shown from a prominent framework tower, 30m high, standing

on the point. 

10.21 Daugavgrivas Sala (Ostrov Daugavgriva) (57°02'N.,

24°00'E.), an island, lies between the mouth of the river Lielupe and the mouth of the river Daugava. 

10.21 Bulluciems Light (57°00'N., 23°53'E.) is shown from a

prominent pyramid structure, 28m high, standing close to the

shore, 1.7 miles W of the W end of Daugavgrivas Sala. 

10.21 Tides—Currents.—On the W side of the gulf between

Kolkasrags and the mouth of the Daugava, the currents set according to the direction and force of the wind. They usually attain rates of 0.5 to 1 knot. 

10.21 Anchorage.—Vessels can obtain anchorage, with offshore

winds, in depths up to 27m, off any part of the coast extending

between Kolkasrags and the mouth of the river Daugava. However, the most used roadstead lies about 2 miles S of Kolkasrags.

Riga (56°57'N., 24°06'E.)

World Port Index No. 28610 

10.22 Riga is situated on the S coast of the Gulf of Riga and

about 7 miles above the mouth of the river Daugava. The city

stands on both banks of the river and is the capital of Latvia.

The port consists of facilities extending along the banks of the

river between the entrance and the city.

10.22 Winds—Weather.—Fog is prevalent from September to

April.

10.22 Ice.—Entry to the port depends almost entirely on when Irbeni Vain becomes icebound, which in turn depends on the direction of the wind. Winds from the N drive the ice into the

strait and winds from the S drive it away. Ice conditions usually

last from the end of January to the beginning of April. How-ever, in most years, powerful icebreakers keep the port open

throughout the winter.

10.22 Vessels bound for Riga and requiring icebreaker assistance

should inform the harbor authorities at least 48 hours before arrival at the ice limit. Such vessels should state in the message

their loading level, draft, ice class, details of any rescue equipment, details of any ice damage, and amounts of fresh water

and fuel remaining on reaching the ice limit. 

10.22 Tides—Currents.—The tides are negligible. The water level varies with the wind direction. Winds from the W may cause

a rise in the water level of up to 2m. Winds from the E may

cause a fall of up to 1.1m. Spring thaws are reported to sometimes raise the water level by as much as 3m.

10.22 The currents in the river Daugava attain rates of 1 to 2 knots.

In the spring, a current sets across the bar, in a NW direction, at

rates of up to 3 knots. However, this same current is weak in

the summer. In the channel leading over the bar, a current,

caused by W or NW winds, usually sets SE at a rate of 0.3

knot. Winds from the E may cause this current to set W at a

rate of 1 knot.

10.22 Depths—Limitations.—The river bar, with depths of less

than 10, extends up to about 1.5 miles from the port entrance.

A safety fairway and an entrance channel, 100m wide, lead SE

over the bar and into the harbor. They were reported (2000) to

have a least depth of 13.3m as far as a point lying 2.5 miles inside the harbor entrance.

10.22 The main facilities include a container terminal, with 450m

of berthage, which can handle vessels up to 10m draft; a passenger terminal, with 217m of berthage, which can handle vessels up to 8m draft; a gas terminal, with 145m of berthage,

which can accommodate vessels up to 6.6m draft; and the Eksportosa riverside terminal, with 240m of berthage, which can

Riga Harbor
244 Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 

Pub. 194

accommodate vessels up to 10m draft. The shipyard provides

500m of berthage and can accommodate vessels up to 8m

draft.

10.22 The port provides over 7,000m of commercial quayage along

the river with facilities for general cargo, bulk, tanker, chemical, gas, ro-ro, passenger, and container vessels. In addition,

there are extensive facilities for repairs, with six floating docks

and two slipways. The largest floating dry dock is 225m long

and 45m wide. It can accommodate vessels up to 8m draft.

10.22 Vessels up to 195m in length can enter the harbor with drafts

up to 10.2m. Those vessels not exceeding 185m in length can

enter with drafts up to 10.6m. An underkeel clearance of 0.45m

is recommended for entry. Vessels up to 86,860 dwt, 240m in

length, 35m beam, and 9m draft have been accommodated in

the port.

10.22 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 52m, spans

the harbor channel, 4 miles above the river mouth. 

10.22 Aspect.—The entrance of the river Daugava lies between

two breakwaters. One extends in a NW direction from the NE

extremity of the island of Daugavgrivas Sala and the other extends in a NW direction from the W extremity of the island of

Mangalsala. The town of Daugavgriva is situated 1.5 miles S of

the river mouth. A prominent fort stands close NE of Daugavgriva and the town of Bolderaya is situated close SE of it. The

river Daugava flows through a valley which consists of meadows and swamps, interspersed with sand hills. Numerous low

islands and sand banks lie in the river and are partly covered

with grass. These islands and banks, along with the low sides

of the river, are usually inundated when the ice melts in the

spring. 

10.22 Several towers, chimneys, and masts are situated in the vicinity of Riga and are conspicuous. 

10.22 Daugavgrivas Rear Range Light is shown from a conspicuous tower, 35m high, standing at the root of the S breakwater.

A racon is situated at this light.

10.22 Outer Approach Lighted Buoy B is moored about 4 miles

NW of the light. The safety fairway and entrance channel are

marked by lighted buoys and indicated by lighted ranges.

Lights are shown from the breakwater heads.

10.22 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Vessels should send requests for pilotage 24 hours and 4 hours in advance. Pilots can

be contacted by VHF and board in the vicinity of Outer Approach Lighted Buoy B. In adverse weather conditions, vessels

should use VTS assistance and proceed to the inner roads

where the pilot will board.

10.22 Regulations.—A mandatory Vessel Traffic Service (VTS)

system operates in the approaches to the port. It covers all waters of the port and all waters lying within a radius of 10 miles

(sector 270°-020°) of the main harbor light.

10.22 All vessels must send an ETA at Outer Approach Lighted

Buoy B 24 hours and 4 hours in advance. The message should

include the following information:

1. Name of vessel.

2. Type of vessel.

3. Nationality.

4. Length.

5. Beam.

6. Draft and air draft.

7. Tonnage.

8. Agent.

9. ETA.

10. Berth.

11. Purpose of visit.

10.22 Tankers must also declare their previous cargo.

10.22 Vessels must establish contact with the VTS (Riga Traffic

Control) on VHF channel 16 or 9, 4 hours prior to and upon arrival at Reporting Point R (57°13.7'N., 23°44.2'E.). Vessels

should then maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF

channel 9.

10.22 The movements of all vessels within the harbor area are controlled by the VTS system. Vessels must receive permission

from the Traffic Control Center via VHF before moving within

the harbor. This permission must be renewed after 30 minutes

if the movement has not taken place.

10.22 During the period of December to March when Irbeni Vain

and the Gulf of Riga are frozen over, vessels should send a report to arrange ice-breaking service at least 24 hours before

passing the meridian of Irbe Strait Light. The report should be

sent to the Harbormaster and to the Captain of the icebreaker

“Varma” directly or through the agent. The report should include the following:

1. Name of vessel.

2. Nationality/Flag.

3. Call sign.

4. Ice classification.

Riga Container Terminal

Daugavgrivas Rear Range Light
Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 245

Pub. 194

5. Length and beam.

6. Draft.

7. Tonnage.

8. Main engine capacity.

9. Type and quantity of cargo.

10. ETA at the meridian of Irbe Strait Light.

10.22 The Riga VTS center and pilot station can be contacted by email, as follows:

10.22 The Riga Harbormaster can be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

10.22 Signals.—A signal station tower is situated close to the light

at the root of the S breakwater. A visual time signal is made

once daily at this station.

10.22 When the entrance of the river is dangerous because of ice,

an additional red flashing light is exhibited from the light structure. If entry becomes impossible, the entrance fairway range

lights are extinguished.

10.22 Anchorage.—An outer designated anchorage area, which

may best be seen on the chart, lies centered 6 miles NW of the

light. It lies SW of the approach route and has a least depth of

27m over a bottom of sand and mud. The roadstead is open to

winds from SW through N to NE and, despite its moderate

depth and good holding ground, is dangerous during such conditions, especially in the autumn when these winds prevail.

During N gales, a heavy sea is usually formed in the roadstead

and vessels should leave in good time if a gale is expected from

that quarter. The most frequent strong winds are reported to

blow from the SW and raise little sea.

10.22 Caution.—It is reported that the outer approach lighted buoy

is likely to drag from its charted position during or after stormy

weather.

10.22 A spoil ground area, which may best be seen on the chart,

lies about 4 miles NNW of the port entrance.

10.22 The approach safety fairway and entrance channel are subject to frequent silting, particularly after storms. The authorities should be contacted for information concerning the latest

depths and draft limitations. When crossing the bar, vessels are

also advised to stay strictly on the alignment of the lighted

range.

The Gulf of Riga—East Side

10.23 From the mouth of the river Daugava, the coast extends 16 miles NE and then 56 miles N to Pikla Nina. The

shore is low, mainly sandy, and backed by sand dunes which

are wooded in places. A few low cliffs stand to the S of the

town of Salacgriva (57°45'N., 24°21'E.). Several churches

stand in the villages, which are situated along this section of

the coast, and form good landmarks.

10.23 Directions.—From the vicinity of the outer approach lighted

buoy, moored about 4 miles NW of Riga, the recommended

route, which may best be seen on the chart, leads N for 37

miles to a position located W of Salacgriva (57°45'N.,

24°21'E.). From this position, one route leads NNE to Parnu

and another route leads NNW to the passage of Vainameri.

10.23 Caution.—Several dangerous wrecks lie within 5 miles of

the coast between Riga and Ladin’i Beacon and may best be

seen on the chart.

10.23 A triangular-shaped area, within which navigation is temporary prohibited, extends up to about 10 miles NE from the vicinity of Ladin’i Beacon and may best be seen on the chart.

10.23 Fishing nets are laid within 3 miles of the coast between the

entrance to the river Daugava and Parnu, 80 miles N. Caution

should be exercised when navigating in this area. 

10.23 Buoys moored in the vicinity of any of the offshore dangers

lying along this stretch of coast are liable to drag and no reliance should be placed on them.

10.24 Ladin’i Beacon (57°12'N., 24°21'E.), a former light

tower, stands near the shore, 13 miles NE of Riga. It consists of

a conspicuous framework tower, 23m high.

Skultes Osta, a small harbor, is located 7.5 miles NNE of Ladin’i Beacon and is used by fishing vessels. The entrance is

70m wide and has a depth of 4m.

Laci Light (57°27'N., 24°23'E.) is shown from a prominent

framework tower, 23m high, standing 15 miles N of Ladin’i

Beacon. A conspicuous tall chimney is reported to stand at a

brickworks 2.3 miles N of this light.

Grintals Light (57°38'N., 24°23'E.) is shown from a prominent framework tower, 21m high, standing 11.7 miles N of Laci Light.

10.25 Salacgriva (57°45'N., 24°21'E.), a small town, is situated at the mouth of a river, 7.5 miles N of Grintals Light. It is

fronted by a small harbor which is protected by two break-waters.

10.25 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel is 60m wide

and has a least depth of 5.5m. The harbor provides about 500m

of quayage with depths of 4 to 5.5m alongside. Vessels up to

115m in length, 20m beam, and 4.5m draft can be accommodated.

10.25 Aspect.—An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about 2

miles WSW of the harbor. The fairway is indicated by a lighted

range which may best be seen on the chart.

10.25 A prominent chimney, a water tower, and a church with a

brown roof stand on the S side of the harbor. A church, with a

red roof, and another church, with a green roof, stand in the

town on the N side of the harbor and are very conspicuous

when the trees are bare. A bridge spans the river at the E end of

the harbor. A conspicuous white beacon stands on the N side of

the river mouth. This structure, 9m high, is a disused light tower.

10.25 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 50m in

length. Pilots can be contacted on VHF channel 12 and board

in the vicinity of the outer approach lighted buoy. Vessels, except local fishing boats, should send an ETA through the agent

72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance.

10.25 Anchorage.—Vessels may obtain anchorage, in depths of 6

to 7m, rock, about 2 miles W or 3 miles SW of the harbor.

10.26 Talais Seklis (57°49'N., 24°13'E.) is a shoal with a

least depth of 6.8m, lies about 4.2 miles offshore, 5.7 miles

als@rok.bkc.lv

lienite@rok.bkc.lv
246 Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 

Pub. 194

NW of Salacgriva. This shoal is the outermost danger in this

vicinity.

Ainazi Light (57°52'N., 24°22'E.) is shown from a prom-inent tower, 18m high, standing near the small coastal town of

the same name, 7 miles N of Salacgriva. A prominent church,

without a spire, stands in this town and a distinctive white

church, with a black roof, is situated in the village of Treimani,

3 miles NNE. A small and shallow harbor fronts the town. 

10.26 Pikola Seklis, an isolated shoal patch, lies about 4.2 miles

NW of Ainazi Light and has a least depth of 6m. It lies outside

the 10m curve.

The boundary between Latvia and Estonia lies about 0.6

mile N of this light.

10.27 Haademeeste (58°05'N., 24°30'E.), a small town, is

situated 13 miles NNE of Ainazi Light. Two conspicuous

churches stand in this vicinity. One is situated near the coast

and is a white building with a black roof and a black cupola.

The other is situated 0.5 mile farther NE and is a red building

with a green spire. A light is shown from a prominent framework tower, 28m high, standing close SW of the town.

10.27 Pihinurme Maed, a group of prominent sand hills, rises to a

height of 46m and stands about 3.5 miles N of this town.

10.27 Bostri Madalik (Kiire Madal) (58°01'N., 24°20'E.), a rocky

shoal, lies about 6.5 miles SW of Haademeeste Light and has a

least depth of 5m. An isolated shoal patch, with a depth of

9.8m, lies 4 miles N of this rocky shoal.

10.27 Pihinurme Madalik, a reef with a least depth of 3.6m, lies

about 2 miles offshore, 4.5 miles NNW of Haademeeste Light.

10.28 Parnu Laht (58°15'N., 24°23'E.) lies at the NE end of

the Gulf of Riga and is entered between Pikla Nina (58°15'N.,

24°28'E.), located 10.5 miles N of Haademeeste, and Sorgu

Saar, a small island lying 8 miles W. The shores at the entrance

to the bay are indented and rocky, but become regular and

sandy to the N. The entire coastal terrain is low and wooded.

There are depths of 9 to 12m in the entrance to the bay and a

depth of 7m in the middle; the bottom is mainly sandy. The bay

is sheltered from all winds, except those from between S and

SW, and provides good anchorage.

The E shore of the bay to the N of Pikla Nina is fronted by

shoals and reefs which extend up to 2 miles seaward. Several

conspicuous churches stand along the stretch of shore extending between Pikla Nina and Parnu.

10.28 Irmgardi Madalik, a detached shoal patch, lies about 4 miles

NW of Pikla Nina and has a least depth of 4.6m.

The SSW part of the W shore of the bay is fronted by the islands of Kihnu Saar, Sorgu Saar, and Manilaid.

10.28 Kihnu Saar (58°08'N., 24°00'E.), the southwesternmost of

the islands, lies about 6 miles S of the mainland and 16 miles

W of Haademeeste. It is low and wooded. A church, with a

dark spire, stands in the middle of the island and is con-spicuous from the SW and W. A large house, with a red roof, is situated close S of this church. Kihnu Saar Light is shown from a

prominent tower, 32m high, standing on Mys Pikkana, the S

extremity of the island.

10.28 A foul area, with several above and below-water rocks, extends up to about 2 miles ESE from the SE side of the island

and is marked close E by a buoy. A dangerous wreck lies about

3.2 miles SE of Kilnu Saar Light. Foul ground areas, marked

by buoys, extend about 2.5 miles N and 7.5 miles NW from

Pilli Ots, the N extremity of the island.

10.28 Kihnu Krunt (Kihnu Madal), an extensive shoal, extends

SSW for 3 miles and its N end lies about 2.5 miles SSW of

Kihnu Saar Light. This shoal has a least depth of 1.8m and is

marked by a lighted buoy, at the S end, and a buoy, at the N

end.

10.28 A dangerous shallow wreck lies on a shoal area, with a least

depth of 8.6m, centered about 9 miles W of Kilnu Saar Light.

10.29 Sorgu Saar (58°11'N., 24°12'E.), lying 6 miles ENE

of the NE end of Kihnu Saar, is a small and low island. It is

covered with bushes and fringed by rocks. A foul ground area

extends up to about 3 miles S of the island. A light is shown

from a prominent tower, 16m high, standing on this island.

10.29 A dangerous wreck, marked by a lighted buoy, lies about 3.5

miles SSE of the light. 

10.29 Manilaid (Manilaiu) (58°13'N., 24°08'E.) is an island, 5m high,

lying 3 miles NW of Sorgu Saar. It is covered with grass and bushes. The island is surrounded by foul ground and separated from the

mainland to the N by a shallow channel, about 0.5 mile wide. A

light is shown from a prominent tower, 8m high, standing on the S

extremity.

10.29 Kiriku Nina (Cape Kirikunina) (58°17'N., 24°17'E.), a salient point, is located on the mainland, 4.5 miles ENE of the N

end of Manilaid. A light is shown from a prominent framework tower, 28m high, standing on this point.

Haademeetse Light

Kihnu Saar Light
Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 247

Pub. 194

10.29 A shallow reef extends up to about 0.6 mile S and 0.3 mile E

of Kirku Nina Light. The shore extending N from this light to

the head of the bay is low and marshy. Several rivers flow into

Parnu Laht and form flats, with depths of less than 5m, which

extend up to 3 miles offshore. Several above and below-water

rocks lie on these flats between Manilaid and Kiriku Nina.

10.29 Caution.—Fishing areas, which may best be seen on the

chart, lie within Parnu Laht and the approaches. Vessels not engaged in fishing are prohibited from navigating in these areas.

10.30 Parnu (54°23'N., 24°30'E.) (World Port Index No.

28550) lies at the head of Parnu Laht and at the mouth of the

Parnu Jogi river. The town, a resort, stands on the S bank of the

river. The harbor is used by commercial vesserls and is a coastal fishing center.

10.30 Winds—Weather.—The harbor is well sheltered, except

from winds from between S and SW which send in a heavy

sea.

10.30 Ice.—The harbor is usually closed by ice from November to

April. The bay usually becomes closed by ice 7 days and free

from ice 11 days later than the river. The later thawing in the

bay and roadstead causes blockages in the entrance of the harbor when the ice in the river begins to move. At such times, the

water level in the river may be raised by up to 3.7m. In addition, the low-lying areas in the vicinity of the river are flooded

and ice floes may be carried out to sea over the break-waters.

In the autumn, the river often freezes over so quickly that vessels are compelled to depart prematurely. 

10.30 Tides—Currents.—The numerous bends in the river cause

varying currents to set between the low embankments. Winds

from the SW usually raise the water level 0.6 to 0.9m above the

mean level. Winds from the NE usually lower the level at least

0.3m. During spring thaws, the river may flood part of the port

area. 

10.30 Depths—Limitations.—The recommended approach route

leads NNE to the vicinity of the outer fairway buoy. A dredged

entrance channel then leads NE over the bar and between two

long breakwaters. It has a least depth of 5.9m and a least bottom width of 53m.

10.30 The harbor has depths of 3.7 to 6.2m and the bottom consists

of clay, with gravel in places, covered by sand. The quays extending along the SE bank of the river have depths of 4.1 to

6.2m alongside. There are facilities for general cargo and bulk

vessels, fishing boats, and pleasure craft. Vessels up to 140m in

length, 45m beam, and 5.5m draft can be accommodated.

10.30 Aspect.—The approach track and entrance channel are indicated by lighted ranges. An outer fairway lighted buoy is

moored about 0.8 mile SW of the breakwater heads. 

10.30 A large stone mill, conspicuous from seaward, is situated at

Pootsi on the W side of the bay, 4.7 miles W of Kiriku Nina

Light. A prominent church stands at Saare, 3.2 miles WNW of

Kiriku Nina Light. A conspicuous chimney and a large lightcolored building stand near Kiriku Nina Light. Another prominent church stands at Audru, 8 miles NNE of Kiriku Nina

Light.

10.30 Several conspicuous buildings and churches are situated in

Parnu; in particular a white church, with a red roof and a red

spire, and a church, with a white spire, situated 0.3 mile E of it.

10.30 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels. Pilots can be contacted by VHF and usually board in the roadstead about 2.5 miles SW of the breakwater heads.

10.30 Pilotage must be requested through the agent in the port.

Vessels must send an ETA message and request for pilotage 24

hours and 12 hours in advance. The message should state the

vessel’s name, flag, length, and draft. Vessels should then contact the port 1 hour before arrival.

10.30 Regulations.—All vessel movements, both in the harbor and

Sorgu Saar Light

Manilaid Light

Kiriku Nina Light
248 Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 

Pub. 194

in the approaches, are controlled by the harbor authorities.

Navigation in the entrance channel is allowed by day and at

night, but only in one direction at a time; priority is given to departing vessels. Navigation is prohibited in the entrance channel when the visibility is less than 1.2 miles.

10.30 Anchorage.—A designated anchorage area, which may best

be seen on the chart, lies centered 4.5 miles SSW of the breakwater heads, on the E side of the fairway. Large vessels can obtain anchorage, in depths of 5 to 9m, sand and mud, good holding ground, in the middle of the bay, but they should re-main

clear of the prohibited fishing areas.

10.30 Caution.—Erosion of the river banks often leads to a build

up of sand in the entrance and outer fairway, especially during

the spring. The entrance channel is subject to frequent silting

and the authorities should be contacted for information concern

ing the latest depths.

10.30 Nets are set out in the fishing areas within the approaches to

Parnu. Vessels are advised to use care when transiting this area.

The Gulf of Riga—Northeast Side

10.31 The NE coast of the gulf between Torila Ots (Munalaid), located 5.3 miles SW of Kiriku Nina, and Someri

Poolsar, 13 miles WNW, is low, marshy, and covered by shrubs

in a few places. Wooded hills rise parallel to the coast, between

1 and 3 miles inland. An area of elevated ground, 28m high,

stands 8.5 miles NW of Torila Ots and is prominent from seaward. At Vaiste, 3.5 miles E of Someri poolsar, the land attains

a height of 35m.

10.31 Numerous villages stand along this stretch of coast and a

church situated at Tostamaa, 7 miles NNW of Torila Ots, is a

good landmark. 

Someri Poolsar (58°20'N., 23°46'E.) is low and covered

with grass and several bushes. Someri Light is shown from a

prominent tower, 20m high, standing on the NW extremity of

this headland. A prominent hill, 40m high, rises 8.7 miles NE

of the light.

Several shoals, with depths of 2 to 3m, extend up to about 7

miles SSE of Someri Light and are marked by buoys.

10.31 The coast extending between Someri Poolsar and Puvarootsi

(58°33'N., 23°37'E.), 13.5 miles NNW, is rocky with steep

bluffs. A ridge, which rises to a height of 35m, runs parallel to

the coast in this vicinity, between 1 and 3 miles inland. Woods

are located some distance inland and clumps of trees extend to

the coast, in places. Numerous villages are situated along this

stretch of coast and the shore is fronted by foul ground and several islets.

10.31 Larinimadalik (58°24'N., 23°38'E.), a reef with a least

depth of 3.4m, is one of the outermost dangers lying on the

edge of the coastal shoalbank. It lies 2.5 miles offshore, 4.5

miles NW of Someri Poolsar. Afanasjevimadalik, an isolated

shoal, lies about 2 miles W of Larinimadalik and has a least

depth of 7.6m.

10.31 A hill, 31m high, rises 1.5 miles inland, 5 miles N of Someri

Poolsar. It is surmounted by the prominent buildings of the estate of Vana-Vargla and a clump of trees. A prominent windmill stands on a hill which rises near Paatsalu, a village, situ-ated 11 miles N of Someri Poolsar.

10.31 Selglaid, marked by a light at its W end, lies 7.4 miles NW

of Someri Poolsar. It is the largest of a group of islets lying on

the coastal bank. The ruins of an old stone mill stand on the

mainland about 2 miles E of this islet and are conspicuous from

seaward. 

Virtsu Light (58°34'N., 23°30'E.) is shown from a prom-inent square tower, 18m high, standing on the SW side of a peninsula, 15 miles NW of Someri Light. This light marks the SE

entrance point of Vainameri.

The Gulf of Riga—Northwest Side

10.32 The NW side of the Gulf of Riga is formed by the E

side of Sorve Poolsar and the SE side of Saaremma.

10.32 Kaavi Nina Light (57°59'N., 22°12'E.) is shown from a

prominent square tower, 15m high, standing on a low point, 6.3

miles NE of Sorve Saar Light (see paragraph 10.12). A rocky

shoal patch, with a least depth of 2.8m, lies about 1.5 miles

SSE of the light and is marked by a buoy.

10.32 Montu, a small harbor, is located 3 miles SW of Kaavi Nina

Light. It is formed by a mole, about 250m long, which extends

E and NE from the coast. Small vessels can berth alongside the

seaward side of the mole, which has a depth of 4.6m at the outer end. The approach channel leading to the harbor has a depth

of 3.8m. Several conspicuous white buildings stand near the

village.

10.33 Ansekula (58°06'N., 22°14'E.), located 6 miles NE of

Kaavi Nina Light, is the N end of a prominent row of densely

Someri Light

Virtsu Light
Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 249

Pub. 194

wooded hills which extend from the vicinity of Montu.

Ansekula Light is shown from a prominent tower, 22m high,

standing 1 mile NNW of Ansekula. A detached shoal, with

rocks awash, lies about 4 miles SE of the light and is marked

by a buoy.

10.33 Suur Katel (58°10'N., 22°23'E.), a bay, is entered between

Ansekula and Vahase Saar, 7 miles ENE. It is used as a loading

place by vessels whose drafts do not permit them to enter the

harbors at Kuressaare or Roomassaar. The approaches to the

bay are fronted by several islets and dangers which may best be

seen on the chart. Local knowledge is required. Anchorage is

available in the center of the bay, in depths of 7 to 13m, sand

and mud. 

10.33 It is reported that Suur Katel is usually closed by ice from the

end of December to the beginning of March. 

10.33 Kuressaare (58°15'N., 22°29'E.), a shallow harbor, lies at the

NE head of the bay and is used by small fishing boats. 

10.33 Kingissepp, the principal town of the area, is situated at the

head of the bay. The conspicuous ruins of a medieval castle are

situated in the middle of this town and five prominet radio

masts stand in the nearby vicinity.

10.34 Roomassaar (58°13'N., 22°31'E.), a small harbor, lies

at the S end of a peninsula in the NE corner of the bay. The approach channel, 85m wide, leads NE and has a depth of 5.8m.

It is marked by a lighted range. The harbor has three main

quays, 103 to 126m long, with depths of 4.3 to 6.3m alongside.

There are facilities for oil, general cargo, and ro-ro ferry vessels, pleasure craft, and fishing boats. Vessels up to 120m in

length, 15m beam, and 5.5m draft can be accommodated.

Nasva, a small harbor with a pier, is situated 3.5 miles W of

Roomassaar. The buoyed entrance channel leads NNE for 1.5

miles. It is 45m wide and has a least depth of 3.4m.

Abruka Saar (58°10'N., 22°31'E.) is low, sandy, and surrounded by rocks. Its highest and central part is covered with tall

trees. This island is surrounded by foul ground and shallow

shoals, islets, and rocks extend up to about 4.5 miles SE and E of

it. Abruka Rear Range Light is shown from a prominent tower,

36m high, standing in the NE part of the island. 

Veiserahu, an extensive rocky ridge, has a least depth of 1.8m

and lies about 7.5 miles SSW of the S extremity of Abruka

Saaar. This shoal is marked on its S side by a lighted buoy and on

its N side by a buoy.

10.35 Vetela Nina (58°13'N., 22°43'E.) is the S extremity of

Vatta Poolsaar, a mainland peninsula located 8 miles NE of

Abruka Saar. The coast extending between this point and

Kubassaar, 23 miles NE, is mostly low and only attains a

height of 12m. A few villages and several woods lie along the

shore. Prominent churches are situated at Kahtla, 14 miles NE

of Vetela Nina, and Poide, 9.5 miles NW of Kubassaar. A conspicuous church, with two domes, stands at Uuemoisa, 2.3

miles E of Poide.

Kaavi Nina Light

Ansekula Light

Roomassaar Harbor

Abruka Light
250 Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 

Pub. 194

Allirahu (Vetala) (58°10'N., 22°48'E.) is a low and barren islet lying 4 miles SE miles of Vetela Nina. A light is shown

from a column, 8m high, standing on the NW part of this islet. 

10.35 Sutu Laht (Vetella Laht) (58°16'N., 22°45'E.) is entered

between Vetela Nina and Saaretukk, a low and rocky point, 4.5

miles NE. The shores of the bay are fairly steep and sandy.

Sheltered anchorage, except with winds from between E and

SE, may be obtained, in depths of 5 to 11m, sand, between 1

and 2.5 miles from the head of this bay.

10.35 Saaretukk Light (58°16'N., 22°48'E.) is shown from a

prominent square tower, 15m high, standing on Saaretukk. A

shoal patch, with a least depth of 5m, lies about l.5 miles S of

the light.

10.36 Koiguste Allirahu (58°18'N., 22°59'E.), a small islet,

lies 1.5 miles offshore, 5.2 miles NE of Saaretukk Light. This

islet should not be confused with the islet of the same name located 10 miles SW. It is rocky and covered with grass. A light

is shown from a prominent framework tower, 16m high, standing on this islet.

Kubassaar (58°27'N., 23°19'E.) is a wooded peninsula. Its

shoreline is rugged and covered by reeds in places. The E side

is steep, in places, and only 2 to 3m high. Kubassaar Light is

shown from a prominent tower, 17m high, standing on the S

part of this peninsula.

From a distance of about 10 miles, the S extremity of this

peninsula, which is surmounted by tall trees, appears as an island. An above-water reef lies about 1 mile SSE of Kubas-saar.

This reef is located on a rocky shoal ridge which extends up to

about 3 miles S and 2 miles SE of the light. 

Udriku Laid (Udriklaid) (58°26'N., 23°17'E.), a low and

grassy island, lies close W of the S end of Kubassaar and is

surmounted by a few buildings.

Muhu (58°36'N., 23°16'E.) lies centered 10 miles N of Kubassaar. This large island is 24m high and partly wooded. Its N

side is cliffy. A causeway connects the SW side of the island to

the mainland.

Viirelaid Light (58°33'N., 23°27'E.) is shown from a prominent tower, 11m high, standing on the E side of an islet of the

same name lying close off the SE end of Muhu. 

10.37 Vainameri (58°50'N., 23°15'E.) is the sound which

connects the Gulf of Riga to the Gulf of Finland via Viirekulk

and Harikurk. Viirekulk (Suur Vain) is the strait located in the

S part of the sound lying between Viirelaid and Virtsu Light.

Harikurk is the strait located in the N part of the sound lying

between the E side of Hiiumaa and the W side of the island of

Vormsi (59°00'N., 23°14'E.).

This sound is bounded, on the N side, by a line extending between Tahkuna Nina Light (59°05'N., 22°36'E.) and OsmusAllirahu Light

Saaretukk Light

Koiguste Allirahu Light

Kubassaar Light
Sector 10. Lithuania and Latvia—Mys Taran to Ovisi and the Gulf of Riga and Approaches 251

Pub. 194

saar Island (59°18'N., 23°22'E.) and, on the S side, by a line extending E from Kubassaar Light (58°26'N., 23°19'E.). The N

end of the sound is encumbered with numerous dangers which

may best be seen on the chart.

10.37 Voosikurk, a narrow channel, leads to Haapsulu. It passes between the E side of Vormsi and the W side of Noarootsi, a peninsula located on the mainland. This channel should not be

used without local knowledge. An overead cable, with an unknown vertical clearance, is reported to span this channel.

10.38 Poosaspea Light (59°14'N., 23°31'E.) is shown from

a prominent framework tower, 16m high, standing on a densely

wooded promontory, 15 miles NNE of Vormsi Island. Several

conspicuous windmills are situated on a ridge at the E side of

this promomtory.

Osmussaar Island (59°18'N., 23°22'E.), marked by a light,

lies 6 miles NW of Poosaspea Light.

10.38 Depths—Limitations.—Although there are depths of 9 to

14m in Harikurk and 11 to 20m in Viirekulk, the passage from

the Gulf of Finland to the Gulf of Riga, and vice versa, is controlled by the depths in the channel leading through the central

part of the sound. This latter part of the channel is narrow and

has a least depth of only 4.7m.

10.38 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory within the sound. Pilots

can be contacted by VHF and generally board vessels, approaching from the N, at Lehima (59°08'N., 22°57'E.) and, approaching from the S, at Virtsu (58°31'N., 23°30'E.). Pilotage

must be requested 48 hours and 24 hours in advance through

the radio station at Tallinn. It is reported that pilots will also

board vessels about 1.2 miles NW of Poosaspea Light, within

the inshore passage lying SE of Osmussaar Island. 

Note.—For a description of Osmussaar Island and the waters

lying N and E of it, see Pub. 195, Sailing Directions (Enroute)

Gulf of Finland and Gulf of Bothnia.

Viirelaid Light Poosaspea Light
Pub. 194

Glossaries 253

Glossaries

Danish

DANISH English

A

aa ...............................................................................rivulet

anlaegsbro.......................................................................pier

B

baek ............................................................................brook

baelte ............................................................................ band

bake ...........................................................................beacon

bakke ..............................................................................hill

banke ............................................................................ bank

bjerg....................................................................... mountain

borg .....................................................castle, fortified place

bredning ............................................ wide place in channel

bro .................................................................................pier

brygge ............................................................... quay, wharf

bugt ...................................................................... bay, bight

bundgarn................................................................. seine net

by.................................................................................. town

D

dal, dale ...........................................................valley, gorge

drag ..........................................................................isthmus

dyb.................................................................................deep

dybde .......................................................................... depth

F

farvand, farvandet..................................................... fairway

fjord .............................................................................. fjord

flak ..................................................................................flat

flogetonde.........................................................whistle buoy

fyr .................................................................................light

G

gab .............................................................................mouth

gammel ........................................................................... old

gittermast ............................................... framework beacon

grat................................................................................. gray

gron ............................................................................ green

grund .................................................................... shoal area

H

hage ......................................................................shoal, spit

hale ............................................................... spit, peninsula

havn ...........................................................................harbor

hoj .........................................................................hill, point

holm.............................................................................island

hoved ............................................................point, headland

huk................................................................................point

hus ..............................................................................house

hvidt ............................................................................ white

I

inder..............................................................................inner

K

kalv..................................................................detached islet

kanal ............................................................................ canal

klev ................................................................................cliff

klint ...................................................................... cliff, bluff

klit .......................................................................sand dunes

knold ..................................................................knoll, shoal

knude ........................................................................... point

kysten .......................................................................... coast

L

lang................................................................................ long

lille ............................................................................... little

lob ............................................................................ channel

lods ............................................................................... pilot

lyd ..............................................................................sound

lys ................................................................................. light

M

middlegrund .................................................. middle ground

minde ......................................................................... mouth

molle ............................................................................. mill

munding ...................................................................... outlet

N

naeb ............................................................................. point

naes ....................................................point, cape, peninsula

nakke ........................................................ point, cape, bluff

nor ..........................................................shallow inlet, basin

nord .............................................................................. north

ny ...................................................................................new

O

o ..................................................................................island

odde ...................................................point, peninsula, cape

ore .................................................... shoal, point, peninsula

ostersoen ...............................................................the baltic

ostre ............................................................................... east

P

plade ............................................................................ shoal

pulle ............................................................................. shoal

pynt ............................................................point, peninsula

R

red ........................................................................ roadstead

redningstatien ........................................... lifesaving station

rende......................................................................... channel

rev ...................................................................reef, sand flat

revle .....................................................................reef, shoal

rod ................................................................................... red

ron ......................................................................rocky ledge

DANISH English
Pub. 194 

254 Glossaries

S

sand ...................................................shoal, sand flat, beach

sandhage ......................................................................shoal

skance ............................................................................ fort

skov, skoven ................................................................ forest

slot .............................................................................. castle

sluse............................................................................... Iock

snaevrinjen .........................................................the narrows

so, soen .............................................................lake, lagoon

sojord ......................................................................sand flat

spids .............................................................................point

steil ...............................................................................steep

store ...................................................................... big, great

DANISH English

strom ......................................................................... current

sund ............................................................................sound

syd................................................................................south

T

tage ................................................................................. fog

tange ............................................................. tongue of land

tarn ............................................................................. tower

V

vest ............................................................................... west

vig ...................................................... bay, inlet, bight, cove

vrag .............................................................................wreck

yder .............................................................................. outer

DANISH English
Pub. 194

Glossaries 255

German

GERMAN English

A

abgersuchtes gebiet .............................................swept area

alt-; e, er, es .....................................................................old

ankerplats ............................................................ anchorage

anlege stelle .................................................... landing place

ansicht ..........................................................................view

ansteuerungstonne............................................landfall buoy

au.....................................................................brook, stream

auffllig...............................................................conspicuous

aussen ............................................................. outer, outside

B

baggerrinne ................................................ dredged channel

bai ..........................................................................bay, cove

bake, baken ............................................... beacon, beacons

balje..................................................channel between sands

bank, untiefe.......................................... bank (shallow area)

berg ........................................................................mountain

betonnung ............................................................... buoyage

binnen .......................................................................... inner

blau ................................................................................blue

bodden ............................................................................bay

boot ...............................................................................boat

brecher, brandung .................................................. breakers

brucke ........................................................................ bridge

bucht ...............................................................................bay

busch ............................................................................. bush

D

dalben ...................................................................... dolphin

damn........................................................ dam, embankment

deich ..............................................................................dike

deviationsbake .......................................... deviation beacon

dock, hafenbecken ............................dock (alongside berth)

dorf ............................................................................village

drahtschleppgerat.................................................. wire drag

drehbrucke ........................................................ drawbridge

dune...............................................................................dune

durchfart.....................................................passage, channel

E

ebbe..........................................................................ebb tide

eck, ecke ..........................................................angle, corner

ehe.....................................................channel for small craft

einfahrt ................................................................... entrance

eiland........................................................................... island

eisenbahn ..................................................................railway

eisfeld....................................................................... icefield

eissignale..............................................................ice signals

F

faden ......................................................................... fathom

fahre .............................................................................ferry

fahrwasser ................................................navigable channel

felsgrund .........................................................rock (bottom)

festmachetonne ............................................. mooring buoy

feuerschiff ..............................................................lightship

fischerei ....................................................................fishery

fischstaken ............................................................ fish weirs

fluss............................................................................... river

forde...................................................................... inlet, gulf

flut......................................................................... flood tide

flutbecken ............................................................ tidal basin

funkfeuer .......................................................... radiobeacon

funkmast .............................................................. radiomast

G

gat ....................................................channel between banks

gebiet ............................................................................ area

gefahrsignale .................................................danger signals

gegenstrom.....................................................countercurrent

gelb ........................................................................... yellow

geloscht............................................................ extinguished

gezeiten ..........................................................................tide

gezeitenstromwirbel .............................................. tide race

glockentonne ......................................................... bell buoy

golf ................................................................................ gulf

grenze .......................................................... boundary, limit

gross- ;e, er, es ...................................................great, large

grun .............................................................................green

grund ........................................................................... shoal

H

hafen .......................................................................... harbor

hafengrenze........................................................harbor limit

hafensignale ...................................................... port signals

hafenzeit ............................... vulgar establishment (of port)

haff .................................................lagoon, fresh water lake

haken ............................................................................point

halbinsel ................................................................peninsula

hauptfahrwasser ......................................main ship channel

heultonne ........................................................ whistle buoy

hochwasser ..........................................................high water

hoft................................................................ foreland, point

hohe ......................................................... height, hill, ridge

holz ................................................................. woods, forest

hoved .................................................................... headland

hugel ................................................................................hill

huk ............................................................cape, point, head

I

insel............................................................................. island

K

kai ......................................................................... pier, quay

kanal ............................................................................ canal

kap ................................................................................cape

kapelle ....................................................................... chapel

kartennull...........................................................chart datum

GERMAN English
Pub. 194 

256 Glossaries

kirche ........................................................................church

klein .............................................................................small

klippe ....................................................................cliff, rock

knoten.............................................................................knot

kreisfunkfeuer .................................................. radiobeacon

kuppel.........................................................................cupola

kurs............................................................................. course

kustenwache ...................................................... coast guard

L

ladeplatz...................................................................... wharf

landenge................................................................... isthmus

landungsbrucke .................................................... pier, jetty

leitfeuer .............................................................. range light

leitmarken, leitbaken.........................................range marks

leuchttonne .......................................................... light buoy

leuchtturm ............................................................lighthouse

lot .................................................................. sounding lead

lotse .............................................................................. pilot

lotsenstelle .........................................................pilot station

M

marsch ........................................................................marsh

meer .................................................................................sea

meerenge .................................................................narrows

meeresarm........................................................ estuary, inlet

mittel .........................................................................middle

mittelwasser ................................................. mean tide level

muhle ............................................................................ mill

munde, Mndung...................................... mouth of river, etc

N

nachrichten fur seefahrer ........................notice to mariners

nebel................................................................................ fog

neue, neu, neues............................................................. new

nieder ...........................................................................lower

niedrigwasser ........................................................low water

niss ..................................................................... cape, point

nord .............................................................................. north

O

ober ..............................................................................upper

ort ................................................................................ place

ortschaft ...........................................................town, village

ost .................................................................................. east

ostsee .....................................................................the baltic

P

pegel....................................................................... tide gage

peilung .....................................................................bearing

pier ................................................................................ pier

platz ............................................................................. place

poller ......................................................................... bollard

punkt ............................................................ position, point

R

radarstelle..............................................coastal radar station

rathaus....................................................................town hall

reede ..................................................................... roadstead

GERMAN English

rettungsstelle..............................................lifesaving station

richtfeuer..............................................................range light

riff ..................................................................................reef

riffgrund ......................................................... rocky ground

rinne ............................................................ narrow channel

rot.....................................................................................red

S

sand ...............................................................................sand

sehiffahrtshindernis ......................obstruction to navigation

schiffahrtswege ..............................................shipping lanes

schleuse ..............................................................loek, sluice

schleusensignale ................................................. lock signal

schlick ...........................................................................mud

schloss .........................................................................castle

schornstein .........................................chimney, smokestack

schwimmdock............................................ floating drydock

schwingbrcke................................................... swing bridge

schwartz....................................................................... black

see .......................................................................... sea, lake

seedeich ....................................................................seawall

seegat .........................................................entrance channel

seegras ........................................................................... kelp

seekarte .........................................................................chart

seemeile ........................................................... nautical mile

seetang ............................................................kelp, seaweed

spiegel..................................................................... reflector

spitze .................................................... summit, peak, point

stadt....................................................................... city, town

stem ............................................................................. stone

strand ................................................................shore, beach

strom ............................................................current, stream

stromkabbelung ...................................... overfalls, tide rips

stromriehtung........................................ set (of tidal current)

strudel ..........................................................eddy, whirlpool

sturmsignale ....................................................storm signals

sud ............................................................................... south

sumpf .................................................................swamp, bog

sund................................................................... sound, strait

T

tidehafen .............................................................. tidal basin

tidenhub ........................................................range (of tide)

tief ..................................................................deep, channel

tiefgang .......................................................draft (of vessel)

tonne .............................................................................buoy

toppzeichen..............................................................topmark

trockendock ............................................................drydock

turm .............................................................................tower

U

ufer....................................... river bank, beach, coast, shore

unreiner grund ................................................... foul ground

unter .................................................................under, lower

unterstromung ................................................. undercurrent

untersuchungsankerplatz .................examination anchorage

unterwasserkabel .......................................submarine cable

untiefe .................................................................bank, shoal

GERMAN English
Pub. 194

Glossaries 257 

V

verboten .............................................................. prohibited

vermuren ................................................................. mooring

versandet ...................................................silted up, shoaled

W

wald...................................................................wood, forest

wasserstande ....................................................... water level

wasserstelle ................................................... watering place

weiss.............................................................................white

GERMAN English

wellenbrecher ..................................................... breakwater

west................................................................................west

wiek ..............................................................bay, inlet, cove

windmotor........................................................... windwheel

windmuhle ............................................................. windmill

wrack .......................................................................... wreck

Z

zeitweilig ............................................................. temporary

zerstort .................................................................. destroyed

zollgrenze ................................................customs boundary

zugbrucke..............................................................lift bridge

GERMAN English
Pub. 194

258 Glossaries

Polish

POLISH English

A

akwen zamkniety ..........................................prohibited area

B

basen ........................................................................... basin

bial bialy ......................................................................white

bloto, szlam, mut............................................................mud

brazowy...................................................................... brown

brzeg .............................................................................bank

brzeg morski ...........................................................seashore

buczek ....................................................................... whistle

C

cypel............................................................................. point

czarny ..........................................................................black

czerwony, czerwone.........................................................red

D

dalby ........................................................................ dolphin

dolny ...........................................................................lower

duzy...............................................................................large

dworzec ..................................................................terminus

G

glebia............................................................................. deep

glebokosci ................................................................. depths

glina ...............................................................................clay

gora ........................................................................mountain

gorny ............................................................................upper

gruby ......................................................................... coarse

grupowe ..................................................................... group

I

il ....................................................................................mud

izobaty...........................................................depth contours

J

jasny .............................................................................. light

jezioro ............................................................................lake

K

kabel podwodny..........................................submarine cable

kamien ................................................................ stone, rock

kanal ........................................................................ channel

komin ............................................................chimney, stack

kotwiczenie I rybolowstwoqzbronione

.........................................anchorage and fishing prohibited

L

las mieszany..........................................................woodland

latarniowce ....................................................... light vessels

latarina morska ....................................................lighthouse

lawica ................................................................. bank, shoal

M

maly ............................................................................ small

ma szt sygnalowy................................................signal mast

miejsce zatopienia amunicji .dumping ground (explosives)

miejscowsci ..............................................................locality

miekki ............................................................................soft

mielizna ...................................................................shallow

mila morska .................................................... nautical mile

molo .....................................................................mole, pier

most ...........................................................................bridge

N

nabrzeze............................................................. quay, wharf

niebieski.........................................................................blue

nord.............................................................................. north

nowa, nowe, nowy ......................................................... new

O

ost ..................................................................................east

ostrow .................................................................river island

P

piasek, mul ..........................................................sand, ooze

piaski ...........................................................................sands

plawy buczace ................................................whistle buoys

plawy dzwonowe ................................................ bell buoys

plawy swietne ..................................................... light buoys

plaza ............................................................................beach

polnoc .......................................................................... north

poludnie ....................................................................... south

polwysep................................................................peninsula

port............................................................................. harbor

przyboj ................................................................... breakers

przyladek ......................................................................cape

pstry ......................................................................... spotted

punkt triangulacyjny ............................... triangulation point

R

radiolatarnia kierunkowa ............... radiobeacon, directional

rafa .................................................................................reef

rafy I dna o nieznanej rozciaglosci

....................................reefs and botoms of unknown extent

reda ............................................................. anchorage, road

reflektor radarowy ........................................ radar reflector

rurociag podwodny .....................................submarine pipes

rybachi ......................................................................fishing

S

skala...............................................................................rock

stacja ratunkowa ........................................lifesaving station

stacja sygnalowa .............................................signal station

stawa ..........................................................................beacon

sud................................................................................ south

swiatlo ostrzegawcze ...................................... warning light

POLISH English
Pub. 194

Glossaries 259 

sygnal burzowy ................................................storm signal

sygnal mglowy......................................................fog signal

szary...............................................................................gray

T

topograficzny punkt ........................................... fixed point

tyki ............................................................................... poles

U

ujscie ........................................................................ estuary

W

wielk ...................................................................large, great

wies ...........................................................................village

wieza ............................................................................tower

wieza koscielna ...................................spire, church steeple

wodorosty....................................................... kelp, seaweed

POLISH English

wrak ........................................................................... wreck

wschod ...........................................................................east

wysepka ........................................................................ islet

wyspa.......................................................................... island

wysypisko .................................................. dumping ground

wyzny...........................................................................upper

Z

zachod ...........................................................................west

zalew ............................................................................. gulf

zatoka .....................................................................gulf, bay

zielony ........................................................................green

znaki nawigacyjne ............................. navigational markers

zolty ........................................................................... yellow

zwir .............................................................. gravel, shingle

POLISH English
Pub. 194

260 Glossaries

R—Russian. E—Estonian. La—Latvian. Li—Lithuanian

R—Russian. E—Estonian.

La—Latvian. Li—Lithuanian English

A

aar .............................................................................E coast

abajas .......................................................................... E bay

akmens ....................................................................La stone

alev,-id ...........................................E market town, borough

allvett .............................................................E above water

alumine............................................................E lower, front

ankruplats, ankrupagaid....................................E anchorage

asula, asundus ..................................................E settlement

austrumi ................................................................... La east

B

baak........................................................................E beacon

bakan................................................................ R large buoy

baklysh...................................................R rock above water

balts.........................................................................La white

banka...............................................................R shoal, bank

bar ................................................................................R bar

bashnya ....................................................................R tower

basseyn ....................................................R basin, wet dock

bel-yy-aya, -oye ....................................................... R white

bereg ............................................R shore, river bank, coast

beregov-oy, -aya, -oye............................................R coastal

berezhn-y, -aya, -oye ....................... R inner, close offshore

bochka.....................................R mooring buoy, barrel buoy

bol'sh-ov, -aya, -oye ....................................... R great, large

bryuage ................................................R pier, landing stage

buek......................................................R small boat or float

bugor .............................................................. R hill, mound

bukhta .....................................R bight, inlet, bay, roadstead

bukhtochka.........................................................R cove, bay

burun .....................................................................R breaker

buy ............................................................................ R buoy

C

chern-yy, -aya, -oye ................................................ R black

ciems .......................................................La village, hamlet

D

damba .......................................................... R seawall, dike

del'ta ......................................................................... R delta

derevnya ................................................................ R village

derevo .........................................................................R tree

dienvidi ..................................................................La south

dlinn-yy, -aya, -oye ....................................................R long

dok ............................................................................ R dock

dolgota ...............................................................R longitude

dolina ...................................................................... R valley

dom .........................................................................R house

doroga .......................................................................R road

dyun-y,a..........................................................R dunes, dune

E

edela.................................................................. E southwest

elling .....................................................................R slipway

ezers.......................................................................... La lake

F

faarvater ......................................................E channel, strait

farvater....................................................R channel, fairway

G

gavan ....................................................R harbor, basin, bay

glubok-iy, -aya, -oye .................................................R deep

golets, Gol'tsy ..........................................R mountain, peak

golomyann-yy, -aya, -oye .................................. R open sea

golova ........................................................ R head (of pier)

gora .............................................................R mountain, hill

gorlo ......................................................................... R strait

gorod..................................................................R city, town

gorodok............................................................R small town

granitsa .............................................................. R boundary

greben' ......................................................................R ridge

grund ........................................................................E shoal

gryada, gryady ...................... R mountains, hill, bank, ridge

H

haabjas ........................................................................E boat

hall ............................................................................ E gray

hoone ...................................................................... E house

I

ida ............................................................................... E east

il ................................................................................ R mud

ilist-yy, -aya, -oye .................................................. R muddy

J

jaa .................................................................................E ice

jaam ......................................................... E railroad station

jame ..............................................................E thick, heavy

jarsk ......................................................................... E steep

jarv,-ed .......................................................................E lake

joesuu..............................................................E river mouth

joed .......................................................................... E rivers

jogl ............................................................................ E river

joom ......................................................... E reef, sand bank

K

kaevand .................................................................E channel

kagu ...................................................................E southeast

kai .............................................................................E quay

kalasadam ..................................................E fishing harbor

kalda ......................................................................... E coast

kalju .......................................................................... E rock

kallas.........................................................................E shore

kallutus ....................................................................... E tide

kalnas..........................................................................Li hill

kamen' .............................................................R rock, stone

R—Russian. E—Estonian.

La—Latvian. Li—Lithuanian English
Pub. 194

Glossaries 261 

kamennyy....................................... R masonry, stony, rocky

kamni .......................................................... R rocks, stones

kamyennaya banka ........................................ R rocky shoal

kamyennaya gryada ................................................... R spit

kanal..........................................................................E canal

kanal........................................................... R channel, canal

kants............................................................................ E fort

kapp ...........................................................................E cape

kari .................................................... E reef, shallow, shoal

karestik......................................................R rapids, cataract

karestiku............................................................ E waterfalls

kare.................................................................. E grassy islet

kari ...............................................................E reef, shallow

kekur ................................................................R pillar, rock

kesk ........................................................... E middle, central

keskmine .................................................. E middle, central

kevad ....................................................................... E spring

kholm ....................................................................R hillock

khram .................................................................... R temple

khrebet ........................ R ridge, mountain range, mountains

kindlus ........................................................................ E fort

kink ..............................................................................E hill

kirde ....................................................................E northeast

kirik, kirikud ......................................................... E church

kitsus .................................................................... E narrows

kivi ..................................................................E stone, rock

koleno................................R reach (of a channel, etc), bend

kollane ................................................................... E yellow

korga ............................................................. R rocky shoal

korge .......................................................................... E high

korotk -iy, -aya, -oye.................................................R short

korsten ................................................................ E chimney

kosa ............................................................................. R spit

koshka .......................................................... R drying shoal

kosk......................................................... E waterfall, rapids

kovsh..........................................................................R cove

kran .......................................................................... R crane

krasn-yy, -aya, -oye .....................................................R red

kray ................................................... R major admin region

krest ..........................................................................R cross

krutoy, aya-oye, -ye...................................................R steep

kruus........................................................................ E gravel

kryazh..............................................R ridge, hill, mountains

kuiv ..............................................................................E dry

kungas ................................................R flat-bottomed craft

kurk ................................................. E channel, strait, sound

kula, -d ................................................................... E village

kulm .......................................................................... E cold

kultuk .......................................................................... R bay

kungas .........................................................................E hill

L

laas, laane...................................................................E west

laev.......................................................................... E vessel

laevasild ......................................................................E pier

laguna .................................................................... R lagoon

laht ..............................................E bay, inlet, sound, harbor

R—Russian. E—Estonian.

La—Latvian. Li—Lithuanian English

laid ...........................................................................E island

lainetemurd ..........................................................E breakers

lakhti ...............................................R bay, cove, bight, gulf

led ................................................................................R ice

lednik ..................................................................... R glacier

lesnoy........................................................ R wooded, forest

liiva kunkad ....................................................E sand dunes

liivakivi .............................................................E sandstone

liman ........................................R estuary, lake, lagoon, bay

linn.....................................................................E town, city

lodu .................................................................E bog, marsh

loode, loe ..........................................................E northwest

loots ........................................................................... E pilot

loss........................................................................... E castle

lotsman .....................................................................R pilot

lotsmanskaya stantsiya .................................. R pilot station

louna ........................................................................E south

lounaida ..............................................................E southeast

lounalaane......................................................... E southwest

luda, Ludka ............................................R small rocky islet

lumi .......................................................................... E snow

Iyuna ........................................................................E south

M

maa ........................................................ E shoal, islet, land

maabumis sild .............................................. E landing stage

maamark ............................................................ E landmark

machta........................................................................R mast

madal .................................................. E low, shallow, shoal

madal vesi..........................................................E low water

madalik, ud ...................................................E shoal, shoals

malen'k -iy, -aya, -oye .................................... R little, small

mal -yye, -aya, -oye ........................................ R little, small

marios ................................................................... Li lagoon

materik ............................................. R mainland, continent

maed .......................................................E mountains, hills

magi ............................................................E mountain, hill

markpuu .................................................E conspicuous tree

mayak ...............................................................R lighthouse

mel' ..........................................................................R shoal

melk -iy, -aya, -oye.....................................R shallow, shoal

melkovodn -y, -aya, -oye .....................................R shallow

merekael .......................................................E sound, strait

merelaht .............................................................. E gulf, bay

meremark ............................................................ E seamark

mererand ..............................................................E seashore

mererohi ..............................................................E seaweed

merevool ................................................................E stream

meresopp...................................................................E creek

meri.........................................................E sea, bight, ocean

mets............................................................... E wood, forest

milya ......................................................................... R mile

mol................................................................... R mole, jetty

more..................................................................R sea, sound

morskaya kapusta ...................................................... R kelp

most .......................................................................R bridge

muda ......................................................................... E mud

R—Russian. E—Estonian.

La—Latvian. Li—Lithuanian English
Pub. 194 

262 Glossaries

munakivid ..............................................E boulders, shingle

must ..........................................................................E black

muul .......................................................................... E mole

myel'..........................................................................R shoal

myelk -y, -aya, -oye .............................................R shallow

mys..................................................R cape, headland, point

N

nadvodn -y, -aya, -oye ...................................R above water

navolok...................................................... R cape, headland

neem ................................................................E cape, point

nina ..................................................................E cape, point

nizhn -iy, -yaya, -eye ...............................................R lower

nizk-iy, -aya, -oye ...................................................... R low

nord ...........................................................................E north

nos .......................................... R cape, headland, spit, point

nov -yy, -aya, -oye .................................................... R new

nukk .................................................................E cape, point

O

oblast' .......................................... R administrative division

obryv ........................................................R bluff, precipice

ogon' ............................................................ R light (or fire)

oja ...........................................................................E stream

okean........................................................................R ocean

okrug .........................................R admin. division of region

opasnot' .................................................................. R danger

org ...........................................................................E valley

ost ...............................................................................E east

osta ...............................................................La port, harbor

ostrov ...................................................................... R island

ostrovok...................................................................... R islet

osyp' ....................................................................R landslide

otmel'................ R shoal, bank or reef extending from shore

ots.....................................................................E point, cape

ozero .......................................................................... R lake

P

paak .......................................................................E beacon

paare............................................................................. E bar

pakhta................................................... R bluff, stoney bank

paastejaam..............................................E lifesaving station

paat............................................................................. E boat

pank ................................................................. E banks, spit

parre ............................................................................ E bar

pealvett............................................................ E underwater

peastepaat .............................................................E lifeboat

peen ............................................................................ E fine

pehme.......................................................................... E soft

perebor, perekat .................................... R bar, ledge, shoals

peredn -iy, -yaya, -eyc .............................................. R front

peresheyek .......................................................... R isthmus

perv-yy, -aya, -oye ......................................................R first

peschan -yy, -aya, -oye ...........................................R sandy

pesok ..................................................................R sandbank

pik ............................................................ R peak, mountain

pikhya........................................................................E north

R—Russian. E—Estonian.

La—Latvian. Li—Lithuanian English

pilseta...............................................................La town, city

pirs .................................................................... R jetty, pier

plavnya.................................................................R mud flat

poberezh'ye, pomor'ye ............................. R coast, seashore

podvodn -yy, -aya, -oye ..................................R submerged

pohi ...........................................................................E north

pohja ......................................................... E north, northern

pohjaida .............................................................E northeast

pohjalaane .........................................................E northwest

poj ..............................................................................E buoy

poluostrov ..........................................................R peninsula

pomor'ye ...................................................................R coast

poolsaar ............................................................. E peninsula

port................................................................. R port, harbor

poselok .................................................................. R village

priberezh'ye .................................................... R coast shore

prikladnoy chas......................... R mean high water interval

priliv................................................................ R flood (tide)

primorskiy ..........................................................R maritime

pristan' ................................................. R pier, jetty, landing

pritok ...................................................................R tributary

prokhod .......................................................R passage, pass

proliv...........................................................R strait, channel

protok.................................... R canal, channel, watercourse

protoka ........................................... R channel in river delta

pruum...................................................................... E brown

put' .................................................................. R route, way

punane ......................................................................... E red

puu ............................................................... E woods, trees

pyatno ............................................................ R shoal patch

R

raba ............................................................ E swamp, marsh

radiomayak ....................................................R radiobeacon

ragas ........................................................................ Li point

rags ...............................................La point, cape, headland

rahu ................... E bank, reef, rocky islet, rock above water

rand .................................................................E shore, coast

ranna ..............................................................E coast, shore

rani........................................................................ E pebbles

ravnina ...................................................................... R plain

razvaliny ................................................................... R ruins

reid..................................................................... E roadstead

reka, rechka................................................... R river, stream

reyd ....................................................................R roadstead

rif ...............................................................................R reef

riff ............................................................................... E reef

roheline .....................................................................E green

rossyp'................................................................ R sandbank

rozhok ........................................................................R cape

rukav ........................................... R channel, stream, branch

rungas .........................................................................E cliff

S

saar, saar .................................................................E island

sadam, ad ........................................................E harbor, port

sala ....................................................................Li,La island

R—Russian. E—Estonian.

La—Latvian. Li—Lithuanian English
Pub. 194

Glossaries 263 

salm........................................................................... E strait

savi .............................................................................E clay

seleniye, selo .......................................R settlement, village

seljandiku......................................................E ridge of land

seredina .................................................................R middle

seriy ...........................................................................R gray

sever .........................................................................R north

severn -yy, -aya, -oye ......................................... R northern

shar............................................................................R strait

shchel' ............................................................. R gap, gorge

shest ................................................................. R pole, staff

shirota....................................................................R latitude

shkhery..................................................................R skerries

sihtpagid..................................................... E range beacons

silm ...........................................................E narrow channel

siniy............................................................................ R blue

sinnine ....................................................................... E blue

sissesoit ................................................................E entrance

skala ................................................................. R rock, cliff

sneg ...........................................................................R snow

somnitel'no.......................................................R is doubtful

soo, -d ............................................................. E marsh, bog

sopka ............................................R hill, volcano, mountain

spornyy ............................................................R conflicting

sredn -yy, -yaya, -eye.............................................R middle

stamik ............................................................. R shoal, rock

stanovishche ................................... R camp, fishing village

star -yy, -aya, -oye .......................................................R old

stolb ........................................R post, column, upright rock

strelka .............................................................R narrow spit

stvornyy znak ...............................................R range beacon

sukh -oy, -aya, -oye .....................................................R dry

suu ..........................................................................E mouth

suud...........................................................................E south

suur .................................................................... E large, big

sugavus .................................................................... E depth

suzem, Susha .......................................................R dry land

T

techeniye ...............................................................R current

temn -y, -aya, -oye ............................................R dark color

tine ................................................................... R ooze, mud

tolcheya ....................................................... R confused sea

toll ....................................................................... E customs

tolst -yy, -aya, -oye ...................................................R thick

tonk -iy, -aya, -oye ......................................................R thin

tonn .......................................................................... E buoy

torn .......................................................................... E tower

tousu .........................................................................E flood

tret iy, 'ya, 'ye ............................................................ R third

tserkov' .................................................................. R church

tuleboi ...............................................................E light buoy

tulelaev ........................................................... E light vessel

tuli ..............................................................................E light

tullepaak.....................................................E lighted beacon

U

udu ...............................................................................E fog

urbkivi ..................................................................E boulder

R—Russian. E—Estonian.

La—Latvian. Li—Lithuanian English

ust'ye ............................................... R river mouth, channel

utes ....................................................................R cliff, crag

uus...............................................................................E new

ulemine ............................................................ E upper, rear

V

valge..........................................................................E white

vana ............................................................................. E old

varemed .................................................................... E ruins

vaike................................................................ E small, little

vain .......................................................................... E strait

varav ....................................................................E entrance

veeneelus ...............................................................E tide-rip

vekha .................................................................R spar buoy

verkhn -iy, -yaya, -eye ............................................ R upper

vershina........................................................R summit, peak

vileboi ..........................................................E whistle-buoy

vkhod ..........................................................R entrance, inlet

vneshn -iy, -yaya, -eye..............................................R outer

vnutrenn -iy, -yaya, -eye ..........................................R inner

vodopad .............................................................. R waterfall

vodorsl'morskaya ................................................R seaweed

vodovorot ................................................R whirlpool, eddy

volnolom ........................................................ R breakwater

voolu ..................................................................... E current

vorota ................................. R entrance, strait, channel pass,

vostochn -yy, -aya, -oye ........................................R eastern

vostok..........................................................................R east

vozyshenie ......................................................... R high land

vrakk .......................................................................E wreck

vtor -oy, -aya, -oye................................................. R second

vulkan ..................................................................R volcano

vyerkhun -u, yaya, eye............................................. R upper

vyssh -iy, -aya, -eye ...............................................R higher

Y

yakornoye mesto ..............................................R anchorage

yar(y) ............................................. R cliff(s), steep bank(s)

yug ............................................................................R south

yuzhn -yy, -aya, -oye .......................................... R southern

Z

zadn -iy, -yaya, -eye ...................................................R rear

zaimka .................................................... R settlement, farm

zaliv ........................................................... R gulf, bay, inlet

zamok ..................................................................... R castle

zapad .........................................................................R west

zapadn -yy, -yaya, -oye.........................................R western

zastruga ................................R sandbar, sandspit, sandbank

zavod....................................................R factory, mill, plant

zavod' ...............................................................R cove, inlet

zelen -yy, -aya, -oye ................................................ R green

zemlya.............................................................R land, island

zhelt -y, -aya, -oye ................................................. R yellow

zank .............................................................R beacon, mark

zona ...........................................................................R zone

zvelav'ye .........................................................R cape, point

R—Russian. E—Estonian.

La—Latvian. Li—Lithuanian English
Pub. 194

264 Glossaries

Swedish

SWEDISH English

A

a, alv, alven .......................................................stream, river

ankarplats ............................................................ anchorage

ankarsattning ......................................roadstead, anchorage

arna, arne.......................................group of islands or rocks

as ................................................................................. ridge

B

back ............................................................................ brook

backe .............................................................................. hill

badan, bade, baden................................................ reef, rock

bak............................................................................. beacon

bank...............................................................................bank

barrskog ................................................... coniferous woods

bassang ........................................................................ basin

bat ..................................................................................boat

berg, berget .................................................... mountain, hill

bergspets ......................................................... peak, summit

block .......................................................................boulders

boj ................................................................................buoy

borg .....................................................................castle, fort

branning .............................................................rock awash

branningar ............................................................... breakers

brant .........................................................steep, precipitous

bredning ............................... wide place in river or channel

bro ............................................................................. bridge

brottsjo .................................................................... breakers

brygga ............................................................... jetty, wharf

bukt, bukten ..........................................................bight, bay

D

dal ...............................................................................valley

dammar ........................................................................weirs

djup, djupet ...................................................channel, sound

djupranna ........................................................deep channel

domkyrk .................................................................cathedral

dy ..................................................................................mud

dykdalb .................................................................... dolphin

E

ebb...................................................................................ebb

elv ................................................................................. river

ensamt .............................................................. isolated rock

enslingje ...............................................................range line

F

fabrik ........................................................................ factory

fabriksskorten..........................................................chimney

famn ......................................................................... fathom

farja ...............................................................................ferry

fartprovsbana ......................................... measured distance

farvatten, farled ........................................................ fairway

fastning .....................................................................fortress

fiskegarn.................................................................. fish trap

fiskehamn....................................................... fishing harbor

fiskelage ........................................................fishing village

fiskevatten .............................................................. fisheries

fjall ................................................................ mountain, hill

fjard, fiarden ....fiord, bay, inlet, lake, sound, channel, strait

fiord, fiorden ................................................................ fiord

flack, flak.............................................................. flat, shoal

flat....................................................................................flat

flod...................................................................... flood, river

flyg ................................................................... aeronautical

flytdocka ..........................................................floating dock

forbjuden ............................................................. prohibited

forbjudet omrade .........................................prohibited area

forhalningsboj ............................................... mooring buoy

forstord ................................................................ destroyed

fortojningsring .................................................mooring ring

fot .................................................................................. foot

framtradante....................................conspicuous, prominent

fyr ..................................................................................light

fyrhus................................................................... lighthouse

fyrskepp .................................................................lightship

fyrtorn .................................................................light tower

G

gammal, gamla ................................................................old

gap .................................................. opening, inlet, passage

gard ........................................................farm, country place

gatt .......................................................... opening, entrance

grans ............................................................ boundary, limit

gron..............................................................................green

grund, grundet ............................................................. shoal

grundklack ...........................................................shoal head

grus ............................................................................. gravel

gul ............................................................................. yellow

H

hak, hake.................................hook (of land), pointed shoal

hal ......................................................................hole, mouth

hals................................................................. neck (of land)

halvo, halvon..........................................................peninsula

hammar ...................................................conspicuous point

hamn ................................................ anchorage, bay, harbor

handelshamn ...........................................commercial harbor

hav ................................................................bay, sea, ocean

havsbukt ........................................................................ gulf

hog ......................................................................height, hill

hogslat ................................................................... tableland

hogvatten ............................................................high water

hojd ..................................................................................hill

holm, holme, holmen ................................................. island

hus................................................................................house

hufvud, huvud ..................................................... cape, head

I

inlopp...................................................................... entrance

innerst ..................................................................innermost

inre................................................................................inner

insegling ................................................................. entrance

insjo .............................................................................. lake

SWEDISH English
Pub. 194

Glossaries 265 

issignaler .............................................................ice signals

J

jarnvag ..................................................................... railroad

K

kabellangd......................................................... cable length

kaidam............................................................................ pier

kaj ......................................................................quay, wharf

kalv....................................small islet near a larger one, calf

kanal ............................................................................ canal

kap ................................................................................ cape

karantan ...............................................................quarantine

kase ........................................................................... beacon

klabbe .................................... bare rocky islet close inshore

klack........................................................... underwater head

klapper ..................................................................... pebbles

klint ....................................... summit of a steep hill or cliff

klippa ................................................cliff, rock above water

klippgrund.......................................................... rock, rocky

klockboj .................................................................bell buoy

kobb ......................................................................islet, rock

koping .................................................market town, district

krigshamn............................................................ war harbor

kulle ............................................................................... hill

kummel ........................................................landmark, cairn

kust .............................................................................. coast

kustvakt.............................................................. coast guard

kvarn ............................................................................. mill

kyrka .........................................................................church

L

landningstrappa .............................................. landing stage

landtunga ......................................spit of land, neck of land

lasarett......................................................................hospital

lastageplats ..................................................... loading place

lastbrygga ....................................................cargo jetty, pier

lag....................................................................................low

lage...................................................................station, berth

lagvatten ...............................................................low water

led ............................................................................ channel

lera .................................................................................clay

lill, lilla ......................................................................... little

livraddningsstation.................................... lifesaving station

ljudboj ............................................................. whistle buoy

ljudpipa .................................................................... whistle

lod ..................................................................................Iead

lopp .......................................................................... channel

lots ...............................................................................pilots

lotsstation...........................................................pilot station

lund ..............................................................................grove

lusthus ........................................................... summerhouse

lysboj.................................................................... light buoy

M

mad........................ marsh, stretch of water with flat bottom

magasin ........................................... storehouse, warehouse

marke .......................................................................... mark

medlerst, mellerst ......................................................central

mellan......................................................... between, middle

SWEDISH English

minerada omradet .............................................. mined area

missvisning ............................................................variation

mol ................................................................................ mill

molo .............................................................................mole

mudder...........................................................................mud

muddrad...................................................................dredged

mun ............................................................................mouth

mynning................................................river mouth, estuary

N

nabb ................................................................... nose, point

nas....................................................................... cape, point

nedre ............................................................................Iower

nodhamn ........................................................ refuge harbor

nord, norr ..................................................................... north

nordost .................................................................. northeast

nordvast, nordvest................................................. northwest

norra, nordlig .......................................................... northern

ny .................................................................................. new

O

oar, oarna ..................................................................islands

o, on ........................................................................... island

ogrupp ..............................................................island group

oklar .............................................................................. foul

oljecistern .................................................................oil tank

oljeledning .........................................................oil pipeline

oljehamn ............................................................... oil harbor

omrade ......................................................... district, ground

oresund ................................................................. the sound

orlogsvarv ......................................................naval shipyard

ost, oster .........................................................................east

ostersjon ................................................................ the baltic

ostra, ostlig ...............................................................eastern

overskoljte .......................................................... submerged

ovre ..............................................................................upper

P

pir ...................................................................................pier

platt ..................................................................................flat

plattboj................................................................... can buoy

prick ..................................................................... spar buoy

R

raddningsstation ........................................lifesaving station

radiofyr ............................................................. radiobeacon

ranna ....................................................................... channel

redd ........................................................................roadstead

rev ................................................................ reef, spit, bank

rod....................................................................................red

ros, rose ...............................................cairn, heap of stones

rott ...................................................................................red

S

samhalle............................................................... settlement

sand................................................................................sand

sjo ....................................................................................sea

sjogras......................................................................seagrass

sjomarke ..................................................................seamark

sjukhus..................................................................... hospital

skal...............................................................................shells

SWEDISH English
Pub. 194 

266 Glossaries

skans..................................................................fort, redoubt

skar......................................... above-water rock, rocky islet

skargard ............................ fringing rocks, islets, and shoals

skog ........................................................................... woods

skogvevaxt ..............................................................wooded

skorsten ..................................................................chimney

skrent ................................................................. slope, bluff

skyddsomrade ..............................................protection area

slatprick ....................................................... plain spar buoy

slick............................................................................... ooze

slip ................................................................marine railway

slott ..............................................................................castle

sluss................................................................................lock

sma...............................................................................small

soder, sodre, syd...........................................................south

sodra, sydlig............................................................southern

spets ............................................................................ point

spetsboj ............................................................ conical buoy

spir ...............................................................................spire

spirboj ................................................................... spar buoy

stad ...............................................................................town

stang...................................................................... pole, spar

stangda farvatter..............................................closed waters

stangmark ......................................................... pole beacon

sten .............................................................................. stone

stor, stora ........................................................ great or large

strand........................................................................... beach

strom ........................................................................ current

sund, sundet ................................................................ sound

svart..............................................................................black

syd, sodre ....................................................................south

sydost .....................................................................southeast

sydvast, sydvest.....................................................southwest

T

tavla .............................................................board, daymark

SWEDISH English

tidssignal ............................................................ time signal

tidvatten ..........................................................................tide

tidvattensdocka ...................................................... wet dock

tippningsplats....................................................spoil ground

topp ..........................................................................summit

torn ..............................................................................tower

torrdocka .................................................................drydock

triangelpunkt .......................................... triangulation point

tullkammare.................................................... custom office

tunga .........................................................................tongue

U

udde ....................................................cape, point, headland

undervattenskabel ......................................submarine cable

undre ...........................................................................lower

utkikstorn .......................................................lookout tower

V

vagbrytare ........................................................... breakwater

vaderkvarn ............................................................. windmill

vall ...................................................................... steep coast

varv ......................................................................... shipyard

vast, vest ........................................................................west

vastra, vastlig ........................................................... western

vatten ........................................................................... water

vattenstandssignalstation ..........................tide signal station

vattentorn ........................................................... water tower

vik .........................................................................bay, creek

vit.................................................................................white

vrak ............................................................................. wreck

vrakboj........................................wreck or obstruction bouy

Y

ytstrom.......................................................... surface current

ytterst ....................................................................outermost

yttre, ytter .....................................................................outer

SWEDISH English
267

Pub. 194

How to use the Index—Gazetteer

Geographic names of navigational features are generally those used by the nation having sovereignty and are listed

alphabetically. Diacritical marks, such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to specific letters in certain foreign

languages, are not used in the interest of typographical simplicity.

Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United States

Government. Positions are approximate and are intended merely as locators to facilitate reference to the charts.

To use as a Gazetteer note the position and Sector number of the feature and refer to the Chart Information diagram for the

Sector. Plot the approximate position of the feature on this diagram and note the approximate chart number.

To use as an Index of features described in the text note the paragraph number at the right. To locate this feature on the best

scale chart use the Gazetteer procedure above. 

Index—Gazetteer

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

A

AABENRAA 55 03 N 9 26 E 3.31

ABBEKAS 55 23 N 13 36 E 4.30

ABENRA FJORD 55 02 N 9 30 E 3.30

ABRENRA 55 03 N 9 26 E 3.31

ABRUKA SAAR 58 10 N 22 31 E 10.34

ACHTERWASSER 54 00 N 14 00 E 9.11

ADLERGRUND 54 47 N 14 21 E 4.53

ADLERGRUND 54 47 N 14 24 E 9.2

AEBELO 55 39 N 10 11 E 3.5

AERO 54 55 N 10 20 E 3.36

AEROSKOBING 54 53 N 10 25 E 3.46

AGERNAES 55 37 N 10 18 E 3.5

AGERSO 55 13 N 11 11 E 2.15

AGERSO SUND 55 13 N 11 14 E 2.33

AHUS 55 56 N 14 19 E 4.37

AHVENAN-MEREN CHANNEL 59 32 N 20 18 E 3.

AINAZI LIGHT 57 52 N 24 22 E 10.26

AKMENRAGS 56 50 N 21 03 E 10.8

ALABODARNA 55 56 N 12 47 E 1.9

ALBUE FLAK 54 49 N 10 55 E 2.29

ALBUEN LIGHT 54 50 N 10 57 E 2.29

ALLINGE 55 17 N 14 48 E 4.56

ALMAGRUNDET LIGHT 59 09 N 19 08 E 8.4,

8.13

ALO 58 55 N 18 13 E 8.3

ALS FJORD 55 03 N 9 38 E 3.33

ALS SUND 54 48 N 9 45 E 3.34

ALSGARDE 56 05 N 12 32 E 1.7

AMAGER 55 35 N 12 35 E 1.25

ANESBADAR 57 30 N 18 53 E 6.16

ANGJARNSUDDEN 57 18 N 17 09 E 5.21

ANSEKULA 58 06 N 22 14 E 10.33

ANSLET HAGE 55 21 N 9 39 E 3.20

APOLLO 59 13 N 22 51 E 10.17

APPALOMADALIK 59 13 N 22 51 E 10.17

ARHOLMA 59 51 N 19 08 E 8.15

ARISTE LAHT 58 09 N 22 11 E 10.13

ARKO 58 30 N 16 58 E 7.2, 7.8

ARKOSUND 58 29 N 16 57 E 7.8

ARMBAGEN 59 38 N 19 58 E 8.4

ARO 55 16 N 9 45 E 3.21

ARO SUND 55 15 N 9 43 E 3.27

AROSUND 55 16 N 9 43 E 3.26

ASKO 54 53 N 11 29 E 2.42

ASNAES 55 40 N 10 56 E 2.6

ASNAES LIGHT 55 40 N 10 56 E 2.6

ASNAES REV 55 39 N 10 53 E 2.6

ASPO 56 07 N 15 32 E 4.46

ASPO 59 07 N 18 25 E 8.7

ASSENS 55 16 N 9 53 E 3.23

ATLA LAHT 58 19 N 21 53 E 10.13

AUGUSTENBORG 54 57 N 9 52 E 3.33

AUGUSTENBORG FJORD 54 59 N 9 46 E 3.33

AVEDORE RASTOFHAVN 55 37 N 12 30 E 1.31

AVEDOREVAEKETS HAVN 55 36 N 12 29 E 1.30

AVERNAKO 55 01 N 10 17 E 3.40

AVNE VIG 55 19 N 9 38 E 3.24

AVNO FJORD 55 05 N 11 45 E 2.38

B

BACKVIKEN 55 54 N 12 43 E 1.10

BAEKKEHAVE LIGHT 55 00 N 10 33 E 3.43

BAGENKOP 54 45 N 10 40 E 3.38

BAGO 55 19 N 9 49 E 3.21

BAGO SUND 55 18 N 9 52 E 3.27

BAKEN BERG 54 41 N 13 21 E 4.22

BAKKEGRUND 54 59 N 14 45 E 4.53

BALLEBRO LIGHT 55 00 N 9 40 E 3.33

BALTIC OFFSHORE ROUTES 54 41 N 13 05 E 4.1

BALTIYSK 54 38 N 19 54 E 9.38

BALTIYSKAYA KOSA 54 25 N 19 35 E 9.37

BANDHOLM 54 50 N 11 30 E 2.44

BANDHOLM RENDE 54 51 N 11 32 E 2.43

BARDENFLETHS GRUND 55 18 N 9 44 E 3.21

BARING VIG 55 32 N 9 55 E 3.6

BARSEBACKSHAMN 55 45 N 12 54 E 1.12,

1.17

BARSHAGAUDDEN 56 55 N 18 12 E 6.21

BARSHAUDDEN 56 55 N 18 12 E 6.21

BARSO 55 07 N 9 33 E 3.30

BASKEMOLLA 55 36 N 14 19 E 4.35

BASTHOLM 55 17 N 9 46 E 3.21

BERGKVARA 56 23 N 16 06 E 5.8

BERGO ISLET 58 45 N 17 25 E 7.15

BERGS 59 19 N 18 10 E 8.17

BERNATI LIGHT 56 23 N 20 59 E 10.6

BEZYMYANNAYA 57 43 N 20 59 E 10.11

BILLES GRUNDE 54 59 N 10 18 E 3.45

BIRKNACK 54 48 N 9 55 E 3.49

BJORKO 59 51 N 19 02 E 8.15

BJORNO 55 04 N 10 15 E 3.40

BJORNSKNUDE 55 42 N 10 02 E 3.5

BLA JUNGFRUN 57 15 N 16 48 E 5.5

BLACKAN 57 29 N 16 49 E 7.3

BLENHEIM LIGHTED BUOY 55 16 N 12 53 E 4.26

BODA 57 14 N 17 05 E 5.21

BOGENSE 55 34 N 10 05 E 3.6

BOGESTROM 55 04 N 12 10 E 1.34,

2.57

BOGO 54 56 N 12 03 E 2.54

BOGSKAR 59 30 N 20 21 E 8.4

BOKNIS ECK 54 33 N 10 01 E 3.60

BOKNISECK 54 33 N 10 01 E 3.60

BORGHOLM 56 53 N 16 39 E 5.18

BORGSTED LIGHT 54 53 N 12 08 E 2.59

BORNHOLM 55 00 N 15 00 E 4.49

BORNHOLMSGAT 55 17 N 14 30 E 4.1

BORRESHOVED 54 50 N 9 45 E 3.50

BORSTAHUSEN 55 54 N 12 49 E 1.9

BORUP N LIGHT 55 32 N 9 41 E 3.14

BORUP SAND 55 31 N 9 38 E 3.17

BORUP W LIGHT 55 32 N 9 42 E 3.14

BOSTRI MADALIK 58 01 N 24 20 E 10.27

BOTVALDAVIK 57 35 N 18 48 E 6.16
268 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 194

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

BOTVALDVIK 57 35 N 18 48 E 6.16

BRANDSO 55 22 N 9 43 E 3.20

BRATTEN BRIDGE 55 03 N 10 36 E 3.44

BRAVIKEN 58 38 N 16 35 E 7.10

BREDGRUND 54 49 N 10 02 E 3.49

BREDGRUND 55 31 N 12 51 E 1.22

BREDGRUND 59 43 N 17 52 E 7.20

BREDNINGEN 55 25 N 9 43 E 3.20

BREGNOR 55 29 N 10 36 E 3.3

BRUNSNAES FLAK 54 52 N 9 38 E 3.53

BUK LIGHT 54 08 N 11 42 E 4.17

BULK LIGHT 54 27 N 10 12 E 3.63

BULLERO 59 12 N 18 51 E 8.4

BULLUCIEMS LIGHT 57 00 N 23 53 E 10.21

BUNGEOR 57 49 N 19 07 E 6.10

BURGSTAKEN 54 25 N 11 12 E 4.7

BURGSVIK 57 02 N 18 16 E 6.3

BURGSVIKEN 57 03 N 18 12 E 6.2

BUTINGE OIL TERMINAL 56 03 N 20 58 E 10.6

BYXELKROK 57 20 N 17 00 E 5.18

C

CHELMINEK 53 41 N 14 32 E 9.17

CHIDOVA NOVA 57 54 N 21 13 E 10.11

CHRISTIANSO 55 19 N 15 11 E 4.57

CHRISTIANSO HARBOR 55 19 N 15 11 E 4.58

COPENHAGEN 55 42 N 12 37 E 1.16

CZOLPINO 54 43 N 17 15 E 9.26

D

DAGELOKKE HAVN 55 04 N 10 52 E 2.23

DAHMESHOVED LIGHT 54 24 N 11 05 E 4.7

DALARO 59 08 N 18 25 E 8.6,

8.11

DAMGARD LIGHT 55 32 N 9 40 E 3.14

DAMMAN 57 03 N 16 42 E 5.5

DANISCHE WIEK 54 08 N 13 28 E 9.7

DARLOWO 54 26 N 16 25 E 9.23

DARSSER ORT 54 29 N 12 32 E 4.19

DAUGAVGRIVAS SALA 57 02 N 24 00 E 10.21

DAVIDS BANKE 55 22 N 14 41 E 4.50

DEGERHAMN 56 21 N 16 25 E 5.16

DEPPO 57 07 N 18 07 E 6.4

DER BOCK 54 27 N 13 00 E 4.21

DIE TRAVE 53 57 N 10 52 E 4.11

DIERNAES BUGT 55 09 N 9 31 E 3.30

DJUPASUND 56 06 N 15 38 E 4.46

DORNBUSCH LIGHT 54 36 N 13 07 E 4.22

DOVNSKLINT 54 44 N 10 43 E 3.38

DRAGOR FERRY HARBOR 55 35 N 12 41 E 1.26

DRAGOR HAVN 55 36 N 12 41 E 1.26

DREJENSODDE LIGHT 55 30 N 9 35 E 3.17

DREJO 54 58 N 10 25 E 3.45

DRIGGE 54 17 N 13 09 E 9.9

DROGDEN 55 36 N 12 42 E 1.28

DROGDEN LIGHT 55 32 N 12 43 E 1.27

DRONNING ALEXANDRINES BRG 54 59 N 12 10 E 2.55

DUEODDE 54 59 N 15 05 E 4.53

E

EAST LILLE BAELT BRIDGE 55 31 N 9 45 E 3.12

ECKERNFORDE 54 29 N 9 50 E 3.62

ECKERNFORDE LIGHT 54 28 N 9 51 E 3.61

ECKERNFORDER BUCHT 54 30 N 10 00 E 3.61

EGERNSUND 54 54 N 9 36 E 3.55

EGERNSUND HAVN 54 55 N 9 36 E 3.55

EGHOLM 55 15 N 11 11 E 2.15

EGHOLM NO. 30 LIGHT 55 15 N 11 06 E 2.15

EKENAS 56 31 N 16 11 E 5.9

ELEFANTGRUND 55 32 N 10 55 E 2.7

ELLEHOLM 56 10 N 14 44 E 4.41

ELSEHOVED LIGHT 55 06 N 10 47 E 2.21

ENEBAERODDE LIGHT 55 31 N 10 34 E 3.2

ENEHOJE 54 50 N 11 01 E 2.29

ENGURE LIGHT 57 10 N 23 14 E 10.21

ENSKAR 58 41 N 17 28 E 7.12

ENSKAR 58 41 N 17 29 E 7.15

ENSTEDVAERKET 55 01 N 9 26 E 3.32

ESPERGAERDE 56 00 N 12 34 E 1.13

F

FABORG 55 06 N 10 15 E 3.42

FABORG FJORD 55 05 N 10 15 E 3.41

FAENO 55 29 N 9 42 E 3.15

FAENO KALV 55 30 N 9 40 E 3.15

FAENO LIGHT 55 29 N 9 42 E 3.16

FAENO SUND 55 29 N 9 43 E 3.15

FAERGESTROM 54 59 N 11 57 E 2.57

FAKSE BUGT 55 08 N 12 19 E 1.33

FAKSE LADEPLADS 55 13 N 12 10 E 1.34

FAKSE LADEPLADS HAVN 55 13 N 12 10 E 1.34

FALKENS GRUND LIGHT 58 37 N 17 02 E 7.12

FALKSE BOLSAKS 55 43 N 10 43 E 2.3

FALSHOFT TOWER 54 56 N 9 58 E 3.49

FALSTER 54 57 N 11 48 E 2.46

FALSTERBO 55 24 N 12 50 E 1.1

FALSTERBO KANAL 55 24 N 12 57 E 1.24

FALSTERBO UDDE LIGHT 55 23 N 12 49 E 1.23

FALSTERBOKANALEN 55 24 N 12 57 E 4.28

FALSTERBOREV 55 20 N 12 50 E 4.26

FALSTERBOREV LIGHT 55 19 N 12 38 E 4.26

FALSTERBOUDDE 55 23 N 12 49 E 4.26

FALUDDEN 57 00 N 18 24 E 6.21

FARENSODDE 54 49 N 9 28 E 3.54

FARJESTADEN 56 39 N 16 28 E 5.17

FARO 54 57 N 12 00 E 2.54

FARO FALSTER BRIDGE 54 57 N 11 59 E 2.54

FARO LIGHT 57 58 N 19 21 E 6.22

FARO SODRA LIGHT 57 51 N 19 06 E 6.10

FAROSUND 57 55 N 19 03 E 6.10

FAROSUND HARBOR 57 52 N 19 04 E 6.11

FEHMARN 54 28 N 11 08 E 3.74

FEHMARN BELT 54 35 N 11 12 E 4.1, 4.2

FEHMARNSUND 54 24 N 11 06 E 3.75,

4.7

FEJAN 59 44 N 19 10 E 8.16

FEJO 54 57 N 11 25 E 2.41

FEMO 54 59 N 11 32 E 2.42

FERNE KLINT 55 11 N 11 18 E 2.37

FIGEHOLM 57 22 N 16 33 E 5.14

FJALKINGE BACKE 56 03 N 14 17 E 4.36

FJARDHALLAN 59 09 N 18 33 E 8.7

FLAEKOJET 55 26 N 9 43 E 3.20

FLAKFORT 55 42 N 12 44 E 1.14,

1.27

FLENSBORG FJORD 54 50 N 9 50 E 3.48

FLENSBURG 54 48 N 9 26 E 3.56

FLENSBURGER FORDE LT BUOY 54 49 N 9 44 E 3.50

FLESSINGEN 55 30 N 9 40 E 3.15

FLINTRANNAN 55 37 N 12 53 E 1.21

FLIVIK 57 33 N 16 35 E 7.3

FLUGGE LIGHT 54 27 N 11 01 E 3.74

FLUGGESAND 54 27 N 10 57 E 3.74

FREDERICIA 55 34 N 9 46 E 3.10

FRIEDRICHSORT 54 23 N 10 11 E 3.67

FRIEDRICHSORT LIGHT 54 23 N 10 12 E 3.65

FRISCHES HAFF 54 27 N 19 45 E 9.39

FURILLEN 57 46 N 19 01 E 6.13

FYNS HOVED 55 37 N 10 35 E 2.3, 3.2

FYNSHAV FERRY HARBOR 55 00 N 9 59 E 3.35

FYR RENDEN 55 18 N 9 46 E 3.27

G

GABELSFLACH 54 32 N 10 21 E 3.64

GALGELOKKEODDE 55 05 N 14 48 E 4.53

GALON ISLAND 59 05 N 18 16 E 8.10

GALS KLINT 55 31 N 9 41 E 3.14

GAMBORG FJORD 55 29 N 9 44 E 3.16

GAMLEBY 57 54 N 16 25 E 7.5

GAMLEBYVIKEN 57 44 N 16 42 E 7.4

GAMMEL POL LIGHT 54 53 N 10 04 E 3.35

GASFJARDEN 57 34 N 16 35 E 7.3

GASKI LIGHT 54 15 N 15 52 E 9.22

GDANSK 54 21 N 18 40 E 9.35
Index—Gazetteer 269

Pub. 194

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

GDYNIA 54 32 N 18 33 E 9.33

GEDSER 54 34 N 11 56 E 4.6

GEDSER ODDE 54 34 N 11 58 E 4.6

GEDSER REV 54 30 N 12 10 E 4.6

GELLEN LIGHT 54 31 N 13 05 E 4.22

GELLENSTROM 54 27 N 13 04 E 4.22

GELLENSTROM 54 28 N 13 04 E 4.23

GELTINGER BUCHT 54 48 N 9 51 E 3.52

GENBOTE 59 08 N 18 27 E 8.7

GENNER FJORD 55 07 N 9 30 E 3.30

GILBJERG HOVED 56 08 N 12 18 E 1.1

GILLELEJE 56 08 N 12 19 E 1.6

GINDRIKSNASBERGET 57 36 N 16 35 E 7.2

GIPKA LIGHT 57 34 N 22 39 E 10.21

GLAENO 55 12 N 11 26 E 2.37

GOLLWITZ N LIGHT 54 01 N 11 28 E 4.14

GOLLWITZ W LIGHT 54 01 N 11 28 E 4.14

GORA DONAS BEACON 54 28 N 18 26 E 9.34

GORA TYUPA 56 17 N 21 00 E 10.6

GOTA KANAL 58 29 N 16 25 E 7.8

GOTLAND 57 30 N 18 30 E 6.1

GOTSKA SANDON 58 22 N 19 15 E 6.23

GRANHAMNSLJARDEN 59 43 N 19 07 E 8.15

GRANITZER ORT 54 24 N 13 40 E 9.5

GRANKULLAVIKEN 57 22 N 17 07 E 5.19

GRANSOSUND 58 31 N 16 54 E 7.8

GRASRANNAN LIGHT 55 52 N 12 48 E 1.12

GRASTEN 54 55 N 9 36 E 3.55

GRAUTEN 57 44 N 19 02 E 6.14

GREIFSWALD 54 05 N 13 23 E 9.10

GREIFSWALDER BODDEN 54 14 N 13 32 E 9.7

GREIFSWALDER OIE 54 15 N 13 55 E 9.8

GRINTALS LIGHT 57 38 N 24 23 E 10.24

GROGARNSHUVUD 57 27 N 18 53 E 6.16

GROMITZ 54 09 N 10 57 E 4.8

GRONHOGEN 56 16 N 16 24 E 5.16

GRONNEODDE 55 02 N 10 40 E 2.22

GRONSUND 54 50 N 12 10 E 4.24

GRONSUND 54 54 N 12 05 E 2.60

GROSS KLUTZHOVED 54 01 N 11 11 E 4.13

GROSSES TIEF 54 05 N 11 27 E 4.14

GROTLINGBOUDD 57 07 N 18 27 E 6.19

GUDHJEM 55 13 N 14 58 E 4.55

GULDBORG BRIDGE 54 52 N 11 45 E 2.47

GULDBORG SUND 54 39 N 11 52 E 4.6

GULDBORG SUND 54 52 N 11 45 E 2.47

GULF'S OIL PIER 55 12 N 11 15 E 2.36

GULFHAVN 55 12 N 11 15 E 2.36

GULLANGSBERG 58 37 N 16 56 E 7.9

GULSTAV FLAK 54 41 N 10 43 E 3.38

GUNNARSTENARNA 58 46 N 18 03 E 8.3

GUNNON 56 09 N 14 47 E 4.41

GUOVIK 56 12 N 15 01 E 4.43

GUSTAF DALEN LIGHT 58 36 N 17 28 E 7.9

GUSTAVSBERG 59 19 N 18 23 E 8.11

H

HAADEMEESTE 58 05 N 24 30 E 10.27

HABERNIS HUK 54 48 N 9 47 E 3.52

HADERSLEV 55 15 N 9 30 E 3.25

HADERSLEV FJORD 55 19 N 9 38 E 3.24

HAKEN LIGHT 55 55 N 12 44 E 1.10

HALK HOVED 55 12 N 9 42 E 3.26

HALLSHUK 57 56 N 18 44 E 6.8

HALLSVIKEN 58 53 N 17 28 E 7.16

HALSSKOV 55 21 N 11 06 E 2.13

HALSSKOV HARBOR 55 21 N 11 06 E 2.13

HAMMARUDD 57 16 N 18 06 E 6.4

HAMMER ODDE 55 18 N 14 46 E 4.50

HAMNKLABBSHALLAN 57 40 N 16 48 E 7.4

HANDELOP ISLAND 57 41 N 16 44 E 7.3

HANNIBAL 54 02 N 11 22 E 4.13

HANO 56 01 N 14 51 E 4.39

HANOBANKEN 55 56 N 14 52 E 4.39

HANOBUKTEN 55 58 N 14 35 E 4.35

HANOSUND 56 00 N 14 48 E 4.39

HARADSKAR 58 09 N 16 59 E 7.7

HARBOLLE PYNT 54 53 N 12 08 E 2.59

HARBOLLE PYNT LIGHT 54 53 N 12 08 E 2.59

HARTSO ISLAND 58 43 N 17 28 E 7.12

HASLE 55 11 N 14 42 E 4.51

HASSELO 57 50 N 16 45 E 7.2

HASSLO ISLAND 56 07 N 15 28 E 4.45

HAUREVLAR 57 54 N 19 02 E 6.11

HAVRINGE 58 36 N 17 19 E 7.9

HEIKENDORF REEDE 54 22 N 10 11 E 3.67

HEILIGENHAFEN 54 22 N 10 59 E 3.73

HEILIGENHAFEN LIGHT 54 22 N 11 01 E 3.73

HEJLSMINDE BUGT 55 22 N 9 37 E 3.20

HEL 54 36 N 18 48 E 9.31

HEL LIGHT 54 36 N 18 49 E 9.30

HEL PENINSULA 54 40 N 18 45 E 9.30

HELIGHOLMEN 56 55 N 18 17 E 6.21

HELLEHAVN NAKKE LIGHT 55 00 N 12 31 E 1.35

HELNAES BUGT 55 07 N 10 04 E 3.36

HELNAES LIGHT 55 08 N 9 59 E 3.22

HELSINGBORG 56 03 N 12 42 E 1.5

HELSINGOR 56 02 N 12 37 E 1.8

HELSINGOR NORDHAVEN 56 02 N 12 37 E 1.7

HELTSBANKE 54 51 N 9 47 E 3.50

HERRENWYK 53 54 N 10 48 E 4.11

HERRHAMRA 58 48 N 17 50 E 8.8

HERRVIK 57 25 N 18 56 E 6.17

HERRVIKEN 57 25 N 18 56 E 6.17

HESTEHOVED 54 50 N 12 10 E 4.24

HESTEHOVED LIGHT 54 50 N 12 10 E 2.59

HESTESKOEN 55 05 N 9 54 E 3.29

HIDDENSEE 54 33 N 13 07 E 4.22

HIIUMAA 58 53 N 22 36 E 10.11

HIUMAA 58 53 N 22 36 E 10.11

HOBURG 56 55 N 18 08 E 6.2

HOBURGS BANK 56 40 N 18 10 E 6.2

HOGANAS 56 12 N 12 33 E 1.3

HOGBY 57 09 N 17 03 E 5.20

HOGSKAR 59 52 N 9 07 E 8.15

HOHWACHTER BUCHT 54 20 N 10 45 E 3.72

HOLCKENHAVN FJORD 55 18 N 10 46 E 2.15

HOLLAENDERDYBET 55 42 N 12 41 E 1.14

HOLLVIKEN 55 26 N 12 55 E 1.23

HOLLVIKEN LIGHT 55 31 N 12 51 E 1.22

HOLMUDDEN 57 58 N 19 21 E 6.22

HOLNIS 54 52 N 9 36 E 3.54

HOLNIS LIGHT 54 52 N 9 34 E 3.54

HOLST BANKE 55 08 N 9 40 E 3.29

HOLTENAU 54 22 N 10 09 E 3.67

HOLTENAU REEDE 54 23 N 10 11 E 3.67

HOLTENAU SCHLEUSEN LIGHT 54 22 N 10 09 E 3.67

HOLTENAU-WIK 54 22 N 10 07 E 3.69

HORNBAEK 56 06 N 12 28 E 1.7

HORNENAES 55 05 N 10 05 E 3.36

HORNSUDDE 57 12 N 16 54 E 5.18

HORUP HAV 55 54 N 9 55 E 3.50

HOV 55 10 N 10 56 E 2.19

HOV LIGHT 55 15 N 10 54 E 2.19

HUMLEBAEK 55 58 N 12 33 E 1.13

HUNO BOTE 57 34 N 16 37 E 7.2

HUVUDET LIGHT 56 40 N 16 23 E 5.4

HUVUDSKAR 58 58 N 18 34 E 8.3

HVIDEODDE 55 07 N 14 42 E 4.51

HYLLEKROG 54 36 N 11 30 E 4.4

I

IDO 57 43 N 16 46 E 7.4

IDO STANGSKAR 57 40 N 16 47 E 7.4

IRBENI VAIN 57 40 N 22 08 E 10.19

IRBENSKIY LIGHT 57 45 N 21 44 E 10.19

IRBENSKIY STRAIT 57 40 N 22 08 E 10.19

ISPEUDDE LIGHT 56 45 N 16 31 E 5.18

J

JAAGURAHU 58 24 N 21 58 E 10.14

JAGERSBERG 54 23 N 10 13 E 3.66

JAMMERLAND BUGT 55 36 N 11 04 E 2.6

JARNAVIK 56 11 N 15 05 E 4.43

JAROSLAWIEC 54 32 N 16 33 E 9.24

JASMUND 54 34 N 13 40 E 9.3

JASTARNIA 54 42 N 18 41 E 9.32

JASTARNIA LIGHT 54 42 N 18 41 E 9.30
270 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 194

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

JULEBAEK LIGHT 56 04 N 12 34 E 1.7

JYDERUP 55 41 N 11 28 E 2.4

K

KAAVI NINA 57 59 N 22 12 E 10.32

KADET BANK 54 34 N 12 22 E 4.20

KADET RINNE 54 27 N 12 15 E 4.1,

4.20

KALESTE 58 55 N 22 08 E 10.16

KALININGRAD 54 38 N 19 54 E 9.38

KALININGRAD 54 42 N 20 29 E 9.38

KALKGRUND 54 48 N 9 54 E 3.49

KALKGRUND LIGHT 54 49 N 9 53 E 3.49

KALMAR 56 40 N 16 22 E 5.10

KALMARSUND 56 30 N 16 17 E 5.3

KALMARSUNDS DJUPRANNA 56 40 N 16 24 E 5.3

KALUNDBORG 55 41 N 11 06 E 2.5

KALUNDBORG FYORD 55 41 N 11 00 E 2.4

KALVEHAVE HAVN 55 00 N 12 10 E 2.56

KALVESTROM 55 04 N 12 10 E 2.57

KALVO 55 07 N 9 28 E 3.30

KANHOLMSFJARDEN 59 20 N 18 47 E 8.6

KAP ARKONA 54 41 N 13 26 E 4.22,

9.2

KAPELLUDDEN 56 49 N 16 51 E 5.20

KAPPEL CHURCH 54 45 N 11 02 E 2.29

KAPPELN 54 40 N 9 56 E 3.59

KAPPELSHAMN 57 51 N 18 47 E 6.9

KAPPELSHAMNSVIKEN 57 54 N 18 48 E 6.9

KAREHAMN 56 57 N 16 53 E 5.20

KARLEBY 54 52 N 11 12 E 2.29

KARLSHAMN 56 10 N 14 52 E 4.42

KARLSKRONA 56 10 N 15 36 E 4.47

KARREBAEKSMINDE 55 11 N 11 39 E 2.38

KARREBAEKSMINDE BUGT 55 07 N 11 33 E 2.37

KASEHUVUD 55 23 N 14 03 W 4.32

KASTRUP SCANPORT HAVN 55 38 N 12 39 E 1.25

KATTHAMMARSVIK 57 26 N 18 51 E 6.16

KEGNAES 54 52 N 9 55 E 3.49

KELDSNOR LIGHT 54 44 N 10 43 E 2.27

KERTEMINDE 55 27 N 10 40 E 2.9

KERTEMINDE BUGHT 55 27 N 10 43 E 2.8

KIEL 54 20 N 10 08 E 3.70

KIEL CANAL 54 22 N 10 09 E 3.68

KIEL LIGHT 54 30 N 10 16 E 3.63

KIELER BUCHT 54 35 N 10 30 E 3.71

KIELER FORDE 54 28 N 10 16 E 3.63

KIELER HAFEN 54 22 N 10 10 E 3.67

KIHELKONNA LAHT 58 23 N 21 58 E 10.14

KIHNU SAAR 58 08 N 24 00 E 10.28

KIIPSAARE NUKK 58 30 N 21 52 E 10.14

KIKUT LIGHT 53 59 N 14 35 E 9.14

KIRIKU NINA 58 17 N 24 17 E 10.29

KIRKEGRUND 55 06 N 11 22 E 2.37

KLAGSHAMN 55 31 N 12 54 E 1.22

KLAIPEDA 55 43 N 21 07 E 10.4

KLEINES HAFF 53 45 N 14 04 E 9.11

KLINTEHAMN 57 23 N 18 12 E 6.5

KLINTS BANK 57 26 N 19 36 E 6.17

KLOVERHAGE PYNT 55 14 N 10 49 E 2.18

KNASTEGRUND 55 03 N 10 14 E 3.40

KNIVESBJERG 55 08 N 9 27 E 3.30

KNOLDEN 55 04 N 10 13 E 3.40

KNOLEN 55 51 N 12 44 E 1.12

KNOLLS GRUND 57 33 N 17 28 E 5.2

KNOSEN 55 26 N 12 52 E 1.23

KNUDSHOVED 55 05 N 11 37 E 2.37

KNUDSHOVED 55 05 N 9 33 E 3.30

KNUDSHOVED 55 17 N 10 51 E 2.10

KNUDSHOVED FAERGEHAVN 55 17 N 10 51 E 2.10

KNUDSHOVED REV 55 05 N 11 35 E 2.37

KO5/T62 LIGHTED BUOY 54 36 N 11 01 E 3.74,

4.2

KO6/T63 LANBY 54 36 N 11 09 E 3.74,

4.2

KOBBERDYB 55 12 N 10 54 E 2.19

KOBENHAVN 55 42 N 12 37 E 1.16

KOFOTSGRUND 59 13 N 18 37 E 8.7

KOGE 55 27 N 12 12 E 1.31

KOGE BUGT 55 30 N 12 26 E 1.29

KOIGUSTE ALLIRAHU 58 18 N 22 59 E 10.36

KOLBERG 54 11 N 15 33 E 9.21

KOLDING 55 29 N 9 30 E 3.18

KOLGDING FJORD 55 30 N 9 32 E 3.17

KOLKA LIGHT 57 48 N 22 38 E 10.19

KOLKASRAGS 57 46 N 22 36 E 10.19

KOLLICKER ORT LIGHT 54 34 N 13 41 E 9.3

KOLOBRZEG 54 11 N 15 33 E 9.21

KONGEBRO LYSTBADEHAVN 55 31 N 9 43 E 3.14

KONGEDYBET 55 41 N 12 39 E 1.14

KOPING 59 31 N 16 00 E 7.19

KOPMANSGRUND 59 29 N 19 40 E 8.4

KOPPARSTERNARNA 58 35 N 19 10 E 6.23

KOPU LIGHT 58 55 N 22 12 E 10.16

KORSHAVN LIGHT 55 36 N 10 37 E 3.2

KORSOR 55 20 N 11 08 E 2.14

KRAGENAES HAVN 54 55 N 11 22 E 2.41

KRAKELUND 57 27 N 16 43 E 5.14,

7.2

KRIEGERS FLAK 55 02 N 13 02 E 4.26

KRISTIANOPEL 56 15 N 16 03 E 5.7

KROGHAGE DYB 54 33 N 11 58 E 4.5

KROKSKAR BEACON 58 47 N 17 51 E 8.8

KRONBORG PYNT 56 02 N 12 37 E 1.7

KRONGRUNDET 56 41 N 16 24 E 5.5

KRYNICA MORSKA LIGHT 54 23 N 19 27 E 9.37

KUBASSAAR 58 27 N 23 19 E 10.36

KUDEMA LAHT 58 31 N 22 15 E 10.15

KUDEMAA LAHT 58 31 N 22 15 E 10.15

KULLAGRUND LIGHT 55 18 N 13 20 E 4.30

KULLEN 56 18 N 12 27 E 1.1

KULLEN LIGHT 56 18 N 12 27 E 1.2

KUNGSGRUND 57 41 N 16 54 E 7.4

KUNGSHOLMEN 56 06 N 15 35 E 4.46

KURSKIY ZALIV 55 20 N 21 10 E 10.5

KUZNICA 54 44 N 18 35 E 9.32

KYRKBACKEN 55 55 N 12 40 E 1.10

L

LABOE HAVN 54 24 N 10 13 E 3.65

LACI LIGHT 57 27 N 24 23 E 10.24

LACKA 58 45 N 17 34 E 7.16

LADIN’I BEACON 57 12 N 24 21 E 10.24

LAGEMADE REACH 54 54 N 9 37 E 3.54

LAGERHOLMEN LIGHT 55 58 N 14 28 E 4.36

LANDSKRONA 55 52 N 12 50 E 1.11

LANDSORT 58 44 N 17 52 E 8.3

LANDSORT 59 44 N 17 52 E 7.20

LANDSORTSDJUPET 58 38 N 18 15 E 7.1

LANDTIEF 54 16 N 13 44 E 9.9

LANDTIEF A LT BUOY 54 21 N 13 51 E 9.6

LANGAGRUND 55 32 N 14 29 E 4.33

LANGBALLIG BANK 54 50 N 9 40 E 3.53

LANGBALLIGAU 54 49 N 9 40 E 3.53

LANGELANDS BAELT 55 09 N 11 04 E 2.27

LANGELANDSORE LIGHT 55 10 N 11 08 E 2.15

LANGGRUND 55 07 N 9 55 E 3.29

LANGHOLMEN 59 18 N 18 46 E 8.7

LANGO 54 59 N 12 07 E 2.55

LANGO HAVN 54 49 N 11 01 E 2.29

LANGOREN 56 04 N 15 50 E 4.48

LARINIMADALIK 58 24 N 23 38 E 10.31

LAUS HOLMAR 57 17 N 18 46 E 6.18

LAUTERHORN 57 57 N 19 05 E 6.22

LAUTERHORNSUDDE 57 57 N 19 05 E 6.22

LAWICA SLUPSKA 54 55 N 16 39 E 9.24

LEBA 54 46 N 17 33 E 9.26

LEDSKAR LIGHT 58 42 N 17 13 E 7.15

LEHNSKOV PYNT 55 02 N 10 31 E 3.43

LERBERGET 56 11 N 12 34 E 1.4

LERHAMN 56 15 N 12 31 E 1.2

LESNOY LIGHT 55 01 N 20 37 E 10.3

LIDINGO 59 22 N 18 12 E 8.17

LIEPAJA 56 31 N 21 01 E 10.7

LIEPS 54 00 N 11 17 E 4.13

LILLA KARLSO 57 19 N 18 04 E 6.4

LILLA ROTHOLMEN 59 04 N 18 20 E 8.7

LILLE BAELT 54 15 N 9 48 E 3.1

LILLE BAELT 55 20 N 9 45 E 3.2

LILLEGRUND 55 03 N 10 14 E 3.40
Index—Gazetteer 271

Pub. 194

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

LILLEGRUND 55 07 N 9 55 E 3.29

LILLEGRUND 55 39 N 10 38 E 2.3

LILLEO 54 54 N 11 29 E 2.42

LILLHAMMARSGRUND 58 40 N 17 20 E 7.12

LIMHAMN 55 35 N 12 56 E 1.19

LINDEHOVED 55 08 N 9 59 E 3.22

LINDERUM 55 18 N 9 43 E 3.21

LINDHOLM 54 53 N 11 27 E 2.42

LINDHOLM 55 00 N 12 13 E 2.56

LINDHOLM DYB 54 54 N 11 25 E 2.43

LINDO SKIBSVAERFT 55 28 N 10 32 E 3.3

LISTED 55 09 N 15 07 E 4.55

LISTERSHUVUD 56 02 N 14 47 E 4.39

LJUNGSKAR 57 31 N 16 47 E 7.2

LOHALS 55 08 N 10 54 E 2.23

LOMMA 55 41 N 13 04 E 1.17

LOMMABUKTEN 55 41 N 13 00 E 1.17

LOODE NEEM 57 59 N 22 00 E 10.12

LOONALAID 58 20 N 21 48 E 10.13

LOU LAHT 58 05 N 22 10 E 10.13

LOUS FLAK 55 50 N 12 38 E 1.13

LUBECK 53 53 N 10 42 E 4.12

LUBECK GEDSER ROUTE 53 58 N 10 53 E 4.1

LUBECKER BUCHT 54 05 N 11 02 E 4.1, 4.8

LUBIN 53 52 N 14 26 E 9.17

LUNDAKRABUKTEN 55 48 N 12 53 E 1.12

LUNDBORG 55 08 N 10 47 E 2.21

LUNSKAR 57 31 N 16 47 E 7.2

LUSHAGE LIGHT 55 46 N 10 37 E 2.2

LYNGS ODDE AMMONIAKHAVN 55 31 N 9 45 E 3.12

LYO 55 02 N 10 09 E 3.36

LYO KROG 55 04 N 10 08 E 3.40

LYSEGRUND 55 35 N 10 55 E 2.6

M

MADDSES KLINT 54 53 N 12 12 E 2.59

MADSES KLINT 54 53 N 12 12 E 4.25

MAGO 57 41 N 18 52 E 6.14

MALLSTEN 58 51 N 18 02 E 8.3, 8.6

MALMO 55 37 N 13 00 E 1.18

MANILAID 58 13 N 24 08 E 10.29

MARKELSDORFER HUK 54 32 N 11 04 E 4.3

MARO 58 34 N 16 53 E 7.8

MARSTAL 54 51 N 10 31 E 3.47

MARSTAL BUGT 54 47 N 10 35 E 3.38

MARSVIKEN 58 39 N 17 04 E 7.12

MASKNAGGEN LIGHT 56 44 N 16 28 E 5.5

MASKNUV LIGHT 58 51 N 18 01 E 8.6

MASNEDO 54 59 N 11 55 E 2.49

MASNEDO GODNINGSHAVN 54 59 N 11 54 E 2.51

MASNEDOVAERKETS HAVN 55 00 N 11 53 E 2.51

MASNEDSUND 55 00 N 11 54 E 2.49

MASNEDSUND BRIDGE 55 00 N 11 53 E 2.50

MATVIK 56 10 N 14 58 E 4.43

MECKLENBURGER BUCHT 54 25 N 11 32 E 4.1

MEELAIUNEEM 58 19 N 21 50 E 10.13

MEM 58 29 N 16 25 E 7.8

MERISE NEEM 58 30 N 22 09 E 10.15

MERSRAGS 57 22 N 23 08 E 10.21

MICHAILOVA SEKLIS 57 44 N 21 42 E 10.19

MIDDELFART 55 30 N 9 44 E 3.13

MIDDELGRUND 54 51 N 9 52 E 3.50

MIDDELGRUNDS FORT 55 43 N 12 40 E 1.14

MIEDZYZDROJE 53 56 N 14 27 E 9.14

MIELINO ISLAND 53 53 N 14 17 E 9.17

MIELINSKI KANAL 53 54 N 14 15 E 9.17

MIELNO 54 15 N 16 03 E 9.22

MIERZEJA HELSKA 54 40 N 18 45 E 9.30

MIERZEJA WISLANA 54 25 N 19 35 E 9.37

MIKELRTORNIS LIGHT 57 36 N 21 58 E 10.19

MITTELGRUND 54 31 N 10 03 E 3.61

MITTELGRUND 54 49 N 9 27 E 3.54

MITTGRUNDEN 56 28 N 16 15 E 5.4

MOLLE 56 17 N 12 30 E 1.2

MOLTENORT 54 23 N 10 12 E 3.67

MOMMARK HAVN 54 56 N 10 03 E 3.35

MON LIGHT 54 57 N 12 33 E 1.35

MONSTERAS 57 02 N 16 27 E 5.11

MORBYLANGA 56 32 N 16 23 E 5.17

MORKO 58 59 N 17 40 E 7.16

MUHU 58 36 N 23 16 E 10.36

MUKRAN HARBOR 54 29 N 13 35 E 9.5

MURWIK 54 49 N 9 27 E 3.54

MUSHOLM BUGT 55 28 N 11 08 E 2.7

MUSKO ISLAND 59 00 N 18 07 E 8.10

MUSTPANK 58 22 N 21 33 E 10.14

MYS GVARDEJSKIY 54 58 N 20 16 E 10.2

MYSINGEHOLM 59 00 N 18 16 E 8.7

N

NAESTVED 55 14 N 11 45 E 2.39

NAKKEBOLLE FJORD 55 03 N 10 23 E 3.43

NAKKEHOVED LIGHT 56 07 N 12 21 E 1.6

NAKSKOV 54 50 N 11 08 E 2.30

NAKSKOV FJORD 54 50 N 11 00 E 2.29

NARSHAMN 57 14 N 18 40 E 6.19

NARSHOLMEN 57 13 N 18 41 E 6.18

NASET 55 27 N 12 57 E 1.23

NASREVET 57 03 N 18 09 E 6.3

NATTARO 58 53 N 18 07 E 8.3

NEKSO 55 04 N 15 08 E 4.54

NEUKIRCHEN GRUND 54 49 N 9 46 E 3.52

NEULAND LIGHT 54 22 N 10 36 E 3.71

NEUPOKOJEVIMADALIK 58 55 N 21 51 E 10.16

NEUSTADT HAFEN 54 06 N 10 49 E 4.9

NEUSTADTER BUCHT 54 03 N 10 49 E 4.9

NEXO 55 04 N 15 08 E 4.54

NIDDEN LIGHT 55 18 N 21 00 E 10.3

NIECHORZE 54 06 N 15 04 E 9.20

NIELSENGRUND 58 17 N 18 00 E 7.7

NIENDORF 54 00 N 10 48 E 4.9

NIVA HAVN 55 56 N 12 32 E 1.13

NOGERSUND 56 00 N 14 44 E 4.36

NORDBORG LIGHT 55 05 N 9 43 E 3.35

NORDHAFEN 54 22 N 10 07 E 3.69

NORDLIGE LILLEGRUND 55 12 N 9 49 E 3.21

NORD-OSTSEE KANAL 54 22 N 10 09 E 3.68

NORDPERD 54 21 N 13 46 E 9.6

NORDRE ROSE LIGHT 55 38 N 12 41 E 1.25

NORRA FALLBADAN 58 27 N 17 06 E 7.9

NORRA KRANKAN 58 37 N 17 23 E 7.9

NORRA MIDSJOBANKEN 56 14 N 17 24 E 5.2

NORRKOPING 58 35 N 16 12 E 7.11

NORRTALJE 59 46 N 18 43 E 8.16

NORRTALJEVIKEN 59 47 N 18 53 E 8.15

NORSHOLMEN 58 00 N 19 15 E 6.22

NOWY PORT 54 25 N 18 40 E 9.35

NY FARVAND 54 58 N 11 58 E 2.57

NYBOL NOR 54 55 N 9 38 E 3.55

NYBORG 55 19 N 10 48 E 2.17

NYBORG FJORD 55 17 N 10 50 E 2.16

NYHAMNSLAGE 56 15 N 12 32 E 1.2

NYKOBING 54 46 N 11 52 E 2.48

NYKOPING 58 45 N 17 01 E 7.14

NYNASHAMN 58 54 N 17 58 E 8.9

NYORD 55 03 N 12 13 E 2.56

NYREVSUDDE 57 32 N 18 07 E 6.6

NYSTED 54 40 N 11 44 E 4.5

O

OAXEN 58 58 N 17 43 E 7.16

OBZORNYY LIGHT 54 50 N 19 57 E 9.40

ODDEN 54 53 N 10 28 E 3.45

ODENSE 55 25 N 10 23 E 3.4

ODENSE FJORD 55 31 N 10 34 E 3.3

ODER BANK 54 20 N 14 25 E 9.14

OFFEN TIEF 54 02 N 11 18 E 4.15

OFFEN TIEF LIGHTED BUOY 54 02 N 11 17 E 4.14

OHLENBURGS HUK 54 30 N 11 15 E 4.3

OJET BANK 54 37 N 11 00 E 3.74,

4.2

OKSEOER 54 51 N 9 31 E 3.54

OLAND 56 40 N 16 37 E 5.15

OLANDS NORRA GRUND 57 29 N 17 09 E 5.19

OLANDS NORRA UDDE 57 22 N 17 06 E 5.19

OLANDS SODRA GRUND 56 04 N 16 41 E 5.2

OLANDS SODRA UDDE 56 12 N 16 24 E 5.15

OLANDSBRON BRIDGE 56 40 N 16 28 E 5.5
272 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 194

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

OLANDSREV 56 10 N 16 24 E 5.15

OLPENITZ HAFEN 54 40 N 10 02 E 3.60

OMMELSHOVED 54 53 N 10 28 E 3.45

OMO 55 10 N 11 10 E 2.15

OMO SUND 55 11 N 11 11 E 2.32

ONSEVIG 54 57 N 11 07 E 2.28

ORBY HAGE 55 18 N 9 40 E 3.24

ORDZANA LAWICA 54 20 N 14 25 E 9.14

ORE FLAK 55 08 N 10 48 E 2.21

ORE LIGHT 55 00 N 11 52 E 2.49

OREBY RENDE 54 51 N 11 32 E 2.43

OREHOVED 54 58 N 11 50 E 2.46

OREHOVED HAVN 54 58 N 11 51 E 2.46

ORESUND 56 07 N 12 33 E 1.1

ORESUND LINK 55 35 N 12 46 E 1.20

ORINGE 55 00 N 11 55 E 2.49

ORNHOKAKNOSEN 55 26 N 14 16 E 4.33

ORNO 59 04 N 18 26 E 8.7

OSKARSHAMN 57 16 N 16 27 E 5.13

OSMUSSAAR ISLAND 59 18 N 23 22 E 10.38

OSTERGARNSHOLM 57 27 N 18 59 E 6.17

OST-LIGE PULLER 55 17 N 10 56 E 2.18

OSTRA ROKO 58 54 N 18 05 E 8.6

OSTROV DAUGAVGRIVA 57 02 N 24 00 E 10.21

OSTTIEF 54 12 N 13 52 E 9.9

OSVALLSGRUNDET LIGHT 56 40 N 16 23 E 5.5

OVISI 57 34 N 21 43 E 10.10

OVISI SEKLIS 57 36 N 21 40 E 10.10

OXELOSUND 58 40 N 17 07 E 7.13

P

PALANGA 55 56 N 21 04 E 10.6

PALMER ORT 54 13 N 13 24 E 9.9

PALUDANS FLAK 55 44 N 10 35 E 2.3

PAPE LIGHT 56 09 N 21 01 E 10.6

PARNU 54 23 N 24 30 E 10.30

PARNU LAHT 58 15 N 24 23 E 10.28

PASKALLAVIK 57 10 N 16 28 E 5.12

PATAHOLM 56 55 N 16 26 E 5.11

PAVILOSTA 56 53 N 21 11 E 10.8

PEBERHOLM 55 36 N 12 45 E 1.27

PEENE RIVER 54 10 N 13 45 E 9.11

PEENEMUNDE 54 08 N 13 46 E 9.12

PELZERHAKEN LIGHT 54 12 N 11 05 E 4.8

PIASTOWSKI KANAL 53 50 N 14 19 E 9.17

PIKLA NINA 58 15 N 24 28 E 10.28

PILTHOLM 59 08 N 18 27 E 8.7

PILTHOLMSKNALL 59 09 N 18 28 E 8.7

PINHATTEN LIGHT 55 45 N 12 52 E 1.12

PLANTAGENET GRUND 54 38 N 12 48 E 4.21

PLETSEVA BANKS 58 11 N 121 02 E 10.14

PLUSCHOWHAFEN 54 23 N 10 10 E 3.67

POEL 54 00 N 11 27 E 4.13

POLICE 53 34 N 14 34 E 9.17

POLS HUK 54 53 N 10 04 E 3.35

POMERANIAN BAY 54 08 N 14 15 E 9.14

POOSASPEA LIGHT 59 14 N 23 31 E 10.38

PREJAREN 59 13 N 19 07 E 8.13

PRIMORSKIY ZALIV 54 40 N 20 00 E 9.38

PRORER WIEK 54 27 N 13 40 E 9.5

PRZEKOP WISLA 54 22 N 18 57 E 9.36

PUCK 54 44 N 18 25 E 9.32

PUKAVIK 56 10 N 14 41 E 4.40

PUKAVIKSBUKTEN 56 07 N 14 47 E 4.40

PUTTGARDEN 54 30 N 11 14 E 4.3

PUVAROOTSI 58 33 N 23 37 E 10.31

R

RAA 56 00 N 12 44 E 1.9

RADE HOVED 55 14 N 9 43 E 3.26

RAGACIEMS 57 02 N 23 30 E 10.21

RAGHAMMER ODDE 55 01 N 14 56 E 4.53

RAGO 54 58 N 11 19 E 2.41

RANZOW 54 35 N 13 38 E 9.3

REDDEVITZER HOFT 54 19 N 13 37 E 9.9

REERSO 55 32 N 11 06 E 2.6

REMMARGRUND 59 46 N 19 19 E 8.14

REVENGEGRUNDTE LIGHT 59 15 N 19 01 E 8.12

RIGA 56 57 N 24 06 E 10.22

RINDO 59 24 N 18 25 E 8.17

RINKENAES BUGT 54 54 N 9 37 E 3.55

RINKENAES REACH 54 53 N 9 35 E 3.54

RISINGE HOVED 55 25 N 10 50 E 2.10

RISTNA 58 56 N 22 03 E 10.16

RODBY HAVN 54 39 N 11 21 E 4.4

RODEGRUND 55 18 N 9 43 E 3.21

RODSAND RENDE 54 33 N 11 58 E 4.5

RODVIG 55 15 N 12 23 E 1.33

ROJA 57 30 N 22 49 E 10.21

ROMSO 55 31 N 10 48 E 2.8

ROMSO PULLER 55 30 N 10 49 E 2.8

ROMSO SUND 55 31 N 10 45 E 2.8

ROMSO TUE NO. 24 LIGHT 55 33 N 10 49 E 2.8

RONEHAMN 57 10 N 18 30 E 6.20

RONNE 55 06 N 14 42 E 4.52

RONNE BANK 54 55 N 14 39 E 4.53

RONNEBY 56 11 N 15 18 E 4.44

ROOMASSAAR 58 13 N 22 31 E 10.34

ROSNAES 55 45 N 10 52 E 2.2

ROSNAES LIGHT 55 45 N 10 52 E 2.2

ROSNAES PULLER 55 45 N 10 51 E 2.2

ROSNAES PULLER LIGHT 55 45 N 10 51 E 2.2

ROSTOCK 54 06 N 12 08 E 4.18

ROUTE H 54 52 N 10 52 E 2.1, 4.1

ROUTE T 54 36 N 11 09 E 4.1

ROUTE T 55 49 N 10 49 E 2.1

ROWEK 54 40 N 17 03 E 9.26

ROWY 54 40 N 17 03 E 9.26

ROZEWIE 54 50 N 18 21 E 9.27

ROZEWIE CAP OIL FLD 55 29 N 18 11 E 9.27

ROZTOKA ODRZANSKA 53 39 N 14 35 E 9.17

RUDEN 54 12 N 13 46 E 9.8

RUDKOBING 54 56 N 10 43 E 2.25

RUGEN 54 41 N 13 26 E 4.22

RUGENWALDE 54 26 N 16 25 E 9.23

RUGISCHER BODDEN 54 18 N 13 33 E 9.7

RUHNU SAAR 57 48 N 23 14 E 10.20

RUNGSTED 55 53 N 12 33 E 1.13

RYBACHIY LIGHT 55 10 N 20 51 E 10.3

RYGGEN 55 37 N 10 45 E 2.3

RZEKA DZIWNA 54 01 N 14 44 E 9.19

RZEKA REGA 54 09 N 15 17 E 9.20

S

SAAREMAA HARBOR 58 32 N 21 14 E 10.15

SAAREMMA 58 16 N 22 36 E 10.11

SAARETUKK LIGHT 58 16 N 22 48 E 10.35

SAGAS BANK 54 17 N 11 12 E 4.7

SAINT JORGENS LIGHT 55 03 N 10 36 E 3.44

SAKSKOBING 54 48 N 11 38 E 2.45

SALACGRIVA 57 45 N 24 21 E 10.25

SALTHOLM 55 40 N 12 46 E 1.27

SALTHOLM FLAK 55 42 N 12 45 E 1.27

SALTSJOBADEN 59 17 N 18 19 E 8.11

SALTVIK 57 18 N 16 30 E 5.14

SALTVIKEN 55 45 N 12 57 E 1.17

SALVOREV 58 03 N 19 22 E 6.22

SANDHAMMAREN 55 23 N 14 12 E 4.32

SANDHAMN 56 06 N 15 52 E 5.7

SANDHAMN 59 17 N 18 55 E 8.12

SANDKASODDE 55 08 N 15 09 E 4.54

SANDO BANK 58 14 N 19 16 E 6.23

SANDON 59 17 N 18 56 E 8.12

SANDSANKAN 58 19 N 17 10 E 7.7

SANDVIG 55 11 N 9 36 E 3.30

SANDVIK 57 04 N 16 52 E 5.18

SASSNITZ 54 31 N 13 39 E 9.4

SAVOSUND 58 46 N 17 29 E 7.15

SCHAABE 54 35 N 13 23 E 9.3

SCHEERHAFEN 54 22 N 10 09 E 3.69

SCHEERHAFEN LIGHT 54 22 N 10 09 E 3.67

SCHLEIMUNDE 54 40 N 10 02 E 3.58

SCHLUTUP 53 54 N 10 48 E 4.11

SCHONHAGENER GRUND 54 37 N 10 04 E 3.60

SCHONHEYDER BANKE 55 09 N 9 43 E 3.29

SEGERSTAD 56 22 N 16 34 E 5.20

SERBINI 59 14 N 22 42 E 10.17

SERBINIMADALIK 59 14 N 22 42 E 10.17
Index—Gazetteer 273

Pub. 194

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

SHCHUKINSKIY LIGHT 54 32 N 19 44 E 9.37

SIKRAGCIEMA LIGHT 57 39 N 22 13 E 10.19

SILLASEN 56 46 N 16 30 E 5.5

SILLNASUDDE LIGHT 56 00 N 14 37 E 4.36

SIMPEVARD 57 25 N 16 40 E 5.14

SIMPNASKLUBB LIGHT 59 54 N 19 05 E 8.15

SIMRISHAMN 55 33 N 14 22 E 4.34

SIO 54 57 N 10 41 E 2.23

SJAELLAND FARO BRIDGE 54 58 N 12 00 E 2.54

SJALBERGET 59 04 N 18 48 E 8.4

SKAELSKOR 55 15 N 11 18 E 2.34

SKAERBAEK FISKERHAVN 55 31 N 9 38 E 3.17

SKAERBAEK LIGHT 55 31 N 9 37 E 3.16

SKAERBAEKVAERKET HAVN 55 31 N 9 37 E 3.17

SKAFTET 57 39 N 16 35 E 7.4

SKAGGENAS 56 47 N 16 28 E 5.11

SKALENBJERG 55 22 N 10 44 E 2.10

SKAMLINGSBANKEN 55 25 N 9 34 E 3.20

SKANOR 55 25 N 12 50 E 1.23

SKANOR PENINSULA 55 23 N 12 49 E 4.26

SKANOR PENINSULA 55 24 N 12 53 E 1.23

SKANSEODDE E LIGHT 55 33 N 9 46 E 3.9

SKANSEPYNT 54 53 N 12 07 E 2.59

SKANSGRUNDET 56 39 N 16 23 E 5.4

SKANSUDDE 57 27 N 18 07 E 6.6

SKARE 55 22 N 13 03 E 4.26

SKARO 55 00 N 10 28 E 3.43

SKARUPORE SUND 55 04 N 10 42 E 2.22

SKAURUP SUND 55 04 N 10 42 E 2.22

SKELDE VIG 54 51 N 9 42 E 3.53

SKILLINGE 55 28 N 14 17 E 4.33

SKJOLDNAES 54 58 N 10 12 E 3.37

SKODSBOL REACH 54 54 N 9 39 E 3.54

SKOVEN 55 32 N 10 34 E 3.2

SKOVSHOVED 55 46 N 12 36 E 1.13

SKRAPAN 58 47 N 17 59 E 8.6

SLETTEN 55 57 N 12 32 E 1.13

SLIPSHAVN 55 17 N 10 50 E 2.16

SLITE 57 42 N 18 49 E 6.15

SLOTTSBREDAN 56 56 N 16 36 E 5.5

SMALANDSFARVANDET 55 07 N 11 45 E 2.31

SMYGEHUK 55 20 N 13 21 E 4.30

SNAEVRINGEN 55 32 N 9 45 E 3.11

SNEKKERSTEN 56 01 N 12 36 E 1.13

SNOGBAEK HUK 54 56 N 10 03 E 3.34

SNOGHOJ LIGHT 55 32 N 9 42 E 3.14

SOBY 54 57 N 10 16 E 3.46

SODERARM 59 45 N 19 24 E 8.14

SODERGRUND 57 48 N 19 11 E 6.12

SODERGRUNDAN 59 15 N 19 03 E 8.13

SODERTALJE 59 11 N 17 39 E 7.17

SODERTALJE CANAL 59 12 N 17 38 E 7.17

SODRA MIDSJOBANKEN 55 40 N 17 25 E 5.2

SODRA UDDE LIGHT 55 53 N 12 43 E 1.10

SOLVESBORG 56 03 N 14 35 E 4.38

SOMERI POOLSAR 58 20 N 23 46 E 10.31

SOMNITELANIA BANK 57 18 N 21 22 E 10.8

SONDERBALLE HOVED 55 08 N 9 31 E 3.30

SONDERBORG 54 55 N 9 47 E 3.51

SONDERBORG BUGT 54 52 N 9 50 E 3.50

SONDERBY KLINT 55 13 N 9 56 E 3.22

SONDRE STENRON 55 04 N 9 57 E 3.29

SOPOT 54 27 N 18 34 E 9.34

SORGU SAAR 58 11 N 24 12 E 10.29

SORTSO GAB 54 56 N 12 00 E 2.58

SORVE POOLSAR 58 03 N 22 10 E 10.12

SORVE SAAR LIGHT 57 55 N 22 03 E 10.12

SPARO 57 43 N 16 44 E 7.4

SPARON 57 43 N 16 44 E 7.4

SPODSBJERG HAVN 54 56 N 10 50 E 2.27

SPROGO 55 20 N 10 58 E 2.11

STABERHUK 54 24 N 11 19 E 4.3

STAFFANS BANK 55 53 N 12 45 E 1.10

STALDYB 55 00 N 11 18 E 2.43

STANGSKAR 57 44 N 16 45 E 7.4

STARA SWINA RIVER 53 52 N 14 17 E 9.17

STAVRBY SKOV LIGHT 55 31 N 9 46 E 3.12

STEGE BUGT 55 00 N 12 14 E 2.56

STEGE HAVN 54 59 N 12 17 E 2.56

STEIN 54 25 N 10 16 E 3.64

STEIN RIFF 54 00 N 10 54 E 4.9

STENDERUP HAVN 55 31 N 9 38 E 3.16

STENHOLM 59 08 N 18 25 E 8.7

STENKYRKEHUK 57 49 N 18 29 E 6.8

STENSHUVUD 55 40 N 14 17 E 4.35

STEPNICA 53 39 N 14 38 E 9.17

STETTIN 53 25 N 14 35 E 9.18

STEVNS KLINT LIGHT 55 17 N 12 27 E 1.1

STEVNS LIGHT 55 17 N 12 27 E 1.32

STEVNS PIER 55 19 N 12 28 E 1.32

STICKENHORN 54 23 N 10 10 E 3.67

STICKSKAR 57 43 N 16 45 E 7.4

STIGSNAESVAERKET HAVN 55 12 N 11 15 E 2.35

STILO LIGHT 54 47 N 17 44 E 9.26

STOCKHOLM 59 20 N 18 05 E 8.18

STOKKEBAEK FLAK 55 10 N 10 50 E 2.19

STOLLERGRUND 54 31 N 10 12 E 3.63

STOLLERGRUND RINNE 54 30 N 10 11 E 3.63

STOLPE BANK 54 55 N 16 39 E 9.24

STOLPMUNDE 54 35 N 16 51 E 9.25

STORA EKON 56 08 N 15 13 E 4.44

STORA HOGGARN 59 22 N 18 18 E 8.17

STORA JATTERSON 57 06 N 16 34 E 5.12

STORA KARLSO 57 17 N 17 58 E 6.4

STORA ROR 56 45 N 16 32 E 5.18

STORA VIKA 58 56 N 17 47 E 7.16

STORE BAELT 55 30 N 10 55 E 2.1

STORE BAELT LINK 55 19 N 11 00 E 2.12

STORE SVELMO 55 02 N 10 20 E 3.40

STORRO 58 41 N 17 33 E 7.16

STORSTROM 54 58 N 11 53 E 2.52

STORSTROM BRIDGE 54 58 N 11 53 E 2.53

STORUGNS 57 50 N 18 48 E 6.9

STRALSUND 54 19 N 13 06 E 4.23

STRANDER BUCHT 54 26 N 10 12 E 3.65

STRIB HAVN 55 32 N 9 45 E 3.12

STRIB LIGHT 55 33 N 9 45 E 3.9

STRUKKAMPHUK LIGHT 54 25 N 11 06 E 3.74

STRYNO 54 54 N 10 37 E 3.45

STUBBEKOBING 54 53 N 12 03 E 2.58

STUBBERUP KNOLD 55 35 N 10 45 E 2.8

STURKO 56 06 N 15 40 E 4.46

SUDPERD 54 16 N 13 43 E 9.6

SUNDET 56 07 N 12 33 E 1.1

SUTU LAHT 58 16 N 22 45 E 10.35

SUUR KATEL 58 10 N 22 23 E 10.33

SUURKUIV 58 23 N 21 40 E 10.14

SVANEKE 55 08 N 15 09 E 4.55

SVANGEN LIGHT 59 16 N 18 59 E 8.12

SVARTGRUND 55 14 N 14 15 E 4.32

SVENDBORG 55 04 N 10 37 E 2.24

SVENDBORG SUND 55 04 N 10 37 E 3.44

SVENDBORG SUND BRIDGE 55 03 N 10 36 E 3.44

SVENSKA BJORN LIGHT 59 33 N 20 01 E 8.4

SVENSKA HOGARNA 59 27 N 19 30 E 8.4

SVENSKA STENARNA 59 35 N 19 35 E 8.5

SVENTOJI LIGHT 56 01 N 21 05 E 10.6

SWINOUJSCIE 53 55 N 14 16 E 9.16

SYSNEUDD 57 23 N 18 53 E 6.18

SZCZECIN 53 24 N 14 32 E 9.18

T

TAERO 54 57 N 12 05 E 2.55

TAGA LAHT 58 29 N 22 06 E 10.15

TAGGEN LIGHTED BUOY 55 54 N 14 35 E 4.36,

4.37

TAHKUNA NINA 59 05 N 22 36 E 10.17

TAKSENSAND LIGHT 55 00 N 9 58 E 3.35

TALAIS SEKLIS 57 49 N 24 13 E 10.26

TARAN, MYS 54 58 N 19 59 E 9.40,

10.2

TARBAEK 55 47 N 12 36 E 1.13

TARBAEK REV 55 47 N 12 38 E 1.13

TARNEWITZER HUK 54 00 N 11 14 E 4.13

TARNO ISLAND 56 07 N 14 58 E 4.43

TARS 54 53 N 11 02 E 2.29

TASINGE 55 00 N 10 33 E 2.22,

3.43

TEJN 55 15 N 14 50 E 4.56

TELEGRAFBERGET 59 21 N 18 14 E 8.17

THE SOUND 56 07 N 12 33 E 1.1

THIESSOW 54 16 N 13 43 E 9.6
274 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 194

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

THURO 55 03 N 10 42 E 2.21

TILLINGENABBEN 56 58 N 16 26 E 5.11

TIMMENDORF LIGHT 53 59 N 11 23 E 4.14

TIMMERNABBEN 56 58 N 16 26 E 5.11

TIRPITZHAFEN 54 21 N 10 09 E 3.69

TJARVEN LIGHT 59 48 N 19 22 E 8.14

TJOCKOFIARDEN 59 46 N 19 06 E 8.16

TJURKO 56 07 N 15 37 E 4.46

TOKENASUDDE 57 19 N 17 00 E 5.18

TONNES ODDE 55 26 N 9 45 E 3.20

TONTOFT NAKKE 55 05 N 9 45 E 3.35

TORHAMNSUDDE 56 04 N 15 51 E 4.48,

5.7

TORKO 56 09 N 15 25 E 4.45

TORO 55 15 N 9 55 E 3.21

TORO BANKE 55 12 N 9 54 E 3.21

TRADGARDSGRUND 56 38 N 16 22 E 5.4

TRAGTEN 55 35 N 9 52 E 3.9

TRANEKAER CASTLE 55 00 N 10 52 E 2.27

TRANERODDE LIGHT 55 03 N 9 51 E 3.35

TRAVEMUNDE 53 58 N 10 53 E 4.10

TRELDE NAES 55 38 N 9 52 E 3.7

TRELLEBORG 55 22 N 13 09 E 4.29

TRELLEBORG LIGHT 55 21 N 13 09 E 4.27

TROMPER WIEK 54 37 N 13 30 E 9.3

TROSKELN 59 39 N 19 50 E 8.4

TROSKELN OSTRA LIFGT 59 40 N 19 55 E 8.5

TROSKELN VASTRA LIGHT 59 40 N 19 52 E 8.5

TRZEBIATOW 54 04 N 15 16 E 9.21

TRZEBIEZ 53 40 N 14 31 E 9.17

TUBORG 55 43 N 12 35 E 1.15

TURO 55 03 N 10 42 E 2.21

TVINGSBERG N LIGHT 55 19 N 9 54 E 3.22

U

UDRIKLAID 58 26 N 23 17 E 10.36

UDRIKU LAID 58 26 N 23 17 E 10.36

ULVSUND 54 58 N 12 09 E 2.57

URNE 54 57 N 11 17 E 2.40

USEDOM 54 11 N 13 48 E 9.10

USTKA 54 35 N 16 51 E 9.25

UTGRUNDEN 56 22 N 16 15 E 5.4

UTHOLMEN 57 26 N 18 06 E 6.6

UTKLIPPAN 55 57 N 15 42 E 4.48

UTKLIPPORNA 55 57 N 15 42 E 4.48

UTLANGAN 56 01 N 15 47 E 4.48

UTO 58 57 N 18 15 E 8.3

UUSKUIV 58 19 N 21 33 E 10.14

UZAVA LIGHT 57 13 N 21 25 E 10.8

V

VAGGA 56 10 N 14 53 E 4.43

VAINAMERI 58 50 N 23 15 E 10.37

VALLO 57 07 N 16 36 E 5.11

VANDBURG 56 57 N 18 19 E 6.21

VANG 55 15 N 14 44 E 4.50

VARGARD HOVED 55 23 N 9 37 E 3.20

VARNAES HOVED 55 03 N 9 35 E 3.33

VASTERAS 59 37 N 16 33 E 7.18

VASTERBADEN 57 45 N 16 45 E 7.5

VASTERVIK 57 46 N 16 39 E 7.6

VASTRA FORSANKNINGEN LIGHT 56 07 N 15 35 E 4.46

VASTRA KORPEN LIGHT 58 36 N 17 19 E 7.9

VATO 59 48 N 18 58 E 8.15

VAXHOLM 59 24 N 18 20 E 8.17

VEDBAEK 55 51 N 12 35 E 1.13

VEJLE 55 43 N 9 33 E 3.8

VEJLE FJORD 55 39 N 9 50 E 3.7

VEJRO 55 02 N 11 22 E 2.40

VEJSNAES FLAK 54 45 N 10 26 E 3.37

VEJSNAES NAKKE 54 49 N 10 25 E 3.37

VEMMINGBUND 54 54 N 9 44 E 3.50

VEN 55 54 N 12 42 E 1.10

VEN LIGHT 55 55 N 12 40 E 1.10

VENEGRUNDE 55 06 N 11 28 E 2.37

VENGEANCEGRUND NO. 31 LIGHT 55 18 N 10 46 E 2.15

VENSHOLM 54 56 N 11 03 E 2.28

VENTSPILS 57 24 N 21 32 E 10.9

VERKEBACKSVIKEN 57 40 N 16 39 E 7.3

VEST-LIGE PULLER 55 17 N 10 54 E 2.18

VETELA NINA 58 13 N 22 43 E 10.35

VETELLA LAHT 58 16 N 22 45 E 10.35

VETTEKULLA 56 10 N 14 55 E 4.43

VIALMSUDD 57 55 N 19 01 E 6.10

VIGSNAES 54 54 N 11 39 E 2.42

VIIELAID LIGHT 58 33 N 23 27 E 10.36

VIKEN 56 08 N 12 35 E 1.4

VIKSTEN 58 47 N 17 57 E 8.6

VILSANDI LIGHT 58 19 N 21 50 E 10.14

VILSANDI SAAR 58 23 N 21 52 E 10.14

VINDASEN 57 55 N 16 47 E 7.2

VINKOVA, BANKA 57 40 N 21 20 E 10.11

VINKOVI 59 11 N 22 19 E 10.17

VINKOVIMADALIK 59 11 N 22 19 E 10.17

VINO 57 31 N 16 42 E 7.2

VIRTSU LIGHT 58 34 N 23 30 E 10.31

VISBY 57 38 N 18 17 E 6.7

VISLINSKIY ZALIV 54 27 N 19 45 E 9.39

VODRUP FLAK 54 51 N 10 16 E 3.37

VOOSIKURK 59 00 N 23 24 E 10.37

VORDINGBORG SYDHAVN 55 00 N 11 54 E 2.51

VORNAES PYNT 55 01 N 10 31 E 3.43

VRESEN 55 13 N 10 53 E 2.18

VRESEN PULLER 55 15 N 10 54 E 2.18

W

WALKYRIENGRUND 54 07 N 11 02 E 4.8

WARNEMUNDE LIGHT 54 11 N 12 05 E 4.17

WEDELLSBORG HOVED 55 22 N 9 47 E 3.20

WEST LILLE BAELT BRIDGE 55 31 N 9 43 E 3.14

WESTERMARKELSDORF LIGHT 54 32 N 11 04 E 3.74

WESTKLUNE 53 51 N 13 55 E 9.11

WIECK 54 06 N 13 27 E 9.10

WISLA SMIALA 54 23 N 18 47 E 9.36

WISMAR 53 54 N 11 28 E 4.16

WISMAR BUCHT 53 59 N 11 20 E 4.13

WISMAR LIGHTED BUOY 54 06 N 11 26 E 4.14

WLADYSLAWOWO 54 48 N 18 25 E 9.29

WOLGAST 54 03 N 13 47 E 9.13

WOLIN 53 51 N 14 36 E 9.17

WOLIN 53 54 N 14 21 E 9.17

WOLIN ISLAND 53 55 N 14 30 E 9.17

WUSTROW LIGHT 54 20 N 12 23 E 4.19

Y

YSTAD 55 26 N 13 50 E 4.31

YUODKRANTE LIGHT 55 33 N 21 07 E 10.3

Z

ZALEW WISLANY 54 27 N 19 45 E 9.39

ZALTNIKEN 54 47 N 19 59 E 9.40

ZATOKA POMORSKA 54 08 N 14 15 E 9.14

ZELENOGRADSK 54 58 N 20 29 E 10.3

ZICKERER SEE 54 17 N 13 42 E 9.9

ZINGST PENINSULA 54 26 N 12 41 E 4.21

ZINNOWITZ 54 05 N 13 55 E 9.14